Mazak I300stw Parameters Ha12ha0034e

Serial No.
294060
Original Instructions
PARAMETER LIST
ALARM LIST
M-CODE LIST
.d
ve
INTEGREX i-100 series
er
s
re
ts
gh
HA12HA0034E (1/2)
ri
Manual No.:
ll
.A
NC: MAZATROL SmoothX
N
O
AVANS 294060
TI
Serial No.:
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this
al
K
ri
manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the
ZA
Se
nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.

A
IM
K
ZA
IMPORTANT NOTICE
A
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
M
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
YA
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
3
2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety.

01
3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
)2
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
(c
such items are in place.

ht
ig
4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
yr
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject
op
to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical
C
Center or Technology Center.

5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology
Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
7. The export of machining programs may be restricted to prevent them from being used for
military purposes. The machining programs you prepared are your property, so you should
manage them yourself in accordance with the law.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION, Japan
06.2018
Copyright (C) 2017 YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved.

C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 29
K 40
C
O 60
Serial No. 294060
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
.
Rule
d
ve
er
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
s
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
re
states may take place at the user site.
ts
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
gh
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
ri
ll
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
.A
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
N
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
O
TI
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
60
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are

A
R
40
“inexecutable” functions.
PO
29
3. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
R
o.
follows:
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

A
IM
DANGER
K
ZA
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

A
life or body.
M
WARNING
YA
3
01
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

)2
machine damage.
CAUTION
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
HGENPA0102E S-1
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
 After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
WARNING  Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
 Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block,
and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path
d.
check, Virtual Machining, and other functions, if provided.
ve
er
 Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
s
re
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable
ts
feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used,
gh
those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ
ri
from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or
ll
rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the
.A
machine.
N
O
 Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
TI
60
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
A
R
40
function is executed without its thorough understanding.

PO
29
 Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
R
o.
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
O
N
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
al
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect

ri
ZA
Se
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
A
without a thorough understanding.

IM
K
Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC

ZA
A
M
 Before using the following cutting conditions:

YA
• Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
3
Determination Function
01
WARNING
)2
• Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function

(c
• Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
ht
Function
ig
yr
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken
op
– especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.

C
 Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.
S-2
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
 Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate
in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the
WARNING
event of contact with the tool.
 During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
 Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
d .
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
ve
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
ser
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
re
from the way it did before.
ts
gh
 If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
ri
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
ll
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
.A
N
 If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
O
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of
TI
60
the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will
A
R
40
be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO

PO
29
functions.)
R
o.
 The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
N
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
al
K
ri
applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)

ZA
Se
 If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are

IM
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
K
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
ZA
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
A
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
M
units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)

YA
 The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter
3
01
the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier
)2
function will not work correctly.

(c
 The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the
ht
machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series and the other turning machines.

ig
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended

yr
machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands
op
C
before using this system.
Sample program Machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series Turning machines

–1
S1000M3 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
–1
S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min . The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S-3
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
 For the machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using
an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate com-
mand) of the EIA/ISO program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through
WARNING
180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the
plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the
program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected
positions may incite collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code
command (G50.1, G51.1).
 After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
d.
check function, the Virtual Machining function, and other functions, and confirm that the
ve
er
program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven
s
machining program to change in operational status.
re
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
ts
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
gh
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is
ri
present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the
ll
.A
common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move
N
from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be
O
present on this path.
TI
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of
60
A
R
the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
40
PO
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.

29
R
o.
O
N
 If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

C
al
for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
K
ri
ZA
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
Se
CAUTION
A
 Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
IM
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
K
operator injury.
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-4
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
 Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system
variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that
makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give
WARNING
thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the
system variables before starting the above operations.
 If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
d.
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures
ve
being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
ser
 Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
re
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
ts
gh
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
ri
 After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
ll
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
.A
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for
N
the active program.
O
TI
60
A
 During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
R
40
PO
29
 For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
R
turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
o.
CAUTION
O
N
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
C
al
As a result, serious machine damage will result.

ri
ZA
Se
 Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
A
operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently,
IM
axial movement will become faster than that expected.

K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-5
Serial No. 294060
REQUEST TO THE USER
REQUEST TO THE USER
Request for Saving Data of Machining Programs

Machining programs saved on the local disk of the NC unit may not be read out in the event of
accidental local disk trouble. The user, therefore, is earnestly requested to back up and store
every machining program of importance at regular intervals onto an external memory (USB
memory, SD card, etc.).
 The procedure for data storage is detailed in the Operating Manual, Part 3
(OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION), Chapter 10, (DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE).
d.
 Always use an initialized USB memory or SD card. The USB connector and
ve
er
the SD card slot are located on the right side of the machine operating panel.
s
re
ts
gh
ri
USB memory SD card
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
 On machines with a random ATC feature, each actual ATC operation changes the tool
data (in pocket numbers). Be sure not to run the machine after loading the externally
stored data of the TOOL DATA display without having confirmed the data’s
CAUTION correspondence to the current tooling on the magazine. Otherwise the machine cannot be
be guaranteed to operate normally.
S-6
Serial No. 294060
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
d.
ve
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
er
equipment
s
re
ts
Operating Environment
gh
ri
1. Ambient temperature
ll
.A
During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
N
O
2. Relative humidity
TI
60
A
During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing)
R
40
PO
Note : As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to

29
deteriorate quickly.
o.
O
N
C
al
Network Setting
ri
ZA
Se
The NC unit operates using dedicated network adapters.

A
IM
Note 1: Do not change the settings of the following two network adapters. Any changes will
K
prevent the NC unit from operating normally.

ZA
 Ethernet_NC (IP address:192.168.100.2)

A
 NC Trainer Virtual Network (IP address:192.168.202.10)

M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-7
Serial No. 294060
Note 2: Use “Ethernet_PC” to connect the NC to an intra-factory network and other systems.
Do not use, however, the following network addresses: “192.168.100.xxx” and
“192.168.202.xxx”
 If the setting of the network adapter “Ethernet_PC” is changed, other systems

connected to the network may not operate normally. So, be sure to check the
settings of the other systems on the network as well. Here are some
examples of systems connected to the network.
Other systems Sections describing how to configure network settings
Smooth PMC Operating Manual of the Smooth PMC
“Network Setting for the MAZATROL at the Machine”
TOOL HIVE Operating Manual & Maintenance Manual of the Extended
TOOL HIVE
d .
“How to Change Network Settings”
ve
Magazine display unit for Operating Manual of the Visual Tool ID/Data Management
er
Tool ID (touch panel) “CONNECTING TO THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK”
s
re
ts
Note 3: If you configure network settings for the NC unit, using Internet Information Services
gh
(IIS) on Windows, do not use the following port numbers.
ri

ll
21
.A
 683
N
 43816
O
 55555
TI

60
55556 A

R
40
57400
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-8 E
Serial No. 294060
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1-1
2 PARAMETER ....................................................................................... 2-1
2-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2-1-1 Types of parameters ............................................................................................... 2-1
d .
2-1-2 Precautions ............................................................................................................. 2-2
ve
s er
2-2 Parameter List .................................................................................................... 2-3
re
ts
gh
2-2-1 User parameter ....................................................................................................... 2-3
ri
ll
2-2-2 Machine parameter ............................................................................................... 2-42
.A
N
2-2-3 Data I/O parameter ............................................................................................... 2-79
O
TI
60
A
2-3 Detailed Description ......................................................................................... 2-84
R
40
PO
29
2-3-1 Structure of the parameter list .............................................................................. 2-84

o.
O
N
C
al
2-3-2 User parameter POINT (D) ................................................................................ 2-86

ri
ZA
Se
2-3-3 User parameter LINE/FACE/3D (E) ................................................................. 2-118

IM
K
2-3-4 User parameter EIA/ISO (F) ............................................................................. 2-154

ZA
A
M
2-3-5 User parameter SOFT LIMIT (I) ....................................................................... 2-258

YA
2-3-6 User parameter SYSTEM (SU) ........................................................................ 2-264

3
01
)2
2-3-7 User parameter TURNING (TC) ....................................................................... 2-298

(c
ht
2-3-8 User parameter SOLID (SD) ............................................................................ 2-351

ig
yr
op
2-3-9 User parameter DISPLAY STRUCTURE (US)................................................. 2-358

C
2-3-10 Machine parameter CALL MACRO (J) ............................................................. 2-362
2-3-11 Machine parameter MEASURE (K) .................................................................. 2-379
2-3-12 Machine parameter TABLE (L) ........................................................................ 2-439
2-3-13 Machine parameter FEED VEL. (M) ................................................................ 2-482
C-1
Serial No. 294060
2-3-14 Machine parameter TIME CONST. (N) ............................................................ 2-500
2-3-15 Machine parameter ANOTHER (S) .................................................................. 2-511
2-3-16 Machine parameter SPINDLE (SA) .................................................................. 2-525
2-3-17 Machine parameter BARRIER (BA) ................................................................. 2-550
2-3-18 Machine parameter MACHINE STRUCTURE (MS) ......................................... 2-582
2-3-19 Data I/O parameter CMT parameter (CMT) ..................................................... 2-584
d .
ve
2-3-20 Data I/O parameter TAPE parameter (TAP) .................................................... 2-586
s er
re
2-3-21 Data I/O parameter DNC parameter (DNC) ..................................................... 2-597
ts
gh
2-3-22 Data I/O parameter OTHER (IOP/DPR/IDD).................................................... 2-605
ri
ll
.A
3 ALARM ................................................................................................. 3-1
N
O
TI
60
3-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 3-1

A
R
40
PO
29
3-1-1 Alarm display .......................................................................................................... 3-1

R
o.
O
N
3-1-2 Precautions ............................................................................................................. 3-2

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
3-2 Detailed Description ........................................................................................... 3-3

A
IM
3-2-1 Structure of the alarm list ........................................................................................ 3-3

K
ZA
A
3-2-2 No. 1 - No. 99, No. 1000 - No. 1099 (System/Drive error) ...................................... 3-4
M
YA
3-2-3 No. 100 - No. 199, No. 1100 - No. 1199 (CNC machine control error) ................. 3-18
3
01
3-2-4 No. 200 - No. 399, No. 1200 - No. 1399 (PLC machine control error) .................. 3-39
)2
(c
ht
3-2-5 No. 400 - No. 499, No. 1400 - No. 1499 (CNC screen operation error)................ 3-77
ig
yr
3-2-6 No. 500 - No. 599, No. 1500 - No. 1599 (I/O error) ............................................ 3-102
op
C
3-2-7 No. 600 - No. 699, No. 1600 - No. 1699 (MAZATROL program error) ............... 3-117
3-2-9 No. 800 - No. 899, No. 1800 - No. 1899 (EIA/ISO program error) ...................... 3-146
C-2
Serial No. 294060
3-2-11 No. 2000 - No. 2099 (3D setup error) ................................................................. 3-180
3-2-12 No. 2100 - No. 2199 (Interference error) ............................................................ 3-186
3-2-13 No. 2200 - No. 2299 (CAM data output error) .................................................... 3-190
3-2-14 No. 2600～No. 2699 (CNC screen operation error)............................................ 3-192
4 M-CODE LIST....................................................................................... 4-1
4-1 Miscellaneous Functions (M Codes) Upper Turret Commands (TR1 Side) ........ 4-1
d .
ve
er
4-2 Miscellaneous Functions (M Codes) Lower Turret Commands (TR2 Side) ...... 4-15
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
C-3
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 29
K
C-4 E
40
C
O 60
Serial No. 294060
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 294060
INTRODUCTION 1
1 INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the meaning and setting of various parameters, and the meaning and
elimination procedure of various alarms used for the MAZATROL Smooth System. This
document also gives the list of M-codes.
For detailed description of the MAZATROL Smooth System, refer to the Operating Manual of the
machine.
Read this manual and the Operating Manual of the machine carefully in order to make the best
use of the possibilities of the MAZATROL Smooth System.
.
d
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
1-1
1
C
op
yr
INTRODUCTION
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 29
K
1-2 E
40
C
O 60
Serial No. 294060
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2 PARAMETER
2-1 Outline
1. Scope of this chapter
This chapter describes the parameters you can change as required. How to read the list is
described in the beginning. Always refer to this list to change parameters.
2. Precautions on this chapter
This chapter also gives parameters relating to optional functions. Accordingly, the list
includes parameters which cannot be changed. Check the type of machine purchased by
you and its specifications before you read the list.
.
d
ve
Note 1: The contents of this list are subjected to change without notice, for NC unit or machine
er
improvement.
s
re
Note 2: Any questions about the contents of this list should be communicated to Mazak
ts
Technical Center or Technology Center.
gh
ri
2-1-1 Types of parameters
ll
.A
Parameters, which refer to constants specific to the NC machines and equipment and the data
N
necessary for cutting operations, possess a very important meaning.
O
TI
Parameters can be broadly divided into the following three types according to their meaning.
60
A
R
 User parameters
40
PO
29
The data required for processes such as point machining, line machining, plane machining,
R
turning, and EIA/ISO programmed machining, is registered. The USER PARAMETER display
o.
O
N
is used to register the user parameters.

C
al
 Machine parameters
ri
ZA
Se
Constants related to the servomotors and spindle motors, machine status data etc. are
A
registered. The MACHINE PARAMETER display is used to register the machine parameters.
IM
 Data I/O parameters

K
ZA
The data required for connection to external units such as a CMT unit and a tape unit, is
A
registered. The DATA I/O PARAMETER display which can be selected on the DATA I/O
M
display is used to register the data I/O parameters.

YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-1
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-1-2 Precautions
1. Details of the parameters may differ according to the machine used, the presence/absence
of an option(s), the production time of the NC machines and equipment, etc. Therefore, do
not use the parameters of other machines.
2. The parameter list is supplied in the form of data sheets within the NC electronic cabinet at
shipment of the machines. Be careful not to lose the list.
3. Before making changes to details of a parameter, make sure that the parameter is the one
to be changed.
4. If details of the parameter to be changed cannot be clearly understood, contact the nearest
Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
d .
5. When changing details of a parameter, maintain records of the old and new data.
ve
er
6. If the particular machine is not used for a long time, then the battery to protect the parameter
s
re
memory will run down. (Battery alarm)
ts
In that case, errors will occur in the parameters and thus machine malfunctions may result.
gh
To prevent this, first check the existing details of the parameters closely against the
ri
separate parameter list and then make the necessary changes to the parameters.
ll
.A
7. In addition to the parameters listed in this document, those related to PLC (Programmable
N
Logic Controller) are also available; refer to the OPERATING MANUAL of the machine for
O
details of the PLC-related parameters and the PLC Parameter List in the ELECTRIC
TI
60
WIRING DIAGRAM. A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-2
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-2 Parameter List
2-2-1 User parameter
1. POINT (D)
Address
Outline
(bit)
D1 Height of the second R-point during point machining
D2 Nominal diameter of spot-machining tool
d .
D3 Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom in spot-machining cycle
ve
s er
D4 Maximum allowable spot-chamfering hole diameter element
re
ts
D5 Prehole through speed during inversed spot-facing
gh
ri
D6 Drill-machining cycle setting element
ll
.A
D7 Drill-machining cycle setting element
N
O
TI
D8 Maximum diameter of holes machinable on one drill
60
A
R
40
D9 Maximum diameter of holes machinable on two drills

PO
29
R
o.
D10 Maximum diameter of holes machinable on three drills

O
N
C
al
D11 Through-hole/tap-prehole machining overshoot

ri
ZA
Se
D12 Stop-hole machining hole-bottom clearance

IM
K
D13 Spot-machining hole diameter (fixed value)

ZA
A
D14 Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (ALMINUM)

M
YA
D15 Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (except AL)

3
Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for chamfering cutter or spot-machining tool in chamfering
01
D16
cycle
)2
(c
D17 Interference clearance of chamfering cutter

ht
ig
D18 Return feed rate for reaming or boring (cycle 3)

yr
op
D19 Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for end milling
C
D20 Radial depth-of-cut setting element for end milling
D21 Reference bottom-finishing allowance for end milling
D22 Tapping-cycle dwell time
D23 Prehole clearance for end milling
2-3
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
D24 Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for boring
D25 Boring-bar tip relief
D26 Returning distance from hole bottom for boring or back-boring
D28 Bottom-finishing amount of boring
D29 Chip removal time
. d
D30 Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle
ve
er
D31 Tapper elongation amount for tapping
s
re
ts
D32 Number of spindle revolutions until spindle CCW rotation begins in tapping cycle
gh
ri
D33 Back-boring tool tip relief
ll
.A
D35 Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (drilling)
N
O
D36 Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (boring)
TI
60
A
R
40
D37 Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (end milling)

PO
29
D38 Reamer-prehole diameter setting element for boring or end milling

o.
O
N
C
al
D39 Reamer-prehole diameter setting element for end milling

K
ri
ZA
Se
D40 Number of revolutions during dwell at spot-faced hole bottom for inversed spot-facing
A
IM
D41 R-point height during point-machining

K
ZA
D42 Height of the third R-point during point machining

A
M
YA
D43 Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screw

3
01
D44 Selecting an automatic calculation method for the amount of chamfer with the tapping unit
)2
D45 Gradual decrements in drilling depth

(c
ht
D46 Minimum gradual drilling depth

ig
yr
op
D47 Reamer-prehole machining overshoot

C
D48 Feed override for the section to be chamfered in the planetary tapping cycle
D49 Amount of return at hole bottom during the planetary tapping cycle
D50 Auto-set feed rate for pre-hole machining in the planetary tapping cycle
D51 Auto-set feed rate for planetary tapping cycle
D52 Reduction ratio for the G00-based relief rate during a very-deep-hole drilling cycle
2-4
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
Number of times of pecking up to the return of the tool to a position near the starting point of the
D53
very-deep-hole drilling cycle of a drilling or turning-drilling unit
D54 Deceleration rate at cutting start for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle
D55 Drilling return distance for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle
Number of revolutions during dwell at chip ejection position and hole bottom for very-deep-hole drilling
D56
cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle
D57 Return speed for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle
Feed rate reduction distance ratio at cutting start of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental
.
D58
d
very-deep-hole machining cycle
ve
Surface speed reduction ratio at cutting end of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole
er
D59
machining cycle
s
re
D60 Automatic setting ratio of axial cutting feed rate during chamfering
ts
gh
D61 Nominal diameter of chamfering cutter, set during automatic tool development for a point machining unit
ri
ll
.A
D62 Maximum number of times automatic pecking is to be performed by MAZATROL programs
N
O
D63 Smooth chamfering (point machining): overlap amount
TI
60
D64
A
Smooth chamfering (point machining): tolerance between the interpolated line segment and the ideal curve
R
40
PO
29
Reduction ratio for the G00 feed rate from the chip ejection position to the return position during a deep-hole
D66
R
drilling/very-deep-hole drilling cycle

o.
O
N
D73 - D77 Learning of cutting conditions (DEP-Z range)

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
D78 - D82 Learning of cutting conditions (WID-R range)

A
IM
D91 0 M04 is output/not output after the tool has dwelled at the hole bottom during a tapping cycle.
K
ZA
D91 1 The tool dwells/does not dwell after M04 has been output at the hole bottom during a tapping cycle.
A
M
D91 2 The tool dwells/does not dwell after it has been returned to the R-point during a tapping cycle.
YA
D91 3 If a drill is used in the pre-machining of the centering drill cycle, the R-point height is set to D1 or not.
3
01
)2
D91 4 The finishing tool path is shortened/not shortened during a true-circle processing cycle (end milling).
(c
ht
D91 5 The tool path is shortened/not shortened during a true-circle processing cycle (chamfering).
ig
If a pre-machining tool sequence is included in the same unit, the R-point height of the drill is set/not set to D1
yr
D91 6
or D42.
op
The R-point height of the chamfering cutter during the cycle 2 is set to D42 or not.
C
D91 7 The R-point height of the spot-machining tool during the chamfering cycle (cycle 2) is set to D42 or not.
R-point height selection for smooth chamfering (point machining)
D92 0 During a true-circle processing (end milling) cycle, E17 is used for axial feed or not.
D92 1 The R1-point height of the back spot facing is set to D1 or not.
If a chamfering cutter is included in the premachining tool sequence of the same unit, the R-point height of the
D92 2
reamer is set to D1 or not.
If a chamfering cutter is included in the pre-machining tool sequence of the same unit, the R-point height of
D92 3
the tapping is set to D1 or not.
2-5
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
The position cleared radially or axially by D17 from the workpiece section concerned is subjected to check for
D92 4
interference or not.
D92 5 Dwell time designation for synchronous tapping in a MAZATROL program valid/invalid
D92 6 During planetary tapping, chips are ejected/not ejected automatically prior to the threading process.
Whether or not to generate alarm 650 CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE if idle cutting takes place during
D92 7
chamfering in point-machining unit
D93 Unidirectional positioning for point-machining
.
D94 Unidirectional positioning for point-machining
d
ve
er
D95 Auto-setting method for tapping
s
re
D96 0 Surface speed calculation for spot drill used
ts
gh
D96 1 Element that determines the counterboring pattern
ri
ll
.A
D96 2 Setting of the amount of chamfer in the spot drill tool sequence
N
Menu display setting of RGH BCB (inversed faced hole machining), BK-CBORE (back boring) and
O
D96 3 CBOR-TAP (counterbore tapping), as well as BACKSPOT FACER (inversed spot-facing tool) and BACK
TI
60
BORING BAR (back boring) in the tool sequence data

A
R
40
D96 4 Conditions to determine the CIRC MIL operation for the specification without Y-axis
PO
29
R
o.
D96 5 Setting of the start point Y of the cylindrical surface in the C-axis point machining unit
O
N
Smooth chamfering (C-POINT MACH-ING):

al
D96 6
Switching of the restrictions according to the cutting edge angle of a chamfering tool
ri
ZA
Se
D96 7 Cutting depth in deep-hole tapping/high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle

IM
D97 0 Cutting drawing method for circular milling unit on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display
K
ZA
Action to be taken when the number of times pecking has been performed has reached the set maximum
D98 0
A
count
M
YA
D98 1 Execution of the INDEX unit when the PRI.No. is set in the MANUAL PROGRAM
3
01
D100 0 fixed value

)2
D105 0 Handling the X-axial coordinates of non-turning TPC relay points

(c
ht
D105 1 Tap high-speed deep-hole cycle menu display/hidden

ig
yr
op
D106 0 Machine operation when machining units are not preceded by an indexing unit
C
D106 1 Execution of an index command after the second or subsequent work coordinate command in WPC unit
D106 2 T-code output during indexing before the end unit
Initial point position in the case where R-point is located outside the clearance around the workpiece at an
D106 3
arbitrary B-axis angle
D106 4 Selection of rotational axis command system by table selection
D106 5 Alarm output timing when the first machining unit is not preceded by an index unit
2-6
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
D106 6 X-axis wear offset direction in the Z offset type milling back face [XY] mode
Selection of the C-axis positioning execution for the workpiece measurement in the WPC workpiece or
D106 7
initial-point scheme
D107 1 Fixed value
D107 2 Alarm output when 3D coordinate conversion mode cancel is specified in the manual program unit
D107 3 Unit of feed rate for the feed per minute command in manual program units for the inch system
.
D107 4 Calculation method for mill spindle speed when spot chamfering
d
ve
er
D130 Chip ejection distance in deep-hole drilling cycle
s
re
D131 G00 feed-in speed override for deep-hole boring cycle
ts
gh
D141 0 Chip ejection operation during deep-hole drilling cycle
ri
ll
.A
D141 1 Feed-in operation selection for deep-hole boring cycle
N
O
D141 2 Circular milling unit: Circular processing selection method switch
TI
60
D143 0 WPC unit/WPC shift unit

A
R
40
PO
29
2. LINE/FACE/3D (E)
o.
O
N
Address
al
Outline
K
(bit)
ri
ZA
Se
E1 Closed-pattern cutting start point and escape point setting element

A
IM
E2 Cutting start point and escape point setting element (the first clearance)
K
ZA
E4 Reference allowance of finishing in radial direction

A
M
E5 Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point (the second clearance)
YA
3
E6 Reference allowance of finishing in axial direction

01
)2
E7 Allowance of cutting start point in axial direction (the second clearance)

(c
ht
E8 Radial interference clearance of chamfering cutter

ig
yr
E9 Allowance of axial-cutting start position (the first clearance)

op
C
E10 Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element (Face milling, End milling-top, End milling-step)
E11 Axial interference clearance of chamfering cutter
E12 Radial interference clearance of face milling unit and angular face milling unit
E13 Tool path setting element for end milling-top unit
E14 Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element (Pocket milling, Pocket milling-mountain, Pocket milling-valley)
2-7
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
E15 Tool path setting element for face milling-top unit (reciprocating short)
E16 Peripheral-cutting feed rate override for end milling-mountain unit
E17 Axial-cutting feed rate override
E18 Override in case of the overall width cutting for pocket-machining
E19 Returning feed rate override in case of bidirectional cutting for rough-machining of the end milling-slot unit.
E20 Axial cutting feed override during Z-axial cutting in the pecking mode of face machining
d .
ve
er
E21 Wall-cutting overlap in closed figure
s
re
E22 Override value of automatic corner over-riding
ts
gh
E23 Effective removal allowance (upper limit) of automatic corner overriding
ri
ll
E24 Effective removal allowance (lower limit) of automatic corner overriding
.A
N
E25 Effective angle (upper limit) of automatic corner overriding
O
TI
60
E26 A
Calculation coefficient for the finishing feed of line milling
R
40
PO
29
E27 Radial direction feed rate calculation reference diameter for finish cutting in line machining unit
R
o.
O
N
E28 Finishing feed rate calculation reference feed rate in line machining unit
C
al
K
ri
ZA
E29 Selection of whether the cutting conditions in the shape sequence during VFC mode are to be modified
Se
An element that determines the starting point and escape point of radial cutting when CLOSED is specified
E30
IM
for the wall attributes at the starting point and ending point of open-pattern line machining
K
E31 Element that determines the amount of OPEN attribute wall protrusion in pocket-machining shape units
ZA
A
E32 Element that automatically determines an approaching radius in a Z-direction helical approach scheme
M
YA
E33 Approaching gradient for a Z-direction helical approach scheme

3
01
E34 Element that automatically determines an approaching distance in a Z-direction tapered approach scheme
)2
(c
E35 Approaching gradient for a Z-direction tapered approach scheme

ht
ig
E36 Element that automatically determines an escape distance in the Z-direction tapered escape scheme
yr
op
E37 The amount of return of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining
C
E38 The returning feed rate of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining
Element that automatically determines the depth-of-cut-R (Pocket milling, Pocket milling-mountain, Pocket
E39
milling-valley, End milling-slot)
E40 Approaching radius in helical approach (helical 2)
E41 Amount of in-feed per revolution in the Z-axis direction in helical approach (helical 2)
E43 Magnification factor of surface speed in helical approach
2-8
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
E55 3-D, Axial cutting-feed overriding
E56 3-D, Inversion check of curved-surface pattern
E57 3-D, Severity check of cutting pitch
E58 3-D, Tool-diameter compensation
E59 3-D, Allowance of axial-cutting start position
E60 3-D, Normal cutting allowance
.d
ve
er
E61 3-D, Search length for parallel cutting
s
re
E62 3-D, Search length for right-angle cutting
ts
gh
E63 3-D, Pattern display division segment (FL direction)
ri
ll
E64 3-D, Pattern display division segment (GL direction)
.A
N
E65 3-D, Radial cutting allowance for area check
O
TI
60
E66 3-D, Axial cutting allowance for area check A

R
40
PO
29
E67 - E75 3-D, Processing error tolerance

R
o.
O
N
E76 3-D, Entire-width override

C
al
K
ri
ZA
E77 3-D, Radial cutting allowance for high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment)
Se
E78 3-D, Multiplying factor set for tolerance

IM
K
E83 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing (offset appointment)
ZA
A
E84 3-D, Region of axial machining during high-speed rough processing (offset appointment)
M
YA
E85 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: –X (workpiece size appointment)
3
01
E86 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: +X (workpiece size appointment)
)2
(c
E87 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: –Y (workpiece size appointment)
ht
ig
E88 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: +Y (workpiece size appointment)
yr
op
E89 3-D, Region of axial machining during high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment)
C
E91 Tool-path pattern selection for end milling-mountain unit
E92 Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling unit
E93 Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling-mountain unit
E94 Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling-valley unit
E95 Tool-path pattern selection for line-machining unit
2-9
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
E96 1 R-point height for end milling-slot unit
E96 2 Approach method selection for 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting in end milling-slot unit
E96 4 Approach point for 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting in end milling-slot unit
E96 5 Returning feed rate override of the end milling-slot unit
Smooth chamfering (end milling-slot): Switching of restrictions according to the cutting edge angle of the
E96 7
chamfering tool
E97 Tool-path pattern selection for end milling-top unit
d .
ve
E98 Cutting method selection for end milling-mountain, pocket milling-valley unit
s er
re
E99 0 Milling feed rate specification range for the shape sequence of the MAZATROL program
ts
gh
E99 1 Bottom/wall simultaneous finishing mode for pocket machining
ri
ll
E99 3 Interference check between the approach point and the cutting starting point of face machining
.A
N
E99 4 Alarm generating condition during the approach or escape for line machining
O
TI
60
E99 5 Smooth chamfering Stopping position during single block operation

A
R
40
Machining start point calculation method after automatic determination of approach point in line machining
PO
E99 6
29
unit
R
o.
E104 0 Cutting method to be used after an approach point is automatically determined during line/face machining
N
C
al
E104 1 Returning position during face machining

ri
ZA
Se
E104 2 Returning position during line machining

IM
E104 3 Infeed position when a CLOSED attribute is assigned to the wall of line machining
K
ZA
E104 4 Method of connecting between shapes during line machining

A
M
YA
E104 5 Method of connecting between shapes during wall finish of face machining
3
E104 6 Calculation of the ZC machining feed rate

01
)2
E104 7 Tool change command output selection

(c
ht
E105 0 B-axis user-defined angle setting during C-axis central line machining
ig
yr
E105 1 Machining shape specification method in line machining in ZC mode/on C-axis

op
C
E105 2 Z-axis sign inversion at ZC/ZY during line/face machining on the MULTIPLEX HD2 side
E105 3 M640T compatible operation selection on the MULTIPLEX HD2 side
CW direction selection during line/face machining in the composite program on the MULTIPLEX HD2 side
E105 4
(engraving unit excluded)
E105 5 C-axis angle selection during Y-axis milling on the MULTIPLEX HD2 side
Reference plane for the chamfering program of the LINE RGT/LINE LFT/LINE IN unit in the ZC mode line
E105 6
machining (cylindrical surface)
2-10
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
E105 7 Operation when tool path generation using WID-R specified for pocket milling fails
E106 0 Selection of the initial point as a relay point to be used after TPC approach (line/face machining unit)
E106 1 Selection of a relay point to be used before TPC escapement (line/face machining unit)
Display of a warning message when a corner radius is automatically inserted to a shape during intelligent
E108 0
pocket milling (IPM) path creation
Display of a warning message when an uncut residue remains due to nose R during intelligent pocket milling
E108 1
(IPM) path creation
E108 4 Execution of a full-circle path movement after helical approach in intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
d .
ve
er
E108 5 Operation on failure of tool entry during intelligent pocket milling (IPM)
s
re
E109 Allowable limits of engage angle in intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
ts
gh
E110 Maximum radius of arc inserted for intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
ri
ll
E111 Element that determines the tool paths in intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining (Pocket milling-valley)
.A
N
E112 Maximum wall avoidance distance in intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
O
TI
60
E113 Bottom face avoidance distance/clearance for recovering surface speed in plane machining
A
R
40
PO
29
E115 Magnification factor of the minimum arc of trochoid cycle in intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
R
o.
E116 Feedrate override for non-cutting feed in intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
N
C
al
E129 Amount of overlapping in groove expanding operation in the end milling-slot unit
ri
ZA
Se
E130 Smooth chamfering (end milling slot): tolerance between the interpolated line segments and the ideal curve
IM
K
E131 Element that automatically determines depth-of-cut-R (line machining)

ZA
A
E132 Radial interference clearance of round bar face milling unit

M
YA
E133 Surface speed change position in helical approach

3
01
E134 Clearance in the tool axial direction in engraving units

)2
E141 0 Selection of the feedrate in C-axis plane machining in the ZC mode

(c
ht
E141 1 Face milling-/end milling-top unit: Cutting start point determination method at manual approach point setting
ig
yr
op
E141 2 Round bar face milling unit: Approach point/cutting start point before automatic approach point setting
C
E141 3 Round bar face milling unit: Cutting start point after automatic approach point setting
E141 5 Surface speed change mode selection in helical approach
E141 7 Operation upon specifying a figure of eight for free closed pattern of line/face machining unit
2-11
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
3. EIA/ISO (F)
Address
Outline
(bit)
F1 G61.1 corner deceleration coefficient (%)
F2 G61.1 arc-clamping speed coefficient (%)
F3 For high-speed smoothing control
F4 Distance to judge the shape formed by 3 axes under tool tip point control in the 5-axis fairing function
F5 Distance to judge the shape formed by rotary 2 axes in the 5-axis fairing function
d .
ve
er
F6 Minimum allowable height of stepped sections for deceleration in high-speed smoothing control mode
s
re
F7 Fixed value (0)
ts
gh
F8 Corner deceleration speed coefficient for high-speed smoothing control
ri
ll
F9 Circular cutting clamp speed coefficient for high-speed smoothing control
.A
N
F10 Return amount during tap high-speed deep-hole cycle
O
TI
60
F11 Vector constant for 3-D, tool-diameter compensationA

R
40
PO
29
F12 Return amount of pecking in drill high-speed deep-hole cycle or in G73

R
o.
O
N
F13 Allowance amount of rapid-feed stop in deep-hole drilling cycle or in G83/G283

C
al
K
ri
ZA
F14 Rotation center of coordinates (axis of abscissa)

Se
A
IM
F15 Rotation center of coordinates (axis of ordinate)

K
ZA
F16 Horizontal length of coordinate rotation

A
M
F17 Vertical length of coordinate rotation

YA
F18 Angle of coordinate rotation

3
01
F19 Maximum permissible difference in arc radius

)2
(c
F20 Fixed value of scaling factor

ht
ig
F21 Maximum inside-corner angle available with automatic corner override (G62)
yr
op
C
F22 Deceleration area of automatic corner overriding (G62)
F27 Handling of G92 (spindle speed clamp value) command at restart
F28 Threading chamfering angle
F29 Override value of automatic corner overriding (G62)
F30 G-code type selection
2-12
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F31 Selection of a roughing priority type for program layout
F32 Operation when argument R is omitted from the maximum/minimum spindle speed setting
F33 0 Incorporation of the MAZATROL tool length into the current position counter valid/invalid
F33 2 Tool management function
F33 3 Selection of check in the course of automatic operation when data is input/output through network
.
F33 4 Selection of restart setting method in the MAZATROL program
d
ve
er
F33 5 Automatic tool identification of turning tools in TOOL EYE manual tool length measurement
s
re
F33 6 Modal indication for G-code group No. 1 in the fixed cycle mode
ts
gh
F33 7 Modal indication on “radius data input for X-axis” in the mode of 3D coordinate conversion (G68.5)
ri
ll
.A
F34 0 Cancellation of the ram spindle offset command (G52.1) when the RESET key is pressed valid/invalid
N
O
F34 1 Representation on the POSITION display for G49 (only for the INTEGREX e Series)
TI
60
F34 2
A
Parts count override in the middle of automatic operation
R
40
PO
29
Tool change command output position of the tool to use in manual program unit when WPC is selected for
F34 3
R
workpiece scheme
o.
O
N
F34 4 Programming type for inclined-surface machining

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F34 5 Current position display of the tool nose at reset

A
IM
F34 6 Compensating movement for a T-code with a movement command in one block
K
ZA
F34 7 Application of Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET values for the tape operation mode
A
Selection whether or not multiple material pieces can be arranged on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D
M
F35 0
MONITOR display
YA
Automatic setting of the material model for a MAZATROL program of initial-point scheme on the VIRTUAL
F35 1
3
MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

01
When assigning G-code for a cutting function not to be represented with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
)2
F35 2
being selected for automatic operation, operation is continued/alarm state
(c
When a program prepared and stored for the Hard Disk operation is called up as a subprogram with the
ht
F35 3
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation, operation is continued/alarm state
ig
yr
F35 4 Representation of cutting-off or parting operation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays
op
Movement of traction tailstock or carriage-connection steadyrest during zero-point return operation of all axes
C
F35 5
on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display
Alarming/No alaming when the feed-overriding value has been changed in the flow of automatic operation
F35 7
with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being active
F36 0 Current position display in the G52.5 coordinate system
F36 1 Automatic M-code setting in EIA/ISO program modal restarting mode
F36 2 Automatic S-code setting in EIA/ISO program modal restarting mode
2-13
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F36 3 Error check function in cases where numerical data is omitted in the EIA program or in MDI mode
Display of the chuck and tailstock areas for an EIA/ISO program on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK
F36 4
display
F36 5 Touch sensor offset in X/Y direction
Number of effective decimal digits in the tool axis vector components (I, J, K) for tool tip point control type 2
F36 6
(G43.5) and cutting point command type 2 (G43.9)
F36 7 Rotational axis prefiltering
.
F37 0 Temporary cancellation of geometry compensation for G0 (rapid traverse) in the mode of tool tip point control
d
ve
er
F37 1 Subprogram call given in manual program unit (for turning machines only)
s
re
F37 2 Tool length compensation in MDI operation
ts
gh
F37 3 Timing of clearing #3006 (stop) message
ri
ll
Selection of the coordinate system for linear interpolation on specification of a rapid traverse command during
.A
F37 4
tool tip point control
N
Operation when running programs in the hard disk or through Ethernet with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
O
F37 5
SHIELD enabled for automatic operation
TI
60
F37 6 Operation when “ATC” is not specified in end unit

A
R
40
PO
29
F38 0 Options displayed in the tool model type selection window according to the tool type
R
o.
O
N
F38 1 Handling of tool index numbers (after tool data exchange)

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F38 2 Font size setting for EIA/ISO PROGRAM display and EIA MONITOR display
A
IM
F38 3 Input method in automatic setting of LENGTH/TOOL SET value

K
ZA
F38 4 Negative tool diameter setting

A
M
F38 5 Reverse pattern display/hidden for milling tool rotation direction

YA
F39 Plane to be used for an EIA/ISO program (called by a subprogram unit) and a manual program unit
3
01
)2
F40 Operating method selection in tape mode

(c
ht
F41 Threading termination waiting time processing

ig
yr
F42 Deceleration area r during Z-axis measurement

op
C
F43 Measurement area d during Z-axis measurement
F44 Measuring speed f
F47 - F66 Common variable name
F68 0 G53.1 acceleration selection during pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
F68 4 Addition of tool position offset to the current position, enabled/disabled
2-14
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F69 EIA/ISO program restart method
F70 Availability of multiple-machining and designated number of repetitions in the EIA/ISO subprogram
F71 Machining order control
F72 Selection of the shape correction function of the MAZATROL program
F73 M-code execution time for time study
.
F74 S-code execution time for time study
d
ve
er
F75 T-code execution time for time study
s
re
F76 B-code execution time for time study
ts
gh
F77 Basis rate for tool life judgment
ri
ll
.A
F78 Selection of separating ratio of graphic display
N
O
F79 0 Holding of memory monitor address valid/invalid
TI
60
F79 1 Selection of menu display

A
R
40
PO
29
F79 2 Key history function valid/invalid

R
o.
O
N
F79 3 Tool search method

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F79 4 Selection of tap gear

A
IM
F79 5 Display of tools currently in use valid/invalid

K
ZA
F79 6 Initial value of synchronous/asynchronous tapping during tapping tool registration

A
M
F79 7 Display of a MAZATROL monitor window valid/invalid

YA
F80 0 MAZATROL function valid/invalid

3
01
)2
F80 1 Automatic display of the navigation window on the occurrence of an alarm valid/invalid
(c
ht
F80 2 MAINTENANCE CHECK display at power on, displayed/not displayed

ig
yr
F80 3 Third page of the MAINTENANCE CHECK display, displayed/not displayed

op
C
F80 4 GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE display on the occurrence of an alarm, displayed/not displayed
F80 5 Learning of cutting conditions valid/invalid
F80 6 Editing on the CUTTING CONDITION LEARN display valid/invalid
F80 7 Destination of spare tool correction by the workpiece measurement
F81 0 Program editing prohibited (in 9000’s)
2-15
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F81 1 Program displaying prohibited (in 9000’s)
F81 2 Fixed value (0)
F81 3 Add-in MAZATROL valid/invalid
F81 4 Program editing prohibited (in 8000, 9000’s)
F81 5 Program displaying prohibited (in 8000, 9000’s)
.
F81 6 Retaining the program transfer settings valid/invalid
d
ve
er
F81 7 Input error prevention function valid/invalid
s
re
F82 0 Characteristics estimation result graph, displayed/not displayed
ts
gh
Selection of inch/metric representation in POSITION display, TOOL DATA display, and TOOL OFFSET
F82 1
ri
display modes valid/invalid
ll
.A
F82 2 Basis for tool life judgment
N
O
F82 3 —
TI
60
F82 4
A
X-axis diameter display on the POSITION display valid/invalid
R
40
PO
29
F82 5 —
R
o.
O
N
F82 6 Automatic setting of the grooving tool length

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F82 7 Index tool wear correction setup during automatic operation

A
IM
F83 0 Output of the alarm history data as text data valid/invalid

K
ZA
F83 1 Operation record function valid/invalid

A
M
F83 2 —
YA
F83 3 —
3
01
)2
F83 4 —
(c
ht
F83 5 —
ig
yr
F83 6 —
op
C
F83 7 —
Selection of whether or not the tool offset data is taken into account for the POSITION counter during the
F84 0
execution of EIA/ISO programs
F84 1 Switching of arguments B and J in a fixed cycle
F84 2 Spare tool search method for EIA/ISO programs
F84 3 Timing to validate new workpiece offset data specified with a system variable
2-16
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F84 4 Machine coordinate system (G92) selection
F84 5 Incremental/absolute data command in high-speed machining mode
F84 6 Tape run method
F84 7 Operation executed/not executed when the tool data has not bee set
F85 0 Table rotational machining
.
F85 1 Radial interference check
d
ve
er
F85 2 Type of coordinate system for controlling the tool tip point
s
re
F85 3 Tool tip point control scheme
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
F85 5 Reset to cancel G68.2, valid/invalid
N
O
F85 6 Display of surface definition 
TI
60
F85 7
A
Output of the B-axis unclamping code before B-axis indexing, valid/invalid
R
40
PO
29
F86 0 Output of M250 (Spindle Speed Confirmation) before a turning feed, valid/invalid
R
o.
O
N
F86 1 Milling-spindle start timing for a milling unit (with MILL&TURN. set under TYPE of UNo. 0)
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F86 2 Override scheme for G0 during tool tip point control

A
IM
F86 3 Clamp command output when indexing the B-axis

K
ZA
F86 4 Display of the PART SHAPE window

A
M
F86 5 Override scheme for G1 during tool tip point control

YA
F86 6 Selection of rotary axis reference position for tool tip point control
3
01
)2
F87 0 Selection of whether or not the machine is to be offset by each change only in the deviation vector
(c
Selection of whether or not the check for mismatch of the workpiece origin and table rotation center is to be
ht
F87 1
conducted
ig
yr
F87 2 Data alteration checking function valid/invalid (tool-related function)

op
C
F87 3 Feed rate display method for the superposition system
F87 4 Single-block mode cancellation during fixed cycle invalid/valid
F87 5 Common variables (#500 and on) are cleared by resetting or at the program end, invalid/valid
F87 6 Local variables are cleared by resetting or at the program end, invalid/valid
F87 7 Common variables (#100 to #199) are cleared by resetting or at the program end, invalid/valid
2-17
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F88 Specifications related to the conversion from MAZATROL program into an EIA program
F89 0 [For EIA conversion] Output of shape data
F89 1 [For EIA conversion] G-codes for synchronous tapping: G74/G84 or G84.2/G84.3
F89 2 [For EIA conversion] Output of F command
F89 3 [For EIA conversion] Mill-turning unit conversion, alarm/shifted path
.
F89 4 [For EIA conversion] Output destination, standard area/ backup area
d
ve
er
F89 5 —
s
re
F89 6 [For EIA conversion] Returning to the second zero point before tool change (output of G30)
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
F91 0 In response to move command without decimal point, tool moves by 1/tool moves by 10
N
O
F91 1 Coordinate system shift using a MAZATROL program, valid/invalid
TI
60
F91 2
A
Stroke inside check before movement/Stroke outside check before movement
R
40
PO
29
F91 3 —
R
o.
O
N
F91 4 Metric (Initial G20 is valid/invalid)/Inch

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F91 5 In response to move command without decimal point:

A
IM
F91 6 G00 interpolation/non-interpolation

K
ZA
F91 7 G33E command is for the number of threads per inch/command is for thread cutting with precise lead
A
M
F92 0 Modal at power-on or at reset (G17 or G19/G18)

YA
F92 1 Modal at power-on or at reset (G17 or G19/G18)

3
01
)2
F92 2 Dwell command method

(c
ht
F92 3 Tool-length compensation (G43, G44) axis for milling tools

ig
yr
F92 4 Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) start up/cancel type

op
C
F92 5 Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) interference check
F92 6 Fixed-cycle hole-drilling axis
F92 7 ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program, invalid/valid
F93 0 Modal at power-on or at reset (G96/G97)
2-18
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F93 3 Tool length of tool data for an EIA/ISO program, invalid/valid
F93 4 Feed rate during machine lock
F93 5 Middle point during reference-point return
F93 6 Single-block operation mode at user macro operation instruction
.
d
ve
er
F94 0 Movement to hole-drilling position in fixed-cycle mode
s
re
F94 1 External deceleration signal valid/invalid
ts
gh
F94 2 Tool length offset cancellation upon zero point return by G28/G30 or manual operation, enabled/disabled
ri
ll
.A
N
O
F94 4 Tool command method using T-codes
TI
60

A
R
40
PO
29

R
o.
O
N
F94 7 Tool offset amount effectuated in an EIA/ISO program

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F95 0 Interrupt function using user macro instruction, valid/invalid

A
IM
F95 1 Handling of macroprogram interruption and call

K
ZA
F95 2 Automatic return position to restart the program (Fixed to 1)

A
M
F95 3 G00 (positioning) command feed rate for dry run

YA
F95 4 Wear offset check scheme with the input error prevention function enabled
3
01
)2
F95 5 Alarm display when the slave or adaptor unit is not connected
(c
ht
F95 6 Manual-pulse interrupt amount cancellation with the RESET key, valid/invalid
ig
yr
F95 7 Coordinate system corresponding to G54 set with the RESET key, valid/invalid
op
C
F96 0 Selection of variable number for tool offset amount
F96 1 Fairing function valid/invalid
F96 2 Processing for arc command blocks in high-speed machining mode, nonuniform feed/uniform feed
F96 3 —
F96 4 Selection of a corner judgment criterion in high-speed machining mode
2-19
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F96 5 Selection of a cutting feed clamping speed in high-speed machining mode
F96 6 Rotational axis shape correction valid/invalid
F96 7 —
F97 Selection of G-code of the coordinates system to be used in the EIA conversion function
F98 Number of macro variable to be used in the EIA conversion function
Offset amount for the subprogram WNo. to the main WNo. concerned in case of output with subprogram in
.
F99
d
the EIA conversion function
ve
er
F100 Spline cancel length
s
re
F101 Spline cancel angle
ts
gh
F102 Fine spline interpolation curve error (Block including the point of inflection)
ri
ll
.A
F103 Spline interpolation fairing block length, 5-axis spline interpolation small block length
N
Fine spline interpolation curve error (block including no inflection point), 5-axis spline interpolation curve error,
O
F104
5-axis fairing command error
TI
60
F107 Small block judgment length

A
R
40
PO
29
F108 Corner deceleration angle increment value

R
o.
O
N
F109 Number of common variables between turrets (#100 onward)

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F110 Number of common variables between turrets (#500 onward)

A
IM
F111 1 Use/disuse of dry run during thread cutting

K
ZA
F111 2 Use/disuse of feed hold during thread cutting

A
M
F111 3 Direction of rotation of the C-axis during C-axial threading with G01.1
YA
F111 5 Tool correction amount selection for EIA/ISO programs

3
01
)2
F111 6 Execution mode selection for a fixed turning cycle

(c
ht
F111 7 Form of single-block stop during a fixed turning cycle

ig
yr
F112 Selection of measurement data items to be printed out

op
Counting all types of use under the same tool number for the tool life management on the TOOL DATA
C
F113 0
display executed/not executed
F113 1 Data handling on the milling tool of a group that has expired in tool life
F113 2 Data handling on the turning tool of a group that has expired in tool life
F113 3 Tool life management of the FLASH tool
F113 4 Tool life management — Life time
2-20
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F113 5 Tool life management — Maximum available wear offset data X
F113 6 Tool life management — Maximum available wear offset data Y
F113 7 Tool life management — Maximum available wear offset data Z
F114 0 Selection of the maximum C-axial cutting feed rate for the inch system
Selection of the operation occurring during the control of the tool tip point when command G49 is issued
F114 1
(when the tool length offset value is canceled)
B-axis angle check during measurement of the turning tool for which OUT is specified in “section to be
.
F114 2
d
machined”, valid/invalid
ve
er
F114 3 Moving axes by using G49 (tool length cancel) in G43 (tool length offset) mode, valid/invalid
s
re
F114 4 Selecting a rethreading function
ts
gh
F114 5 Output timing of a tool life alarm
ri
ll
.A
F114 6 Initial setting of G53.5
N
O
F114 7 Judging tool life from the count of machined workpieces, valid/invalid
TI
60
F116 Feed rate of the threading runout — X-axis

A
R
40
PO
29
F117 Feed rate of the threading runout — Y-axis

R
o.
O
N
F118 Feed rate of the threading runout — Z-axis

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F119 Runout feed rate for the inside diameter threading cycle
A
IM
F120 Clamping speed for the threading cycle — X-axis

K
ZA
F121 Clamping speed for the threading cycle — Y-axis

A
M
F122 Clamping speed for the threading cycle — Z-axis

YA
Processing of work offset specified with G53.1 for the machine whose table rotary axis is not an axis that
3
F123 1 rotates around the Z-axis on the INTEGREX type (the machine specification featuring both the tool rotary axis
01
and the table rotary axis)

)2
F123 2 Shape drawing: Validity of a mirroring command specified in the M CODE unit
(c
ht
F123 3 MDI tool change enable/disable for tools with no tool data
ig
yr
Execution of the workpiece axis offset in association with Z-axis feed in the hobbing mode independently of
op
F123 5
hobbing axis rotating status
C
F123 7 EIA conversion sequence number output
F124 Permissible data alteration amount 1 for input error prevention function
F125 Permissible data alteration amount 2 for input error prevention function
F126 Maximum wear offset setting with the input error prevention function enabled
F128 5-axis spline interpolation angular error, 5-axis fairing angular error
2-21
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F129 5-axis spline interpolation corner deceleration coefficient
F130 5-axis spline interpolation arc-clamping speed coefficient
F135 Tool-drawing accuracy on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display
F136 Amount of offset for dummy workpiece shape on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display
F137 Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for No. 1 turning spindle
.
F138 Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for No. 2 turning spindle
d
ve
Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for the No. 1
er
F139
turning spindle
s
re
Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for the No. 2
F140
ts
turning spindle
gh
F142 Background color of spindle override window displayed when the external override function is used
ri
ll
Operation when workpiece counting is made valid while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY
.A
F143 0
SHIELD is enabled
N
O
F143 1 Status of [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] when the power is turned on
TI
60
F143 2 —
A
R
40
PO
29
Setting of the section to cancel the collision check function between the TOOL EYE sensor and the tool with
F143 3
R
the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected

o.
O
N
F143 5 X-axis diameter/radius input mode after the G136 command (measurement macro call)
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F143 6 Display of WPC during inclined-surface machining on the POSITION display

A
IM
F143 7 G43 modal cancel selection with the RESET key

K
ZA
F144 1 Selection of table rotary axis reference position for inclined-surface machining
A
M
F144 2 Resetting of a tool life alarm with the alarm clear button
YA
F144 3 Setting a minus value for argument Q in hobbing, valid/invalid

3
01
)2
F144 5 Selection of operation by the G49 command immediately after a macro variable command
(c
ht
F144 6 Deletion of unnecessary codes during EIA/ISO conversion for machining centers
ig
yr
F144 7 Deletion of G92.5 blocks during EIA/ISO conversion for machining centers
op
C
F145 Rapid feed override when data alteration is detected
Selection of the material model’s part to be taken off (hidden) on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D
F146
MONITOR displays in the flow of turning operation under synchronization of both spindles
F148 Compensation amount for G41/G42 given in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit
F149 Operation between blocks when single block mode is switched from ON to OFF during automatic operation
F150 Output data offset of NC basic information for field network
2-22
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F151 0 Switching of valid/invalid for registering multiple tools
F151 1 Fixed value
Switching of the material geometry when execution of a program is returned to the head during continuous
F151 2
program run
F151 5 Rotary axis fairing for the 5-axis fairing function
Valid/invalid of wear offset (mill tool/touch sensor) on the TOOL DATA display when the tool length offset
F151 6
function for turning tools (G43P1) is used
.
F151 7 Time stamp used at the time of read/write command to macro variable #3001 (power-on time)
d
ve
er
F152 Fixed value (0)
s
re
F153 SMART font display, valid/invalid
ts
gh
F154 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited
ri
ll
.A
F155 0 Material geometry display for programs converted into the EIA format
N
O
F155 3 Operation when argument I is omitted from the tap cycle command having argument Q
TI
60
F155 5
A
Setup data editing during automatic GL operation, disabled/enabled
R
40
PO
29
F155 7 Setting of the spindle to be displayed in the results of machining navigation for the mill-turning unit
R
o.
O
N
The operating status and the drawing on the 3D MONITOR display when a cutting command associated with
C
F156 0
al
rotary axis movement is specified with the automatic ISS valid

K
ri
ZA
The operating status and the drawing on the 3D MONITOR display when a cutting command associated with
Se
F156 1
rotary axis movement is specified with the automatic ISS valid
A
IM
Separation between rotary axis and linear axis when moving axes during workpiece placement error
F156 2
correction
K
ZA
F156 3 Selection of solution to workpiece placement error correction (primary rotary axis sign prioritized)
A
M
F156 4 Pitch division in the case when the arc length exceeds the maximum value during helical/spiral interpolation
YA
F156 5 Single-block stop when the VFC key is pressed with override set to 100%
3
01
)2

(c
ht
F156 7 Geometric deviation compensation function, valid/invalid

ig
yr

op
C
F157 1 Geometry compensation/modal spline tolerance (chord error) input, valid/invalid
F157 2 EIA tip position memory
MAZATROL table selection unit (2 tables) on the VIRTUAL MACHINING, 3D MONITOR, or 3D SETUP
F157 3
display
Switching of the axis directions for the VTC machine model on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR
F157 4
display
F157 5 Add-in EIA function
2-23
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F157 6 5-axis fairing function
F157 7 Whether or not to set 5-axis spline interpolation tolerance (chord error) specified curve error
F158 0 Tool length/tool diameter check function after tool change
F158 1 Output timing of MSTB command after a movement command under geometry compensation
F158 2 Display of an angle holder in the rotation direction selection menu
.
F158 3 Drawing mode of the upper and lower turrets during Y-axis turning/pinch-cutting
d
ve
Distinguishing the unit number that matches the selected head by color when the compound type
er
F158 4
MAZATROL program is displayed in the process selection window
s
re
Output of an alarm when a process is selected for the head differing from the selected head in the process
F158 5
ts
selection window where the compound type MAZATROL program is displayed
gh
F158 6 Bar loader schedule function, valid/invalid
ri
ll
Selection of wear offset direction when the tool length compensation and 3D coordinate conversion functions
.A
F158 7
are used together
N
Timing of data creation for the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display with workpiece counting made
O
F159 0
valid
TI
60
F159 1
A
Modal selection at power on or at reset (G64/G61.1)
R
40
PO
29
F159 2 Fixed value

R
o.
O
N
F159 3 Fixed value

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F159 4 Whether or not to display on the POSITION display a spindle output diagram stored in the setting file
A
IM
F159 5 Workpiece spindle (C-axis) clamping speed selection in hobbing

K
ZA
F159 6 Reflecting tool offset (tool wear offset/tool geometry offset) in the G53.5 mode in the current position
A
M
F159 7 Offset direction judgment selection for steps for workpiece measurement
YA
F160 1 Feedrate display during tool tip point control

3
01
)2
F160 2 Fixed value

(c
ht
F160 3 Use of TC45 in interference check

ig
yr
F160 4 Display of the measured value on the AUTO MEASURE display in O.D./I.D. measurement, diameter/radius
op
Alarm output when the actual measurement of the C-axis coordinate is carried out with the sensor ON
C
F160 5 because it did not go off due to insufficient C-axis return distance after temporary measurement of the C-axis
coordinate
Switching the collision check method during automatic operation with the ISS function set valid when
F160 6
measuring a tool by the TOOL EYE
F160 7 Priority change when erasing the tool path from the TOOL PATH CHECK display or TRACE display
F161 0 Shape/wear offset number separation, valid/invalid
F161 1 Shape offset handling
2-24
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F161 2 Tool offset timing
F161 3 Tool offset vector handling if reset function is executed
F161 4 Shape offset handling if offset number 0 is entered
F161 5 Simplified wear offset, valid/invalid
F161 6 C/Z offset when a MAZATROL program is called from an EIA program
.
F161 7 C/Z offset when an EIA program is called from a MAZATROL program
d
ve
Movement/No movement according to the particular amount of offset during independent start of tool tip point
er
F162 0
control
s
re
F162 1 Type of passage of tool tip point through singular point
ts
gh
F162 2 Chamfer/corner R-command address selection
ri
ll
.A
F162 3 Fixed hole-machining cycle return selection
N
O
F162 4 6 digits in T-command for turning
TI
60
F162 5
A
Use of the M Pro scheme as the method of selecting the Length correction axis bit
R
40
PO
29
F162 6 MAZATROL program check for missing Z-offset, valid/invalid

R
o.
O
N
F162 7 Encoder polarity selection

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F163 0 Bar feeder scheduling function, valid/invalid

A
IM
F163 1 Incorporation of wear offset data into the current position display in EIA/ISO program mode, valid/invalid
K
ZA
F163 2 Incorporation of wear offset data into the current position display in MAZATROL program mode, valid/invalid
A
M
F163 3 Position of thread turning tool nose on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display
YA
F163 4 Barrier check on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display valid/invalid

3
01
)2
F163 6 Menu on the DATA I/O display (tape), displayed/hidden

(c
ht
F163 7 Menu on the DATA I/O display (CMT), displayed/hidden

ig
yr
F164 0 Automatic tool data setting conditions Magazine (turret) tool

op
C
F164 2 PROGRAM LAYOUT display save function selection
F164 4 Automatic tool data setting conditions Invalid tools
F164 5 Automatic tool data setting conditions Broken tools
F164 6 Automatic tool data setting conditions Expired tools
F164 7 Automatic tool data setting conditions Life warning tools
2-25
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F165 0 High-speed synchronous tapping function, valid/invalid
F165 1 X-axis movement to minus side during polar coordinate interpolation, enabled/disabled
F165 2 Polar coordinate interpolation of the C-axis, in radius/diameter
F165 3 C-axis indexing when EIA subprogram is called from MAZATROL program
F165 4 Modal or non-modal state of Q command in deep-hole drilling cycle
.
F165 5 Conversion of tool set data for milling tool based on head swivel angle when G53.5 is commanded
d
ve
er
F165 6 Behavior of automatic operation of an EIA program when Z-offset is not set
s
re
F165 7 Setting at CONTI. of the end unit during tool path check, valid/invalid
ts
gh
Alteration of tool set value (tool length) on the TOOL DATA display in the automatic operation mode,
F166 0
ri
enabled/disabled
ll
.A
F166 1 Type of wear offset indicated in the milling tool list on the TOOL DATA display
N
O
F166 2 ID No./Tool name selection on the TOOL DATA display
TI
60
F166 3
A
Selection whether the selected plane on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display is to be held
R
40
PO
29
Operation conducted when [RESTART] is tapped following completion of the search in EIA modal restarting
F166 4
R
mode
o.
O
N
F166 5 Tool diameter auto-setting for the end mill, face mill, and ball end mill on the TOOL DATA display
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F166 7 Automatic backup function

A
IM
F167 0 Threading (by turning) shift angle (Q-command) unit

K
ZA
F167 1 Handling the diameter/radius of point R during the hole-machining fixed cycle
A
M
F167 2 Handling the tool measured using the G137H command

YA
F167 3 Handling the single-process mode when operation is completed/reset

3
01
)2
F167 4 Connecting the path linearly/Alarm, if the arc internal correction value is greater than the arc radius
(c
ht
F167 5 Handling the X-axis command in G68.5

ig
yr
F167 6 Wear correction direction

op
C
F167 7 Updating the current position by a press of the RESET key in manual operation mode
F168 0 Selection of operation to perform when dynamic offset II is canceled
Rotational center offset is added/not added to the tool length when the tool axial tool length offset command
F168 2
(G43.1) is issued.
F168 3 Axis for the milling tool wear correction and TOOL EYE compensation amount for the B-axis rotational turret
F168 4 Conversion of 3D coordinate conversion into inclined-surface machining
2-26
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
F168 5 Holding the amount of manual handle pulse interruption
F168 6 [RESTART2 NONMODAL] during stop of an EIA program execution invalid/valid
F168 7 Correction pattern for the groove/protrusion width measurement
F169 1 Rapid feed overlapping function
The function to restart machine operation after the detection of collision by the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
F169 2
SHIELD function
.
d
ve
er
F169 4 Handling of smooth corner control setting width when G61.1 is specified in MAZATROL programs
s
re
F169 5 Calling of the program specified in the end unit upon reaching the target part count, enabled/disabled
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
F170 0 Consideration of the offset amount of dynamic offsetting II at the current position
N
O
F170 2 Tool offset changed in an EIA program in a tool path check
TI
60
F170 3
A
Continuous diameter display of the X-axis coordinates on the POSITION screen
R
40
PO
29
F241 Operation when address P is omitted in G297/G298 command

R
o.
O
N
F242 Threshold for the travel ratio between the tool tip point and machine end point for time study
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F268 Corner rounding in the cutting point command mode

A
IM
F269 Fixed value (1)

K
ZA
F270 Smooth corner control function: Setting width

A
M
F271 Smooth corner control function: Arc cutting clamp speed coefficient
YA
F272 Smooth corner control function: Arc cutting clamp speed coefficient for high-speed smooth control
3
01
)2
F273 Smooth corner control function: Cancellation angle

(c
ht
F274 Cutting feedrate override rate in the tool axial direction for the EIA/ISO engraving function
ig
yr
F275 Character depth for the EIA/ISO engraving function

op
C
F276 Character height for the EIA/ISO engraving function
F277 Retraction height for the EIA/ISO engraving function
F300 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD: Cutting accuracy
F301 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD: Tool path accuracy for collision check processing
F302 Allowance in rapid feed stop in deep-hole boring cycle
2-27
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
F303 G01 feed-in speed for deep-hole boring cycle
F304 Alarm wait time during [CUT] restarting search during VIRTUAL MACHINING
F326 Automatic operation intelligent safety shield (ISS)/virtual machining interference check selection
F328 Real time tuning II Number of buffers for calculating the average of optimum time constants
F329 0 Operation at specification of undefined SMC data number
.
F329 2 Mating tool selection function for automatic tool length setting of FLASH tool
d
ve
er
F329 3 Automatic M code output for smooth restart
s
re
F329 4 Operation to return to the restarting position for smooth restart
ts
gh
F330 0 Hobbing selection
ri
ll
.A
F330 1 Hobbing axis (V-axis) clamping speed selection in hobbing II (position controlled hobbing)
N
Machine coordinate display of hobbing axis (V-axis) and workpiece spindle (C-axis) in hobbing II (position
O
F330 2
controlled hobbing)
TI
60
F330 7
A
Life count for multiple tools with the same tool number and different tool names
R
40
PO
29
F331 2 Command unit for thread cutting shift angle (Q command), for the G-code series for machining centers
R
o.
O
N
F331 4 Shape sequence specification at restart in a MAZATROL program

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
F335 0 Tool nose center speed clamp operation in the cutting point command mode
A
IM
F335 1 Disabling linear axis distortion cancel in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode
K
ZA
F335 2 Disabling rotary axis distortion cancel in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode
A
Action to take when the part count is set using the program with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD enabled
M
F335 7
for automatic operation
YA
F336 0 Control mode selection for rapid feed in the cutting point command mode
3
01
)2
F336 1 Cutting point selection in a singular posture in the cutting point command mode
(c
ht
F336 2 Variable acceleration control G0

ig
yr
F336 6 Variable acceleration control

op
C
F336 7 Super-high-speed machining
4. SOFT LIMIT (I)

Address
Outline
(bit)
I1 Shift amount of unidirectional positioning (G60)
I2 Upper (plus direction) user soft-limit
2-28
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
I3 Lower (minus direction) user soft-limit
I5 Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable override: Minimum value
I7 Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area (lower limit side)
I8 Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area (upper limit side)
I9 Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area lower limit
.
I10 Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area upper limit
d
ve
er
I11 Rotary center of a workpiece
s
re
I12 Clamping value for the amount of handle interruption
ts
gh
I13 0 Execution of G28 (reference-point return)
ri
ll
.A
I13 1 Manual zero-point return operation
N
O
I13 2 Axis display when a control axis is removed
TI
60
I13 6 Removal of control axes, valid/invalid

A
R
40
PO
29
I14 0 Mirror image with respect to the machine zero point, valid/invalid
R
o.
O
N
I14 1 —
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
I14 2 User software limits (I2, I3) valid/invalid

A
IM
Tool-tip relief after spindle orientation during execution of G75, G76, G86 or point-machining (boring or
I14 3
back-boring), valid/invalid
K
Direction of tool-tip relief after spindle orientation during execution of G75, G76, G86 or point-machining
ZA
I14 4
(boring or back-boring)
A
M
I14 5 —
YA
I14 6 —
3
01
)2
I14 7 —
(c
ht
I17 Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 0°)
ig
yr
op
C
I21 Fixed point 1 specified by the user
I22 Fixed point 2 specified by the user
2-29
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
5. SYSTEM (SU)
Address
Outline
(bit)
SU1 Axis setting I for plane selection
SU4 Axis setting J for plane selection
d .
ve
s er
re
SU7 Axis setting K for plane selection
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
SU10 Selection of tool change command output position
O
TI
60
SU11 Movement of axes during approach A

R
40
PO
29
SU12 Rotating position specified in the indexing unit after tool change
R
o.
O
N
SU13 Axis name of the transfer axis

C
al
K
ri
ZA
SU14 Tool nose mark display color on the TOOL PATH CHECK display/TRACE display
Se
A
IM
SU15 Name of thrust axis for servo axis

K
SU16 Movement to C-axis index swivel position when Z-offset scheme is used
ZA
A
M
SU17 Background color for the MDI window

YA
SU18 Character color for the MDI window

3
01
Selecting the method of axis movement to the tool change command output position or to the position
SU19
)2
designated at RETURN of the end unit

(c
SU20 Coefficient for polygonal machining spindle acceleration

ht
ig
Selection of returning operation after the execution of the workpiece transfer unit corresponding to the work
yr
SU21
hand angle to be changed
op
Method of axis movement from the initial point or the escape TPC relay point to the rotating position in the
C
SU22
indexing unit
SU23 Cutting feed rate reduction rate in composite-type fixed cycle
SU24 Spindle speed multiplication factor in the execution of a composite-type fixed cycle
SU26 Chopping axis selection
SU29 Specification of an axis (linear axis) on a plane during polar coordinate interpolation
2-30
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
SU30 Specification of an axis (rotary axis) on a plane during polar coordinate interpolation
Axis movement pattern to the return position set in the end unit of initial-point scheme program for
SU31
multi-tasking machine
SU49 Delay timer for the parts catcher
SU50 Tool turning clearance (radial value) in X-axis
SU51 Tool turning clearance in Z-axis
.
SU52 Lower-turret retraction function - Tool number of the retraction tool 1
d
ve
er
SU53 Lower-turret retraction function - Tool number of the retraction tool 2
s
re
SU54 Allowable limit of axis movement completion waiting time when a cross machining command is executed
ts
gh
SU55 Wait time for accessing the programs in the hard disk operation area/Ethernet operation area
ri
ll
.A
SU56 For setting SPRINT interface (option), fixed value
N
SU97 -
O
Lower-turret retraction function - Fixed point of the retraction position
TI
SU100
60
SU102
A
Return distance at wall during rough cutting in bar machining or in corner machining of EIA/ISO program
R
40
PO
29
SU103 Cutting depth in the composite-type fixed cycle

R
o.
O
N
SU104 Pecking return distance in grooving of EIA/ISO program

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
SU105 Cut depth (diametral value) for final cut in composite-type thread cutting cycle of EIA/ISO program
A
IM
Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial value) in composite-type thread cutting cycle G276 of EIA/ISO
SU106
program
K
ZA
SU107 Safety clamp speed

A
M
SU108 Safeguarding strength

YA
SU109 Tip mass

3
01
SU110 -
)2
Tool length setting range check function - settable data range

SU113
(c
Lower turret width setting for barrier expansion by the difference in X-axis angle between the upper and lower
ht
SU122
turrets
ig
yr
SU123 Admissible motion range on the primary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction
op
C
SU124 Admissible motion range on the secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction
SU125 Fixed value
SU126 Amount of offset for runout of the B-axis center (BA61) (only for Maza-Check)
SU127 Amount of offset for B-axis - spindle nose distance offset (BA62) (only for Maza-Check)
Retraction position of the upper and lower turrets at the end of the two-workpiece machining sequence
SU128
(X-axis)
2-31
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
Retraction position of the upper and lower turrets at the end of the two-workpiece machining sequence
SU129
(Z-axis)
SU130 Chopping reference point
SU131 Chopping top dead point
SU132 Chopping bottom dead point
SU133 Chopping speed
.
SU134 Chopping clamp speed
d
ve
er
SU135 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during chopping
s
re
SU136 Chopping compensation coefficient
ts
gh
SU137 Chopping tolerance
ri
ll
.A
SU153 0 M-code selection for tapping cycle
N
O
SU153 1 Display of BUFFER on the POSITION display
TI
60
SU153 2 Display of REMAIN on the POSITION display

A
R
40
PO
29
SU153 3 Display of POSITION on the POSITION display

R
o.
O
N
SU153 4 Automatic retraction of the lower turret for MAZATROL programs

al
K
ri
ZA
“C-axis Clamp” machining method for MAZATROL programs (line/linear machining for the C-axis CYLIND
SU153 5
Se
mode)
A
IM
SU153 6 MAZATROL point machining with C-axis clamped (M210)

K
“C-axis Clamp” machining method for MAZATROL programs (line/linear machining for the C-axis FACE
ZA
SU153 7
mode)
A
M
SU154 0 Displaying tool-setting values for ATC-type turret

YA
SU154 1 Tool length setting range check function

3
01
)2
SU154 2 Displaying the “next distance” during execution of G18.2/G18.3/G18.4

(c
ht
SU154 3 Displaying the “remaining distance” during execution of G18.2/G18.3/G18.4

ig
yr
SU154 4 Displaying the “current position” during execution of G18.2/G18.3/G18.4

op
C
SU154 5 Display of BUFFER during G17.1 - G17.5 mode
SU154 6 Display of REMAIN during G17.1 - G17.5 mode
SU154 7 Display of POSITION during G17.1 - G17.5 mode
SU155 0 Fixed value (1)
Correction timing of the touch sensor tool length during EIA/ISO programmed or MDI operation
SU155 1
(for machining center specifications only)
2-32
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
SU155 2 Operation at an EIA subprogram call from a MAZATROL program
SU155 3 Judgment method for tool change command output during MAZATROL programmed operation
SU155 4 Tool change command output at the start of MAZATROL programmed operation
SU155 7 Reference value for judging tool breakage during laser tool measurement
SU156 3 Tool command scheme for each turret
.
SU156 4 Type of deep-hole drilling cycle G83/G87
d
ve
er
s
re
Execution of the restarting search for a block in the mode of G68 when tool length compensation (G43/G44)
SU156 6
ts
remains valid with a turning tool mounted
gh
SU156 7 Execution of the restarting search for a block after the cancellation of the cross command
ri
ll
The scheme of axis movement during an approach and during movement to the tool change command output
.A
SU157 1
position for machining at the work hand side
N
O
SU157 2 Conditions for returning to the tool change command output position in the manual program unit (MANL PRG)
TI
60
SU157 3
A
Movement to the tool rotating position for tool change command for the same TNo.
R
40
PO
29
SU157 4 Operation to be performed if either TURN POS X, Y, or Z of the indexing unit is left blank.
R
o.
O
N
Preparatory C-axis positioning to 0° for a manual program unit (MANL PRG) with a milling tool after a turning
C
SU157 5
unit
al
K
ri
ZA
SU157 6 Selection of Y-axis movement to the zero point when a turning tool is mounted
Se
A
IM
Selection of whether or not the B-axis rotation radius is to be included into the “clearance position” for
SU157 7
changing the indexed cutting edge on one and the same FLASH tool
K
ZA
SU158 0 Tool change position during TOOL EYE measurement

A
M
SU158 1 Conditions for wear compensation of turning tools in manual program unit
YA
Checking the rotational axes’ correction values in workpiece placement error correction for MAZATROL
SU158 2
3
programs
01
)2
SU158 3 Handling of G43P0 tool length compensation with a touch sensor

(c
ht

ig
yr
SU158 5 Returning operation from the chopping reference point

op
C
SU158 7 Manual tool measurement tool wear offset clear function
SU159 1 Selection of whether or not to consider the tool length for tip position memory on the WORK OFFSET display
SU165 0 Current position display for milling tool with B-axis angle reflected in manual operation mode
2-33
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
6. TURNING (TC)
Address
Outline
(bit)
Cut depth reduction rate for rough cutting in bar machining unit, corner machining unit, and copy machining
TC1
unit
TC2 Acceleration rate in up-going taper for rough cutting in bar machining unit
TC3 Acceleration rate in up-going wall slope (90°) for rough cutting in bar machining unit
Selection of chamfering pattern in rough external turning cycle G71 (G271) or rough edge-machining cycle
TC4
G72 (G272)
TC5 Deceleration rate in down-going taper for rough cutting in bar machining unit
.d
ve
TC6 Deceleration rate in down-going wall slope (90°) for rough cutting in bar machining unit
er
s
re
TC7 Acceleration rate on outside stock contour for rough cutting in copy machining unit
ts
gh
TC8 Acceleration pitch error ratio in thread cutting unit
ri
ll
TC9 Rough cutting residue ratio in cutting off cycle in groove cutting unit
.A
Cut depth allowable incremental rate for rough cutting in groove cutting unit, edge machining unit and copy
N
TC10
O
machining unit
TI
60
TC11 Deceleration rate at cutting start in turning-drilling unit

A
R
40
PO
TC12 Deceleration rate at cutting end in turning-drilling unit

29
R
o.
TC13 Deceleration rate at rough cutting start in bar machining unit and copy machining unit
N
C
al
TC14 Maximum permissible rate of increase of the initial cutting depth during roughing
ri
ZA
Se
TC15 Deceleration clearance at start of rough cutting in bar machining unit and copy machining unit
IM
K
TC16 Tolerance for escape in high speed rough cutting cycle of bar machining unit
ZA
A
TC17 Pitch error correction during threading acceleration

M
YA
TC18 Fixed value (0)

3
01
TC19 Turning-drilling cut depth calculation coefficient

)2
TC20 Reamer return speed calculation coefficient in the turning-drilling unit

(c
ht
TC21 Incomplete threading portion length calculation coefficient for turning-tap tip
ig
yr
op
TC22 Turning-tapper elongation calculation coefficient

C
TC23 Thread height calculation coefficient for outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting (metric)
TC24 Thread height calculation coefficient for inside diameter thread cutting (metric)
TC25 Thread height calculation coefficient for outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting (inch)
TC26 Thread height calculation coefficient for inside diameter thread cutting (inch)
TC27 Recessing width for #1 to #3
2-34
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
TC28 Recessing depth #1 to #3
TC29 Recessing width for #4
TC30 Recessing depth for #4
d.
ve
er
s
re
TC35 Lower limit for thrust ratio
ts
gh
TC37 Safety contour clearance — Outside diameter clearance (radial value)
ri
ll
TC38 Safety contour clearance — Inside diameter clearance (radial value)
.A
N
TC39 Safety contour clearance — Front clearance
O
TI
60
TC40 Safety contour clearance — Back clearance A

R
40
PO
29
TC41 Thread cutting clearance (radial value)

R
o.
O
N
TC42 Groove cutting clearance (radial value) in X-axis

C
al
K
ri
ZA
TC43 Groove cutting clearance in Z-axis

Se
TC44 Workpiece transfer clearance

IM
K
TC45 Amount of the edge clearance after edge-machining

ZA
A
TC46 Drilling depth decrement in turning-drilling unit

M
YA
TC47 Pecking return distance in turning-drilling unit

3
01
TC48 Drilling cut depth clamp value in turning-drilling unit

)2
(c
TC49 Spindle speed clamp value in cutting off cycle

ht
ig
TC50 Number of times that the feed rate is to be reduced during the #4 and #5 cutting-off cycles of a grooving unit
yr
op
TC51 Dwell at the hole bottom during non-through hole drilling cycle of the turning-drilling unit
C
TC52 Dwell (specification of spindle rotation number) at groove bottom in groove cutting unit
TC53 Feed rate for escape by short distance
TC54 Cut depth per cycle for machining inside diameter in bar machining unit
TC55 Reverse feed tolerance for contour machining
TC56 Overtravelling in X-axis direction in edge machining unit
2-35
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
TC57 Workpiece pressing speed in workpiece transfer unit

–1
Spindle speed (min ) of two spindles in workpiece transfer while the spindles are rotating in workpiece
TC58
transfer unit
TC59 Workpiece pressing distance in workpiece transfer unit
TC61 Simultaneous operation pattern for transfer
TC62 Selection of tool change command output position for FLASH tool
.
TC63 Amount of relief after transfer using the workpiece transfer unit (Spindle mode 0 to 5)
d
ve
er
TC64 Amount of relief after transfer using the workpiece transfer unit (Spindle mode 6 and 7)
s
re
TC65 Specification of first M-code for parts catcher control
ts
gh
TC66 Minimum index angle of the FLASH tool
ri
ll
Return distance (radial value) in X-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner machining unit
.A
TC67
or in mill-turning unit of MAZATROL programs
N
Return distance in Z-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner machining unit or in
O
TC68
mill-turning unit of MAZATROL programs
TI
60
TC69
A
Number of revolutions during dwell for pecking of grooving
R
40
PO
29
TC70 FLASH tool — Number of cutting edges to be used for the tool not registered in the tool file
R
o.
O
N
TC71 Feed stopping rotation dwell time during the chip cutting cycle
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TC72 Number of times of roughing in the composite-type fixed cycle (G273, G73)
A
IM
TC73 Return speed at pecking portion in groove cutting unit and turning-drilling unit
K
ZA
TC74 Pecking return distance in groove cutting unit of MAZATROL programs

A
M
TC75 Overlap distance for machining wide groove in groove cutting unit
YA
TC76 Escape value after machining in edge machining unit

3
01
)2
TC77 Acceleration distance clamp value for thread cutting unit

(c
ht
TC78 Cut depth (radial value) for final cut in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs
ig
yr
TC79 Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial value) in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs
op
C
TC80 Angle of the tool nose during the G276/G76 mode
TC81 Final finishing repeat times in the composite-type fixed cycle (G276, G76)
TC82 Chamfering data calculation coefficient in thread cutting unit and thread cutting cycle (G276/G292, G76/G92)
Number of cutting operations to be performed on finishing allowance corresponding to standard pattern (#0)
TC83
of threading unit
TC84 Feed rate to be auto-set for finishing
2-36
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
TC85 - TC94 Specification of the pocket for the long boring bar
TC95 Fixed value
TC96 Fixed value
TC97 Type of retraction during workpiece transfer
TC98 Returning operation after machining specified in the end unit
.
TC99 ATC operation after machining when not specified in the end unit
d
ve
er
TC101 Selection of droop sampling axis
s
re
TC102 Selection of cycle counter sampling axis
ts
gh
TC103 Amplitude limit of table vibration
ri
ll
.A
TC104 Clearance for rechucking using the workpiece transfer unit
N
O
TC105 Fixed value (0)
TI
60
TC106
A
Designation of MOVE C in a workpiece transfer unit of a program of workpiece scheme (only for the
R
40
INTEGREX e-H Series)

PO
29
TC107 Overshoot in the longitudinal direction with the workpiece for inside machining
R
o.
O
N
TC108 End position of the two-workpiece machining

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TC109 Reference length for the display of bar materials on the BL SCHEDULE display
A
IM
TC111 -
CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display — Workpiece length range
TC113
K
TC114 -
ZA
CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display — Max. workpiece outside diameter range

TC116
A
M
TC117 Composite-type fixed cycle — G273 amount of X-axial release

YA
TC118 Composite-type fixed cycle — G273 amount of Z-axial release

3
01
TC120 -
)2
Distance to the front end of the long boring bar

TC137
(c
ht
TC141 0 Use/disuse of acceleration in up-going slope during rough cutting cycle in bar machining unit
ig
yr
TC141 1 Use/disuse of deceleration in down-going slope during rough cutting cycle in bar machining unit
op
C
TC141 2 Selection between use/disuse of acceleration distance check at start of thread cutting unit
TC141 3 Selection between start position shift/start angle shift for thread number offset in thread cutting unit
TC141 4 Selecting an angle margin for nose shape compensation
TC141 5 Selecting an angle margin for nose shape compensation
TC141 6 CHUCK JAW DATA display name/code selection
2-37
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
TC141 7 Whether to make the partition plate and the workpiece barrier valid
TC142 0 Fixed value (0)
Selecting an inter-unit relief path when a succession of I.D. turning units using the same tool exist and there is
TC142 1
no movement to the rotating position of the tool
TC142 2 Selection of the jaw data reference method
TC142 3 Using angle tool holder valid/invalid
.
TC142 4 Turning spindle stop M code output in end unit
d
ve
Selection whether an alarm is to be issued if the ending position of workpiece pressing is reached during
er
TC142 5
transfer of the workpiece
s
re
X-axis retraction position during workpiece transfer as specified in the workpiece transfer unit of the
TC142 6
ts
MAZATROL program
gh
TC142 7 Upper turret retraction during machining with the lower turret (for MULTIPLEX series)
ri
ll
.A
TC143 Whether the end tool of the long boring bar can be changed
N
O
TC144 0 Automatic selection of the relief path for the continuous I.D. machining
TI
60
TC144 1
A
Workpiece transfer axis motion for opposed turret specification lathes
R
40
PO
29
TC144 2 C-axis clamping during workpiece transfer with C-axis positioning, valid/invalid
R
o.
O
N
TC144 3 Automatic output of spindle rotation command when turning tool is used in the manual program unit
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TC144 4 ATC and RETURN of the end unit after single-process operation
A
IM
TC144 5 ATC and RETURN of the end unit for repetition (CONTI. = 1)
K
ZA
TC144 6 Relief path G00/G01 selection for edging

A
M
TC144 7 Handling when no tools are specified for the manual program unit
YA
TC145 0 OFFSET unit Z-axial inversion during turning

3
01
)2
TC145 1 Handling of the G04 command in the manual program unit

(c
ht
TC145 2 Operation by cutting-feed override 0 in G31 command mode

ig
yr
TC145 3 Mode selection after C-axis transfer using the workpiece transfer unit
op
C
TC145 4 Selection of a calculation method for tail barrier end reference
TC145 5 Output of maximum spindle speed command specified in the common unit
Alarm display when tools different in shape (infeed angle, nose angle and nose R) are designated for the
TC145 6
upper and lower turret in balanced cutting
TC145 7 Operation of the path inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the tip (only for copy machining)
TC146 0 Selection of the turning spindle rotation timing when the relay point for the turning approach is specified
2-38
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
TC146 1 X-axis command in the manual program unit
TC146 2 Tool path when the infeed angle or the relief angle is 0° or less
C-axis command output for the second workpiece transfer unit onward when workpiece transfer units of a
TC146 3
BAR moving pattern exist in succession
TC146 4 System enabled at MAZATROL program call from EIA/ISO program
Automatic setting of M8 as an M-code to be outputted at the beginning of a unit which is selected for the
TC146 5
single-process operation
.
TC146 6 C-offset values to be used on HD1 and HD2 for a two-workpiece machining unit
d
ve
er
Whether or not to modify the numeric positional indication with respect to the workpiece coordinate system
TC146 7
according to the tool offset setting in the TPC data
s
re
Modal condition about diameter/radius value input for the unit succeeding a manual program or subprogram
TC147 0
ts
unit
gh
ri
TC147 1 Z/C offset value to be used in the EIA/ISO subprogram after workpiece transfer in the MAZATROL program
ll
.A
TC147 3 Tool change position at RETURN in end unit when FLASH tool is mounted
N
O
TC147 4 Whether pressing is to be made selectable for workpiece transfer units of a BAR moving pattern
TI
60
TC147 5
A
Tool nose position of an inside-turning grooving tool for machining on the back side
R
40
PO
29
TC147 6 Handling of nose R in the retraction path during grooving #4, 5 (cutting off)
R
o.
O
N
TC147 7 Z-axial withdrawal after M-code unit execution

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TC148 4 Selection of compensation cancel when working around the workpiece

A
IM
TC148 5 Selection of movement from the clearance area to a clearance point during O.D. turning
K
ZA
TC148 6 Selection of movement from the clearance area to a clearance point during face/rear turning
A
M
TC148 7 W-axis command enabled/disabled during two-workpiece machining

YA
TC149 0 Selection of the zone where spindle override is fixed to 100% during thread cutting cycle
3
01
)2
TC149 1 Cutting edge offset when a milling drill rotates at the same time in turning-drilling unit (blind hole)
(c
ht
TC149 4 Spindle rotation during turning when an S-code is specified in TPC data
ig
Machine operation on tool path check of a program for which workpiece scheme is selected and T. CENTER
yr
TC149 5
is specified for X and Y, but Z is left blank in the basic coordinates system unit (WPC)
op
C
Alarm output when the directions of rotation of the turning tool of the manual program unit and the spindle do
TC149 7
not match
TC150 0 Setting of the thrust when moving a workpiece
TC150 1 Pinch cut/Y-axis turning in MAZATROL program, valid/invalid
TC150 2 Alarm stop if a program that performs 2 workpiece machining with only one spindle is executed
TC150 5 Selection of surface speed to be output to the screen during constant surface speed control
2-39
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
TC155 Cut depth per cycle for machining external diameter in bar machining unit
TC156 Tool load avoidance distance in reciprocating grooving operation (side wall)
TC157 INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function (IBA): Angular offset
TC158 Feed rate override in reciprocating grooving operation
TC159 Tool load avoidance distance in reciprocating grooving operation (bottom)
TC160 -
.
Retraction distance from wall in reciprocating grooving operation
d
TC161
ve
er
TC162 Wall clearance in uni-directional grooving
s
re
TC251 INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function (IBA): Imbalance multiplication parameter
ts
gh
TC252 INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function (IBA): Imbalance factor parameter
ri
ll
.A
TC253 INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function (IBA): Imbalance droop offset
N
O
TC254 INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function (IBA): Imbalance rotary speed offset
TI
60
TC255
A
Intelligent Balance Analyzer function (IBA): Imbalance slope parameter
R
40
PO
29
Considering C1 and C2 values in the workpiece travel unit in an FRM workpiece scheme program in the tool
TC289 0
R
path check, trace shapes and QUICK shapes

o.
O
N
TC290 0 Thread cutting pattern

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
TC290 1 Cutting start position selection for reciprocating/uni-directional grooving

A
IM
7. SOLID (SD)
K
ZA
Address
Outline
A
(bit)
M
YA
SD49 Machine coordinate selection

3
01
SD50 Table type

)2
SD51 Round table axis direction

(c
ht
ig
SD53 Smoothness selection for arcs in the tool path check/shape check
yr
op
SD58 QUICK MAZATROL product shape display accuracy

C
SD59 - SD63 Fixed value
SD97 Distance of model movement per time
SD98 Amount of model rotation per time
SD125 Minimum table dimension X
SD126 Maximum table dimension X
2-40
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
SD127 Minimum table dimension Y
SD128 Maximum table dimension Y
SD129 Minimum table dimension Z
SD130 Maximum table dimension Z
SD131 Amount of table chamfer
.
SD165 1 Tool data setting using QUICK MAZATROL
d
ve
er
SD166 0 Fixed value
s
re
SD167 0 Display method for the jaws set on the 3D SETUP display in the turning mode
ts
gh
ri
SD167 1 Sampling data automatic save function on occurrence of an INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) alarm
ll
.A
8. DISPLAY STRUCTURE (US)
N
O
Address
TI
Outline
60
(bit) A
R
40
PO
US1 0 Menu highlighting method

29
R
o.
US1 1 Selection of operation for automatic determination of cutting conditions when tool data is not input
O
N
C
al
US1 2 MAZA-CHECK input support function log output, parameter reference

ri
ZA
Se
US1 4 Directory selection function in the WORK No. SELECT window

IM
US1 5 Project function in the WORK No. SELECT window/PROGRAM FILE display
K
ZA
US37 Data guard function: Maximum number of users

A
M
YA
US39 Automatic determination of cutting conditions Element that automatically determines “FR” (DRILL)
3
Automatic determination of cutting conditions Element that automatically determines “FR” (BOR BAR, B-B
01
US40
BAR and BCK FACE)
)2
Automatic determination of cutting conditions Element that automatically determines “FR” (FCE MILL, END
US41
(c
MILL)
ht
ig
US42 Automatic determination of cutting conditions Reference shank diameter (BAR, CPY, CORNER)
yr
Automatic determination of cutting conditions Tool nose radius when tool data is not input (BAR, CPY,
op
US43
CORNER and FACING)
C
Automatic determination of cutting conditions Tool width when tool data is not input (BAR, CPY and
US44
CORNER)
Automatic determination of cutting conditions Tool nose angle when tool data is not input (BAR, CPY,
US45
CORNER and FACING)
US46 Automatic determination of cutting conditions Tool nose width when tool data is not input (T.GROOVE)
2-41
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-2-2 Machine parameter
1. CALL MACRO (J)
Address
Outline
(bit)
J1 - J40 G-code macroprogram call
J41 - J80 M-code macroprogram call (J44, J48, J52, J56, J60: Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited)
J89 - J107 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited
.
J108 Maximum number of retrials to update the model with the SAFETY SHIELD function
d
ve
er
J109 - J112 Barrier setup chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side/NC tailstock position
s
re
J113 - J116 Barrier setup chuck reference position 2 on the No. 2 spindle side
ts
gh
J119 - J120 Barrier-setting/cancelling M-code to be used for barrier teaching
ri
ll
Amount of offset for height axis rotational center offset (K124, K128) of the rotary axis for the tool (tool tip
.A
J121
point control)
N
O
J124 M codes for SPRINT control [Option]
TI
60
J125 - J126
A
SPRINT control enable signal ON/OFF delay time [Option]
R
40
PO
29
J127 SPRINT control start signal assigned device [Option]

R
o.
O
N
J128 SPRINT control select signal assigned device [Option]

al
K
ri
ZA
J130 Z-axis stroke for the teaching of lower turret tool

Se
A
IM
Setting the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic
J131 - J140
operation
K
Selecting whether to output the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid
ZA
J141
during automatic operation
A
M
J142 0
YA
J142 1
3

01
Output selection of M codes for temporarily disabling/canceling disabled status of INTELLIGENT SAFETY
)2
J142 2
SHIELD function in automatic operation
(c
Output selection of M codes for temporarily disabling/canceling disabled status of INTELLIGENT SAFETY
J142 3
ht
SHIELD function in automatic operation

ig
Method to handle the tool offset data when the program is returned to a MAZATROL program with the tool
yr
J143 0
offset function set valid in an EIA/ISO subprogram
op
C
J143 1 Selection of the lower turret tool teaching data input method
In reference point return operation (G28, G30, G30.1), tool change command is executed with or without
J143 2
waiting the completion of middle-point return
J143 3 Fixed value
J143 4 Fixed value
J143 5 Modal at power-on or at reset (G23/G22)
2-42
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
J143 7 For setting SPRINT interface (option), fixed value
J144 0 Tool interference check type
J144 2 Tool life data overwrite during automatic operation
J145 - J184 M-code macroprogram call
J235 Workpiece measurement offset (X-axis offset for OD (both sides), X-axis offset for protrusion width)
.
J236 Workpiece measurement offset (Y-axis offset for OD (both sides), Y-axis offset for protrusion width)
d
ve
er
J237 Workpiece measurement offset (X-axis offset for ID (both sides), X-axis offset for groove width)
s
re
J238 Workpiece measurement offset (Y-axis offset for ID (both sides), Y-axis offset for groove width)
ts
gh
J239 Workpiece measurement offset (Z-axis offset for protrusion width, offset for ID protrusion width)
ri
ll
.A
J240 Workpiece measurement offset (Z-axis offset for groove width, offset for ID groove)
N
O
J251 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the separating direction (1st set of axes)
TI
60
J252
A
Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the separating direction (2nd set of axes)
R
40
PO
29
J253 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the separating direction (3rd set of axes)
R
o.
O
N
J254 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the separating direction (4th set of axes)
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
J261 0 Arithmetic operation after G code

A
IM
J261 3 Initial point relay setting for point-machining TPC

K
ZA

A
M

YA
J473 - J512 M-code macroprogram call

3
01
)2
J513 - J530 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

(c
Amount of correction for height axis rotational center offset (K233, K237) of the tool control rotary axis (tool tip
ht
J531
point control)
ig
yr
J533 - J540 For setting SPRINT interface (option), fixed value

op
M code setting for temporarily disabling/canceling disabled status of INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
C
J550 - J551
function in automatic operation
2. MEASURE (K)
Address
Outline
(bit)
K1 Rotational radius of the C-axis
K2 Minimum rotational angle
2-43
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
K3 Identification number of the shaping control axis
K7 Unbalanced axis
K8 Waiting time for speed attainment ON during override variable thread cutting
K10 Fixed value
K11 Selection of language to be displayed
.
K12 Fixed value (0)
d
ve
er
K13 Measurement skip feed rate (X-axis, Z-axis)
s
re
K14 Measurement approach speed (X-axis, Z-axis)
ts
gh
K15 Measurement skip speed (C-axis)
ri
ll
.A
K16 Measurement approach speed (C-axis)
N
O
K17 Specification of measuring tolerance (lower limit) [valid only for L106 bit 6 = 1]
TI
60
K18
A
Specification of measuring tolerance (upper limit) [valid only for L106 bit 6 = 1]
R
40
PO
29
K19 Measurement stroke for workpiece measurement

R
o.
O
N
K20 Measurement stroke for tool nose measurement

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
K21 Coefficient to determine rotation angle when retrying measurement C reference face
A
IM
K22 Measurement retry frequency when retrying reference face C measurement

K
ZA
K23 Retry frequency for workpiece measurement

A
M
K24 - K28 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

YA
K29 Simultaneous control: Delay counter for automatic correction of synchronizing errors
3
01
)2
K30 Approach speed for laser tool length measurement

(c
ht
K31 Approach speed for laser tool diameter measurement

ig
yr
K32 Pre-measuring speed for laser tool length measurement

op
C
K33 Pre-measuring speed for laser tool diameter measurement
K34 Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool length measurement
K35 Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool diameter measurement
K36 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited
K37 External deceleration speed
2-44
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
K38 Work number called during S-code macroprogram appointment
K39 Work number called during T-code macroprogram appointment
K40 Work number called during second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment
K41 G31 skipping speed
K42 G31.1 skipping speed
.
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
K46 Excessive pressing error spread (Amount of drooping)
ri
ll
.A
K47 M-code for external workpiece measurement
N
O
K48 Spindle FB alarm detection method
TI
60
K49 First number of the standby M-codes

A
R
40
PO
29
K50 Total number of the standby M-codes

R
o.
O
N
K51 M-code during workpiece measurement retry operation

al
K
ri
ZA
Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

Se
K52
A
IM
K53 Vocal output language selection

K
ZA
K54 Vocal output sound level

A
M
K55 Vocal output warning reference value

YA
K56 Name of second auxiliary function

3
01
)2
K57 Type of S-code macroprogram appointment call

(c
ht
K58 Type of T-code macroprogram appointment call

ig
yr
K59 Type of second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment call

op
C
K60 Fixed value (4)
K61 Fixed value (1)
K62 Fixed value (1)
K63 Fixed value (1)
K64 Fixed value (2)
2-45
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
K65 Fixed value (1)
K66 Fixed value (1)
K67 Fixed value (1)
Coordinate system with reference to which the offset amounts are to be used in tool length offset for the
K68 0
selected machining surface (For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools)
K68 1 Speed clamping method for polar coordinate interpolation
.
K68 3 Fixed value (0)
d
ve
er
s
re
K68 5 Override/dryrun speed valid/invalid when the G31 command is issued
ts
gh
Whether all the barrier cancel data in the program is to be cleared by executing the MMS unit in a
K68 7
ri
MAZATROL program
ll
.A
K69 0 G31.1 skip condition SKIP-2
N
O
TI
60

A
R
40
PO
29

R
o.
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se

A
IM

K
ZA

A
M

YA

3
01
)2

(c
ht

ig
yr

op
C
2-46
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
.
d
ve
er
K72 G31.4 skip conditions
s
re
K73 G4 skip conditions
ts
gh
K74 Emergency stop contactor cutoff time (Safety supervisory function)
ri
ll
.A
K75 Contactor control output device 1 (Safety supervisory function)
N
O
K76 Contactor control output device 2 (Safety supervisory function)
TI
60
K77
A
Door switch input device (Safety supervisory function)
R
40
PO
29
K78 Number of door switches (Safety supervisory function)

R
o.
O
N
K79 Supervisory speed filtering time during servo-off (Safety supervisory function)
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
K80 Warning reference value (Vocal output)

A
IM
K81 Timer for machining management

K
ZA
K82 Fixed value

A
M
K83 Maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion

YA
K84 Maximum allowable amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion in each interpolating cycle
3
01
)2
K85 Special linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for threading

(c
ht
K87 - K89 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

ig
yr
K90 Return override during synchronous tapping

op
C
K91 Alternative M-code for M96
K92 Alternative M-code for M97
K93 Fixed value (2)
K94 0 Selection of whether menu function is to be made invalid after operation has been stopped by [ATC STOP]
K94 1 Indexing in measurement unit
2-47
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
K94 2 Program editing on the EIA MONITOR display during multi-system operation
K94 3 W-axis command code selection for the MDI mode
Indexing in cases where the next machining is started without specifying an index unit after a measurement
K94 4
unit has been executed
K94 5 Display/no display of a block start interlock alarm if tool life of a tool specified in the block has expired
Selection whether the difference in angle between the upper and lower turrets is to be incorporated into the
K95 0
current C-axis position display of HD2
.
d
ve
er
K95 2 Tool position compensation during T-command execution, performed/not performed
s
re
K95 3 Coordinate system update during handle pulse interrupt, performed/not performed
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
K95 5 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for handle pulse feed
N
O
K95 6 Software limits for G30 execution valid/invalid
TI
60
K95 7 In-position check valid/invalid

A
R
40
PO
29
K96 0 G0 command in-position check valid/invalid

R
o.
O
N
K96 1 Timing of manual free feed finish signal

al
K
ri
ZA
Se

A
IM
K96 3 Axis/Cutting interlock alarm display, valid/invalid

K
ZA
K96 4 Suppression of lost motion in modes other than the G1 command mode, valid/invalid
A
M

YA

3
01
)2
K96 7 Fixed G0 inclination

(c
ht
K97 B-axis misalignment correction, name of parallel axis

ig
yr
K98 B-axis misalignment correction, name of orthogonal axis

op
C
K99 Dynamic offset, name of rotational axis
K100 Dynamic offset, name of parallel axis
K101 Dynamic offset, name of orthogonal axis
2-48
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
Compensation method for the sensing tool’s eccentricity and stylus radius in workpiece measurement and
K102 3
coordinate measurement, M Pro compatible/New scheme
K102 4 Z-axis direction for setting the TPC relay points of a measurement unit
K102 5 Selection of setup data (jaw data and tailstock position) to be used in EIA/ISO programs
K102 6 Setting the direction of rotation for milling tools mounted on the turret
.
d
ve
er
K103 0 Handling of the sign assigned to hobbing address D
s
re
K103 1 Synchronous control error auto-correction valid/invalid
ts
gh
K103 2 Fixed value
ri
ll
.A
K103 3 DDB micron unit
N
O
K103 4 Fixed value
TI
60
K103 5 Output of S-code and T-code at restart

A
R
40
PO
29
K103 6 —
R
o.
O
N
K103 7 Whether FIXED PT can be selected at RETURN of the end unit of the MAZATROL program
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
K104 0 Output of a laser measurement B-axis 0-degree command after ATC, valid/invalid
A
IM
K104 1 Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring instrument (L16/K104 bit 2)
K
ZA
K104 2 Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring instrument (Parallel to the Y-axis/X-axis)
A
M
K104 3 Voice Adviser (Vocal output function) valid/invalid

YA
K104 4 Type of voice

3
01
)2
K104 5 Vocal guidance for warm-up operation

(c
ht
K104 6 Rapid feed command when cutting feed override is set to 0%, operation is executed/alarm state
ig
yr
K104 7 Feed rate for an approach to the starting point in EIA modal restarting mode
op
C
K105 2 S-code macro call invalid/valid
K105 3 T-code macro call invalid/valid
K105 4 Second auxiliary function macro call invalid/valid
2-49
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
K105 6 Handling of the shaping control axis
K106 0 Execution conditions for user macroprogram interrupt
K106 1 Start timing for user macroprogram interrupt
.
K106 3 Fixed value
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
K107 4
A
Corner judgment halfway through a block during polar coordinate interpolation where rotary axis shape
R
40
correction is valid
PO
29
K107 5 Motion distance in the manual pulse feed mode for the axis whose position is displayed in diameter value
R
o.
O
N
K107 6 Deceleration for arc valid/invalid

al
K
ri
ZA
Se

A
IM
K108 Permissible error range for synchronous control

K
ZA
K110 Judgment angle near a singular point

A
M
K111 Clamping speed in safety supervisory mode 3

YA
K113 Machine type

3
01
)2
K114 Axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate system
(c
ht
K115 Axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate system
ig
yr
K116 Axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate system
op
C
K117 Rotational direction of the rotary axis
K121 Axis number of the first rotary axis
K122 Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis
K123 Vertical axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis
K124 Height axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis
2-50
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
K125 Axis number of the second rotary axis
K126 Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis
K127 Vertical axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis
K128 Height axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis
K129 Position deviation 1 of the first rotary axis
.
K130 Position deviation 2 of the first rotary axis
d
ve
er
K131 Position deviation 1 of the second rotary axis
s
re
K132 Position deviation 2 of the second rotary axis
ts
gh
K133 X-axis position deviation at the spindle center position
ri
ll
.A
K134 Y-axis position deviation at the spindle center position
N
O
K135 Angle deviation 1 of the first rotary axis centerline
TI
60
K136
A
Angle deviation 2 of the first rotary axis centerline
R
40
PO
29
K137 Angle deviation 1 of the second rotary axis centerline

R
o.
O
N
K138 Angle deviation 2 of the second rotary axis centerline

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
K139 X-axis angle deviation of the spindle centerline

A
IM
K140 Y-axis angle deviation of the spindle centerline

K
ZA
K225 Machine type (2nd set of axes)

A
M
K226 Axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate system (2nd set of axes)
YA
K227 Axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate system (2nd set of axes)
3
01
)2
K228 Axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate system (2nd set of axes)
(c
ht
K229 Rotational direction of the rotary axis (2nd set of axes)

ig
yr
K230 Axis number of the first rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
op
C
K231 Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K232 Vertical axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K233 Height axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K234 Axis number of the second rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K235 Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
2-51
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
K236 Vertical axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K237 Height axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K238 Fixed value
K239 Fixed value
K242 Axis name of the spindle to be rotated in orbit machining
.
K243 M code number of the forward rotation command for orbit machining
d
ve
er
K244 M code number of the reverse rotation command for orbit machining
s
re
K245 M code number of the rotation stop command for orbit machining
ts
gh
K246 Permissible error at involute interpolation end point
ri
ll
.A
K247 Involute interpolation permissible acceleration
N
O
K248 Involute interpolation minimum feedrate
TI
60
K249 Involute interpolation override lower limit

A
R
40
PO
29
K250 Wait time before turning ON of zero-speed signal upon ending hobbing II (position controlled hobbing)
R
o.
O
N
K251 Threshold value for singular posture in the cutting point command mode (for other than rapid feed)
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
K252 Fixed value

A
IM
K253 Angle that sets the mill spindle tool tip in the +X-axis direction in orbit machining
K
ZA
K254 Threshold value for singular posture in the cutting point command mode (for rapid feed)
A
M

YA
K257 1 Jaw shape data: registration count

3
01
)2
K257 2 Fixed value

(c
ht
K257 3 Direction of mill spindle rotation in orbit machining

ig
yr
K257 4 Speed clamp alarm display in orbit machining

op
C
K258 0 Spindle speed override unit switching function
K258 1 MDI input support function
K258 2 HANDLE INTERUPT window Tx display
2-52
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
K258 3 HANDLE INTERUPT window Ty display
K258 4 HANDLE INTERUPT window Tz display
K259 0 Hobbing: Axis configuration discrimination function
K280 0 Fixed value
K280 1 Fixed value
.
K280 2 Fixed value
d
ve
er
K280 6 Fixed value
s
re
K281 0 Laser tool length/diameter measurement on an arbitrary axis
ts
gh
ri
3. TABLE (L)
ll
.A
Address
Outline
N
(bit)
O
TI
L1 Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (X-component)
60
A
R
40
L2 Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (Y-component)

PO
29
R
o.
L3 Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (X-component)

O
N
C
al
L4 Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (Y-component)

ri
ZA
Se
L5 Z-axis stroke for tip position memory (TEACH function)

IM
K
L6 Tool-breakage judgment distance for TBR function

ZA
Tool-breakage restoration mode for TBR function (for M35 external tool breakage detection or tool
A
L7
measurement unit)
M
YA
L8 Skipping stroke limit for MMS

3
01
L9 Selection of random ATC specifications

)2
(c
L10 Interval between magazine pockets

ht
ig
L11 Touch sensor’s interference direction

yr
op
L12 Tolerance for manual measurement

C
L13 Allowable angle for parallelism and right angle in manual measurement
L14 Escapement for straightness measurement
L15 Macro program number for straightness measurement
L16 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited
L17 Minimum angle of head indexing command (only for INTEGREX j)
2-53
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
L18 Presence/absence of tailstock
L19 Number of electric steady rests
L21 Output type of index (rotary) table
L22 Data of the tool nose measurement sensor, Sensor width along the X-axis
L23 Data of the tool nose measurement sensor, Sensor width along the Z-axis
.
L24 Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, X-axis
d
ve
er
L25 Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, Z-axis
s
re
L26 Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, Y-axis
ts
gh
L27 Timer setting for manual TOOL EYE measurement
ri
ll
.A
L28 Amount of Z-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement
N
O
L29 Machine efficiency
TI
60
L30
A
Selection of machining navigation case introduction messages
R
40
PO
29
L31 - L34 Use in machine manufacturer macro

R
o.
O
N
L37 Minimum index angle of index table

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L38 M/B-code for index of index table

A
IM
L39 Selection of execution/non execution of indexing unit

K
ZA
L40 Availability of specification of index table angle in end unit

A
M
L41 Simultaneous operation of indexing unit with ATC

YA
L42 Initial value of index table angle

3
01
)2
L43 Indication of index table angle

(c
ht
L44 Selection of automatic setting on/off for nose position correction of a drilling tool
ig
yr
L45 Index table angle command

op
C
L46 Maximum number of pallets in pallet changing unit
L47 To prepare or not to prepare next pallet change
L48 Number of long boring bars
L49 Simultaneous operation of pallet change with ATC
L50 Rewriting of head number
2-54
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
L51 Tool command system in MDI operation
L52 Writing of machining management data with macro variable
L53 Showing of program number in PALLET MANAGEMENT display
L54 Selection of automatic operation mode
L55 Spindle load meter display type
.
L56 Method of measurement of coordinates by tool edge memorizing function (TEACH)
d
ve
er
L57 Rewriting of tool data during automatic operation
s
re
L58 Head index angle indication system
ts
gh
L59 Input selection for HEAD OFFSET display
ri
ll
.A
L60 Head quantity
N
O
L61 Output timing of AHC and APC
TI
60
L62 Head relay point X1

A
R
40
PO
29
L63 Head relay point Y1

R
o.
O
N
L64 Head relay point X2

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L65 Head relay point Y2

A
IM
L66 Return/No return to head indexing point Z

K
ZA
L67 Length between the end surface of the spindle and the center of head rotation
A
M
L68 Head correction value X

YA
L69 Head correction value Y

3
01
)2
L70 Axis movement from machining face on escapement

(c
ht
L71 Shift of basic coordinate for oblique face machining

ig
yr
L72 5-axis spline interpolation geometry compensation software acceleration/deceleration filter 2 time constant
op
C
L73 Time constant for shape correction acceleration/deceleration filter 2
L74 Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control
L75 Time constant for pre-interpolational linear control during cutting feed rate acceleration/deceleration
L76 Acceleration rate for high-speed cutting
L77 Angle for deceleration at corner before interpolation
2-55
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
L78 Amount of X-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement
L79 In-position width for changeover of the synchronized-tapping gain
L80 Linear to arc deceleration rate
L81 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited
L82 Table thickness
.
L83 Spindle head radius
d
ve
er
L84 Correction value of alignment deviation X (Upper face)
s
re
L85 Correction value of alignment deviation Y (Upper face)
ts
gh
L86 Correction value of alignment deviation X (0-degree face)
ri
ll
.A
L87 Correction value of alignment deviation Y (0-degree face)
N
Correction value of alignment deviation X (90-degree face)
O
L88
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (X-component for B-axis at 90-degree position) (for INTEGREX series)
TI
60
L89
A
Correction value of alignment deviation Y (90-degree face)
R
40
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (Y-component for B-axis at 90-degree position) (for INTEGREX series)
PO
29
Correction value of alignment deviation X (180-degree face)

L90
R
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (X-component for B-axis at 180-degree position) (for INTEGREX series)
o.
O
N
Correction value of alignment deviation Y (180-degree face)

C
L91
al
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (Y-component for B-axis at 180-degree position) (for INTEGREX series)
K
ri
ZA
Se
L92 Correction value of alignment deviation X (270-degree face)

A
IM
L93 Correction value of alignment deviation Y (270-degree face)

K
ZA
L94 X/Y travel distance during EIA-programmed tool measurement

A
M
L95 Offset number auto-setting for EIA-programmed tool measurement

YA
L96 Amount of shifting during offset number auto-setting for EIA-programmed tool measurement
3
01
)2
L97 M-code to be output when selecting menu function for the MDI tool designation
(c
ht
L98 Max. tool length for laser tool length measurement

ig
yr
L99 Cycle time for saving the operational status management data
op
C
L100 Laser sensor position X
L101 Laser sensor position Y
L102 Laser sensor position Z
L103 Approach point X for laser tool diameter measurement
L104 Approach point Y for laser tool diameter measurement
2-56
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
L105 Approach point Z for laser tool diameter measurement
L106 0 Measuring equipment selection
L106 1 Selection of a rotational reference coordinate system for WPC-th
L106 2 Selection of measuring equipment
Selection of whether workpiece measurement results and tool measurement results are to be stored into tool
L106 3
data of the lower turret
.
L106 4 Selection of whether to enable or disable the fixed amount compensation function
d
ve
B-axis user-defined angle setting in the coordinate measurement unit and workpiece measurement unit
er
L106 5
invalid/valid
s
re
Non-compensation area for the tool measurement and execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement
L106 6
ts
operation
gh
L106 7 Selection of laser measuring menu display
ri
ll
.A
L107 0 Tool path drawing
N
O
L107 1 Tailstock function valid/invalid
TI
60
L107 2 Tailstock type

A
R
40
PO
29
L107 3 Whether tail thrust is also to be displayed in pounds (lbs)

R
o.
O
N
L107 4 LBB No. setting for the grooving I.D. tool, threading I.D. tool, or touch sensor, valid/invalid
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L107 5 XYZ-axis operation for the first T-command after cycle start
A
IM
L107 6 A-axis operation for the first T-command after cycle start
K
ZA
L107 7 Heavy tool designation valid/invalid

A
M
L108 0 Fixed value (0)

YA

3
01
)2

(c
ht

ig
yr

op
Incorporating the C-axis coordinate into the TOOL PATH CHECK, TRACE, and SHAPE CHECK displays of
C
L108 5
the VRX machine
L108 7 Displaying the milling tool nose in the MAZATROL program of the TOOL PATH CHECK display
Axial direction of the two axes to be checked by the software limit relative position check function
L109 0
(1st set of axes)
L109 1
(2nd set of axes)
2-57
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
L109 2
(3rd set of axes)
L109 3
(4th set of axes)
L109 4 Formula selection for calculating horsepower and thrust on the TOOL DATA display with [AUTO SET]
L109 5 Teaching when the lower turret is selected in the basic coordinate system unit (WPC)
L109 6 Fixed value
.
L109 7 Fixed value
d
ve
er
L110 0 Opposed-spindle lathe specifications
s
re
L110 1 Vertically inverted spindle specifications
ts
gh
L110 2 Axis name of the secondary spindle
ri
ll
.A
L110 3 Whether to disable or enable the display of “section to be machined” in the milling tool sequence
N
O
L110 4 RAM spindle specification
TI
60
L110 5 Correction axis for LENGTH B

A
R
40
PO
29
L110 6 Vertical lower turret specification

R
o.
O
N
L110 7 Z-axis direction

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L111 5 T-code in the index unit to be executed before the pallet change unit
A
IM

K
ZA
L111 7 Whether interference check is executed or not while tailstock pushing state is released
A
M
L112 0 Whether traction tailstock is present or absent

YA
L112 1 Whether carriage-connection steadyrest 1 is present or absent

3
01
)2

(c
ht

ig
yr

op
C
L112 5 —
L112 6 —
L112 7 —
L113 Software limit relative position check – Check reference axis (1st set of axes)
L114 Software limit relative position check – Check reference axis (2nd set of axes)
2-58
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
L115 Software limit relative position check – Check reference axis (3rd set of axes)
L116 Software limit relative position check – Check reference axis (4th set of axes)
L117 Software limit relative position check – Check target axis (1st set of axes)
L118 Software limit relative position check – Check target axis (2nd set of axes)
L119 Software limit relative position check – Check target axis (3rd set of axes)
.
L120 Software limit relative position check – Check target axis (4th set of axes)
d
ve
er
L121 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the approaching direction (1st set of axes)
s
re
L122 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the approaching direction (2nd set of axes)
ts
gh
L123 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the approaching direction (3rd set of axes)
ri
ll
.A
L124 Software limit relative position check – Limit distance in the approaching direction (4th set of axes)
N
O
L125 Rotational axis prefiltering time constant
TI
60
L126
A
Positioning direction of the head rotation - -axis for oblique plane indexing
R
40
PO
29
L129 Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage), G1 time constant

R
o.
O
N
L130 Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage), G0 time constant

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L131 Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage), G1 time constant

A
IM
L132 Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage), G0 time constant

K
<For tool tilt type>

ZA
Tool control rotary axis offset First rotary axis horizontal offset
L133
A
<For table tilt type (B-axis tilting table specifications)>

M
B-axis rotation center displacement (X-axis direction)

YA

Tool control rotary axis offset First rotary axis vertical offset
3
L134
01
<For table tilt type (A-axis tilting table specifications)>

)2
A-axis rotation center displacement (Y-axis direction)

(c
<For tool tilt type> Tool control rotary axis offset First rotary axis height offset
L135
ht
<For table tilt type> (A-(B-)axis rotation center displacement (Z-axis direction)
ig
L136 <For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset, horizontal axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis
yr
op
L137 <For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset, vertical axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis
C
L138 <For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset, height axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis
L139 Minimum usable tool diameter of the measurable chamfering tool
L140 Waiting time for the completion signal of M35 (tool breakage detection) from PLC
L141 Software limit relative position check (for auxiliary equipment axis) – Task delay period
2-59
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
L145 Smooth corner control function: Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control
Smooth corner control function:

L146
Time constant for pre-interpolational linear control during cutting feed rate acceleration/deceleration
L147 Smooth corner control function: Software acceleration/deceleration filter G1 time constant (1st stage)
L148 Smooth corner control function: Software acceleration/deceleration filter G1 time constant (2ndt stage)

L149
Rapid feed rate before interpolation for rapid feed command (involving rotary axis) during tool tip point control
Smooth corner control function: Rapid feed time constant before interpolation for rapid feed command
.
L150
d
(involving rotary axis) during tool tip point control
ve
er
L151 Small-diameter table thickness
s
re
L171 1 Selection of [PALLET No.SET] menu item display
ts
gh
Feedrate for clamping the acceleration in orbit machining
ri
L270
ll
.A
L271 Time constant for clamping the acceleration in orbit machining
N
O
4. FEED VEL. (M)
TI
60
A
R
Address
40
Outline
PO
(bit)
29
R
o.
M1 Rapid feed rate

O
N
C
al
M2 Feed rate for initial zero-point return

ri
ZA
Se
M3 Cutting feed rate limit

IM
M4 Offset of machine coordinates system

K
ZA
M5 Second zero-point coordinating value

A
M
YA
M6 Third zero-point coordinating value

3
01
M7 Fourth zero-point coordinating value

)2
M8 Maximum software limit specified by manufacturer (+ direction)

(c
ht
M9 Maximum software limit specified by manufacturer (– direction)

ig
yr
op
M10 Command unit

C
M11 Coding of address of axis
M12 Coding of incremental axis
M13 Axis name (for display)
M14 Shifting distance of the watchdog-less home position
M15 Axis name (for axis name changing)
2-60
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
M16 Zero-point shift amount/grid shift amount
M17 0 —
M17 1 Unit of output from MCP to servo amplifier
M17 2 Direction of machine zero-point return
M17 3 Error correction schema with servo on
.
M17 4 Type of axis
d
ve
er
M17 5 Rotational direction of servo motor (for movement in (+) direction)
s
re
M17 6 —
ts
gh
M17 7 Alarm/No alarm with axis removed
ri
ll
.A
M18 0 Spindle C-axis
N
O
M18 2 Machine zero-point position
TI
60
M18 3 Virtual axis with dog

A
R
40
PO
29
M18 4 Dog-less axis

R
o.
O
N
M18 5 X-axis current position display in radius/diameter

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
M18 6 Automatic/manual simultaneous absolute-value updating

A
IM
M18 7 Absolute-value detection

K
ZA
M19 0 Transmission of rapid feed rate value to SV69/SV70

A
M
M19 3 In-position checking method

YA
Parameter for system internal setting

M19 4
3
Setting prohibited
01
)2
M19 5 Zero-point operation starting position check

(c
ht
M19 7 Backlash scheme to be adopted for dog-type returning to zero point

ig
yr
M20 0 Rotational direction of the rotation axis (Dynamic offset II)

op
C
M20 1 KOMET tool axis specification
M20 2 Method of jog/rapid feed stopping when the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is valid
M20 3 Current position display of NC steady rest axis
M20 4 Warning check for alarm 67 HI-SPEED SYNCTAP AXIS ALARM
M20 5 Multi-axis integrated type amplifier specification
2-61
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
M20 6 Switching between zero-point shift amount and grid shift amount
M20 7 GL-axis specification
M21 0 Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Linear acceleration/deceleration
M21 1 Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, First-order lag
M21 2 Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Second-order lag
.
M21 3 Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration
d
ve
er
M21 4 Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Linear acceleration/deceleration
s
re
M21 5 Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type. First-order lag
ts
gh
M21 6 Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Second-order lag
ri
ll
.A
M21 7 Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration
N
O
M22 0 Deceleration time constant for rapid-feed exponential acceleration/linear deceleration
TI
60
M22 1 Type of stroke-end stop

A
R
40
PO
29
M22 2 Type of stroke-end stop

R
o.
O
N
M22 3 —
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
M22 4 —
A
IM
M22 5 —
K
ZA
M22 6 —
A
M
M22 7 —
YA
M23 0 Selection of NC control axes/PLC control axes

3
01
)2
M23 1 MP scale offset method

(c
ht
M25 Illegal axis area upper limits

ig
yr
M26 Illegal axis area lower limits

op
C
M27 Optimum acceleration control: Target speed
M29 Rapid feed clamping speed 1 for superposition control
M30 Rapid feed clamping speed 2 for superposition control
M31 Cutting feed clamping speed for superposition control
M32 Safety speed for Safety supervisory mode 2
2-62
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
M33 Safety speed for Safety supervisory mode 3
M34 Safety clamping speed for Safety supervisory mode 2
M35 Safety clamping speed for Safety supervisory mode 3
M36 Speed supervisory door selection
M37 Safety clamping speed reduction judgment coefficient
.
M38 Interference check distances for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD, primary check distance
d
ve
er
M39 Interference check distances for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD, secondary check distance
s
re
M40 Ram spindle stored stroke end, upper limit
ts
gh
M41 Ram spindle stored stroke end, lower limit
ri
ll
.A
M42 Interference check distance for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during automatic operation
N
O
M45 Selection of a door for signal input on the drive side (servo) in safety supervisory mode
TI
60
M61 Fixed value

A
R
40
PO
29
M66 Variable acceleration control: Cutting feed rate

R
o.
O
N
M67 Rapid traverse rate limit in orbit machining

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
M68 Cutting feedrate limit in orbit machining

A
IM
M70 Fixed value

K
ZA
M72 0 Real time tuning II Rapid feed time constant selection

A
M
YA
5. TIME CONST. (N)

3
Address
01
Outline
(bit)
)2
(c
N1 Rapid-feed time constant (linear acceleration/deceleration)

ht
N2 Cutting-feed time constant (linear acceleration/deceleration)

ig
yr
op
N3 Rapid-feed time constant (First-order lag)

C
N4 Time constant for post-interpolation rapid feed acceleration/deceleration filter
N5 Cutting-feed time constant (First-order lag)
N7 OT time
N8 Creeping speed during initial zero-point return
N9 Amount of grid ignorance during initial zero-point return
2-63
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
N10 Grid spacing
N12 Machine dependent specific value
N17 Servo amplifier channel number
d .
ve
N18 Servo amplifier rotary switch number
s er
re
N19 Axis system number
ts
gh
N21 0 Linear-type rotational axis
ri
ll
N21 1 Rotational axis shortcut Invalid/Valid
.A
N
N21 2 Fixed value (0)
O
TI
N21 3 Fixed value
60
A
R
40
PO
N21 4 Reference axis for superposition control

29
R
o.
N21 5 Superposition axis for superposition control

O
N
C
al
N21 6 Relative polarity of control axis

ri
ZA
Se
N21 7 Current position immediately after cross machining

IM
Axis selection for 3D interference check during automatic operation and for positioning on the VIRTUAL
N22 0
K
MACHINING display
ZA
N22 1 Turret C-axis specification (for 3D interference check during automatic operation and for virtual machining)
A
M
N22 2 Axis for which the axis name is specified with a comma
YA
3
N22 3 Fixed value

01
)2
N22 4 Fixed value

(c
ht
N25 Time constant for deceleration rate calculation

ig
yr
N26 Accuracy coefficient for deceleration rate calculation

op
C
N27 Rapid feed time constant for superposition
N28 Cutting feed time constant for superposition
N29 Time constant for shape correction rapid feed acceleration/deceleration filter
N30 Time constant for cutting feed (for M881)
2-64
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
N36 Multi-turn counter increment with absolute position rotary-type rotational axis in special gear ratio
Rotational speed after multi-turn counter increment with absolute position rotary-type rotational axis in special
N37
.
gear ratio
d
ve
N38 Fixed value
s er
re
N57 Real time tuning II Rapid feed time constant, maximum value
ts
gh
N58 Real time tuning II Minimum inertia ratio
ri
ll
N60 Real time tuning II Rapid feed time constant, minimum value
.A
N
N61 Real time tuning II Maximum inertia ratio
O
TI
N63 Real time tuning II Rapid feed time constant, range of change
60
A
R
40
PO
N66 Variable acceleration control: Cutting feed time constant

29
R
o.
N67 0 Axis with a 2-character axis name

O
N
C
al
N67 1 Fixed value

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
6. ANOTHER (S)
K
Address
ZA
Outline
(bit)
A
M
S3 Feed forward gain for the MAZAK Precision Rapid Boring Tornado Option
YA
S4 Feed forward gain

3
01
S5 Rotational center of the table

)2
(c
S6 Absolute position detection parameter

ht
ig
S7 Upper limit (on Z-axis) of machining range for table rotating machining 
yr
op
S8 Feed-forward gain G00

C
S10 Axis of rotation of the tilting table
S11 Corner position of the tilting table
S12 Axis of rotation of the tilting table (Used for the automatic program origin calculation function)
S13 G00 in-position width
2-65
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
S14 G01 in-position width
S15 Fixed value
S16 Unbalanced axis torque offset
S17 Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 1
S18 Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 2
S19 Tool change completion position of the long boring bar end tool
d .
ve
er
S20 APC completion position
s
re
S21 Completion position of gantry robot operation
ts
gh
S22 Cutting feed clamping speed during tool tip point control
ri
ll
S23 Reference workpiece zero point
.A
N
S24 Long milling tool ATC complete position
O
TI
Central position on the upper surface of the tilt table (VARIAXIS)
60
S25 A
Central position of table upper surface (other machining centers)
R
40
PO
29
S26 Central position of tilt table rotation (VARIAXIS)

R
o.
O
N
S27 Ram spindle offset amount

C
al
K
ri
Center of the workpiece to be directly mounted on the table of the machines equipped with an additional table
ZA
S28
Se
S29 Position of the work hand rotating axis in relation to the machine zero point
IM
K
S30 Distance from the axis of rotation of the work hand to the reference position of the vice for the work hand
ZA
A
S31 Specification of the machine coordinates of the floating reference point

M
YA
S32 Rapid traverse speed for the mode of tool tip point control
3
01
Reference position X for the TEACH function, to be used for setting the LENGTH B item of an angular tool
S33
(For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools)
)2
(c
S34 Amount of offset for rotary head misalignment (only for Maza-Check)
ht
ig
S35 Rotational center of the second table

yr
op
S36 Position of the center of the second additional table on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display
C
S38 Time-out period for releasing the emergency stop status during powering on
Turning spindle number of the table control mechanism that features switching of servo C-axis and turning
S39
spindle
S40 Offset amount from the turning spindle 0position to the servo C-axis machine zero point
S45 0 Non-target axis setting for indexing unit (rotational axis)
S45 1 Setting of an axis not displayed on the counter
2-66
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
S45 2 Rapid feed overlapping function disabled axis
S49 Rapid feed overlapping function: G0 in-position width
S50 Rapid feed overlapping function: G1 in-position width
S51 Distance to the small-diameter table
S52 Rapid feed overlap function G0 in-position width (for tool tip point control and cutting point command)
S53 Rapid feed overlap function G1 in-position width (for tool tip point control and cutting point command)
d .
ve
er
S70 Fixed value
s
re
S71 0 Smart safety monitoring alarm (for servo axis)
ts
gh
ri
7. SPINDLE (SA)
ll
.A
Address
Outline
N
(bit)
O
TI
SA1 - SA8 Maximum spindle speed in each speed range (range 1 to 8)
60
A
R
40
SA9 - SA16 Constants for calculating each gear speed of the spindle (range 1 to 8)
PO
29
R
o.
SA17 - SA24 Maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle (range 1 to 8)

O
N
C
al
SA25 - SA28 Spindle speed during gear shifting (range 1 to 4)

K
ri
ZA
Se
SA29 Load meter reference output scaling factor (high-speed coil)

A
IM
SA30 Load meter reference output base rotational speed (high-speed coil)
K
ZA
SA31 Load meter reference output scaling factor (low-speed coil)

A
M
SA32 Load meter reference output base rotational speed (low-speed coil)
YA
3
SA33 - SA40 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for the synchronous tapping (range 1 to 8)
01
)2
SA41 Spindle orientating speed

(c
ht
SA42 Minimum spindle speed

ig
yr
SA43 Channel number for the spindle amplifier

op
C
SA44 Spindle amplifier rotary switch number
Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the
SA45 0
cutting load detection type
Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the
SA45 1
cutting load detection type 2
SA45 2 Homing direction for synchronous tapping
SA45 3 Homing direction for synchronous tapping
2-67
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
SA45 4 Defines the specified direction as the Z-phase detection direction
SA45 5 Spindle index gear correction
SA45 6 Selection of spindle removal
SA46 0 Direction of orientation
SA46 1 Direction of orientation
SA46 2 C-axis position control changeover type
.d
ve
er
SA46 3 Synchronous tapping position control changeover type
s
re
SA46 4 Z-phase detection direction
ts
gh
SA46 5 C-axis homing direction
ri
ll
.A
SA46 6 C-axis homing direction
N
O
SA46 7 Synchronous tapping command polarity
TI
60
SA47 0 —
A
R
40
PO
29
SA47 1 —
R
o.
O
N
SA47 2 —
al
K
ri
ZA
SA47 3 —
Se
A
IM
SA47 4 —
K
ZA
SA47 5 —
A
M
SA47 6 —
YA
SA47 7 Considering/Ignoring the spindle/motor gear ratio

3
01
)2
SA48 Encoder signal input destination

(c
SA49 Speed attainment detection width

ht
ig
yr
SA50 Spindle type

op
C
SA51 Number of gears on spindle
SA52 Turning spindle type
SA53 Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type — L coils
SA54 Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type — H coils
SA55 Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type — Spindle gear position 3
2-68
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
SA56 Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type — Spindle gear position 4
SA57 Spindle viscous friction coefficient “cms” for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type — Range 1
.
SA61 Spindle coulombic friction coefficient “fms” for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type — Range 1
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
SA65 Cutting force calculation filter for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type
N
O
SA66 Maximum permissible speed of the rotational axis for polygonal/hobbing machining
TI
60
SA67 - SA73
A
Rotational speed in the following spindle output diagrams: MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT/MACHINING
R
40
NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION
PO
29
Output in the following spindle output diagrams MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT/MACHINING

SA74 - SA80
R
NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION
o.
O
N
SA81 Spindle limit speed selection for spindle position control time constants — Limit speed 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
SA84 Spindle position control time constants — Time constant 1

A
M

YA

3
01
)2
SA87 Spindle speed operating time constant changeover revolutions 1

(c
ht
SA88 Spindle speed operating time constant changeover revolutions 2

ig
yr
SA89 Spindle speed operating time constant 1

op
C
SA92 Z-phase detection speed
SA93 Amount of synchronous tapping zero point shifting
SA94 Homing speed for synchronous tapping
2-69
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
SA95 Maximum revolutions in manual operation mode
SA96 Amount of orientation position shifting
SA97 Reduction ratio of the synchronous tapping time constant for high-speed synchronous tapping
SA98 Time constant for override variable thread cutting
SA99 Orientation time constant
SA100 - Rotational speed in the following spindle output diagrams at continuous rating: MACHINING
d .
SA106 NAVIGATION-RESULT/MACHINING NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION
ve
SA107 - Output in the following spindle output diagrams at continuous rating: MACHINING
er
SA113 NAVIGATION-RESULT/MACHINING NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION
s
re
SA114 Spindle speed supervisory mode 2 for safety supervision
ts
gh
SA115 Spindle speed supervisory mode 3 for safety supervision
ri
ll
.A
SA116 Spindle safety clamping mode 2 for safety supervision
N
O
SA117 Spindle safety clamping mode 3 for safety supervision
TI
60
SA118
A
Selecting the spindle door of the spindle whose speed is to be monitored
R
40
PO
29
SA119 Deceleration judgment coefficient on safety speed clamping of the spindle to be supervised for safety
R
o.
O
N
SA120 PLG pulse rate for spindle index gear tooth correction
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
SA121 Amount of branching [1] point correction for spindle index gear tooth
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
SA129 #1 notch filter frequency for cutting-load detection pecking cycle
SA130 #1 notch filter depth for cutting-load detection pecking cycle
SA131 #2 notch filter frequency for cutting-load detection pecking cycle
SA132 #2 notch filter depth for cutting-load detection pecking cycle
SA133 Breakage detection torque for cutting-load detection pecking cycle
2-70
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
SA134 Maximum spindle orientation speed
SA135 Rotational speed change width while override variable thread cutting is valid
SA136 Selection of signal input door on the safety monitor drive side (spindle)
SA138 Number of spindle gears
SA139 Number of motor gears
.
SA140 Turret indexing gear ratio at the motor side (only for MULTIPLEX)
d
ve
er
SA142 0 Initial C-axis position control changeover with deceleration to stop setting
s
re
SA143 0 Relationship between spindle rotation commands (M code) and direction of spindle rotation
ts
gh
SA143 1 Waiting for phase compensation completion at the start of high-speed synchronous tapping
ri
ll
.A
SA143 2 Simultaneous output of a gear shift M code and a turning spindle speed command
N
O
SA143 3 Spindle speed for the orient command given during spindle rotation
TI
60
SA143 4 Fixed value

A
R
40
PO
29
SA143 5 Fixed value

R
o.
O
N
SA143 6 Fixed value

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
SA144 0 Spindle winding coil selection function while override variable thread cutting is valid
A
IM
SA144 1 Spindle winding coil selection while override variable thread cutting is valid
K
ZA
SA144 3 Warning check for alarm 67 HI-SPEED SYNCTAP AXIS ALARM (for spindle C-axis)
A
M
SA144 4 Positive threading spindle rotational direction and encoder polarity

YA
SA144 5 Gear conversion during spindle rotation valid

3
01
)2
SA144 6 Spindle gear changeover valid

(c
ht
SA144 7 Turret indexing valid

ig
Spindle speed fluctuation function M code number for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation synchronous
yr
SA231
mode
op
Spindle speed fluctuation function M code number for disabling the spindle speed fluctuation synchronous
C
SA232
mode
SA233 Spindle speed fluctuation function M code number for enabling spindle speed fluctuation
SA234 Spindle speed fluctuation function M code number for disabling spindle speed fluctuation
SA242 Fixed value
SA243 0 INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function (IBA): Measured data rotation direction
2-71
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
SA243 1 Smart safety monitoring alarm (for spindle)
8. BARRIER (BA)
Address
Outline
(bit)
BA1 Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier) — No. 1 turning spindle
BA2 Chuck width (for chuck barrier) — No. 1 turning spindle
. d
ve
BA3 Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier) — No. 1 turning spindle
ser
re
BA4 EIA program workpiece outside diameter
ts
gh
BA5 Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier) — No. 2 turning spindle
ri
ll
BA6 Chuck width (for chuck barrier) — No. 2 turning spindle
.A
N
BA7 Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier) — No. 2 turning spindle
O
TI
60
BA8 Tail body outside diameter (for tail barrier) A

R
40
PO
BA9 Tail body length (for tail barrier)

29
R
o.
BA10 Tail spindle outside diameter (for tail barrier)

N
C
al
BA11 Length with tail spindle at back end (for tail barrier)
ri
ZA
Se
BA12 Tail head outside diameter (for tail barrier)

IM
K
BA13 Tail head length (for tail barrier)

ZA
A
BA14 Tail head taper angle (for tail barrier)

M
YA
BA15 Tail head biting diameter (for tail barrier)

3
01
BA16 Tail barrier, tail extruding length

)2
(c
BA17 Tail barrier, workpiece length

ht
ig
BA18 Tail barrier, tail reversing position Z

yr
op
BA19 Distance from the Z-axis machine zero point to the spindle edge — No. 1 turning spindle
C
BA20 Distance from the Z-axis machine zero point to the spindle edge — No. 2 turning spindle
BA21 Jaw number for EIA program barrier — No. 1 turning spindle
BA22 Jaw number for EIA program barrier — No. 2 turning spindle
BA23 Turret outside diameter (turret type tool post)
2-72
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
BA24 Turret width (turret type tool post)
BA25 Turret reference position X (turret type tool post)
BA26 Turret reference position Z (turret type tool post)
BA27 Tool holder mounting position — Type 1
BA28 Tool holder width in X-axis direction — Type 1
.
BA29 Tool holder width in Z-axis direction — Type 1
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60

A
R
40
PO
29

R
o.
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se

A
IM
BA39 EIA tool barrier, tool holder mounting position

K
ZA
BA40 EIA tool barrier, tool holder width X

A
M
BA41 EIA tool barrier, tool holder width Z

YA
BA42 Barrier type

3
01
)2
BA43 First tool number (in the 1st set of tools)

(c
ht
BA44 Number of tools (in the 1st set of tools)

ig
yr
BA45 First tool number (in the 2nd set of tools)

op
C
BA46 Number of tools (in the 2nd set of tools)
BA47 Turret type
BA48 Axis name of the head to be rotated
BA49 Axis number of the inclined axis
BA50 Fundamental axis number
2-73
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
BA51 Inclined-axis control, vector of virtual Y
BA52 Inclined-axis control, vector of real X
BA53 Inclined-axis control, vector of real Y
BA54 Selection of work spindle for hobbing
BA55 Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D1)
.
d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
BA59 Spindle forward rotation M-code for tapping cycle
ri
ll
.A
BA60 Spindle reverse rotation M-code for tapping cycle
N
O
BA61 Amount of runout of the B-axis center
TI
60
BA62 Amount of offset for the B-axis — spindle distance

A
R
40
PO
29
BA63 Holder angle of angle tool holder

R
o.
O
N
BA64 B-axis tool reference position X

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
BA65 B-axis tool reference position Z

A
IM
BA66 Deceleration area Z

K
ZA
BA67 Measuring area Z

A
M
BA68 Deceleration area X

YA
BA69 Measuring area X

3
01
)2
BA70 Distance between the reference points on both turrets

(c
ht
BA71 System number to be used when argument L is omitted from G112

ig
yr
BA72 Feed override for retracting the tap

op
C
BA73 Barrier valid/invalid 1 (chuck, sub-chuck, tailstock)
BA74 Barrier valid/invalid 2 (Lower turret, steady rest)
BA75 - BA78 Barrier setup turret reference position
BA79 - BA82 Barrier setup chuck reference position 1
BA83 - BA86 Barrier setup chuck reference position 2
2-74
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
BA87 - BA90 Barrier reference position for a powered tailstock
BA91 Distance from spindle edge to partition plate
BA92 Central position X when viewed from machine zero point
BA93 Upper/lower turret tool angle difference (HD1)
BA94 Upper/lower turret tool angle difference (HD2)
.
BA95 Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the X-axis
d
ve
er
BA96 Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the Z-axis
s
re
BA97 Tool nose measurement, X-coordinate of the sensor’s reference point
ts
gh
BA98 Tool nose measurement, Y-coordinate of the sensor’s reference point
ri
ll
.A
BA99 Tool nose measurement, Z-coordinate of the sensor’s reference point
N
O
BA100 Tool nose measurement, X-coordinate of the sensor’s reference point (for lower turret/HD2)
TI
60
BA101
A
Tool nose measurement, Y-coordinate of the sensor’s reference point (for lower turret/HD2)
R
40
PO
29
BA102 Tool nose measurement, Z-coordinate of the sensor’s reference point (for lower turret/HD2)
R
o.
O
N
BA103 Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the X-axis (for lower turret/HD2)
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
BA104 Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the Z-axis (for lower turret/HD2)
A
IM
BA105 Adjustment “FdT” for servo axis thrust hold

K
ZA
BA106 Dead zone

A
M
BA107 Filter
YA
BA108 Servo axis thrust hold droop

3
01
)2
BA109 Offset amount (X) during automatic tool setting value calculation
(c
ht
BA110 Offset amount (Z) during automatic tool setting value calculation
ig
yr
BA111 Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M881)
op
C
2-75
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
BA117 Outside diameter of the turret for Virtual Machining
BA118 Width of the turret for Virtual Machining
BA119 Selecting a head having a lower-turret TOOL EYE
BA120 Mounting position X for an assembly tool model
BA121 Mounting position Z for an assembly tool model
.
BA122 Turret reference position X (for VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display)
d
ve
er
BA123 Turret reference position Z (for VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display)
s
re
BA124 Fixed value (0)
ts
gh
BA125 0 EIA tailstock barrier, tailstock usage valid/invalid
ri
ll
.A
BA125 1 Tailstock present/absent
N
O
BA125 2 EIA tool barrier, tool holder present/absent
TI
60
BA125 3 Barrier tool nose position (EIA, automatic)

A
R
40
PO
29
BA125 4 Setting of BA11 is handled as tailstock extruding length, valid/invalid

R
o.
O
N
BA125 5 Output of spindle revolution M-code specified in same block as synchronous tapping, valid/invalid
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
BA125 6 Alarm stop when [BARRIER CANCEL] is selected at the start of the automatic operation, valid/invalid
A
IM
BA125 7 Alarm stop when jaw Nos. are not specified at the start of the automatic operation, valid/invalid
K
ZA
BA126 0 System to be made valid without system selection for queuing

A
M
BA126 1 Y-axis interference type

YA
BA126 2 Y-axis moving range display

3
01
)2
BA126 3 Tool command scheme

(c
ht
BA126 4 FLASH tool valid/invalid

ig
yr
BA126 5 Milling spindle orientation command (M219), output/no output

op
C
BA126 6 System without turret
BA126 7 Shape of the tailstock center for Virtual Machining, single stage/twin stage
M249 command for preparing for tool change before moving the tool to the tool change position using a
BA127 0
MAZATROL program, output/no output
BA127 1 For programs of Z-offset scheme: Fixed value (1) For other programs: Invalid
BA127 2 Simultaneous output of TTM6M200 and TTM6M202
2-76
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
BA127 3 NC tailstock (servo axis thrust control)
BA127 4 M90/M91 output for machines with turret
Type of the clamping and unclamping M-codes that the NC automatically output for machines equipped with a
BA127 5
spindle head of swiveling type
BA127 6 —
Whether or not to read the current settings (tailstock position) on the SET UP MANAG. display at the
BA127 7
beginning of the execution of each program
.
BA128 0 NC tailstock pushing direction
d
ve
er
BA128 1 Method of automatic determination of the virtual nose point for a tool measuring unit
s
re
BA128 2 Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the first set of tool data (BA43, BA44)
ts
gh
BA128 3 Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the second set of tool data (BA45, BA46)
ri
ll
.A
BA128 4 TOOL EYE measurement approach selection with turret-equipped machines
N
O
BA128 5 Hobbing on the machine without tool rotary axis or table tilt axis
TI
60
BA128 6 Turret lathe with an ATC unit

A
R
40
PO
29
BA128 7 Display of [TURRET UNCLAMP] for machines with an ATC-type turret

R
o.
O
N
BA129 0 Output of tool change preparation M code (M109/M249) when executing tool change
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
BA129 1 Fixed value

A
IM
BA129 2 Fixed G0 inclination control in the G68/G68.5 mode

K
ZA
BA129 3 Selection of whether or not to measure the milling tool length with the tool measuring unit
A
M
BA129 4 Display of [BARRIER CANCEL] with [BARRIER CANCEL TEACH] selected

YA
Handling of measurement speed of 1 in/min or higher during laser tool length/diameter measurement with
BA129 5
3
inch-specification machines
01
)2
BA129 7 Planetary tapping in the MAZATROL rear XY mode

(c
ht
BA130 1 Fixed value

ig
yr
BA131 0 Multi-magazine number display

op
C
BA131 1 Tool length C input, valid/invalid
BA131 5 Switching of the approach pattern in TOOL EYE measurement (MAZATROL program)
BA241 Hobbing II (position controlled hobbing) Hobbing axis allocation
2-77
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
9. MACHINE STRUCTURE (MS)

Address
Outline
(bit)
MS26 Spindle speed fluctuation function Fluctuation cycle Initial value
MS27 Spindle speed fluctuation function Fluctuation amplitude Initial value
MS125 0 Spindle speed fluctuation function Spindle speed fluctuation mode Initial value
. d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-78
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-2-3 Data I/O parameter
1. TAPE parameter (TAP)
Address
Outline
(bit)
TAP1 Type of terminator
TAP2 Terminator code 1
TAP3 Terminator code 2
.
TAP4 Output of CR during ISO code punching
d
ve
er
TAP5 DC code parity
s
re
TAP6 Feed section DC code output
ts
gh
TAP7 DSR output flow control selection
ri
ll
.A
TAP9 “[” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA
N
O
TAP10 “]” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA
TI
60
TAP11 “#” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

A
R
40
PO
29
TAP12 “” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

R
o.
O
N
TAP13 “=” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

al
K
ri
ZA
TAP14 “:” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Se
A
IM
TAP15 “(” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

K
ZA
TAP16 “)” code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

A
M
TAP25 Paper tape puncher parity-V check

YA
TAP26 0 Data transfer of a paper tape program which has been punched by M2
3
01
)2
TAP26 1 Types of data to be punched onto paper tape during all punching
(c
TAP26 2 Input/output of the program name during paper tape reading/punching

ht
ig
yr
TAP26 3 Number of digits of work No. output

op
C
TAP26 4 Input/output of material data during punching/reading
TAP26 5 Setup data to add when outputting an EIA/ISO program through tape I/O
TAP27 Bit parameter related to program end code (M) for paper tape reader
TAP29 Number of characters in feed section for paper tape puncher
TAP30 Number of characters in the space between O-number and program for paper tape puncher
2-79
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
TAP31 Number of characters in the space between programs for paper tape puncher
2. DNC parameter (DNC)
Address
Outline
(bit)
DNC1 Type of terminator
DNC2 Terminator code 1
d .
ve
DNC3 Terminator code 2
ser
DNC5 DC code parity
re
ts
DNC9 Number of NC transmission retries during DNC file transfer
gh
ri
DNC10 Number of NC reception retries during DNC file transfer
ll
.A
N
DNC11 Number of NC transmission/reception retries during DNC command message transfer
O
TI
DNC12 @ waiting time during DNC transmission
60
A
R
40
PO
DNC13 “”, TEXT waiting time during DNC transmission

29
R
o.
DNC14 EOT waiting time during DNC transmission

N
C
al
DNC15 NC stop time after reception of !

ri
ZA
Se
DNC16 NC reset time after digital-out

IM
K
DNC17 NC stop time from reception

ZA
A
DNC18 DNC command reply message waiting time

M
YA
DNC19 DNC machine number

3
01
DNC20 NC transmission stop time of DNC (from reception to transmission)

)2
(c
DNC21 NC transmission stop time of DNC (from transmission to transmission)

ht
Type of processing to be executed if the tool quantity data within the NC memory mismatches that which has
ig
DNC25 0
been transferred from the DNC memory
yr
op
DNC25 1 —
C
DNC25 2 Handling of tool data and tool files in the M PLUS format, valid/invalid
DNC25 3 —
DNC25 4 —
DNC25 5 —
DNC25 6 —
2-80
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
DNC25 7 —
DNC26 0 After program reception, a search is made/not made for the work number of that program.
DNC26 1 Details of an alarm occurring in DNC are displayed or not.
Loading of programs having the same work number as that of the registered program in NC becomes
DNC26 2
impossible or not.
DNC26 3 The function of the PROGRAM LOCK/ ENABLE switch is released or not.
.
DNC26 4 —
d
ve
er
DNC26 5 Three digit G-format and G10 format codes input/output for MAZAK data transfer protocol
s
re
DNC26 6 Binary to ASCII format input/output of MAZAK data transfer protocol
ts
gh
All programs having work numbers smaller than No. 9000 are erased/not erased at the start of program
DNC26 7
ri
reception.
ll
.A
DNC27 0 Interpretation of message for DNC macro variable transmission
N
O
DNC29 Number of retry times with detection of a physical error
TI
60
DNC30 Tool data/tool file message format

A
R
40
PO
29
DNC31 Waiting time for a response from the COM port driver
R
o.
O
N
C
al
3. Other (IOP/DPR/IDD)
ri
ZA
Se
Address
A
Outline
(bit)
IM
K
IOP2 0 Handling of TPC data when loading programs created with the MATRIX series
ZA
A
IOP2 1 Handling of TPC data when loading programs created with the MATRIX series
M
YA
IOP4 0 Mazak data library function

3
01
IOP4 1 Outputting of Version.txt at saving on the DATA I/O display

)2
(c
IOP4 2 Parameter load error prevention function

ht
Overwriting registration judgment criteria when entering tool data text with machines allowing registration of
ig
IOP4 3
multiple tools
yr
op
IOP5 1 Tool data count check during tool data loading

C
Selection of the sign for the start point Z of point machining (XC, XY mode) when loading a Z offset scheme
IOP5 2
program
IOP5 6 Overwriting associated with loading of the program of the same work number
IOP5 7 Overwriting associated with loading of the tool model of the same name
IOP6 1 Program name change upon program conversion
IOP6 2 Adding comments to the converted blocks upon EIA conversion
2-81
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Address
Outline
(bit)
IOP6 3 EIA-compatible conversion menu display
IOP6 4 Commenting out blocks containing variable numbers and operators upon EIA conversion
IOP6 5 Commenting out T-command blocks upon EIA conversion
IOP7 0 Serial port used for communication with the magazine-side display unit
IOP7 1 Serial port used for communication with the magazine-side display unit
.
IOP7 2 Fixed value
d
ve
er
IOP7 3 Fixed value
s
re
IOP7 4 (Magazine-side display unit) ID amplifier type
ts
gh
IOP7 5 (Magazine-side display unit) ID amplifier type
ri
ll
.A
IOP7 6 (Magazine-side display unit) Tool mounting/removing timing
N
O
IOP7 7 (Magazine-side display unit) Tool mounting/removing timing
TI
60
IOP8 0
A
(Magazine-side display unit IN/OUT) Tool count/time data clear setting
R
40
PO
29
IOP8 1 (Magazine-side display unit IN/OUT) Tool life count/time data clear setting
R
o.
O
N
IOP8 3 B-axis tilt table compatible program conversion menu

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
IOP9 Fixed value (0)

A
IM
IOP13 Mazak data library function: Connection port number

K
ZA
IOP14 MAZA-CARE function

A
M
DPR1 Baud rate

YA
DPR2 Stop bit

3
01
)2
DPR4 Data bit

(c
ht
DPR8 ISO code CR output and the output file size

ig
yr
DPR9 Method of handshaking

op
C
DPR10 DC code parity
DPR11 Feed section DC code output
DPR12 Waiting time
DPR13 Output format
DPR14 Selection of an output destination port
2-82
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Address
Outline
(bit)
DPR15 Number of characters or the number of lines in feed section
. d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-83
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3 Detailed Description
2-3-1 Structure of the parameter list

Each parameter list is written in the following format:
Classification [1] Display title [2]
Address Meaning Description
. d
ve
[4]
s er
re
[3] [9]
ts
gh
Program type [5]
ri
Conditions [6]
ll
.A
Unit [7]
N
Setting range [8]
O
TI
60
[1] Classification of parameters (USER, MACHINE or DATA I/O)

A
R
40
[2] Characters displayed at the upper part of the screen

PO
29
[3] Parameter address displayed on the screen

R
o.
O
N
 Bit input type parameters have the bit No. shown in the parentheses below address.
C
al
Example :
ri
ZA
Se
Setting value for parameter

A
P1 (bit 0) is indicated here

Address
IM
P1 P1
K
(bit 0)
ZA
Bit 0
Bit 1
A
M
Bit 2
YA
Bit 3
Bit 4
3
Bit 5
01
Bit 6
)2
Bit 7
(c
[4] Meaning of the parameter

ht
ig
[5] Applicable program

yr
op
M ················Effective only for MAZATROL programs

C
E ················Effective for EIA/ISO programs

M, E ············Effective for MAZATROL programs and EIA/ISO programs
2-84
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
[6] Conditions under which a changed parameter becomes valid
Example 1: “Immediate” designates that new parameter value becomes effective upon
parameter change.
Example 2: “At power on” designates that new parameter value will become effective after
procedure below.
1. Change parameter setting value.
(By procedure similar to changing of ordinary data)

2. Shut off power supply to the NC.

3. Press power on button on the operation panel.
d .
ve
Example 3: If “At I/O startup” is specified
er
The system operates at the parameter data entered before the start of I/O. If the
s
re
parameter data is modified during I/O operation, the new data will not become
ts
valid until the I/O operation has been completed.
gh
Example 4: If “After stop of movement” is specified
ri
When the movement of the machine is completed, the program will operate with
ll
.A
the new parameter value. Changing the parameter during the machine movement
N
will not make the new parameter value valid during the movement.
O
TI
Example 5: If “Next block” is specified
60
A
When the next block is loaded, the program will operate with the new parameter
R
40
value. Changing the parameter while the block is being loaded will not make the
PO
29
new parameter value valid in that block.

R
o.
O
N
Example 6: If “After resetting” is specified: The new parameter setting takes effect after
C
al
resetting.
K
ri
ZA
Se
[7] Units of data displayed

A
IM
[8] Allowable range of data (for an effective data range, refer to “Description” column.)
[9] Details or meaning of the parameter
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-85
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-2 User parameter POINT (D)
Classification USER Display title POINT
Height of the second R-point
Initial point
D1
Second R-point
d .
ve
MPL001
er
Height of the second R-point during point
s
machining The height of the R-point during point machining is basically D41,
re
however, it is changed to D1 under the following conditions.
D1
ts
Tool sequence Conditions
gh
 Bit 6 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D1 valid).
ri
Drill  There is a spot drill in the pre-machining tool
ll
sequence of the same unit.
.A
N

O
Reamer There is a chamfering cutter in the
TI
pre-machining tool sequence of the same
60
A unit.
Program type M
R
40
However, when a drill is included in the pre-machining tool sequence in

PO
29
Conditions Immediate
case of a drilling tool sequence, the height is changed to D42.
R
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

o.
(D42)
O
N
Setting range –999 to 999

C
al
The nominal diameter of a spot-machining tool that is automatically set

ri
ZA
during automatic tool development.

Se
Example :
A
IM
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP

Nominal diameter of spot-machining tool
1 CTR-DR 10. 
K
20.
ZA
D2 
D2
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit mm/0.1 in
)2
Setting range 0 to 99
(c
Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a spot-machining cycle. Set
ht
this time in spindle revolutions.

ig
When the spot-machining tool reaches

yr
Number of revolutions during dwell at hole the hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop
op
bottom in spot-machining cycle moving until the spindle makes D3

C
revolutions, and then return to the

D3
original position at the rapid feed rate.
Program type M
Unit Revolutions
(Stops at hole bottom.)
Setting range 0 to 9 MPL002
2-86
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Element used to set the maximum spot-chamfering hole diameter (d)

during automatic tool development
Spot-chamfering occurs if
D2 d  D2 – D4.
Maximum allowable spot-chamfering hole If d > D2 – D4, the chamfering
d
diameter element cutter is developed automatically.
D4
Chamfering
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in MPL003
s
re
ts
The feed rate of a tool as it is being passed through the prehole during an
gh
inversed spot-facing cycle
ri
Note : 0.5 mm/rev if this parameter setting is 0.
ll
Prehole through speed during inversed
.A
spot-facing
N
D5
O
TI
At the feedrate of D5
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
MPL004
R
o.
Unit 100 mm/min / 10 in/min

O
N
al
Element used to automatically set drill-machining cycles during automatic

ri
ZA
tool development
Se
A
IM
Machining cycle Conditions

Drill-machining cycle setting element
K
DEPTH
Drilling cycle  D6
ZA
D6 DIA
D7
A
High-speed deep-hole DEPTH

M
D6 <  D7
drilling cycle DIA
YA
Program type M
DEPTH
3
Deep-hole drilling cycle D7 <

01
DIA
Unit —
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-87
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Element used to automatically set the number of drills which are

automatically developed according to the hole diameter of the drill unit
Maximum diameter of holes machinable on Number of drills

Conditions
one drill developed
1 DIA  D8
D8
2 D8 < DIA  D9
3 D9 < DIA  D10
Program type M Alarm D10 < DIA
d .
ve
er
Unit mm/0.1 in
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Maximum diameter of holes machinable on
.A
two drills
N
D9
O
TI
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO
29
Unit mm/0.1 in
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Maximum diameter of holes machinable on

three drills
K
D10
ZA
A
M
Program type M
YA
3
Unit mm/0.1 in
01
)2
(c
Element used to automatically set the hole-drilling, endmilling, and boring

depths during automatic tool development of inversed spot-facing,
ht
tapping, back-boring, through-hole drilling, through-hole counter-boring,

ig
and spot-faced tapping units

yr
op
Through-hole/tap-prehole machining
C
DEPTH DEPTH
overshoot
D11
D11 D11
MPL005
Example :
Program type M 1 CTR-DR 10. 10. 21.
Conditions Immediate 
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in (DEPTH + D11)
Setting range 0 to 99 Note : See also parameter D30 for tapping units.
2-88
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Element used to automatically set the hole-drilling depth during automatic

tool development of stop-hole counter-boring and stop-hole boring units
DEPTH
Stop-hole machining hole-bottom clearance
MPL006
D12 D12
Example :
d .
1 DRILL 10. 10.
ve
19.
Program type M 
er
(DEPTH – tool tip compensation – D12)
s
re
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in Note :
ts
Setting range 0 to 99 This parameter is invalid when the residual hole diameter is not 0.
gh
Hole diameter is automatically set during automatic tool development
ri
when spot-chamfering is not to be performed.
ll
.A
D13
N
Spot-machining hole diameter
O
(fixed value)
TI
60
D13 A MPL007
R
40
PO
29
Example :
R
Program type M SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP

o.
O
N
Conditions Immediate 1 CTR-DR 20. 

C
10.
al
Unit mm/0.1 in D13

K
ri
ZA
Se
Element used to automatically set the depth-of-cut per drilling operation

IM
during automatic tool development

HOLE- × D14 : when the material of the stock workpiece is AL
K
(aluminum) in article MAT. 6

ZA
Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling

(ALMINUM) HOLE- × D15 : when the material of the stock workpiece is other than
A
AL in article MAT. 6
M
D14
YA
3
01
Program type M
)2
(c
Unit 0.1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling

(except AL)
D15
Program type M
Unit 0.1
2-89
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in the chamfering cycle of
chamfering cutter or spot-machining tool. Set this time in spindle
revolutions.
Number of revolutions during dwell at hole When the chamfering cutter reaches the
bottom for chamfering cutter or hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop
spot-machining tool in chamfering cycle moving until the spindle makes D16
revolutions, and then return to the original
D16
position at the rapid feed rate.
Note :
This parameter is invalid for
.
Program type M
d
chamfering with true-circle processing.
ve
er
Unit Revolutions
s
(Stops at hole bottom.)
re
ts
The clearance in order to prevent tool interference with a wall of the
gh
workpiece or with the hole bottom during a chamfering cycle
ri
Use in the case of D92 bit 4 = 0:
ll
The safety clearance (D17) is radially or axially used only when an
.A
interference could actually occur.
N
Note :
O
A tip of the tool is allowed to enter the safety clearance area as long as
TI
60
there remains ever so short a clearance.

A
R
D17
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
Interferes.
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
Interference clearance of chamfering cutter D17

ZA
Interferes. MPL009
D17
A
M
Use in the case of D92 bit 4 = 1:

YA
The safety clearance (D17) is radially or axially used for restrictively

shifting the position of that workpiece section which is subjected to check
3
for interference.
01
Note :
)2
No tip of the tool is allowed to enter the safety clearance area.

(c
D17 D17
ht
ig
yr
op
C
Judged as an
interference
D17
Program type M D17
MPL009’
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
2-90
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The feed rate at which the tool is returned from the hole bottom during
reaming or boring.
D18
Return feed rate for reaming or boring
(cycle 3)
D18 MPL010
Note :
1. Valid only when the setting of DEPTH for the reamer (tool
.
sequence) is G01.
d
Program type M
ve
2. Valid only when the setting of PRE-DIA for the boring tool (tool
er
sequence) is CYCLE 3.
s
Unit 100 mm/min / 10 in/min 3. If this parameter is 0, the tool is returned at the same feed rate as
re
Setting range 0 to 9 that of cutting.
ts
Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in an end milling cycle. Set this
gh
time in spindle revolutions.
ri
ll
When the end mill reaches the hole
.A
Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop
bottom for end milling moving until the spindle makes D19
N
revolutions, and then return to the
O
D19 original position at the rapid feed rate.
TI
60
A
R
40
Note :
PO
Program type M
29
This parameter is invalid for

R
Conditions Immediate true-circle processing.

o.
O
N
Unit Revolutions (Stops at hole bottom.) MPL011

C
al

K
ri
ZA
Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut per end milling
Se
operation
A
IM
Depth-of-cut = nominal diameter × D20

Depth-of-cut is automatically set according to the value of this parameter
K
Radial depth-of-cut setting element for end

when nominal diameter of the end mill is input.
ZA
milling
Example :
D20
A
M
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH

DEPTH
YA
1 END MILL 20. 40. 10. 30.  0. 12.
Program type M (NOM- × D20)

3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
The reference value for calculation of a bottom-finishing allowance which

ig
corresponds to the roughness level of the end milling (tool sequence). The
yr
finishing allowance in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the value of

op
this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are set using
C
Reference bottom-finishing allowance for the expressions listed in the table below.
end milling
Roughness Bottom-finishing allowance
D21 0 to 3 0.0
4 D21
5 D21 × 0.7
Program type M 6 D21 × 0.7 × 0.7
7 D21 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
8 D21 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in 9 D21 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
2-91
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Dwell time at the hole bottom or at the R-point. This value is valid when 1
is set for bit 0, 1 or 2 of parameter D91.
Tapping-cycle dwell time
D22
Program type M Note :
d .
This parameter is valid only when the setting for roughness (RGH) of
ve
tapping (tool sequence) is FIX.
er
Unit 0.01 s
s
re
ts
The excess amount of prehole diameter over nominal diameter that is
gh
used to specify whether the Z-axis is to be moved at a rapid feed rate or at
a cutting feed rate during true-circle processing with the end mill
ri
ll
.A
Prehole clearance for end milling
D23 D23
N
D23
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions Immediate Cutting feed Rapid feed MPL012

R
o.
Unit mm/0.1 in
O
N
al
Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a boring cycle. Set this time in
ri
ZA
spindle revolutions.
Se
When the boring bar reaches the hole

IM
bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop moving

Number of revolutions during dwell at hole until the spindle makes D24 revolutions,
K
bottom for boring and then the spindle orientation will be

ZA
D24 performed.
A
Note :
M
This parameter is invalid if the roughness

YA
(RGH) of the boring (tool sequence) is 0.

Program type M
3
01
Unit Revolutions
)2
(Stops at hole bottom.) MPL013

(c
ht
The amount of relief provided for the tip of a boring bar to be kept clear of
the hole wall after spindle orientation
ig
yr
D25
op
C
Boring-bar tip relief
D25
During boring During returning MPL014

Note :
Program type M
1. Valid only when the setting for the prehole diameter of the boring
Conditions Immediate (tool sequence) is CYCLE 1.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in 2. For the relief direction of the tool tip, see the description of bit 3 and
Setting range 0 to 99 bit 4 of I14.
2-92
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The distance which the boring or back-boring tool is returned at the same
feed rate and milling spindle speed as for the preceding operation after
the tool has reached the hole bottom
Returning distance from hole bottom for

boring or back-boring
D26
D26
MPL015
[1] Has reached the [2] Returned at the [3] Returned at a
Program type M
d .
hole bottom. same feedrate. rapid feedrate.
ve
Conditions Immediate Note :
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in Not valid if the setting for the roughness (RGH) of the boring (tool
s
re
Setting range 0 to 99 sequence) is 1.
ts
The distance which the boring bar is fed in at 70% of the original feed rate
gh
and milling spindle speed to finish the hole bottom
ri
ll
.A
Bottom-finishing amount of boring
N
D28
O
D28
MPL016
TI
60
A
The feed rate is reduced to 70% of the original value before the hole
R
40
Program type M bottom is reached.

PO
29
Note :
R
Not valid if the setting for the roughness (RGH) of the boring (tool
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

O
sequence) is 1.
N
al
The time required for a chip removal tool to complete a chip removal
ri
ZA
Se
operation after the tool has been positioned to the hole

A
IM
Chip removal time

K
ZA
D29
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit
)2
s
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-93
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
To set number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for metric screws

and unified screws. In tapping, internal thread is tapped extra for the depth
of (D30 × pitch) in the direction of Z.
This is also used as an element for automatically determining hole-drilling
depth (HOLE-DEP) in the automatic tool development of the tapping unit.
Number of incomplete threads in tapping

cycle DEPTH
D30 D30 × Pitch
d .
D11 MPL017
ve
Example :
s er
re
Program type M
1 DRILL 10. 10. 19.
ts
{DEPTH + D11 + (D30 × pitch)} 
gh
Unit Thread
[Related parameter]
ri
Setting range 0 to 9 D43: Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screws
ll
Excess amount of tool return due to elongation of the tapper during
.A
tapping cycle
N
Set this value in spindle revolutions.
O
TI
60
Tapper elongation amount for tapping A

R
40
D31 D31 × Pitch

PO
R-point
29
R
o.
O
N
Program type M
al
ri
ZA
Se
Unit Revolutions MPL018

A
IM
The number of inertial turns in tapping cycle that the spindle has rotated
K
clockwise during the time from output of a spindle CCW rotation command
ZA
to the start of spindle CCW rotation

Number of spindle revolutions until spindle
A
M
CCW rotation begins in tapping cycle

YA
D32
3
01
Program type M
)2
(c
Unit Revolutions
ht
ig
yr
The amount of relief provided for a back-boring tool tip to be kept clear of
op
the prehole walls as it is being passed through the prehole in the oriented
state of the spindle
C
D33
Back-boring tool tip relief
D33
[1] During back-boring [2] During passage MPL019

Program type M
Note :
For the relief direction of the tool tip, see the description of bit 3 and bit 4
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in of I14.
2-94
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during

automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining
process is drilling.)
DIA
Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for
reamer (drilling)
D35 DIA – D35
Program type M MPL020
d.
ve
Example :
er
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 in SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE-
s
re
Setting range 0 to 999 1 DRILL 10. 10.  (DIA – D35)
ts
gh
process is boring.)
ri
DIA
ll
.A
reamer (boring)
N
D36
O
DIA – D36
TI
60
A
R
40
MPL020
PO
Program type M
29
Conditions Immediate Example :

R
o.

N
Setting range 0 to 999 1 DRILL 10. 10.  (DIA – D36)

al
K
ri

ZA
Se

A
process is end milling.)

IM
DIA
K
reamer (end milling)

ZA
D37 DIA – D37

A
M
YA

3
01
Conditions Immediate Example :

)2

(c
1 DRILL 10. 10.  (DIA – D37)

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-95
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
1. In automatic tool development of the reamer unit, if the pre-machining

process is boring:
DIA
Reamer-prehole diameter setting element

for boring or end milling
Boring-hole diameter
D38 = DIA – D38
MPL021
Program type M
d .
ve
Example :
er
s
re
Setting range 0 to 999 1 BOR BAR 10. 10.  (DIA – D38)
ts
2. In automatic tool development of the reamer unit, if the pre-machining
gh
process is end milling:
ri
DIA
ll
.A
First end milling hole diameter
Reamer-prehole diameter setting element = DIA – D39
N
for end milling
O
Second end milling hole diameter
D39
TI
= DIA – D38
60
A MPL022
R
40
PO
29
Example :
R
Program type M
o.
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE-

N
1 END MILL 15. 20.  (DIA – D39)
al
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 in

2 END MILL 10.  (DIA – D38)
ri
21.
ZA

Se
Z-axis feed dwell time at the spot-faced hole bottom in an inversed spot
IM
facing cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions.

K
When the inversed spot-facing tool

ZA
Number of revolutions during dwell at reaches the hole bottom, firstly the
spot-faced hole bottom for inversed Z-axis will stop moving until the
A
spot-facing spindle makes D40 revolutions, and

M
D40 then the rotational direction of the

YA
spindle will reverse.

(Feeding stops at
3
01
hole bottom.) MPL023

Program type M
)2
(c
Unit Revolutions
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-96
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
R-point height of each tool in the point-machining unit

Example :
Initial point
R-point height during point-machining
D41 R-point
D41
Machining surface
MPL024
d .
Program type M
ve
Note :
er
For the inversed spot-facing unit or the back-boring unit, this parameter
Unit mm/0.1 in
s
can also be used for setting the clearance amount at the hole bottom.
re
Setting range 0 to 99 (D1, D42)
ts
Height of the third R-point
gh
ri
ll
Initial point
.A
N
D42
O
TI
Third R-point
60
A
R
40
MPL001
PO
29
Height of the third R-point during point

R
o.
The height of the R-point during point machining is basically D41,

O
machining
N
however it is changed to D42 under the following conditions.

C
D42
al
K
ri
ZA
Tool sequence Conditions

Se

IM
Drill  There is a drill in the pre-machining tool

sequence of the same unit.
K
ZA

Chamfering
 CYCLE 2 is selected for the machining
A
cutter
M
cycle.
YA

Program type M
Spot  CYCLE 2 in the chamfering cycle is selected
3
Conditions Immediate for the machining cycle.

01
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

)2

(c
ht
To set number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screws

(PT, PF, PS). In tapping, internal thread is tapped extra for the depth of
ig
(D43 × pitch) in the direction of Z.

yr
This is also used as an element for automatically determining hole-drilling

op
depth (HOLE-DEP) in the automatic tool development of the tapping unit.

C
Number of incomplete threads in tapping

cycle for piped screw
DEPTH
D43
D43 × Pitch
D11 MPL017
Program type M Example :
Conditions Immediate SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP
Unit Thread 1 DRILL 10. 10. 19.
Setting range 0 to 9 {DEPTH + D11 + (D43 × pitch)} 
2-97
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select an automatic calculation method for the amount of chamfer with the
tapping unit.
0: Following calculation expression is used:
Selecting an automatic calculation method (MAJOR- + 2 × PITCH) – PRE-DIA
for the amount of chamfer with the tapping Amount of chamfer = 2
unit
1: Following calculation expression is used (same as M32):
D44
MAJOR- – PRE-DIA
Amount of chamfer = 2
Note :
Program type M
.
Select 1 if a loss of the threaded section is likely due to overchamfering
d
ve
Conditions Immediate as compared with a small TAP-DEP value.
er
Unit — Example : Sheet metal tapping
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
q1 1st time
ri
ll
.A
N
i-th time
O
Drilling
TI
qi
depth
60
q1
A
R
40
PO
29
q2
R
Gradual decrements in drilling depth qn

o.
O
N
D45
al
qi
K
ri
ZA
b
Se
qn
A
IM
K
ZA
1 2 i n Number of
q1: 1st drilling depth times
A
qi : i-th drilling depth

M
qn: Residual hole depth

YA
b : Minimum drilling depth D46

Program type M qi = q1 – D45 × (i – 1) (If qi  b)
3
qi = b (If qi < b)
01
)2
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 in

(D46)
(c

ht
Set the minimum gradual drilling depth.

ig
However, if the residual hole depth is smaller than D46, actual drilling
yr
depth will be the same as the residual hole depth.

op
C
Minimum gradual drilling depth
D46
Program type M
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 in
(D45)
2-98
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Element used to automatically set the hole depth (HOLE-DEP) of drilling,

end milling and boring during automatic tool development of the reamer
unit
Reamer-prehole machining overshoot DEPTH DEPTH
D47 D47 D47
For drilling For end milling or boring MPL025

Program type M
.
Example :
d
ve
Conditions Immediate SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP
er
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 in 1 DRILL 10. 10. 21.  (DEPTH + D47)
s
re
ts
Feed override for the section to be chamfered in the planetary tapping
gh
cycle
Chamfering feed =
ri
Pre-hole machining feed in tapping tool sequence × D48/100
ll
Feed override for the section to be
.A
chamfered in the planetary tapping cycle
N
D48
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Chamfering section
R
o.
Unit %
O
N

al
The amount of return at hole bottom during the planetary tapping cycle
ri
ZA
Specify data by the number of threads.

Se
Amount of return = Tapping pitch × D49/10

IM
Amount of return at hole bottom during the

K
planetary tapping cycle

ZA
D49
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
Conditions Immediate Amount of return

01
Unit 0.1 thread

)2

(c
ht
The feed rate for pre-hole machining will be auto-set to D50 when the
planetary tapping cycle is selected.
ig
yr
op
Auto-set feed rate for pre-hole machining SNo. TOOL NOM- No.HOLE- HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
in the planetary tapping cycle
C
1 TAP M10. 10. 23.7 PLANET 0.15 FIX P1.5 50 1.5


D50 D50
Program type M
0.01 mm/rev
Unit
0.001 in/rev
2-99
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The feed rate will be auto-set to D51 when the planetary tapping cycle is
selected.
SNo. TOOL NOM- No.HOLE- HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M
Auto-set feed rate for planetary tapping 1 TAP M10. 10. 23.7 PLANET 0.15 FIX P1.5 50 0.04
cycle 
D51
D51
Program type M
.
d
ve
0.01 mm/rev
Unit
er
0.001 in/rev
s
re
ts
Set the reduction ratio for the G00-based relief rate during the
gh
very-deep-hole drilling in a drilling or turning-drilling unit.
ri
Cutting feed
ll
Reduction ratio for the G00-based relief rate
.A
during a very-deep-hole drilling cycle Rapid feed (G00)
N
D52
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
O
N

al
Set the number of times of pecking to be executed before returning the

ri
ZA
tool to a position near the starting point of the very-deep-hole drilling cycle
Se
of a drilling or turning-drilling unit.

IM
Example : If D53 = 3:
Cutting feed
K
Rapid feed
ZA
A
Starting
M
point
YA
Number of times of pecking up to the return After pecking has been

3
repeated three times, the

01
of the tool to a position near the starting

point of the very-deep-hole drilling cycle of tool returns to a position
)2
near the starting point.

a drilling or turning-drilling unit
D53
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
Ending point
Program type M
Unit Times
2-100
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
D54
F’= F × 100 F : Specified feed rate
F' : Feed rate at cutting start
End point Programmed

start point
 Drill D
d .
ve
Deceleration rate at cutting start for
er
very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental
s
re
D54

ts
gh
Feed rate at F' over distance  from the NM211-00268
programmed start point
ri
ll
D
.A
= (0° <  < 180°)
2 × tan/2
N
=0 (  180°)
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
R
o.
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
ZA
D55 D55 D55

Se
A
IM
G1
Drilling return distance for very-deep-hole
K
drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole G0

ZA
machining cycle
D55
A
P2 P1
M
YA
D4 D3 D2 D1
Program type M
3
P1: Start point

01
Conditions Immediate NM211-00252

P2: End point
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in Dn (n = 1 to 4) = Cut depth

(c

ht
Set the number of revolutions of the milling spindle during dwell time at
ig
the chip ejection position and the hole bottom for the very-deep-hole
yr
drilling cycle or the decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle.

op
Number of revolutions during dwell at chip

ejection position and hole bottom for
C
very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental

D56
Program type M
Unit Revoluitons
2-101
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the return speed for the very-deep-hole drilling cycle or the
decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle.
Return speed for very-deep-hole drilling

cycle/decremental very-deep-hole
machining cycle
D57
Program type M
d .
ve
0.001 mm/rev
Unit
er
0.0001 in/rev
s
re
ts
Set the feed rate reduction distance from the reference point at cutting
gh
start of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (blind hole, through hole) during the
point machining. Specify the ratio with respect to the drill diameter.
ri
If the nominal diameter of the drill is D, the feed rate reduction distance L
ll
.A
at cutting start is calculated using the following calculation expression:
L = D × D58/100
N
O
The feed rate is reduced by the ratio specified in D54 (feed rate reduction
TI
ratio at cutting start) by the distance L from the reference point (R).
60
Feed rate reduction distance ratio at cutting A

start of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (blind
R
40
hole, through hole)

PO
29
D58
R
o.
R
O
N
Clearance
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L = D × Feed rate reduction

A
distance ratio
IM
Program type M
K
ZA
Conditions After movement stop

A
Unit %
M

YA
Set the surface speed reduction ratio at cutting end of a very-deep-hole

drilling cycle (through hole) during the point machining.
3
01
If the surface speed during drilling is S, the surface speed S’ at cutting end
)2
is calculated using the following calculation expression:

(c
S’ = S × D59/100
ht
The surface speed is reduced to S’ by “speed reduction distance

ig
Surface speed reduction ratio at cutting end immediately before the hole bottom” (hb specified in the program).
yr
of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (through

op
hole)
D59
C
Distance to the
hole bottom
hb
Program type M
Unit %
2-102
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the ratio between automatic setting value for the feed rate in the axial
cutting and that in the radial cutting during chamfering in the point
machining.
Automatic setting ratio of axial cutting feed

rate during chamfering
D60
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
Set the nominal diameter of a chamfering cutter that is automatically set
gh
during automatic tool development for a point machining unit of
MAZATROL programs.
ri
Nominal diameter of chamfering cutter, set
ll
.A
during automatic tool development for a
point machining unit
N
D61
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

O
N

al
Set the maximum number of times automatic pecking can be performed

ri
ZA
by MAZATROL programs.
Se
* The setting “0” is regarded as a setting of 9999 times.

IM
Maximum number of times automatic

pecking is to be performed by MAZATROL
K
programs
ZA
D62
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2

(c
ht
Set the amount of overlap for smooth chamfering (point machining).

ig
Note :
yr
If a value greater than one fourth of circumferential length is set, the

op
amount of overlap is clamped to one fourth of circumferential length.

Smooth chamfering (point machining):
C
overlap amount Cutting end point Hole profile shape
D63
Overlap path D63 Chamfering
path
Program type M Y
Cutting start point Z
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
2-103
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the tolerance between the interpolated line segment and the ideal
curve for smooth chamfering (point machining).
Smooth chamfering (point machining): Interpolated line segment

tolerance between the interpolated line End
segment and the ideal curve D64 or less point
D64
Ideal curve
Start point
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Sets the reduction ratio for the G00 feed rate used for axis travel from the
gh
chip ejection position to the return position during a deep-hole
drilling/very-deep-hole drilling cycle.
ri
When either 0 or 100 is set, the feed rate is not reduced.
ll
.A
N
Start
O
point
Retraction feed rate = G00 feed rate  D52 / 100
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Reduction ratio for the G00 feed rate from

29
the chip ejection position to the return

R
position during a deep-hole drilling/

o.
very-deep-hole drilling cycle

N
D66
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
Feed rate used for axis travel from the

ZA
chip ejection position to the return position

= G00 feed rate  D66 / 100
A
M
YA
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Cutting feed
3
01
Unit % Rapid feed (G00)

)2

(c
Specify DEP-Z range for the end mill and the face mill from the learning
ht
data of cutting conditions.

ig
When learning data on the condition that DEP-Z is in the following range
yr
has been stored in the memory, learning is not effectuated again.

op
Learning of cutting conditions

(DEP-Z range) For a DEP-Z range of the end mill, set a value of “DEPTH/NOM-” (at a
C
D73
unit of 0.1%).
to 0 to D73 .................. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 1
D77 D73 to D74 .............. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 2
D74 to D75 .............. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 3
Program type M For a DEP-Z range of the face mill, set a value of “DEPTH” (at a unit of
Conditions Immediate 0.1 mm or 0.01 in).
Unit 0.1% (0.1 mm/0.01 in) 0 to D76 .................. DEP-Z range (for face mill) 1
D76 to D77 .............. DEP-Z range (for face mill) 2
2-104
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify WID-R range for the boring bar, back boring bar and end mill from
the learning data of cutting conditions.
When learning data on the condition that WID-R is in the following range
has been stored in the memory, learning is not effectuated again.
Learning of cutting conditions For a WID-R range of the boring bar and back boring bar, set a value of
D78 (WID-R range)
“DEPTH” (at a unit of 0.1 mm/0.01 in).
to 0 to D78 .................. WID-R range (for boring bar and back boring bar) 1
D82 D78 to D79 .............. WID-R range (for boring bar and back boring bar) 2
For a WID-R range of the end mill, set a value of “DEPTH/NOM-” (at a
d .
unit of 0.1%).
Program type M
ve
0 to D80 .................. WID-R range (for end mill) 1
er
D80 to D81 .............. WID-R range (for end mill) 2
s
Unit 0.1% (0.1 mm/0.01 in) D81 to D82 .............. WID-R range (for end mill) 3
re
ts
gh
76543210 (1: Execution, 0: No execution)
ri
M04 is output after the tool has dwelled at the
ll
.A
hole bottom during a tapping cycle.
The tool dwells after M04 has been output at the
N
hole bottom during a tapping cycle.
O
TI
The tool dwells after it has been returned to the
60
A R-point during a tapping cycle.

R
40
If a drill is used in the pre-machining of the

PO
29
centering drill cycle, the R-point height is set to

D1.
R
o.
The finishing tool path is shortened during a

N
— true-circle processing cycle (end milling).

al
The tool path is shortened during a true-circle

ri
ZA
D91 processing cycle (chamfering).

Se
If a pre-machining tool sequence is included in

IM
the same unit, the R-point height of the drill is set

to D1 or D42.
K
1. The R-point height of the chamfering cutter

ZA
during the cycle 2 is set to D42.

A
2. The R-point height of the spot-machining tool

M
during the chamfering cycle (cycle 2) is set to

YA
D42.
3. R-point height selection for smooth
3
01
chamfering (point machining)

)2
Program type M 0 : The R-point height is set to TC39.

(c
Conditions Immediate 1 : The R-point height is set to D42.

ht
Unit —
ig
Setting range Binary, eight digits

yr
1: Used
op
0: Not used
C
During a true-circle processing (end milling)

cycle, E17 is used/not used for axial feed
D92
(bit 0)
Program type M
Unit —
2-105
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Setting range 0, 1
1: Set
0: Not set
The R1-point height of the back spot facing

is set/not set to D1
D92
(bit 1)
. d
ve
Program type M
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
1: Set
ri
0: Not set
ll
.A
If a chamfering cutter is included in the
N
unit, the R-point height of the reamer is
O
set/not set to D1
TI
D92
60
(bit 2)
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M
R
o.
N
Unit —
al
K
ri
Setting range 0, 1
ZA
Se
1: Set
A
IM
0: Not set
If a chamfering cutter is included in the

K

ZA
unit, the R-point height of the tap is set/not

A
set to D1
M
D92
YA
(bit 3)
3
01
Program type M
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
1: Subjected
yr
0: Not subjected
op
C
The position cleared radially or axially by

D17 from the workpiece section concerned
is subjected/not subjected to check for
interference
D92
(bit 4)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-106
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
1: Valid
0: Invalid
Note :
Dwell time designation for synchronous Timing of dwell execution of bit 5 is determined by settings in bit 0 to 2 of
tapping in the MAZATROL program parameter D91.
D92
(bit 5)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
1: Ejected
gh
0: Not ejected
ri
ll
During planetary tapping, chips are
.A
ejected/not ejected automatically prior to
the threading process
N
D92
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
1: Generate
ri
ZA
Se
0: Do not generate
A
IM
Whether or not to generate alarm 650

CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE if idle cutting
K
takes place during chamfering in

ZA
D92 point-machining unit

A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Unidirectional positioning for point-machining

ig

yr
op
CTR-DR (Spot-machining tool)

C
— DRILL (Drill)
REAMER (Reamer)
D93
TAP (Tap)
BCK FACE (Inversed spot-facing tool)
BOR BAR (Boring tool)
Program type M
B-B BAR (Back-boring tool)
CHAMFER (Chamfering cutter)
Unit —
2-107
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Unidirectional positioning for point-machining

END MILL (End mill)
— Planetary tapping
Tornado cycle
D94
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Selection of the auto-setting method to be used for the MAZATROL
gh
program data items of the tapping unit (TAPPING and CBOR-TAP) and
the diameter item of pipe taps on the TOOL DATA display.
ri
76543210
ll
.A
For pipe-tapping items
N
0: Conventional method
O
1: The text file concerned is referred to for the
TI
auto-setting of pipe-tapping data items in a
60
A MAZATROL program as well as on the

R
40
Auto-setting method for tapping TOOL DATA display.

PO
29
D95 For unified thread items

R
o.
O
N

al
auto-setting of the pre-hole diameter

K
ri
(PRE-DIA) within a tapping unit (for unified

ZA
Se
thread).
A
IM
For metric thread items

K

ZA
Program type M
auto-setting of the pre-hole diameter
A
(PRE-DIA) within a tapping unit (for metric

M
Unit — thread).
YA

3
Surface speed calculation for spot drill used

01
0: Based on machining hole diameter

)2
1: Based on nominal diameter of the tool

(c
ht
Surface speed calculation for spot drill used

ig
D96
yr
(bit 0)
op
C
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-108
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Element that determines the counterboring pattern (whether to execute

diameter enlarging)
0: Determines the counterboring pattern from the nominal diameter in tool
data and the hole diameter in the program.
Counterboring pattern 1: Determines the counterboring pattern from the tool diameter in the tool
data and the hole diameter in the program.
D96
(bit 1)
Program type M
d .
ve
Conditions After stop of movement
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
The amount of chamfer in the spot drill tool sequence
gh
0: Cannot be specified
ri
1: Can be specified
ll
Setting of the amount of chamfer in the spot
.A
drill tool sequence
N
D96
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit
O
—
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
RGH BCB (inversed faced hole machining), BK-CBORE (back boring),

ZA
Se
and CBOR-TAP (counterbore tapping) are displayed in the menu in the

Menu display setting of RGH BCB (inversed
A
point-machining unit.
faced hole machining), BK-CBORE (back
IM
boring) and CBOR-TAP (counterbore BACKSPOT FACER (inversed spot-facing tool) and BACK BORING BAR
tapping), as well as BACKSPOT FACER (back boring) are displayed in the tool menu for tool sequence data in the
K
point-machining unit.
ZA
(inversed spot-facing tool) and BACK

D96 BORING BAR (back boring) in the tool 0 : Invalid
A
(bit 3) sequence data

1 : Valid
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Conditions At power on
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Conditions to determine the CIRC MIL operation for the specification

ig
without Y-axis
yr
0: Machining in Cycle 1 HOLE- = Tool diameter

op
Conditions to determine the CIRC MIL 1: Machining in Cycle 1 HOLE- ≥ Tool diameter
C
operation for the specification without

Y-axis
D96 * For RGH CBORE and CBOR TAP, this parameter is valid when D96
(bit 4) bit 1 = 1 and invalid when D96 bit 1 = 0.
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-109
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Setting of the start point Y of the cylindrical surface in the C-axis point
machining unit
0 : Impossible
Setting of the start point Y of the cylindrical 1 : Possible

surface in the C-axis point machining unit
D96
(bit 5)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Switching of the restrictions according to the cutting edge angle of a
gh
chamfering tool used for Smooth chamfering (C-POINT MACH-ING)
0: Enables machining only when the cutting edge angle is 45.
ri
Smooth chamfering (C-POINT MACH-ING): (Alarm if the cutting angle edge is not 45.)
ll
.A
Switching of the restrictions according to 1: Enables machining even when the cutting edge angle is not 45.
the cutting edge angle of a chamfering tool (Conventional scheme)
N
D96
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Used to select the mode of operation when the cutting depth is not
ri
ZA
specified or is set to 0 in the deep-hole tapping or high-speed deep-hole

Se
tapping cycle.
IM
0: Perform tapping without pecking

Cutting depth in deep-hole tapping/
1: Alarm
K
high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle

ZA
D96
(bit 7)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Select the cutting drawing method for circular milling unit on the VIRTUAL
MACHINING display.
ig
yr
0: Detailed drawing
op
(Cutting is drawn according to the specified pitch.)

Cutting drawing method for circular milling
C
unit on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display 1: Simple drawing

D97 (Cutting is drawn using approximate geometries regardless of the
specified pitch. Cutting is performed from the start point to the end
(bit 0) point by one single rotation and another rotation at the end point.)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-110
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Stop with an alarm

1: Invalid
(The control moves to the next machining process.)
Action to be taken when the number of 0: Valid
times pecking has been performed has
reached the set maximum count (The alarm 980 MACRO USER ALARM 1 occurs.)
D98
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
. d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set if the INDEX unit is executed or not.
gh
0: Not executed (Conventional scheme)
ri
1: Executed
ll
Execution of the INDEX unit when the
.A
PRI.No. is set in the MANUAL PROGRAM
N
D98
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Fixed value
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
D100
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
ht
0: Radius value
ig
1: Diameter value
yr
op
Handling the X-axial coordinates of

C
non-turning TPC relay points

D105
(bit 0)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-111
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Tap high-speed deep-hole cycle menu

0: Hidden
1: Display
Tap high-speed deep-hole cycle menu
display/hidden
D105
(bit 1)
Program type M
. d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select whether or not to generate alarm 1602 SET INDEX UNIT BEFORE
gh
MACHINING when the following unit is not preceded by an index unit.
[Units]
ri
Point machining, line machining, chamfering, face machining, C-axis
ll
Machine operation when the first machining
.A
point machining, C-axis line machining, C-axis chamfering, turning,
unit is not preceded by an index unit
EIA/ISO subprogram, manual program, MMS, pallet change, workpiece
N
D106 measurement, tool measurement
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
0: No alarm A
R
1: Alarm
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Do not execute
ri
ZA
Se
1: Execute
A
IM
Execution of an index command after the

second or subsequent work coordinate
K
command in WPC unit

ZA
D106
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
T-code in index unit to be executed before the end unit

ig
0: Output
yr
1: Do not output
op
T-code output during indexing before the

C
end unit
D106
(bit 2)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-112
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Initial point position when the specified R-point is located outside the
workpiece clearance area at an arbitrary B-axis angle other than 0, 90 and
180 degrees in the MAZATROL program of the WPC workpiece scheme.
Initial point position in the case where 0: Intersection point of the extended lines from the R-point and from the
R-point is located outside the clearance corner of the clearance area around the workpiece
around the workpiece at an arbitrary B-axis
D106 angle 1: Same position as R-point
(bit 3)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Selection of rotational axis command system by table selection
gh
ri
0: Table selection invalid
ll
Selection of rotational axis command 1: Table selection valid
.A
system by table selection Specify the rotational axis in the table selection unit when table
N
D106 selection is valid.
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Timing of outputting alarm 1602 SET INDEX UNIT BEFORE MACHINING

ZA
Se
when bit 0 of parameter D106 is set to 1

A
0: Output before executing a machining unit

IM
Alarm output timing when the first 1: Alarm output immediately after the cycle start button is pressed
machining unit is not preceded by an index
K
ZA
unit
D106
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Set whether the offset direction of the X-axis wear offset/TOOL EYE
ig
adjusting amount offset in the Z offset type milling back face [XY] mode
yr
follows the setting at parameter F168 bit 3:

op
0: Follows
X-axis wear offset direction in the Z offset
C
type milling back face [XY] mode 1: Does not follow (offset is made in the direction opposite to the direction
D106 set at F168 bit 3)
(bit 6) * This parameter is valid only for the B-axis rotary type turret.
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-113
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Selection of the C-axis positioning execution after turning, C-axis milling,

coordinate measurement or tool measurement for starting the workpiece
measurement in the WPC workpiece or initial-point scheme
Selection of the C-axis positioning 0: Executes workpiece measurement at the C-axis angle reached after
execution for the workpiece measurement the completion of turning, C-axis milling, coordinate measurement or
in the WPC workpiece or initial-point tool measurement
D106 scheme
1: Executes workpiece measurement after C-axis positioning in the head
(bit 7) rotating position specified in the indexing unit
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
D107
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
When a 3D coordinate conversion mode cancel code (G69 for machining

ri
ZA
centers and G69.5 for turning centers) is specified in the manual program
Se
unit, alarm 714 ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA is:

IM
Alarm output when 3D coordinate 0: Not output

conversion mode cancel is specified in the 1: Output
K
manual program unit

ZA
D107
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
0 : 0.01 [in/min]
ig
1 : 1 [in/min]
yr
op
Unit of feed rate for the feed per minute

command in manual program units for the
C
inch system
D107
(bit 3)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-114
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Calculating based on C-SP and NOM- in the tool sequence

(conventional operation)
< With mm specification >
–1
Mill spindle speed (min ) =
Surface speed (m/min)  1000 / (Nominal diameter (mm)  )
< With inch specification >
–1
Surface speed (ft/min)  12 / (Nominal diameter (in)  )
Calculation method for mill spindle speed
when spot chamfering
.
D107 1: Calculating based on C-SP in the tool sequence and the diameter at
d
ve
the cutting position (NOM-  (1/2))
(bit 4)
er
< With mm specification >
s
–1
re
Surface speed (m/min)  1000 / (Nominal diameter (mm)  1/2  )
ts
< With inch specification >
gh
–1
ri
Surface speed (ft/min)  12 / (Nominal diameter (in)  1/2  )
ll
.A
Program type M
N
O
Unit —
TI
Setting range 0, 1
60
A
R
40
Sets the chip ejection distance for deep-hole drilling cycles.

PO
29
When a deep-hole drilling cycle is selected using a drill (tool sequence)

with bit 0 of D141 enabled, the tool is retracted to the point determined
R
o.
according to the setting of D130 during machining, instead of the R-point.

O
N
C
al
K
ri
Chip ejection distance

ZA
Se
D130
A
R-point
IM
Chip ejection distance in deep-hole drilling

cycle
K
D130
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
Note : If “0” is set, the R-point is used.

)2
Program type M
(c
Conditions Immediate [Related parameters]

ht
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in D106 bit 3

ig
yr

op
C
2-115
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the override for the G00 feed-in speed to the previous cutting point in
pecking during the deep-hole boring cycle.
G00
G00 feed rate  D131 / 100

F302 G01
.
F302
d
G00 feed-in speed override for deep-hole
ve
boring cycle
er
D131
s
re
ts
gh
Note :
ri
1. When “0” is set, the override is set to 100%.
ll
.A
2. The D131 setting does not apply to any other G00 than that for the
feed-in operation.
N
O
TI
60
Program type M A
[Related parameters]
R
40
PO
F302 : Allowance in rapid feed stop in deep-hole boring cycle

29
Unit %
R
o.

O
N
Used to select whether the chip ejection distance set for parameter D130
al
is to be used during deep-hole drilling cycle or not.

ri
ZA
0: Not used (use R-point)

Se
1: Used
Chip ejection operation during deep-hole
IM
drilling cycle
D141
K
ZA
(bit 0)
A
M
Program type M
YA
3
Unit —
01
Setting range 0, 1
)2
Feed-in operation during deep-hole boring cycle

(c
0 : G00
ht
ig
1 : G01
yr
Feed-in operation selection for deep-hole

op
boring cycle Note :

D141
C
1. When D141 bit 1 = “0”, the G00 feed-in speed override can be set
(bit 1) with D131.
2. When D141 bit 1 = “1”, the G01 feed-in speed can be set with F303.
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-116
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select the circular processing selection method for circular milling unit.
0 : Automatic selection based on “HOLE-”, “PRE-DIA” and “DEPTH” in
tool sequence data of the program
1 : Circular processing B
Circular milling unit: Circular processing
selection method switch
D141
(bit 2)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
.A
WPC unit/WPC shift unit
D143
N
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-117
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-3 User parameter LINE/FACE/3D (E)
Classification USER Display title LINE/FACE/3D
Element used to set cutting start point and escape point for closed-pattern
line- or face-machining
Example :
Defined closed pattern Defined closed
Closed-pattern cutting start point and pattern
escape point setting element SRV-R
E1 E2 E2
. d
ve
E1 Cutting Escape E1
er
start point point MPL026
s
Program type M
re
Conditions Immediate [Applicable units]
ts
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in  LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF OUT and CHMF IN
gh
Setting range 0 to 999  Wall finishing of STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT and PCKT VLY
ri
ll
Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point for line- or
.A
face-machining (the first clearance)
N
Example :
O
NOM-/2  SRV-R
TI
60
A E2
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
SRV-R
N
Cutting Escape point

C
E2
start point
al
Cutting start point and escape point setting

ri
NOM-/2 < SRV-R

ZA
element (the first clearance)

Se
E2
A
E2
IM
K
ZA
Cutting Escape point

start point E2 SRV-R MPL027
A
M
[Applicable units]
YA
 All line-machining units

3
 Face-machining units other than FCE MILL, TOP EMIL, and SLOT
01
Note :
)2
Program type M 1. See the diagram of parameter E1 also.

(c
Conditions Immediate 2. Positioning of E2 at the escape point can be selected using E95, but
ht
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in only for line-machining units.

ig

yr
op
C
2-118
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The reference value of each finishing allowance R (FIN-R) which is

automatically set when the roughness levels of the line- or face-machining
units have been set
The finishing allowance R in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the
value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are
calculated using the expressions listed in the table below.
Reference allowance of finishing in radial
direction Roughness FIN-R
E4 0 to 3 0.0
4 E4
. d
5 E4 × 0.7
ve
6 E4 × 0.7 × 0.7
s er
Program type M 7 E4 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
re
Conditions Immediate 8 E4 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
ts
9 E4 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
gh
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
ri
ll
Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point (the second
.A
clearance)
N
E2 is used generally as a clearance on the X-Y plane, however, E5 is used
O
when the condition meets both of 1. and 2. mentioned below.
TI
Element used to set the cutting start point 1. There is pre-machining in the same unit.
60
and escape point (the second clearance) A

2. The parameter (E91 to E95) that makes E5 effective is set to ON (1).
R
40
E5
PO
[Applicable units]
29
LINE OUT, LINE IN, STEP, POCKET, POCKT MT, PCKT VLY
R
o.
N
Program type M
E91 bit 3, E92 bit 3, E93 bit 3, E94 bit 3, E95 bit 7
al
ri
* Parameter that effectuates E5 in the applicable unit.

ZA
Se
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

A

IM
The reference value of each finishing allowance Z (FIN-Z) which is

K
automatically set when the roughness levels of the line- or face-machining

ZA
units have been set

The finishing allowance Z in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the
A
value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are
M
calculated using the expressions listed in the table below.

YA
Reference allowance of finishing in axial

direction
3
Roughness FIN-Z
01
E6 0 to 3 0.0
)2
4 E6
(c
5 E6 × 0.7
ht
6 E6 × 0.7 × 0.7
ig
yr
Program type M 7 E6 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7

op
Conditions Immediate 8 E6 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7

C
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in 9 E6 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7 × 0.7
2-119
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Allowance of cutting start point in axial direction

For the line- or face-machining, E9 is used as an axial clearance for rapid
access to the machining point from the initial point, however, E7 is used
when the condition meets both of 1. and 2. mentioned below.
Allowance of cutting start point in axial 1. There is pre-machining in the same unit.
direction (the second clearance)
2. The parameter (E91 to E97) that makes E7 effective is set to ON (1).
E7 [Applicable units]
All line-/face-machining units except the face milling and angular face unit.
Program type M
d .
E91 bit 2, E92 bit 2, E93 bit 2, E94 bit 2, E95 bit 6, E96 bit 1, E97 bit 2
ve
* Parameter that effectuates E7 in the applicable unit.
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
ts
The amount of clearance that prevents interference of the chamfering
gh
cutter with the walls during face-machining
ri
E8
ll
Radial interference clearance of chamfering
.A
cutter
N
E8
O
TI
Interferes.
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions Immediate Interference distance MPL028

R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

N

al
K
ri
Element used to set the position in which the cutting feed in axial direction
ZA
Se
is to be started after the line- or face-machining tool has been moved from
A
the initial point toward the workpiece at a rapid feed rate

IM
Example :
Allowance of axial-cutting start position
K
(the first clearance) Initial point

ZA
E9
A
E9
M
SRV-Z
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2

(c

ht
Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut (WID-R) of the

ig
tool sequence in FCE MILL, TOP EMIL or STEP unit

yr
NOM- × E10
WID-R =
op
Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element 10

C
(Face milling, End milling-top, End Example :

milling-step)
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R
E10
R1 FCE MILL 100A ? ? XBI  1. 19.

NOM- × E10
Program type M 10
Unit 10%
2-120
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The amount of clearance that prevents interference of the chamfering

cutter with the bottom during chamfering
Axial interference clearance of chamfering

cutter
E11 E11
Interference depth Interferes. MPL030

Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
ts
The amount of clearance that prevents interference between the tool and
gh
the figure during face milling
ri
Example :
ll
Escape point Defined figure
Radial interference clearance of face milling
.A
unit and angular face milling unit
N
E12
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M Cutting

PO
29
start point
Conditions Immediate E12 E12
R
MPL031
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

N

al
K
ri
Element used to set the tool path internal to the figure for end milling-top
ZA
Se
unit
A
Example :
IM
Tool path setting element for end milling-top

K
unit
ZA
Tool diameter × E13

E13 10
A
M

YA
10
Program type M
Defined figure
3
MPL032
01
)2
Unit 10%
(c
ht
Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut (WID-R) of the

ig
tool sequence in POCKET, PCKT MT or PCKT VLY unit

yr
NOM-× E14
WID-R =
op
Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element 10

C
(Pocket milling, Pocket milling-mountain, Example :

Pocket milling-valley)
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R
E14
R1 END MILL 20. ? ? CW G01 10. 12.

NOM-× E14
Program type M 10
Unit 10%
2-121
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Element used to set the tool path external to the defined figure for
reciprocating-short machining with face milling unit
Example :
Tool path setting element for face
milling-top unit
(reciprocating short) 10
E15
Program type M
d .
Conditions Immediate 10
ve
Unit 10% Defined figure MPL033
s er
re
Override value of the idle-cutting feed rate at which tool of end milling-
ts
mountain unit is to be moved around the outer form of the workpiece
gh
Note : Valid only when bit 0 of E91 is 1 and its bit 7 is 0.
ri
Example :
Peripheral-cutting feed rate override for end
ll
Defined figure
.A
milling-mountain unit
N
E16
O
E16
FR × 10
TI
FR
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO
29
Unit 10% MPL034

o.
O
N
C
al
Override value of the feed rate at which the tool of a line- or

ri
ZA
face-machining unit (excluding face milling unit) is to be moved to the

Se
machining surface in an axial direction

A
IM
Note :
1. Valid only when ZFD (or AFD) of tool sequence is G01.
K
Axial-cutting feed rate override

2. Feed overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.
ZA
E17 Example :
A
M
YA
3
Program type M E17

01
FR × E9 SRV-Z
Conditions Immediate 10
)2
Unit 10% Machining

(c
surface
ht
ig
Override value of feed rate when the pocket-machining radial depth-of-cut

yr
becomes equal to the tool diameter

op
Example :
C
Override in case of the overall width cutting FR × E18

10
for pocket-machining
E18
MPL036
Note :
Program type M
Overriding for overall width cutting is not valid when this parameter is 0.
[Applicable units]
Unit 10% Rough-machining of POCKET, PCKT MT, PCKT VLY and STEP
2-122
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Override value of tool returning feed rate in the rough-machining process

of the end milling-slot unit, when the bidirectional cutting is executed.
E19
FR × 100
Returning feed rate override in case of
bidirectional cutting for rough-machining of Note :
the end milling-slot unit.
The override value is invalid, when bit 5 of parameter E96 is set to OFF,
E19 or this parameter is set to 0.
[Applicable unit]
Returning path in rough-machining of SLOT
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
This parameter indicates the feed override value for axial pecking
ts
movement to the surface to be machined using a face-machining unit
gh
excepting a face milling unit.
ri
Axial cutting feed override during Z-axial E20
ll
Feed rate during pecking operation = FR × 10
cutting in the pecking mode of face
.A
machining
N
E20 Note :
O
TI
1. Valid only when G01 or a numeric value is set for ZFD (or AFD) and
60
A
[PECKING] is selected for TYPE in the tool sequence.
R
40
Program type M 2. The feed override function is invalid when “0” is assigned to this
PO
29
Conditions Immediate parameter.

R
Unit 10%
o.
O
N
C
al
The amount of overlap of the wall-cutting start and end areas in

ri
ZA
closed-pattern line- or face-machining

Se
Example :
IM
Defined closed pattern

Wall-cutting overlap in closed figure
K
ZA
E21
A
M
Escape point Cutting start

YA
E21 point
3
[Applicable units]
01
 LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF OUT and CHMF IN
)2
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

 Wall finishing of STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT, PCKT VLY and SLOT
(c

ht
Override value of automatic corner overriding in line- or face-machining

ig
Example :
yr
FR × E22
op
10
Override value of automatic corner
C
over-riding FR
E22
MPL038
Note : Automatic corner overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.
Program type M
[Applicable units]
Conditions Immediate LINE RGT, LINE LFT, LINE OUT, LINE IN, STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT
Unit % and PCKT VLY
2-123
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The range of removal allowances (upper and lower limits)

The automatic corner overriding becomes valid when the following line- or
face-machining conditions are met:
Effective removal allowance (upper limit) of Tool E24 Removal Tool E23
automatic corner overriding diameter × 100  allowance  diameter × 100
E23
Removal allowance
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
MPL039
ts
gh
ri
ll
Effective removal allowance (lower limit) of Machining Removal allowance
.A
automatic corner overriding
Line-rough machining (SRV-R) – (FIN-R)
N
E24
O
Face-rough machining (WID-R)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
O
N
al
The shape angle range (upper limit)

ri
ZA
Se
The automatic corner overriding becomes valid when the following line- or
A
face-machining conditions are met:

IM
Shape angle  E25

Effective angle (upper limit) of automatic
K
corner overriding Shape angle

ZA
E25
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
Conditions Immediate MPL040

01
Unit °
)2
(c

ht
Axial feed rate calculation parameter for a line milling finish.

ig
Set the changing ratio of the axial feed rate with respect to the radial feed
yr
rate.
op
E26
Calculation coefficient for the finishing feed Axial feed rate = Radial feed rate × 100
C
of line milling
Tool
E26
Axial feed rate
Work-
Program type M Radial feed rate piece
Unit %
2-124
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
These parameters, the roughness code, etc. determine the finishing feed
rate.
 If the radial-finishing feed rate is taken as F1, then:

Radial direction feed rate calculation
reference diameter for finish cutting in line D
E28 × × Kf × Z (D < E27 × )
machining unit F1 = E27 × 
E27 E28 × Kf × Z (D  E27 × )
D : Tool diameter
 : 0.1 (for metric specs.) or
Program type M 0.01 (for inch specs.)
d .
Kf : Roughness coefficient (Refer to the list below)
ve
er
Z : Number of teeth
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
Setting range 0 to 65535 Roughness Roughness Roughness
Kf Kf Kf
code code code
ts
gh
 –3   3
K0 × 0.8 K0 K0 × 0.8
ri
1 4 7
  
ll
–2 4
Finishing feed rate calculation reference K0 × 0.8 K0 × 0.8 K0 × 0.8
.A
2 5 8
feed rate in line machining unit
 –1  2  5
K0 × 0.8 K0 × 0.8 K0 × 0.8
N
3 6 9
E28
O
K0=Standard data 0.5
TI
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO
29
0.001 mm/rev
o.
Unit
O
0.0001 in/rev
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Select whether the cutting conditions in the shape sequence during VFC
Se
mode are to be modified. The selection is valid only for milling.

A
0: Modification of the cutting conditions in the shape sequence

IM
Selection of whether the cutting conditions 1: No modification of the cutting conditions in the shape sequence
K
in the shape sequence during VFC mode

In the case of 0, only the cutting conditions in the tool sequence are
ZA
are to be modified modified. In the case of 1, both the cutting conditions in the tool sequence
E29
A
and the cutting conditions in the shape sequence are modified.

M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-125
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
An element that determines the starting point and escape point of radial
cutting when CLOSED is specified for the wall attributes at the starting
point and ending point of open-pattern line machining.
When OPEN is specified, E2 is used.
<CLOSED specified>
d .
ve
Radial clearance for wall attributes during
er
line machining E30 E30
s
E30
re
<OPEN specified>
ts
gh
E2 E2
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

O
N

al
Element that determines the amount of OPEN attribute wall protrusion in

ri
ZA
pocket-machining shape units (POCKET, PCKT MT or PCKT VLY unit

Se
only)
IM
Protrusion Protrusion
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
Element that determines the amount of

01
Protrusion
OPEN attribute wall protrusion for
)2
pocket-machining shape units

E31
(c
OPEN attribute wall

ht
ig
yr
op
CLOSED attribute wall

C
Tool dia. (Note) × E31

CLOSED attribute wall = 10
Note :
Nominal tool diameter in the tool sequence is used when tool data is
Program type M absent.
Unit 10%
2-126
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Element that automatically determines an approaching radius in a

Z-direction helical approach scheme.
The approaching radius value to be used in the Z-direction helical

approach scheme for helical machining is automatically determined by the
parameter as follows:
Tool dia. × E32

Approaching radius = 100
 For helical approach (Helical circle 2 + 1/4)
.
d
Element that automatically determines an Approaching radius
ve
approaching radius in a Z-direction helical × (E33/100)
er
approach scheme
s
re
E32
ts
Clearance Z
gh
ri
ll
.A
Clearance Z
+
N
Cutting allowance Z
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M Approaching radius

PO
29

R
o.
Unit %
O
N

al
K
ri
Approaching gradient value for a Z-direction helical approach scheme

ZA
Se
Distance in Z-direction
A
Distance in XY-plane
IM
K
 For helical approach (Helical circle 2 + 1/4)

ZA
Approaching radius
A
× (E33/100)
M
YA
3
Clearance Z
01
Approaching gradient for a Z-direction

helical approach scheme
)2
(c
E33
ht
Clearance Z
+
ig
Cutting allowance Z
yr
op
C
Approaching radius
Program type M
Unit %
2-127
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The approaching distance value to be used in a Z-direction tapered

approach scheme for tapered machining is automatically determined by
the parameter as follows:
Tool dia. × E34

Approaching distance = 100
Element that automatically determines an
approaching distance in a Z-direction  For tapered approach (3 tapers)
tapered approach scheme
Approaching distance
E34 × (E35/100)
d .
ve
Clearance Z
ser
Clearance Z
re
+
Program type M Cutting allowance Z
ts
gh
ri
Unit %
ll
.A
Approaching gradient value for a Z-direction tapered approach scheme
N
O
Distance in Z-direction
TI
Distance in XY-plane
60
A
R
40

PO
Approaching gradient for a Z-direction For tapered approach (3 tapers)

29
tapered approach scheme Approaching distance

R
o.
× (E35/100)
O
E35
N
C
al
Clearance Z
ri
ZA
Se
Clearance Z
A
+
IM
Program type M
Cutting allowance Z
K
ZA
Unit %
1 to 999
A
Setting range
M
The escape distance value to be used in the Z-direction tapered escape

YA
scheme after tapered machining is automatically determined by the

parameter as follows:
3
01
Element that automatically determines an

Tool dia. × E36
escape distance in the Z-direction tapered Escape distance =
)2
100
escape scheme
(c
E36
ht
ig
yr
Program type M Clearance Z

op
C
Unit % Escape distance
2-128
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
This parameter indicates the amount of return of pecking in the Z-axial

pecking mode of face machining.
Amount of return of pecking in the Z-axial

pecking mode of face machining
E37
E37
Program type M Pecking
.
E37
d
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in MPL058
s
re
ts
Set the returning feed rate of the pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode
gh
during the face machining.
ri
[1] Feed rate
[1] Cutting (G1) F command
ll
Returning feed rate of pecking in the Z-axial
.A
[2] [2] Pecking (G1) E38
pecking mode of face machining [3]
[3] Cutting (G1) F command
N
O
E38
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
Note : This value will be handled as100 if 0 is set here.

29
R
o.
0.01 mm/rev
O
Unit
N
0.001 in/rev
C
al

ri
ZA
Se
Set the element that automatically determines the depth-of-cut-R of tool

A
sequence in the pocket milling, pocket milling-mountain, pocket

IM
milling-valley and end milling-slot units.

Element that automatically determines the * This parameter is valid only when intelligent pocket milling (IPM)
K
depth-of-cut-R (Pocket milling, Pocket (CW/CCW) is selected for the tool sequence method.
ZA
milling-mountain, Pocket milling-valley, End

milling-slot)
A
E39 Depth-of-cut-R = NOM-  E39/100

M
YA
3
Program type M
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
ig
The approaching radius in helical approach mode (helical 2 selected) is

yr
automatically determined with the following math formula.

op
Approaching radius = E40

C
Approaching radius in helical approach

(helical 2)
E40
Program type M
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
2-129
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Amount of in-feed per revolution in the Z-axis direction in helical approach

(helical 2 selected) is automatically determined with the following math
formula.
Amount of in-feed per revolution in the Amount of in-feed in the Z-axis direction = E41
Z-axis direction in helical approach
(helical 2)
E41
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
ts
Set the magnification factor of surface speed in helical approach.
gh
ri
Surface speed during helical approach = Surface speed in tool
ll
sequence  E43/100
.A
Magnification factor of surface speed in
helical approach * If a value outside the setting range is set, E43 = 100 is assumed.
N
O
E43
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
R
o.
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Feed overriding for cutting a workpiece in an axial direction using a 3-D

Se
unit
A
IM
Example :
3-D
K
Axial cutting-feed overriding FR × E55 FR × E55

ZA
10 10
E55
A
E59
M
YA
Depth of cut
Program type M
3
01
Conditions Immediate High-speed rough processing Finish processing MPL041

)2
Unit 10% Note : Feed overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.

(c
ht
This parameter is used to select whether or not an alarm message is to be

ig
displayed if the curved surface of a defined pattern points in the – Z

yr
direction (normally, processing becomes impossible).

op
0: No alarm
C
3-D 1: Alarm
Inversion check of curved-surface pattern
Example :
E56
The curved surface of a +Z
defined pattern points in
the – Z direction
Program type M +X
Unit — Note : This parameter is invalid during high-speed rough processing.
Setting range 0, 1
2-130
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
This parameter is used to select whether or not processing is to be

performed in strict accordance with the tool-sequence pitch data setting.
0: The pitch setting is not strictly observed.
1: The pitch setting is strictly observed.
3-D
Severity check of cutting pitch
E57
Note :
Program type M
d .
1. This parameter is invalid during high-speed rough processing.
ve
2. The operation time becomes long if this parameter is set to 1.
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
This parameter is used to select whether or not 3-D tool-diameter
gh
compensation according to tool data is to be made for the curved surface
of a defined pattern
ri
0: Diameter compensation made
ll
3-D
.A
1: Diameter compensation not made
Tool-diameter compensation
Example :
N
Pattern Pattern
E58
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Diameter compensation Diameter compensation

Conditions Immediate made not made MPL043
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Element used to set the position in which the cutting feed in axial direction
Se
is to be started after the tool has been moved from the initial point toward
A
the workpiece at a rapid feed rate

IM
3-D Example :
K
Allowance of axial-cutting start position

ZA
E59
E59
A
Material height
M
E59
YA
Program type M Workpiece

3
01
Conditions Immediate Pattern

Normal-speed or high-speed
)2
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in rough processing Finish processing MPL044

(c

ht
The 3-D finish processing (cutting) allowance in the direction of the normal
ig
with respect to the defined pattern of the curved surface

yr
Example :
op
E60
C
3-D
Normal cutting allowance
E60
E60
Program type M
2-131
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The length of a short line segment which determines the next

approximation point for tool-path creation
Depending on the tool-sequence selected:
E61 is applicable for //-1 or //-2, or
3-D
E62 is applicable for -1 or -2
Search length for parallel cutting
This value will be handled as 0.1 mm (or 0.01 in) if 0 is set here.
E61
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
3-D
.A
Search length for right-angle cutting
N
E62
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

N

al
K
ri
The number of segments into which the defined pattern of a curved

ZA
Se
surface is to be divided for display of the curved-surface pattern on the

A
TOOL PATH CHECK display

IM
3-D Example :
K
Pattern display division segment

E64 E63
ZA
(FL direction)
E63
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit — GL or normal to FL
(c
Setting range 0 to 999 FL MPL046

ht
Note :
ig
This parameter is used for display of a curved-surface pattern, and thus

yr
the pattern displayed may slightly differ from the actual pattern of the
op
3-D curved surface to be machined.

C
Pattern display division segment

(GL direction)
E64
Program type M
Unit —
2-132
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The allowance of cutting a workpiece along the wall of the area which has
been set using the area check function
Example :
3-D
Radial cutting allowance for area check
E65
Program type M
d .
ve
Conditions Immediate E66
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
E66
re
ts
Pattern
gh
Min. E65 Max.
ri
E65
ll
3-D
.A
MPL047
Axial cutting allowance for area check
N
E66
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

N

al
K
ri
The processing error tolerance with respect to a curved-surface pattern

ZA
Se
which corresponds to a #T setting (1 through 9) of the tool sequence

A
IM
#T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3-D Address E67 E68 E69 E70 E71 E72 E73 E74 E75
K
E67 Processing error tolerance

ZA
Example :
to
A
M
E75
YA
Program type M
3
Curved-surface
01
Conditions Immediate #T
pattern
)2
Unit 0.01 mm/0.001 in #T MPL048

(c

ht
The override value which becomes valid in case that the depth-of-cut in a
ig
radial direction becomes equal to the entire width (diameter) of the tool
yr
Example :
op
3-D
C
Entire-width override
E76
Program type M
E76
Conditions Immediate Tool-sequence feed × MPL049
10
Unit 10% Note : Entire-width overriding is not valid when this parameter is 0.
2-133
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The clearance of high-speed rough processing (workpiece size

appointment) between the tool and the figure
Workpiece
3-D
Radial cutting allowance for high-speed
rough processing (workpiece size
appointment)
E77
Program type M
d .
ve
Conditions Immediate Defined pattern
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in E77 E77 MPL050
s
re
ts
0: 100%
gh
ri
ll
3-D
.A
Multiplying factor set for tolerance
N
E78
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
ZA
That amount of offset from a curved-surface pattern which determines the

Se
region of high-speed rough processing (offset appointment) in a radial

A
direction
IM
3-D Region to be
Region of radial machining during machined
K
high-speed rough processing (offset

ZA
appoint-ment)
E83
A
Material height
M
Curved-surface
YA
pattern
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in E83 MPL051

(c

ht
That distance from the bottom of a curved-surface pattern which

ig
determines the region of high-speed rough processing (offset

yr
appointment) in an axial direction

op
3-D Example :
C
Region of axial machining during

high-speed rough processing (offset Region to be machined
appoint-ment) Material height
E84
E84
Program type M
E83
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in Curved-surface pattern MPL052
2-134
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The factor that determines the region of high-speed rough processing

(workpiece size appointment) in a radial direction
3-D
Region of radial machining during E88
high-speed rough processing: –X
(workpiece size appointment)
E85
E85 E86
Program type M Curved-surface
d .
pattern
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
+Y
re
ts
gh
E87
+X
ri
Region to be machined
3-D
ll
Region of radial machining during MPL053
.A
high-speed rough processing: +X
N
E86
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
3-D
Region of radial machining during
K
high-speed rough processing: –Y

ZA

E87
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
3-D
op
Region of radial machining during

C
high-speed rough processing: +Y

E88
Program type M
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
2-135
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
That distance from the bottom of a curved-surface pattern which

determines the region of high-speed rough processing (workpiece size
appointment) in an axial direction
Example :
3-D Region to be machined Curved-surface pattern
Region of axial machining during
high-speed rough processing Material
height
E89
+Z
d .
E89
ve
er
+X
Program type M
s
re
Conditions Immediate E85 E86
ts
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
gh
MPL054
ri
ll
76543210
.A
0: Machining from inside to outside
N
1: Machining from outside to inside
O
0: Cutting direction inversed
TI
1: Cutting direction fixed
60
A 0: The R-point height is set always to E9.

R
40
1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when

PO
29
there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same unit,

R
respectively.
o.
O
N
0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always to

C
E2.
al
1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2

ri
ZA
Se
when there is or isn’t pre-machining in the

A
same unit, respectively.

IM
Tool-path pattern selection for end 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
K
0: Tool path based on inside shape

ZA
E91 1: Tool path based on outside shape

A
M
Note :
YA
1. If bit 0 = 0, tool path based on inside shape is selected

automatically, irrespective of value of bit 7.
3
2. If bit 0 = 1 and bit 7 = 0, fixed direction of cutting is selected

01
automatically, irrespective of value of bit 1.

)2
3. — 4 becomes valid only for two or more rounds of cutting.

(c
Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1
ht
ig
E9 Initial point
yr
E7
op
C
1st cutting
Program type M
2nd cutting
Unit —
MPL055
2-136
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Tool-path pattern selection for pocket 0: The R-point height is set always to E9.
milling unit 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when
there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same unit,
E92 respectively.
E2.
Program type M 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2
d .
ve
er
Unit —
1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9
s
re
ts
76543210
gh
ri
ll
.A
Tool-path pattern selection for pocket 1: Cutting direction fixed
N
O
0: The R-point height is set always to E9.
TI
E93 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when
60
A there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same unit,

R
40
respectively.
PO
29

R
E2.
o.
Program type M 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2

N

al
K

ri
ZA
Unit —
Se

IM
76543210
K
ZA

A

M
1: Cutting direction fixed

YA
Tool-path pattern selection for pocket

milling-valley unit 0: The R-point height is set always to E9.
3

01
E94 there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same unit,

)2
respectively.
(c

E2.
ht
1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2

ig
Program type M when there is or isn’t pre-machining in the

yr
Conditions Immediate same unit, respectively.

op

C
Unit —
2-137
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
In case of a collision in the line-machining
approach path:
0: Machining not aborted (conventional method)
1: Machining aborted
For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting:
0: Not via the approach point
1: Via the approach point
0: Escape to the Z-axis initial point
d.
1: No escape on the Z-axis
ve
er
1: Escape is set to a point where the tool comes
s
re
out of the removal allowance.
The R-point height for central, right hand, left
ts
hand, outside and inside linear machining is:
gh
0: Set always to E9
ri
1: Set to E7 or E9 when there is or isn’t
ll
pre-machining in the same unit, respectively.
.A
The X-Y plane clearance for outside and inside
N
linear machining is:
O
0: Set always to E2
TI
1: Set to E5 or E2 when there is or isn’t
60
A pre-machining in the same unit, respectively.

R
40
 Bit 2
PO
29
Bit 2 = 1 Bit 2 = 0
R
o.
Tool-path pattern selection for line

O
Initial point
N
machining unit
C
al
E95
K
ri
ZA
Se
1st removal allowance

A
2nd removal allowance

IM
K
Approach point Cutting start point MPL501

ZA
 Bit 3
A
Approach point Escape point

M
YA
Bit 3 = 0
Initial point
3
01
)2

(c
Bit 3 = 1 2nd removal allowance

ht
MPL502
ig
yr
 Bit 5
op
Bit 5 = 0 Bit 5 = 1
C
E2
Escape point E2
WID-R MPL503
Program type M
Note :
1. Bit 3 valid only for inside/outside line machining unit.
Unit — 2. When bit 3 is set to 1, “no escape on the Z-axis” is selected
Setting range Binary, eight digits regardless of bit 2 of parameter E104.
2-138
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: The R-point height is set always to E9.

1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isn’t
pre-machining in the same unit, respectively.
R-point height for end milling-slot unit

E96
(bit 1)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
0: Not via the approach point
ri
1: Via the approach point
ll
Approach method selection for 2nd and
.A
subsequent rounds of cutting in end
milling-slot unit
N
E96
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Rapid feed up to the cutting allowance + E9

Se

A
IM
Approach point for 2nd and subsequent

K
rounds of cutting in end milling-slot unit

ZA
E96
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Returning feed rate override of the end milling-slot unit disabled

ig
1: Returning feed rate override of the end milling-slot unit enabled

yr
op
C
Returning feed rate override of the end

milling-slot unit
E96
(bit 5)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-139
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Switching of restrictions according to the cutting edge angle of the

chamfering tool used for Smooth chamfering (end milling-slot)
0: Enables machining only when the cutting edge angle is 45° (Alarm if
Smooth chamfering (end milling-slot): the cutting angle edge is not 45°.)
Switching of restrictions according to the 1: Enables machining even when the cutting edge angle is not 45°.
cutting edge angle of the chamfering tool (Conventional scheme)
E96
(bit 7)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
76543210
gh
0: The R-point height is set always to E9
ri
ll
Tool-path pattern selection for end there is or isn’t pre-machining in the same
.A
milling-top unit unit, respectively.
N
E97
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
ZA
76543210
Se
A
IM
1: The 1st cutting amount exceeds the

command value at end milling-mountain or
Cutting method selection for end
K
pocket valley-machining.
milling-mountain, pocket milling-valley unit
ZA
E98
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
Milling feed rate specification range for the shape sequence of the
ig
MAZATROL program
yr
0: Valid for roughing

op
Milling feed rate specification range for the 1: Valid for finishing
C
shape sequence of the MAZATROL

program
E99
(bit 0)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-140
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Bottom/wall simultaneous finishing mode for pocket machining

0: Sequential (Conventional scheme)
1: Simultaneous
Bottom/wall simultaneous finishing mode
for pocket machining
E99
(bit 1)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Interference check between the approach point and the cutting starting
gh
point of face machining
ri
0: Invalid
Interference check between the approach
ll
1: Valid
.A
point and the cutting starting point of face
machining
N
E99
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Set whether or not to display alarm 705 APPROACH POINT ERROR and
ri
ZA
stop operation when the amount of tool movement is 0 for the command in
Se
the last line of shape sequence in the right-hand/left-hand linear

IM
machining or right-hand/left-hand chamfering unit.

Alarm generating condition during the 0: Not set
K
approach or escape for line machining

1: Set
ZA
E99
(bit 4)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Used to select the stopping position while executing smooth chamfering in

the single block mode.
ig
yr
0: Stop at any block in the chamfering path

op
Smooth chamfering 1: Stop after completing entire circumference

Stopping position during single block
C
operation
E99
(bit 5)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-141
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Used to select the calculation method of the machining start point after
automatic determination of the approach point in line machining units.
0: Conventional scheme
Machining start point calculation method 1: Start machining near the automatically determined approach point
after automatic determination of approach
point in line machining unit
E99
(bit 6)
Program type M
.d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Same operation before and after automatic determination
gh
1: Operation by manual input after automatic determination
ri
Cutting method to be used after an
ll
.A
approach point is automatically determined
during line/face machining
N
E104
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Tool retraction position after each cutting plunge in the Z-axis direction in
ri
ZA
Se
the face machining unit

A
0: R-point
IM
1: Initial point
K

ZA
Returning position during face machining.

E104 bit 1 = 1 Initial point
A
E104
M
(bit 1) R-point
E104 bit 1 = 0
YA
(workpiece top face + E9)

3

01
Program type M 2nd removal allowance

)2
(c
ht
Unit —
ig
Setting range 0, 1
yr
op
C
2-142
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Tool retraction position after each cutting plunge in the Z-axis direction in
the line machining unit
0: R-point
1: Initial point
E104 bit 2 = 1 Initial point
Returning position during line machining.
E104 E104 bit 2 = 0 R-point
(workpiece top face + E9)
(bit 2)
.d
ve
er
2nd removal allowance
s
re
ts
gh
When bit 3 of parameter E95 is set to 1, “no escape on the Z-axis” is
selected.
ri
Unit —
ll
.A
Setting range 0, 1
N
0: Starting or ending point of shape + Tool radius + E30
O
1: Starting or ending point of shape
TI
60
Selecting an infeed position when a A

R
40
CLOSED attribute is assigned to the wall of

PO
29
line machining
E104
R
o.
(bit 3)
O
N
C
al
K
ri
Program type M
ZA
Se
A
IM
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-143
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select the method of connecting between shapes in line machining and

wall finish of face machining.
Method of connecting between shapes E104 (bit 4) 0 1

during line machining E105 (bit 5) 0 1 0 1
E104 Line machining
(bit 4) Linear Circular
(rough, finish)
Face machining
Linear Linear Circular
(wall finish)
Program type M
d .
ve
Conditions Immediate XY Circular
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
ri
Pattern
ll
Method of connecting between shapes Pattern
.A
during wall finish of face machining
E104
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Calculation based on finishing surface (New scheme)

ri
ZA
1: Calculation based on the starting position of machining (MT Pro

Se
scheme)
IM
Calculation of ZC machining feed rate

K
ZA
E104
(bit 6)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Outputting of a tool change command when the next tool is the same tool.
ht
0: Not output
ig
yr
1: Output
op
Tool change command output selection

C
E104
(bit 7)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-144
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Specifiable
1: Not specifiable
Arbitrary B-axis angle during C-axis central

line machining
E105
(bit 0)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select the surface on which to describe a line machining shape with a
gh
Z-axis offset in the ZC mode.
ri
0: Surface defined by SHIFT-R
ll
1: Surface defined by SHIFT-R + SRV-A
Machining shape specification method in
.A
line machining in ZC mode/on C-axis
N
E105 Select the surface on which to describe a C-axis line machining of the
O
(bit 1) WPC workpiece scheme.
TI
60
0: Surface defined by “Cylinder radius”

A
R
40
1: Surface defined by “Cylinder radius” + “Allowance Z value”

Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: Invalid
ZA
Se
1: Valid (compatible with M640T)

A
IM
Z-axis sign inversion at ZC/ZY during

line/face machining on the MULTIPLEX
K
ZA
HD2 side
E105
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid (compatible with M640T)

yr
op
M640T compatible operation selection on

C
the MULTIPLEX HD2 side

E105
(bit 3)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-145
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: CW direction of the machining shape that is opposite to the machining

direction on the HD1 side
1: CW direction of the machining shape that is the same as the machining
CW direction selection during line/face direction on the HD1 side
machining in the composite program on the
(Valid only when bit 3 of parameter E105 is set to 1)
MULTIPLEX HD2 side (engraving unit
E105 excluded)
(bit 4)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: C-axis angle in the opposite direction to the machining direction on the
gh
HD1 side during the following:

ri
Point machining in the ZY mode on the HD2 side;

ll
C-axis angle selection during Y-axis milling Engraving unit in the ZY mode on the HD2 side;
.A
in the composite program on the  Point machining in the XY mode on the HD2 side;
MULTIPLEX HD2 side
N
E105  Line/face machining in the XY mode on the HD2 side
O
(bit 5) 1: C-axis angle same as the machining direction on the HD1 side during
TI
the following:
60
A

R
Point machining in the ZY mode on the HD2 side;
40
PO
Program type M  Engraving unit in the ZY mode on the HD2 side;

29
Conditions Immediate 
R
Point machining in the XY mode on the HD2 side;

o.
Unit —  Line/face machining in the XY mode on the HD2 side

N
Setting range 0, 1
al
(Valid only when bit 3 of parameter E105 is set to 1)

K
ri
ZA
Select the reference plane for the program when developing chamfering
Se
tools in the LINE RGT/LINE LFT/LINE IN unit in the ZC mode line

A
machining (cylindrical surface) from the following:

IM
Reference plane for the chamfering 0: Cylinder radius + Allowance Z value

program of the LINE RGT/LINE LFT/LINE
K
IN unit in the ZC mode line machining 1: Cylinder radius

ZA
E105 (cylindrical surface)

A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Sets the operation when tool path generation using WID-R specified for
ig
pocket milling fails.

yr
0: Generating the alarm 709 CHECK DEPTH-R

op
1: Generating a tool path using the tool radius

C
Operation when tool path generation using

WID-R specified for pocket milling fails
E105 Note :
(bit 7) If this parameter is set to 1, the tool path is generated using the tool
radius instead of WID-R specified in the program, if tool generation
using WID-R fails, the machined shape does not conform to that
Program type M specified in the program.
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-146
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select whether or not to go through the initial point after TPC approach
relay point during line/face machining in a program of initial-point scheme.
0: Do not go through
Selection of the initial point as a relay point 1: Go through
to be used after TPC approach (line/face
* Valid only with the machines equipped with ATC-type turret and
machining unit)
E106 swiveling-type spindle head
(bit 0)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select the operation to perform before moving to the TPC escape relay
gh
point at the end of machining during line/face machining in a program of
initial-point scheme.
ri
0: Initial point → TPC escape relay point
ll
Selection of a relay point to be used before
.A
TPC escapement (line/face machining unit) 1: R-point → TPC escape relay point
N
E106 * Valid only with the machines equipped with ATC-type turret and not
O
equipped with swiveling-type spindle head
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Display of a warning message when a corner radius is automatically

ZA
Se
inserted to a shape during intelligent pocket milling (IPM) path creation

A
0: Not displayed
IM
Display of a warning message when a

corner radius is automatically inserted to a 1: Displayed
K
shape during intelligent pocket milling (IPM)

ZA
E108 path creation

A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Display of a warning message when an uncut residue remains due to nose

ig
R during intelligent pocket milling (IPM) path creation

yr
0: Not displayed
op
Display of a warning message when an 1: Displayed

C
uncut residue remains due to nose R during

intelligent pocket milling (IPM) path creation
E108
(bit 1)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-147
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Execution of a full-circle path movement after helical approach in

intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining
0: Executed
Execution of a full-circle path movement 1: Not executed
after helical approach in intelligent pocket
milling (IPM) machining
E108
(bit 4)
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
If two geometries are too close to each other and the tool cannot enter
gh
while executing intelligent pocket milling (IPM);
ri
0: Generates an alarm 706 ILLEGAL FIGURE DATA and continues
operation.
ll
Operation on failure of tool entry during
.A
intelligent pocket milling (IPM) 1: Generates an alarm 704 TOOL INTERFERENCE and stops operation.
N
E108
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Set the maximum difference in the radius between the start and end points
Se
of the circular arc path

A
The circular arc path is divided if this value is exceeded.

IM
K
ZA
Allowable limits of engage angle in

Increased
A

engage angle
M
E109
YA
3
01
)2
Engage angle
(c
Program type M specified by

depth-of-cut-R
ht
ig
Unit %
yr

op
C
2-148
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the maximum radius of an arc to be inserted for intelligent pocket

milling (IPM) machining.
Maximum radius of arc inserted for E110

E110
d .
ve
er
s
re
Program type M E110
ts
gh
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
ri
ll
.A
This determines the following conditions in intelligent pocket milling (IPM)
machining (Pocket milling-valley)
N
O
 Maximum amount of tool protrusion in valley-shape machining
TI
Element that determines the tool paths in  Amount of clearance in approaching into valley shape
60


A
Ignoring the valley shape where a shape diminishes when the path is
R
40
(Pocket milling-valley)
offset inward by “E111 + Tool radius”
PO
E111
29
R
o.
O
N
Program type M
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Unit %
IM

K
Set the maximum distance to avoid the wall in intelligent pocket milling
ZA
(IPM) machining.
In intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining, when a tool passes the wall
A
M
already machined again, tool movement to avoid the wall is performed

Maximum wall avoidance distance in using the set distance as the maximum avoidance distance.
YA

3
E112
01
)2
(c
Program type M
ht
ig
yr
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

op

C
2-149
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
In intelligent pocket milling (IPM), when a tool passes the

already-machined bottom face again, tool movement to avoid the bottom
face is implemented using the set distance as the avoidance distance.
Bottom face avoidance distance/clearance During helical approach for plane machining in end milling-mountain,
for recovering surface speed in plane pocket milling, pocket milling-mountain, and pocket milling-valley units, the
machining tool moves the set distance away from the hole bottom and changes its
E113 surface speed after the helical approach to the hole bottom. (*)
* This parameter is valid when E141 bit 5 = 0 and E43 > 0.

Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Set the magnification factor of the minimum arc of trochoid cycle in
gh
intelligent pocket milling (IPM) machining.
ri
ll
Magnification factor of the minimum arc of
.A
trochoid cycle in intelligent pocket milling
(IPM) machining
N
E115
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
N
al
K
ri
ZA
Set the feedrate override value to be applied during bottom face

Se
avoidance operation.
A
If “0” is set, the feedrate set in tool sequence is used.

IM
Feedrate override for non-cutting feed in

K

ZA
E116
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Set the amount of overlapping for expanding the groove width in the end
ig
milling-slot unit.
yr
op
C
Amount of overlapping in groove expanding

operation in the end milling-slot unit
E129
Program type M
Unit 10%
2-150
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Tolerance between the interpolated line segment and the ideal curve for
smooth chamfering
* When 0 is set, it is regarded as 1. When a negative value or a value of
Smooth chamfering: tolerance between the 10000 or greater is set, it is also regarded as 1.
interpolated line segment and the ideal
Interpolated line
curve
segment
E130 End
E130 or less point
Ideal curve
Program type M Start point
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
This is the element used for automatically determining the depth-of-cut R
gh
in the tool sequence in the line machining unit.
ri
(The set value is invalid for the LINE CTR unit.)
ll
Element that automatically determines
.A
depth-of-cut-R (line machining)
N
E131
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 10%
N
al
K
ri
ZA
Sets the radial interference clearance during approach/retraction for the

Se
round bar face milling unit.

A
IM
Example : Reciprocating milling in the Y-axis direction with wall

K
ZA
E132
A
Radial interference clearance of round bar

M
face milling unit

YA
E132
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
Program type M
E132 Wall
yr
op
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

C
2-151
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When a helical approach is set, the tool changes its surface speed to the
value set in the tool sequence after moving the distance set for parameter
E133 away from the hole bottom.
Surface speed change position in helical

approach * This parameter is valid when E141 bit 5 = 1
E133
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
ts
Sets the clearance from the machining face when carrying out the
gh
machining for an engraving unit in a MAZATROL program.
ri
ll
Clearance in the tool axial direction in
.A
E134
engraving units
N
Machining
E134
O
face
Depth
TI
60
HoleA
bottom
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions Immediate Workpiece

R
o.
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in

N

al
K
ri
Select the feedrate for C-axis plane machining in the ZC mode

ZA
Se
0: The vale set in tool sequence

A
1: The value set in tool sequence SHIFT-R/( SHIFT-R + SRV-A)

IM
Selection of the feedrate in C-axis plane

K
machining in the ZC mode

ZA
E141
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Start machining near the starting point of the shape

ig
1: Determine the starting point based on the quadrant near the approach
yr
point
op
Face milling-/end milling-top unit

C
Cutting start point determination method at

manual approach point setting
E141
(bit 1)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-152
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Lower left (X/+Y) of the shape, viewed from the end face (back face)
direction
1: Determine the approach point based on the specified shape
Round bar face milling unit
Approach point/cutting start point before
automatic approach point setting
E141
(bit 2)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Determine the cutting start point at the lower left (X/+Y) of the shape
gh
when E141bit2 = 0
ri
Or determine the cutting start point from the specified shape when
ll
Round bar face milling unit E141bit2 = 1
.A
Cutting start point after automatic approach 1: Determine the cutting start point near the approach point.
N
point setting
E141
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Surface speed change mode in helical approach

Se
0: After the helical approach to the hole bottom, the tool moves the
A
distance set for E113 away from the hole bottom and changes its
IM
surface speed.
Surface speed change mode selection in
K
helical approach 1: After the helical approach to a position the distance set for E133 away
ZA
from the hole position, the tool changes its surface speed at that
E141
position.
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Continue machining with no alarm

ig
1: Generating alarm 702 FIGURE DEFINITION ERROR

yr
op
Operation upon specifying a figure of eight

C
for free closed pattern of line/face

machining unit
E141
(bit 7)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-153
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-4 User parameter EIA/ISO (F)
Classification USER Display title EIA/ISO
When (L74/L75) × (F1/100) is assigned as the allowable acceleration

attained before corner deceleration is started, the theoretical value Vo of
the corner deceleration in G61.1 will be changed to the following Vo’
value:
G61.1 corner deceleration coefficient (%)
Vo’ = Vo × F1/100
F1
.
Note :
d
ve
The assigned value is invalid if minus. If 0 is assigned, the deceleration
er
Program type M, E coefficient will be regarded as 100, or if more than 500 is assigned, the
s
Conditions Immediate deceleration coefficient will be regarded as 500.
re
Unit %
ts
gh
ri
When (L74/L75) × (F2/100) is assigned as the allowable acceleration
attained before arc radius speed clamping is started, the theoretical value
ll
.A
Vc of the arc radius clamping speed in G61.1 will be changed to the
following Vc’ value:
N
O
G61.1 arc-clamping speed coefficient (%)
TI
Vc’ = Vc × (F2/100)
60
F2
A
R
40
PO
Note :
29
The assigned value is invalid if minus. If 0 is assigned, the deceleration

R
Program type M, E
o.
coefficient will be regarded as 100, or if more than 500 is assigned, the

N
Conditions Immediate deceleration coefficient will be regarded as 500.

al
Unit %
ri
ZA

Se
0: High-speed smoothing control invalid

IM
1: High-speed smoothing control valid

K
(No deceleration at very slightly stepped sections)

ZA
3: High-speed smoothing control valid

High-speed smoothing control (Deceleration at very slightly stepped sections)
A
M
YA
F3
3
01
Program type E
)2

(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1, 3
ig
yr
op
C
2-154
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the distance, succeeding and preceding the point to be modified, to

judge the shape formed by the 3 axes under tool tip point control in the
5-axis fairing function
Note : When 0 is set, the distance is regarded as 1 mm/0.04 in.
Distance to judge the shape formed by 3 Example : When the setting is F4 = 5000 [0.5 mm (0.02 in)]
axes under tool tip point control in the 5-axis
fairing function
Point to be modified
F4 0.15 mm (0.006 in) 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
.
0.15 mm (0.006 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
d
0.2 mm (0.01 in)
ve
0.2 mm (0.01 in)
er
Succeeding Preceding 0.2 mm (0.01 in)
s
distance distance
re
Z
Program type E 0.5 mm 0.5 mm
Y (0.02 in) (0.02 in)
ts
gh
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in X
ri
ll
.A
Set the distance, succeeding and preceding the point to be modified, to
judge the shape formed by the rotary 2 axes in the 5-axis fairing function
N
O
Note : When 0 is set, the distance is regarded as 1°.
TI
Distance to judge the shape formed by
60
rotary 2 axes in the 5-axis fairing function

A
R
40
PO
29
F5
R
o.
O
N
Program type E
al
ri
ZA
Se
Unit 0.0001°
A

IM
Specify the minimum height of stepped sections at which the axis feed is
K
not to be decelerated in high-speed smoothing control mode.

ZA
A
Minimum allowable height of stepped

M
sections for deceleration in high-speed

YA
smoothing control mode

3
F6
01
)2
(c
Program type E
ht

ig
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

yr

op
C
2-155
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value (0)
F7
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Corner deceleration speed Vo determined by the optimal corner
gh
deceleration function is adjusted using the value set in this parameter.
ri
F8
Vo = Vo × 100
ll
.A
Corner deceleration speed coefficient for
The speed is not adjusted if 0 is set here. (Setting is handled as 100.)
high-speed smoothing control
N
Setting more than 2000 is disposed as 2000.
O
F8
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
o.
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Circular cutting clamp speed Vc is adjusted using the value set in this
Se
parameter.
A
IM
F9
Vc = Vc × 100
Circular cutting clamp speed coefficient for
K
high-speed smoothing control The speed is not adjusted if 0 is set here. (Setting is handled as 100.)
ZA
Setting more than 500 is disposed as 500.

A
F9
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Return amount of pecking in the tool path of tap high-speed deep-hole

ig
cycle
yr
op
C
Return amount during tap high-speed

deep-hole cycle
F10 F10
Pecking
Program type M, E F10
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-156
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
(I, J, K) I d
Machining x = x0 + ×
d F11 2
pattern
Vector J d
y = y0 + ×
Vector constant for 3-D tool-diameter normal F11 2
compensation to face K d
z = z0 + ×
F11 2
F11
Coordinates of
Coordinates of tool center
program (x0, y0, z0) (x, y, z) MPL057
Program type —
. d
Conditions Next block
ve
F11 = I2+J2+K2 if this parameter is 0.
er
0.001 mm/0.0001 in
Unit
(0.001°)
s
re
ts
Return amount of pecking in drill high-speed deep-hole cycle or in G73
gh
tool path
ri
ll
.A
Return amount of pecking in drill
high-speed deep-hole cycle or in G73
N
O
F12
TI
F12
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E Pecking

F12
R

o.
O
N
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

C
MPL058
al

K
ri
ZA
The allowance amount provided for the tool to stop moving at rapid-feed
Se
just in front of the preceding hole during a deep-hole drilling cycle or

A
IM
during G83/G283 tool path

K
Allowance amount of rapid-feed stop in

ZA
deep-hole drilling cycle or in G83/G283

A
F13
M
F13
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
Conditions Next block F13

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in MPL059

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
Rotation center of coordinates (axis of

abscissa)
F14
Program type —
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
Setting range 0 to ±99999999
2-157
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Rotation center of coordinates (axis of

ordinate)
F15
Program type —
. d
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Vector of coordinate rotation (axis of abscissa)
gh
ri
ll
.A
Horizontal length of coordinate rotation
N
F16
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
Vector of coordinate rotation (axis of ordinate)

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Vertical length of coordinate rotation

K
ZA
F17
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

)2

(c
ht
Angle of coordinate rotation

ig
yr
op
Angle of coordinate rotation

C
F18
Program type —
Unit 0.001°
2-158
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Maximum radius difference that causes spiral interpolation to be

performed when the arc-drawing start point and end point radii that have
been specified in the arc command do not agree.
Specified end point R  F19: Spiral interpolation
Maximum permissible difference in arc R > F19: Alarm
radius
F19
R End point
according to
start point
Program type M, E
d .
Center
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in Start point MPL060
s
re
ts
That fixed value of the scaling factor which becomes valid in the case that
gh
no value is set (using the address P) in the same block as that of G51.
b
ri
Scaling factor =
Machining a
ll
pattern
.A
Fixed value of scaling factor
b
N
F20
O
a
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
Conditions Next command Program pattern

Scaling center MPL061
R
o.
Unit 1/1000000
O
N

al
The automatic corner override using the G62 code becomes valid when
ri
ZA
the following condition of the shape angle is met:

Se
Shape angle  F21

IM
Maximum inside-corner angle available with Pattern angle

K
automatic corner override (G62)

ZA
F21
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
Conditions Next command

01
Overriding occurs here. MPL062

Unit °
)2

(c
ht
The area in which automatic corner overriding using the G62 code occurs
ig
yr
F22
op
Deceleration area of automatic corner

overriding (G62)
C
F22
Program type E
Conditions Next command
Overriding occurs here. MPL063
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
Unit
(0.0001°)
2-159
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Only the last G92SsQqRr command is enabled.

1: All the G92SsQqRr commands are enabled.
2 to 8: Not used.
Handling of G92 (spindle speed clamp 9: The spindle speed clamp value is invalid at restart.
value) command at restart
F27
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set chamfering angle at thread portion in thread cutting cycle.
gh
G276 and G292 are used for thread cutting cycle, if F30 is set to 0.
G76 and G92 are used for thread cutting cycle, if F30 is set to 1.
ri
ll
.A
Threading chamfering angle
F28
N
F28
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E Chamfering data NM211-00219

29
Conditions Immediate Note : Set 45 or 60.

o.
O
N
Unit °
C
al
Setting range 45, 60

K
ri
ZA
The override value of automatic corner overriding using the G62 code
Se
A
IM
F29
F× Specified feed rate F
100
Override value of automatic corner
K
ZA
overriding (G62)
F29
A
M
YA
MPL064
Program type E Note :
3
01
Conditions Next command The automatic corner overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Select a G-code type.

ig
0: G-code series for machining centers

yr
op
1: G-code series for turning machines

C
Settings other than the above are all handled as 0.

G-code type selection
F30 Note :
Do not disturb the default setting. It is a fixed value for your machine
model.
Program type E
Unit Decimal number
Setting range 0, 1
2-160
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select a roughing priority type for program layout (Rearrangement of

milling tool sequence).
0: Rearranging a roughing tool, a normal tool, and a finishing tool, in that

order
order
Further rearranging each tool with priority given to the same tool (with
roughing/finishing tool distinction)
2: Milling to be excluded from tool rearrangement.
Select a roughing priority type for program
.
layout 3: Rearranging each tool with priority given to the same tool (with
d
ve
roughing/finishing tool distinction)
F31
er
order
s
re
Further rearranging normal tools in the order of spot drilling  drilling 
end milling  chamfering  boring  reaming  back spot facing 
ts
back boring  tapping
gh
ri
order
ll
Further rearranging normal tools in the order of spot drilling  drilling 
.A
end milling  chamfering  boring  reaming  back spot facing 
Program type M
N
back boring  tapping
O
Conditions After stop of movement In addition, for the manual programming unit, assigning priority
TI
Unit Decimal number numbers, judged from the tools to be used
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Select operation when argument R is omitted from the maximum/minimum

spindle speed setting.
R
o.
O
N
0: Alarm
C
Operation when argument R is omitted from 1: Handled as R1

al
the maximum/minimum spindle speed

ri
ZA
setting
Se
F32
IM
K
ZA
Program type E
A
M
Unit —
YA
Setting range 0, 1
3
Select whether to make the incorporation of the tool length into

01
current-position counter Z valid when tool length correction is in a

)2
canceled status, irrespective of whether the program selected on the

POSITION display is EIA/ISO or MAZATROL.
(c
Incorporation of the MAZATROL tool length

ht
into the current position counter 0: Valid

ig
F33 1: Invalid
yr
(bit 0)
op
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-161
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Tool management function

F33
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Check during automatic operation
gh
1: Do not check during automatic operation
ri
* When “Do not check during automatic operation” is selected, data that
ll
Selection of check in the course of cannot be altered in the course of automatic operation can be altered via
.A
automatic operation when data is network.
input/output through network
N
F33
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Method of selecting the restart position in the MAZATROL program

Se
0: Selection from program layout

IM
1: By setting [WNo./UNo./SNo REPEAT]

Selection of restart setting method in the
K
MAZATROL program
ZA
F33
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Automatic tool identification from the B-axis angle and the milling spindle’s
ig
indexing angle when the length of a turning tool is manually measured

yr
using TOOL EYE

op
Automatic tool identification of turning tools 0: Not set

C
in TOOL EYE manual tool length

1: Set
measurement
F33
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-162
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: The indication at the selection of the fixed cycle remains as it is

throughout the cycle. (No updating)
1: The indication changes to show the actual modal condition of the cycle
operation.
Modal indication of modal group 1 in the
fixed cycle mode
F33
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: The indication at the G68.5 mode selection remains as it is.
gh
1: G122.1 (radius data input for X-axis ON) is indicated during the G68.5
ri
mode.
ll
Modal indication on "radius data input for
.A
“X-axis” in the mode of 3D coordinate
conversion (G68.5)
N
F33
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Invalid (G52.1 hold)

Se
1: Valid
A
IM
Cancellation of the ram spindle offset

K
command (G52.1) when the RESET key is

ZA
pressed, valid/invalid
F34
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
The data number and value for tool length offset on the POSITION display
ig
upon execution of a G49 (Tool length offset OFF) command

yr
op
0: Not changed at all

C
Representation on the POSITION display 1: Reset to zero (0)

by the G49 command
F34
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-163
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
To manually override the parts count (current number of machined

workpieces) in the middle of automatic operation
0: Impossible (The operation caused by the ATC and RETURN settings in

Parts count override in the course of the end unit occurs with respect to the parts count.)
automatic operation 1: Possible (The operation caused by the ATC and RETURN settings in
F34 the end unit occurs irrespectively of the parts count.)
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set the tool change command output position of the tool to use in manual
gh
program unit when WPC is selected for workpiece scheme.
ri
0: Always output at the machining end position of the previous unit.
ll
Tool change command output position of
1: Set the output position in manual program unit.
.A
the tool to use in manual program unit when
(“RETURN” is automatically set at the same time as default.)
WPC is selected for workpiece scheme
N
F34
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Type A (5-axis machining available)

Se
1: Type B (MPro compatible)

A
IM
Programming type for inclined-surface

K
machining
ZA
F34
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Display the B-axis rotational center position.

ig
1: Display the tool tip position when a MAZATROL program is selected or

yr
when MAZATROL tool length is valid (bit 3 of parameter F93 is set to

op
1).
C
Current position display of the tool nose at

reset
F34
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-164
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: No compensating movement on an unspecified axis till completion of

the specified movement
1: Simultaneous compensating movement on all the axes including un-
specified one, on condition that the tool number is not changed
Compensating movement for a T-code with
* Bit 6 of F34 is valid only when G-code series T (Turning machines) is
a movement command in one block
selected and F161 bit 2 is set to 1.
F34
(bit 6)
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Application of the Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET values prepared for the
gh
program that is currently selected from the STANDARD PROGRAM
ri
storage area for the automatic operation
ll
1: No application of the Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET values prepared on
.A
Application of Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET the SETUP INFORMATION display
values for the tape operation mode
N
F34
O
TI
(bit 7)
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Select whether or not multiple material pieces can be arranged on the

Se
VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display.

A
IM
0: Arrangement of a single piece

Multiple material pieces arrangement on the
1: Arrangement of multiple pieces
K
VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR

ZA
display
F35
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Automatic setting of the material model for a MAZATROL program of

ig
initial-point scheme on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR

yr
display.
op
Automatic setting of the material model for

a MAZATROL program of initial-point 0: Valid
C
scheme on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 1: Invalid

F35 3D MONITOR display
(bit 1)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-165
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Machine status when assigning G-code for a cutting function not to be

represented with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for
automatic operation.
Machine status when assigning G-code for
a cutting function not to be represented with 0: Continuing the operation by canceling the interference check function
the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being for material model
F35 selected for automatic operation 1: Alarm stop
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Machine status when a program prepared and stored for the Hard Disk
gh
operation is called up as a subprogram with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
SHIELD being selected for automatic operation.
ri
Machine status when a program prepared
and stored for the Hard Disk operation is 0: Continuing the operation by canceling the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
ll
.A
called up as a subprogram with the SHIELD for automatic operation
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being 1: Alarm stop
F35
N
selected for automatic operation
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
Conditions At power on [Related parameters]

R
o.
Unit —
O
F37 bit 5
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Representation of cutting-off or parting operation on the VIRTUAL

ri
ZA
MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays

Se
0: No representation
IM
Taking off a material model’s part on the (Cut-off part remains shown in its original place and undergoes the
VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR
K
interference check.)
displays
ZA
F35 1: Representation
(Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.)
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Traction tailstock or traction work rest operation when [ALL AXIS ZERO
RET] is selected on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display
ig
yr
Movement of traction tailstock or traction 0: Zero-point return

op
work rest when [ALL AXIS ZERO RET] is 1: No zero-point return

C
selected on the VIRTUAL MACHINING

F35 display
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-166
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select whether or not it is to be indicated by an alarm message that the

feed-overriding value has been changed in the flow of automatic operation
with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being active.
Alarming for a change of feed-overriding
value with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY 0: Alarming
SHIELD being active for automatic 1: No alarming
F35 operation
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Tool offset in the current position display in the G52.5 coordinate system
gh
0: Do not consider
ri
1: Consider
ll
Current position display in the G52.5
.A
coordinate system * This parameter is valid for automatic operation and virtual machining, but
N
F36 not valid in tool path check.
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
M-code displayed as search results in EIA/ISO program modal restarting

ZA
Se
mode
A
0: Do not set automatically

IM
Automatic M-code setting in EIA/ISO 1: Set automatically (up to six M-codes preceding immediately)
K
program modal restarting mode

ZA
F36
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
S-code displayed as search results in EIA/ISO program modal restarting

ig
mode
yr
0: Do not set automatically

op
Automatic S-code setting in EIA/ISO 1: Set automatically (immediately preceding S-code)

C
program modal restarting mode

F36
(bit 2)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-167
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Example :
Error check function in cases where If numerical data is omitted, such as “G90G0X”, alarm 807 ILLEGAL
numerical data is omitted in the EIA
FORMAT is displayed.
program or in MDI mode
F36
(bit 3)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Whether or not the chuck and tailstock areas are to be displayed for an
gh
EIA/ISO program on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display
ri
0: Not displayed
Display of the chuck and tailstock areas for
ll
1: Displayed
.A
an EIA/ISO program on the TRACE or
TOOL PATH CHECK display
F36
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Offset in the XY direction at the time when the tool offset of the touch
ri
ZA
sensor is specified by the G43P1 command (tool length compensation for

Se
a turning tool) for geometry offset X/Y on the TOOL OFFSET display
IM
0: Invalid
K
Only the Z-axis offset is valid.

ZA
1: Valid
The X-/Y-/Z-axis offset is valid.
A
Touch sensor offset in X/Y direction

M
F36 Y-axis
YA
X-axis
(bit 5)
3
01
Z-axis
)2
(c
Geometry offset Z
ht
Program type E (tool length)

Geometry offset Y
ig
yr
Unit — Geometry offset X

op
Setting range 0, 1
C
2-168
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
System Command Minimum Maximum

F36 bit 6
Number of effective decimal digits in the of units unit value value
tool axis vector components (I, J, K) for tool
mm 0.0001 –99999.9999 99999.9999
tip point control type 2 (G43.5) and cutting 0
F36 point command type 2 (G43.9) in 0.00001 –9999.99999 9999.99999
(bit 6) mm 0.0000001 –99.9999999 99.9999999
1
in 0.0000001 –99.9999999 99.9999999
Program type E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
.A
Rotational axis prefiltering
F36
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Invalid
ri
ZA
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
Temporary cancellation of geometry

compensation for G0 in the mode of tool tip
K
point control
ZA
F37
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
For turning machines only: Alarming for a subprogram call command

ig
given in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit

yr
0: No alarming
op
Subprogram call given in manual program 1: Alarming

C
unit (for turning machines only)

F37
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-169
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Z-axis movement immediately after ATC during MDI operation when the
MAZATROL tool length is valid (bit 3 of parameter F93 is set to 1)
0: Perform tool length compensation.

1: Do not perform tool length compensation.
Tool length compensation in MDI operation
F37
(bit 2)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select the timing of clearing the message that is displayed at #3006
gh
(stop).
ri
0: At the end of automatic operation
ll
1: At the execution of the next block
.A
Timing of clearing #3006 (stop) message
N
F37
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Set the coordinate system to be used for linear interpolation when a rapid
Se
traverse command has been specified during tool tip point control.
A
IM
0: Table coordinate system

Selection of the coordinate system for
1: Machine coordinate system
linear interpolation on specification of a
K
rapid traverse command during tool tip

ZA
F37 point control

A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Used to select operation when running programs in the hard disk or

ig
through Ethernet with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD enabled for

yr
automatic operation.
op
Operation when running programs in the 0: Continue operation

hard disk or through Ethernet with the
C
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD enabled 1: Depend on the setting of bit 3 of parameter F35
F37 for automatic operation
(bit 5)
Program type E
Unit —
F35 bit 3
Setting range 0, 1
2-170
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the operation pattern when “ATC” is not set in end unit
0: Same operation as when “1” is set for “ATC”

(The tool is returned and the axes move to the returning position.)
Operation when “ATC” is not specified in 1: Same operation as when “0” is set for “ATC”
end unit (The tool is not returned.)
F37
(bit 6)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Options displayed in the tool model type selection window are limited
gh
according to the selected tool type (milling tool or turning tool).
ri
0: Not set
ll
Options displayed in the tool model type 1: Set
.A
selection window according to the tool type
N
F38
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Tool index number and that of the tool to change when [TOOLDATA
ZA
Se
MOVE] is selected on the TOOL DATA display for machining centers

A
(without multiple tool data registration specifications)

IM
Handling of tool index numbers (after tool 0: Exchange

K
data exchange) 1: Do not exchange

ZA
F38
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Large
ig
1: Small
yr
op
Font size setting for EIA/ISO program

C
display and EIA MONITOR display

F38
(bit 2)
Program type E
Conditions At power back on
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-171
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
In automatic setting of LENGTH/TOOL SET value on the TOOL DATA

display, the result of calculation is set:
0: By tapping [AUTO SET]
Input method in automatic setting of 1: By tapping the [OK] button after tapping [AUTO SET]
LENGTH/TOOL SET value
F38
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Negative tool diameter setting in tool data
gh
0: Impossible
ri
If a negative value is input, alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT
occurs.
ll
.A
Negative tool diameter setting 1: Possible
N
F38
O
(bit 4) * When this parameter is set to “1”, alarm 654 TOOL DATA ERROR will
TI
occur if a tool to which a negative tool diameter is input is used in the
60
A
MAZATROL program.
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: Displayed
ZA
Se
1: Not displayed
A
IM
Reverse pattern display/hidden for milling * This parameter is valid when bit 6 of parameter K102 is set to 1 (milling
K
tool rotation direction tool rotational direction setting enabled).

ZA
F38
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Default setting of the modal plane selection G-code to be used for an

ig
EIA/ISO program (called by a subprogram unit) and a manual program

yr
unit.
op
Plane to be used for an EIA/ISO program 0: G17

C
(called by a subprogram unit) and a manual 1: G18

program unit 2: G19
F39
Settings other than the above are all handled as 0.
Program type M
Unit —
2-172
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Tape operation
1: Hard disc operation
3: Ethernet operation
Operating method selection in tape mode * Do not set value “2”.
F40
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set a threading termination waiting time.
gh
F41 = 0
No waiting time
ri
ll
F41 = 1 to 255
.A
Setting × 1.7 ms
N
X-axis
O
F41 < F41’ < F41”
TI
60
Threading termination waiting time A Incomplete thread Complete thread

R
40
processing
PO
29
F41
R
F41
o.
F41’
N
F41”
al
Z-axis
K
ri
ZA
Gradual deceleration Uniform feed

Se
on the Z-axis
A
Note :
IM
Program type M An excessively high setting may cause the thread of the run-out section
K
to be destroyed.
ZA
Unit 1.7 ms
A
M

YA
Distance (r) between the starting point of movement at measuring speed

and the measuring point
3
This data is used when argument R is omitted in G37 command format.

01
)2
Deceleration area r during Z-axis G37 Z_ Rr D_ F_;

(c
measurement (G37)
ht
F42
ig
yr
op
Program type E
C

Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-173
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Range (d) where the tool should stop

This data is used when argument D is omitted in G37 command format.
G37 Z_ R_ Dd F_;
Measurement area d during Z-axis
(G37)
measurement
F43
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Measuring speed (f)
gh
This data is used when argument F is omitted in G37 command format.
ri
G37 Z_ R_ D_ Ff;
ll
.A
Measuring speed f (G37)
N
F44
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit mm/min/0.1 in/min

O
N

al
K
ri
The name of the variable specified by the user macro SETVN is displayed
ZA
Se
(Name display only. No setting is possible on the PARAMETER display.)

A
F47: Name of #500

IM
 
Common variable name
K
F47 F66: Name of #519

ZA
to
A
F66
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
0: L74/L75
ht
ig
1: With modal G00, all the axes are accelerated/decelerated at the

yr
smaller of the rates for the axes set for parameters M1/N1.
With modal G01, all the axes are accelerated/decelerated at the
op
G53.1 acceleration selection during smaller rate between those for the axes set for parameters M3/N2.
C
pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
F68 Note :
(bit 0) When F68 bit 0 = 1, the composite acceleration/deceleration speed for
G53.1 changes if either of the following conditions is satisfied.
 G61.1 command
Program type E
 G61.2 command
 G64 command (only for modal G00 while constant G00 inclination
Unit — control is enabled)
Setting range 0, 1
2-174
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Addition of tool position offset to the current position

0: Added
1: Not added
Addition of tool position offset to the current
position, enabled/disabled
F68
(bit 4)
Program type E
.d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
This parameter is used to select the method of specifying the EIA/ISO
gh
program restarting position. Two methods are available:
ri
0: The whole program, including the subprograms, is subjected to this
processing. Set the sequence number, block number and number
ll
.A
EIA/ISO program restart method of times of repetition as searched from the beginning part of the
main program.
N
F69 1: The subprogram including the desired restart position can be
O
specified. After setting the work number of the corresponding
TI
60
program, set the sequence number, block number, and number of

A
times of repetition as searched from the beginning part.
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
When the EIA/ISO program is called up as a subprogram, this parameter

ri
ZA
Se
is used to validate/invalidate multiple-machining and the specified number

A
of times to restart the program.

IM
Availability of multiple-machining and 0: Multiple-machining is ineffective for the EIA/ISO subprogram.

designated number of repetitions in the Specified number of times to restart the EIA/ISO subprogram is
K
EIA/ISO subprogram effective.

ZA
F70 1: Multiple-machining is effective for the EIA/ISO subprogram.

A
Specified number of times to restart the EIA/ISO subprogram is

M
ineffective.
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Tool priority and multiple-machining priority selection

ig
0: Identical-tool priority function is executed first.

yr
1: Multiple-machining function is executed first.

op
Example : Multiple-machining of two workpieces using a spot drill

C
Machining order control F71 = 0 F71 = 1
F71
Program type M
MPL065
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-175
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
To select whether the shape correction function of the MAZATROL

program is always effective or ineffective.
0: Invalid
1: Shape correction function valid
Selection of the shape correction function of
the MAZATROL program
F72
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time an
ts
M-code is output.
gh
ri
ll
.A
M-code execution time for time study
N
F73
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.01 s
O
N

al
The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time an
ri
ZA
S-code is output.
Se
A
IM
S-code execution time for time study

K
ZA
F74
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit 0.01 s
)2

(c
The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time a
ht
T-code is output.
ig
yr
op
T-code execution time for time study

C
F75
Program type M, E
Unit 0.01 s
2-176
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time a
B-code is output.
B-code execution time for time study
F76
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit 0.01 s
s
re
ts
The basis rate for the NC to judge whether the tool is to be displayed in
gh
reverse display mode on the TOOL DATA display to indicate that the life
of that tool is approaching expiry.
ri
If bit 2 in F82 is 0:
ll
.A
Basis rate for tool life judgment When the rate of the operation time to the estimated life exceeds the
setting of the F77 parameter, the NC will judge the tool to be approaching
N
expiry.
F77
O
TI
If bit 2 in F82 is 1:
60
When the residual life decreases below the setting of the F77 parameter,
A
the NC will judge the tool to be approaching expiry.
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
Note :
o.
Unit %, min The above judgment function is invalid if this parameter is set to 0.
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Selection of separation ratio between side view and front view (or rear
Se
view) when two split plane indication mode has been selected.
A
F78 = 0 .......................1:1
IM
F78 = 1 .......................2:1
Selection of separating ratio of graphic F78 = 2 .......................5:1
K
display
ZA
Example : F78 = 1
F78
A
Graphic display
M
YA
Side view Front view

Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit — NM211-00217
2:1
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-177
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
Holding of memory monitor address
0: No
1: Yes
Selection of menu display
0: Menu for machining centers
1: Menu for turning centers
Key history function
0: Yes
1: No
Tool search method
d .
0: In order of TNo.
ve
—
1: In order of TNo. of tools currently in use
er
* Only bit 3 becomes valid after power-on.
s
F79
re
Selection of tap gear
0: M32 system
ts
1: M640M Pro system
gh
(M640M/M PLUS system)
ri
Display of tools currently in use
ll
0: No
.A
1: Yes
Initial value of synchronous/asynchronous tapping
N
during tapping tool registration
O
TI
0: Synchronous tapping
60
A 1: Asynchronous tapping
Program type M, E * This parameter is valid only when a sync
R
40
Immediate tapping option is provided.

PO
Conditions
29
(Bit 3: At power on) Display of a MAZATROL monitor window

R
0: Yes
o.
Unit —
O
1: No
N

al
K
ri
ZA
76543210 MAZATROL function

Se
0: Valid
IM
1: Invalid (Only EIA-related displays valid)

Automatic display of the navigation window on the
K
occurrence of an alarm
ZA
0: Display off
1: Display on
A
M
MAINTENANCE CHECK display at power on

0: Not displayed
YA
1: Displayed
3
Third page of the MAINTENANCE CHECK display

01
0: Not displayed
—
)2
1: Displayed
Automatic display of the GRAPHIC
(c
F80 MAINTENANCE display on the occurrence of an

ht
alarm
ig
0: Display off
yr
1: Display on
op
Learning of cutting conditions

0: Invalid
C
1: Valid
Editing on the CUTTING CONDITION LEARN
display
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Destination of spare tool correction by the
Program type M, E workpiece measurement
0: Tool length and tool diameter of the TOOL
Conditions Immediate DATA display
Unit — 1: Tool length and tool diameter correction of the
TOOL DATA display
2-178
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Program management function
0: Normal
1: Editing prohibited (in 9000’s)
0: Normal
1: Displaying prohibited (in 9000’s)
Fixed value (0)
Add-in MAZATROL
.
— 0: Invalid
d
ve
1: Valid
F81
er
s
0: Normal
re
1: Editing prohibited (in 8000, 9000’s)
ts
gh
0: Normal
ri
1: Displaying prohibited (in 8000, 9000’s)
ll
Retaining the program transfer settings
.A
0: Invalid
1: Valid
N
O
Program type M, E Input error prevention function
TI
Conditions At power on 0: Invalid
60
Unit —
A 1: Valid
R
40
PO

29
76543210
o.
O
N
0: Characteristics estimation result graph display off

C
1: Characteristics estimation results graph display on

al
K
ri
Selection of inch/metric representation in POSITION

ZA
Se
display, TOOL DATA display, and TOOL OFFSET

A
display modes
IM
0: Invalid 1: Valid
Basis for tool life judgment
K
0: Whether the rate of the operation time to the

ZA
estimated life is greater than the setting of the F77

A
parameter
M
1: Whether the residual life is less than the setting of

YA
— the F77 parameter

X-axis diameter display on the POSITION display
F82
3
0: Invalid 1: Valid
01
Select whether to make the incorporation of tool nose

)2
width valid when grooving tool length is auto-set for

(c
the B-axis type of turret.

0: Invalid 1: Valid
ht
Index tool wear correction setup during automatic

ig
operation
yr
0: Impossible 1: Possible
op
Note :
C
1. Bit 1 in parameter F82 is valid only when an inch/metric unit system

change simplifying function (option) is provided.
Program type M 2. Bit 4 in parameter F82 is valid only for the X-axis for which bit 5 in
Conditions Immediate M18 is set to 0, and the diameter value is displayed in turning mode.
(Only for the INTEGREX e Series)
Unit —
2-179
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
Output of the alarm history data as text data

0: Valid
— 1: Invalid
Operation record function
F83 0: Invalid
1: Valid
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Select whether or not the tool offset data is taken into account for the
gh
POSITION counter during automatic operation or virtual machining with
EIA/ISO programs
ri
Selection of whether or not the tool offset 0: Not taken into account
ll
data is taken into account for the POSITION
.A
1: Taken into account
counter during the execution of EIA/ISO
N
F84 programs
O
* In the tool path check, the tool offset value is not taken into account
(bit 0)
TI
disregarding the setting of this parameter.
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Switches the argument to be used in a fixed cycle program.

ZA
Se
0: B is used.
A
1: J is used.
IM
Switching of arguments B and J in a fixed

K
cycle
ZA
F84
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Group number assignment

ig
1: Tool number assignment

yr
op
Spare tool search method for EIA/ISO

C
programs
F84
(bit 2)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-180
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Valid when the workpiece offset is specified after a system variable is

entered.
1: Valid immediately after a system variable is entered.
Timing to validate new workpiece offset

data specified with a system variable
F84
(bit 3)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: M32, M PLUS, M640M, or M640M Pro system
gh
1: M2 system
ri
ll
.A
Machine coordinate system (G92) selection
N
F84
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: Always incremental data command

ZA
Se
1: Based on the modal G90/G91 command

A
IM
Incremental/absolute data command in

K
high-speed machining mode

ZA
F84
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Not operated until the buffer is full.

ig
1: Operated at a unit of EOB.

yr
op
C
Tape run method

F84
(bit 6)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-181
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When no tool data has been set during EIA/ISO program execution with
the MAZATROL tool diameter data enabled (parameter F92 bit 7 = 1) or
the MAZATROL tool length data enabled (parameter F93 bit 3 = 1):
0: Operation is executed.
Operation executed/not executed when the
1: Causes alarm 953 TOOL DATA INPUT PROCESS ERROR
tool data has not bee set
F84
(bit 7)
Note :
Whether the alarm 953 TOOL DATA INPUT PROCESS ERROR occurs
Program type E
.
or not in the MDI mode depends on the setting of bit 3 of parameter
d
ve
Conditions At power on F123.
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Sets the condition where machining with table rotation is possible.
gh
0: Always possible
ri
1: Possible outside the area only
ll
.A
Table rotational machining
F85
N
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Enables/disables radial interference check

ri
ZA
Se
0: Enabled
A
1: Disabled
IM
Radial interference check

K
When 0 is set, the operation on detecting interference can be set for bit 5
ZA
F85 of parameter F92.

A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Sets the type of coordinate system for controlling the tool tip point.
ig
0: The table coordinate system that rotates according to the particular

yr
rotation of the C-axis is defined as the programming coordinate

system.
op
Type of coordinate system for controlling

C
the tool tip point 1: The work coordinate system is defined as the programming coordinate
F85 system.
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-182
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Sets the tool tip point control scheme.

0: Uni-axial rotation interpolation
1: Joint interpolation
 When 0 is set:
Y In the case of uni-axial rotational

R2 interpolation, the pivot point of
the machine moves as denoted
d .
RC1
by the arrow.
ve
The tool attitude vector moves in
R1 a plane including R1 and R2.
er
Tool tip
Z
s
re
ts
Tool tip point control scheme
Face horizontal to R1 and R2
gh
X
F85
ri
(bit 3)
ll
.A
 When 1 is set:
N
O
TI
In the case of joint interpolation,
60
A Y the pivot point of the machine

moves as denoted by the arrow.
R
40
RC2
The tool attitude vector moves
PO
R2
29
along a conical surface.

R
o.
R1
O
N
Tool tip Z
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Program type M, E
A
X Lateral face of the cone

IM
Unit —
K
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
A
Fixed value (0)

M
YA
3
—
01
F85
)2
(bit 4)
(c
ht
ig
Program type —
yr
Conditions —
op
Unit —
C
Setting range —
2-183
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets whether G68.2 is canceled upon pressing the RESET key.

0: Valid
1: Invalid
G68.2 modal setting upon pressing the
RESET key
F85
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
Sets whether surface definition  is to be displayed.
ts
gh
0 : Not displayed
ri
1 : Displayed
ll
.A
Display of surface definition 
F85
N
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Sets whether the B-axis unclamping code is to be output before B-axis

ri
ZA
indexing.
Se
0: To output
IM
Output of the B-axis unclamping code 1: Not to output

K
before B-axis indexing

ZA
F85 (Valid only for MAZATROL programs of the INTEGREX and INTEGREX-e
(bit 7) series.)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Output of M250 (Spindle Speed Confirmation) before a turning feed

ig
0: Not output
yr
1: Output
op
Output of M250 (Spindle Speed

Confirmation) before a turning feed,
C
valid/invalid
F86
(bit 0)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-184
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Milling-spindle start timing for a milling unit (with MILL&TURN. set under
TYPE of UNo. 0)
0: After tool change
Milling-spindle start timing for a milling unit 1: At the initial point
(with MILL&TURN. set under TYPE of
UNo. 0)
F86
(bit 1)
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Makes the override function valid for the movement of the tool tip
gh
point.
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A Tool tip point

Override scheme for G0 during tool tip point
R
40
control
PO
29
F86 1: Makes the override function valid for the clamping speed at the
R
machine control point.

o.
(bit 2)
O
If the moving speed of the axis exceeds the setting of machine

N
parameter M1 (i.e., the maximum rapid feed rate), the override

al
function will work for that setting.

ri
ZA
Se
Machine control point

A
IM
K
Program type E
ZA
A
M
Unit —
YA
Setting range 0, 1
A clamp command is or is not output when indexing the B-axis
3
01
0: Output
)2
1: Not output
(c
Clamp command output when indexing the

* This parameter is valid only for the INTEGREX i series
ht
B-axis
F86
ig
yr
(bit 3)
op
C
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-185
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The plane for the display on the PART SHAPE window is:
0: X-Y plane
1: X-Z plane
Display of the PART SHAPE window

F86
(bit 4)
Program type M
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
0: Override valid for the movement of the tool tip point
ts
gh
1: Override valid for the clamping speed at the machine control point
ri
ll
Override scheme for G1 during tool tip point
.A
control
F86
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Position during the start of tool tip point control

ri
ZA
1: Position with the rotary axis at 0 degrees

Se
A
IM
Selection of rotary axis reference position

for tool tip point control
K
F86
ZA
(bit 6)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-186
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Machine offset by each change in the deviation

vector
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Check for mismatch of the workpiece origin and
table rotation center
0: Valid (an alarm is output in case of a
mismatch)
d .
1: Invalid
ve
Data alteration checking function (tool-related
er
function)
s
re
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ts
gh
Select a feed rate display method for the
superposition system.
ri
0: Display in terms of moving speed of actual
ll
axis
.A
— 1: Display in terms of relative speed with respect
N
to the workpiece
O
F87 Single-block mode cancellation during fixed cycle
TI
0: Invalid (single-block stop occurs)
60
A 1: Valid (single-block stop does not occur)

R
40
PO
Common variables (#500 and on) are cleared by

29
resetting or at the program end.

R
o.
0: Invalid
O
N
1: Valid
C
al
Local variables are cleared by resetting or at the

ri
ZA
program end.
Se
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
IM
Common variables (#100 to #199) are cleared by

K
resetting or at the program end.

ZA
0: Invalid
1: Valid
A
M
Note :
YA
Variables for tool path check are not cleared even if Bit 5, 6 or 7 in F87
is set to 1.
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht

ig
yr
op
C
2-187
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set this parameter to specify functions related to the conversion from

MAZATROL program into an EIA program.
76543210
Conversion of a part of program into sub-program
(See Note.)
Output method of G-code for point machining
0: G-code of fixed cycle
1: G-code in 1 digit
Output of G10 and G92.5 in conversion of WPC
data
.
0: Not to output
d
ve
1: To output
Output of tool diameter correction G-code
er
0: Not to output G-code
s
re
1: To output G-code
Tool path modification caused by tool diameter
ts
correction
gh
0: Correction is not included in path
1: Correction is included in path
ri
Fixed value (0)
ll
.A
Fixed value (1)
N
O
Note :
TI
When bit 0 of F88 is set to 1 on converting to the EIA program, the line
60
A
machining, groove machining, face machining portions in the
R
40
MAZATROL program are respectively programmed as subprograms.

PO
29
Example :
R
Note :
o.
—
O
N
1. Subprograms that can be called out of the

C
Common unit
al
F88 MAZATROL program are not

K
[1]  reprogrammed as subprograms of the

ri
ZA
FCE MILL [4]

Se
EIA program.
[2] 
A
2. Manual program mode unit is not

IM
LINE CTR [5]

programmed as subprogram.
[3] 
K
END 3. It can be selected to make a subprogram

ZA
with parameter.
1: To make subprogram
A
F88 bit 0
0: Not to make subprogram
M
Conversion into
YA
EIA program
Main program Subprogram
3
01
(WNo.1001); N1(UNo.2FACE-MILL);
G17G0G40G54G64G90G94;
)2
G0X5.Y2.;
G80; G1X50.; Unit of
(c
 [1]  [4] machining

N1(UNo.2FACE-MILL); G0X60.Y60.;
ht
units
M98P1001H1; M99;
ig
G1Z-2;
yr
 N2(UNo.3LINE-CTR);
M98P1001H1; G2X10.Y10.R5.;
op
G0Z100; G1X50.; Unit of

machining
C
[2]  [5]
N2(UNo.3LINE-CTR); G2X40.Y10.R5.; units
M98P1001H2; M99;
G0Z-2; %

N3(UNo.4END);[3]

M30;
%
Program type M, E
Conditions Immediate Note : Bit 2 and 3 of F88 are valid only for machining centers.
Unit —
2-188
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set this parameter to specify functions related to the conversion from

MAZATROL program into an EIA program.
76543210
Output of shape data
0: Not to output
1: To output
Synchronous tapping G-code
0: G74/G84
1: G84.2/G84.3
Output of F command
d .
0: To output
ve
— 1: Not to output
er
Whether to generate an output for EIA conversion
s
F89 of the mill-turning unit
re
0: Alarm (No output)
ts
1: Output of the path shifted through a distance
gh
equivalent to the tool radius
ri
EIA conversion output destination
ll
0: Standard area
.A
1: Backup area
N
Returning to the second zero point before tool
O
change (output of G30)
TI
0: Not to return
60
A 1: To return
Program type M, E
R
40
Fixed value (0)

PO
29
Unit —
o.
O
N

C
al
76543210
ri
ZA
In response to move command without decimal

Se
point:
A
0: Tool moves by 1/1.

IM
1: Tool moves by 10/1.

Coordinate system shift using a MAZATROL
K
program:
ZA
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
M
0: Stroke inside check before movement

YA
1: Stroke outside check before movement

— Metric/inch system (Note)
3
01
0: Metric (Initial G20 is valid/invalid)

F91 1: Inch
)2
In response to move command without decimal

(c
point:
ht
0: Tool moves in 0.0001 mm (0.00001 in)

ig
increments.
yr
1: Tool moves in 1 mm (1 in) increments.

op
0: G00 interpolation
1: G00 non-interpolation
C
0: G33E command is for the number of threads

per inch
1: G33E command is for thread cutting with
Program type M, E precise lead
Conditions At power on Note :
Unit — Execute zero point return operation without fail before changing the
setting of bit 4 (metric/inch system selection).
2-189
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
Modal at power-on or at reset (Initial G18)
0: G17 or G19
1: G18
Modal at power-on or at reset (Initial G19)
0: G17 or G18
1: G19
Dwell command method
0: Modal
1: Always based on the time command
.
Tool-length compensation (G43, G44) axis for
d
ve
milling tools
0: X-, Y-, Z-axes (Note)
er
— 1: Z-axis fixed
s
re
Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) start
F92 up/cancel type
ts
0: Type A
gh
1: Type B
ri
Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42)
ll
interference check
.A
0: Alarm stop occurs to prevent overcutting.
1: Tool path is changed to prevent overcutting.
N
O
Fixed-cycle hole-drilling axis
TI
0: Plane selection using G17, G18 or G19
60
A 1: Z-axis fixed
R
40
ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an

PO
EIA/ISO program
29
0: Invalid
R
Program type M, E
o.
1: Valid
O
N
C
Note :
al
Unit —
K
In the case of tool offset type C, the value set for each axis on the TOOL
ri
ZA
Setting range Binary, eight digits OFFSET display is used for compensation.
Se
Modal at power-on or at reset.

IM
0: G96 (Constant surface speed control ON)

K
1: G97 (Constant surface speed control OFF)

ZA
Modal selection at power on or at reset

(G96/G97)
A
F93
M
YA
(bit 0)
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
yr

op
0 : G94 (Feed per minute)

C
1 : G95 (Feed per revolution)

(G94/G95)
F93
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-190
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

0 : G91 (Incremental-value command)
1 : G90 (Absolute-value command)
(G91/G90)
F93
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Tool length of tool data for an EIA/ISO program
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
Tool length of tool data for an EIA/ISO
.A
program
F93
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Feed rate during machine lock

ri
ZA
Se
0: Specified feed rate

A
1: Rapid feed rate

IM
Feed rate during machine lock

K
ZA
F93
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Middle point during reference-point return

ig
0: Return through middle point to reference point

yr
1: Return directly to reference point

op
Middle point during reference-point return

C
F93
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-191
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Single-block operation mode at user macro operation instruction

0: Single-block stop does not occur (for operation)
1: Single-block stop occurs (for test)
Single-block operation mode at user macro
operation instruction
F93
(bit 6)
Program type E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value (0)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
F93
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
0: According to the selected modal mode (G00 or G01)

ri
ZA
Se
1: Fixed as rapid traverse mode (G00)

A
IM
Movement to hole-drilling position in

K
fixed-cycle mode
ZA
F94
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
0: External deceleration signal enabled

ig
1: External deceleration signal disabled

yr
op
External deceleration signal valid/invalid

C
F94
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-192
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Cancel
1: Do not cancel
Tool length offset cancellation upon zero

point return by G28/G30 or manual
operation, enabled/disabled
F94
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: G01 (linear interpolation)
gh
1: G00 (positioning)
ri
ll
.A
Modal at power-on or at reset (G01/G00)
F94
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: To specify the group number on the TOOL DATA display

ri
ZA
Se
1: To specify the tool number (or pocket number)

A
IM
Tool command method using T-codes

K
ZA
F94
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Fixed value (0)

ig
yr
op
—
C
F94
(bit 5)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-193
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value (1)
—
F94
(bit 6)
Program type —
. d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
0: Offsets on the TOOL OFFSET display enabled
gh
1: EIA/ISO offsets on the TOOL DATA display enabled
ri
ll
Tool offset amount effectuated in an
.A
EIA/ISO program
F94
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Interrupt function using user macro instruction

ri
ZA
Se
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
IM
Interrupt function using user macro

K
instruction, valid/invalid
ZA
F95
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Handling of macro program interruption and call

ig
0: Handled as interruption
yr
1: Handled as subprogram call

op
Handling of macro program interruption and

C
call
F95
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-194
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Automatic return position to restart the program (Fixed to 1)

0: Manual return
1: Automatic return
Automatic return position to restart the
program (Fixed to 1)
F95
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
G00 (positioning) command feed rate for dry run
gh
0: Rapid feed rate
ri
1: Feed rate for dry run
ll
G00 (positioning) command feed rate for
.A
dry run
N
F95
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: Window scheme
ZA
Se
1: Alarm scheme
A
IM
Wear offset check scheme with the input [Related parameters]

K
error prevention function enabled F81 bit 7: Input error prevention function valid/invalid
ZA
F95 F125: Permissible data alteration amount 2 for input error prevention
A
(bit 4) function
M
F126: Maximum wear offset setting with the input error prevention
YA
function enabled
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Alarm display when the slave or adaptor unit is not connected

ig
0: Displayed
yr
1: Not displayed
op
Alarm display when the slave or adaptor

C
unit is not connected

F95
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-195
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Manual-pulse interrupt amount cancellation with the RESET key

0: Invalid
1: Valid
Manual-pulse interrupt amount cancellation
with the RESET key, valid/invalid
F95
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
With the RESET key
gh
0: Coordinate system corresponding to G54
ri
1: Coordinate system unchanged
ll
G54 coordinate system with the RESET
.A
key, valid/invalid
N
F95
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
76543210
Se
Selection of variable number for tool offset

A
IM
amount
0: 16001 to 16512, 17001 to 17512
K
1: 12001 to 12512, 13001 to 13512

ZA
Fairing function
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
M
Processing for arc command blocks in high-speed

YA
machining mode
— 0: Nonuniform feed
3
01
1: Uniform feed
F96
)2
Selection of a corner judgment criterion in

(c
0: Judgment from the angle relative to adjacent

ht
blocks
ig
1: Judgment by excluding the small block (if

yr
present between large-angle blocks)

op
Selection of a cutting feed clamping speed in

C

0: Minimum clamping speed of movable axes
1: Clamping speed based on the radius of the
Program type M, E curvature
Conditions Immediate Rotational axis shape correction
0: Invalid
Unit —
1: Valid
2-196
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
To select G-code modal of the coordinates system to be used in the EIA

conversion function.
Coordinates Coordinates
Selection of G-code of the coordinates Setting value Setting value
system system
system to be used in the EIA conversion
function 1 G54 5 G58
F97 2 G55 6 G59
3 G56
4 G57 Others G54
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
Conditions Immediate Note : F97 is valid only for machining centers.
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
To specify the number of a macro variable to be used in the EIA
gh
conversion function.
If any macro variable is not used, set to 0.
ri
ll
In case of output with a subprogram in the EIA conversion, the height of
.A
cutting face is set with a macro variable. Set to F98 the number of the
macro variable to be used.
N
O
(M)
TI
(M) (S) (M)
(S)
60
A (S)
R
40
(S) (S)
(M)
PO
(M) (M) Main program

29
(S)
(S) (S) (S) (S) Subprogram
R
(S)
o.
(M)
O
Rapid feed
N
(S)
C
(S) Cutting feed

al
(M) (S)
ri
ZA
(S) MPL504
Se
(S)
A
IM
Number of macro variable to be used in the

EIA conversion function Main program Subprogram
K
F98
ZA
 N_(_);
To the height of
G01Z_; 
A
cutting face
#_=_; G00Z_; Return on Z-axis
M
Height of
X_Y_; Moves to the start point
YA
cutting face
of the next machining
Macro variable (F98) G01Z#_; on Z-axis
3
M98P_H_; XY_;
01
  Machining on Z-axis
M99;
)2
M30; specified with the variable

% %
(c
ht
[Units that use macro variables]

ig
FCE MILL (cutting in one direction), TOP EMIL, POCKET, PCKT MT,
yr
PCKT VLY
op
Note :
C
1. 3D machining cannot be output using subprograms.

2. Subprogram is output in the absolute mode (G90).
Program type M, E
Unit —
100 to 199
Setting range
500 to 999
2-197
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
In case of output with subprogram in the EIA conversion function:

Example :
Offset amount for the subprogram WNo. to WNo. 10

When F99 is “20”.
the main WNo. concerned in case of output
EIA conversion (The WNo. of the converted program is assumed to be
with subprogram in the EIA conversion
function 1000.)
F99 Main WNo. 1000
Sub WNo. 1020
Offset amount: 20
Program type M, E For the subprogram of the EIA conversion function, refer to F88 bit 0.
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
If the commanded distance in a block exceeds the spline cancel length
gh
(F100), spline interpolation is not realized in this block even in the spline
interpolation mode.
ri
ll
Curve with spline interpolation
.A
Spline cancel length
N
F100
O
P3 P4
TI
P2
60
A P5 (P3-P4) > F100

P1
R
40
Program type E P6
Straight line when the
PO
29
Conditions Immediate distance between P3 and P4

R
exceeds the value of F100.

o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N
MPL505
C

al
K
ri
If the angle formed by two blocks exceeds the value set by the parameter
ZA
Se
F101, spline interpolation is not realized in these blocks even in the spline
A
interpolation mode.
IM
If F101 = 0 in the spline interpolation mode, the spline interpolation mode

is not canceled. In the 5-axis spline interpolation mode, this sets the spline
K
cancel angle at 60 degrees.

ZA
A
M
3 P4 P4
4
YA
P3 P3
Cornered
Spline cancel angle 2 P5 P5
3
4 F101 P2
01
F101 P2
5 P6 P6
)2
(c
P1 6 P7 P1 P7
ht
ig
P4
yr
When F101 is not set.

op
P3
P5
C
P2
Program type E P6
P1 P7
Unit °
MPL506
2-198
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
During block checking in the fine spline interpolation mode, if the spline
curve of a specific block is judged to include an inflection point and the
maximum chord error between the spline curve and the block is larger
than the value of F102, the shape of the curve will be modified to reduce
Fine spline interpolation curve error the maximum chord error below the value of F102.
(Block including the point of inflection)
F102 Original spline curve
Modified spline curve
Program type E A B
d .
F102 or less
ve
D735S0001
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
ts
If a block whose length is less than the value of F103 is detected during
gh
fine spline interpolation, that block will be skipped and integrated (faired)
into the preceding and succeeding blocks to create a spline curve.
ri
Suppose that the i-th block in the fine spline interpolation mode has a
ll
.A
block length of li:
If Ii – 1 is greater than F103 × 2
N
Ii is equal to or less than F103
O
TI
Ii + 1 is greater than F103 × 2
60
A
then the ending point of the “i – 1” th block and the starting point of the “i +
R
40
1” th block will be modified to the middle point of the i-th block and this
PO
block will be deleted. A spline curve will be created from the sequence of
29
points updated this way.

R
o.
Ii  F103
N
Spline interpolation fairing block length,

C
Ii – 1 > F103 × 2
5-axis spline interpolation small block Ii + 1 > F103 × 2
al
length
ri
ZA
F103
Se
After-modification
IM
of relay points
Created spline curve
K
ZA
A
M
D735S0002
YA
If the length of the starting block or ending block in the fine spline
interpolation mode is smaller than the value of F103, processing will
3
01
slightly differ from that described above.

)2
This parameter is effective when bit 1 of F96 is 1.

(c
Program type E If the distance between blocks is less than the value of F103 in the 5-axis
ht
Conditions Immediate spline interpolation mode, the 5-axis spline interpolation mode will be
ig
canceled only between these blocks. When F103 is set to 0, the value of
yr
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

parameter F104 is used.
op

C
2-199
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
During block checking in the fine spline interpolation mode, if the spline
curve of a specific block is judged to include no inflection point and the
than the value of F104, the shape of the curve will be modified to reduce
the maximum chord error below the value of F104.
Original spline curve

Modification Modified spline curve
A B
d .
F104 or less
ve
er
D735S0003
s
re
During block checking in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode, if the
ts
gh
Fine spline interpolation curve error than the value of F104, the shape of the curve will be modified to reduce
the maximum chord error below the value of F104.
ri
(Block including no inflection point)
When F104 is set to 0, if the block is judged to include an inflection point,
ll
.A
the spline curve of the block will be modified to be linear, and if it is judged
5-axis spline interpolation curve error
to include no inflection point, it will not be modified (spline interpolation is
N
F104 realized).
O
5-axis fairing command error
TI
60
A
In 5-axis fairing, if the error between the command point and the point
R
40
after fairing for the tool tip 3 axes is larger the value of F104, the point
PO
after fairing is modified to reduce the error below the value of F104.
29
When F104 is set to 0, the point after fairing will not be modified.
R
o.
O
N
C
al
Point after fairing

ri
ZA
(with modification)
Se
F104 or less
A
IM
K
ZA
Z
Y Point after fairing
A
M
(without modification)
X
YA
Program type E
: Paths after fairing
3
Conditions Immediate : Paths of command points

01
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

)2

(c
In a small-segment machining program, if a small block is present

ht
between large-angle blocks, optimum corner deceleration can be

ig
achieved by excluding the small block and then judging the total corner
yr
angle.
op
Judgment length for judging the small block

Small block judgment length
C
F107 Small block
Program type E
This parameter is valid when bit 4 of F96 is 1.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-200
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify by what degrees the angle of corner deceleration is to be

incremented when the shape correction function is valid.
Corner deceleration angle increment value
F108
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit °
s
re
ts
Set the number of common variables which can be read and written
gh
between the turrets.
ri
Example :
ll
If 10 is set in F109
Number of common variables between
.A
turrets (#100 onward) #100 to #109: Common variables that are valid for both turrets
N
#110 to #199: Common variables that are valid only for one turret
F109
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit Number of variables

N

al
K
ri
Set the number of common variables which can be read and written
ZA
Se
between the turrets.

A
IM
Example :
Number of common variables between If 10 is set in F110
K
turrets (#500 onward) #500 to #509: Common variables that are valid for both turrets
ZA
F110 #510 to #999: Common variables that are valid only for one turret
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit Number of variables

(c

ht
F111 (bit 1) = 0:
ig
Disuse of dry run during thread cutting cycle

yr
F111 (bit 1) = 1:
op
Use of dry run during thread cutting cycle

C
Use/disuse of dry run during thread cutting

F111
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-201
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
F111 (bit 2) = 0:
The feed hold function causes the threading operation to stop after the
completion of chamfering at the thread end point.
F111 (bit 2) = 1:
Use/disuse of feed hold during thread The feed hold function starts chamfering at the position where the feed
cutting hold button is pressed and stops the threading operation at the completion
F111 of chamfering.
(bit 2)
Note :
With TC82 = 0, the same operation as that for setting 0 will occur even if
Program type M, E 1 is set for F111 bit 2.
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select the direction of rotation of the C-axis during C-axial threading
gh
based on G01.1.
ri
F111 (bit 3) = 0:
The C-axis rotates CW (forward).
ll
Direction of rotation of the C-axis during
.A
F111 (bit 3) = 1:
C-axial threading with G01.1
The C-axis rotates CCW (backward).
N
F111
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Select whether the wear correction data on the TOOL DATA display is to
ZA
Se
be added during execution of the EIA/ISO program when using the tool
A
length that has been entered on the TOOL DATA display.

IM
Tool correction amount selection for F111 (bit 5) = 0:

K
EIA/ISO programs Wear correction data is not added

ZA
F111 F111 (bit 5) = 1:

Wear correction data is added
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
In the fixed turning cycle mode (G290/G292/G294)

ig
F111 (bit 6) = 0:
yr
The fixed turning cycle is executed for each block (G66 type).
op
F111 (bit 6) = 1:
Execution mode selection for a fixed turning
C
The fixed turning cycle is executed only for movement blocks (G66.1
cycle
F111 type).
(bit 6)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-202
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
This parameter specifies whether single-block operation during a fixed

turning cycle (G290, G292 or G294) is to be stopped after the entire cycle
has been executed, or for each block.
F111 (bit 7) = 0:
Form of single-block stop during a fixed After execution of the cycle
turning cycle
F111 F111 (bit 7) = 1:
For each block
(bit 7)
Program type E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Selection of printout items in measurement data printout
gh
76543210 (0: Not printout 1: Print out)
ri
ll
Selection of measurement data items to be Work No., Unit No.
.A
printed out Tool index number, work counter
N
F112 Measurement mode
O
Target data
TI
60
A Measured data
R
40
Program type M, E Offset data

PO
29
Conditions Immediate Tolerance upper/lower

R
Day and time of measurement

o.
Unit —
O
N

al
F113 (bit 0) = 0:
ri
ZA
Se
Counting each type of use under the same tool number individually.
A
IM
Counting all types of use under the same F113 (bit 0) = 1:

tool number for the tool life management on Counting all types of use under the same tool number integratingly.
K
the TOOL DATA display

ZA
F113 executed/not executed

A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
F113 (bit 1) = 0:
ig
Operation will be continued.

yr
F113 (bit 1) = 1:
op
Data handling on the milling tool of a group Operation will be stopped.

C
that has expired in tool life

F113
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-203
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
F113 (bit 2) = 0:
Operation will be continued.
F113 (bit 2) = 1:
Data handling on the turning tool of a group Operation will be stopped.
that has expired in tool life
F113
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select whether the FLASH tool that has been registered under the same
gh
tool number for the tool life management function is to be included in
spare tools.
ri
ll
F113 (bit 3) = 0:
.A
Tool life management of the FLASH tool The FLASH tool will be included in spare tools.
N
F113
O
F113 (bit 3) = 1:
(bit 3)
TI
The FLASH tool will not be included in spare tools.
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Select whether the life time on the TOOL DATA display is to be included
ZA
Se
in the life judgment items listed for the tool life management function.
A
IM
F113 (bit 4) = 0:
The life time will be included in the life judgment items.
Tool life management – Life time
K
ZA
F113 F113 (bit 4) = 1:

The life time will not be included in the life judgment items.
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select whether the maximum available wear offset data X on the TOOL
ig
DATA display is to be included in the life judgment items listed for the tool
yr
life management function.

op
Tool life management – F113 (bit 5) = 0:

C
Maximum available wear offset data X The maximum available wear offset data X will be included in the life
F113 judgment items.
(bit 5) F113 (bit 5) = 1:
The maximum available wear offset data X will not be included in the life
judgment items.
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-204
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select whether the maximum available wear offset data Y on the TOOL

Maximum available wear offset data Y The maximum available wear offset data Y will be included in the life
(bit 6) F113 (bit 6) = 1:
The maximum available wear offset data Y will not be included in the life
judgment items.
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select whether the maximum available wear offset data Z on the TOOL
gh
ri
ll
.A
Maximum available wear offset data Z The maximum available wear offset data Z will be included in the life
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
F113 (bit 7) = 1:
60
The maximum available wear offset data Z will not be included in the life
A
judgment items.
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Specify the maximum C-axial cutting feed rate that can be selected for the
ZA
Se
inch system.
A
IM
F114 (bit 0) = 0:
–1
Selection of the maximum C-axial cutting The maximum selectable C-axial cutting feed rate is 88 min .
K
feed rate for the inch system

ZA
F114 F114 (bit 0) = 1:

–1
The maximum selectable C-axial cutting feed rate is 400 min .
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select the type of operation occurring during the control of the tool tip
ig
point when command G49 is issued (when the tool length offset value is
yr
canceled).
op
Selection of the operation occurring during

F114 (bit 1) = 0:
C
the control of the tool tip point when

The axis moves according to the tool length offset value.
command G49 is issued (when the tool
F114 length offset value is canceled) F114 (bit 1) = 1:
(bit 1) The axis does not move.
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-205
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select whether the B-axis angle is to be checked during measurement of

the turning tool for which OUT is specified in “section to be machined”.
F114 (bit 2) = 0:
B-axis angle check during measurement of During measurement for OUT turning tool, alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL
the turning tool for which OUT is specified in DESIGNATED occurs if the B-axis angle is not 90°.
“section to be machined”
F114
F114 (bit 2) = 1:
(bit 2)
The measurements for OUT turning tool are possible irrespective of the
B-axis angle.
Program type M, E
.
Turning tools for which IN or EDGE is specified in “section to be
d
ve
Conditions At power on machined” can be measured irrespective of the B-axis angle.
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Moving axes by using G49 (tool length offset cancel) in G43 (tool length
gh
offset) mode
ri
F114 (bit 3) = 0:
Moving axes by using G49 (tool length
ll
Valid
.A
offset cancel) in G43 (tool length offset)
mode F114 (bit 3) = 1:
F114
N
Invalid
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Selecting a rethreading function

ri
ZA
Se
F114 (bit 4) = 0:
A
IM
Using the rethreading function
Rethreading function F114 (bit 4) = 1:

K
ZA
F114 Not using the rethreading function

A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Output timing of a tool life alarm

ig
F114 (bit 5) = 0:
yr
At the time of the next tool change

op
Output timing of a tool life alarm

C
F114 (bit 5) = 1:
F114 When the program ends.
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-206
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
F114 (bit 6) = 0:
Invalid. Initially, the G50-specified coordinate system is selected.
F114 (bit 6) = 1:
Valid. Initially, the MAZATROL coordinate system (G53.5) is selected.
Initial G53.5
F114
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
F114 (bit 7) = 0:
gh
The life of the tool is judged from its machining count.
ri
F114 (bit 7) = 1:
ll
Judging tool life from the count of machined The life of the tool is not judged from its machining count.
.A
workpieces
F114
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Specify the X-axial feed rate for the runout of the threading cycle.
ri
ZA
Se
A quarter (1/4) of the rapid traverse (as set in parameter M1) applies when
A
this parameter is set to zero (0).

IM
Feed rate of the threading runout – X-axis In case of M1 < F116, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.
K
ZA
F116
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit mm/min
)2

(c
ht
Specify the Y-axial feed rate for the runout of the threading cycle.
ig
yr

op
Feed rate of the threading runout – Y-axis In case of M1 < F117, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.
C
F117
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min
2-207
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the Z-axial feed rate for the runout of the threading cycle.
Feed rate of the threading runout – Z-axis In case of M1 < F118, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.
F118
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
re
ts
Specify the runout feed rate for the inside diameter threading cycle.
gh
This parameter is valid only when chamfering is not specified in the inside
ri
diameter threading unit of the MAZATROL program.
ll
Runout feed rate for the inside diameter A quarter (1/4) of the rapid traverse (as set in parameter M1) applies when
.A
threading cycle this parameter is set to zero (0).
N
F119 In case of M1 < F119, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit mm/min
O
N

al
Specify the X-axial clamping speed for the threading cycle.

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Clamping speed for the threading cycle –

K
X-axis
ZA
F120
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit mm/min
)2

(c
ht
Specify the Y-axial clamping speed for the threading cycle.

ig
yr
op

C
Y-axis
F121
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min
2-208
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the Z-axial clamping speed for the threading cycle.

Z-axis
F122
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
re
ts
Processing of work offset specified with G53.1 (tool axis direction control)
gh
for the machine whose table rotary axis is not an axis that rotates around
Processing of work offset specified with the Z-axis on the INTEGREX type (the machine specification featuring
ri
G53.1 for the machine whose table rotary both the tool rotary axis and the table rotary axis)
ll
axis is not an axis that rotates around the
.A
0: Includes a holder length.
Z-axis on the INTEGREX type (the machine
F123 1: Does not include a holder length.
N
specification featuring both the tool rotary
O
(bit 1) axis and the table rotary axis)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Consideration of a mirroring command specified in the M CODE unit for

ri
ZA
shape drawing
Se
0: Not considered
IM
Shape drawing: Validity of a mirroring 1: Considered

K
command specified in the M CODE unit

F123
ZA
(bit 2)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Enables/disables tool change operation in the MDI mode for tools whose
ht
tool data has not been set, when bit 7 of parameter F84 is set to “1”.
ig
yr
0: Stop operation with the alarm 953 TOOL DATA INPUT PROCESS
ERROR displayed
op
1: Single block stop after completing tool change with the alarm 1107
C
MDI tool change enable/disable for tools INCOMPLETE TOOL DATA displayed
with no tool data
F123
(bit 3) Note :
1. When bit 7 of parameter F92 is set to “1”:
The above mentioned alarm will be generated if the tool
diameter is not set for the specified tool.
Program type E
2. When bit 3 of parameter F93 is set to “1”:
Conditions Immediate The above mentioned alarm will be generated if the tool
Unit — diameter, tool diameter A/B, or tool set X/Y is not set for the
Setting range 0, 1 specified tool.
2-209
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The workpiece axis offset in association with Z-axis feed during hobbing is
executed
0: In the hobbing (G114.3) mode and only while the hobbing axis is
Execution of the workpiece axis offset in
rotating.
association with Z-axis feed in the hobbing
mode independently of hobbing axis 1: Disregarding whether the hobbing axis is rotating or not as long as the
F123 rotating status current mode is the hobbing (G114.3) mode.
(bit 5)
Program type E
d .
ve
Unit —
ser
Setting range 0, 1
re
Sets the output position of sequence numbers during EIA conversion.
ts
0: Output the sequence number after completing machining with each
gh
tool sequence/shape sequence and immediately before the first tool
ri
change command
ll
EIA conversion sequence number output 1: Output the sequence number after completing machining with each
.A
F123 tool sequence/shape sequence
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
The data input in the following items are checked based on the
ri
ZA
permissible data alteration amount set in this parameter.

Se
TOOL DATA:
A
LENGTH, ACT-, TOOL SET X, TOOL SET Z, LENG COMP., LENG.CO.,

IM
Permissible data alteration amount 1 for ACT-CO.

input error prevention function
K
TOOL OFFFSET:
ZA
F124 GEOMETRIC OFFSET

A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

)2

(c
The data input in the following items are checked based on the
ht
permissible data alteration amount set in this parameter.

ig
TOOL DATA:
yr
WEAR COMP. X, WEAR COMP. Y, WEAR COMP. Z

op
Permissible data alteration amount 2 for

input error prevention function TOOL OFFFSET:
C
WEAR COMP.
F125
Program type M, E
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-210
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
When the absolute value of the value input for the following data exceeds
the setting of this parameter, either a window prompting a check on the
input value is displayed or the input value is discarded with an alarm
generated, according to the setting of F95 bit 4.
Maximum wear offset setting with the input TOOL DATA: WEAR COMP.
error prevention function enabled
TOOL OFFFSET: WEAR COMP.
F126
F81 bit 7: Input error prevention function valid/invalid
Program type M, E
.
F95 bit 4: Wear offset check scheme with the input error prevention
d
ve
Conditions Immediate function enabled
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
During rotary axis checking in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode, if the
ts
error between the line that connects the start point and the end point and
gh
the spline curve is larger than the value of F128, the shape of the curve
ri
will be modified to reduce the error below the value of F128.
ll
When F128 is set to 0, the angular spline shape will not be modified.
.A
Angle  Original spline
N
curve
O
TI
60
A Time t
Modified spline
R
40
curve
PO
Modification
29
End point angle

R
o.
F128 or less
O
N
Start point
al
angle
ri
ZA
Se
5-axis spline interpolation angular error

IM
During rotary axis checking in the 5-axis fairing mode, if the error between
K
5-axis fairing angular error the point after fairing and the command point is larger than the value of
ZA
F128 F128, the point after fairing will be modified to reduce the error below the
value of F128.
A
M
When F128 is set to 0, the point after fairing will not be modified.
YA
Point after fairing

3
(without modification)
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
Point after fairing

op
(with modification)
C
F128 or less
Angle
: Paths after fairing
Program type E : Paths of command points
Time
Unit 0.0001°
2-211
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Corner deceleration in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode is changed to

the following Vo’ with respect to the theoretical value Vo.
Vo’ = Vo × F129/100
5-axis spline interpolation corner
deceleration coefficient The assigned value is invalid if minus. If 0 is assigned, it will be regarded
as 100, or if a value greater than 2000 is assigned, it will be regarded as
F129 2000.
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
Arc radius clamping speed in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode is
ts
changed to the following Vc’ with respect to the theoretical value Vc.
gh
Vc’ = Vc × (F130/100)
ri
ll
5-axis spline interpolation arc-clamping
.A
The assigned value is invalid if minus.
speed coefficient
If 0 is assigned, it will be regarded as 100, or if a value greater than 500 is
N
F130 assigned, it will be regarded as 500.
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
O
N

al
Specify tool-drawing accuracy on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D

ri
ZA
MONITOR display
Se
As the specified value is greater (maximum value: 9), accuracy increases

IM
progressively.
Tool-drawing accuracy on the VIRTUAL
K

ZA
F135
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
(c
It is possible to change the size of the workpiece created automatically on

ht
the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display.

ig
yr
Y Workpiece automatically set by NC

Amount of offset for dummy workpiece
op
shape on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D

C
F136
MONITOR display
F136
Workpiece displayed in
F136
solid display mode
Program type M
X
This offset function is valid for both
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in X-axial and Y-axial directions.
2-212
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D

MONITOR display automatically. If 0 is entered, three jaws will be
displayed as standard.
Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL
MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for
No. 1 turning spindle
F137
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit Jaws
s
re
Specify the number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D
ts
MONITOR display automatically. If 0 is entered, three jaws will be
gh
displayed as standard.
ri
ll
Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL
.A
MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for
No. 2 turning spindle
N
F138
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
R
o.
Unit Jaws
N
al
K
ri
ZA
Specify the amount of C-axial angle offset for the jaws indicated on the
Se
VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display automatically.

A
IM
Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the

K

ZA
display for the No. 1 turning spindle

F139
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.1°
(c

ht
Specify the amount of C-axial angle offset for the jaws indicated on the
ig
VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display automatically.

yr
op
Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the

C

display for the No. 2 turning spindle
F140
Program type M
Unit 0.1°
2-213
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select the background color of override window displayed when the

external override function is used. This is valid in the automatic operation
mode.
Background color of spindle override 0: Black
window displayed when the external 1: Red
override function is used
2: Blue
F142
3: Green
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Operation when workpiece counting is made valid while the automatic
gh
operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) is enabled.
ri
<Manual setting on the POSITION screen>
0: Workpiece counting is activated while the ISS is disabled, and the
ll
.A
automatic operation continues.
1: Workpiece counting is not activated, the alarm 1129 MEMORY
N
PROTECT (SAFETY SHIELD) is displayed and the automatic
O
operation continues.
TI
60
<Setting using programs (#3901, #3902)> (Note 1) (Note 2)

A
Operation when workpiece counting is
R
40
0: Workpiece counting is activated while the ISS is disabled, and the

made valid while the automatic operation
PO
automatic operation continues.

29
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is enabled

F143 1: Workpiece counting is not activated, the alarm 1824 UNWRITABLE
R
o.
(bit 0) SYSTEM VARIABLE (ISS) is displayed and the automatic operation

O
N
stops.
C
al
Note :
K
ri
ZA
1. When parameter F335 bit 7 = 0, operation follows the setting of

Se
F143 bit 0 upon overwriting the part count from the program while
A
IM
executing ISS (automatic).

2. When parameter F335 bit 7 = 1, the part count is set upon
K
overwriting the part count from the program while executing ISS
ZA
Program type M, E (automatic), regardless of the setting of F143 bit 0, and automatic
A
Conditions Immediate operation continues with ISS enabled.

M
Unit — [Related parameters]

YA
Setting range 0, 1 F335bit7

3
Select the status [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] when the power is

01
turned on.
)2
0: Disabled
(c
(The condition of the material model cut with the ISS enabled is not
Status of [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL]
ht
maintained.)
when the power is turned on
ig
F143 1: Enabled
yr
(The condition of the material model cut with the ISS enabled is
(bit 1)
op
maintained.)
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-214
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Invalid
—
F143
(bit 2)
d .
Program type —
ve
Conditions —
s er
Unit —
re
Setting range —
ts
gh
Setting of the section to cancel the collision check function between the
TOOL EYE sensor and the tool with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
ri
being selected
ll
Setting of the section to cancel the collision 
.A
During manual TOOL EYE measurement
check function between the TOOL EYE
0 : Canceling the collision check function between the TOOL EYE
N
sensor and the tool with the INTELLIGENT
F143 sensor and the tool (cutter, shank)
O
SAFETY SHIELD being selected
TI
(bit 3) 1 : Canceling the collision check function between the TOOL EYE
60
sensor and the tool (cutter, shank, holder)

A
R
40
 During automatic TOOL EYE measurement

PO
29
Program type M, E Canceling the collision check function not only between the TOOL
R
Conditions Immediate EYE sensor and the tool but entirely.

o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
ri
ZA
X-axis input mode selection after execution of G136

Se
0: According to bit 5 of parameter M18 if G122.1/G123.1 (diameter/radius

IM
selection) is not specified

1: Radius values if G122.1/G123.1 is not specified
K
X-axis diameter/radius input mode after the

ZA
G136 command (measurement macro call)

F143 * If this parameter setting is changed after the machine is started, it will
A
M
(bit 5) become valid after resetting operation. In single-block operation,

diameter values are used regardless of this parameter setting.
YA
3
Program type E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
ig
Display of WPC on the POSITION display during inclined-surface

yr
machining
op
0: Display the work coordinate system that is selected before the

inclined-surface machining command.
C
Display of WPC during inclined-surface

machining on the POSITION display 1: Display the coordinate system that is selected after coordinate system
F143 rotation and zero point parallel movement according to the
inclined-surface machining command.
(bit 6)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-215
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Cancel or hold G43 when the RESET key is pressed in G43 (tool length
compensation) mode.
0: Cancel
G43 modal cancel selection with the 1: Hold

RESET key
F143
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Selection of table rotary axis reference position for inclined-surface
gh
machining
ri
0: Table rotary axis start position as the reference
ll
Selection of table rotary axis reference 1: Table rotary axis 0-degree position as the reference
.A
position for inclined-surface machining
N
F144
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Resetting of a tool life alarm with the alarm clear button

ZA
Se
0: Not reset
A
IM
1: Reset
Resetting of a tool life alarm with the alarm
K
clear button
ZA
F144
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Setting a minus value for argument Q (module/diametral pitch) in hobbing

ig
0: Invalid
yr
1: Valid
op
Setting a minus value for argument Q in * If a minus value is set for argument Q in hobbing, while 0 is set for F144
C
hobbing, valid/invalid bit 3, alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be caused.
F144
(bit 3)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-216
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
G49 command immediately after the macro variable command when bit 3
of parameter F114 is set to 1 (no axis movement by the G49 command)
0: No axis movement
Selection of operation by the G49 command 1: Axis movement
immediately after a macro variable
command
F144
(bit 5)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
G92.5 block, #3090 = 1, and G10.9 block in the EIA/ISO program
gh
converted for machining centers (parameter F30 is set to 0)
ri
0: Output
ll
Deletion of unnecessary codes during 1: Do not output
.A
EIA/ISO conversion for machining centers Note :
N
F144 For G92.5 block only, the setting at bit 7 of parameter F144 is used.
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
G92.5 block in the EIA/ISO program converted for machining centers

ZA
Se
(parameter F30 is set to 0)

A
0: Output
IM
Deletion of G92.5 blocks during EIA/ISO 1: Do not output

K
conversion for machining centers * Same as when bit 6 of parameter F144 is set to 1
ZA
F144
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
The rapid feed rate override is reduced to the value set here, when data
ig
alteration is detected.
yr
This value will be handled as100 if 0 is set here.

op
Rapid feed override when data alteration is

C
detected
F145
Program type M
Unit %
2-217
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Representation of cutting-off or parting operation under synchronization of

both turning spindles on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR
displays
0: Representation with the material at the head that operates as the
Selection of the material model’s part to be
master side in synchronization and the material at the other side cut
taken off (hidden) on the VIRTUAL
off
MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays in
the flow of turning operation under
synchronization of both spindles 1: Representation by taking-off the material from the 2nd spindle, with
F146
the material remaining on the 1st spindle
d .
2: Representation by taking-off the material from the 1st spindle, with the
ve
material remaining on the 2nd spindle
er
Program type M, E
s
3: Representation with the material opposite the head that operates as
re
the master side in synchronization left and the material at the other
ts
Unit — side cut off
gh
ri
Reference data for the calculation of compensation amount for G41/G42
ll
given in a manual program unit
.A
F148 = 0:
N
NOSE-R setting on the TOOL OFFSET display
O
Compensation amount for G41/G42 given
TI
F148 = 1:
in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit
60
NOSE-R or ACT- setting on the TOOL DATA display

A
F148
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
Program type M
N
al
K
ri
ZA
Unit —
Se
Setting range 0, 1
A
IM
Operation between blocks in the single block signal status when single
block mode is switched from ON to OFF during automatic operation
K
ZA
When the single block signal is When the single block signal is turned
turned from ON to OFF from OFF to ON and then to OFF
A
M
ON ON OFF
YA
OFF Single block signal
F149=0
3
Execution block Next block Execution block Next block

Operation between blocks when single
01
block mode is switched from ON to OFF Stop between Stop between

)2
during automatic operation blocks blocks

F149
(c
ON OFF ON OFF
ht
ig
F149=1 Execution block Next block Execution block Next block

yr
No stop between Stop between

op
blocks blocks
C
ON OFF ON OFF
Program type M, E F149=2 Execution block Next block Execution block Next block
Conditions Immediate No stop No stop
between blocks between blocks
Unit —
2-218
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the top register R (R18176 to R18463) for output destination of NC

basic information for field network.
Example :
1. When F150 = 0 2. When F150 = 352
Output side Output side
Output data offset of NC basic information
Data output to
for field network NC basic information slave/adaptor
F150
.
d
ve
Data output to NC basic information
slave/adaptor
s er
re
Note :
ts
If a value set for F150 is out of the setting range or is an odd value,
gh
Program type M, E
alarm 528 FIELDNETWORK SETTING ERROR (4, , ) occurs and the
ri
Conditions Immediate communication stops. NC basic information will not be output.
ll
Unit —
.A
N
Validity of registration of multiple tools if the turning function is valid when
O
registering a tool on the TOOL DATA display
TI
60
0: Valid A
R
40
Switching of valid/invalid for registering 1: Invalid

PO
29
multiple tools
F151
R
o.
O
N
(bit 0)
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Program type M, E
Se
IM
Unit —
K
Setting range 0, 1
ZA
Fixed value (0)

A
M
YA
—
3
01
F151
)2
(bit 1)
(c
ht
Program type —
ig
yr
Conditions —
op
Unit —
C
Setting range —
2-219
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Returning of the material geometry to the initial geometry when execution

of a program is returned to the head during continuous program run in the
state the virtual machining function or the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
Switching of the material geometry when SHIELD function is valid
execution of a program is returned to the 0: Not returned to the initial geometry.
head during continuous program run
F151 1: Returned to the initial geometry.
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
Unit —
er
Setting range 0, 1
s
re
0: Invalid
ts
1: Valid
gh
ri
Rotary axis fairing for the 5-axis fairing
function
ll
.A
F151
(bit 5)
N
O
TI
Program type E
60
A
R
40
PO
Unit —
29
Setting range 0, 1
o.
O
N
Set valid/invalid of wear offset (mill tool/touch sensor) on the TOOL DATA
C
display when the tool length offset function for turning tools (G43P1) is
al
used.
ri
ZA
Se
When a milling tool is used:

IM
Valid/invalid of wear offset (mill tool/touch When the parameters are set as F111 bit 5 = 1 and F94 bit 7 = 0, tool
sensor) on the TOOL DATA display when
K
wear offset on the TOOL DATA display is made:

the tool length offset function for turning
ZA
F151 0: Invalid
tools (G43P1) is used
A
1: Valid
(bit 6)
M
YA
When the touch sensor is used:

3
When the parameter is set as F111 bit 5 = 1, tool wear offset on the TOOL
01
DATA display is made:

)2
Program type E 0: Invalid

(c
Conditions Immediate 1: Valid

ht
Unit —
ig
Setting range 0, 1
yr
op
C
2-220
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Data to be referenced or changed by macro variable #3001 (power-on

time)
0: Value indicated for POWER ON in the ACCUMULATED TIME window
1: Value counted from the power-on timing
Time stamp used at the time of read/write
command to macro variable #3001 F151 bit7 Value indicated for POWER ON in Value at #3001
(power-on time) the ACCUMULATED TIME at the time the
F151 window at the time when the read power is turned
(bit 7) command to #3001 is specified on again
0 Changed accordingly Not reset
.
1 Not changed Reset to 0
d
ve
Program type E
er
Conditions Immediate [Related macro variable]
s
re
Unit — #3040 : Power-on time in the ACCUMULATED TIME window (read only)
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
Fixed value (0)
ri
ll
.A
N
—
O
TI
F152
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type —
R
o.
Conditions —
N
Unit —
al
K
ri
Setting range —
ZA
Se
Make SMART font display valid/invalid.

A
IM
0: Invalid
1: Valid
K
ZA
SMART font display, valid/invalid

* This parameter is valid only when any language other than Japanese,
A
F153 Chinese (traditional/simplified), Korean, Russian or Bulgarian is

M
selected for the display language.

YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig

yr
Setting prohibited
op
C
F154
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-221
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Display of material based on the geometry data in the programs output

during EIA conversion in virtual machining, 3D setup, and the 3D
interference check
0: Not displayed
Material geometry display for programs
converted into the EIA format 1: Displayed
F155 *1 After changing the parameter settings, the settings may not be
(bit 0) reflected in drawings on the 3D MONITOR display. In such cases,
tap [DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL] on the 3D MONITOR display.
*2 When F89 bit 0 = 1, geometry data can be output by executing EIA
Program type E conversion.
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Operation when argument I is omitted from the tap cycle command having
ts
argument Q
gh
0: Operation as a deep-hole cycle
ri
1: Operation as a high-speed deep-hole cycle
ll
Operation when argument I is omitted from
.A
the tap cycle command having argument Q
F155
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Setup data editing during automatic GL operation

ri
ZA
Se
0: Editing disabled (alarm 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO

A
OPERATION) occurs)
IM
Setup data editing during automatic GL 1: Editing enabled (only during single-block stop or feed hold stop)
K
operation, disabled/enabled
F155
ZA
(bit 5)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Sets the spindle to be displayed in the results of machining navigation for

ht
the mill-turning unit

ig
0: Milling spindle
yr
Setting of the spindle to be displayed in the

op
1: Turning Spindle
results of machining navigation for the
C
mill-turning unit
F155
(bit 7)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-222
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The operating status and the switching of the drawing on the 3D

MONITOR display when a cutting command associated with rotary axis
movement is specified with the automatic ISS valid.
The operating status and the drawing on
the 3D MONITOR display when a cutting
command associated with rotary axis F156 bit 1
movement is specified with the automatic 0 1
F156
ISS valid Continue operation with material cutting enabled
(bit 0) 0
only at the end position
Continue operation Operation stopped
.
F156 bit 0
d
with material cutting with alarm message
Program type M, E
ve
1 disabled 1139 ILLEGAL
er
Conditions Immediate COMMAND (SAFETY
SHIELD) displayed
s
Unit —
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
The operating status and the switching of the drawing on the 3D
MONITOR display when a cutting command associated with rotary axis
ri
movement is specified with the automatic ISS valid.
ll
The operating status and the drawing on
.A
the 3D MONITOR display when a cutting
F156 bit 1
N
command associated with rotary axis
O
movement is specified with the automatic 0 1
F156
TI
ISS valid Continue operation with material cutting enabled
60
(bit 1) A 0
only at the end position
R
40
PO
Continue operation Operation stopped

29
F156 bit 0 with material cutting with alarm message

R
Program type M, E
o.
1 disabled 1139 ILLEGAL

O
N
Conditions Immediate COMMAND (SAFETY

C
SHIELD) displayed
al
Unit —
K
ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
Separation between rotary axis and linear axis when moving axes during
IM
workpiece placement error correction

0: Combine the movement of rotary axis and linear axis.
K
Separation between rotary axis and linear

ZA
1 : Separate the movement between rotary axis and linear axis.

axis when moving axes during workpiece
A
placement error correction

F156
M
YA
(bit 2)
3
01
Program type E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
Selection of solution to workpiece placement error correction (primary

yr
rotary axis sign prioritized)

op
0 : No priority according to the sign in the command (compliant with F162

C
Selection of solution to workpiece bit 1)

placement error correction (primary rotary 1 : Priority according to the sign in the command in the program
axis sign prioritized)
F156
(bit 3)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-223
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Pitch division in the case when the arc length exceeds the maximum value
during helical/spiral interpolation
0: Invalid
Pitch division in the case when the arc 1: Valid
length exceeds the maximum value during
helical/spiral interpolation
F156 Remark :
(bit 4) Arc length [mm] = diameter [mm]    pitch [times]
Maximum arc length: 107374.1824 mm
Program type E
d.
* When this parameter is invalid, alarm 814 INTERPOLATION
ve
OVERFLOW will occur if the arc length has exceeded the maximum
er
Unit — length.
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Set a stop at the end of execution of a tool sequence block when the VFC
ts
key is pressed with override set to 100% during automatic operation.
gh
0: Single-block stop does not occur
ri
1: Single-block stop occurs
ll
Single-block stop when the VFC key is
.A
pressed with override set to 100%
F156
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Fixed value (0)

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
F156
ZA
(bit 6)
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
Geometric deviation compensation function

ht
0: Invalid
ig
yr
1: Valid
op
Geometric deviation compensation function

C
F156
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-224
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (0)
—
F157
(bit 0)
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
Setting range —
re
The tolerance (chord error) specified function is made valid or invalid.
ts
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
Geometry compensation/modal spline
.A
tolerance (chord error), valid/invalid
F157
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Tip position memory setting in consideration of the tool length

ri
ZA
compensation in the EIA tip position memory window on the WORK

Se
OFFSET display when the MAZATROL tool length is not valid

A
IM
0: Invalid
EIA tip position memory 1: Valid
K
ZA
F157
(bit 2) * This parameter is valid when parameter F30 is set to 0 and bit 3 of
A
M
parameter F93 is set to 0 (MAZATROL tool length invalid).

YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
op
MAZATROL table selection unit (2 tables)

on the VIRTUAL MACHINING, 3D
C
MONITOR, or 3D SETUP display

F157
(bit 3)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-225
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The direction of the set axes X/Z for the additional table of the machine
model and that of the machine axes are:
0: Opposite direction
Switching of the axis directions for the VTC 1: Same direction
machine model on the VIRTUAL
F157
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Add-in EIA function
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
.A
Add-in EIA function
F157
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Invalid
ri
ZA
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
5-axis fairing function

K
ZA
F157
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Whether or not to update the tolerance specified value for 5-axis spline
interpolation to the value of parameter F104
ig
yr
0: Updated
op
Whether or not to update the 5-axis spline

interpolation tolerance specified curve error 1: Not updated
C
setting
F157
(bit 7)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-226
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Tool data check at tool length/tool radius compensation after ATC

operation.
0: Invalid
Tool length/tool diameter check function 1: Valid
after tool change
F158
Note :
(bit 0)
1. With F158 bit 0 = 1, if no tool data exists, the machine stops with the
alarm 193 NO TOOL IN MAGAZINE generated.
2. When F158 bit 0 = 1, if no tool data has been set with the
d .
Program type E
ve
MAZATROL tool diameter data enabled (F92 bit 7 = 1) or the
Conditions Immediate MAZATROL tool length data enabled (F93 bit 3 = 1), the machine
er
Unit — stops with the alarm 1107 INCOMPLETE TOOL DATA generated.
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Output timing of MSTB command after a movement command under
gh
geometry compensation
ri
0: Before completing axis movement
ll
Output timing of MSTB command after a
.A
1: After completing axis movement
movement command under geometry
N
compensation
F158
O
* When an MSTB command is specified in one of the consecutive cutting
TI
(bit 1) feed blocks such as G1 → G1M3, the operation will be equivalent to
60
that with F158 bit 1 = 0 and M3 will be output during movement initiated
A
R
40
by G1 before M3.
PO
Program type M, E
29
o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
K
ri
ZA
Display of an angle holder in the milling tool rotation direction selection

Se
menu on the TOOL DATA display

A
IM
0: Displayed
Display of an angle holder in the rotation 1: Not displayed

K
ZA
direction selection menu

F158
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Drawing mode of the upper and lower turrets during Y-axis

ig
turning/pinch-cutting
yr
0: Drawing based on the actual axes

op
1: Drawing based on the virtual axes

C
Drawing mode of the upper and lower

turrets during Y-axis turning/pinch-cutting
F158
(bit 3)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-227
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When the compound type MAZATROL program is displayed on the

process selection (restart/single block) window, the unit that matches the
selected head is:
Distinguishing the unit number that matches 0: Not distinguished by color and displayed in black characters
the selected head by color when the
1: Displayed in red characters
compound type MAZATROL program is
F158 displayed in the process selection window
(bit 4) * This parameter is valid only for the MULTIPLEX series.
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
When a process is selected for the head, that differs from the selected
gh
head, in the process selection window where the compound type
MAZATROL program is displayed:
ri
Output of an alarm when a process is
selected for the head differing from the 0: No alarm
ll
.A
selected head in the process selection 1: Causes alarm 1477 INCORRECT PROCESS SELECTION
window where the compound type
F158
N
MAZATROL program is displayed
O
(bit 5) * This parameter is valid only for the MULTIPLEX series.
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Bar loader schedule function

ri
ZA
Se
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
IM
Bar loader schedule function

K
ZA
F158
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Select the direction in which the wear offset data of the Mazatrol tool data
is applied when both the tool length compensation and 3D coordinate
ig
conversion functions are used together.

yr
Selection of wear offset direction when the

op
0: Actual axes (Machine coordinate system)

tool length compensation and 3D
C
coordinate conversion functions are used 1: Virtual axes (Program coordinate system)
F158 together
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-228
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the timing of data creation for the MACHINING NAVIGATION -

RESULT display when “1” is specified for both CONTI. and NUMBER
items of the end unit (program repetition with workpiece counting made
valid).
Timing of data creation for the MACHINING
NAVIGATION - RESULT display with 0: At the end of the first piece machining
workpiece counting made valid
F159 1: At the end of the last piece machining
(bit 0)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
0: G64
ri
1: G61.1
ll
.A
(G64/G61.1)
F159
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Fixed value
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
F159
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
ht
Fixed value
ig
yr
op
—
C
F159
(bit 3)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-229
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When an output diagram is displayed for continuous rating in the spindle

load meter area of the POSITION display, a spindle output diagram
registered in the setting file is:
0: Not displayed
Whether or not to display on the POSITION (An output diagram is displayed using the values set with the
display a spindle output diagram stored in parameters SA67 to SA80.)
the setting file
F159 1: Displayed
(bit 4) (An output diagram is displayed using the values stored in the setting
file.)
d .
Program type M, E Note :
ve
This parameter is available only to models that allow the operator to
er
switch between load meter ratings and are capable of displaying a
s
Unit —
re
spindle output diagram on the POSITION display.
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
C-axis clamping speed selection in hobbing
ri
ll
0: Clamp at the rapid feed rate (parameter M1). (Conventional operation)
.A
Workpiece spindle (C-axis) clamping speed 1: Clamp at the cutting feed rate (parameter M3).
N
selection in hobbing
O
F159
TI
(bit 5)
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type E
R
o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
ri
ZA
Reflects tool offset (tool wear offset and tool geometry offset) in the G53.5
Se
mode in the current position in automatic operation of EIA/ISO programs:

IM
0: Reflects
Reflecting tool offset (tool wear offset/tool 1: Does not reflect
K
geometry offset) in the G53.5 mode in the

ZA
current position
F159
A
*1 This parameter is valid only for the models for which the G code type
M
(bit 6) for turning machines (F30 = 1) is set.

YA
*2 Even if the setting of this parameter is changed, the current position

on the TOOL PATH CHECK display and the tool nose symbol shown
3
Program type E on the TRACE and TOOL PATH CHECK displays are given
01
Conditions Immediate assuming the setting of F159 bit 6 = 0.

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Compare the magnitudes of the start position and end position using
ig
signed integers. (Conventional operation)

yr
op
1: Compare the magnitudes of the start position and end position using
unsigned integers.
C
Offset direction judgment selection for

steps for workpiece measurement
F159 * In measurement in which both of the start and end positions of the
(bit 7) program turn out to be negative values, the result of offsetting will not be
correctly reflected unless F159 bit 7 is set to “1”.
This parameter is effective for steps +X, –X, +Y, and –Y in workpiece
Program type M measurement.
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-230
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set how the feedrate is displayed on the POSITION screen during tool tip
point control.
0: Composite feedrate of the machine axes
1: Feedrate at the tool tip in reference to the workpiece
Feedrate display during tool tip point control
F160
(bit 1)
Program type E
. d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
F160
N
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
0: Not used
ri
ZA
Se
1: Used
A
IM
Use of TC45 in interference check

K
ZA
F160
A
(bit 3)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
When the O.D./I.D. measurement is performed with the workpiece

measurement unit of MAZATROL or using the workpiece measuring
ig
macro in EIA program, display mode of the target value, result of

yr
measurement and offset data on the AUTO MEASURE display is

op
Display of the measured value on the

switched according to the setting for this parameter.
AUTO MEASURE display in O.D./I.D.
C
measurement, diameter/radius 0: Conforms to the setting at M18 bit 5.

F160
1: In diameter
(bit 4)
* M18 bit 5: Switching between diameter/radius (0: Radius/1: Diameter)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-231
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Alarm output when the actual measurement of the C-axis coordinate is

carried out with the sensor ON because it did not go off due to insufficient
Alarm output when the actual measurement C-axis return distance after temporary measurement of the C-axis
of the C-axis coordinate is carried out with coordinate
the sensor ON because it did not go off due 0: During continuous operation: No alarm stop
to insufficient C-axis return distance after
F160 temporary measurement of the C-axis During single block operation: Alarm stop
(bit 5) coordinate 1: During continuous operation: Alarm stop

During single block operation: Alarm stop
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Switching the collision check method during automatic operation with the
gh
ISS function set valid when measuring a tool by the TOOL EYE
ri
0: Conforms to the setting at parameter F143 bit 3 during the execution of
Switching the collision check method during a measuring cycle.
ll
automatic operation with the ISS function
.A
1: Collision check is made invalid during the execution of a measuring
set valid when measuring a tool by the
F160 cycle.
N
TOOL EYE
O
(bit 6) (During the execution of a measuring cycle means the movement starting
TI
from the “approach point” and ending at the “approach point after
60
measurement”.)
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Priority when erasing the tool path from the TOOL PATH CHECK display
ri
ZA
or TRACE display
Se
0: Drawing first
IM
Priority change when erasing the tool path After the tool path is erased, the geometry will be drawn correctly.
from the TOOL PATH CHECK display or However, the tool path erasing time will be longer than that in the
K
TRACE display case when the setting value is “1”.

ZA
F160
1: Erasing time first
A
(bit 7)
M
The tool path erasing time will be shorter than that in the case when
the setting value is “0”. However, after the tool path is erased, the
YA
Program type M, E color of overlapping lines may change from the one before erasure.
3
01
Unit — * The drawing color differs depending on the machine.

)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-232
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Lathing tool offset functions

76543210
Shape/wear offset number separation
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Shape offset handling
0: Coordinate shift
1: Tool movement
Tool offset timing
0: When move command is executed following
d .
T-code command
ve
1: When T-code command is executed
er
Tool offset vector handling if reset function is
s
executed
re
0: Vector cleared
ts
1: Vector not cleared
gh
Shape offset handling if offset number 0 is entered
ri
— 0: Offset cleared
ll
1: Offset not cleared
.A
F161 Simplified wear offset
0: Invalid
N
O
1: Valid
TI
C/Z offset when a MAZATROL program is called
60
A from an EIA program

R
40
0: C/Z offset set in the MAZATROL program is

PO
29
valid
1: C/Z offset set in the EIA program is valid
R
o.
O
N
C/Z offset when an EIA program is called from a

C
MAZATROL program
al
0: C/Z offset set in the EIA program is valid

ri
ZA
1: C/Z offset set in the MAZATROL program is

Se
valid
A
IM
F161 bit 0:
K
T command:
ZA
Program type M  For offset number separation

A
 is used for shape offset.  is used for wear offset.

M
 For offset number non-separation
YA
Unit —
Offset number  is used for both shape offset and wear offset.
3
01
During independent start of tool tip point control

)2
0: Movement according to the particular amount of offset

(c
1: No movement according to the particular amount of offset

ht
Movement/no movement according to the

ig
particular amount of offset during

yr
independent start of tool tip point control

F162
op
(bit 0)
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-233
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: The same primary rotary axis angle sign as that existing during the
start of tool tip point control is selected as the angle of the rotary axis
for implementing the tool axial vector specified during tool tip point
control.
Example :
B = positive B=0 B = positive
d .
B
ve
s er
re
C=0 C = 180
ts
1: The angle that provides a smaller amount of rotational movement of
gh
the secondary rotary axis on a singular point is selected as the angle
Type of passage of tool tip point through of the rotary axis for implementing the tool axial vector specified during
ri
singular point tool tip point control.
ll
F162 (Both positive and negative signs are available for the primary rotary
.A
(bit 1) axis.)
N
Example :
O
B = positive B=0 B = negative
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
C=0 C=0
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
Program type M, E
A

M
Unit —
YA
Setting range 0, 1
3
01
Chamfer/corner R-command address selection

)2
0 : (I), (K), (R), (,R), (,C), (,A)

1 : (R), (C), (A)
(c
ht
Chamfer/corner R-command address

selection
ig
F162
yr
op
(bit 2)
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-234
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed hole-machining cycle return selection

0: Initial point
1: R-point
Fixed hole-machining cycle return selection

F162
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
Conditions After stop of movemen
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
6 digits in T-command for turning
ts
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
.A
6 digits in T-command for turning
F162
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Use of the M Pro scheme as the method of selecting the Length correction
ri
ZA
axis bit
Se
0: Invalid
IM
Use of the M Pro scheme as the method of 1: Valid

K
selecting the Length correction axis bit

F162
ZA
(bit 5)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
MAZATROL program check for missing Z-offset

ht
0: Valid
ig
yr
1: Invalid
op
MAZATROL program check for missing

C
Z-offset, valid/invalid
F162
(bit 6)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-235
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Encoder polarity selection

0: Pulse rate increase for forward rotation command
1: Pulse rate reduction for forward rotation command
Encoder polarity selection

F162
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
.A
Bar feeder scheduling function
N
F163
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Invalid
ri
ZA
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
Incorporation of wear offset data into the *1 This parameter is valid only for the models for which the G code type
current position display in EIA/ISO program
K
for machining centers (F30 = 0) is set and those equipped with the
mode, valid/invalid
ZA
F163 swivel type head.

A
(bit 1) *2 This parameter is valid in automatic operation and virtual machining,

M
but not valid in tool path check.

YA
Program type E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
op
Incorporation of wear offset data into the

C
current position display in MAZATROL

program mode, valid/invalid
F163
(bit 2)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-236
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Position of thread turning tool nose on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display

0: Tool tip
1: Position measured using TOOL EYE
Position of thread turning tool nose on the
VIRTUAL MACHINING display
F163
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
Barrier check on the VIRTUAL
.A
MACHINING display valid/invalid
F163
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0 : Hidden
ri
ZA
Se
1 : Displayed
A
IM
Menu on the DATA I/O display (tape),

K
displayed/hidden
ZA
F163
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
0 : Hidden
ig
1 : Displayed
yr
op
Menu on the DATA I/O display (CMT),

C
displayed/hidden
F163
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-237
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Automatic tool data setting conditions

Magazine (turret) tool
F164
(bit 0)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
When the layout has been saved on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display, the
gh
saved layout is retained or not if the WNo. is changed on the PROGRAM
display or the program is edited.
ri
0: Do not retain
ll
PROGRAM LAYOUT display save function
.A
selection 1: Retain
F164
N
O
(bit 2) Note :
TI
When F164 bit 2 = 1, the priority number cannot be written in the save
60
A
enabled status. The priority number cannot be written when the WNo.
R
40
Program type M on the PROGRAM display is changed in the save enabled status.
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Enabled
ri
ZA
Se
1: Disabled
A
IM

K
Invalid tools
ZA
F164
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Enabled
ig
1: Disabled
yr
op
C

Broken tools
F164
(bit 5)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-238
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Expired tools
F164
(bit 6)
.
M
d
Program type
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Enabled
gh
1: Disabled
ri
ll
.A
Life warning tools
N
F164
O
TI
(bit 7)
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M
R

o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-239
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
High-speed synchronous tapping function
0: Valid
1: Invalid
X-axis movement to minus side during polar
coordinate interpolation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Polar coordinate interpolation of the C-axis
d .
0: Specification in terms of radius value
ve
1: Specification in terms of diameter value
er
C-axis indexing when EIA subprogram is called
s
from MAZATROL program
re
0: Not executed
ts
1: Executed
gh
Modal or non-modal state of Q command in
ri
deep-hole drilling cycle
ll
0: Modal
.A
1: Non-modal
N
Conversion of tool set data for milling tool based on
O
— head swivel angle when G53.5 is commanded
TI
60
A 0: Disabled
F165 1: Enabled
R
40
PO
29
Behavior of automatic operation of an EIA program

when Z-offset is not set
R
o.
0: Z-offset = 0
N
1: Alarm stop
al
Setting at CONTI. of the END unit during tool path

ri
ZA
check
Se
0: Invalid
IM
1: Valid
Supplemental explanation of F165 Bit 4
K
ZA
This bit is used to select whether the depth of infeed per pass (address Q
command) in deep-hole drilling cycles (G83, G283, and G287 for G-code
A
series M; G83 and G87 for G-code series A) is modal or non-modal.

M
0: Modal
YA
The modal value is used if the Q command is not specified. If the

modal value of the Q command is 0 (typically, in cases where the Q
3
01
setting is omitted in the initial deep-hole drilling cycle command), or if

the Q value is set to 0, an alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT
)2
occurs.
(c
1: Non-modal
ht
Program type M If the Q setting is omitted, or if the Q value is set to 0, the workpiece is
ig
Conditions After stop of movement cut to the preset infeed depth in a single pass.
yr
Unit —
op

C
2-240
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Possible
1: Impossible
Alteration of tool set value (tool length) on

the TOOL DATA display in the automatic
operation mode,
F166 enabled/disabled
(bit 0)
.
M, E
d
Program type
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Cutting edge offset
gh
1: Wear offset
ri
ll
.A
Type of wear offset indicated in the milling
tool list on the TOOL DATA display
N
F166
O
TI
(bit 1)
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
R

o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
ri
ZA
0: IDNo.
Se
1: Name
IM
K
ID No./Tool name selection on the TOOL

ZA
DATA display
F166
A
M
(bit 2)
YA
3
Program type M, E
01

)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
0: Same plane
yr
1: Retain independent plane

op
C
Selection whether the selected plane on the

TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display is
to be held
F166
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-241
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Retain search complete status

1: Cancel search results
Operation conducted when the [RESTART]

menu item is tapped following the
completion of the search in EIA modal
F166 restarting mode
(bit 4)
.
M, E
d
Program type
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Automatic adjustment to nominal diameter
gh
1: No automatic adjustment
ri
ll
Tool diameter auto-setting for the end mill,
.A
face mill, and ball end mill on the TOOL
N
DATA display
F166
O
TI
(bit 5)
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
R

o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
ri
ZA
0: Invalid
Se
1: Valid
IM
K
ZA
Automatic backup function

F166
A
M
(bit 7)
YA
3
Program type M, E
01

)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
yr
op
C
2-242
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Threading (by turning) shift angle (Q-command) unit
0: 1/1000° 1: 1°
Handling the diameter/radius of point R during the
hole-machining fixed cycle
0: Based on the settings for the X-axis
1: Fixed at the radius value
Handling the tool measured using the G137H
command
0: Regarding the tool as broken
d .
1: Not regarding the tool as broken
ve
Handling the single-process mode when operation
er
— is completed/reset
s
0: Not holding the mode
re
F167 1: Holding the mode
ts
If the arc internal correction value is greater than
gh
the arc radius
ri
0: Connecting the path linearly
ll
1: Regarding the status as an alarm
.A
Handling the X-axis command in G68.5
N
0: Radius value
O
1: Diameter value
TI
Wear correction direction in the lathe-based
60
A machine model
R
40
0: Actual axis direction

PO
1: Virtual axis direction

29
Program type M
R
Updating the current position by a press of the

o.
Conditions After stop of movement RESET key in manual operation mode

N
Unit — 0: Valid 1: Invalid

al

ri
ZA
Se
Axis movement at the time when dynamic offset II is canceled (G54.2P0)

A
IM
0: Perform
1: Do not perform
K
Selection of operation to perform when

ZA
dynamic offset II is canceled

A
F168
M
(bit 0)
YA
3
Program type E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
Select whether the rotational center offset is to be added to the tool length
yr
when the tool axial tool length offset command (G43.1) is issued
op
F168 (bit 2) = 0:
C
Rotational center offset is added/not added

Offset is added.
to the tool length when the tool axial tool
length offset command (G43.1) is issued F168 (bit 2) = 1:
F168
(bit 2) Offset is not added.
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-243
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select axis for the milling tool wear correction and TOOL EYE
compensation amount for the B-axis rotational turret.
F168 (bit 3) = 0:
Axis for the milling tool wear correction and
Virtual axis
TOOL EYE compensation amount for the
B-axis rotational turret F168 (bit 3) = 1:
F168
(bit 3) Actual axis
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Convert the 3D coordinate conversion (G68/G68.5) into inclined-surface
gh
machining (G68.2 or G68.4).
ri
0: Invalid
ll
Conversion of 3D coordinate conversion 1: Valid
.A
into inclined-surface machining
F168
N
* When G68 is replaced with G68.2 (or G68.4) by setting bit 4 of
O
(bit 4) parameter F168 to 1, 5-axis machining function (inclined-surface
TI
machining, workpiece placement error correction) can be used at the
60
A
same time.
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Select whether to hold the amount of shift in spite of pressing the RESET
ri
ZA
key when manual handle pulse interruption is valid.

Se
F168 (bit 5) = 0:
IM
Holding the amount of manual handle pulse Hold

K
interruption
ZA
F168 F168 (bit 5) = 1:

No hold (M640T compatible mode)
A
(bit 5)
M
The same operation as that of the M640T can be selected. This parameter
YA
is valid when F95 bit 6 = 0 (holds the amount of manual handle pulse
Program type M, E interruption, in spite of the RESET key operation/M30/M02).
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Select whether [RESTART2 NONMODAL] during stop of an EIA program

execution is to be made valid or invalid.
ig
yr
F168 (bit 6) = 0:
op
[RESTART2 NONMODAL] during stop of Invalid

C
an EIA program execution invalid/valid

F168 F168 (bit 6) = 1:
(bit 6) Valid
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-244
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Whether to allow for groove/protrusion width measurement the selection

of a correction pattern which assumes that both ends of the groove or
protrusion are machined with the same tool
Correction pattern for groove/ protrusion F168 (bit 7) = 0:

width measurement Impossible to select the correction pattern
F168
F168 (bit 7) = 1:
(bit 7)
Possible to select the correction pattern
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Rapid feed overlapping function
gh
0 : Invalid
ri
1 : Valid
ll
.A
Rapid feed overlapping function
F169
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
The function to restart machine operation after the detection of collision by

ri
ZA
the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function

Se
0 : Invalid
IM
The function to restart machine operation 1 : Valid

after the detection of collision by the
K
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function

ZA
F169
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Fixed value (0)

ig
yr
op
—
C
F169
(bit 3)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-245
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Handling of smooth corner control setting width when G61.1 is specified in

MAZATROL programs
0: Handle as 0 without referring to parameter F270
Handling of smooth corner control setting 1: Refer to parameter F270
width when G61.1 is specified in
MAZATROL programs
F169 [Related parameters]
(bit 4) F270: Smooth corner control function setting width
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Calling of the program specified in the end unit upon reaching the target
ts
part count
gh
0: Not called
ri
Calling of the program specified in the end 1: Called (compatible with T PLUS/M640T/M640MT/M640MTPro)
ll
.A
unit upon reaching the target part count,
enabled/disabled
F169
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Fixed value (0)

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
F169
ZA
(bit 7)
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
Consideration of offset amount of dynamic offsetting II at the current

ht
position
ig
0: Considered
yr
op
Consideration of the offset amount of 1: Not considered

C
dynamic offsetting II at the current position

F170
(bit 0)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-246
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Reflecting the tool offset changed in an EIA program in a tool path check
0: Does not reflect
1: Reflects
Tool offset changed in an EIA program in a
tool path check
F170
(bit 2)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Continuous diameter display of the X-axis coordinates on the POSITION
ts
screen
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
.A
Continuous diameter display of the X-axis
N
coordinates on the POSITION screen Note :
F170
O
F170 bit 3 is enabled only when F82 bit 4 is set to 1. When the diameter
TI
(bit 3) display is enabled, the coordinates are displayed as diameter values
60
A
even in the milling mode.
R
40
PO
29
F82 (bit 4) 0 1
R
Program type M, E F170 (bit 3) 0 1 0 1

o.
O
N
C
Turning mode Radius Radius Diameter Diameter

al
Unit —
K
Milling mode Radius Radius Radius Diameter

ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
Select the parameter setting range when the inertia estimation/parameter

IM
setting G codes (G297/G298) are specified with address P omitted.

0: All axes in all systems (same operation as when P0 specified)
K
ZA
Operation when address P is omitted in 1: All axes in the specified systems (same operation as when P1
G297/G298 command specified)
A
2: Specified axes in specified systems (same operation as when P2

M
F241 specified)
YA
Other than above: Displaying alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT

3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 32768 to 32767

ig
During the tool center point control (G43.4, G43.5), the feedrate used for
yr
calculating the deceleration time at corners is switched from the feedrate

op
at the machine end point to that at the tool tip point if the travel ratio
C
between the tool tip point and machine end point (travel at the machine
Threshold for the travel ratio between the
end point/travel at the tool tip point) exceeds the value set for F242.
tool tip point and machine end point for time
study When 0 is set, 5 is assumed.
F242 When a value beyond 20 is set, 20 is assumed.
Program type E
Unit —
2-247
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the corner rounding offset used in the cutting point command mode.
* This parameter is enabled when F92 bit 7 = 0 and F94 bit 7 = 0.
Corner rounding in the cutting point

command mode
F268
Program type E [Related parameters]
d .
ve
Conditions Immediate F92 (bit 7)
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in F94 (bit 7)
s
re
Fixed value
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
F269
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
Set the setting width used when the Smooth corner control function is
ri
ZA
valid.
Se
The value set at this parameter is used when the R command is not
IM
specified with the G61.1 or G61.2 command.

K
Setting width
ZA
* When the set value is modified, the new value is made valid when
F270 G61.1 or G61.2 is executed after the modification.
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

)2

(c
Set the arc cutting clamp speed coefficient used when the Smooth corner
ht
control function is valid.

ig
yr
op

C
Arc cutting clamp speed coefficient
F271
Program type M, E [Related parameters]

Conditions Immediate F2
Unit %
2-248
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Sets the arc cutting clamp speed coefficient used when both the smooth
corner control function and the high-speed smooth control function are
enabled.
Arc cutting clamp speed coefficient for
high-speed smooth control
F272
d .
ve
Conditions Immediate F9
er
Unit %
s
re
Set the Smooth corner control function cancellation angle.
ts
gh
Corner deceleration is not performed at a point where two blocks are
joined at an angle smaller than the angle obtained by the following math
ri
calculation.
ll
.A
Cancellation angle
Cancellation angle = F273  Number of feed axes/2
N
F273
O
TI
* If “0” is set, default operation applies.
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit °
O
N
al
Sets the ratio of the cutting feedrate in the tool axial direction with respect
ri
ZA
to the feedrate F specified in the program, used during execution of the

Se
EIA/ISO engraving function.

A
IM
Cutting feedrate override rate in the tool Cutting feedrate in the tool axial direction F’ = F  F274/100
axial direction for the EIA/ISO engraving When 0 is set, 100 is assumed.
K
function
ZA
If 999 or greater is set, 999 is assumed.

F274
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit %
)2

(c
Sets the character depth used during execution of the EIA/ISO engraving
ht
function if specification of the depth (address D) is omitted in the program.

ig
When a value smaller than 0 is set, 0 is assumed.

yr
op
Character depth for the EIA/ISO engraving

C
function
F275
Program type E
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-249
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the character height used during execution of the EIA/ISO engraving
function if specification of the height (address H) is omitted in the program.
Character height for the EIA/ISO engraving When a value smaller than 0 is set, 0 is assumed.
function When 0 is set, the alarm 1914 TEXT HEIGHT INVALID OF ENGRAV.
occurs.
F276
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
Sets the retract height used during execution of the EIA/ISO engraving
ts
function if specification of the retraction height (address R) is omitted in
gh
the program.
ri
When a value smaller than 0 is set, 0 is assumed.
ll
Retraction height for the EIA/ISO engraving
.A
function
N
F277
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
Set the cutting accuracy to be taken into consideration for the

ri
ZA
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function during automatic operation.

Se
A
IM
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD:

K
Cutting accuracy
ZA
F300
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm
)2

(c
Set the tool path accuracy to be taken into consideration for the collision
ht
check processing by the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function.

ig
yr
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD:

op
Tool path accuracy for collision check

C
processing
F301
Program type M, E
Unit 0.0001 mm
2-250
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the allowance when stopping axis feed above the previously reached
depth for the execution of a deep-hole boring cycle or a cycle shown
below.
G85/G285, G89/G289, G75, G76, G78, G79, G86, G88, G89
Allowance in rapid feed stop in deep-hole

boring cycle G00
F302
G00 feed rate  D131/100
F302
.
G01
d
ve
Program type M, E F302
s er
re
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
ts
gh
Sets the feed rate per minute for G01 re-entry for a deep-hole boring cycle
ri
or for G85/G285, G89/G289, G75, G76, G78, G79, G86, G88 and G89.
ll
.A
N
G01 feed-in speed for deep-hole boring Note :
O
cycle If “0” or a value outside the setting range is set, re-entry is executed at
TI
the machining feed rate.
60
F303 A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
o.
O
N
C
al
Unit 1 mm/min / 1 in/min

K
ri
ZA

Se
Sets the wait time when an alarm is detected during restarting search
IM
initiated by pressing [CUT] during VIRTUAL MACHINING.

When an alarm has been detected, the restarting search is resumed if the
K
alarm is canceled within the set wait time or stopped with alarm 2120
ZA
Alarm wait time during [CUT] restarting RESTART PT SEARCH INTERRUPTED generated if it is not canceled
search during VIRTUAL MACHINING
A
even after the wait time has elapsed.

M
F304
YA
When this parameter is set to “0”, the wait time is 10 seconds.

3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit ms
ht

ig
yr
op
C
2-251
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When an incremental feed command of 720 (two turns) or greater is

specified for a rotary type rotary axis, the feed amount of the rotary axis is
rounded to one turn + a fraction (remainder obtained by dividing the
specified feed amount by 360).
Rounding the feed amount increases the speed of the interference check
during automatic operation intelligent safety shield (ISS)/virtual
machining.
The rounding process can be enabled/disabled as follows.
0: Rounding process for rotary axes disabled
1: Rounding process for rotary axes enabled in interference check during
d .
automatic ISS
ve
2: Rounding process for rotary axes enabled in interference check during
er
automatic ISS and in virtual machining
s
re
Automatic operation intelligent safety shield
ts
(ISS)/virtual machining interference check Example :
gh
selection Change in machining shape due to rounding process with respect to the
ri
F326 ZC plane
ll
.A
Before applying the After applying the
rounding process rounding process
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
Cutting path in C-axis line machining

O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Note :
Se
Program type M, E Applying the rounding process to two or more axes including a rotary
IM
axis may change the cutting shape and cause interference. Therefore,
Conditions Immediate restrict the use of this parameter to machining in which no interference
K
Unit — will be caused due to influence of the rounding process.

ZA
A
Number of buffers for calculating the average of optimum time constants

M
YA
Note :
Real time tuning II Number of buffers for
3
When a value outside the setting range is set, 3 is assumed.

01
calculating the average of optimum time

constants
)2
F328
(c
ht
ig
Program type M, E
yr
op
C
Unit —
Setting range 1-5
2-252
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Used to select the operation when an undefined SMC data number or an

SMC data number outside the permissible range has been specified with
an SMC data specification command (G61.1P) in EIA/ISO programs.
0: Continue operation without changing the SMC data number with the
Operation at specification of undefined alarm 965 DESIGNATED PNo NOT FOUND displayed.
SMC data number Note, however, if this alarm is generated during a tool path check, the
F329 tool path check operation stops.
(bit 0) 1: Stop operation with the alarm 964 DESIGNATED PNo NOT FOUND
displayed.
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Function to select the mating tool when setting the tool length
gh
automatically for a FLASH tool on the TOOL DATA display.
0: Invalid
ri
ll
Mating tool selection function for automatic 1: Valid
.A
tool length setting of FLASH tool
F329
N
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Select whether the M codes related to spindle rotation are to be

ri
ZA
automatically output when executing the smooth restart function.

Se
0: Output automatically
IM
1: Do not output automatically

Automatic M code output for smooth restart
K
F329
ZA
(bit 3)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Select the operation of the axes for which no movement is specified in the
ht
program when returning the axes to the restarting position for the smooth
ig
restart function.
yr
0: Move the axes for which no movement is specified in the program to

op
Operation to return to the restarting position the machine zero point.

C
for smooth restart

F329 1: Do not move the axes for which no movement is specified in the
program to the machine zero point.
(bit 4)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-253
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Switches the hobbing mode between standard hobbing and hobbing II.
0: Hobbing
1: Hobbing II (position controlled hobbing)
Hobbing selection
F330
(bit 0)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Selects the clamping speed of the hobbing axis (V-axis) in hobbing II.
ts
gh
0: Clamping at the rapid feed rate (parameter M1)
ri
1: Clamp at the cutting feed rate (parameter M3).
Hobbing axis (V-axis) clamping speed
ll
.A
selection in hobbing II (position controlled
hobbing)
F330
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Selects whether to display the machine coordinates of the hobbing axis

ri
ZA
(V-axis) and workpiece spindle (C-axis) in hobbing II.

Se
0: Not displayed
IM
Machine coordinate display of hobbing axis 1: Displayed

(V-axis) and workpiece spindle (C-axis) in
K
hobbing II (position controlled hobbing)

F330
ZA
(bit 2)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Counting of use count and time of use for multiple tools with the same tool
ht
number and different tool names

ig
0: Invalid
yr
op
Life count for multiple tools with the same 1: Valid

C
tool number and different tool names

F330 * This parameter is enabled when parameter F113 bit 0 = 1 (counting all
(bit 7) types of use under the same tool number for the tool life management
on the TOOL DATA display).
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-254
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Command unit setting of Q command for G32 (thread cutting) for the
G-code series for machining centers (parameter F30 = 0)
Command unit for thread cutting shift angle 0: 1°

(Q command), for the G-code series for
1: 1/1000°
machining centers
F331
(bit 2)
Program type E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Shape sequence specification at restart in a MAZATROL program
ts
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
Shape sequence specification at restart in
.A
a MAZATROL program The shape sequence can be specified only for point machining units or
F331
N
the C-axis point machining unit.
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Clamp at the specified speed

ri
ZA
Se
1: Do not clamp at the specified speed

A
IM
Tool nose center speed clamp operation in

the cutting point command mode
K
F335
ZA
(bit 0)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
0: Enable cancellation of distortion for linear axes

ht
1: Disable cancellation of distortion for linear axes

ig
yr
Disabling linear axis distortion cancel in the

op
5-axis spline interpolation mode

C
F335
(bit 1)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-255
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Enable cancellation of distortion for rotary axes

1: Disable cancellation of distortion for rotary axes
Disabling rotary axis distortion cancel in the

5-axis spline interpolation mode
F335
(bit 2)
Program type E
d .
ve
Unit —
er
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Action to take when the part count is set using the program (#3901,
ts
#3902) during automatic operation with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
gh
SHIELD (ISS) enabled for automatic operation
ri
Action to take when the part count is set
0: Follow the setting of parameter F143 bit 0 (operation upon overwriting
using the program with the INTELLIGENT
ll
the part count during automatic operation with IIS enabled).
.A
SAFETY SHIELD enabled for automatic
F335 operation 1: Set the part count and continue automatic operation with ISS enabled.
N
(bit 7)
O
TI
60
Program type E
A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
R
o.
F143bit0
O
Setting range 0, 1
N
C
al
Control mode for rapid feed in the cutting point command mode
K
ri
ZA
0: Cutting point command mode

Se
1: Tool center point control mode

A
IM
Control mode selection for rapid feed in the

cutting point command mode
K
F336
ZA
(bit 0)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Cutting point specification when the tool is set in a singular posture in the
ht
cutting point command

ig
0: Tool tip center

yr
Cutting point selection in a singular posture 1: The cutting point is made the point on the face that is closest to the
op
in the cutting point command mode immediately preceding cutting point.

C
F336
(bit 1)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-256
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Variable acceleration control G0

F336
(bit 2)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Variable acceleration control
ts
gh
0 : Invalid
ri
1 : Valid
ll
.A
Variable acceleration control
F336
N
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Super-high-speed machining
ri
ZA
Se
0 : Invalid
A
1 : Valid
IM
Super-high-speed machining
K
* This parameter is valid only when the high-speed smooth control

F336
ZA
function is valid.
(bit 7)
A
* When the set value is modified, the new value is made valid when
M
G61.1 or G61.2 is executed after the modification.

YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-257
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-5 User parameter SOFT LIMIT (I)
Classification USER Display title SOFT LIMIT

The amount and direction of shift from the final setting position during
unidirectional positioning of the point-machining or during execution of
G60.
I1 < 0: Positioning in minus direction
I1 > 0: Positioning in plus direction
Example : +y
Shift amount of unidirectional positioning
(G60) Machine coordinate system
Shift amount
I1 +x
.
I1
d
ve
ser
re
Final setting position MPL091
Program type M, E
ts
Note :
gh
For the axes which operate in submicrons in the case of submicron
ri
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
Unit machine specifications, the setting unit of this parameter is reduced to
(0.0001°)
ll
1/10 times.
.A
N
The parameter used to define the machine working zone in order to
O
prevent machine interference with the workpiece or jigs. Set the
TI
coordinate values of the machine coordinate system.
60
Example :
A
R
40
PO
Upper (plus direction) user soft-limit

29
+Y Machine
R
coordinate system
o.
I2 M8
N
(Y-axis) +X
al
I3 (X-axis)
K
ri
ZA
Se
Program type M, E
A
M9
IM
(Y-axis)
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in I2 (X-axis)
Unit
K
(0.0001°)
ZA

A
M
M9 (X-axis) M8 (X-axis)
YA
Manufacturer soft-limit MPL092

3
01
Lower (minus direction) user soft-limit

)2
If the machine is likely to overstep its working zone, an alarm will occur
(c
I3 and the machine will stop.

ht
Note :
ig
1. These parameters are valid only when bit 2 of I14 is 0.

yr
Program type M, E
2. These parameters are invalid if I2 = I3.
op

3. For the axes which operate in submicrons in the case of submicron
C
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in machine specifications, the setting unit of this parameter is reduced
Unit
(0.0001°) to 1/10 times.
2-258
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Override
(%)
Function for making the G0 speed variable

Variable override: Minimum value 100
I5
50
Program type M, E I5
0
d .
ve
I9 I7 I8 Axis position
Unit %
er
I10
s
re
Note :
ts
1. When I7 = 0, the G0 speed variable control function is invalid.
gh
2. When I8 = 0, the variable control area width (upper limit side and
ri
lower limit side) is determined by parameter I7.
ll
.A
Function for making the G0 speed variable Override
N
Variable control area (lower limit side) (%)
O
TI
I7
60
100
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E 50
o.
O
N
Conditions Immediate I5
C
0
al
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
K
Unit Axis position

ri
(0.0001°) I9 I7 I8
ZA
Se
Setting range 0 to 99999999 I10

A
IM
Note :
1. When I7 = 0, the G0 speed variable control function is invalid.
K
ZA
2. When I8 = 0, the variable control area width (upper limit side and
lower limit side) is determined by parameter I7.
A
M
Function for making the G0 speed variable, Override

YA
Variable control area (upper limit side) (%)

3
I8
01
)2
100
(c
ht
Program type M, E 50
ig
Conditions Immediate I5
yr
0
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
op
Unit I9 I7 Axis position

(0.0001°) I8
C
Override
Setting range 0 to 99999999 I10 Axis position
2-259
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Override
(%)

Variable control area lower limit
100
I9
50
0
d .
ve
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
er
I10
s
re
Override
ts
gh
(%)
ri
ll
Variable control area upper limit
.A
100
I10
N
O
50
TI
60
A
0
R
40
PO
29
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

R
I10
o.

O
N
Set the rotary center of a workpiece at a table angle of 0° for each axis in
al
the machine coordinate system. (Valid only with dynamic offset function
ri
ZA
and in manual operation)

Se
Rotary center of a workpiece

IM
I11
K
ZA
Note :
A
Program type E
M
For the axes which operate in submicrons in the case of submicron

YA
machine specifications, the setting unit of this parameter is reduced to

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 1/10 times.
3
01

)2
Set the clamping value for the amount of handle interruption.

(c
ht
ig
Clamping value for the amount of handle

yr
interruption
op
I12
C
Program type M, E
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-260
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Execution of G28 (reference-point return)

0: Memory-type zero-point return
1: Watchdog-type zero-point return
Zero-point return mode when G28
(reference-point return) is specified
I13
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Manual zero-point return operation
gh
0: Memory-type zero-point return (After power-on, however,
ri
watchdog-type zero-point return)
ll
1: Watchdog-type zero-point return
.A
Manual zero-point return operation
N
I13
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
—
O
Unit
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Display of a removed axis

ZA
Se
0: Not displayed
A
IM
1: Displayed
Axis display when a control axis is removed

K
ZA
I13
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Removal of control axes

ig
0: Not removed
yr
1: Removed
op
C
Removal of control axes, valid/invalid

I13
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-261
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
Mirror image with respect to the machine
zero-point
0: Invalid
1: Valid
User software limits (I2, I3)
— 0: Valid
1: Invalid
I14
Tool-tip relief after spindle orientation during
d .
execution of G75, G76, G86 or point-machining
ve
(boring or back-boring)
er
0: Required
s
1: Not required
re
Program type M, E Direction of the relief mentioned above
ts
0: Plus
gh
Conditions After stop of movement 1: Minus
ri
Unit —
ll
.A
Enter the error between the zero point of the actual workpiece and the
N
FRM zero point that has been automatically calculated as a result of the
O
workpiece transfer unit (with work hand angle of 0°).
TI
60
X A X
Automatically calculated workpiece position
R
40
Amount of work hand rotational error Z Y

PO
correction (Work hand angle: 0°) Actual workpiece position

29
I17
R
o.
O
N
C
al
I17 (X)
ri
ZA
Program type M, E
Se
Conditions After stop of movement I17 (Z) I17 (Y)

IM
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)
K

ZA
A
M

YA
X Automatically calculated workpiece position X

Amount of work hand rotational error Z
Actual workpiece position Y
3
correction (Work hand angle: 45°)

01
I18
)2
(c
I18 (X)
ht
Program type M, E
ig
After stop of movement

yr
Conditions I18 (Z) I17 (Y)

op
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

C
Setting range –32768 to 32767 (Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)
2-262
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
X Automatically calculated workpiece position X
Amount of work hand rotational error Z Actual workpiece position Y
correction (Work hand angle: 90°)
I19 I19 (X)
d .
Program type M, E I19 (Z)
ve
I19 (Y)
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
(Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)
ts
Specify the position of the fixed point which is used when 9 is specified in
gh
parameter SU10 or that [USER 1 (I21)] is specified in “Change position” of
ri
the manual program unit.
ll
.A
Fixed point 1 specified by the user
N
O
I21
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
o.
O
N
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

C
al

K
ri
ZA
Specify the position of the fixed point which is used when 9 is specified in
Se
parameter SU10 or that [USER 2 (I22)] is specified in “Change position” of

A
IM
the manual program unit.

K
Fixed point 2 specified by the user

ZA
A
I22
M
YA
3
Program type M
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-263
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-6 User parameter SYSTEM (SU)
Classification USER Display title SYSTEM
Axis setting for selecting the plane used in circular interpolation, cutter
radius compensation, tool nose radius compensation, cylindrical
interpolation and polar coordinate interpolation.
Base axis Parallel axis 1 Parallel axis 2
Axis setting I for plane selection
I SU1 SU2 SU3
SU1 J SU4 SU5 SU6
K SU7 SU8 SU9
d .
Enter the ASCII code for the axis name as a decimal number for the
ve
Program type M, E parameters.
er
Conditions After stop of movement (Example: 88 for the X-axis)
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0 to 255 When a plane selection command (G17, G18, G19) is specified, the
gh
horizontal and vertical axes are determined according to the axis address
specified in the same block as the plane selection command.
ri
When there are multiple axis addresses that can be candidates for the
ll
.A
horizontal and vertical axes of the plane, the axes are selected in this
order of priority: “base axis > parallel axis 1 > parallel axis 2”. If there are
N
no axis addresses that can be candidates for the horizontal and vertical
O
axes specified in the same block as the plane selection command, the
TI
SU2
base axes are selected.
60
A
R
40
PO
The G17 plane takes I in the above table as the horizontal axis and J as
29
Program type M, E
the vertical axis.
R

o.
The G18 plane takes K in the above table as the horizontal axis and I as
N
Unit —
C
the vertical axis.

al
Setting range 0 to 255 The G19 plane takes J in the above table as the horizontal axis and K as
ri
ZA
the vertical axis.

Se
A
IM
K

ZA
SU3
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c

ht
For details, refer to the explanation of parameters SU1 to SU3.

ig
yr
op
Axis setting J for plane selection

C
SU4
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-264
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
SU5
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
SU6
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Axis setting K for plane selection

K
ZA
SU7
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3

01
Unit —
)2

(c
ht

ig
yr
op

C
SU8
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-265
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
SU9
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-266
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Selection of tool change command output Specify tool change command output position from [0] through [10] below.
position
M5 Z-axis
[6] [1] [3] I21/I22 Z-axis Zc : Stock material edge projection length
Dmax : Stock material maximum outside
diameter
x : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50
M5 X-axis
Machine zero point + B-axis spindle edge offset value
[4] BA62
+ Spindle tool length
z : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51
d .
Fixed point
ve
[5] [0] [2]
er
I21/I22 X-axis
s
[9/10]
re
x
ts
[7] [8]
gh
User-specified
ri
Dmax fixed point 1/2
ll
.A
Setting X-axis Z-axis
N
Zc z 0 Clearance position Clearance position
O
1 Machine zero point Clearance position
TI
60
2 Clearance position Machine zero point

3
A Machine zero point Machine zero point
R
40
PO
4 Fixed point Fixed point

SU10
29
5 Clearance position End point of previous machining

R
o.
6 Machine zero point End point of previous machining

O
N
7 End point of previous machining Clearance position

C
al
8 End point of previous machining Machine zero point

K
ri
9 User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 1

ZA
Se

A
IM
Note :
K
1. SU10 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output position is

ZA
identical with the end point of previous machining. In the case

below, however, this may not be applied.
A
As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the hatched portion,
M
the position will escape in Z-axis direction by the distance

YA
determined by SU51.
3
01
)2
SU51
(c
ht
ig
Stock material
Stock material edge protrusion
yr
length length
op
Program type M
C
Conditions Immediate 2. The turret type of turret conducts tool turning at the tool change
Unit — command output position. The ATC type of turret moves from the
tool change command output position to the ATC position.
2-267
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Selection of tool change command output Specify tool change command output position from [0] through [11] below.
position
INTEGREX e-H I21/I22 Z-axis Zc : Stock material edge projection length

[11] 3rd zero point Dmax : Stock material maximum outside
diameter
M5 Z-axis x : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50
M6 [6] [1] [3] + B-axis spindle edge offset value BA62
X-axis + Spindle tool length
M5 z : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51
X-axis [4]
Machine zero point
I21/I22
.
[2]
d
[5] [0] X-axis
ve
User-specified
[9/10]
er
fixed point 1/2
2nd zero point
s
x
re
[7] [8]
ts
gh
0 Clearance position Clearance position
Dmax
ri
ll
3 Machine zero point Machine zero point
.A
Zc z
4 2nd zero point 2nd zero point
3rd zero point
N
End point of previous
5 Clearance position
O
machining
TI
INTEGREX e-V M6 End point of previous
6 Machine zero point
60
X-axis A machining
I21/I22
R
40
X-axis Machine 7 Clearance position

machining
PO
M5 zero point
29
X-axis End point of previous

8 Machine zero point
[8] [2] [3] machining
R
o.
User-specified fixed User-specified fixed

N
I21/I22 9
M5 point 1 point 1
C
Z-axis [4]
Z-axis
al
SU10 User-specified fixed User-specified fixed

K
10
[9/10] point 2 point 2
ri
ZA

Se
User-specified 11 3rd zero point

machining
A
fixed point 1/2 2nd zero point

IM
[7] [0] [1]

K
z
ZA
[11] Note :
A
[5] [6] 1. Do not set SU10 = 4 with machines equipped with an

M
ATC mechanism. Since some models have an ATC

Zc position that is specified as the second zero point
YA
inside the ATC cover or the software limit range, this

Dmax x setting can cause a collision with the ATC cover or
3
hitting the software limit.

01
2. Since x in the case of SU10 = 0, 2, or 5 includes

spindle tool length, if the tool is too long (as in the
)2
case of a long boring bar), the tool change operation

(c
may be software-limited in the +X direction.

3. SU10 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output
ht
position is identical with the end point of previous

ig
machining. In the case below, however, this may not

be applied.
yr
As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the

op
hatched portion, the position will escape in Z-axis

direction by the distance determined by SU51.
C
SU51
Program type M
Stock material
Stock material
Conditions Immediate length
edge protrusion
length
Unit —
2-268
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the types of axes to be simultaneously moved when approaching

the tool to the next machining area.
0: Three axes (X, Y, Z) move at the same time.
1: After Z-axis movement, the X-axis and the Y-axis move at the same
time.
Movement of axes during approach Note :
When PINCHCUT HOLDER or Y TURN. HOLDER is used either of the
SU11 following movements can be specified.
0: After Y-axis movement, the X-axis and the Z-axis move at the same
time.
d .
ve
1: The Y-axis, Z-axis and X-axis move in order.
Program type M
er
<Supplementary description>
s
Conditions Immediate This parameter is valid only when “workpiece scheme” is selected in the
re
Unit — common unit. If “initial-point scheme” is selected, three axes move
ts
simultaneously, irrespective of setting of this parameter.
Setting range 0, 1
gh
ri
Select the rotating position specified in the index unit after tool change.
ll
0: After the tool change, rotation occurs at the position specified in the
.A
index unit. For the movement from the completing position of the
tool change to the rotating position of the index unit, three axes (X,
N
Rotating position specified in the index unit Y, Z) move at the same time.
O
after tool change
TI
1: After the tool change, rotation occurs at the position specified in the
60
SU12 index unit. For the movement from the completing position of the
A
R
40
tool change to the rotating position of the index unit, the X-axis and
PO
the Y-axis move at the same time following completion of Z-axis

29
movement.
R
Program type M
o.
2: After the tool change, rotation occurs at the completing position of

N
C
the tool change.

al
Unit —
ri
ZA
Se
Set the axis name of the transfer axis.

IM
K
ZA
Axis name of the transfer axis

A
M
SU13
YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2

(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range &0 to &7F

ig
yr
Set the display color for the tool nose marks in each system indicated on
op
the TOOL PATH CHECK and TRACE displays.

C
0: Red (default)
1: Green
Tool nose mark display color on the TOOL 2: Blue
PATH CHECK display/TRACE display 3: Yellow
SU14 4: Pink
5: Cyan
6: White
Program type M, E
* Invalid when the 3D mode is valid.
Unit —
2-269
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the name of the axis used as the thrust axis for the servo axis.
Name of thrust axis for servo axis
SU15
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
0: The tool moves to the approach position set in the machining program,
gh
without moving to the indexed swivel position.
ri
1: The tool moves to the index swivel position and after C-axis indexing, it
moves to the approach position.
ll
Movement to C-axis index swivel position
.A
when Z-offset scheme is used
N
SU16
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Set the background color for the MDI window.

ZA
Se
0: Green (default)
A
1: Red
IM
2: Green
3: Blue
K
Background color for the MDI window

4: Yellow
ZA
SU17 5: Pink
A
6: Cyan
M
7: White
YA
8: Black
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Set the character color for the MDI window.

ig
0: Black (default)
yr
1: Red
op
2: Green
C
Character color for the MDI window 3: Blue

4: Yellow
SU18 5: Pink
6: Cyan
7: White
8: Black
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-270
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
SU19 = 0:
Three axes (X, Y, Z) are simultaneously moved to the tool change
command output position specified in SU10 and TC62 or to the position
designated at RETURN of the end unit.
* When the tool nose is present at a position internal to the position of
(workpiece diameter + safety profile clearance), the axes pass through
the clearance point.
SU19 = 1:
Following the X-axis, the Y- and Z-axes are simultaneously moved to the
tool change command output position specified in SU10 and TC62 or to
.
the position designated at RETURN of the end unit.
d
Selecting the method of axis movement to
ve
the tool change command output position or * When the tool nose is present at a position internal to the position of
er
to the position designated at RETURN of (workpiece diameter + safety profile clearance), only the X-axis passes
s
the end unit through the clearance point. The Z-axis does not pass.
SU19
re
Note :
ts
This parameter is valid only when the program is of the workpiece
gh
scheme (WPC setting) or the Z-offset scheme.
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
During polygonal machining, acceleration of the turning and milling spindle

ri
ZA
can be decreased by this parameter.

Se
Spindle acceleration for polygonal machining =

IM
SU20
Coefficient for polygonal machining spindle Spindle acceleration × 100
K
acceleration
Note :
ZA
SU20 This value will be handled as100 if a negative value, 0 or a value more
A
than 100 is set here.

M
YA
Program type E If during polygonal machining alarm 43 SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 2
3
(52, , ) occurs for the milling spindle, set a value less than 100 in this
01
parameter to elongate the turning spindle speed attainment time

Unit %
)2
(acceleration is decreased).
(c
ht
Specify the axis to be returned home after the execution of the workpiece
transfer unit corresponding to the work hand angle to be changed, and the
ig
returning sequence.
yr
Selection of returning operation after the

op
0: X-axis homing  B-axis homing

execution of the workpiece transfer unit
C
corresponding to the work hand angle to be 1: XYZ axes simultaneous homing  B-axis homing
changed 2: X-axis homing  YZ axes simultaneous homing  B-axis homing
SU21
Program type M
Unit —
2-271
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Simultaneous movement of three axes (X, Y, Z)

1: Z-axis movement  X-/Y-axis movement
2: X-axis movement  Y-/Z-axis movement (selection is possible only for
the machine equipped with swivel type head)
Depending on the machine model, the parameters available for selecting

the sequence of movement from the tool change completing position to
the rotating position in the indexing unit vary as shown below.
 When the machine is equipped with a spindle head of swiveling type
d .
(parameter BA48  0)
ve
Select the sequence of movement from the initial point and the escape
er
TPC relay point to the head rotating position in the indexing unit. If the
s
workpiece scheme is selected for the program type, select the
re
movement sequence from the machining end position and the escape
ts
TPC relay point to the head rotating position in the indexing unit. (The
gh
sequence of movement from the tool change completing position to
the head rotating position in the indexing unit is specified in parameter
ri
SU12.)
ll
.A
 When the machine is not equipped with a spindle head of swiveling
type (parameter BA48 = 0, L21 = 0, 1, 2)
N
Method of axis movement from the initial Select the sequence of movement from the initial point, the escape
O
point or the escape TPC relay point to the TPC relay point and the tool change completing position to the rotating
TI
rotating position in the indexing unit
60
position in the indexing unit.

SU22
A
R
40
PO
29
SU22=1
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
SU22=0
Se
Rotating end position

Initial point
A
in the indexing unit

IM
K
Z Workpiece
ZA
Y
A
M
SU22=1
YA
X
3
01
)2
TPC relay
point SU22=0
(c
Rotating end position

ht
Program type M in the indexing unit

ig
yr
Workpiece
Unit —
op
C
2-272
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Initial-point scheme
SU22 = 1
Initial point SU22 = 0
Head rotating
SU22 = 2 position in the
indexing unit
.
Z
d
ve
Workpiece
Y
s er
re
SU22 = 1
X
ts
gh
SU22 = 0
ri
ll
TPC relay point
.A
SU22 = 2
Head rotating
position in the
N
indexing unit
O
Method of axis movement from the initial Workpiece
TI
point or the escape TPC relay point to the
60
rotating position in the indexing unit A

R
40
SU22
PO
29
Material scheme
R
o.
Head rotating
O
N
position in the
C
indexing unit
al
Machining end SU22 = 2

ri
ZA
position
Se
SU22 = 0
IM
K
ZA
SU22 = 1
Head rotating
A
position in the
M
indexing unit
YA
SU22 = 2
3
TPC relay point SU22 = 0

01
)2
SU22 = 1
(c
ht
X
ig
Program type M
yr
op
Y Z
C
Unit —
2-273
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the feed rate reduction rate for in-feed paths for the execution of a
composite-type fixed cycle.
The setting “0” is regarded as a setting of 100%.
Cutting feed rate reduction rate in

composite-type fixed cycle
SU23
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
Set the spindle speed multiplication factor for the execution of a
gh
composite-type fixed cycle.
ri
ll
Spindle speed multiplication factor in the The setting “0” is regarded as a setting of 100%.
.A
execution of a composite-type fixed cycle
N
SU24
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
Set the chopping axis by specifying its axis name.

ZA
Se
A
IM
This parameter specifies the chopping axis when no chopping axis is set
by the system variable for the chopping start M-code command.
K
Chopping axis selection

ZA
* If this parameter setting is changed after the machine is started, the

SU26
A
change will become valid after resetting operation.

M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range &41 to &5A

ht
Set the name of an axis (linear axis) on a plane used during polar
ig
coordinate interpolation by ASCII code (hexadecimal).

yr
op
Specification of an axis (linear axis) on a

C
plane during polar coordinate interpolation
SU29
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-274
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the name of an axis (rotary axis) on a plane used during polar
coordinate interpolation by ASCII code (hexadecimal).
Specification of an axis (rotary axis) on a

plane during polar coordinate interpolation
SU30
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Sets the axis movement pattern when returning to the return position set in
gh
the end unit during the execution of an initial-point scheme program on a
multi-tasking machine, except for VTC machines, whose turret type is ATC
ri
(BA47 = 0) and whose rotating head axis name is set (BA48).
ll
.A
Axis movement pattern to the return 0 : After X-axis movement, the Y-axis and the Z-axis move at the same
position set in the end unit of initial-point time.
N
scheme program for multi-tasking machine
O
1 : After Z-axis movement, the X-axis and the Y-axis move at the same
SU31
TI
time.
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M
o.
O
N
C
BA47 : Turret type

al
Unit — BA48 : Axis name of the head to be rotated

ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
Set dwell time for the parts catcher.

IM
K
ZA
Delay timer for the parts catcher

A
M
SU49
YA
3
01
Program type M
)2
(c
Unit 0.001 s
ht

ig
yr
op
C
2-275
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Tool turning clearance is required to prevent interference between the tool

and stock material during tool change in automatic operation.
SU51
Tool turning clearance (radial value) in
Chuck
X-axis SU50
SU50
Stock material shape
0
.
Program type M
d
Dmax
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
Setting range 0 to 65535 NM211-00220
ts
gh
Dmax: Stock material maximum outside diameter
ri
0: Stock material edge projection length
ll
.A
Tool turning clearance in Z-axis
N
SU51
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
Set the tool to be retracted to the fixed position for the automatic
ri
ZA
Se
lower-turret retraction function. Specify the tool number of the lower turret.
A
SU52: Tool number of Retraction tool 1

IM
Lower-turret retraction function SU53: Tool number of Retraction tool 2

K
Tool number of the retraction tool

ZA
SU52
A
SU53
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2

(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-276
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Sets the allowable limit of axis movement completion waiting time when a
cross machining command is executed
Alarm 159 CROSS MACHINING IMPOSSIBLE (0x0400) occurs if axis
movement does not complete within the set allowable limit.
F Command
FB
Allowable limit of axis movement

completion waiting time when a cross
.
machining command is executed
d
t
ve
SU54 SU54
ser
re
* The length of time required to end outputting droop when a moving axis
ts
stops.
gh
ri
Note :
ll
.A
1. Execution of a cross-control command, if specified during axis
Program type M, E movement, does not start until axis movement is completed.
N
Conditions Immediate 2. If 0 is set, the waiting time is infinite.
O
TI
Unit s 3. If a value larger than 999 is set, it is regarded as 999.
60
Setting range 0 to 999 If a value smaller than 0 is set, it is regarded as 0.

A
R
40
Sets the wait time for the response to a request to access the programs in
PO
29
the hard disk operation area and Ethernet operation area in automatic
R
operation
o.
O
N
0: Continues to wait for the response to an access request

C
al
1 to 65535: Displays the alarm 1835 FILE ACCESS ERROR ( , , ) and

K
ri
records information for investigating cause of the alarm if no

ZA
Wait time for accessing the programs in the

Se
hard disk operation area/Ethernet operation response is received within the set time after requesting for
A
area an access
IM
SU55
K
Note :
ZA
1. Set the parameter for system 1.

A
2. Normally, an access to a program is completed within one second.

M
Since the purpose of this parameter is to detect a wait for a

YA
Program type E response, set a value of 10 or larger when changing the setting of
Conditions Immediate this parameter. If a value less than 10 is set, the alarm 1835 FILE
3
ACCESS ERROR ( , , ) may occur before completion of normal

01
Unit 0.1 s processing.

)2

(c
For setting SPRINT interface (option), fixed value

ht
ig
yr
op
—
C
SU56
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-277
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the position where the turret is to be retracted for the turret retraction
function. Specify coordinates in the machine coordinate system based on
the machine zero point.
Fixed point 2
Fixed point 1
SU100
.
SU99
d
SU98
SU97
ve
Lower-turret retraction function
er
SU97 Fixed point of the retraction position Machine zero point
s
to
re
SU100
ts
SU97: X-axis retraction point – Fixed point 1
gh
SU98: Z-axis retraction point – Fixed point 1
SU99: X-axis retraction point – Fixed point 2
ri
SU100: Z-axis retraction point – Fixed point 2
ll
.A
Specify a minus value if the fixed point of the retraction position is located
in a minus direction when viewed from the zero point of the machine
N
coordinates.
O
TI
60
Note : Set this parameter for the system of the lower turret.
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-278
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Example :
1. Standard type cutting
Prior to cutting up along the wall in the end of final cycle, escape will
be made by specified distance.
SU102
d .
ve
Return distance at walls during rough
cutting in bar machining or in corner
er
machining of an EIA/ISO program SU102
s
re
SU102
2. High speed rough cutting
ts
Escape will be made by SU102 specified distance during return after
gh
reaching the wall.
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A SU102
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
SU102
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N
* For MAZATROL programs refer to TC67 and TC68.

al
K
ri
ZA
If a cutting depth has not been specified in the program, operation will
Se
occur in accordance with the setting of this parameter.

A
IM
Cutting depth in the composite-type fixed

K
cycle (G271/G272, G71/G72)

ZA
SU103
SU103
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
Tool
Pecking return distance in grooving
C
(G274/G275, G74/G75) of EIA/ISO

program
SU104
SU104
Program type E
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in * For MAZATROL programs refer to TC74.

2-279
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Cut depth (diametral value) for final cut in

composite-type thread cutting cycle G276, 1st cut
G76 of EIA/ISO program
SU105
(n/2-1)th cut
(n/2)th cut
SU105/2 nth cut
Program type E
.d
NM211-00247
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
* For MAZATROL programs refer to TC78.
s
re
ts
Clamping will follow the setting of SU106 if the calculated value of the cut
gh
depth with the composite type thread cutting cycle G276 is smaller than
the setting of SU106. This parameter is valid only for the infeed operation
ri
of the fixed volume chip production scheme.
Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial
ll
.A
value) in composite-type thread cutting
cycle G276 of EIA/ISO program * For MAZATROL programs refer to TC79.
N
SU106
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

O
N

al
Set the spindle safety clamp speed of a tool whose diameter (nominal
ri
ZA
diameter) is not specified in the tool data. This clamp speed is invalid for
Se
the tools with tool diameter (or nominal diameter, if diameter cannot be
IM
specified) setting in the tool data.

Safety clamp speed
K
ZA
SU107
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
–1
Unit min
)2

(c
ht
Set the machine safeguarding strength to be used during the calculation of

the safety speed for the spindle.
ig
yr
Remark : Spindle safety speed calculation expression

op
3
60 × 10 2E –1
Safeguarding strength N= m (min )
C
D
Tool diameter D (mm):
SU108
ACT- in MAZATROL tool data
(For a tool whose tool diameter cannot be registered in tool data:
Nominal diameter)
Program type M Safeguarding strength E (J): Parameter SU108
Conditions Immediate Tip mass m (kg): Parameter SU109/1000
Unit J
2-280
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the tip mass used to calculate the spindle safety clamp speed.
Tip mass
SU109
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit g
s
re
ts
Set the desired data range.
gh
Note :
ri
Although entered data is checked for the range that has been set in
ll
SU110 - SU113, the check is conducted only when the “Tool length
.A
setting range check function” is valid (SU154 bit 1 = 1).
N
Example of setting (SU111 = 0):
O
TI
60
Tool length setting range check function

A
R
40
PO
Settable data range

29
SU110 Max. tool length (+X-axis)

R
o.
SU110 SU111 Min. tool length (–X-axis)

O
N
SU112 Max. tool length (+Z-axis)

C
to
al
SU113 Min. tool length (–Z-axis)

K
SU113 SU112 SU113

ri
ZA
Se
SU110
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

)2
Setting range ±19999999

(c
ht
Lower turret width setting for barrier expansion by the difference in X-axis
angle between the upper and lower turrets
ig
yr
op
X1
XY plane
C
Lower turret width setting for barrier

expansion by the difference in X-axis angle
between the upper and lower turrets
SU122 Actual lower turret
Upper turret
Lower turret
width SU122
Program type M
Conditions Immediate X2
Expansion
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in Lower turret in the barrier
2-281
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Set the limit for the amount of motion on the primary rotational axis for
workpiece placement error correction.
Admissible motion range on the primary Note :

rotational axis for workpiece placement
Set zero (0) in SU123 if no restriction is to be imposed on the range of
error correction
correcting motion on the primary rotational axis for workpiece placement
SU123 error correction.
d .
Program type M
ve
er
s
Unit 0.0001°
re
ts
gh
Set the limit for the amount of motion on the secondary rotational axis for
workpiece placement error correction.
ri
ll
.A
Admissible motion range on the secondary Note :
rotational axis for workpiece placement
N
Set zero (0) in SU124 if no restriction is to be imposed on the range of
error correction
O
correcting motion on the secondary rotational axis for workpiece
SU124
TI
placement error correction.
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
o.
O
N
Unit 0.0001°
C
al

K
ri
ZA
Fixed value
Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
SU125
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Amount of offset for runout of the B-axis center (BA61)

ig
B-axis rotational center

yr
op
BA61
C
Amount of offset for runout of the B-axis

center (BA61) SU126
SU126
* Set a minus value to perform offset in the same direction as BA61 when
the B-axis rotational center position is located above the tool center
position as shown in the figure.
Program type M, E
* Runout of B-axis center = BA61 + SU126
Conditions Immediate * This parameter can be altered by using system variable #6020.
Unit 0.001 mm * This parameter is valid on the machines with the capability of
Setting range –1000 to 1000 Maza-Check.
2-282
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Amount of offset for B-axis - spindle nose distance offset (BA62)
B-axis - spindle nose

distance offset
SU127 BA62
.
d
Fig. 1 When offsetting in the same direction as BA62
ve
(a plus value is set at SU127)
er
Amount of offset for B-axis - spindle nose
s
re
distance offset (BA62)
ts
SU127 B-axis - spindle
gh
nose distance
ri
offset
ll
.A
SU127
N
O
BA62
TI
Fig. 2 When offsetting in the opposite direction as BA62
60
A (a minus value is set at SU127)

R
40
PO
29
* Set a minus value to perform offset in the opposite direction to the B-axis
R
o.
- spindle nose distance offset (BA62) as shown in Fig. 2.

O
N
Program type M, E
C
* B-axis - spindle nose distance offset = BA62 + SU127

al
Conditions Immediate * This parameter can be altered by using system variable #6021.
ri
ZA
Se
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in * This parameter is valid on the machines with the capability of
A
Maza-Check.
IM
Set the X- and Z-axis retraction positions of the upper and lower turret in
K
the machine coordinate system. When parameter TC108 = 3, the upper

ZA
and lower turrets are placed in a queue in this position after the
two-workpiece machining sequence.
A
M
YA
SU129 (#1)
3
Retraction positions of the upper and lower

01
turrets at the end of the two-workpiece SU128 (#1)

)2
SU128 machining sequence

(c
SU129
ht
ig
yr
op
C
Program type M SU128 (#2)

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in SU129 (#2)
2-283
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the reference point, top dead point, bottom dead point, and feed rate
for chopping.
These parameters (SU130 to SU133) specify the chopping conditions
when no conditions are set by the system variables for the chopping start
Chopping reference point M-code command.
SU130
Program type E
d .
ve
Rapid feed
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in Start
s
Reference point
re
Setting range ±99999999 SU130
ts
gh
Top dead point
SU132
ri
Chopping speed
ll
(SU133)
Bottom dead point
.A
Chopping top dead point
SU131
N
O
SU131
TI
Workpiece zero point
60
A
R
40
SU130:
PO
Program type E
29
Conditions Immediate Set the chopping reference point by specifying an incremental value from
R
o.
the top dead point.

O
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N
SU131:
al

K
Set the chopping top dead point by specifying an absolute value in the
ri
ZA
work coordinate system.

Se
SU132:
A
IM
Set the chopping bottom dead point by specifying an incremental value

from the top dead point.
K
Chopping bottom dead point SU133:

ZA
Set the speed of moving between the top dead point and the bottom dead
SU132
A
point during chopping.

M
YA
* If this parameter setting is changed after the machine is started, the

Program type E
3
change will become valid after resetting operation.

01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
Chopping speed
SU133
Program type E
Unit 1 mm/min / 0.1 in/min
2-284
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The chopping axis feed rate is clamped with this parameter during
chopping.
When this parameter is set to 0, the feed rate will be clamped according to
Chopping clamp speed parameter M3.
SU134
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit 1 mm/min / 0.1 in/min
s
re
ts
Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant during chopping.
gh
ri
When this parameter is set to 0, parameter N2 becomes valid.
ll
.A
Acceleration/deceleration time constant
during chopping
N
O
SU135
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
o.
Unit ms
N
C
al

K
ri
ZA
Set the coefficient to apply to the compensation value that is calculated

Se
from the difference in position due to the servo follow-up delay.

A
IM
K
Chopping compensation coefficient

ZA
SU136
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Permissible difference between the command and the actual stroke

ig
yr
op
C
Chopping tolerance
SU137
Program type E
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-285
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
M-code selection for tapping cycle.

If the command block of G284/G288 (machining G-codes, F30 = 0) or of
G84/G88 (turning G-codes, F30 = 1) does not contain spindle forward/
reverse rotation M-codes, one of the following M-codes will be output,
depending on the status of bit 0 in parameter SU153:
M-code selection for tapping cycle
BA59 = 3 BA59 = 203
SU153 BA60 = 4 BA60 = 204
(bit 0) 0 Tapping cycle of turning Tapping cycle of milling
SU153
bit 0 Inverse tapping cycle of Inverse tapping cycle of
1
.
turning milling
d
ve
Program type E  If 0 is set in BA59, 3 will be regarded as having been set, and M03 will
er
Conditions After stop of movement be output.
s
 If 0 is set in BA60, 4 will be regarded as having been set, and M04 will
re
Unit —
be output.
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
Display of BUFFER/REMAIN/POSITION on the POSITION display
ri
0: Display in the machine axial direction
ll
1: Display in the axial direction in the coordinates system that has been
.A
converted by the inclination of the B-axis
N
O
TI
Actual axis X
60
A Virtual axis Z
R
40
Virtual axis X
PO
Bit 1: Display of BUFFER on the POSITION

29
display
R
o.
Bit 2: Display of REMAIN on the POSITION

N
SU153 display
al
(bit 1) Bit 3: Display of POSITION on the

ri
ZA
(bit 2) POSITION display Actual axis Z

Se
(bit 3)
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
yr
op
C
2-286
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The retraction of the lower turret in the execution of a MAZATROL

program is determined according to the program contents and this
parameter’s setting as detailed below.
Program contents Retraction of the lower turret

Retraction to the position as specified with
With a retraction [TURRET 2 POS. 1] or [TURRET 2 POS. 2]
command POS. 1: X = SU97, Z = SU98
POS. 2: X = SU99, Z = SU100
 SU153 bit 4 = 0: No retraction
d .
Automatic retraction of the lower turret for  SU153 bit 4 = 1: Retraction
ve
MAZATROL programs Movement to the position of automatic
er
SU153 Without retraction retraction as below.
s
commands
re
(bit 4) MULTIPLEX: X/Z = 2nd zero point
(M5)
ts
Others: X/Y/Z = Machine zero point
gh
(M4)
ri
ll
Note : Set this parameter for the system of the lower turret.
.A
N
O
TI
60
Program type M A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
R
o.
Setting range 0, 1
N
Set the “C-axis Clamp” machining method for MAZATROL programs

al
(line/linear machining for the C-axis CYLIND mode).

ri
ZA
Se
“C-axis Clamp” machining method for 0: Machining with C-axis braked

A
IM
MAZATROL programs 1: Machining with C-axis clamped

(Line/Linear machining for the C-axis (only for machining without C-axis movement)
SU153
K
CYLIND mode)
ZA
(bit 5)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
MAZATROL point machining with C-axis clamped (M210)

ht
0: Output of M210
ig
1: No output of M210
yr
MAZATROL point machining with C-axis

op
clamped (M210)
C
SU153
(bit 6)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-287
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the “C-axis Clamp” machining method for MAZATROL programs

(line/linear machining for the C-axis FACE mode).
“C-axis Clamp” machining method for 0: Machining with C-axis braked

MAZATROL programs 1: Machining with C-axis clamped
(Line/Linear machining for the C-axis FACE (only for machining without C-axis movement)
SU153 mode)
(bit 7)
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Do not display
gh
1: Display
ri
ll
.A
Displaying tool-setting values for ATC-type
turret
N
SU154
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0 : Invalid
Se
1 : Valid
A
IM
K
Tool length setting range check function

ZA
SU154
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Actual axis
ig
1: Virtual axis
yr
op
C
Displaying the “next distance” during

execution of G18.2/G18.3/G18.4
SU154
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-288
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Actual axis
1: Virtual axis
Displaying the “remaining distance” during

SU154
(bit 3)
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Actual axis
gh
1: Virtual axis
ri
ll
.A
Displaying the “current position” during
N
SU154
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Actual axis
Se
1: Virtual axis
A
IM
Displaying the “next distance” during

K
execution of G17.1 to G17.5

ZA
SU154
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Actual axis
ig
1: Virtual axis
yr
op
C
Displaying the “remaining distance” during

SU154
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-289
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Actual axis
1: Virtual axis
Displaying the “current position” during

SU154
(bit 7)
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value (1)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
SU155
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Select the timing in which the tool length of the touch sensor is to be made
ZA
Se
valid during EIA/ISO programmed or MDI operation when the following

A
conditions are satisfied:

IM
Correction timing of the touch sensor tool  F93 bit 3 = 1 (using MAZATROL tool length)
length during EIA/ISO programmed or MDI
K
 F94 bit 7 = 0 (using tool offsets)

operation
ZA
SU155 (for machining center specifications only) 0: When a move command is executed for any controlled axis (X, Y, Z, or
rotational axis)
A
(bit 1)
M
1: When a move command is executed for the Z-axis

YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select whether the zero point return is to be executed at an EIA

ig
subprogram call from a MAZATROL program.

yr
0: Executed
op
Operation at an EIA subprogram call from a 1: Not executed

C
MAZATROL program
SU155
(bit 2)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-290
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select whether the index angle of the spindle is to be checked during

MAZATROL programmed operation when a judgment on whether a tool
change is necessary.
Judgment method for tool change 0: No check (No tool change command is output when the tool is the
command output during MAZATROL same in tool name, nominal size, and suffix.)
programmed operation
SU155 1: Check (No tool change command is output when the tool is the same in
(bit 3) tool name, nominal size, suffix, and spindle index angle.)
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select whether the tool change command is to be output during
gh
MAZATROL programmed operation when the machining unit is executed
for the first time.
ri
0: Output of the tool change command except for the same tool
ll
Tool change command output at the start of
.A
1: Unconditional output of the tool change command
MAZATROL programmed operation
SU155
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Select a method of judging tool breakage during laser tool measurement.

ri
ZA
Se
0: Judging from the setting of parameter L6

A
IM
1: Judging from the tolerance specified in the program

Reference value for judging tool breakage
K
during laser tool measurement

ZA
SU155
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-291
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When the group number is selected for tool command system, select
either group number or tool number to use for each turret.
0: Group number
1: Tool number
* When group number is used in the EIA/ISO program, bit 3 of parameter
SU156, bit 4 of parameter F94, and bit 2 of parameter F84 must be set to
0.
SU156 (bit 3) 0 1
d .
ve
Tool command scheme for each turret F94 (bit 4) 0 1 0 1
er
SU156 F84 (bit 2) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
s
re
(bit 3) L51 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
ts
EIA/ISO G T
gh
MDI T G T
ri
ll
G Group number
.A
N
T Tool number
O
TI
F94 (bit 4) Tool command system (0: group number, 1: tool number)
60
Program type E A
R
40
Conditions Immediate F84 (bit 2) Spare tool search (0: group number, 1: tool number)
PO
29
Unit — L51 Tool command system in MDI operation (0: tool number, 1: group
R
number)
o.
Setting range 0, 1
N
Type of deep-hole drilling cycle G83/G87

al
K
ri
ZA
0: Normal type
Se
1: High-speed type
A
IM
Type of deep-hole drilling cycle G83/G87

SU156
K
ZA
(bit 4)
A
M
Program type E
YA
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Fixed value (0)

ht
ig
yr
op
—
C
SU156
(bit 5)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-292
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Execution of the restarting search for a block in the mode of G68 when
tool length compensation (G43/G44) remains valid with a turning tool
mounted.
Execution of a restarting search for a block
in the mode of G68 when tool length 0: Alarm
compensation (G43/G44) remains valid 1: Possible (however, the return to the restarting position is not
SU156 with a turning tool mounted conducted)
(bit 6)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Execution of the restarting search for a block after the cancellation of the
gh
cross command
ri
0: Alarm
ll
Execution of a restarting search for a block 1: Possible (however, the return to the restarting position is not
.A
after cancellation of the cross command conducted)
N
SU156
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Compliant with SU11 and SU19.

ri
ZA
Se
1: Approach with priority assigned to the Z-axis (SU11 = 1)

A
Movement to the tool rotating position with priority assigned to the

IM
The scheme of axis movement during an X-axis (SU19 = 1)

approach and during movement to the tool (Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)
K
change command output position for

ZA
SU157 machining at the work hand side

A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Operation pattern with [NO RETURN] selected for CHANGE-PT in the

ig
manual program unit (MANL PRG)

yr
0: NO RETURN to the tool change command output position is effective

op
Conditions for moving to the tool change only when the tool need not be changed for another one, nor in the
C
command output position in manual index angle.

program unit
SU157 1: NO RETURN to the tool change command output position is effective
when there is no need of changing the tool, irrespectively of whether its
(bit 2)
index angle is to be altered or not.
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-293
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Response to a tool change command for the same tool number (TNo.)
0: No movement to the tool rotating position

1: Movement to the tool rotating position when either of the following
Conditions for moving to the tool change three conditions is satisfied:
command output position for the same TNo. a. The value of tool length/tool setting data differs.
SU157 b. The value of nose R/tool diameter differs.
(bit 3)
c. The section to be machined differs.
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select the kind of operation to be performed if either TURN POS X, Y, or Z
gh
of the indexing unit is left blank (only when a tool change is not conducted
in immediate front of the indexing unit).
ri
ll
Operation to perform if either TURN POS X, 0: The unspecified axis moves to the position of the third home position
.A
Y, or Z is left blank in index unit (M6) before the B/C-axes are swiveled. (Conventional operation)
N
SU157 1: The B/C-axes are swiveled without any motion having been conducted
O
on the unspecified axis. (New operation)
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
K
ri
ZA
Preparatory C-axis positioning to 0° for a manual program unit (MANL

Se
PRG) with a milling tool after a turning unit

A
IM
0: Positioning to 0° on the C-axis

Preparatory C-axis positioning to 0° for
1: No movement on the C-axis.
K
manual program unit with a milling tool in

ZA
turning mode
SU157
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
When a turning tool is mounted, move it to the Y-axis zero point before
ig
moving to the tool change position.

yr
0: Do not move
op
1: Move
C
Selection of Y-axis movement to the zero

point when a turning tool is mounted
SU157 Note :
(bit 6) This parameter is valid when the program is created in the workpiece
scheme (WPC) and Z-offset scheme.
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-294
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select whether or not the B-axis rotation radius is to be included into the
“clearance position,” a component of the tool change position (when TC62
= 0, 1, 2, 5 or 7) for changing the indexed cutting edge on one and the
Selection of whether or not the B-axis
same FLASH tool.
rotation radius is to be included into the
“clearance position” for changing the 0: Included
indexed cutting edge on one and the same
SU157 1: Not included
FLASH tool
(bit 7)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
When executing tool measurement, use the TOOL EYE tool change
ts
position (SU118 to SU121) for tool change.
gh
0: Invalid
ri
1: Valid
ll
Tool change position during TOOL EYE
.A
measurement
SU158
N
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Wear compensation valid for XYZ if any one axis is specified

ri
ZA
Se
1: Wear compensation valid for the specified axis

A
IM
Conditions for wear compensation of

K
turning tools in manual program unit

ZA
SU158
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
Note :
op
Checking the rotary axis correction values

Admissible motion ranges are to be specified in SU123 and SU124
C
in workpiece placement error correction for

respectively for the primary and secondary rotational axis.
MAZATROL programs
SU158
(bit 2)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-295
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Tool length compensation for turning tools

1: Tool length compensation for milling tools
Handling of G43P0 tool length * However, this is always used for tool length compensation for milling
compensation with a touch sensor tools when bit 7 of parameter F94 is set to 0 and bit 1 of parameter
SU158 SU155 is set to 0.
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value (0)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
SU158
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
ZA
Set the speed to use when returning from the chopping top dead point to
Se
the chopping reference point.

A
0: Chopping speed
IM
Returning operation from the chopping 1: Rapid feed rate

K
reference point
ZA
SU158
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
op
C
Manual tool measurement tool wear offset

clear function
SU158
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-296
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Whether or not to consider tool length depends on bit 3 of parameter

F93.
Do not consider tool length when bit 3 of parameter F93 is set to 0.
Consider tool length when bit 3 of parameter F93 is set to 1.
Selection of whether or not to consider the
tool length for tip position memory on the 1: Do not consider tool length.
WORK OFFSET display * F93 (bit 3) Tool length in MAZATROL tool data in the EIA/ISO program
SU159
(0: invalid, 1: valid)
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Selects whether to reflect the B-axis angle when displaying the current
gh
position of the milling tool in the manual operation mode.
ri
0: Not displayed
ll
Current position display for milling tool with 1: Displayed
.A
B-axis angle reflected in manual operation
mode
N
SU165
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-297
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-7 User parameter TURNING (TC)
Classification USER Display title TURNING
Cut depth can be reduced as remaining workpiece thickness becomes

less in rough cutting in bar machining unit, corner machining unit, and
copy machining unit. Reduced cut depth (A) can be expressed by
Cut depth reduction rate for rough cutting in TC1
A = T × 100
bar machining unit, corner machining unit,
and copy machining unit where T = Remaining thickness (radial value).
TC1
d.
ve
Program type M
er
s
re
Unit %
ts
gh
ri
ll
F2 b
.A
F1
N
Acceleration rate in up-going taper for a
O
rough cutting in bar machining unit
TI
TC2
60
NM211-00262
A
R
40
PO
F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting

29
TC2 b
Program type M F2 = F1 × × F2 : Increased feed rate
100 a
R
o.
N
This is effective only when TC141 (bit 0) = 1.

Unit %
al
K
ri

ZA
Se

IM
F2 : Increased feed rate

F2 F1
K
Acceleration rate in up-going wall slope

ZA
(90°) for rough cutting in bar machining unit

A
TC3
M
NM211-00263
YA
TC3
F2 = F1 × 100
3
Program type M
01
Note : Up to 500 % can be set.

)2

Unit %
(c

ht
ig
TC4 = 0: 45°
yr
TC4 = 1: Chamfering along the shape to be finished

op
TC4 = 2: Feed rate (F) for chamfering is expressed as follows:

TC3
C
Selection of chamfering pattern in rough F = F0 × 100

external turning cycle G71 (G271) or rough
edge-machining cycle G72 (G272) (where F0 = Feed rate specified in program)
TC4 When TC4 = 2, feed rate can be changed only when chamfering at 90°.
(TC3)
Program type E
Unit —
2-298
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
a
b F3
F1
Deceleration rate in down-going taper for
rough cutting in bar machining unit
TC5 NM211-00264
TC5 a F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting

F3 = F1 × ×
100 b F3 : Reduced feed rate
.
Program type M
d
ve
Conditions Immediate This is effective only when TC141 (bit 0) = 1.
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
gh
F3
ri
F3 : Reduced feed rate
F1
ll
Deceleration rate in down-going wall slope
.A
(90°) for rough cutting in bar machining unit
N
TC6 NM211-00265
O
TI
TC6
F3 = F1 ×
60
A 100
R
40
Program type M
PO
29

R
o.
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Stock material shape

Se
F2
IM
Acceleration rate on outside stock contour F1 : Feed rate inside stock

F1
K
for rough cutting in copy machining unit contour

ZA
F2 : Feed rate outside stock

TC7 contour
A
TC7
M
F2 = F1 ×
100
YA
NM211-00266
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Used to calculate acceleration distance in thread cutting unit

ig
TC8 TC8
L = L0 { – n ( 1000 ) – 1 + 1000 }
yr
op
L : Acceleration distance
Acceleration pitch error ratio in thread
C
L0 : Distance over which feed rate become constant

cutting unit
TC8
Program type M
Unit 0.1%
2-299
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
PS
PS : Programmed start point
[1] PE : Programmed end point

 : Groove machining depth
Rough cutting residue ratio in cutting off [2]
d  = PS・PE
cycle in groove cutting unit
d : Rough cutting residue
PE
TC9 TC9
d=×
100
NM211-00267
.
Program type M [1] Cutting at rough cutting feed rate to a point short of end point PE by
d
ve
Conditions Immediate distance d
er
Unit % [2] Cutting off at finish cutting feed rate to end point PE
s
re
ts
Used to calculate minimum cutting frequency in groove cutting unit, edge
gh
machining unit and copy machining unit
ri
100 + TC10
d’ = d ( 100 )
ll
Cut depth allowable incremental rate for
.A
rough cutting in groove cutting unit, edge d : Cut depth per cycle
machining unit and copy machining unit d’ : Allowable maximum cut depth
N
TC10
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
N

al
TC11
ri
ZA
F’ = F × 100
Se
F : Specified feed rate

IM

K
ZA
End point Programmed

start point
A
M
YA
Deceleration rate at cutting start in

turning-drilling unit  Drill D
3
01
TC11
)2
(c
ht
ig

yr
Feed rate at F' over distance  from the

op
NM211-00268
programmed start point
C
Program type M D
= (0° <  < 180°)
Conditions Immediate 2 × tan/2
Unit % =0 (  180°)
2-300
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
TC12
F’ = F × 100
F : Specified feed rate
Programmed Programmed
end point start point
End point
Deceleration rate at cutting end in
.
d
turning-drilling unit
ve
er
TC12  Drill D
s
re
ts
gh
ri

ll
Feed rate at F' to the point distant by NM211-00269
.A
 from the end point
N
O
Program type M D D
= + 10 (0° <  < 80°)
TI
2 × tan/2
60
Unit %
A D
 = 10 (  180°)
R
40
PO

29
R
o.
O
N
F F’
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Deceleration clearance
A
(TC15)
IM
Deceleration rate at rough cutting start in

bar machining unit and copy machining unit
K
TC13
ZA
NM211-00270
A
TC13
M
F’ = F × 100
YA
F: Specified feed rate

3
Program type M F': Feed rate at cutting start

01
)2
Unit %
(c
Setting range 0 to 100 (TC15)

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-301
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
This parameter is valid during initial cutting in a bar roughing cycle. If the
remainder obtained by dividing the thickness of cutting during the roughing
cycle by the corresponding cutting depth stays within the range specified
by this parameter, that value will be added to the initial cutting depth to
reduce the cutting repeat times.
Example :
1. TC14 = 0 2. TC14 = 10%
(R-depth.: 5) (R-depth.: 5)
.
5
d
5.1
ve
Maximum permissible rate of increase of
the initial cutting depth during roughing 10.1
er
10.1 5
s
TC14 5
re
0.1
ts
gh
ri
ll
Cutting to a depth of 10.1 Cutting at a depth setting of 5 results
.A
is executed in 3 rounds of in a final cutting depth of 0.1. Since
cutting (5, 5, and 0.1). 10% of the depth setting of 5 is 0.5
N
and this value is larger than the final
O
cutting depth, this final cutting depth is
TI
added to the initial cutting depth.
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO

29
Up to 100% can be set. When a value larger than 100% is set, it is

R
Unit %
o.
regarded as 0.
O
N

C
al
Block separated Front clearance (TC39)

ri
ZA
Se
F  F’
A
F F’ (Feedrate decelerated
IM
Deceleration clearance at start of rough for the initial contact with

cutting in bar machining unit and copy workpiece)
K
machining unit
TC15
ZA
TC15
A
M
NM211-00256
YA

Conditions Immediate Using this parameter will reduce load in the initial contact between the
3
01
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in tool and workpiece.

)2
(TC13)
(c
TC16 Escape
ht
P1
ig
yr
op
Tolerance for escape in high speed rough P2

cutting cycle of bar machining unit
C
P3 d : Distance in cutting
TC16 direction between P1
d and P2
NM211-00257
Program type M
Conditions Immediate If TC16  d, tool escape from the workpiece.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in If TC16 < d, tool doesn’t escape from the workpiece.
2-302
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the starting pitch error rate of threading.

[1]
Pitch error correction during threading

acceleration
TC17
.
Program type M
d
ve
Conditions Immediate Ideal pitch = Starting pitch of threading ([1]) + TC17
er
Unit 0.001 mm
s
re
ts
Fixed value (0)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
TC18
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
—
O
Unit
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Used for automatic determination of first cut depth in turning-drilling

ZA
Se
TC19
d1 = D × 100
A
IM
D : Drilling hole diameter

Turning-drilling cut depth calculation
K
coefficient d1 : Cut depth of first cut

ZA
TC19
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
F1
ig
yr
op
P2 P1
Reamer return speed calculation coefficient
C
in the turning-drilling unit

TC20 F2 NM211-00271
TC20
F2 = F 1 × 100 F1 : Specified feed rate
Program type M F2 : Return speed
P1 : Start point
Conditions Immediate P2 : End point
Unit %
2-303
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
TC21
=P× 10
Programmed Programmed
end point start point
P : Tapping pitch
Incomplete threading portion length  : Incomplete thread
portion length Tap
calculation coefficient for turning-tap tip
TC21 
Cutting end point specified

farther by this length 
.
Program type M NM211-00273
d
ve
er
Unit Pitch/10
s
re
ts
TC22
gh
=P× 10 Normal state
Tap
ri
P : Tapping pitch
ll
Turning-tapper elongation calculation  : Tapper elongation Pressed state
.A
coefficient Tap during cutting, etc.
N
TC22
O
TI

60
A NM211-00274
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit Pitch/10
N
al
K
ri
ZA
TC23
Se
h = P × 10000
A
IM
h : Thread height
Thread height calculation coefficient for P : Thread pitch
outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting
K
ZA
(metric)
TC23
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.01%
(c

ht
TC24
ig
h = P × 10000
yr
h : Thread height
op

C
inside diameter thread cutting (metric)

TC24
Program type M
Unit 0.01%
2-304
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
TC25
h = P × 10000
h : Thread height
outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting
(inch)
TC25
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit 0.01%
s
re
ts
TC26
gh
h = P × 10000
ri
h : Thread height
ll
.A
inside diameter thread cutting (inch)
N
TC26
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.01%
N

al
<#1>
ri
ZA
Se
P
IM
TC28
Recessing width for #1 to #3
K
TC27
ZA
NM211-00277
TC27
A
<#2>
M
TC28
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

TC27
(c
Setting range 0 to 65535 P

NM211-00278
ht
ig
<#3>
yr
op
C
Recessing depth #1 to #3
TC28 TC27 P
TC28
Program type M TC28 TC27 NM211-00279

Conditions Immediate P: Programmed end point
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-305
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
<#4>
Recessing width for #4 P

TC30
TC29
TC29 NM211-00280
.
Program type M
d
ve
P: Programmed end point
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
Recessing depth for #4
N
TC30
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
<#5>
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
TC32
Recessing width for #5
K
ZA
TC31
A
M
YA
Program type M
TC31
3
01
P
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
)2

(c
NM211-00278
ht
ig

yr
op

C
TC32
Program type M
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-306
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
<#6>
Recessing width for #6
TC33 TC33 P
TC34
.
Program type M
d
NM211-00279
ve
Conditions Immediate TC34 TC33
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
TC34
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
Sets the lower limit for the ratio of the workpiece pressing thrust for
ri
ZA
Se
CHUCK and BAR units.

A
If a value smaller than the one set for this parameter is set for the CHUCK
IM
or BAR workpiece pressing thrust of the workpiece transfer unit of a

Lower limit for thrust ratio MAZATROL program, the alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be
K
generated.
ZA
TC35 If the workpiece pressing thrust specified for #3030 in an EIA/ISO

A
program, the alarm 1144 MISSING TRANSFER (PUSH THRUST) will be

M
generated.
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit %
)2

(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-307
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Safety contour clearance is provided for outside of the stock material

shape specified by common data in program.
Tool approach and escape paths for each unit will be automatically
determined according to set data (outside diameter, inside diameter, front
Safety contour clearance
clearance, back clearance) for parameters from TC37 to TC40.
― Outside diameter clearance (radial
value) TC40  TC39
TC37
Safety contour
TC37
Dmin
.
Program type M Stock material shape
d
ve
TC38
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
Dmax
ts
0
gh
ri
ll
Safety contour clearance NM211-00221
.A
― Inside diameter clearance (radial value)
Dmax: Stock material maximum outside diameter
N
TC38 Dmin: Stock material minimum inside diameter
O
0:
TI
Stock material edge projection length
60
A : Stock material length

R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM

K
― Front clearance
ZA
TC39
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

)2

(c
ht
ig
yr
op

C
― Back clearance
TC40
Program type M
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-308
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Thread cutting clearance is provided to specify tool return distance for

each cycle in thread cutting unit.
Thread cutting clearance will be added to the highest portion of thread and
repeating path will be determined automatically.
<OUT>
TC41
d .
ve
Programmed shape
s er
Thread cutting
re
acceleration distance
ts
NM211-00222
gh
<IN>
ri
ll
Programmed shape Thread cutting
.A
N
O
TI
60
TC41
A
R
40
PO
Thread cutting clearance (radial value)

29
NM211-00223
R
o.
TC41
O
<FCE>
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Programmed TC41
A
shape
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
Thread cutting
acceleration
3
distance NM211-00224
01
<BAK>
)2
Thread cutting
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
TC41
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Programmed shape
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
NM211-00225
2-309
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Groove cutting clearance is provided at machining start portion in groove

cutting unit.
<OUT>
Tool path Outside diameter
clearance TC37
d .
TC42
ve
Groove cutting clearance (radial value) in
X-axis
er
s
TC42
re
NM211-00226
ts
<IN>
gh
Front clearance
ri
TC39
ll
Tool path
.A
N
O
TI
TC42
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO
29
NM211-00227
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
R
o.
<FCE>
N

C
Tool path Outside diameter

al
clearance TC37
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
Front clearance
3
Groove cutting clearance in Z-axis

TC39 NM211-00228
01
TC43
)2
TC43 <BAK>
(c
Outside diameter
clearance TC37
ht
Tool path
ig
yr
op
C
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Back clearance
TC40 TC43
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in NM211-00229
2-310
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Workpiece transfer clearance is provided to specify workpiece transfer

position in workpiece transfer unit.
Workpiece transfer clearance No. 1 No. 2

Workpiece
spindle spindle
TC44
TC44
Workpiece transfer position NM211-00231
.
Program type M
d
No. 2 spindle traverses by rapid feed rate to a position distant from
ve
Conditions Immediate transfer position by clearance distance, and then transfer operation is
er
initiated.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
(TC57, TC58, TC59)
ts
After edge-machining unit, this parameter works instead of safety contour
gh
clearance FCE parameter TC39.
ri
If, however, TC45 is zero, then TC39 is used.
ll
.A
Amount of the edge clearance after
edge-machining
N
O
TC45
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N

al
K
ri
ZA
D
Se
dn di d1
IM
Cut depth
K
ZA
d1 End Start
point point
A
M
d2 n-th cycle i-th cycle 1st cycle

YA
di
3
01
Drilling depth decrement in turning-drilling

)2
unit b
(c
TC46 dn
ht
ig
1 2 i n Number of
yr
cutting in
op
NM211-00251
C
D : Drilling depth
d1 : Cut depth in 1st cycle
di : Cut depth in i-th cycle
d1 – TC46 × (i – 1) (di  b)
Program type M b (di < b)
Conditions Immediate b : Drilling depth clamping value (TC48)
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

2-311
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
TC47 TC47 TC47
G1
Pecking return distance in turning-drilling
unit G0
TC47
P2 P1
Program type M D4 D3 D2 D1
d .
ve
P1: Start point
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in P2: End point
s
Dn (n = 1 to 4) = Cut depth
re
ts
Minimum turning-drilling cut depth is set.
gh
ri
ll
Drilling cut depth clamp value in
.A
turning-drilling unit
N
TC48
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
If 0 or 1 is set up in TC50:
ri
ZA
This value will be used as the spindle speed clamp value in cutting off
Se
cycle (#4/#5).
IM
If 2 or more is set up in TC50:

Spindle speed clamp value in cutting off
K
Immediately before the cutting off area (*) is reached during the cutting off
cycle (GRV)
ZA
cycle, this value will be used as the spindle speed clamp value. Within the
TC49 cutting off area, however, machining will be executed at the speed
A
corresponding to this value.

M
YA
*: Cutting off area = (Starting position X – Ending position X) × TC9/100

3
Program type M TC49 = 0:

01
The spindle speed will be clamped with the RPM value in the common
)2
unit.
–1
Unit min If RPM is zero, the spindle speed will be clamped with the value of
(c
Setting range 0 to 999999 parameter SA1.

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-312
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The staring feed value for cutting-off is a feed value that has been
designated in unit data, and the ending feed value for cutting-off is a feed
value that has been designated in sequence data. The feed rate from the
start of machining to the end is reduced in steps according to the number
of times that has been designated here.
Example :
Number of times that the feed rate is to be Feed rate set at feed item in unit data = 0.5
reduced during the #4 and #5 cutting-off Feed rate set at roughness item in sequence data = 0.1
cycles of a grooving unit TC50 = 3
TC50 Feed rate: 0.5
d.
ve
er
Feed rate: 0.3
s
re
Workpiece Workpiece
ts
gh
Program type M Feed rate: 0.1
ri
ll
Unit Times
.A
Setting range 0 to 65535 When 0 or 1 is set for TC50, the feed rate is unchanged.
N
Set the number of revolutions of the spindle during dwell time at the
O
bottom of a hole when the #0 - #4 non-through hole drilling cycle is
TI
60
selected in the turning-drilling unit.

A
R
40
PO
Dwell at the hole bottom during non-through

29
hole drilling cycle of the turning-drilling unit

R
o.
TC51
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Program type M
A
IM
Unit Revolutions
K

ZA
Tool will stop at groove bottom while spindle rotates N times when TC52 is
A
set to N (N=0 to 255).

M
YA
Dwell (specification of spindle rotation

number) at groove bottom in groove cutting
3
01
unit
TC52
)2
(c
ht
ig
Program type M
Remaining at groove bottom until
yr
Conditions Immediate the spindle rotates N times. NM211-00218

op
Unit Revolutions
C
2-313
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
For escape by very short distance, G01 feed speed will be faster than G00
to complete the operation. (If G00 is used, smoothing 0 detection will be
made at the end position.)
Therefore, for escape very short distance, use G01 command, and set the
feed speed of this command as parameter.
Example :
Escape in finish Escape in rough cutting
cutting of edge-machining unit of bar machining unit
[1]
d .
ve
Feed rate for escape by short distance
s er
TC53
re
[1]
ts
[1]: Feed speed in this block
gh
specified by G01 (TC53)
ri
Escape distance
ll
.A
NM211-00238
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
(TC67, TC68)
29
R
o.
Unit mm/min / 0.1 in/min

O
N

al
Inside diameter enlarging cycle

ri
ZA
Se
TC54 TC54
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
NM211-00241
3
01
Cut depth per cycle for machining inside

diameter in bar machining unit Cutting is promoted gradually from the edge,
)2
and machining chip removal efficient.

TC54
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
cf. Standard inside diameter cutting
Cutting to specified depth once

through, and machining chip
removal not efficient
Program type M
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in NM211-00242
2-314
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Example :
Outside diameter machining in normal (– Z-axis) direction
dr: Reverse feed
Reverse feed tolerance for contour contour data
machining Contour
TC55
dr
NM211-00243
Program type M
d .
dr  TC55 ........ No alarm
ve
Conditions Immediate dr > TC55 ........ Alarm
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
gh
PS PE TC56
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
PE A PS
Overtravelling in X-axis direction in edge TC56
R
40
machining unit PS: Start point

PO
29
PE: End point

TC56
R
NM211-00244
o.
O
N
Note :
al
By setting an adequate value for TC56, uncut residue will not be

ri
ZA
produced in edge machining.

Se
Uncut residue because

IM
Tool of nose R. etc.

K
Program type M
ZA
A
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

M
NM211-00245
YA

Example :
3
01
Workpiece transferred from No. 1 spindle to No. 2 spindle

)2
TC57
(c
Workpiece
ht
ig
Workpiece pressing speed in workpiece

yr
transfer unit
op
No. 2
C
TC57 No. 1
spindle spindle
Workpiece transfer
clearance (TC44)
Workpiece transfer position specified
in transfer display
Program type M
NM211-00236
Set this parameter equal to or as close as possible to its standard value.
mm/min
Unit Excessive setting may cause a contact error.
0.1 in/min
(TC44, TC59)
2-315
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Workpiece
–1
Spindle speed (min ) of two spindles in
workpiece transfer while the spindles are
rotating in workpiece transfer unit
TC58 No. 1 Workpiece transfer No. 2
spindle speed clearance (TC44) spindle speed
–1 –1
(min ) TC58 (min ) TC58
Workpiece transfer position specified
Program type M
d.
in the transfer display
ve
er
–1
Unit min
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Workpiece pressing distance in workpiece
No. 2
.A
transfer unit No. 1
Workpiece spindle
spindle
N
TC59
O
TI
TC59 Workpiece transfer
60
Program type M
A clearance (TC44)
R
40
PO
29
0.001 mm/min Workpiece transfer position specified

R
Unit
o.
0.0001 in/min in the transfer display NM211-00255

O
N

al
Simultaneous operation pattern for transfer of workpieces between two

ri
ZA
Se
unit jobsites
A
TC61 = 1:
IM
Rotation of the spindle and movement of the Z-axis

Simultaneous operation pattern for transfer
K
TC61 = 2:
ZA
TC61 Orientation of the spindle and movement of the Z-axis

A
TC61 = 4:
M
Positioning of the C-axis and movement of the Z-axis

YA

3
01
To combine patterns, set the sum total of setting numbers

corresponding the conditions.
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-316
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Selection of tool change command output When a FLASH tool is used, specify the position for indexing the tool,
position for FLASH tool namely, the tool change command output position for indexing the tool of
the same TNo. at the same B-axis angle during programmed operation.
In all other cases, the tool change command output position specified by
SU10 becomes valid.
M5 Z-axis
[6] [1] [3] I21/I22 Z-axis Zc : Stock material edge projection length
Dmax : Stock material maximum outside
diameter
x : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50
.
M5 X-axis
d
Machine zero point + B-axis spindle edge offset value
[4]
ve
BA62
er
z : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51
s
re
Fixed point
[5] [0] [2]
ts
I21/I22 X-axis
gh
[9/10]
ri
x
ll
.A
[7] [8]
User-specified
N
Dmax fixed point 1/2
O
TI
60
Setting A X-axis Z-axis

R
40
Zc z 0 Clearance position Clearance position

PO
29

R
o.
3 Machine zero point Machine zero point

N
TC62 4 Fixed point Fixed point

al
5 Clearance position End point of previous machining

ri
ZA
6 Machine zero point End point of previous machining

Se
7 End point of previous machining Clearance position

A
IM
8 End point of previous machining Machine zero point

K

ZA
Note :
A
1. TC62 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output position is

M
identical with the end point of previous machining. In the case

YA
below, however, this may not be applied.

As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the hatched portion,
3
the position will escape in Z-axis direction by the distance

01
determined by SU51.
)2
(c
ht
SU51
ig
yr
op
Stock material
C

length length
2. The turret type of turret conducts tool turning at the tool change
command output position. The ATC type of turret moves from the
Program type M tool change command output position to the ATC position.
Unit —
2-317
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Selection of tool change command output When a FLASH tool is used, specify the position for indexing the tool,
position for FLASH tool namely, the tool change command output position for indexing the tool of
the same TNo. at the same B-axis angle during programmed operation.
In all other cases, the tool change position specified by SU10 becomes
valid.
INTEGREX e-H I21/I22 Z-axis Zc : Stock material edge projection length
[11] 3rd zero point Dmax : Stock material maximum outside
diameter
M5 Z-axis x : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50
M6 [6] [1] [3] + B-axis spindle edge offset value
X-axis
.
BA62
d
ve
M5
X-axis [4] z : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51
er
Machine zero point
I21/I22
s
[5] [0] [2] X-axis
re
User-specified
[9/10]
ts
fixed point 1/2
2nd zero point
gh
x
[7] [8]
ri
ll
0 Clearance position Clearance position
.A
Dmax
N
O
Zc z 3 Machine zero point Machine zero point
TI
4 2nd zero point 2nd zero point
60
3rd zero point

A End point of previous
5 Clearance position
R
40
machining
PO
INTEGREX e-V End point of previous

29
M6 6 Machine zero point

X-axis machining
I21/I22
R

o.
X-axis Machine 7 Clearance position

O
M5 zero point machining

N
TC62 X-axis
8
Machine zero point
al
[8] [2] [3] machining

K
ri
ZA

I21/I22 9
Se
M5 point 1 point 1
Z-axis [4]
Z-axis
A

10
IM
[9/10] point 2 point 2

User-specified End point of previous
11 3rd zero point
machining
K
fixed point 1/2 2nd zero point

ZA
[7] [0] [1]

Note :
A
z 1. Do not use the setting of TC62 = 4 for the INTEGREX

M
e-II series. A collision with the ATC cover is likely to

[11]
YA
occur since the ATC position specified in fixed-point

[5] [6] M5 is present inside the ATC cover.
3
Zc 2. Since x in the case of TC62 = 0, 2, or 5 includes

01
spindle tool length, if the tool is too long (as in the

case of a long boring bar), the tool change operation
)2
Dmax x may be software-limited in the +X direction.

(c
3. TC62 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output

position is identical with the end point of previous
ht
machining. In the case below, however, this may not

be applied.
ig
As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the

yr
hatched portion, the position will escape in Z-axis

op
direction by the distance determined by SU51.

C
SU51
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Stock material
length
Unit — length
2-318
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the amount of relief after executing the workpiece transfer unit.
Example : Transfer from HD2 to HD1
Spindle No. 1 Spindle No. 2

Amount of relief after transfer using the
workpiece transfer unit
(Spindle mode 0 to 5)
TC63
Workpiece
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
s
re
Gripping position Amount of relief
ts
gh
ri
ll
Amount of relief after transfer using the
.A
(Spindle mode 6 and 7)
N
TC64
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M
29

R
o.
Unit 0.01 s
N

al
K
ri
It is a parameter to automatically control the parts catcher.

ZA
Se
If the set value of TC65 is n, M-code of No. n (parts catcher forward) is

A
outputted at the start of cutting off (#4, #5), and M-code of No. n+1 (Parts
IM
catcher backward) is outputted at the end.

Specification of first M-code for parts Note : If 0 is set in TC65 no M-code is outputted.
K
catcher control
ZA
TC65
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
This parameter is used as the basis for judging whether the index angle
ig
entered in TOOL DATA display is acceptable. An alarm will be displayed if

yr
the entered value is judged to be unacceptable.

op
(Specify “900” for 4-segment splitting.)

C
Minimum index angle of the FLASH tool
TC66
Program type M, E
Unit 0.1°
2-319
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Example :
1. Standard type cutting
Prior to cutting up along the wall in the end of final cycle, escape will
Return distance (radial value) in X-axis at be made by specified distance.
wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit,
in corner machining unit or in mill-turning
unit of MAZATROL programs
TC67
TC67
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in TC68
s
re
Setting range 0 to 65535 2. High speed rough cutting
Escape will be made by TC67 and TC68 specified distance during
ts
return after reaching the wall.
gh
ri
Return distance in Z-axis at wall during
ll
rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner
.A
machining unit or in mill-turning unit of
N
MAZATROL programs
TC68
O
TI
TC67
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
TC68
29
R
* For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU101 and SU102.

o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
Set number of revolutions during dwell for each cutting operation for
ri
ZA
machining #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, or #5 groove (T. GROOVE unit) with pecking
Se
return distance (TC74) of 0.

IM
The tool stops moving until the spindle makes revolutions set in this
Number of revolutions during dwell for parameter.
K
pecking of grooving
ZA
TC69
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit Revolutions
(c

ht
Number of cutting edges to be used if the tool file data for the
ig
corresponding tool is not yet registered during FLASH tool selection.

yr
op
FLASH tool
C
— Number of cutting edges to be used for

the tool not registered in the tool file
TC70
Program type M
Unit Number of cutting edges
2-320
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the feed stopping rotation dwell time during the chip cutting cycle.
Feed is stopped while the spindle rotates for the specified time.
Note :
Feed stopping rotation dwell time during the
chip cutting cycle (valid only for roughing) If “0” is entered, the dwell time will be handled as “0”. However, the feed
rate will be reduced since the dwell function itself will be executed.
TC71
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit Revolutions
s
re
ts
If the number of times of roughing has not been specified in the program,
gh
operation will occur in accordance with the setting of this parameter.
ri
ll
.A
Number of times of roughing in the
composite-type fixed cycle (G273, G73)
N
Number of times of
TC72
O
roughing
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
o.
Unit Times
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Pecking speed
Se
[1] Cutting: (G1) F command data

A
IM
[2] Pecking: (G1) TC73

[3] Cutting: (G1) F command data
K
ZA
Return speed at pecking portion in groove When executing groove cutting with grooving pattern #0 (only for oblique
A
groove) the tool returns from the groove bottom also at the “G1” feed rate
M
cutting unit and turning-drilling unit

determined by this parameter.
YA
TC73 Grooving #0 (Right-angled groove) Grooving #0 (Oblique groove)

3
01
Returns at G1
)2
Returns at G0
(c
ht
Program type M
ig

yr
0.001 mm/rev In turning-drilling unit, TC73 setting will be used only for #2 and #2
op
Unit
0.0001 in/rev types.
C
2-321
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Tool
Pecking return distance in groove cutting
unit of MAZATROL programs
TC74
TC74
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in * For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU104.
s
re
ts
d
gh
d: Tool diameter
ri
: Groove width
Tool
ll
Overlap distance for machining wide groove
.A
in groove cutting unit
N
TC75
O
TI
60
A TC75
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
NM211-00249
O
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 

N

al
K
ri
<Rough cutting> <Finish cutting>

ZA
Se
TC76 TC76
IM
Escape value after machining in edge

K
machining unit
ZA
TC76
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
TC76 TC76
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

NM211-00250
(c

ht
TC77
ig
L L0
yr
op
Acceleration distance clamp value for

C
thread cutting unit

TC77
Program start Thread cutting
L : Effective thread length point start point
L0: Acceleration distance
Program type M NM211-00246
Conditions Immediate If L0 > TC77, alarm will be caused.
Unit Lead/10 If, however, TC141 (bit 2) = 0, alarm will not be caused.
Setting range 0 to 255 (TC141 (bit 2))
2-322
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Cut depth (radial value) for final cut in

thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs 1st cut
TC78
(n/2-1)th cut
(n/2)th cut
TC78 nth cut

Program type M
.d
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in * For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU105.
s
re
ts
Clamping will follow the setting of TC79 if the calculated value of the cut
gh
depth with the threading unit is smaller than the setting of TC79. This
parameter is valid only for the infeed operation of the fixed-area scheme.
ri
Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial
ll
* For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU106.
.A
value) in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL
programs
N
TC79
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
If, during the composite-type fixed cycle G276/G76 mode, a tool nose
ri
ZA
angle has not been specified in the program, the setting of this parameter
Se
will become the angle of the tool nose.

IM
Angle of the tool nose during the G276/G76

K
mode
ZA
TC80 Angle
A
M
YA
Program type E The setting must be either 0, 29, 30, 55, 60 or 80.
3
01
Unit °
)2
Setting range 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80

(c
ht
If the number of times of repetition has not been specified in the program,
operation will occur in accordance with the setting of this parameter.
ig
yr
op
Final finishing repeat times in the Number of times

C
composite-type fixed cycle (G276, G76)

TC81
Program type E
Unit Times
2-323
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
L2 L1 L
End
point
Start
ψ point
NM211-00272
.
L : Effective thread length
d
Chamfering data calculation coefficient in
ve
L1 : Same pitch incomplete thread length (follow-up delay)
thread cutting unit and thread cutting cycle L2 : Chamfering data
er
(G276/G292, G76/G92) ψ : Chamfering angle
s
TC82
re
TC82
L2 = L0 × 10
ts
gh
L0 : Thread lead
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit Lead/10
O
N
al
During a finishing process based on the standard pattern (#0) of the

ri
ZA
threading unit, TC78 cutting (final cutting diameter in threading unit) is

Se
repeated the number of times that has been specified in TC83.

IM
TC83 = 0 or 1:
Number of cutting operations to be
Cutting based on the setting of TC78 occurs once.
K
performed on finishing allowance

ZA
corresponding to standard pattern (#0) of TC83  2:

threading unit Finish-cutting is repeated the number of times specified in TC83, and with
A
TC83 the depth-of-cut setting of TC78/TC83.

M
YA
 Parameter TC83 is valid only for #0, #0: it does not function for #1, #1
3
or #2, #2.
01
Program type M
 If TC78 = 0, TC83 is invalid.
)2
For thread refinishing, one cutting operation is performed as before.
(c
Unit Times
ht

ig
yr
Specify the feed rate to be auto-set for finishing (turning) in the

MAZATROL program.
op
C
Feed rate to be auto-set for finishing
TC84
Program type M
Unit 0.001 mm/rev / 0.0001 in/rev
2-324
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the number of the magazine pocket holding the adapter for the
long boring bar.
Address Description
Specification of the pocket for the long TC85 Pocket No. 1 for long boring bar
boring bar TC86 Pocket No. 2 for long boring bar
TC85
TC87 Pocket No. 3 for long boring bar
to TC88 Pocket No. 4 for long boring bar
TC94 TC89 Pocket No. 5 for long boring bar
.
Program type M, E TC91 Pocket No. 7 for long boring bar
d
ve
Conditions Immediate TC92 Pocket No. 8 for long boring bar
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
TC95
O
TC96
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Specify the sequence of retraction during workpiece transfer on machines

ZA
Se
with the lower turret.

A
TC97 = 0:
IM
The upper and lower turrets return simultaneously.

Type of retraction during workpiece transfer
K
TC97 = 1:
ZA
The upper turret returns prior to the lower turret.

TC97 TC97 = 2:
A
The lower turret returns prior to the upper turret.

M
YA
The setting is regarded as “0” if out of range.

Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Specify the sequence of the returning operation set in the ATC and
ig
RETURN items in the end unit for machines with the lower turret.
yr
TC98 = 0:
op
The upper and lower turrets return simultaneously.

Returning operation after machining
C
specified in the END unit TC98 = 1:

The upper turret returns prior to the lower turret.
TC98 TC98 = 2:
The lower turret returns prior to the upper turret.
The setting is regarded as “0” if out of range.

Program type M
Unit —
2-325
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the ATC operation after machining when the ATC item in the end
unit is not set.
TC99 = 0:
The same operation as when the item is set to “0” is followed.
ATC operation after machining when not (The tool is not returned.)
specified in the END unit
TC99 = 1:
TC99 The same operation as when the item is set to “1” is followed.
(The tool is returned and axes move to the returning position.)
TC99 = 2:
The same pattern as when the item is set to “2” is followed.
Program type M
d.
(The axes move to the returning position and the tool is returned).
ve
er
Unit — The setting is regarded as “0” if out of range.
s
re
ts
Select a droop sampling axis.
gh
ri
ll
Selection of droop sampling axis
.A
(For detecting imbalance)
N
TC101
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
al
Set the spindle number of a cycle counter sampling axis.

ri
ZA
Se
(Set “32” for No. 1 spindle.)

A
IM
Selection of cycle counter sampling axis

K

ZA
TC102
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
(c
ht
Set the amplitude limit of table vibration.

ig
yr
op
Amplitude limit of table vibration

C

TC103
Program type E
Unit —
2-326
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the clearance for rechucking the workpiece using the workpiece
transfer unit.
Movement to the clearance position occurs in the G0 mode.
Movement from the clearance position to the gripping position occurs in
the G1 mode using the feed rate specified in parameter TC57.
 Spindle No. 1 specification

G0 G1 Gripping
position
.d
ve
Clearance for rechucking using the Workpiece
er
s
TC104
re
Clearance + Direction
ts
TC104
gh
 Spindle No. 2 specification
ri
ll
G1 G0
Gripping position
.A
N
O
TI
Workpiece
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions Immediate Clearance + Direction

R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in TC104

O
N

al
Fixed value (0)

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
TC105
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
ht
Select whether or not to enable the specification of MOVE C which

becomes valid after the workpiece has been moved using the workpiece
ig
transfer unit (CHUCK/BAR/MOVE) in a program of workpiece scheme.

yr
0: Not to be enabled
op
Designation of MOVE C in a workpiece

C
transfer unit of a program of workpiece 1: To be enabled

scheme MOVE C can be specified only when the workpiece transfer unit is set
TC106 as follows:
[CHUCK WORK] or [BAR LOOP] is selected for PAT.
Either [3 ORIENT], [4 C-AXIS POSITION], or [5 KEEP POSITION] is
selected for SPDL.
Also, MOVE C needs to be specified in incremental data terms with
Program type M
respect to the value of C in the immediately preceding fundamental
Conditions Immediate coordinate unit (WPC).
Unit — (Only for the INTEGREX e-H Series)
Setting range 0, 1
2-327
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the distance beyond the workpiece where the end point in the
workpiece longitudinal direction can be placed when machining the inner
surface in bar machining, copy machining or thread cutting unit.
Overshoot in the longitudinal direction with

the workpiece for inside machining
TC107
Overshoot for
inside machining
Program type M
d .
TC107
ve
Workpiece length
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Select the waiting position after the two-workpiece machining.
gh
TC108 = 0
ri
Tool-rotating position in accordance with the spindle and the basic
coordinate system selected for machining after the two-workpiece
ll
End position of the two-workpiece
.A
machining
machining
TC108 = 1
N
TC108 Tool-rotating position in accordance with the spindle and the basic
O
coordinate system selected for the two-workpiece machining
TI
60
TC108 = 2 A
R
40
End position of the machining (safety clearance position)

Program type M
PO
29
TC108 = 3
Retraction position specified by the two-workpiece machining unit (END)
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
al
Sets the reference length for the display of bar materials on the BL
ri
ZA
SCHEDULE display
Se
A
IM
Reference length for the display of bar Remark :

K
materials on the BL SCHEDULE display If a value outside the allowable setting range is set, the set value is
ZA
regarded as 1200 mm or 47.2 in.

TC109
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit mm/0.01 in
)2
1 to 9999 (mm)
Setting range
(c
1 to 3650 (0.1 in)

ht
Specify the workpiece length range displayed on the CUTTING

ig
CONDITON LEARN display.

yr
Specify the range so that the relational expression of

op
TC111 < TC112 < TC113 is established.

C
CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display

TC111 — Workpiece length range
to
TC113
Program type M
Unit mm/0.1 in
2-328
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the maximum outside diameter range of the workpieces displayed

on the CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display.
Specify the range so that the relational expression of
TC114 < TC115 < TC116 is established.
CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display
TC114 — Max. workpiece outside diameter range
to
TC116
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit mm/0.1 in
s
re
ts
The settings of these parameters will be used if the amount of release is
gh
not specified in the program.
ri
ll
Composite-type fixed cycle
.A
— amount of X-axial release (G273)
N
TC117
TC117
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E TC118

PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Composite-type fixed cycle

K
— amount of Z-axial release (G273)

ZA
TC118
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

)2

(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-329
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the distance from the B-axis rotational center of the milling spindle
to the front end of the long boring bar.
Distance to the front end of the long boring (On the 3D MONITOR display, long boring bar image is shown at the
bar display position when the tool data is changed or the tool is changed to
other tool after changing the parameter value.)
Distance from B-axis rotational

center to the spindle edge (BA62)
Shift stroke Z
d .
ve
Milling spindle Milling spindle
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Long boring bar
.A
TC120 Long boring bar Shift stroke Y
N
Shift stroke X
to
O
TI
TC137 Address Description
60
TC120
A Long boring bar No. 1 - Shift stroke X
R
40
PO
TC121 Long boring bar No. 1 - Shift stroke Y

29
TC122 Long boring bar No. 1 - Shift stroke Z

R
o.
TC123 Long boring bar No. 2 - Shift stroke X

O
N

al

ri
ZA

Se
Long boring bar No. 3 - Shift stroke Y

A
TC127
IM

K

ZA

A

M

YA

Program type M, E
3

01
Conditions At power on TC136 Long boring bar No. 6 - Shift stroke Y

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in TC137 Long boring bar No. 6 - Shift stroke Z
(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-330
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
TC141 (bit 0) = 0: Disuse
F1
F1 No acceleration
Use/disuse of acceleration in up-going

slope during rough cutting cycle in bar
machining unit
TC141
(bit 0) TC141 (bit 0) = 1: Use
d .
ve
F2 F2 > F1
er
F1 F1 : Feed rate for rough
s
cutting cycle
re
F2 : Feed rate after
Program type M
acceleration
ts
gh
Unit — NM211-00208
ri
(TC2, TC3)
ll
Setting range 0, 1
.A
N
O
TI
F1
F1
60
A No deceleration
R
40
Use/disuse of deceleration in down-going

PO
29
slope during rough cutting cycle in bar

machining unit
R
TC141
o.
O
N
(bit 1) TC141 (bit 1) = 1: Use

C
al
F3 < F1
ri
ZA
F3 F1 : Feed rate for rough

Se
F1 cutting cycle
A
F3 : Feed rate after

IM
Program type M deceleration

K
ZA
Unit — NM211-00209
(TC5, TC6)
A
Setting range 0, 1
M

YA
Alarm not caused even if acceleration distance at start of thread cutting

3
unit exceeds clamp data

01
TC141 (bit 2) = 1: Use

)2
Alarm caused when acceleration distance at start of thread cutting unit

(c
exceeds clamp data

ht
Selection between use/disuse of

acceleration distance check at start of
ig
Example :
thread cutting unit
yr
TC141 Lc
op
(bit 2)
C
→ Alarm not caused

Lo
→ Alarm caused
Lo
Start of
thread
Program type M cutting Lo : Acceleration distance
Conditions Immediate Lc : Acceleration distance clamp data
Unit —
(TC77)
Setting range 0, 1
2-331
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
TC141 (bit 3) = 0: Start position shift

Thread number offset adjusted by moving thread cutting start position
1st thread Acceleration distance

Selection between start position shift/start 2nd thread changes according to the
angle shift for thread number offset in 3rd thread thread number
thread cutting unit
TC141
(bit 3) TC141 (bit 3) = 1: Start angle shift
Thread number offset adjusted according to thread cutting start angle
d .
ve
1st thread Acceleration distance is
Program type M
2nd thread same for any thread
er
Conditions Immediate number
s
3rd thread
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
An angle margin for nose shape compensation can be selected by setting
ri
data in bits 4 and 5.
ll
.A
Selecting an angle margin for nose shape
N
Setting Angle margin for nose
compensation
O
TC141 Bit 5 Bit 4 shape compensation
TI
(bit 4) 0 0 3.0
60
(bit 5)
A 0 1 2.0
R
40
PO
1 0 1.0
29
Program type M 1 1 0.5

R
o.
N
Unit —
al
K
ri
Setting range 0, 1
ZA
Se
TC141 (bit 6) = 1
A
A code can be selected.

IM
TC141 (bit 6) = 0
K
A name can be selected.

ZA
CHUCK JAW DATA display name/code

selection
A
TC141
M
(bit 6)
YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
TC141 (bit 7) = 1
yr
Partition plate and the workpiece barrier valid

op
TC141 (bit 7) = 0
C
Partition plate and the workpiece barrier invalid

Whether to make the partition plate and the
workpiece barrier valid
TC141
(bit 7)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-332
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (0)
TC142
(bit 0)
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
TC142 (bit 1) = 0
gh
The relationship between the starting position of machining with the next
unit and the ending position of machining with the previous unit is
ri
Selecting an inter-unit relief path when a examined and if interference is judged to be likely, the tool will escape to a
ll
succession of I.D. turning units using the clearance point.
.A
same tool exist and there is no movement TC142 (bit 1) = 1
N
TC142 to the rotating position of the tool The tool escapes to the clearance point each time the I.D. turning unit is
O
(bit 1) executed to completion.
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Specify the jaw data reference method.

ri
ZA
Se
TC142 (bit 2) = 0:
A
Reference using the code number of the jaw.

IM
TC142 (bit 2) = 1:
Selection of the jaw data reference method Reference using the name of the jaw.
K
ZA
TC142
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
TC142 (bit 3) = 0:
Angle tool holder cannot be used.
ig
yr
TC142 (bit 3) = 1:
op
Angle tool holder can be used.

Using angle tool holder valid/invalid
C
TC142 Use BA63 to set the angle of the angle tool holder.
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-333
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Turning spindle stop M code output in end

unit
TC142
(bit 4)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
TC142 (bit 5) = 0:
gh
An alarm will not be issued even if the ending position of workpiece
pressing is reached during the transfer of the workpiece.
ri
Selection whether an alarm is to be issued TC142 (bit 5) = 1:
ll
.A
if the ending position of workpiece pressing An alarm will be issued if the ending position of workpiece pressing is
is reached during transfer of the workpiece reached during the transfer of the workpiece.
N
TC142
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
TC142 (bit 6) = 0:
ri
ZA
When the workpiece is transferred as specified in the workpiece transfer

Se
unit of the MAZATROL program, the X-axis moves to the machine zero
IM
point.
X-axis retraction position during workpiece
transfer as specified in the workpiece TC142 (bit 6) = 1:
K
transfer unit of the MAZATROL program When the workpiece is transferred as specified in the workpiece transfer
ZA
TC142 unit of the MAZATROL program, the X-axis moves to the third zero point.
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
TC142 (bit 7) = 0:
Upper turret moves to the X-axis zero point during machining with the
ig
lower turret.
yr
op
TC142 (bit 7) = 1:
Upper turret retraction during machining Upper turret retraction does not occur during machining with the lower
C
with the lower turret turret.

TC142
(bit 7)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-334
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Whether the end tool of the long boring bar can be changed by ATC
(1: Changeable, 0: Not changeable)
76543210 (1: Changeable, 0: Not changeable)
Whether the end tool of the long boring bar Long boring bar No. 1
can be changed
Long boring bar No. 2
TC143 Long boring bar No. 3
Program type M, E Long boring bar No. 6
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
76543210
gh
Automatic selection of the relief path for the
ri
continuous I.D. machining
ll
Workpiece transfer axis motion for opposed turret
.A
specification lathes
N
0: Z-axis return to zero point
O
1: Compliant with TC63/TC64
TI
C-axis clamping during workpiece transfer with
60
A C-axis positioning
R
40
0: Valid
PO
29
1: Invalid
R
Automatic output of spindle rotation command

o.
when turning tool is used in the manual program

N
—
C
unit
al
TC144 0: Valid
ri
ZA
1: Invalid
Se
ATC and RETURN of the end unit after

IM
single-process operation
0: Not executed
K
1: Executed
ZA
ATC and RETURN of the end unit for repetition

A
(CONTI. = 1).
M
0: Not executed
YA
1: Executed
Relief path G00/G01 selection for edging
3
0: G00
01
1: G01
Program type M
)2
Handling when no tools are specified for the

(c
manual program unit

0: Returning the tool
ht
Unit —
1: Inheriting the mounted tool
ig

yr
op
C
2-335
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
OFFSET unit Z-axial inversion during turning

0: Valid
1: Invalid
Handling of the G04 command in the manual
program unit
0: Dwell per rev
1: Dwell per min
Operation by cutting-feed override 0 in G31
d .
command mode
ve
0: Normal operation
er
1: Alarm stop
s
re
After C-axis transfer using the workpiece transfer
unit
ts
0: Milling mode
gh
1: Turning mode
ri
Selection of a calculation method for tail barrier
ll
end reference
.A
0: Spindle edge
N
1: Z-offset
O
Output of maximum spindle speed command
TI
specified in the common unit
60
A 0: At the beginning of each unit

R
40
— 1: Only at the program head (or at the restart

PO
29
position)
TC145
R
Handling when tools different in shape (infeed

o.
angle, nose angle and nose R) are designated for

N
the upper and lower turret in balanced cutting

al
0: Machining continues with the alarm 790

ri
ZA
ILLEGAL BALANCE CUT displayed.

Se
1: Machining continues without alarm

A
IM
Operation of the path inversed with respect to the

traveling direction of the tip (only for copy
K
machining)
ZA
0: Inversed path ignored

1: Alarm stop
A
M
YA
Description of TC145 bit 7

Operation of the path inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the
3
01
tip
)2
0: Inversed path ignored

During roughing with the copy-machining unit, if the path is auto-
(c
matically created that is inversed with respect to the traveling direction

ht
of the tip, this path will be ignored and the next path executed. In this
ig
case, roughing will be executed with a smaller number of cutting

yr
operations than the specified number of cutting operations.

op
1: Alarm stop
C
During roughing with the copy-machining unit, if the path is auto-

matically created that is inversed with respect to the traveling direction
Program type M
of the tip, operation will stop with the display of alarm 714 ILLEGAL
Conditions Immediate SEQUENCE DATA to indicate that the path is incorrect. The shape
Unit — sequence number of the section where the inversed path has been
created will be output. Correct the machining program.
2-336
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Selection of the turning spindle rotation timing when the relay point for the
turning approach is specified
0 : Spindle rotation after movement to relay point
Selection of the turning spindle rotation 1 : Spindle rotation before movement to relay point
timing when the relay point for the turning
approach is specified
TC146
(bit 0)
d .
Conditions Immediate For mill-turning unit or turning-drilling unit in which a milling tool is used,
ve
Unit — the spindle rotates after movement to the relay point, even when TC146
er
bit 0 = 1.
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Used to select the mode of X-axis commands in manual program units.
ts
0: Radial value
gh
1: Diametral value
ri
ll
X-axis command in manual program unit
.A
TC146
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
Used to select the operation when the infeed angle or relief angle is 0° or
ri
ZA
less.
Se
0: Tool path output assuming that the infeed angle or the relief angle is
A
IM
90°
Operation at the infeed angle or relief angle
of 0° or less 1: Alarm stop
K
TC146
ZA
(bit 2)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
C-axis command output for the second workpiece transfer unit onward at
ht
successive workpiece transfer units of a BAR moving pattern

ig
0: Do not output
yr
C-axis command output for the second

workpiece transfer unit onward at 1: Output
op
successive workpiece transfer units of a

C
TC146 BAR moving pattern

(bit 3)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-337
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
System enabled at MAZATROL program call from EIA/ISO program

0: 1st system only
1: All systems
System enabled at MAZATROL program
call from EIA/ISO program
TC146
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Automatic setting of M8 as an M-code to be output at the beginning of a
unit which is selected for the single-process operation.
gh
0: No setting
ri
1: Setting
ll
M8 output before executing single-process
.A
operation
TC146
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
C-offset values to be used on HD1 and HD2 for a two-workpiece

ri
ZA
machining unit of MAZATROL programs

Se
0: Use of the C-OFFSET setting in the preceding workpiece transfer unit

IM
for both sides. (If the setting in question is omitted, the C-OFFSET
C-offset on HD1/HD2 in two-workpiece
setting on the SETUP INFORMATION display is used for both sides.)
machining unit of MAZATROL program
K
TC146 1: Use of the C-OFFSET settings in the preceding workpiece transfer

ZA
unit and on the SETUP INFORMATION display as appropriate for the

(bit 6)
A
respective sides.
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Whether or not to modify the numeric positional indication with respect to

ht
the workpiece coordinate system according to the tool offset setting in the
ig
TPC data.
yr
0: Modification
op
Addition of tool offset in the TPC data to

1: No modification
C
current position
TC146
(bit 7)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-338
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: The condition of the manual program or subprogram unit is retained.

1: The condition of the unit preceding a manual program or subprogram
unit is used.
Modal condition about diameter/radius
value input for the unit after manual
program or subprogram unit
TC147
(bit 0)
Program type M
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Z/C offset value to be used in the EIA/ISO subprogram after workpiece
gh
transfer in the MAZATROL program
ri
0: Z/C offset value set in the workpiece transfer unit
ll
Z/C offset value to be used in the EIA/ISO 1: Z/C offset value for the MAZATROL program set on the SET UP
.A
subprogram after workpiece transfer in the MANAG. display
MAZATROL program
N
TC147
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: FLASH tool change position (TC62)

Se
1: Tool change position (SU10)

A
IM
Tool change position at RETURN in end

K
unit when FLASH tool is mounted

ZA
TC147
A
(bit 3)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Whether pressing is to be made selectable for workpiece transfer units of

ig
a BAR moving pattern.

yr
0: Not to be made selectable

op
Whether or not pressing is to be made 1: To be made selectable

C
selectable for workpiece transfer unit of

BAR moving pattern
TC147
(bit 4)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-339
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Upper right corner of the tip-width section
Tool nose position of an inside-turning

grooving tool for machining on the back
side
1: Upper left corner of the tip-width section
TC147 (compatible with M640T, MT, T NEXUS, and MT Pro)
(bit 5)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Include nose R. (MTPro compatible)
gh
1: Do not include nose R.
ri
ll
Handling of nose R in the retraction path
.A
during grooving #4, 5 (cutting off)
N
TC147
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Z-axial withdrawal after M-code unit execution when the tool nose is
ZA
Se
positioned at the edge clearance including the workpiece edge protrusion

A
(See example below.)

IM
0: Invalid
K
1: Valid
ZA
Example :
A
The tool will be withdrawn after execution of the M-code unit when the
M
tool nose has been positioned in the area between the front clearance
YA
point and the workpiece zero point (the hatched section in the figure)
using the manual program unit, or when the program is restarted from
3
Z-axial withdrawal after M-code unit the M-code unit with the tool nose positioned in that area.
01
execution O.D. clearance

)2
TC147 (TC37)
(c
(bit 7)
ht
ig
Workpiece edge
yr
protrusion
op
C
Rear clearance
(TC40)
Workpiece length Front

OFF path
clearance
Program type M ON path
(TC39)
Unit —
Note : TC147 bit 1 is valid only when F161 bit 7 is set to 1.
Setting range 0, 1
2-340
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Change the timing of cancelling the amount of wear compensation (tool

offset number set in TPC or wear compensation in tool data) when
working around the workpiece with a turning tool mounted.
Tool length A/B data
Tool with wear compensation
0: Cancel compensation when working around the workpiece
Tool rotation position SU10
.d
ve
er
Clearance area
s
re
ts
Selection of compensation cancel when
gh
working around the workpiece
ri
TC148
ll
(bit 4)
.A
N
O
TI
Wear compensation cancel
60
A
R
40
PO
1: Cancel compensation after working around the workpiece

29
R
o.
Tool rotation position SU10

O
N
Wear compensation
al
cancel
Clearance area
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Program type M
K
ZA
Unit —
A
Setting range 0, 1
M
YA
Movement onto a clearance point when the tool tip after O.D. turning is
located within the clearance area around the workpiece
3
0: Do not move
01
1: Move
)2
Selection of movement from the clearance

(c
area to a clearance point during O.D. * Operation with this parameter set to 1 (ON)
ht
turning
TC148
ig
(bit 5) Clearance area

yr
op
O.D.
C
direction
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Move onto a
clearance point
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-341
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Movement onto a clearance point when the tool tip after face/rear turning
is located within the clearance area around the workpiece
0: Do not move
1: Move
Selection of movement from the clearance
area to a clearance point during face/rear
Move onto a
turning
TC148 clearance point
(bit 6) To the rear To the front
Clearance area
.
Move onto a
d
clearance point
ve
Program type M
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
W-axis command from the lower turret when upper - head 1 and lower
ri
-head 2 is set in two-workpiece machining unit
ll
.A
0: Impossible
1: Possible (using address B)
N
W-axis command enabled/disabled during
O
two-workpiece machining * The W-axis command can be issued using G110 (cross command) and
TI
TC148 address B regardless of parameters except for two-workpiece machining
60
(bit 7) unit. A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M
R
o.
O
N
C
al
Unit —
K
ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
Zone where to fix spindle override to 100% during thread cutting

IM
0: Fix to 100% during thread cutting

K
1: Fix to 100% during thread cutting cycle

Selection of the zone where spindle
ZA
* In the case of EIA/ISO: Thread cutting zone during the G32/G76

override is fixed to 100% during thread
(G276)/G92 (G292) cycle
A
cutting cycle
M
TC149 * In the case of MAZATROL program: G32 block in thread cutting unit
YA
(bit 0)
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
yr
0: Invalid
op
1: Valid
C
Cutting edge offset when a milling drill

rotates at the same time in turning-drilling
unit (blind hole)
TC149
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-342
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Spindle rotation during turning when an S-code is specified as a TPC

approach relay point in turning unit
0: Rotation at a spindle speed specified in tool sequence data
Spindle rotation during turning when an 1: Rotation at a spindle speed specified at the TPC approach relay point
S-code is specified in TPC data (rotation by G97)
TC149 * The spindle rotates at a speed that is set when bit 4 of parameter TC149
is set to 0, regardless of the setting value, if simultaneous drill rotation is
(bit 4)
valid in turning-drilling unit.
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Alarm 613 DATA MISSING IN WPC UNIT occurs.
gh
1: Setting of Z is handled as 0.
ri
Machine operation on tool path check of a
ll
program for which workpiece scheme is
.A
selected and T. CENTER is specified for X
and Y, but Z is left blank in the basic
N
TC149 coordinates system unit (WPC).
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: No alarm
Se
1: Generate the alarm 189 ILLEGAL SPINDLE DIRECTION.

A
IM
Handling of the cases where the directions

K
of rotation of the turning tool of the manual

ZA
program unit and the spindle do not match

TC149
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
op
Setting of the thrust when moving a

C
workpiece
TC150
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-343
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Pinch cut/Y-axis turning in MAZATROL * This parameter is valid only when the pinch cut/Y-axis turning option is
program selected.
TC150
(bit 1)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
When a program that performs 2 workpiece machining is executed with
gh
only one spindle,
0: No alarm stop
ri
Alarm stop if a program that performs 2
ll
1: Stop with the output of alarm 789 DBL SPDL OPER UNIT ERROR
.A
workpiece machining with only one spindle
is executed
N
TC150
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Display the specified surface speed

ri
ZA
Se
1: Display the surface speed calculated from the spindle speed

A
IM
Selection of surface speed to be output to

Note : When TC150 bit 5 = 1, the surface speed display will fluctuate.
the screen during constant surface speed
K
control
ZA
TC150
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Set the depth of cut in the Z-axis direction when machining pattern #2 is
selected in the external diameter turning unit.
ig
yr
op
Cut depth per cycle for machining external

C
TC155 TC155
diameter in bar machining unit
TC155
Program type M
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-344
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Sets the distance to avoid excess load on a tool at side walls in

reciprocating grooving operation.
TC159
Tool load avoidance distance in

reciprocating grooving operation (side wall)
.
TC156
d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
TC156
ri
Program type M
ll
.A
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
N
TC159
O
TI
Set any of rotation angles (0, 90, 180 and 270) in the direction from the
60
A
default direction.
R
40
PO
If a value other than 0, 90, 180 or 270 is set, 0 is assumed.

29
INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER

R
o.
function (IBA):
O
N
Angular offset
C
TC157
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Program type M, E
K
Unit 
ZA

A
M
Sets the override for the traverse feed rate in reciprocating grooving
YA
operation.
Setting “0” results in the same operation as when “100” is set.
3
01
Feed rate override in reciprocating grooving

)2
operation
(c
TC158
ht
ig
yr
Program type M
op
C
Unit %
2-345
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the distance to avoid excess load on a tool at the bottom in

reciprocating grooving operation.
TC159
Tool load avoidance distance in

reciprocating grooving operation (bottom)
d .
TC159
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
TC156
ri
Program type M
ll
.A
N
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
O
TC156
TI
60
A
Sets the retraction distance from the wall at completion of groove bottom
R
40
machining in reciprocating grooving operation.

PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
+X
ZA
Retraction distance from wall in

Se
reciprocating grooving operation

A
TC160 +Z
IM
TC161
K
ZA
Cutting path
A
TC160
M
Retraction path
YA
Program type M from wall

3
Conditions Immediate TC161

01
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

)2

(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-346
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
When the uni-directional pattern is selected in a grooving unit, the tool

moves in the G0 mode to the position set for parameter TC162 and then
moves in the G1 mode from that position to the wall.
TC162
Wall clearance in uni-directional grooving
+X
TC162
+Z
d .
ve
er
Program type M
s
Cutting path
re
ts
Positioning path
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
gh
ri
Set a multiplier factor to be used in the math formula which calculates the
ll
.A
amount of balance.
N
O
TI
function (IBA):
60
Imbalance multiplication parameter A

TC251
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
Program type M, E
N
al
K
ri
ZA
Unit —
Se
Setting range 0 to 2147483648

A
IM
Set the factor to be used in the math formula that calculates the amount of
balance.
K
ZA

A
function (IBA):
M
Imbalance factor parameter

YA
TC252
3
01
)2
Program type M, E
(c
ht
Unit —
ig

yr
op
C
2-347
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the dead zone for the drooping level for the math formula that
calculates the amount of balance.

function (IBA):
Imbalance droop offset
TC253
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
0 to 2147483648
re
Setting range
ts
Set the dead zone for the rotary speeds for the math formula that
gh
calculates the direction of imbalance.
ri
ll
.A
function (IBA):
Imbalance rotary speed offset
N
TC254
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
Set the slope of the math formula that calculates the direction of
ri
ZA
imbalance.
Se
A
IM
Intelligent Balance Analyzer function (IBA):

K
Imbalance slope parameter

ZA
TC255
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2

(c
ht
0: Not considering C1/C2

ig
1: Considering C1/C2
yr
Considering C1 and C2 values in the

op
workpiece travel unit in an FRM workpiece

C
scheme program in the tool path check, trace

TC289 shapes and QUICK shapes
(bit 0)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-348
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Corrected flank infeed

1: Flank infeed
Thread cutting angle

Thread cutting pattern TC290 (bit 0) Angle < 0 Angle = 0 Angle > 0
TC290
(bit 0)
0
d .
Program type M
ve
er
1
s
Unit —
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-349
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the cutting start position for pattern #1 (reciprocating)/#2

(uni-directional) in grooving. The cutting start position is determined
depending on the position of grooving as shown below.
<With upper turret>

When TC290 bit 1 = 0
Spindle No. 1
OD/ID: Workpiece end side, Front/back: Outer diameter side
Spindle No. 2
d .
ve
Cutting start position
er
Spindle Spindle
s
No. 1
re
No. 2
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
Spindle No. 1 OD/ID: Chuck side, Front/back: Inner diameter side
O
TI
60
A Cutting start position

R
40
Spindle Spindle
PO
29
No. 1 No. 2
R
o.
Cutting start position selection for

O
N
reciprocating/uni-directional grooving
C
TC290
al
K
ri
ZA
(bit 1)
Se
A
IM
<With lower turret>

K

ZA
Spindle No. 1
A

M
Spindle No. 2
YA

3

01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C

Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-350
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-8 User parameter SOLID (SD)
Classification USER Display title SOLID
Set the type of coordinate system used for position display.

0: MAZATROL coordinate system
Machine coordinate system setting
SD49
d .
ve
Program type M, E
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
Select a table type for 3D setup display.
ri
0: Square table
ll
.A
1: Round table
2: Chuck
N
Table type
O
TI
SD50 * When this parameter is set to “2” on machines with the vertical Z-axis
60
A
(L110 bit 7 = 1) and the rotary head axis (BA48 ≠ 0), the table will be
R
40
displayed by referring to the settings of parameters BA1 to BA3. With

PO
29
Program type M, E other machines, the chuck shape will not be displayed even if this
parameter is set to “2”.
R
o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
ri
ZA
Se
Select the axis direction of a round table to be displayed in the 3D SETUP

A
display.
IM
0: X-axis
1: Y-axis
K
Round table axis direction

ZA
2: Z-axis
A
SD51
M
* This parameter is valid when parameter SD50 is set to 1.

YA
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Sets the drawing mode for arcs in the tool path check and shape check.
ig
yr
0: Simplified drawing (drawing speed prioritized)

op
1: Detailed drawing (drawing accuracy prioritized)

C
Smoothness selection for arcs in the tool

path check/shape check
SD53
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-351
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the accuracy of the product shape to be displayed with QUICK

MAZATROL.
The permissible error when approximating a circular arc with polygons is
selected based on this parameter setting.
The product shape will be represented most coarsely when this parameter
is set to “1” and most precisely when set to “9”.
The relationship between setting of this parameter and the permissible

error is as follows.
d.
ve
0 : Invalid *
Permissible error
er
1 : 1.2 mm
s
2 : 0.8 mm
re
3 : 0.5 mm
ts
4 : 0.4 mm
gh
QUICK MAZATROL product shape display
accuracy 5 : 0.35 mm
ri
SD58 6 : 0.3 mm
ll
.A
7 : 0.25 mm
N
8 : 0.2 mm
O
9 : 0.15 mm
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
* When this parameter is disabled, the following shapes will be

C
approximated with a 32-sided polygon.

al
K
ri
- Material of common unit: cylindrical surface

ZA
Se
- Material unit: cylindrical surface

A
IM
- Point machining unit: hole shape
Program type M - Turning unit: turning cylindrical surface

K
- C-axis cylindrical surface, line-/face-machining shape (360-degree

ZA
machining)
Unit —
A
For shapes other than above, a setting of “7” is assumed.

M
YA
Fixed value
3
01
)2
—
(c
SD59
ht
to
ig
SD63
yr
op
Program type —
C
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-352
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the default value for the model’s movement distance per time that is to
be displayed in the movement distance assignment dialog box.
Distance of the model movement per time
SD97
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
ts
Set the default value for the amount of model rotation per time that is to be
gh
displayed in the amount-of-rotation assignment dialog box.
ri
ll
.A
Amount of model rotation per time
N
SD98
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001°
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-353
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the table size for 3D setup display.
< Rectangular table (not chamfered) >
 Vertical type
SD125 +Z
+Y
SD128
+X
SD126
.
SD127
d
ve
SD130
er
SD129
s
re
 Horizontal type
ts
gh
ri
SD129 +Y
ll
+X
.A
SD126
+Z
N
SD130
SD125
O
Table size
TI
SD128
SD125: Minimum table dimension X
60
SD126: Maximum table dimension X

A SD127
R
40
SD127: Minimum table dimension Y

PO
SD125
29
SD128: Maximum table dimension Y

to < Rectangular table (chamfered) >
R
SD129: Minimum table dimension Z

o.
SD130: Maximum table dimension Z  Vertical type

SD130
N
SD125 SD126
al
K
ri
ZA
SD131
Se
SD131
IM
+Y SD128
K
+X
ZA
A
M
SD127
YA
3

01
Horizontal type
)2
SD129 SD130
(c
SD131
ht
SD131
ig
SD126
yr
+X
op
+Z
C
Program type M, E
SD125
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-354
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
< Round table >
Table upper face direction is determined according to the setting of

parameter SD51.
1. SD51 = 0:
In the length in the Y-axis direction (SD127 + SD128) and that in the
Z-axis direction (SD129 + SD130), the value having a smaller absolute
value is taken as the diameter of the round table, and the length in the
X-axis direction (SD125 + SD126) is taken as the height of the round
table. The center of the rectangle (SD127, SD128, SD129, SD130) is
taken as the center of the round table.
d .
ve
2. SD51 = 1:
In the length in the X-axis direction (SD125 + SD126) and that in the
er
Z-axis direction (SD129 + SD130), the value having a smaller absolute
s
re
value is taken as the diameter of the round table, and the length in the
Y-axis direction (SD127 + SD128) is taken as the height of the round
ts
table. The center of the rectangle (SD125, SD126, SD129, SD130) is
gh
taken as the center of the round table.
ri
3. SD51 = 2:
ll
In the length in the X-axis direction (SD125 + SD126) and that in the
.A
Table size Y-axis direction (SD127 + SD128), the value having a smaller
N
SD125: Minimum table dimension X absolute value is taken as the diameter of the round table, and the
O
SD126: Maximum table dimension X length in the Z-axis direction (SD129 + SD130) is taken as the height
TI
SD127: Minimum table dimension Y of the round table. The center of the rectangle (SD125, SD126,
SD125
60
SD128: Maximum table dimension Y SD127, SD128) is taken as the center of the round table.
A
to
R
40
SD129: Minimum table dimension Z  Vertical type (SD51 = 2)

PO
SD130 SD130: Maximum table dimension Z

29
Length in the X-axis direction

R
o.
SD125 SD126
O
N
+Y
al
SD128
ri
ZA
Se
+X
Length in the
A
Y-axis direction
IM
K
SD127
ZA
A
 Horizontal type (SD51 = 1)

M
Length in the Z-axis direction

YA
SD129 SD130
3
01
+X
)2
SD126
(c
+Z Length in the
ht
X-axis direction
ig
Program type M, E
yr
Conditions Immediate SD125

op
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

C
2-355
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the amount of table chamfer for 3D setup display.
 Top view of the table

Length of the shorter side in vertical and horizontal directions
Amount of chamfer
Amount of table chamfer
SD131
d .
ve
er
Program type M, E
s
re
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
ts
gh
ri
0: Reflecting information on tools used to the shape
ll
1: Reflecting information (nominal diameter, etc.) specified in the program
.A
to the shape
N
Tool data setting using QUICK MAZATROL
O
TI
SD165
60
(bit 1)
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M
o.
O
N
C
al
Unit —
K
ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
Fixed value
IM
K
ZA
—
A
SD166
M
(bit 0)
YA
3
01
Program type —
)2
Conditions —
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range —
ig
0: To be a solid of revolution
yr
1: Not to be a solid of revolution

op
C
Display method for the jaws set on the 3D

SETUP display in the turning mode
SD167
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-356
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Sampling data automatic save function on

occurrence of an INTELLIGENT SAFETY
SHIELD (ISS) alarm
SD167
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-357
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-9 User parameter DISPLAY STRUCTURE (US)
Classification USER Display title DISPLAY STRUCTURE
Selects the highlighting method for the menu items selected.

0: Display the frame and text in green
1: Display the background in white and text in black
Menu highlighting method

US1
(bit 0)
d .
ve
Program type M, E
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
Select the operation to be performed when tool data (ACT-, NOSE-R,
ri
EDG-ANG, TIP-WID, WIDTH) is not input upon automatically determining
ll
cutting conditions.
.A
Selection of operation for automatic
N
determination of cutting conditions when
O
0: Displaying the alarm 414 AUTO CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE
tool data is not input
TI
US1 1: Automatically determining cutting conditions by referring to NOM- in
60
(bit 1) A
the program and parameters US43, US44, US45 and US46
R
40
PO
29
Program type M
R
o.
N
Unit —
al
K
ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
0: Fixed for each machine model

IM
1: According to the setting file

K
ZA
MAZA-CHECK input support function log

output, parameter reference
A
US1
M
(bit 2)
YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
0: Invalid
yr
1: Valid
op
C
Directory selection function in the WORK

No. SELECT window
US1
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-358
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Project function in the WORK No. SELECT

window/PROGRAM FILE display
US1
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set the number of users which the data guard function identifies.
gh
* The function is invalid when “0” or “1” is set.
ri
ll
Data guard function:
.A
Maximum number of users
N
US37
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
When determining “FR” automatically using the automatic cutting

ZA
Se
condition determination function, adjust the calculated feed rate according

A
to the cutting power.

IM
Automatic determination of cutting

Enabled when “DRILL” is set for the tool name in the tool sequence for
conditions
point machining.
K
Element that automatically determines “FR”

ZA
US39 (DRILL)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht

ig

yr

op
Enabled when “BOR BAR”, “B-B BAR” or “BCK FACE” is set for the tool
conditions
C
name in the tool sequence for point machining.

US40 (BOR BAR, B-B BAR, BCK FACE)
Program type M
Unit %
2-359
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Enabled when “FCE MILL” or “END MILL” is set for the tool name in the
conditions
tool sequence for point machining, line machining or face machining.
US41 (FCE MILL, END MILL)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
When determining “DEP-1” automatically using the automatic cutting
gh
condition determination function, adjust the depth of cut during I.D.
machining.
ri
Enabled when “IN” or “IN INNER (BAK)” is set for the machining section in
ll
conditions
.A
the tool sequence for a “BAR”, “CPY” or “CORNER” unit.
Reference shank diameter
N
US42 (BAR, CPY, CORNER)
O
DEP-1 = R-MAX-DEPTH (CUTTING CONDITION display) 
TI
WORKPIECE MATERIAL PERCENTAGE_R-DEPTH% (CUTTING
60
A
CONDITION display)  TOOL MATERIAL PERCENTAGE_R-DEPTH%
R
40
(CUTTING CONDITION display)  (WIDTH (TOOL DATA) / US42

Program type M
PO
(reference shank diameter))

29
R
o.
Unit mm/0.1 in
N

al
K
ri

ZA
Se
condition determination function, determine the condition by using US43

A
as the tool nose radius if “NOSE-R” is not input for the specified tool.
IM

Enabled when a “BAR”, “CPY”, “CORNER” or “FACING” unit is selected.
conditions
K
Tool nose radius when tool data is not input

ZA
(BAR, CPY, CORNER, FACING) Note : US43 is enabled only when US1 bit 1 = 1.
US43
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

(c

ht

ig

yr
as the tool width if “WIDTH” is not input for the specified tool.
op
Enabled when “IN” or “IN INNER (BAK)” is set for the machining section in
conditions
C
the tool sequence for a “BAR”, “CPY” or “CORNER” unit.

Tool width when tool data is not input
US44 (BAR, CPY, CORNER)

Note : US44 is enabled only when US1 bit 1 = 1.
Program type M
Unit mm/0.1 in
2-360
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

as the tool nose angle if “EDG-ANG” is not input for the specified tool.
Enabled when a “BAR”, “CPY”, “CORNER” or “FACING” unit is selected.
conditions
Tool nose angle when tool data is not input
(BAR, CPY, CORNER, FACING) Note : US45 is enabled only when US1 bit 1 = 1.
US45
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1°
s
re
ts
gh
as the tool nose width if “TIP-WID” is not input for the specified tool.
ri
Enabled when a “T.GROOVE” unit is selected.
ll
conditions
.A
Tool nose width when tool data is not input
N
(T.GROOVE) Note : US46 is enabled only when US1 bit 1 = 1.
US46
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-361
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-10 Machine parameter CALL MACRO (J)
Classification MACHINE Display title CALL MACRO
G-code macroprogram call

Setting Program
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 No.9 No.10 Unit Conditions Description
range type
J29 J33 J37
Work number of
100009590 100009599 100009401 0 to
J1 J5 J9 J13 J17 J21 J25 — M, E Immediate the program to be
(Fixed (Fixed (Fixed 999999999
called
value) value) value)
The G-code
number to be used
for program call
.
J30 J34 J38
d
136 137 130 Note :
ve
J2 J6 J10 J14 J18 J22 J26 — 0 to 999 M, E Immediate
(Fixed (Fixed (Fixed Not possible to
er
value) value) value) set G-codes
s
re
whose uses are
predefined.
ts
J31 J35 J39
gh
Calling type
1 1 2
J3 J7 J11 J15 J19 J23 J27 — 0 to 3 M, E Immediate 0: M98 2: G66
ri
(Fixed (Fixed (Fixed
1: G65 3: G66.1
value) value) value)
ll
.A
J4 J8 J12 J16 J20 J24 J28 J32 J36 J40 — — — — Invalid
N
O
TI
Setting Program
60
A range type
R
40
0 to Work number of
PO
J265 J269 J273 J277 J281 J285 J289 J293 J297 J301 — M, E Immediate the program to be
29
999999999 called
R
o.
The G-code
O
N
number to be used
C
for program call

al
Note :
ri
ZA
J266 J270 J274 J278 J282 J286 J290 J294 J298 J302 — 0 to 999 M, E Immediate
Se
Not possible to
A
set G-codes
IM
whose uses are

predefined.
K
Calling type
ZA
J267 J271 J275 J279 J283 J287 J291 J295 J299 J303 — 0 to 3 M, E Immediate 0: M98 2: G66
A
1: G65 3: G66.1
M
YA
3
01
Setting Program
range type
)2
0 to Work number of
(c
999999999 called
ht
The G-code
ig
number to be used
yr
for program call

op
Note :
C
Not possible to
set G-codes
whose uses are
predefined.
Calling type
1: G65 3: G66.1
2-362
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Setting Program
range type
0 to Work number of
999999999 called
The G-code
number to be used
for program call
Note :
Not possible to
set G-codes
whose uses are
d .
predefined.
ve
Calling type
er
s
1: G65 3: G66.1
re
ts
gh
ri
Setting Program
range type
ll
.A
0 to Work number of
N
999999999 called
O
The G-code
TI
number to be used
60
A for program call

R
40
Note :
PO
29
Not possible to
R
o.
set G-codes
O
N
whose uses are

C
predefined.
al
K
ri
Calling type
ZA
M, E Immediate 0: M98 2: G66

Se
J387 J391 J395 J399 J403 J407 J411 J415 J419 J423 — 0 to 3
1: G65 3: G66.1
A
IM
K
ZA
Setting Program
A
range type
M
0 to Work number of
YA
999999999 called
3
The G-code
01
number to be used
)2
for program call

Note :
(c
Not possible to
ht
set G-codes
ig
whose uses are

yr
predefined.
op
Calling type
C
1: G65 3: G66.1
2-363
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
M-code macroprogram call

Setting Program
No. 1 No .2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 Unit Conditions Description
range type
J41 J45 J49 J53 J57
0 to Work number of the
100000090 100000091 100000092 100000093 100000001 — M, E Immediate
999999999 program to be called
(Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value)
The M-code number to
be used for program call
J42 J46 J50 J54 J58 Note :
90 91 92 93 153 — 0 to 9999 M, E Immediate
(Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) Not possible to set
M-codes whose uses
.
are predefined.
d
ve
J43 J47 J51 J55 J59 Calling type
er
0 0 0 0 0 — 0 to 3 M, E Immediate 0: M98 2: G66
1: G65 3: G66.1
s
re
J44 J48 J52 J56 J60 Parameter for system
ts
0 0 0 0 0 — — — — internal setting
Setting prohibited
gh
ri
ll
Setting Program
.A
No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 No. 9 No. 10 Unit Conditions Description
range type
N
J61
O
100000002 J65 J69 J73 J77 — M, E Immediate
TI
(Fixed value)
60
A The M-code number to

R
40

PO
29
J62 Note :
154 J66 J70 J74 J78 — 0 to 9999 M, E Immediate
R
o.
Not possible to set

O
(Fixed value)
N
M-codes whose uses

C
are predefined.
al
K
ri
ZA
J63 Calling type

Se
0 J67 J71 J75 J79 — 0 to 3 M, E Immediate 0: M98 2: G66

A
(Fixed value) 1: G65 3: G66.1

IM
J64
0 J68 J72 J76 J80 — — — — Invalid
K
(Fixed value)
ZA
A
M
Setting Program
YA
range type
3
J145 J149 J153 J157 J161 J165 J169 J173 J177 J181 — M, E Immediate
program to be called
01
999999999
)2

(c
Note :
ht
Not possible to set
ig
M-codes whose uses

yr
are predefined.
op
Calling type
C
1: G65 3: G66.1
2-364
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Setting Program
No.21 No.22 No.23 No.24 No.25 No.26 No.27 No.28 No.29 No.30 Unit range type
Conditions Description

J473 J477 J481 J485 J489 J493 J497 J501 J505 J509 — M, E Immediate
Note :
Not possible to set
M-codes whose uses
are predefined.
.
Calling type
d
ve
1: G65 3: G66.1
er
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-365
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Setting prohibited
—
J89
to
J107
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
When updating the model with the SAFETY SHIELD function at power-on,
gh
if “model update completion check interval (300 ms) * the number of
retrials” counting from the start of update is exceeded, it will be regarded
ri
as a failure in model update and alarm 1106 SAFETY SHIELD FAILURE
ll
Maximum number of retrials to update the (3, , ) will be output.
.A
model with the SAFETY SHIELD function 0 or less : 50 times
N
J108 1 or above : The setting value (J108) is regarded as the number of
O
TI
retrials.
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
R
o.
Unit Times
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-366
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side or the NC
tailstock position with respect to the machine zero point of the upper turret.
Use BA79 to BA86 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 2.
 Setting the chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side
Machine zero point
of the upper turret
J111 J109
d.
ve
er
Barrier setup chuck reference position 1 on
s
J110
re
the No. 2 spindle side
J109 Barrier setup NC tailstock position
ts
to
gh
J112
J112
ri
ll
.A
 Setting the NC tailstock position
N
Machine zero point
of the upper turret
O
TI
60
A J111
R
40
PO
29
J110
R
J109
o.
O
N
Program type M, E
al
ri
ZA
Se
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in J112

A

IM
Set the chuck reference position 2 on the No. 2 spindle side with respect
K
to the machine zero point of the upper turret.

ZA
Use BA79 to BA86 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 2.
A
Machine zero point

M
of the upper turret

Barrier setup chuck reference position 2 on
YA
J113 the No. 2 spindle side

3
to J115 J113
01
J116
)2
J114
(c
ht
Program type M, E
ig
yr
J116
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
op

C
2-367
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the ID number of the barrier-setting and barrier-cancelling

M-codes to be used for barrier teaching function.
J119: Barrier-setting M-code to be used for barrier teaching

(If a value other than 1 - 999 is set, the value will be regarded as
Barrier-setting/cancelling M-code to be 846.)
used for barrier teaching
J120: Barrier-cancelling M-code to be used for barrier teaching
J119
(If a value other than 1 - 999 is set, the value will be regarded as
J120 847.)
d .
ve
Program type M, E
er
s
Unit —
re
ts
gh
Amount of offset for height axis rotational center offset (K124, K128) of the
rotary axis for the tool
ri
<If the first rotary axis rotates for tool control>
ll
.A
Set the amount of offset for the distance (K124) from the rotational center
of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the direction of the height
N
Amount of offset for height axis rotational
O
axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite
center offset (K124, K128) of the rotary axis
TI
side).
60
for the tool (tool tip point control) A

* Height axis rotational center offset of the rotary axis at the tool side =
J121
R
40
K124 + J121
PO
29
<If the second rotary axis rotates for tool control>

o.
O
N
Set the amount of offset for the distance (K128) from the spindle holder
C
al
end in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the tool
K
Program type E
control rotary axis (at the tool side).
ri
ZA

Se
A
Unit 0.0001 mm K128 + J121

IM
Setting range — * This parameter can be altered by using system variable #6022.
K
Set the M codes for SPRINT control.

ZA
When parameter J124 = 0

A
M558: Start signal ON

M
M559: Start signal OFF

YA
M574: Enable signal ON

3
M575: Enable signal OFF

01
M576: Select signal ON

)2
M577: Select signal OFF

(c
M codes for SPRINT control [Option]

ht
When parameter J124 ≠ 0

J124
ig
M [parameter J124 setting value]: Start signal ON

yr
M [parameter J124 setting value + 1]: Start signal OFF

op
M [parameter J124 setting value + 2]: Enable signal ON

C
M [parameter J124 setting value + 3]: Enable signal OFF

M [parameter J124 setting value + 4]: Select signal ON
M [parameter J124 setting value + 5]: Select signal OFF
Program type —
Note :
Conditions Immediate Set the first M code number from which six consecutive unused M codes
Unit — are available.
2-368
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the delay time before actually turning the enable signal ON/OFF after
the execution of the M code for turning the SPRINT control enable signal
ON/OFF.
SPRINT control enable signal ON/OFF J125: Enable signal ON delay time
delay time [Option] J126: Enable signal OFF delay time
J125
J126
d .
ve
Program type —
er
s
Unit ms
re
ts
gh
Set the device number that outputs the SPRINT control start signal.
ri
ll
Note :
.A
1. A decimal number must be set with this parameter. Convert the
SPRINT control start signal assigned
N
assigned device number (hexadecimal) into a decimal and set the
device [Option]
O
decimal number.
TI
J127 Example :
60
A
When this is assigned to device Y650:
R
40
PO
Setting value: 1616 (decimal)

29
2. If "0" is set, the signal is not output.

R
Program type —
o.
O
N
C
al
Unit Decimal number

K
ri
ZA

Se
Set the device number that outputs the SPRINT control select signal.
IM
K
Note :
ZA
SPRINT control select signal assigned 1. A decimal number must be set with this parameter. Convert the
device [Option] assigned device number (hexadecimal) into a decimal and set the
A
M
decimal number.
J128
YA
Example :
When this is assigned to device Y650:
3
Setting value: 1616 (decimal)

01
Program type —
2. If "0" is set, the signal is not output.
)2
(c
Unit Decimal number

ht

ig
yr
Set the distance from the rotation center of the lower turret to the end face
of the chuck on the No. 1 turning spindle, with the Z-axis located at the
op
machine zero point position.

C
Z-axis stroke for the teaching of lower turret Chuck end face
tool Reference workpiece zero point
J130
Lower turret machine

Program type M, E zero point
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in J130
2-369
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the ID number of the M-code for making the interference check
function valid/invalid.
J131: INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function invalid

Setting the M-code for making the J132: Material model cutting invalid
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function J133: Machine interference check invalid
J131 valid/invalid during automatic operation J134: Machine interference check valid
to J135: Material model interference check invalid
J140 J136: Material model interference check valid
J137: Fixture model interference check invalid
J138: Fixture model interference check valid
.
Program type M, E J139: Tool model interference check invalid
d
ve
Conditions Immediate J140: Tool model interference check valid
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Select whether the M-code registered in parameter J131–J138 to make
gh
the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during
automatic operation is to be output from the NC to the PLC ladder.
ri
0: Invalid (No output to the PLC ladder)
ll
.A
1: Valid (Output to the PLC ladder)
Selecting whether to output the M-code for
N
making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY 76543210
O
TI
SHIELD function valid/invalid during M-code registered in J131
60
automatic operation A
J141 M-code registered in J132
R
40
PO
M-code registered in J133

29

R
o.

N
C
al

K
Program type M, E
ri
ZA

Se
A
Unit M-code registered in J138

—
IM

K
Select whether the M-code registered in parameter J139 and J140 to

ZA
make the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during

A
automatic operation is to be output from the NC to the PLC ladder.

M
Selecting whether to output the M-code for 0: Invalid (No output to the PLC ladder)
YA
making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY

1: Valid (Output to the PLC ladder)
SHIELD function valid/invalid during
J142
76543210
3
automatic operation
01
(bit 0)
(bit 1) M-code registered in J139
)2
(c

Program type M, E
ht
ig
yr
Unit —
op
Setting range 0, 1
C
2-370
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Selects whether to output the M codes for temporarily disabling/canceling

the disabled status of INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD in the automatic
operation, which are registered in parameters J550/J551, from the NC to
Output selection of M codes for temporarily the PLC ladder.
disabling/canceling disabled status of 0: Disabled (Not output to PLC ladder)
J142 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in
1: Enabled (Output M code registered in relevant parameter to PLC
automatic operation
(bit 2) ladder)
(bit 3) 76543210
M code registered in J550
.
Program type M, E
d
M code registered in J551
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Used in the manual programming unit and subprogram unit (EIA/ISO)
gh
1: Cancel
ri
Method to handle the tool offset data when
ll
the program is returned to a MAZATROL
.A
program with the tool offset function set
N
J143 valid in an EIA/ISO subprogram
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Select the reference of the value to be input when teaching the tool nose
ri
ZA
Se
position of the tool in the lower turret.

A
0: Reference workpiece zero point

IM
Selection of the lower turret tool teaching 1: Parameter J130: Z-axis stroke for teaching
K
data input method

ZA
J143
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
Conditions
01
Immediate
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
In reference point return operation, execution of tool change command

ig
waits or does not wait the completion of middle-point return

yr
0 : Do not wait
In reference point return operation (G28,
op
G30, G30.1), tool change command is 1 : Wait

C
executed with or without waiting the

J143 completion of middle-point return
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-371
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
—
J143
(bit 3)
Program type —
.
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
J143
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al

ri
ZA
Se
0: G23 (Stroke check before movement OFF)

A
1: G22 (Stroke check before movement ON)

IM

K
(G23/G22)
ZA
J143
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht

ig
yr
op
—
C
J143
(bit 7)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-372
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Tool interference check type on the TOOL DATA, TOOL LAYOUT and
VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT displays
0: Magazine-type tool interference check
1: TOOL HIVE-type tool interference check
Tool interference check type
J144
(bit 0)
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Overwriting of tool life data (maximum allowable wear, life time, use time,
gh
life count, use count) when parameter L57 is set to 1 (tool data overwriting
ri
during automatic operation valid)
ll
0: Possible
.A
Tool life data overwrite during automatic
1: Impossible
operation
N
J144
O
TI
(bit 2)
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 0, 1
K
ri
ZA
For details, refer to the explanation for M-code macroprogram call.

Se
A
IM
K

ZA
J145
to
A
M
J184
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Workpiece measurement offset (X-axis offset for OD (both sides), X-axis

ig
offset for protrusion width)

yr
op
Workpiece measurement offset (X-axis

C
offset for OD (both sides), X-axis offset for

protrusion width)
J235
Program type M
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
Setting range 99999999
2-373
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Workpiece measurement offset (Y-axis offset for OD (both sides), Y-axis

offset for protrusion width)
Workpiece measurement offset (Y-axis

offset for OD (both sides), Y-axis offset for
protrusion width)
J236
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
ts
Workpiece measurement offset (X-axis offset for ID (both sides), X-axis
gh
offset for groove width)
ri
ll
Workpiece measurement offset (X-axis
.A
offset for ID (both sides), X-axis offset for
groove width)
N
J237
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N

al
Workpiece measurement offset (Y-axis offset for ID (both sides), Y-axis

ri
ZA
Se
offset for groove width)

A
IM
Workpiece measurement offset (Y-axis

offset for ID (both sides), Y-axis offset for
K
groove width)
ZA
J238
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

99999999
(c
Setting range
ht
Workpiece measurement offset (Z-axis offset for protrusion width, offset

ig
for ID protrusion width)

yr
op
Workpiece measurement offset (Z-axis

C
offset for protrusion width, offset for ID

protrusion width)
J239
Program type M
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-374
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Workpiece measurement offset (Z-axis offset for groove width, offset for
ID groove)
Workpiece measurement offset (Z-axis

offset for groove width, offset for ID groove)
J240
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
ts
For any two axes that run on the same slideway, the maximum distance
gh
that those axes can be separated from each other is set to prevent
damage to the way covers. If the two axes are going to be separated
ri
beyond the value set for this parameter, a software limit alarm is output to
ll
stop the axis movement. Using parameters J251 to J254, the maximum
.A
separating distances can be set for up to four axes.
N
O
TI
Set the machine coordinate of the check target axis, set at parameters
60
L117 to L120, existing at the permissible most separated position from the
A
check reference axis, set at parameters L113 to L116, which is located at
R
40
Software limit relative position check –

PO
the home position.

29
Limit distance in the separating direction

Example :
R
J251: 1st set of axes

o.
In the example shown below, if the W-axis and the Z2-axis are defined
N
J251 J252: 2nd set of axes

C
as the check reference axis and the check target axis, respectively, set
al
l J253: 3rd set of axes

K
the machine coordinate of the Z2-axis existing at the permissible most

ri
ZA
J254: 4th set of axes separated position from the W-axis, which is located at the home
J254
Se
position. If zero is entered, the checking function in the separating

A
direction will be invalid. Note that the check is possible only for the
IM
combination of NC axes.
K
ZA
Machine coordinate
W=0
A
M
Z2-axis
YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
Conditions Immediate J251 Lower turret W-axis

(c
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in machine zero point machine zero point

ht

ig
yr
op
C
2-375
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Used to select the mode of operation when an arithmetic operation is

specified without [ ] after a G code.
0: No alarm
1: Alarm
Example : (G code command pattern)

[ When bit 0 of parameter J261 is set to 0 ]
G70 – 1 ······· Handled as G69
G68 + 1······· Handled as G69
d.
ve
Arithmetic operation after G code G1 – 70 ······· Stop with alarm displayed (808 MIS-SET G CODE)
er
G [70 – 1] ···· Handled as G69
J261
s
re
(bit 0)
[ When bit 0 of parameter J261 is set to 1 ]
ts
G70 – 1 ······· Stop with alarm displayed (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT)
gh
G68 + 1······· Stop with alarm displayed (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT)
ri
G1 – 70 ······· Stop with alarm displayed (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT)
ll
.A
G [70 – 1] ···· Handled as G69
N
O
TI
60
Program type E Note : A

R
40
Regardless of this parameter setting, the alarm 808 MIS-SET G CODE

PO
occurs when the calculation inside [ ] results in a negative value.

29
Unit —
R
o.
Setting range 0, 1
N
Initial point relay setting for point-machining TPC

al
0: Hidden
ri
ZA
Se
1: Displayed
A
Initial point relay setting for point-machining

IM
TPC
J261
K
ZA
(bit 3)
A
M
Program type M
YA
3
Unit —
01
Setting range 0, 1
)2
(c
For details, refer to the explanation for G-code macroprogram call.

ht
ig
yr
op

J265
C
to
J424
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-376
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
For details, refer to the explanation for G-code macroprogram call.

J433
to
J472
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
For details, refer to the explanation for M-code macroprogram call.
gh
ri
ll
.A
J473
N
to
O
TI
J512
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri

ZA
Se
Setting prohibited
A
IM
K
—
J513
ZA
to
A
M
J530
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-377
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Amount of correction for height axis rotational center offset (K233, K237)
of the tool control rotary axis
Set the amount of offset for the distance (K233) from the rotational center
of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the direction of the height
axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite
Amount of correction for height axis side).
rotational center offset (K233, K237) of the * Height axis rotational center offset of the rotary axis at the tool side =
tool control rotary axis (tool tip point control) K233 + J531
J531
d .
ve
er
Set the amount of offset for the distance (K237) from the spindle holder
s
end in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the tool
re
control rotary axis (at the tool side).
ts
gh
Program type E K237 + J531
ri
Conditions After stop of movement * This parameter can be altered by using system variable #6022.
ll
Unit 0.0001 mm
.A
Setting range —
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
—
J533
R
o.
to
N
J540
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Program type —
A
Conditions —
IM
Unit —
K
Setting range —
ZA
Specifies the M code numbers for temporarily disabling/canceling the

A
disabled status of interference check by INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD

M
in the automatic operation.

YA
M code setting for temporarily J550: Temporarily disable the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function
disabling/canceling disabled status of
3
in automatic operation
01
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in

J551: Cancel disabled status of the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
J550 automatic operation
)2
function in automatic operation

J551
(c
ht
ig
Program type E
yr
op
Unit —
C
2-378
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-11 Machine parameter MEASURE (K)
Classification MACHINE Display title MEASURE
Distance from the center of the C-axis (spindle) to the nose of the tool
Z
Tool
Rotational radius of the C-axis
K1
d .
K1
ve
X
er
Spindle
s
center
re
K1
Program type E
ts
gh
ri
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
Y
ll
.A
The minimum rotational angle of the C-axis at shaping block connections
N
Rotational angle of the C-axis at block connections: 
O
The C-axis does not rotate if l  l < K2.
TI
60
A
R
40
90°
Minimum rotational angle
PO
29

K2
R
K2
o.
180°
N
0° If –K2    K2,
C
C-axis does not rotate.

al
–K2
ri
ZA
Program type E
Se
IM
270°
Unit 0.001° –
K

ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-379
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set identification number of the shaping control axis.

Specify the identification number of the shaping control axis as follows
according to the value set at parameter K105 bit 6 (handling of the
shaping control axis)
Example :
Data unset axis Shaping axis
X Y Z B C V
M1
M2
d .
・
ve
Identification number of the shaping control ・
er
axis
s
When there is an axis for which data is not set on the MACHINE
re
PARAMETER display (“FEED VEL.” (M), “TIME CONST.” (N), etc.),
K3
ts
where the axis data is set, as shown below, set the identification number
gh
of the shaping axis as follows:
ri
If the value set at parameter K105 bit 6 is:
ll
“0”, set “6”.
.A
Counting of the axis number starts with “1” and the axis for which the
data is not set is not included when counting the axis number.
N
O
“1”, set “7”.
TI
Counting of the axis number starts with “1” and the axis for which the
60
data is not set is included when counting the axis number.

A
R
40
PO

29
Set the type of the axis which has been set on this parameter to the
R
o.
rotational axis (M17 bit 4 = 1).

O
N
Unit —
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Specify the axis that moves vertically

Se
1 : The X-axis acts as the unbalanced axis.

IM
2 : The Y-axis acts as the unbalanced axis.

4 : The Z-axis acts as the unbalanced axis.
K
Unbalanced axis
ZA
K7
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Set the waiting time before the speed attainment signal is turned ON after
ig
the specified spindle speed is 100% reached during override variable

yr
thread cutting.
op
C
Waiting time for speed attainment ON

during override variable thread cutting
K8
Program type M, E
Unit ms
2-380
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
K10
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set this parameter to change the display language.
gh
Setting Language Setting Language
ri
0 English 12 Portuguese
ll
.A
1 Japanese 13 Danish
N
2 German 14 Czech
O
3 French 15 Turkish
TI
4 Italian 16 Polish
60
5
A Spanish 17 Romanian
R
40
Selection of language to be displayed

PO
6 Norwegian 18 Hungarian
29
K11 7 Swedish 19 Russian

R
o.
8 Finnish 20 Slovak
N
Chinese Chinese
al
9 21
K
(traditional character) (simplified character)

ri
ZA
10 Dutch 22 Slovenian
Se
11 Korean 25 Bulgarian
IM
K
Program type — Note :

ZA
Conditions Immediate To display Japanese characters, traditional and/or simplified Chinese

A
characters, Korean characters, Russian characters, Slovenian

M
Unit — characters, or Bulgarian characters the appropriate OS (display

YA
Setting range 0 to 22, 25 language) must be installed in your personal computer.

Fixed value (0)
3
01
)2
(c
—
ht
ig
K12
yr
op
C
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-381
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
1. Workpiece measurement
Sensor path
fa
K13
Measurement skip feed rate (X-axis, Z-axis)
Workpiece
K13
Measurement stroke (K19)
fa: Measurement approach
Program type M
.
speed (K14)
d
NM211-00233
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
2. Tool tip measurement
re
Tool path
ts
gh
ri
K13
ll
Measurement approach speed (X-axis,
.A
Z-axis) Sensor
N
K14
O
Measurement stroke (K20)
TI
60
A NM211-00234
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions Immediate (K19, K20)

R
o.
Unit mm/min
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Sensor path
A
IM
[1]
Measurement skip speed (C-axis)
K
ZA
[3]
K15 [1], [3] : Rapid feed
A
[2] [2] : Measurement approach

[4] Workpiece
M
speed (K16)
YA
[4] : K15
Program type M
3
01
NM211-00235
)2
Unit °/min
(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
Measurement approach speed (C-axis)
K16
Program type M
Unit °/min
2-382
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
 With workpiece measurement

1. Tool compensation will be applied in the cases below.
 1 – 2 1 – 2
100  K18  Compensation data  100  K17
 1 – 2 1 – 2
 100  K17  Compensation data   100  K18
2. Tool compensation will not be applied in the cases below.
Specification of measuring tolerance
(lower limit)  1 – 2 1 – 2
100  K17 > Compensation data >  100  K17
K17
.
3. Alarm will be caused in cases below.
d
ve
 1 – 2
Compensation data > 100  K18
s er
 1 – 2
re
 100  K18 > Compensation data
ts
where 1 = Tolerance upper limit
gh
Program type M, E 2 = Tolerance lower limit (Specified in program)
ri
ll

.A
Unit % With tool measurement
1. Tool compensation will be applied in the cases below.
N
O
 
100  K18  Compensation data  100  K17
TI
60
 A 
 100  K17  Compensation data   100  K18
R
40
PO
29
2. Tool compensation will not be applied in the cases below.

R
 
o.
100  K17  Compensation data >  100  K17

N
C
al
Specification of measuring tolerance 3. Alarm will be caused in cases below.

K
ri
(upper limit)
ZA

Compensation data > 100  K18
Se
K18
A

IM
 100  K18  Compensation data

K
: Tolerance (tool length/X-axis direction or tool

ZA
radius/Z-axis direction)
A
(Specified in program)
M
YA
Program type M, E
Note :
3
Judgment against the tolerance takes place in tool measurement only

01
Unit % when L106 bit 6 = 1.

)2

(c
ht
a
ig
a : Approach point
yr
b : Measurement start point

Measurement stroke for workpiece c : Measurement point
op
measurement b (target data)

C
d : Measurement end point

K19 K19
Measurement region
c
Program type M
K19
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in d NM211-00259
2-383
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
TOOL EYE TOOL EYE

reference reference
point #2 point #1
K20
Measurement stroke for tool nose
measurement K20 K20
K20
K20
Program type M
d .
ve
Conditions Immediate TOOL EYE TOOL EYE
reference reference
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in point #4 point #3
s
re
ts
During approach operation to measurement start point, if touch sensor is
gh
actuated, the C-axis will rotate by angle determined by the measurement
object shape angle and setting value K21.
ri
Example : CW programmed as measurement direction
ll
Coefficient to determine rotation angle
.A
when retrying measurement C reference
face
N
ON : Measurement object shape
K21
O
angle
TI
 :  × K21/100
60
A
R
40
Program type M C-axis rotation by angle

PO
  in this direction
29

R
o.
Unit % NM211-00261
N

al
K
ri
When touch sensor is actuated before reaching target point in C offset

ZA
Se
measurement, set retry frequency.

A
When K22 is set to N (N = 0 to 255), measurement alarm will be indicated

IM
when touch sensor is actuated before reaching measurement target point

Measurement retry frequency when retrying in (N+1)th retry operation.
K
reference face C measurement

ZA
K22
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit Times
(c

ht
Specify the number of times the workpiece measurement is to be retried if

ig
a measurement error occurs.

yr
op
Retry frequency for workpiece

C
measurement
K23
Program type M
Unit Times
2-384
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

Setting prohibited
—
K24
to
K28
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Delays master/slave axis position matching during automatic error
gh
correction (parameter K103 bit 1 = 0).
ri
ll
Simultaneous control:
.A
Delay counter for automatic correction of
synchronizing errors
N
K29
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
Conditions Immediate Note : The delay time will be 3 seconds if 0 is set.

R
o.
Unit 1.7 ms
N

al
K
ri
Specify the approach speed and pre-measuring speed for laser tool length
ZA
Se
K30 Approach speed for laser tool length (diameter) measurement.

A
measurement
IM
K31 Approach speed for laser tool

diameter measurement
K
K30 K32 Pre-measuring speed for laser tool

ZA
length measurement
to K33 Pre-measuring speed for laser tool
A
M
K33 diameter measurement

YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit mm/min / 0.1 in/min

(c

ht
Specify the pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool length (diameter)
ig
measurement.
yr
op
K34 Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser

tool length measurement
C
K35 Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser

K34 tool diameter measurement
K35
Program type M, E
–1
Unit min
2-385
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Setting prohibited
K36
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
The upper-limit value of the feed rates available while the external
gh
deceleration signal is ON
ri
Feedrate
ll
.A
External deceleration speed
N
K37
O
TI
60
K37 A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
External
Conditions After stop of movement ON
deceleration
R
o.
signal
O
Unit mm/min
N

al
K
ri
The work number of the macroprogram to be called during S-code

ZA
Se
macroprogram appointment
A
(Programming of “S0000;” causes execution of the macroprogram whose

IM
work number is set using this parameter.)

Work number called during S-code
K
ZA
K38
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Conditions Immediate Note : This parameter is valid only when bit 2 of parameter K105 is 1.
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
The work number of the macroprogram to be called during T-code

ig
yr
(Programming of “T0000;” causes execution of the macroprogram whose

op
work number is set using this parameter.)

Work number called during T-code
C
K39
Program type M, E
Conditions Immediate Note : This parameter is valid only when bit 3 of parameter K105 is 1.
Unit —
2-386
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The work number of the macroprogram to be called during macroprogram

appointment using the second auxiliary function
Work number called during second auxiliary

function macroprogram appointment
K40
d .
1. This parameter is valid only when bit 4 of parameter K105 is 1.
ve
2. See the description of parameter K56 for details of the addresses
er
Unit —
available with the second auxiliary function.
s
re
ts
The feed rate during axis movement by G31 (skip function)
gh
If the same block as that of G31 contains an F command, then that feed
rate becomes valid.
ri
ll
.A
G31 skipping speed
N
K41
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit mm/min
N

al
K
ri
The feed rate during axis movement by G31.1 (multi-step skip function)
ZA
Se
If the same block as that of G31.1 contains an F command, then that feed
A
rate becomes valid.

IM
G31.1 skipping speed

K
ZA
K42
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01

)2
Unit mm/min
(c

ht
ig
yr
rate becomes valid.

op
C
K43
Program type E
Unit mm/min
2-387
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
rate becomes valid.
K44
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
re
ts
The feed rate during axis movement by G31.4 (skip function)
gh
ri
rate becomes valid.
ll
.A
N
K45
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit mm/min
N

al
K
ri
Set the excessive pressing error spread (the amount of drooping).

ZA
Se
A
IM
Excessive pressing error spread

K
(Amount of drooping)
ZA
K46
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm
(c

ht
Specify the M-code that is output at the start and end of measurement in
ig
the external pattern of workpiece measurement unit.

yr
Measurement start: M-code of a “value set at parameter K47” is output.

op
Measurement end: M-code of a “value set at parameter K47 + 1” is output.

M-code for external workpiece
C
measurement
* If the set value is out of the range, this parameter is invalid. (Setting
K47
range: 100 to 998)
Program type M
Unit —
2-388
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Monitoring based on acceleration

1: Monitoring based on speed
2: Ignoring alarms
Spindle FB alarm detection method
K48
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the first number of the M-codes to be used for the M-code standby
gh
function.
ri
Example :
ll
To use M950 to M995 as the standby M-codes set “950” in K49 and “46”
.A
First number of the standby M-codes
in K50.
N
K49
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
Set the total number of M-codes to be used for the M-code standby
ZA
Se
function.
A
IM
Example :
To use M950 to M995 as the standby M-codes set “950” in K49 and “46”
Total number of the standby M-codes
K
in K50.
ZA
K50
A
Note : If “0” is set, the M-code standby function will be invalid.

M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c

ht
Set the M-code to be output if workpiece measurement results in an error

ig
and is to be retried.
yr
Note : If “0” is set, this function will be invalid.

op
C
M-code during workpiece measurement M-code output

retry operation
K51
If workpiece measurement results
in an error and is to be retried
Program type M, E
Conditions After stop of movement M-code output
Unit —
2-389
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Setting prohibited
K52
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set the type of vocal output language.
gh
Setting Language Setting Language
ri
0 English 11 Korean
ll
.A
1 Japanese 12 Portuguese
2 German 13 Danish
N
O
3 French 14 Czech
TI
4 Italian 15 Turkish
60
Language selection (vocal output) A

5 Spanish 16 Polish
R
40
6 Norwegian 17 Rumanian
K53
PO
29
7 Swedish 18 Hungarian
R
8 Finnish 19 Russian
o.
O
N
Chinese (traditional
C
9 20 Slovakian
character)
al
10 Dutch 21 Chinese (simplified character)

ri
ZA
Se
Note :
A
Program type M, E
IM
Output will be in English (0) if the selected value is for a language not
Conditions Immediate supported.
K
Unit —
ZA
A
M
Set the vocal output sound level.

YA
Note : Entry of “0” means no sound level.

3
01
Sound level (vocal output)

)2
(c
K54
ht
ig
yr
Program type M, E
op
C
Unit —
2-390
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
A vocal warning will be output if the value of the spindle load meter
exceeds the percentage value set in K55.
Warning reference value (vocal output)
K55
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
Select the address name of the second auxiliary function from among the
gh
following three types:
ri
Address name Setting (HEX)
ll
Name of second auxiliary function
.A
Invalid 0
A 41
N
K56
O
B 42
TI
C 43
60
Program type E A
R
40
Note :
PO
29
Do not use the same address for the axis name and the second auxiliary
Unit —
function.
R
o.
Hexadecimal two-digit
N
Setting range
C
0, 41, 42, 43
al
This parameter is used during S-code macroprogram appointment to

ri
ZA
select the method of calling the macroprogram whose work number has
Se
been set using the K38 parameter.

A
IM
Type of S-code macroprogram appointment Setting Calling method

K
call 0 M98 P

ZA
K57 1 G65 P

A
2 G66 P
M
3 G66.1 P
YA
Program type M, E
Note : Valid only when bit 2 of K105 is 1.
3
01
Unit —
)2
(c
This parameter is used during T-code macroprogram appointment to

ht
select the method of calling the macroporgram whose work number has
ig
been set using the K39 parameter.

yr
op
Type of T-code macroprogram appointment Setting Calling method

C
call 0 M98 P

K58 1 G65 P
2 G66 P
3 G66.1 P
Program type M, E
Conditions Immediate Note : Valid only when bit 3 of K105 is 1.
Unit —
2-391
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
This parameter is used during the second auxiliary function macroprogram

appointment to select the method of calling the macroporgram whose work
number has been set using the K40 parameter.
Type of second auxiliary function Setting Calling method

macroprogram appointment call 0 M98 P
K59 1 G65 P
2 G66 P
3 G66.1 P
Program type M, E
d .
Note : Valid only when bit 4 of K105 is 1.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Fixed value (4)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
K60
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Fixed value (1)

ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
K61
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Fixed value (1)

ig
yr
op
C
K62
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-392
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (1)
K63
Program type —
.
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Fixed value (2)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
K64
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Fixed value (1)

ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
K65
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Fixed value (1)

ig
yr
op
C
K66
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-393
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value (1)
K67
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Coordinate system with reference to which the offset amounts are to be
gh
used in tool length offset for the selected machining surface.
(For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools)
ri
ll
Coordinate system in which the amount of
.A
tool offset becomes valid (for five-face 1: Workpiece coordinate system
machining by angular tools)
N
K68
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Speed clamping method for polar coordinate interpolation

ri
ZA
Se
0: Virtual axis clamp:

A
C-axis speed in /min specified by M1/M3 is converted into mm/min.

IM
Speed clamping method for polar Actual axis clamp:

K
coordinate interpolation C-axis rapid feed or cutting feed rate is clamped to M3.
ZA
K68 1: Virtual axis clamp:

A
(bit 1) The X-axis speed specified by M1/M3 is used for the C-axis.
M
Actual axis clamp:

YA
C-axis rapid feed rate is clamped to M1 and the cutting feed rate is
Program type M, E
clamped to M3.
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
Fixed value (0)

ig
yr
op
—
C
K68
(bit 3)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-394
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (0)
—
K68
(bit 4)
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
0 : Invalid
ts
gh
1 : Valid
ri
ll
Override/dryrun speed valid/invalid when
.A
the G31 command is issued
K68
N
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Invalid
ri
ZA
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
Whether or not all the barrier cancel data in

the program is to be cleared by executing
K
the MMS unit in the MAZATROL program

K68
ZA
(bit 7)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
In the execution of the G31.1 command, whether or not SKIP-2 is used as

ht
the skip signal:

ig
yr
0: Not used as the skip signal

op
1: Used as the skip signal

G31.1 skip condition SKIP-2
C
K69
(bit 0)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-395
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
In the execution of the G31.1 command, whether or not SKIP-10 is used

as the skip signal:
K69
(bit 1)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
ts
the skip signal:
gh
ri
ll
.A
K69
N
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
Program type E
A
R
40
PO

29
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al

K
ri
ZA
as the skip signal:

Se

A
IM

K
K69
ZA
(bit 3)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c

ht
the skip signal:

ig

yr

op

C
K69
(bit 4)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-396
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

as the skip signal:
K69
(bit 5)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
ts
the skip signal:
gh
ri
ll
.A
K69
N
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
Program type E
A
R
40
PO

29
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al

K
ri
ZA
as the skip signal:

Se

A
IM

K
K69
ZA
(bit 7)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c

ht
the skip signal:

ig

yr

op

C
K70
(bit 0)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-397
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

as the skip signal:
K70
(bit 1)
.
Program type E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
the skip signal:
ri
ll
.A
N
K70
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al

ri
ZA
as the skip signal:

Se

IM

K
K70
ZA
(bit 3)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c

ht
the skip signal:

ig

yr

op

C
K70
(bit 4)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-398
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

as the skip signal:
K70
(bit 5)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
the skip signal:
ri
ll
.A
K70
N
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al

ri
ZA
as the skip signal:

Se

IM

K
K70
ZA
(bit 7)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c

ht
the skip signal:

ig

yr

op

C
K71
(bit 0)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-399
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

as the skip signal:
K71
(bit 1)
.
Program type E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
the skip signal:
ri
ll
.A
N
K71
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al

ri
ZA
as the skip signal:

Se

IM

K
K71
ZA
(bit 3)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c

ht
the skip signal:

ig

yr

op

C
K71
(bit 4)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-400
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

as the skip signal:
K71
(bit 5)
.
Program type E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
the skip signal:
ri
ll
.A
N
K71
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al

ri
ZA
as the skip signal:

Se

IM

K
ZA
K71
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
76543210 (0: Invalid 1: Valid)

ig
yr
SKIP-2
op
SKIP-10
G31.4 skip conditions
C
SKIP-3
K72 SKIP-11
HR353
SKIP-5
SKIP-13
Program type E SKIP-6
SKIP-14
Unit —
Select the skip signal for the G31.4 command.
2-401
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210 (0: Invalid 1: Valid)
SKIP-2
G4 skip conditions SKIP-10 QX721
K73 SKIP-3
Select the skip signal for G4 command.

Program type E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the desired time from an emergency stop to the start of cutting off the
gh
contactor of the main power to the driving section during the execution of a
safety supervisory function when all-axis zero-speed confirmation is
ri
impossible.
ll
Emergency stop contactor cutoff time
.A
A contactor cutoff signal will be immediately output if all-axis zero-speed
(Safety supervisory function) confirmation is executable earlier than the set time.
N
K74
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit s
N
al
K
ri
Specify a remote I/O device that is to output a contactor

ZA
Se
activating/deactivating signal when the safety supervisory function is

A
executed.
IM
Contactor control output device 1

K
Note : The signal will not be output if “&0” is specified.

(Safety supervisory function)
ZA
K75
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c

ht
Specify another remote I/O device that is to output the contactor

ig
activating/deactivating signal when the safety supervisory function is

yr
executed.
op
Contactor control output device 2

C
Note : The signal will not be output if “&0” is specified.

K76
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-402
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Enter the device number of the remote I/O device to be activated to input a
door open/closed status signal. The device of the entered serial device
number will be reserved according to the particular setting of K78 (the
parameter for setting the number of door switches).
Door switch input device
Note : Door switch input will be invalid if “&0” is entered.
K77
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the number of doors for which the door open/closed status signal is to
gh
be output.
ri
ll
Number of door switches
.A
N
K78
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
Set the filtering time for the speed that is to be monitored in a servo-off
ZA
Se
status during safety speed monitoring.

A
IM
Supervisory speed filtering time during Note : Input of “0” means 200 ms.
servo-off
K
ZA

K79
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit 1.777 ms
(c

ht
A vocal warning will be output when the value of the load meter for servo
ig
axis control reaches or exceeds the percentage value set in K80.

yr
op
Warning reference value

C
(Vocal output)
K80
Program type M, E
Unit %
2-403
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
Timer for machining management
K81
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit ms
s
re
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
K82
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
Specify the maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal

ri
ZA
Se
expansion. In order to prevent eventual collision, the maximum amount

A
should not exceed the distance between software limit and mechanical
IM
end on any axis concerned.

Maximum amount of compensation for
K
workpiece thermal expansion Note :

ZA
1. If 0 is set here, compensation will not be made for workpiece thermal

K83 expansion.
A
M
2. This parameter is valid for machining centers with the capability of

YA
compensating for workpiece thermal expansion.

Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.00005 mm
(c

ht
Specify the maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal

ig
expansion in each interpolating cycle.

yr
If the compensation amount computed exceeds the maximum value (as

op
Maximum allowable amount of set with K84), compensation will be executed by dividing the interpolation
motion into multiple sections.
C
compensation for workpiece thermal

expansion in each interpolating cycle
Note :
K84
1. If 0 is set here, the amount is set to 0.001 mm.
2. This parameter is valid for machining centers with the capability of
compensating for workpiece thermal expansion.
Program type M, E
Unit 0.00005 mm
2-404
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
If the setting of K85 is from 1 to 300 ms, this setting will be used as the
linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the G32 threading block.
If the setting is outside the valid range, however, the normal linear
acceleration/deceleration time constant for G01 will be used.
Special linear acceleration/deceleration
time constant for threading
K85
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit ms
s
re
ts
Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
K87
N
to
O
TI
K89
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
The overriding value for return from the hole bottom during a synchronous
ZA
Se
tapping cycle
A
IM
Return override during synchronous tapping

K
ZA
K90
A
M
YA
Programmed × K90
feed rate 100
Program type E
3
01
Conditions After stop of movement MPL509

)2
Unit % Note : This parameter is valid only when bit 6 of F94 is 1.

(c

ht
Specify an alternative M-code for M96 when user macro interruption is

ig
valid.
yr
op
C
Alternative M-code for M96
K91
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-405
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify an alternative M-code for M97 when user macro interruption is

valid.
Alternative M-code for M97
K92
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Fixed value (2)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
K93
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
If [ATC STOP] does not need to be deselected to restart the automatic

ZA
Se
operation that has been stopped by tapping [ATC STOP], set this
A
parameter to “1” (only for applicable machines).

IM
Selection of whether or not the menu 0: [ATC STOP] is to be made invalid

function is to be made invalid after
K
operation has been stopped by [ATC 1: [ATC STOP] is not to be made invalid
ZA
K94 STOP]
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select indexing operation in measurement unit when the rotation position

ig
in index unit is blank.

yr
0: Move to the zero point.

op
1: Do not move.
C
Indexing in measurement unit

K94
(bit 1)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-406
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Selection for whether or not program editing is allowed on the EIA

MONITOR display when any of the multiple control systems is executing
automatic operation
0: Not allowed
Program editing on the EIA MONITOR
display during multi-system operation 1: Allowed
K94
(bit 2)
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
Command code to be displayed in the MDI window when [W SUB] is
ts
selected in the MDI mode
gh
0: G110B2
ri
1: G110Z[B]2
ll
W-axis command code selection for MDI
.A
mode
K94
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: Reset to the B-axis angle that is valid before measurement.

ri
ZA
Se
1: Hold the B-axis angle at the time of measurement.

A
* This parameter is valid only when the program is created in the WPC
IM
Indexing in cases where the next machining

is started without specifying an index unit scheme.
K
after a measurement unit has been

K94
ZA
executed
(bit 4)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
0: Displayed
ht
ig
1: Not displayed
yr
(A tool life alarm will be displayed.)

Display/No display of a block start interlock
op
* Only the alarm display is invalid while interlock remains valid.

alarm if tool life of a tool specified in the
C
block has expired Alarm 135 BLOCK START INTERLOCK is not displayed on the ALARM
K94 or ALARM HISTORY display.
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-407
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
Select whether the difference in angle between the

upper and lower turrets is to be incorporated into
the current C-axis position display of HD2.
0: Yes (Incorporated)
1: No (Not incorporated)
Fixed value (0)

Tool position compensation during T-command
.
execution
d
ve
0: Not performed
—
1: Performed
s er
K95 Coordinate system update during handle pulse
re
interrupt
ts
0: Not performed
gh
1: Performed
ri
Fixed value (0)
ll
Acceleration/deceleration time constant for handle
.A
pulse feed
N
0: Time constant for cutting feed
O
1: No time constant
TI
Software limits for G30 execution
60
Program type M, E
A 0: Invalid
R
40
1: Valid
PO
29
In-position check
R
Unit — 0: Invalid
o.
1: Valid
N

C
al
76543210
ri
ZA
G0 command in-position check

Se
0: Check
IM
1: Non-check
K
Timing of manual free feed finish signal

ZA
0: Smoothing
1: Distribution finish (equivalent to DEN)
A
M
— Fixed value (0)

YA
K96 Axis/Cutting interlock alarm display

0: Valid
3
01
1: Invalid
)2
Suppression of lost motion in modes other than the

(c
G1 command mode
ht
0: Valid
ig
1: Invalid
yr
Program type M, E Fixed value (0)

op

Fixed value (0)
C
Unit —
Fixed G0 inclination
2-408
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the name of the axis to be made parallel with respect to the
direction of the spindle when the angle of the B-axis is 0 degrees.
B-axis misalignment correction

Name of parallel axis
K97
Program type M, E
d .
Note : If 0 is entered, the axis will be regarded as the Z-axis (&5A).
ve
er
Unit Hexadecimal, two digits
s
re
ts
Specify the name of the axis to be made orthogonal with respect to the
gh
direction of the spindle when the angle of the B-axis is 0 degrees.
ri
ll
B-axis misalignment correction
.A
Name of orthogonal axis
N
K98
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
Conditions Immediate Note : If 0 is entered, the axis will be regarded as the X-axis (&58).
R
o.

N

al
K
ri
Specify the name of the rotational axis to undergo dynamic offset.

ZA
Se
A
IM
Dynamic offset
K
Name of rotational axis

ZA
K99
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2

(c

ht
Specify the name of the axis to be made parallel with respect to the
ig
rotational plane of the rotational axis to undergo dynamic offset.

yr
op
Dynamic offset
C
Name of parallel axis

K100
Program type M, E
2-409
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the name of the axis to be made orthogonal with respect to the
rotational plane of the rotational axis to undergo dynamic offset.
Dynamic offset
Name of orthogonal axis
K101
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
s
re
ts
Fixed value (0)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
K102
N
(bit 0)
O
to
TI
(bit 2)
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
How to use the data of compensation for the sensing tool’s eccentricity
ZA
Se
and stylus radius in workpiece measurement and coordinate measure-

A
ment.
IM
0: M Pro scheme
For workpiece measurement: No use of eccentricity settings; Use of
K
stylus radius settings for both longitudinal (workpiece-axial) and

ZA
transverse (workpiece-radial) directions.

A
Compensation method for the sensing For coordinate measurement: Use of eccentricity setting for the direc-
M
tool’s eccentricity and stylus radius in tion of measuring feed; Use of stylus radius setting for transverse
YA
workpiece measurement and coordinate (workpiece-radial) direction.

K102 measurement 1: New scheme
3
Full use of the eccentricity and stylus radius settings for both work-
01
(bit 3)
piece measurement and coordinate measurement.
)2
* Setting of this parameter and compensation method

(c
ht
Eccentricity Stylus radius

K102
ig
bit 3 Measurement Other

Axial Radial
yr
direction directions
op
Workpiece 0 Invalid Invalid Valid Valid

Program type M
measurement 1 Valid Valid Valid Valid
C
Coordinate 0 Valid Invalid Invalid Valid
Unit — measurement 1 Valid Valid Valid Valid
Setting range 0, 1
2-410
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Z-axis direction for setting the TPC relay points for a measurement unit.
0: Direction opposite to the program coordinate system
X
Z-axis direction for setting the TPC relay
points for a measurement unit
K102 Z
(bit 4)
1: Direction of the program coordinate system
X
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit — Z
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Barrier information for EIA/ISO programs is to be set
gh
0: in the relevant parameters,
ri
1: on the SET UP MANAGE. display.
ll
Barrier information setting for EIA/ISO
.A
programs
N
K102
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Whether or not, on the TOOL DATA display, the direction of rotation can
ZA
Se
be specified for milling tools mounted on the turret.

A
IM
0: No
Setting the direction of rotation for milling 1: Yes (Normal/Reverse)
K
tools
K102
ZA
(bit 6)
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Fixed value (0)

ht
ig
yr
op
—
C
K102
(bit 7)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-411
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
Handling of the sign assigned to hobbing address D
(Note 1)
0: If plus (+), the workpiece spindle and the milling
spindle rotate in opposite directions.
If minus (–), both spindles rotate in the same
direction.
1: If plus (+), the workpiece spindle and the milling
spindle rotate in the same direction.
If minus (–), both spindles rotate in opposite
.
directions (MT Pro compatible).
d
ve
Synchronous control error auto-correction (Note 2)
er
0: Valid 1: Invalid
—
s
re
Fixed value
K103
ts
DDB micron unit
gh
0: Interpolation 1: Microns
ri
Fixed value
ll
Output of S-code and T-code at restart
.A
0: Invalid 1: Valid
N
* Set 0 for machining center specifications.
O
Whether FIXED PT can be selected at RETURN of
TI
60
A the end unit of the MAZATROL program

0: Possible to select
R
40
1: Impossible to select
PO
29
R
o.

O
N
Conditions Immediate 1. K103 bit 0 is valid, only when M17 bit 5 = 1.

al
Unit — 2. Even with K103 bit 1 = 0, unless M17 bit 4 is set to 0 (linear axis) for
ri
ZA
the axis concerned, auto-correction is not made valid.

Se

A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-412
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Output of a laser measurement B-axis 0-degree
command after ATC
0: Output invalid
1: Output valid
Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring
instrument
0: Depends on the setting of parameter L16.
L16 = 1: Parallel to the Y-axis,
L16 = 2: Parallel to the X-axis
d .
1: Depends on the setting of bit 2 in parameter
ve
K104.
er
Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring
s
re
instrument
0: Parallel to the Y-axis
ts
1: Parallel to the X-axis
gh
Note :
ri
— This parameter is valid when K104 bit 1 = 1.
ll
.A
Voice Adviser (Vocal output function)
K104
N
0: Invalid
O
1: Valid
TI
60
A Type of voice
0: Male’s voice
R
40
PO
1: Female’s voice
29
Vocal guidance for warm-up operation

R
o.
0: Invalid
N
1: Valid
al
Machine status when rapid feed command is given

ri
ZA
with cutting feed override set to 0%

Se
0: Alarm stop
IM
1: Operation is executed.
Feed rate for an approach to the starting point in
K
ZA
EIA modal restarting mode

0: Approach at the feed rate during manual
A
Program type M, E operations

M
1: If the modal command during the search is G0,

YA
approach at G0, or if the modal command is
Unit — other than G0, approach at G1
3
01

)2
Fixed value (1)

(c
ht
ig
—
yr
op
K105
C
(bit 1)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-413
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: Valid
S-code macro call invalid/valid

K105
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
. d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
.A
T-code macro call invalid/valid
N
K105
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: Invalid
ZA
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
Second auxiliary function macro call

K
invalid/valid
ZA
K105
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Fixed value (0)

ig
yr
op
C
—
K105
(bit 5)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-414
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select the value to be set (shaping control axis) at parameter K3.

On the MACHINE PARAMETER display (“FEED VEL.” (M), “TIME
CONST.” (N), etc.) where the axis data is set,
0: The identification number of the shaping control axis is handled as a
number that does not include the axes for which data is not set.
Handling of the shaping control axis 1: The identification number of the shaping control axis is handled as a
K105 number that includes the axes for which data is not set.
(bit 6) Refer to the explanation for parameter K3 for the example of setting.
Data unset axis Shaping axis
d .
ve
X Y Z B C V
Program type E
er
M1
s
Conditions Immediate M2
re
— ・
Unit
ts
・
Setting range 0, 1
gh
ri
Fixed value (0)
ll
.A
N
O
—
TI
K105
60
(bit 7)
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type —
o.
O
N
Conditions —
C
al
Unit —
ri
ZA
Setting range —
Se
76543210
IM
Execution conditions for user macroprogram

K
interrupt
ZA
0: Edge triggering (Performed just once when the

A
interrupt signal is turned ON)

M
1: Status triggering (Repeatedly performed while

YA
the interrupt signal is ON)

3
— Start timing for user macroprogram interrupt

01
0: The block under execution is aborted and then

)2
K106 the interrupt occurs immediately.

1: Interrupt occurs after completion of the block
(c
being executed.
ht
ig
Fixed value (0)

yr
Fixed value
op
C
Fixed value (0)
Program type M, E Fixed value (0)

Conditions At power on Fixed value (0)
Unit — Fixed value (0)
2-415
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value (0)
—
K107
(bit 0)
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Polar coordinate interpolation in the condition that the rotational axis
gh
shape correction is valid
0: Corner judgment halfway through a block
ri
Corner judgment halfway through a block
ll
1: No corner judgment halfway through a block
.A
during polar coordinate interpolation where
rotary axis shape correction is valid
K107
N
* When this parameter is set to 1, the machine will undergo hard
O
(bit 4) acceleration when the moving axis changes partway through a block,
TI
which may cause machine vibrations.
60
A
* When this parameter is set to 0, optimum acceleration control works
R
40
Program type M, E during the operation of a block. In this condition, if the feed rate is high, it
PO
29
Conditions At power on may slow down at corners and the machining cycle time may be longer.
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: In radius values
ri
ZA
Se
1: In diameter values
A
* Invalid for the axis for which bit 5 of M18 is set to 1.

IM
Motion distance in the manual pulse feed

mode for the axis whose position is
K
displayed in diameter value.

ZA
K107
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Deceleration for arc valid/invalid

ig
yr
op
C
Deceleration for arc valid/invalid

K107
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-416
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (0)
—
K107
(bit 7)
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Specify the maximum permissible error range for the master and slave
gh
axes for synchronous control (Tandem driving system).
ri
If the specified range is overstepped, alarm 141 EXCESS
SIMULTANEOUS ERROR will be displayed.
ll
Permissible error range for synchronous
.A
Note : Error checking will not occur if 0 is set.
control
N
K108
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
0.0001 mm
O
Unit
N

al
K
ri
Set the judgment angle near a singular point. The setting, if 0, will be
ZA
Se
handled as 1°.
A
IM
Judgment angle near a singular point

K
ZA
K110
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Conditions After stop of axis movement

)2
Unit °
(c

ht
Set the clamping speed (speed command) in safety supervisory mode 3.

ig
yr
op
Clamping speed in safety supervisory mode

C
K111
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min
2-417
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the type of machine.

1: Tool tilt type
2: Mixed type
3: Table tilt type
Example :
1 = Tool tilt type 2 = Mixed type
1st rotary axis
for the tool
.
Rotary axis for
d
the tool
ve
Machine type 2nd rotary axis
for the tool
er
Tool
Workpiece
s
K113 Tool
re
Workpiece Table
ts
gh
Table Rotary axis
ri
for the table
ll
3 = Table tilt type
.A
N
Table
O
Tool
TI
1st rotary axis
60
Workpiece for the table

Program type E A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
R
o.
Setting range 1 to 3 2nd rotary axis for the table

N
Set the axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate
al
system.
ri
ZA
A setting of 0 is invalid.
Se
A
IM
Axis number of the horizontal axis in the

rectangular coordinate system
K
K114
ZA
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
(c
Set the axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate
ht
system.
ig
yr
Axis number of the vertical axis in the

op

C
K115
Program type E
Unit —
2-418
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate
system.
Axis number of the height axis in the

K116
Program type E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
1 : Machines with 4 axes, the rotary axis rotates about the horizontal axis.
gh
2 : Machines with 4 axes, the rotary axis rotates about the vertical axis.
ri
3 : Machines with 4 axes, the rotary axis rotates about the height axis.
ll
12: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about horizontal axis,
.A
1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about vertical axis.
N
13: 2nd rotary axis .... Rotates about horizontal axis,
Rotational direction of the rotary axis
O
1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about height axis.
TI
21: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about vertical axis,
60
K117 A
1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about horizontal axis.
R
40
PO
23: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about vertical axis,

29
1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about height axis.

R
o.
31: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about height axis,

O
N
1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about horizontal axis.

C
Program type E
al
32: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about height axis,

ri
ZA
1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about vertical axis.

Se
Unit —
A
IM
Setting range —
Set the axis number of the first rotary axis.
K
ZA
A
M
Axis number of the first rotary axis

YA
K121
3
01
)2
(c
Program type E
ht
ig
Unit —
yr
op
C
2-419
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Set the distance from the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at
the tool side) in the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center
of the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite side).
Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the
first rotary axis <If the first rotary axis rotates for table control>
K122 Set the distance from the spindle tip point in the direction of the horizontal
axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the opposite
side) when all axes are in the machine home position.
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
ts
gh
ri
the tool side) in the direction of the vertical axis to the rotational center of
the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite side).
ll
Vertical axis rotational center offset of the
.A
first rotary axis <If the first rotary axis rotates for table control>
N
K123 Set the distance from the spindle tip point in the direction of the horizontal
O
axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the opposite
TI
side) when all axes are in the machine home position.
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm
O
N

al

ri
ZA
Se
A
the tool side) in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of
IM
the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite side).

K
Note :
ZA
In the case of machines with the capability of Maza-Check, the height

A
Height axis rotational center offset of the axis rotational center offset is equal to K124 + J121 (amount of height
M
first rotary axis axis rotational center offset of the rotary axis on the tool side).
YA
K124
<If the first rotary axis rotates for table control>
3
01
Set the distance from the spindle tip point in the direction of the height axis
)2
to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the opposite side)
when all axes are in the machine home position.
(c
ht
Note :
ig
Program type E When K113 = 2 (machine type: mix type), K124 has the same meaning
yr
as BA62 (amount of offset for the B-axis - spindle). In the case of inch
op
specifications, multiply the BA62 value by 2.54, round off to the nearest
whole number, and enter this value to K124.
C
Unit 0.0001 mm
2-420
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the axis number of the second rotary axis.

Axis number of the second rotary axis
K125
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
gh
Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the direction of the
ri
horizontal axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the
tool side).
ll
.A
second rotary axis <If the second rotary axis rotates for table control>
N
K126 Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis in
O
the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center of the table
TI
control rotary axis (at the workpiece side) when all axes are in the machine
60
A
home position.
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm
O
N

al

ri
ZA
Se
Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the direction of the vertical
A
axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side).
IM
Vertical axis rotational center offset of the <If the second rotary axis rotates for table control>
K
second rotary axis Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis in
ZA
K127 the direction of the vertical axis to the rotational center of the table control
A
rotary axis (at the workpiece side) when all axes are in the machine home
M
position.
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm
)2

(c
ht

ig
Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the direction of the height
yr
axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side).
op
Height axis rotational center offset of the <If the second rotary axis rotates for table control>
C
second rotary axis Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis in
K128 the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the table control
rotary axis (at the workpiece side) when all axes are in the machine home
position.
Program type E
Unit 0.0001 mm
2-421
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When the first rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: center position
deviation in the vertical axis direction
When the first rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: center position
deviation in the horizontal axis direction
Position deviation 1 of the first rotary axis When the first rotary axis rotates about height axis: center position
K129
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
ts
When the first rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: center position
gh
deviation in the height axis direction
ri
When the first rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: center position
ll
.A
Position deviation 2 of the first rotary axis When the first rotary axis rotates about height axis: center position
N
K130
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit
O
0.0001 mm
N

al
K
ri
When the second rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: center position
ZA
Se

A
When the second rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: center position
IM

Position deviation 1 of the second rotary
K
axis When the second rotary axis rotates about height axis: center position
ZA

K131
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm
(c

ht
When the second rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: center position
ig

yr
When the second rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: center position
op

Position deviation 2 of the second rotary
C
When the second rotary axis rotates about height axis: center position
axis
K132
Program type M, E
Unit 0.0001 mm
2-422
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the X-axis deviation of the spindle center position. Normally set 0
because the zero point is determined with respect to the spindle center
position. This parameter is invalid with the 3-axis machine, table tilt type
machine, and 4-axis machine of table-side rotation type.
X-axis position deviation at the spindle
center position
K133
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
ts
Set the Y-axis deviation of the spindle center position. Normally set 0
gh
because the coordinate origin is determined with respect to the spindle
center position. This parameter is invalid with the 3-axis machine, table tilt
ri
type machine, and 4-axis machine of table-side rotation type.
ll
Y-axis position deviation at the spindle
.A
center position
N
K134
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit
O
0.0001 mm
N

al
K
ri
When the first rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: angle deviation
ZA
Se
about vertical axis

A
When the first rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: angle deviation about
IM
horizontal axis
Angle deviation 1 of the first rotary axis
K
centerline When the first rotary axis rotates about height axis: angle deviation about
ZA
vertical axis
K135
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001
(c

ht
When the first rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: angle deviation
ig
about height axis

yr
When the first rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: angle deviation about
op
height axis
Angle deviation 2 of the first rotary axis
C
When the first rotary axis rotates about height axis: angle deviation about
centerline
horizontal axis
K136
Program type M, E
Unit 0.0001
2-423
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When the second rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: angle deviation
about vertical axis
When the second rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: angle deviation
about horizontal axis
Angle deviation 1 of the second rotary axis
When the second rotary axis rotates about height axis: angle deviation
centerline
about vertical axis
K137
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001
s
re
ts
When the second rotary axis rotates about horizontal axis: angle deviation
gh
about height axis
ri
When the second rotary axis rotates about vertical axis: angle deviation
about height axis
ll
Angle deviation 2 of the second rotary axis
.A
centerline When the second rotary axis rotates about height axis: angle deviation
about horizontal axis
N
K138
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit
O
0.0001
N

al
K
ri
Set the X-axis angle deviation of the spindle centerline. This parameter is
ZA
Se
invalid with the 3-axis machine, table tilt type machine, and 4-axis machine
A
of table-side rotation type.

IM
X-axis angle deviation of the spindle

K
centerline
ZA
K139
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001
(c

ht
Set the Y-axis angle deviation of the spindle centerline. This parameter is
ig
invalid with the 3-axis machine, table tilt type machine, and 4-axis machine
yr
of table-side rotation type.

op
Y-axis angle deviation of the spindle

C
centerline
K140
Program type M, E
Unit 0.0001
2-424
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the machine type for the 2nd set of axes when selecting multiple axis
sets for 5-axis machining.
1: Tool tilt type
2: Mix type
3: Table tilt type
Example :
1 = Tool tilt type 2 = Mix type

First tool control
rotary axis
d.
ve
Tool control
er
Machine type (2nd set of axes) rotary axis
Second tool
s
re
control rotary axis Tool
K225 Workpiece
ts
Tool
gh
Workpiece
Table
ri
Table
ll
Table control
.A
rotary axis
N
3 = Table tilt type
O
TI
Table
60
A Tool First rotary axis

R
40
Workpiece for the table

PO
29
Program type E
R
o.
O
N
Unit —
al
Setting range 1 to 3 Second rotary axis for the table

ri
ZA
Se
Set the axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate
A
system for the 2nd set of axes when selecting multiple axis sets for 5-axis
IM
machining. Setting 0 disables the function.

K
Axis number of the horizontal axis in the

ZA
rectangular coordinate system (2nd set of

axes)
A
K226
M
YA
3
Program type E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
ig
Set the axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate
yr
op

C
Axis number of the vertical axis in the

rectangular coordinate system (2nd set of
axes)
K227
Program type E
Unit —
2-425
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate
Axis number of the height axis in the
(2nd set of axes)
K228
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
1 : Machines with 4 axes, the rotary axis rotates about the horizontal
gh
axis.
ri
2 : Machines with 4 axes, the rotary axis rotates about the vertical axis.
ll
3 : Machines with 4 axes, the rotary axis rotates about the height axis.
.A
12 : The second rotary axis rotates around the horizontal axis and the first
N
rotary axis around the vertical axis.
Rotational direction of the rotary axis
O
13 : The second rotary axis rotates around the horizontal axis and the first
TI
(2nd set of axes)
rotary axis around the height axis.
60
K229 A
21 : The second rotary axis rotates around the vertical axis and the first
R
40
rotary axis around the horizontal axis.

PO
29
23 : The second rotary axis rotates around the vertical axis and the first
R
o.
rotary axis around the height axis.

O
N
31 : The second rotary axis rotates around the height axis and the first
al
rotary axis around the horizontal axis.

K
Program type E
ri
ZA
32 : The second rotary axis rotates around the height axis and the first
Se
Conditions Immediate rotary axis around the vertical axis.

A
Unit —
IM
(For the 2nd set of axes when selecting multiple axis sets for 5-axis
Setting range — machining)
K
Set the axis number of the first rotary axis for the 2nd set of axes when
ZA
selecting multiple axis sets for 5-axis machining. Setting 0 disables the
A
function.
M
YA
Axis number of the first rotary axis (2nd set

of axes)
3
01
K230
)2
(c
Program type E
ht
ig
yr
Unit —
op
C
2-426
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
<If the first rotary axis is the tool control rotary axis>
of the tool control rotary axis (at the root side).
first rotary axis (2nd set of axes) <If the first rotary axis is the table control rotary axis>
K231 Set the distance from the spindle nose point to the rotational center of the
table control rotary axis (at the root side) in the horizontal axis direction,
with all axes at the machine zero points.
Program type E
.
machining)
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
ts
gh
ri
the tool side) to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the
root side) in the vertical axis direction.
ll
Vertical axis rotational center offset of the
.A
first rotary axis (2nd set of axes) <If the first rotary axis is the table control rotary axis>
N
K232 Set the distance from the spindle nose point to the rotational center of the
O
table control rotary axis (at the root side) in the vertical axis direction, with
TI
all axes at the machine zero points.
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
machining)
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
root side) in the height axis direction.

K
Note :
ZA
In the case of machines with the capability of Maza-Check, the height axis
A
rotational center offset is equal to K233 + J531 (amount of height axis

M
Height axis rotational center offset of the rotational center offset of the rotary axis on the tool side).
YA
first rotary axis (2nd set of axes)
K233 <If the first rotary axis is the table control rotary axis>
3
01
Set the distance from the spindle nose point to the rotational center of the
)2
table control rotary axis (at the root side) in the height axis direction, with
all axes at the machine zero points.
(c
ht
Note :
ig
When K225 = 2 (machine type: mix type), K233 has the same meaning as
yr
BA62 (the offset for the B-axis - spindle). In the case of inch
Program type E
specifications, multiply the BA62 value by 2.54, round off to the nearest
op
Conditions Immediate whole number, and enter this value for K233.
C
Unit 0.0001 mm (For the 2nd set of axes when selecting multiple axis sets for 5-axis
Setting range ±99999999 machining)
2-427
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the axis number of the second rotary axis for the 2nd set of axes when
selecting multiple axis sets for 5-axis machining. Setting 0 disables the
function.
Axis number of the second rotary axis

(2nd set of axes)
K234
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
gh
Set the distance from the spindle holder end to the rotational center of the
ri
tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the horizontal axis direction.
ll
Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the <If the second rotary axis is the table control rotary axis>
.A
second rotary axis (2nd set of axes) Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis
N
K235 (at the root side) to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at
O
the workpiece side) in the horizontal axis direction, with all axes at the
TI
machine zero points.
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
machining)
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm
O
N

al
K
ri

ZA
Se
A
tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the vertical axis direction.
IM
Vertical axis rotational center offset of the <If the second rotary axis is the table control rotary axis>
K
ZA
A
the workpiece side) in the vertical axis direction, with all axes at the
M

YA
Program type E machining)
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm
(c

ht

ig
yr
tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the height axis direction.
op
Height axis rotational center offset of the <If the second rotary axis is the table control rotary axis>
C
the workpiece side) in the height axis direction, with all axes at the
Program type E machining)
Unit 0.0001 mm
2-428
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
K238
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
K239
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Set the axis name of the spindle to be rotated in orbit machining.

ZA
Se
A
IM
Axis name of the spindle to be rotated in

K
orbit machining
ZA
K242
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Conditions After resetting

)2

(c

ht
Set the M code number of the forward rotation command for orbit
ig
machining.
yr
op
M code number of the forward rotation

C
command for orbit machining
K243
Program type E
Unit —
2-429
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the M code number of the reverse rotation command for orbit
machining.
M code number of the reverse rotation

K244
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the M code number of the rotation stop command for orbit machining.
gh
ri
ll
.A
M code number of the rotation stop
N
O
K245
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29

R
o.
Unit —
N
C
al

K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-430
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Permissible error at involute interpolation end point

Sets the permissible error between the involute curve that passes the start
point and that which passes the end point in involute interpolation.
L in the figure corresponds to the involute interpolation error at the end
point.
Involute curve that

passes the end point
End point
Involute curve
Y that passes L
d .
the start point
ve
Start
er
point
s
Permissible error at involute interpolation
re
end point
ts
K246
gh
ri
ll
Base circle
.A
X
0
N
O
TI
If the error L becomes larger than the value set for this parameter, the
60
A
alarm 817 INCORRECT ARC DATA occurs at the start point of the
R
40
involute interpolation.
PO
29
R
o.
Note :
O
N
Program type E When 0 is set, the permissible error at the end point becomes 0,
al
meaning that the alarm 817 INCORRECT ARC DATA occurs unless the
K
ri
ZA
curve that passes the start point completely coincides with the curve that
Se
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in passes the end point.

A
Setting range 0 to 99999999 When a value outside the setting range is set, 0 is assumed.
IM
Sets the maximum acceleration permitted in involute interpolation to clamp

K
the acceleration. The feedrate in the tangential direction can be clamped

ZA
to maintain the acceleration within the value set for this parameter.
A
Note :
M
Involute interpolation permissible

When this parameter is set to 0 or a value outside the setting range, the
acceleration
YA
involute acceleration/deceleration clamp function is disabled and the

K247 feedrate in the tangential direction becomes constant regardless of the
3
curvature radius.
01
)2
Program type E
(c
ht
ig
2
Unit 0.1 mm/sec
yr

op
C
2-431
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the minimum feedrate permitted in involute interpolation to clamp the

acceleration. When the lower limit for the clamping feedrate is set for this
parameter, the feedrate in the tangential direction is adjusted so that it
does not go below the lower limit.
Involute interpolation minimum feedrate Note :
1. When a value outside the setting range is set, 0 is assumed.
K248 2. This parameter is valid when K247 > 0.
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
re
ts
Sets the lower limit for the involute interpolation override. When this
gh
parameter is set, the override is adjusted according to the curvature radius
ri
so that the feedrate at the cutting position becomes the specified feedrate,
with respect to the feedrate at the tool center path.
ll
.A
Involute interpolation override lower limit Note :
N
When this parameter is set to 0 or a value outside the setting range, the
O
K249 involute interpolation override function is disabled and the override is
TI
always set to 100% during tool radius offset.
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
o.
Unit %
N
C
al

K
ri
ZA
Sets the time to wait before the zero-speed signal of the hobbing axis
Se
(V-axis) turns ON upon specifying G113 (hobbing end) or interruption of

A
hobbing during hobbing II operation.

IM
Wait time before turning ON of zero-speed

K
signal upon ending hobbing II (position

ZA
controlled hobbing)
K250
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit ms
(c

ht
During operation other than rapid feed (G00), the tool is said to be in a
ig
singular posture when the vector normal to machining face and the tool
yr
posture vector are parallel. When the orientations of the two vectors are
op
within the threshold value, the tool is considered to be in a singular

Threshold value for singular posture in the
C
posture.
cutting point command mode (for other than
rapid feed)
* When 0 is set, 500 (0.0000500°) is assumed.
K251
* For rapid feed (G00), parameter K254 is used.
Program type E
In the cutting point
Conditions
command mode [Related parameters]
Unit 0.0000001° K254
2-432
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
K252
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set the angle of the mill spindle when the tip of the tool in the mill spindle is
gh
oriented in the +X-axis direction in orbit machining.
ri
ll
Angle that sets the mill spindle tool tip in the
.A
+X-axis direction in orbit machining
N
K253
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001°
N

al
K
ri
During rapid feed (G00), the tool is said to be in a singular posture when
ZA
Se
the vector normal to machining face and the tool posture vector are
A
parallel. When the orientations of the two vectors are within the threshold
IM
Threshold value for singular posture in the value, the tool is considered to be in a singular posture.
cutting point command mode (for rapid
K
feed)
ZA
* When 0 is set, 500 (0.0000500°) is assumed.

K254 * For other than rapid feed (G00), parameter K251 is used.
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
In the cutting point

01
Conditions [Related parameters]

command mode
)2
Unit 0.0000001° K251

(c

ht
Fixed value (1)

ig
yr
op
C
—
K257
(bit 0)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-433
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: 50 items
1: 400 items
* After changing the setting of K257 bit1, initialize jaw shapes with the
Jaw shape data: registration count
data initialization operation.
K257
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
K257
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
0: Rotated in the forward direction

ZA
Se
1: Rotated in the reverse direction

A
IM
Direction of mill spindle rotation in orbit

K
machining
ZA
K257
A
(bit 3)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Display of the alarm 1154 FEED LIMITED IN ORBIT MACHINING upon

ig
clamping the speed in orbit machining

yr
0: Not displayed
op
Speed clamp alarm display in orbit 1: Displayed

C
machining
K257
(bit 4)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-434
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (0)
—
K257
(bit 6)
Program type —
. d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
Setting range —
re
Fixed value (1)
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
K257
N
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
Spindle speed override unit switching function

ri
ZA
Se
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
IM
Spindle speed override unit switching

K
function
ZA
K258
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
op
C
MDI input support function

K258
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-435
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Used to add tool axis direction coordinate Tx in the HANDLE INTERUPT

window.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
HANDLE INTERUPT window Tx display
K258
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Used to add tool axis direction coordinate Ty in the HANDLE INTERUPT
gh
window.
0: Invalid
ri
ll
1: Valid
.A
HANDLE INTERUPT window Ty display
K258
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Used to add tool axis direction coordinate Tz in the HANDLE INTERUPT

ri
ZA
window.
Se
0: Invalid
IM
1: Valid
HANDLE INTERUPT window Tz display
K
ZA
K258
A
(bit 4)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
0: Disabled (using the Z-axis as the feed axis in the workpiece axis
direction)
ig
yr
1: Enabled (discriminating the feed axis in the workpiece axis direction

op
according to parameters K113 to K127)

Hobbing: Axis configuration discrimination
C
function
K259
(bit 0)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-436
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
—
K280
(bit 0)
Program type —
.
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
K280
N
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
Fixed value
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
K280
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
ht
Fixed value
ig
yr
op
—
C
K280
(bit 6)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-437
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Laser tool length/diameter measurement on an arbitrary axis

0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
Laser tool length/diameter measurement on
an arbitrary axis
K281
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-438
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-12 Machine parameter TABLE (L)
Classification MACHINE Display title TABLE
The eccentricity of the stylus of the touch sensor with respect to the center
of the spindle
Touch sensor
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor

(X-component)
L1
+Z
.
Stylus
d
ve
+X Spindle centerline
er
Program type M
s
re
Stylus L1
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in centerline
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor L2
O
(Y-component) +Y
TI
60
L2 A
R
40
+X
PO
29
MPL093
R
o.

O
N
1. These data are automatically set when calibration measurement is

C
al
performed using the MMS unit.

K
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

ri
ZA
2. With 5-axis machines, L84 and L85 are used for these settings.
Se

A
The true radius value of the stylus ball of the touch sensor
IM
Touch sensor
K
ZA
Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor

(X-component)
A
M
L3
YA
+Z
Stylus ball
3
01
Program type M +X
)2
(c
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

ht

ig
yr
op
L4 × 2
C
Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor

(Y-component) +Y
L4
+X
L3 × 2 MPL094
Program type M
Note :
These data are automatically set when calibration measurement is
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
performed using the MMS unit.
2-439
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The distance from the spindle taper gage line to the table surface, No. 1
turning spindle chuck edge, or the reference block on the pallet existing
when the Z-axis is in the machine zero-point position
Spindle L5
Machine
zero point
Machine Spindle
zero point
L5
d .
Pallet
ve
Z-axis stroke for tip position memory Reference block
er
(TEACH function)
Table
s
MPL095
re
L5
ts
Machine
gh
zero point
ri
L5
ll
.A
N
O
Spindle Machine
Spindle
TI
edge zero point
edge
60
A L5
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
Chuck edge
29
Conditions Immediate Table

R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N
(Horizontal composite machine) (Vertical composite machine)

C

al
K
ri
The minimum tool displacement by which the tool is judged to be a broken

ZA
Se
one as a result of execution of the tool breakage detection function

A
If (registered tool length data) – (tool length data that has been measured
IM
during the detecting operation)  L6, then the tool is judged broken.
Tool-breakage judgment distance for TBR
K
function
ZA
L6
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-440
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Selects the restoration operation to be executed when the tool is judged

broken upon executing the external tool breakage detection function
(M35) or tool measurement unit.
0: Continue machining
1: Single-block stop occurs
Tool-breakage restoration mode for TBR 2: Continue machining from the next process, or executing the end
function (for M35 external tool breakage unit when there is only one process or when the machining for the
detection or tool measurement unit) last process is being executed.
L7 3: After stopping in single block mode, continue machining from the
next process, or execute the end unit when there is only one
d .
process or when the machining for the last process is being
ve
executed.
er
Note :
s
re
Program type M
1. When “2” is set for this parameter, the operation is equivalent to that
ts
Conditions Immediate for the setting of “0” upon executing a tool measurement unit.
gh
Unit — 2. When “3” is set for this parameter, the operation is equivalent to that
ri
Setting range 0 to 3 for the setting of “1” upon executing a tool measurement unit.
ll
.A
The maximum skipping movement distance for the measurement with the
MMS unit
N
An alarm message will appear if the touch sensor has not come into
O
contact with the workpiece within this distance.
TI
60
Skipping stroke limit for MMS A

R
40
PO
L8
29
R
o.
O
N
Program type M, E
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

A
IM

Set to 1 when the machine of the random ATC specifications is used.
K
ZA
0: Standard machine
1: Machine of random ATC specifications
A
M
Selection of random ATC specifications

YA
L9
3
01
)2
(c
Program type M, E
ht
ig
Unit —
yr
Setting range 0, 1
op
C
2-441
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the interval between magazine pockets.
Interval between magazine pockets
L10
L10
MPL511
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 1 mm/0.1 in
s
re
Set the touch sensor's interference direction.
ts
gh
0: Non-interference (normal diameter)
ri
1: To jut out in the direction of a pocket of higher number (Positive
direction of magazine)
ll
Touch sensor’s interference direction
.A
2: To jut out in the direction of a pocket of lower number (Negative
direction of magazine)
N
L11
O
TI
60
Program type M, E
A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
o.
O
N
C
al
Tolerance for Z coordinate value in circle measurement

K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
Tolerance for manual measurement

ZA
L12
A
L12 Tolerance for measured coordinate value in face measurement

M
YA
Y
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
Conditions Immediate L12

(c
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in X

ht
Setting range 0 to ±99999999 MPL512

ig
yr
Set the allowable angle for calculation of parallelism and right angle to be
op
measured manually.
C
Allowable angle for parallelism and right

angle in manual measurement
L13
Program type M
Unit 0.0001° When error angle is smaller than the setting angle, the parallelism and
right angle are calculated.
2-442
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set an escape amount from a measurement point to the next point in

straightness measurement.
Escapement for straightness measurement

L14
L14
MPL513
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
ts
Set macro program number for straightness measurement.
gh
Before shipment, the macro program is numbered “9999” at the factory.
ri
ll
Macro program number for straightness
.A
measurement
N
L15
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
ZA

Se
Setting prohibited
A
IM
K
—
ZA
L16
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Set a command unit of head indexing angle.

ig
yr
op
C
Minimum angle of head indexing command
L17
Program type M, E
Unit 0.1° (Only for INTEGREX j)
2-443
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Tailstock absent.
1: Tailstock present.
Presence/absence of tailstock
L18
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set the number of electric steady rests.
gh
0: No electric steady rest
ri
1: One electric steady rest
ll
2: Two electric steady rests
.A
Number of electric steady rests
N
L19
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
ZA
Select the output type for the angle command of the indexing unit and the
Se
end unit of the MAZATROL program.

A
0: To select servo axis (4th axis)

IM
1: To select the code (the second auxiliary function) set by K56

K
Output type of index (rotary) table

2: To select servo axis (4th/5th axis)
ZA
L21
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-444
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Use L22 and L23 to set the dimensions of the sensor for tool nose
measurement.
L24 and L25 are provided to set in machine coordinates the reference
point of the sensor (see the diagram below).
Example :
[INTE IV, INTE e-HII, lathes]
1. For No. 1 turning spindle
Machine zero point
d.
ve
er
L24
s
Sensor’s
re
reference point
ts
L25
gh
Data of the tool nose measurement sensor
ri
L22
L22 : Sensor width along the X-axis
ll
.A
L23 : Sensor width along the Z-axis Sensor for tool nose
L24 : X-coordinate of the sensor’s measurement
L22
N
reference point L23
O
to L25 : Z-coordinate of the sensor’s Set the imaginary upper left corner of the sensor as its reference point
TI
L25 reference point for No. 2 spindle.
60
[INTE e-VII]
A
R
40
PO
2.
29
Machine zero point

o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
L25
IM
Sensor’s
reference point
K
L24
ZA
A
L23
M
YA
Sensor for tool nose

measurement
3
Program type M L22

01

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in As shown above, the X- and Z-axes must be replaced with each other
(c
Setting range ±99999999 between INTEGREX e-HII and e-VII.

ht
ig
Setting of sensor reference point Y coordinate

yr
op
L26 Machine zero point

C
Tool nose measurement sensor reference

position, Y-axis
L26
Program type M
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-445
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
During manual TOOL EYE measurement, even if the sensor turns on for a
time shorter than that which has been specified in this parameter, that will
not be regarded as sensor-on.
Timer setting for manual TOOL EYE

measurement
L27
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit 7.1 ms
s
re
ts
In the machine configuration that will cause the arm of the TOOL EYE to
gh
interfere with the tool when the arm is extended or retracted with the tool
present at the measuring approach point during automatic tool
ri
measurement with the TOOL EYE, set the distance through which the tool
ll
is to be returned in the Z-axis direction before extending or retracting the
.A
arm for the measurement.
N
In the MAZATROL program, before the arm is extended or retracted, the
O
tool is returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the measuring
TI
60
approach point.
A
R
In the EIA/ISO program, when G136 command execution is completed,
40
PO
the tool will be returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the
29
approach point. (In the EIA/ISO program, the tool will be retreated to a
R
o.
relay point, only in retraction mode, and the arm will be extended by
O
N
execution of M284 in the next block onward.)

C
Amount of Z-axial retreat from the approach

al
point for TOOL EYE measurement (For QTN machine specifications, parameter L28 becomes valid for the #2
K
ri
and #4 approach points in the –Z direction.)

ZA
L28
Se
X
IM
K
Z
ZA
In case of #2, #4
approaching (QTN) TOOL EYE #1, #2 APK1
A
approach point AP1

M
L78 TOOL EYE #1, #2

AP1
YA
approach point
L28 APK1
K20
3
01
K20 TOOL K20

EYE L28
)2
APK3
K20 TOOL EYE #3, #4
(c
Program type M, E
approach point
ht
Conditions Immediate AP3 APK3

ig
TOOL EYE #3, #4

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
yr
approach point AP3

op
C
2-446
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set machine efficiency. This value is used as average output calculation

data for machining navigation. If the setting is 0, machine efficiency will
become 90%.
Machine efficiency
L29
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
Select for each machine model the appropriate case introduction
gh
messages on MACHINING NAVIGATION-PREDICTION display.
ri
Specific data is preset for each machine model. Do not disturb the
ll
presettings.
Selection of machining navigation case
.A
introduction messages
N
L30
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
ZA
The settings of these parameters can be read using system variables.

Se
Parameter System variable

IM
L31 #3103
K
Use in machine manufacturer macro L32 #3104

L31
ZA
L33 #3105
to
A
L34 #3106
M
L34
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
For the command to rotate the index table, specify the minimum index
ig
angle for angle command by the M-code or B-code.

yr
op
C
Minimum index angle of index table
L37
Program type M
Conditions At power on Note :
This parameter is ineffective for the system with an NC rotary table.
Unit °
2-447
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
For the command to rotate the index table, select the turning direction and
the M-code number to be output.
0 or 1: B-code (0: Turning in the direction of CW,
1: Turning in the direction of CW/CCW/shortcut)
M/B-code for index of index table 2 to 9999: M-code (Numeric value is the M-code number to be
output)
L38
Note :
1. This parameter is ineffective for the system with an NC rotary table.
.
Program type M
d
ve
Conditions At power on 2. Turning direction of the index table can be selected in the indexing
unit only when this parameter is set to 1.
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Specify the execution condition of the indexing unit.
gh
Execution of the indexing unit just before starting of machining of each
tool sequence or at the end of each process:
ri
ll
0: Won’t be made when the index angle is the same as the preceding
Selection of execution/non execution of
.A
indexing unit execution.
indexing unit
N
1: Will be made unconditionally.
L39
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Select availability to specify the index table angle in the end unit.
Se
0: Enables to specify the angle.

A
IM
1: Prohibits to specify the angle.

Availability of specification of index table
K
angle in end unit

ZA
L40
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
Conditions Immediate Note : Set to 0 only for index table specification.

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
For execution of the indexing unit, specify the commanding order for
ig
movement to turning position, turning of the table and ATC.

yr
0: Movement to turning position  Table turning  ATC

op
1: Movement to turning position  Table turning and ATC

Simultaneous operation of indexing unit
C
with ATC 2: Movement to turning position, table turning and ATC

simultaneously take place.
L41
Program type M
Note :
In case of setting to 2, only the X-axis coordinates can be set at turning
Unit — position of the indexing unit.
2-448
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select setting of the initial value (modal) of the index table angle for cyclic
operation.
0: Actual table angle of the machine
1: Table angle indexed at present taken as 0°
Initial value of index table angle
L42
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select showing or not showing of the index table angle on the POSITION
gh
display.
ri
0: Not to show
ll
1: To show
.A
Indication of index table angle
N
L43
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Set to 1 for the machine with the index table, or set to 0 for that of the
O
Unit —
N
NC rotary table.
C
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Select whether automatic setting of the amount of tool nose position

Se
correction is to be made valid or invalid when entering the nose angle of a

A
drilling tool in the tool data or when measuring the tool.

IM
0: Automatic setting valid

Selection of automatic setting on/off for
K
When the tool nose angle is specified: The amount of correction that is
nose position correction of a drilling tool
ZA
appropriate for the specified angle is auto-set.

L44 When the tool nose angle is not specified: The amount of correction is
A
not auto-set.
M
1: Automatic setting invalid

YA
2: Automatic setting valid

Program type M, E
3
When the tool nose angle is specified: The amount of correction that is
01
Conditions Immediate appropriate for the specified angle is auto-set.

)2
Unit — When the tool nose angle is not specified: The amount of correction
that assumes a nose angle of 118° is auto-set.
(c
ht
Set the minimum unit of index table angle command for the indexing units,
ig
ANGLE in the end units and B-codes in the manual program unit.
yr
0: 1°
op
1 to 8: 1/1000° (auxiliary equipment axis specifications)

C
Index table angle command
L45
Note :
Index table angle display on the POSITION display is valid only when
L43 = 1 (index table angle display on).
Program type — 0: 1° index table
Conditions — 1 to 7: Nth axis under auxiliary equipment axis specs. (N = 1 to 7)
8: Positioning table
Unit —
2-449
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select change or no change of the pallet and specify the maximum

number of pallets.
0 or 1: Not to change pallet
2 to 255: To change pallet (Numeric value indicates the maximum
Maximum number of pallets in pallet
number of pallets.)
changing unit
L46
.
Program type M
d
Note :
ve
When this parameter is set to 0 or 1, use of the pallet changing unit is
er
Unit — prohibited.
s
re
ts
Select preparation of next pallet or not to do so according to the pallet
gh
change mechanism.
ri
0: Not to prepare next pallet
ll
1: To prepare next pallet
To prepare or not to prepare next pallet
.A
change
N
L47
O
TI
60
A
R
40

PO
29
Conditions At power on When this parameter is set to 1, it is possible to set the number of the
R
o.
next pallet in the pallet changing unit.

O
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Specify the number of long boring bars mounted.

Se
A
IM
K
Number of long boring bars

ZA
L48
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
This parameter is used to select simultaneous operation of pallet change

ig
with the next ATC operation in execution of the pallet changing unit and
yr
the face definition unit, or not.

op
0: To operate ATC after pallet change

Simultaneous operation of pallet change
C
1: To operate pallet change and ATC simultaneously

with ATC
L49
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-450
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Rewriting of head number in MDI mode:

0: Impossible
1: Possible
Rewriting of head number
L50
.
Program type —
d
ve
er
(For five surface machining)
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Tool command system in MDI operation (Tool on the spindle and next
gh
time tool)
ri
0: Command of pocket number
ll
1: Command of group number
.A
Tool command system in MDI operation
N
L51
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Rewriting of machining management data with macro variable (system

Se
variable)
A
0: Impossible
IM
1: Possible
Writing of machining management data with
K
macro variable
ZA
L52
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select showing or not showing of the work number in the PALLET

ig
MANAGEMENT display.
yr
0: Not to show WNo.

op
1: To show WNo.
Showing of program number in PALLET
C
MANAGEMENT display
L53
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-451
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: FMS pallet ID operation mode
2: Pallet management operation mode
Selection of automatic operation mode
L54
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
0: FR-SF
gh
1: FR-SE
ri
ll
.A
Spindle load meter display type
N
L55
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Method by M2 tool edge memorizing function

Se
1: Method by M32 tool edge memorizing function (for Z-axis only)

A
2: Method by M32 tool edge memorizing function (for X-, Y-, Z-axes)
IM
Method of measurement of coordinates by Example :

K
tool edge memorizing function (TEACH) +Z

ZA
L56
A
 Mothod by M2
M
(distance from the tool tip

YA
50 to the zero point with a sign) .... –50

Program type M  Method by M32
3
01
Conditions Immediate +Y (distance from the zero point

)2
Unit — to the tool tip with a sign) ........... 50

MPL514
(c
ht
Make it possible/impossible to rewrite tool data except on tools on the

ig
spindle in automatic operation on a program.

yr
0: Impossible
op
1: Possible
Rewriting of tool data during automatic
C
operation
L57
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-452
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select a head angle indication system for the five surface machining
system.
0: Indication corresponding to 90° index (0°, 90°, 180°, 270°)
1: Indication corresponding to 1° (5°) index
Head index angle indication system
L58
.
Program type E
d
ve
er
Unit — (For five surface machining)
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
This parameter limits input items on the HEAD OFFSET display.
gh
0: Data just on item SPDL. CMD can be input.
ri
1: All data can be input.
ll
.A
Input selection for HEAD OFFSET display
N
L59
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.

N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
The total number of heads to be mounted in the spindle

Se
A
IM
K
Head quantity
ZA
L60
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2

(c
ht
Operation timing of automatic head change (AHC) and automatic pallet

ig
change (APC)
yr
0: AHC first and then APC

op
1: APC first and then AHC

C
Output timing of AHC and APC

2: Simultaneous
L61
Program type M, E
(For five surface machining)
Unit —
2-453
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When FIXED is selected at the item RELAY in the face definition unit, the
head arrives at the face for next machining through the point(s) specified
by the parameters (to be set in the machine coordinates system).
For AGX or five-surface machining models, the relay points (X1, Y1) and
(X2, Y2) can be specified in the program (in the face definition sequence).
Head relay point X1
For the five surface machining, the head goes through the four corners of
a face where the two specified points are positioned in its diagonal line.
L62
Z
.
Program type M
d
(X1, Y1)
ve
Conditions Immediate Y
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in X
s
re
ts
gh
(X2, Y2)
ri
MPL515
ll
(For five-surface machining)
.A
Head relay point Y1
(For AGX series)
N
L63
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Head relay point X2

K
ZA
L64
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
Head relay point Y2
L65
Program type M
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-454
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
After EIA/ISO subprogram execution;

0: Return to head indexing point Z (Even if the T-code command is for
the same tool.)
1: No return to head indexing point Z
Return/No return to head indexing point Z
L66
.
Program type M
d
ve
Conditions Immediate (For five-surface machining)
er
Unit — (For AGX series)
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set the length from the end surface of the spindle to the center of head
gh
rotation for respective machines. (100 mm in usual)
ri
Y
ll
 = 180°
Length between the end surface of the
.A
spindle and the center of head rotation
N
L67  = 0°
O
TI
60
A L67
Z
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
MPL516
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N

al
K
ri
ZA
Set for respective machines.

Se
 = 180°
Y
IM
 = 0°
K
Head correction value X

ZA
L68
A
M
L68
YA
X
Program type M, E
3
MPL517
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (For AGX series)

(c

ht
Set for respective machines.

ig
yr
op
C
Head correction value Y
L69
Program type M, E
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (For AGX series)
2-455
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the axes that simultaneously move from a machining face to the
next machining face or in case of tool replacement.
0: Two (three) axes simultaneously move to the safety position.
1: Y-axis (or X- and Y-axes) moves to the safety position after Z-axis
Axis movement from machining face on
moved.
escapement
The X-axis moves when a relay point (RELAY) or a fixed point (FIXED) is
L70 selected for the item RELAY in the face definition unit.
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
s
re
Setting range 1, 0
ts
For execution of the program for oblique face machining, specify to
gh
execute or not machining on the coordinate that is turned from the basic
coordinate (set in WPC unit or in OFFSET unit) at an angle of the
ri
correction value for the B-axis.
ll
Shift of basic coordinate for oblique face
.A
0: Machining on the coordinate that is turned from the basic
machining coordinate at an angle of the correction value for the B-axis
N
L71
O
1: Machining on the basic coordinate specified in the program
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
(For AGX series)

C
Setting range 1, 0
al
K
ri
ZA
Set the time constant to be used in the 5-axis spline interpolation mode.
Se
A setting value of 0 is invalid.

A
IM
5-axis spline interpolation geometry

K
compensation software acceleration/

ZA
deceleration filter 2 time constant

L72
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01

)2
Unit ms
(c
ht
Set the time constant to be used when shape correction is on.

ig
yr
op
Time constant for shape correction

C
acceleration/deceleration filter 2
L73
Program type M, E
Unit ms
2-456
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration

control.
Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational

acceleration/deceleration control
L74
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
re
ts
Set the time constant to obtain acceleration/deceleration of the cutting
gh
feed rate for pre-interpolational linear control.
ri
ll
Time constant for pre-interpolational linear
.A
control during cutting feed rate
acceleration/deceleration
N
L75
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit ms
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Set the maximum cutting speed in the G61.1 mode at percentage to the
Se
maximum cutting speed in the G64 mode.

A
Input of 0 is regarded as 100%.

IM
1000 or higher percent is disposed as 1000%.

K
Acceleration rate for high-speed cutting

ZA
L76
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Set an angle for decelerating cutting feed rate at a corner.

ig
Input of 0 is regarded as 5°.

yr
Setting at an angle higher than 30° is disposed as 30°.

op
Angle for deceleration at corner before

C
interpolation 
L77
MPL518
Program type M, E
Unit °
2-457
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
In the machine configuration that will cause the arm of the TOOL EYE to
interfere with the tool when the arm is extended or retracted with the tool
present at the measuring approach point during automatic tool
measurement with the TOOL EYE, set the distance through which the tool
is to be returned in the X-axis direction before extending or retracting the
arm for the measurement.
In the MAZATROL program, before the arm is extended or retracted, the
tool is returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the measuring
approach point.
In the EIA/ISO program, when G136 command execution is completed,
.
the tool will be returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the
d
ve
approach point. (In the EIA/ISO program, the tool will be retreated to a
Amount of X-axial retreat from the approach
er
relay point, only in retraction mode, and the arm will be extended by
point for TOOL EYE measurement execution of M284 in the next block onward.)
s
re
X
L78
ts
gh
Z
ri
In case of #2, #4
ll
approaching (QTN) TOOL EYE #1, #2 APK1
.A
approach point AP1
TOOL EYE #1, #2
N
AP1 L78
approach point
O
L28 APK1
TI
K20
60
A K20 TOOL K20

R
40
EYE L28 APK3

PO
29
Program type M, E K20 TOOL EYE #3, #4

R
approach point
o.
O
AP3 APK3
N
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in TOOL EYE #3, #4

al
approach point AP3

K

ri
ZA
Se
Set the In-position width for changeover of the synchronized-tapping gain.

A
If 0 is set, 10 microns will be regarded as having been set.

IM
K
In-position width for changeover of the

ZA
synchronized-tapping gain
A
L79
M
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
(c
Unit 0.001 mm
ht

ig
Set the deceleration rate at the linear to arc or arc to linear blocks of
yr
shape correction.
op
C
Linear to arc deceleration rate
L80
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min / in/min
2-458
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2

Setting prohibited
L81
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set the thickness of the tilting table.
gh
This parameter is used for the software travel limit function provided to
ri
avoid collision between the spindle head and the tilting table (in its angular
ll
position from –90° to –120°).
.A
Table thickness
N
L82
O
TI
60
A Tilting table L82

R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm
N
(For machines equipped with a tilting table)

C

al
K
ri
Set the radius of the spindle head.

ZA
Se
This parameter is used for the software travel limit function provided to
A
avoid collision between the spindle head and the tilting table.
IM
K
Spindle head radius

ZA
L83
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm
L83 (For machines equipped with a tilting table)
(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-459
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2Mx
Correction value of alignment deviation X

(Upper face)
2My
L84 ey
ex
.
Program type M Stylus
d
ve
Conditions After stop of movement Spindle center
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
MPL519
re
Setting range 0 to ±99999999 ex: Alignment deviation correction value on X-axis
ts
ey: Alignment deviation correction value on Y-axis
gh
Mx: Stylus radius in the X-axis direction (The setting of L3)
My: Stylus radius in the Y-axis direction (The setting of L4)
ri
ll
Correction value of alignment deviation Y
.A
Note :
(Upper face)
N
The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement
L85
O
(on the upper face) with the MMS unit.
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29

R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (For five-surface machining)

N

al
K
ri
ZA
2Mx
Se
A
IM

K
(0-degree face)
ZA
2My
L86 ey
A
M
YA
ex
3
01

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

MPL519
(c

ht

ig

yr

op

C
Note :
(0-degree face)
L87 (0-degree face) with the MMS unit.
Program type M
2-460
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2Mx

(90-degree face)
(X-component for B-axis at 90-degree
2My
L88 position) ey
ex
.
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
MPL519
re
ts
gh
ri
(90-degree face)
ll
.A
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor Note :
N
(Y-component for B-axis at 90-degree The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement
L89
O
position) (90-degree face) with the MMS unit.
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
Conditions After stop of movement (For INTEGREX series)

R
o.
(For five-surface machining)

O
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

N

al
K
ri
ZA
2Mx
Se

IM
(180-degree face)
K

ZA
(X-component for B-axis at 180-degree

2My
L90 position) ey
A
M
YA
ex
3
01

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

MPL519
(c

ht

ig

yr

op
(180-degree face)
C
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor Note :

(Y-component for B-axis at 180-degree The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement
L91 position) (180-degree face) with the MMS unit.
Program type M
Conditions After stop of movement (For INTEGREX series)
2-461
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2Mx

(270-degree face)
2My
L92 ey
ex
.
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
MPL519
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
Note :
(270-degree face)
N
L93
O
(270-degree face) with the MMS unit.
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29

R
o.

N

al
K
ri
The X/Y travel distance can be set during the selection of

ZA
Se
EIA-programmed fully automatic tool length measurement with the

A
measuring table.
IM
0: Invalid
X/Y travel distance during EIA-programmed
K
1: Valid
tool measurement
ZA
L94
A
Note :
M
It is invalid to set this parameter under laser tool measuring equipment

YA
specifications.
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
The offset number is auto-set during EIA-programmed tool measurement

ig
data setting.
yr
0: Invalid
op
Offset number auto-setting for 1: Valid

C
EIA-programmed tool measurement

Note :
L95
When making the auto-setting function valid, see the description of L96.
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-462
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The amount of shifting for TNo. during offset number auto-setting for
EIA-programmed tool measurement data setting.
[Offset No.] = [TNo. setting] + [L96 setting]
Amount of shifting during offset number
auto-setting for EIA-programmed tool
Note : Valid only when L95 = 1.
measurement
L96
.
Program type E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
1 - 999: M-code of the specified number
gh
1000: None
ri
Other than above: M149
ll
M-code to be output when selecting menu
.A
function for the MDI tool designation
N
L97
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
Specify the muximum tool length for the MDI laser tool length
ZA
Se
measurement.
A
IM
Max. tool length for laser tool length

K
measurement
ZA
L98
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c
Setting range 99999999

ht
Specify the cycle time at which the operational status management data
ig
for the day is to be saved as a file on the hard disk.

yr
Note :
op
Cycle time for saving the operational status 1. If the setting is 0, the data will be saved each minute.
C
management data 2. If the setting is –1, the data will be saved only when the date
changes or when NC power is turned off.
L99
Program type M, E
Unit min
2-463
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
[INTE e-HII]
Approach point for tool
L103: X
L100: X
Machine
d .
zero point
ve
L102: Z
s er
re
L100 Laser sensor position X
ts
gh
L101 Laser sensor position Y L101: Y
L102 Laser sensor position Z
ri
ll
L103 Approach point X for laser tool
.A
L100
N
L104 Approach point Y for laser tool
to
O
diameter measurement L98
TI
L105 L105: Z
L105 Approach point Z for laser tool length
60
measurement A
R
40
length measurement
PO
29
[INTE e-VII]
o.
O
N
Machine
C
zero point Machine

al
zero point
K
L100: X
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
L104: Y
L105: Z L102: Z
ZA
L98
A
M
L101: Y
YA
Program type M, E
3
Conditions At power on Approach point for tool

01

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in diameter measurement length measurement
)2

(c
Select the measuring equipment to be used to perform MDI tool

ht
measurements and EIA tool measurements.

ig
yr
0: Measuring table
1: Laser tool measuring equipment
op
Measuring equipment selection

C
L106
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-464
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select a rotational reference coordinate system for WPC-th.

0: Workpiece coordinates (Index angle B)
1: Machine coordinates
Selection of a rotational reference
coordinate system for WPC-th
L106
(bit 1)
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Measuring table (see L22 to L26)
gh
1: TOOL EYE (see BA95 to BA102)
ri
ll
.A
Selection of measuring equipment
N
L106
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Select whether workpiece measurement results and tool measurement

ZA
Se
results are to be stored into tool data of the lower turret.

A
0: Measurement results are stored into lower-turret tool data

IM
1: Measurement results are not stored into lower-turret tool data

—
K
ZA
L106
A
(bit 3)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Specify whether to enable or disable the fixed amount compensation

ig
function.
yr
0: Disabled
op
1: Enabled
C
—
L106
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-465
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Select whether the user-defined angle setting for the B-axis in the
coordinate measurement unit and workpiece measurement unit is to be
made valid or invalid.
B-axis user-defined angle setting in the 0: Invalid
coordinate measurement unit and 1: Valid
workpiece measurement unit
L106
(bit 5)
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set the non-compensation area for the tool measurement and execution
gh
timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation.
ri
0: MT Pro scheme
ll
Non-compensation area setting
.A
Non-compensation area for the tool measurement based on the
N
measuring tolerance (K17 and K18) invalid (handled as if K17 = 0
O
and K18 = 100)
TI
Execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation
60
A
The measurement unit is executed whenever the parts count
R
40
reaches same or a multiple of the specified measurement interval in

PO
addition to the first time.

29
Non-compensation area for the tool

R
measurement and execution timing of tool 1: M Pro scheme

o.
and workpiece measurement operation Non-compensation area setting

N
L106
C
Non-compensation area for the tool measurement based on the

al
(bit 6) measuring tolerance (K17 and K18) valid

ri
ZA
Se
Execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation

A
The measurement unit is executed whenever the program

IM
execution count reaches same or a multiple of the specified

measurement interval, omitting the first time.
K
ZA
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select whether the laser measuring menu is to be displayed when laser

ig
tool measuring equipment is selected (L106 bit 0 = 1) as tool measuring

yr
equipment.
op
0: Display of the laser measuring menu

C
Selection of laser measuring menu display 1: No display of the laser measuring menu
L106
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-466
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
In AGX machines, the tool locus (on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK
display) on the following coordinate is drawn by the EIA/ISO program.
0: Loft on the standard coordinates system
1: Loft on the machine coordinates system
Tool path drawing
L107 Note :
(bit 0) When 1 (drawing on the machine coordinate) is selected, the loft does
not correspond to the form made on the MAZATROL coordinates
system. However, 1 makes a loft corresponding to the tool movement of
the machine.
.
Program type E
d
ve
Conditions Immediate (For AGX series)
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set whether the tailstock function is to be made valid or invalid.
gh
0: Tailstock function invalid
ri
1: Tailstock function valid
ll
.A
Tailstock function valid/invalid
N
L107
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Select whether the tailstock included in the tailstock-equipped machine

ZA
Se
specifications is of the conventional type or the motor-driven type.

A
0: Conventional type
IM
1: Motor-driven type
Tailstock type
K
ZA
L107
A
(bit 2)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select whether the tail thrust is also to be displayed in pounds (lbs).

ig
0: Display off
yr
1: Display on
op
Whether tail thrust is also to be displayed in

C
pounds (lbs)
L107
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-467
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
LBB No. setting for the grooving I.D. tool, threading I.D. tool, or touch
sensor
0: Invalid
1: Valid
—
L107
(bit 4)
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Moves the X-axis to the third zero point and the Y/Z-axes to the
gh
respective zero points.
ri
1: Moves the X-axis to the third zero point and the Y/Z-axes to the
respective second zero points.
ll
XYZ-axis operation for the first T-command
.A
after cycle start
N
L107
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.

N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: Does not operate the A-axis.

ZA
Se
1: Returns the A-axis to its zero point.

A
IM
A-axis operation for the first T-command

K
after cycle start

ZA
L107
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
(For AGX series)
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Heavy tool designation valid

ig
1: Heavy tool designation invalid

yr
op
C
Heavy tool designation valid/invalid

L107
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-468
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value (0)
—
L108
(bit 0)
to
(bit 4)
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set whether the C-axis coordinate obtained by C-axis coordinate rotation
gh
in the indexing unit is to be incorporated into the path and shape drawings
on the TOOL PATH CHECK, TRACE, and SHAPE CHECK displays of
ri
Incorporating the C-axis coordinate into the VRX machine.
ll
the TOOL PATH CHECK, TRACE, and
.A
0: Incorporation valid.
SHAPE CHECK displays of the VRX 1: Incorporation invalid (M640M-5X compatible).
N
L108 machine
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Fixed value (0)

ZA
Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
L108
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Set whether, during tool path check of the MAZATROL program on the
ig
TOOL PATH CHECK display of a machine having a turning function, the

yr
tool nose of the milling tool is to be displayed with the tool diameter
similarly to the M640M Pro or with a tool nose mark similarly to the
op
Displaying the milling tool nose in the M640MT Pro.

C
MAZATROL program of the TOOL PATH

0: Display with tool diameter (M640M Pro compatible)
CHECK display
L108 1: Display with tool nose mark (M640MT Pro compatible)
(bit 7) Note :
1. A tool nose mark is always displayed when the tool path of the
EIA/ISO program is checked.
Program type M 2. For a machine without a turning function, this parameter is invalid
Conditions Immediate and the display is always made with the tool diameter.
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-469
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the relationship between axial directions of the two axes, on the
machine coordinate system, for which software limit relative position is
checked.
0: Same direction
1: Reverse directions
Example :
When checking the software limit relative position between the Z2- and
W-axis, the positive (+) direction of the W-axis on the machine
coordinate system may be the same or reverse direction of the positive
(+) direction of the Z2-axis depending on the machine model.
.d
Axial direction for checking the software
ve
limit relative position Set “0” if the positive (+) direction of the Z2- and W-axis is the same on
er
the machine coordinate system as shown in Fig. 1. Conversely, if the
Bit 0: Axial direction (1st set of axes)
direction is reverse as shown in Fig. 2, then set “1”.
s
L109 Bit 1: Axial direction (2nd set of axes)
re
(bit 0) Bit 2: Axial direction (3rd set of axes) Fig. 1
ts
to Bit 3: Axial direction (4th set of axes)
gh
W-axis
(bit 3)
ri
+
ll
.A
Z2-axis +
N
O
TI
Fig. 2
60
A
R
40
W-axis
PO
29
+
R
Program type M, E
o.
O
N

+
C
Z2-axis
al
Unit —
K
ri
ZA
Setting range 0, 1
Se
Selection of formula to be used for calculating the horsepower and thrust

IM
on the TOOL DATA display with [AUTO SET]

0: M640M compatible scheme
K
ZA
Formula selection for calculating 1: New scheme

horsepower and thrust on the TOOL DATA
A
display with [AUTO SET]

L109
M
YA
(bit 4)
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range 0, 1
ig
yr
When [TEACH] is tapped while the lower turret is selected in the basic
coordinate system unit,
op
0: Causes Alarm 1450 SELECT LOWER TURRET

C
Teaching when the lower turret is selected 1: Enables teaching only along the Z- and C-axis.
in the basic coordinate system unit (WPC) (With other axes, Alarm 1450 SELECT LOWER TURRET is caused.)
L109
(bit 5)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-470
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
—
L109
(bit 6)
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
Fixed value
N
L109
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
76543210
ZA
Se
A
IM
Opposed-spindle lathe specifications

Vertically inverted spindle specifications
K
Axis name of the secondary spindle

ZA
0: Z/C-axis
A
1: W/U-axis
M
YA
Display of “section to be machined” in the milling

tool sequence
—
3
0: Disabled
01
1: Enabled
L110
)2
RAM spindle specification (e-V RAM)

(c
Correction axis for LENGTH B

ht
0: X-axis
ig
1: Y-axis (VARIAXIS Turning Specifications)

yr
op
Lower turret specification

0: Horizontal
C
1: Vertical
Program type M, E Z-axis direction
Conditions At power on 0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
Unit —
2-471
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Output
1: Do not output
T-code in the index unit to be executed

before the pallet change unit
L111
(bit 5)
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Fixed value (1)
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
L111
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
While tailstock pushing state is released, interference check between the

ZA
Se
barrier and the software limit is

A
0: Executed
IM
1: Not executed
Whether interference check is executed or
K
not while tailstock pushing state is released

ZA
L111
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-472
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Whether traction tailstock is present or absent

0: Without traction tailstock
1: With traction tailstock
Whether carriage-connection steadyrest 1 is
present or absent
0 : Without carriage-connection steadyrest 1
— 1 : With carriage-connection steadyrest 1
d .
ve
L112
present or absent
er
s
re
1 : With carriage-connection steadyrest 2
ts
gh
present or absent
ri
ll
.A
Program type M, E Whether carriage-connection steadyrest 4 is
present or absent
N
O
Unit —
TI
60
Setting range Binary, eight digits A

R
40
Set the axis to be taken as the check reference in software limit check in
PO
29
the approaching or separating direction. Specify the axis number by that

Software limit relative position check – of NC.
R
o.
Check reference axis

O
The checking function will be invalid if the number is missing or if an

N
L113 1st set of axes invalid number is set.

al
L113
K
L114 2nd set of axes

ri
ZA
L115 3rd set of axes

to
Se
L116 4th set of axes

A
L116
IM
Program type M, E
K
ZA
A
Unit —
M
YA
Set the check target axis corresponding to the axis set as the check
3
reference (parameter L113 to L116) for checking the software limit

01
Software limit relative position check – relative position. Specify the axis number by that of NC.
Check target axis
)2
The checking function will be invalid if the number is missing or if an

L117 1st set of axes invalid number is set.
(c
L117 L118 2nd set of axes

ht

to
ig
L120 4th set of axes

yr
L120
op
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-473
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
For arbitrary two axes that move on the same slideway, the limit of
distance those axes can approach with each other is set to prevent
interference. If they are going to move closer beyond the distance set at
this parameter, software limit alarm is output and they stop moving. Using
parameters L121 to L124, the limit distance in the approaching direction
can be set for up to four axes.
Set the machine coordinate of the check target axis, set at parameters
L117 to L120, existing at the permissible closest position from the check
reference axis, set at parameters L113 to L116, which is located at the
home position.
d.
ve
Example:
er
In the example shown below, if the W-axis and the Z2-axis are defined
as the check reference axis and the check target axis, respectively,
s
re
move the Z2-axis close to the W-axis, which is located at the home
position, up to the position just before they interfere with each other, and
ts
set the machine coordinate of the Z2-axis located at that position. If zero
gh
Software limit relative position check –
Limit distance in the approaching direction is entered, the checking function in the approaching direction will be
ri
invalid. Note that the check is possible only for the combination of NC
L121 1st set of axes
ll
axes.
.A
L121 L122 2nd set of axes
to
N
L124 4th set of axes Machine coordinate W = –100.
O
L124
TI
60
A W
Z2
R
40
PO
29
X2
R
o.
O
N
Lower turret Machine coordinate Z2 = 496.

al
W-axis machine
ri
machine zero point

ZA
zero point
Se
Machine coordinate W = 0
IM
K
ZA
Z2-axis
A
M
Program type M, E
YA
L121 W-axis machine

Conditions Immediate zero point
Lower turret
3
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in machine zero point

01

)2
Specify the time constant for smoothing the tool attitude during tool tip
(c
point control.
ht
This time constant is valid only when all the following conditions are
ig
satisfied:
yr
Rotational axis prefiltering time constant  High-speed smooth interpolation is valid (G05P02, G61.1, F3 bit 0 =
op
1)
C
L125  Rotational axis prefiltering is valid (F36 bit 7 = 1)

 Tool tip point control (G43.4, G43.5) is on
 Cutting feed is on
Program type E
Even when the above conditions are met, if the setting of L125 is 0,
Conditions Immediate rotational axis prefiltering will be invalid.
Unit ms
2-474
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Positioning direction of the -axis for oblique plane indexing specified in

ANGLE (plane angle) of the surface definition sequence.
0: Makes the sign of the plane angle value invalid and positions the
-axis in its minus direction.
1: Makes the sign of the plane angle value valid and if the plane angle
is plus, positions the -axis in its plus direction or if the plane angle
is minus, positions the -axis in its minus direction.
2: Makes the sign of the plane angle value invalid and positions the
-axis in its plus direction.
If the setting of this parameter is other than the above, the value of L126
d .
Positioning direction of the head rotation will be handled as 1.
ve
-axis for oblique plane indexing
er
<Example of operation with 0 assigned to L126 and 45° as a plane angle>
L126
s
Head rotation -axis = –114.4698°
re
Table rotation B-axis = 65.5302°
ts
gh
– –
ri
ll
.A
N
+B
O
+B
TI
60
Program type M, E A
R
40
Conditions Immediate +B –
PO
29
Unit —
R
(For AGX series)

o.
O
N
This parameter functions as a filter to smoothen the waveform command

al
specified for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.

ri
ZA
<Type of feed and acceleration/deceleration>

Se
Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage)

A
L = Post-interpolation Linear acceleration/deceleration

IM
L129 G1 time constant S = Pre-interpolation S-shaped acceleration/deceleration

L129 L130 G0 time constant
K
G64 mode G61.1 mode

ZA
L130 G0 L S
Auto- G1 L S
A
matic
M
Positioning to fixed points

Program type M, E L L
YA
(for ATC, APC, etc.)

Conditions After stop of axis movement Manual Axis feed L
3
Unit ms
01
Linear acc. & dec. S-shaped acc. & dec.

)2
Speed Speed
(c
ht
Time Time
ig
Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage)

yr
L131 G1 time constant

op
L131 L132 G0 time constant

C
L132
Program type M, E
Unit ms
2-475
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
<For tool tilt type (Example: VERSATECH)>

<For tool tilt type> of the tool control rotary axis (at the root side).
Tool control rotary axis offset Setting range: –30000 to 30000
First rotary axis horizontal offset
Setting a value exceeding the upper (lower) limit has the same effect as
<For table tilt type (B-axis tilting table setting the upper (lower) limit.
specifications)>
L133 B-axis rotation center displacement (X-axis <For table tilt type (B-axis tilting table specifications) (Example:
direction) VARIAXIS)>
Sets the displacement of the actual center of B-axis rotation from the
d .
reference position in the X-axis direction. Specify a minus value when
ve
the actual center of B-axis rotation is located at the plus side in the X-axis
er
direction with respect to the reference position.
s
Program type —
re
Setting range: –10000 to 10000
ts
gh
Unit 0.0001 mm setting the upper (lower) limit.
ri
Setting range See explanation to the right.
ll
.A
N
O
<For tool tilt type> root side) in the vertical axis direction.
TI
Tool control rotary axis offset
60
First rotary axis vertical offset A

R
40
<For table tilt type (A-axis tilting table

PO
setting the upper (lower) limit.

29
specifications)>
L134 A-axis rotation center displacement (Y-axis
R
<For table tilt type (A-axis tilting table specifications) (Example:

o.
direction) VARIAXIS)>
N
Sets the displacement of the actual center of A-axis rotation from the
al
reference position in the Y-axis direction. Specify a minus value when

ri
ZA
the actual center of A-axis rotation is located at the plus side in the Y-axis
Se
Program type — direction with respect to the reference position.

A
IM
Conditions After stop of axis movement Setting range: –10000 to 10000

Unit 0.0001 mm Setting a value exceeding the upper (lower) limit has the same effect as
K
setting the upper (lower) limit.

ZA
Setting range See explanation to the right.

A

M
YA
<For tool tilt type> root side) in the height axis direction.
3
Tool control rotary axis offset Setting range: –30000 to 30000

01
First rotary axis height offset

)2
<For table tilt type> setting the upper (lower) limit.

(c
(A-(B-)axis rotation center displacement

L135 <For table tilt type (Example: VARIAXIS)>
ht
(Z-axis direction))
Sets the displacement of the actual center of A-(B-)axis rotation from the
ig
reference position in the Z-axis direction. Specify a minus value when

yr
the actual center of A-(B-)axis rotation is located at the plus side in the
op
Z-axis direction with respect to the reference position.

Program type E
C

Unit — setting the upper (lower) limit.
2-476
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
<For tool tilt type only (Example : VERSATECH)>

Set the distance along the horizontal axis from the spindle edge to the
rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side).
Tool rotational axis offset
horizontal axis offset amount for the 2nd
rotational axis
L136
d .
Program type —
ve
er
s
Unit 0.0001 mm
re
ts
gh
Set the distance along the vertical axis from the spindle edge to the
ri
ll
.A
N
vertical axis offset amount for the 2nd
O
rotational axis
L137
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type —
R

o.
O
N
Unit 0.0001 mm
al

ri
ZA
Se

A
Set the distance along the height axis from the spindle edge to the
IM

K

ZA
height axis offset amount for the 2nd

rotational axis
A
L138
M
YA
3
Program type —
01

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm
(c

ht
ig
yr
op
Minimum tool diameter of the measurable

C
chamfering tool
(For fully automatic tool measurement with
measuring table)
L139
Program type M, E
Unit 0.1 mm/0.01 in
2-477
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: 50 ms
1: 50 ms
2: 100 ms
Waiting time for the completion signal of 3: 150 ms
M35 (tool breakage detection) from PLC 
L140 
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 50 ms
s
re
ts
gh
ri
Software limit relative position check (for
ll
.A
auxiliary equipment axis) – Task delay
period
N
L141
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit 0.1 ms
O
N

al
Set the cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration

ri
ZA
control when the Smooth corner control function is valid.

Se
A
IM

Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational
K
acceleration/deceleration control
ZA
L145
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit mm/min [Related parameters]

)2
L74
(c
Set the time constant for pre-interpolational linear control during cutting
ht
feed rate acceleration/deceleration when the Smooth corner control

ig
function is valid.
yr

op
Time constant for pre-interpolational linear

C
control during cutting feed rate

acceleration/deceleration
L146
Program type M, E
Unit ms [Related parameters]
L75
2-478
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Software acceleration/deceleration filter G1 time constant (1st stage) used

when the Smooth corner control function is valid.

Software acceleration/deceleration filter G1
time constant (1st stage)
L147
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit ms [Related parameters]
L129
s
re
ts
Software acceleration/deceleration filter G1 time constant (2nd stage)
gh
used when the Smooth corner control function is valid.
ri
ll
.A
Software acceleration/deceleration filter G1
time constant (2nd stage)
N
L148
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit ms
O
L130
N

al
Sets the rapid feed rate to be used before interpolation when a feed
ri
ZA
command involving a rotary axis is specified during tool tip point control
Se
with the smooth corner control function enabled.

A

IM
Rapid feed rate before interpolation for

rapid feed command (involving rotary axis) When “0” is set, the setting of L145 is assumed.
K
ZA
during tool tip point control

L149
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit mm/min
L150
)2

(c
Sets the rapid feed time constant to be used before interpolation when a
ht
feed command involving a rotary axis is specified during tool tip point
ig
Smooth corner control function: control with the smooth corner control function enabled.
yr
Rapid feed time constant before

op
interpolation for rapid feed command When “0” is set, the setting of L146 is assumed.
C
(involving rotary axis) during tool tip point

L150 control
Program type M, E
Unit ms
L149
2-479
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the thickness of the small-diameter table.

The thickness of the small-diameter table is taken into consideration in the
software limit check with respect to the spindle when the tilt table is
indexed in the range from 90 to 180.
When 0 is set, the small-diameter table is not taken into consideration.

Small-diameter table thickness
L151
d .
ve
L151
L82
ser
re
Program type M, E
ts
gh
Unit 0.0001 mm L82
ri
Setting range 0 to 99999999 (Function dedicated to machines equipped with the tilt table)
ll
.A
Display of the [PALLET No.SET] menu item
N
0: Displayed
O
1: Not displayed
TI
60
Selection of [PALLET No.SET] menu item A

R
40
display Note :
L171
PO
29
This parameter is valid when L46 > 1.

(bit 1)
R
o.
O
N
C
al
Program type M, E
K
ri
ZA
Se
Unit —
IM
Setting range 0, 1
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-480
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the clamp value for the acceleration in orbit machining.

When either L270 or L271 is a negative value or 0: L74 and L75 are used.
Other: L270 and L271 are used.
Feedrate for clamping the acceleration in
orbit machining
L270
.
Program type E
d
ve
er
Unit mm/min
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Time constant for clamping the acceleration
.A
in orbit machining
N
L271
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit ms
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-481
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-13 Machine parameter FEED VEL. (M)
Classification MACHINE Display title FEED VEL.
The feed rate for moving each axis under the G00 command during
automatic operation
The feed rate for moving each axis in either the manual rapid feed mode
or the zero-point return mode
Rapid feed rate
M1
d .
ve
er
Program type M, E
Note :
s
re
Initial zero-point return is performed at the feed rate set in parameter
Unit mm/min (°/min)
ts
M2.
gh
ri
The feed rate for moving each axis during initial zero-point return
ll
(reference-point return) at power on
.A
Feed rate
N
O
Feed rate for initial zero-point return
TI
M2
60
A
M2
R
40
PO
N8
29
R
o.
Program type M, E
O
N
Watchdog
C

Zero point
al
Unit mm/min (°/min) (reference point)

ri
ZA
MPL520
Se

A
The limit of cutting feed rate during automatic operation

IM
Even if a feed rate higher than this parameter setting is specified, the
K
latter governs.
ZA
Cutting feed rate limit

A
M
YA
M3
3
01
Program type M, E
)2

(c

ht
ig

yr
op
C
2-482
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The machine coordinating values of the point to which each axis is to

move back under G28 command (first zero-point return).
M4 First zero point

Offset of machine coordinates system
M4
Machine M4
zero point
Program type M, E
d .
MPL521
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
ts
gh
move back under the G30 command (second zero-point return).
ri
ll
.A
Second zero-point coordinating value Second zero point
M5
N
M5
O
TI
60
A
Machine M5
R
40

PO
29

R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm
O
N

al

ri
ZA
Se
move back under the G30P3 command (third zero-point return).

A
IM
Third zero-point coordinating value

K
M6 Third zero point

ZA
M6
A
M
YA
Machine M6
3
MPL521
01

)2
Unit 0.0001 mm
(c

ht

ig
move back under the G30P4 command (fourth zero-point return).

yr
op
C
Fourth zero-point coordinating value Fourth zero point

M7
M7
Machine M7
Unit 0.0001 mm
2-483
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The maximum moving zone permissible under the machine specifications

Set the machine coordinate values.
Example :
+Y
Maximum software limit specified by
manufacturer (+ direction)
M8
M8 (Y-axis)
+X
Moving zone
Program type M, E M9 (Y-axis)
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°
s
re
M9 (X-axis) M8 (X-axis)
ts
MPL522
gh
ri
Note : This parameter is invalid when M8 = M9.
ll
Maximum software limit specified by
.A
manufacturer (– direction)
N
M9
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

O
N

al
Select a unit of command from the following table and set it.
ri
ZA
Se
* micron system
A
IM
1000* 100* 10* 1* 0.1*

Command unit
K
– 10000 1000 100 10 1

ZA
2° index 20000 2000 200 20 2

M10
A
5° index 50000 5000 500 50 5

M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
Register the address of each axis in hexadecimal numbers in ASCII code.

ig
yr
X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th-axis 5th-axis 6th-axis

op
Address name X Y Z A B C
C
Coding of address of axis

Set value &58 &59 &5A &41 &42 &43
M11
Fixed value
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-484
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Register the incremental axes respectively in hexadecimal numbers of the

ASCII code.
Coding of incremental axis
M12
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Specify the address name of the axes to be used for display, by the
gh
appropriate hexadecimal number of the ASCII code.
ri
For reverse display, set up the most significant bit.
ll
Example :
.A
Axis name (for display)
1. Reverse display of “C”
N
M13 C : &0043  Reverse display of “C”: &00C3
O
TI
2. Reverse display of “X1”
60
X1 : &5831  Reverse display of “X1”: &D831

A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range &0 to &FFFF

al
K
ri
When the watchdog-less home position is set, it will be shifted through the
ZA
Se
distance
A
IM
<If returning to the zero point is not yet executed>

K
M14
ZA
Shifting distance of the watchdog-less home

A
position
M
M14 Zero point Signal ON position

YA
3
<If returning to the zero point is executed>

01
New M14
)2
Ex-M14
(c
Program type M, E
ht
ig
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001° Zero Ex-zero M14 changing position

yr
point point
op
C
2-485
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify the name of the address to be used for axis name changing
(G110), by the appropriate hexadecimal number of the ASCII code.
Axis name (for axis name changing)
M15
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
The distance from the grid point to the actual zero point that exists during
gh
zero-point return (reference point return) in the initial operation after
power-on.
ri
ll
M16
.A
Zero-point shift amount/grid shift amount
N
O
M16
TI
60
A Watchdog
R
40
Grid point Zero point

PO
(Reference point)
29
Program type M, E MPL527

o.
Note :
N
C
This parameter specifies a grid shift amount when bit 6 of parameter

al
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

K
M20 is 1.
ri
ZA

Se
76543210
IM
Unit of output from MCP to servo amplifier

K
0: Millimeter
ZA
1: Inch
A
Direction of machine zero-point return

M
0: (+) direction
YA
1: (–) direction
Error correction schema with servo on
3
0: To correct with motor

01
Axis control flag 1: To correct with counter display

)2
Type of axis
M17 0: Linear
(c
1: Rotational
ht
Rotational direction of servo motor (Note)

ig
(for movement in (+) direction)

yr
0: CW
op
1: CCW
If axis is removed:
C
0: Alarm
1: No alarm
Usually, specify the rotational direction for the motor when viewed from
the front (the opposite side of the encoder). For “Spindle-Cs control”,
Unit — however, specify the rotational direction for the motor when viewed
Setting range Binary, eight digits from the rear.
2-486
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Motor type with frame

1: Built-in type
Spindle C-axis
M18
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
.d
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
0: Fixed point for zero-point return using dog
ts
gh
1: Position existing when power was turned on
ri
ll
.A
Machine zero-point position
M18
N
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
Set the axis to perform virtual dog-type zero-point return.

ri
ZA
Se
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
IM
K
Virtual axis with dog

ZA
M18
A
(bit 3)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Invalid
ig
1: Valid
yr
op
C
Dog-less axis
M18
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-487
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Radius
1: Diameter
X-axis current position display in

radius/diameter
M18
(bit 5)
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
.A
Automatic/manual simultaneous
absolute-value updating
N
M18
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Invalid
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
M18 bit 7
0 1
K
Absolute-value detection 0 Dog type Simplified detection position

ZA
SV17 bit 7
M18 1 Dog type Absolute detection position
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Set whether or not the value of parameter M1 (rapid feed rate) is

ig
transmitted to servo parameter at power-on.

yr
op
0 : Transmit (same as before)

C
1 : Do not transmit
Transmission of rapid feed rate value to
SV69/SV70
M19
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-488
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0 : NC
1 : Servo
Select an in-position checking method

M19
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
Setting prohibited
ri
ll
.A
—
N
M19
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
0: No check
ZA
Se
1: Alarm if returned from the dog

A
IM
Zero-point operation starting position check

K
ZA
M19
A
(bit 5)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0 : G01
ig
1 : G00
yr
op
Backlash scheme to be adopted for

C
dog-type returning to zero point

M19
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-489
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Rotational direction of the rotary axis (for

dynamic offset II)
M20
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Normal
gh
1: KOMET tool axis
ri
ll
.A
KOMET tool axis selection
N
M20
O
(bit 1)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
0: With the ISS being selected, the stop is delayed by about 140 ms than
ZA
Se
otherwise.
A
Example :
IM
Type of stopping the motion of feed and The stop position for combining the tailstock or steady rest will be
rapid traverse for the INTELLIGENT shifted accordingly.
K
ZA
SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) 1: Independently of whether the ISS is selected or canceled, the axis
M20
movement will come to a stop in one and the same position.
A
(bit 2)
M
Example :
YA
Independently of the ISS, the stop for combining the tailstock or

Program type M, E steady rest will occur in one and the same position. Changing the
3
parameter setting from 0 to 1, therefore, must be followed by a

01
readjustment of the combining position.)
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Select the method of displaying the current position of NC steady rest

ig
axis.
yr
0: Display the value considering the reference workpiece zero point (S23)
op
and WPC-Z.
Current position display of NC steady rest
C
1: Display the same value as the machine position.

axis
M20 * This is valid for current position display on the POSITION, VIRTUAL
MACHINING and TOOL PATH CHECK displays.
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-490
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Include
1: Do not include
Warning check for alarm 67 HI-SPEED

SYNCTAP AXIS ALARM
M20
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Normal
gh
1: Multi-axis integrated type amplifier
ri
ll
Multi-axis integrated type amplifier
.A
specification
N
M20
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
This parameter determines the use of parameter M16.

ZA
Se
0: Use parameter M16 for zero-point shift amount.

A
IM
1: Use parameter M16 for grid shift amount.

Switching between zero-point shift amount
K
and grid shift amount

ZA
M20
A
(bit 6)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Normal
ig
1: GL-axis
yr
op
C
GL-axis specification
M20
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-491
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Linear acceleration/
deceleration
First-order lag Rapid-feed
acceleration/
Second-order lag deceleration type
—
Exponential acceleration/
linear deceleration
M21
Linear acceleration/
d .
deceleration
ve
First-order lag Cutting-feed
er
acceleration/
s
Second-order lag deceleration type
re
Program type M, E Exponential acceleration/
ts
linear deceleration
gh
Unit — Time constants for each type of acceleration/deceleration control must be
ri
set using parameters N1 through N6.
ll
.A
76543210
N
Deceleration time constant for rapid-feed
O
exponential acceleration/linear deceleration
TI
0: Parameter N3
60
—
A 1: Parameter N3 × 2
R
40
PO
29
Type of stroke-end stop

M22
00: Linear deceleration
R
o.
10: Position-loop stepped stop

N
01: Speed-loop stepped stop

al
11: Position-loop stepped stop

K
Program type M, E
ri
ZA
Se
Unit —
IM

K
0: NC control axes
ZA
1: PLC control axes

A
M
Selection of NC control axes/PLC control

YA
axes
M23
3
01
(bit 0)
)2
(c
Program type M, E
ht
ig
yr
Unit —
op
Setting range 0, 1
C
2-492
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the axis for which the MP scale offset method is adopted.
0: Normal
1: MP scale offset method
MP scale offset method

M23
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set an access inhibition area in the inclined-axis control software limit
gh
area consisting of the X-axis and the Yt-axis.

ri
Parameters M25 and M26 are valid only for the X-axis and the
Yt-axis.
ll
.A
 If the X-axial and Yt-axial upper limits (M25) and lower limits (M26)
are all zeros, the illegal axis area check function is invalid.
N
O
 Use the parameter BA126 to select Type A or B (BA126 bit 1).
TI
Illegal axis area upper limits (Type A)  When the selection of whether to make this interference checking
60
A
function valid or invalid is to be made according to the B-axis angle,
R
40
M25 specify the interference checking B-axis angle range.

PO
29
(Type A) The interference checking function will be valid when the following
R
o.
1. M26 (B-axis)  B-axis angle  M25 (B-axis)

N
2. M25 (B-axis) = M26 (B-axis) = 0

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
<Type A (BA126 bit 1 = 0)>

A
Program type M, E
IM
X-axial upper limit M25 (X) Upper

Conditions After stop of movement interference
K
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001° Yt-axial upper soft-limit area

ZA
M8 (Yt)
A
Yt-axial (A)
lower limit
M
M26 (Yt) (X,Yt) = (0,0)

YA
Lower
3
interference area
01
Yt-axial
(B) upper limit
)2
M25 (Yt)
Yt-axial
(c
lower
ht
soft-limit
Illegal axis area lower limits (Type A) M9 (Yt)
ig
M26 X-axial
yr
X-axial lower X-axial upper

soft-limit lower limit soft-limit
op
(Type A) M26 (X)

M9 (X) M8 (X)
C
Shaded area (A) in the above diagram, determined by

parameters M8 (X), M8 (Yt), M25 (X), and M25 (Yt), is referred
Upper: to as the illegal axis area.
An alarm will result if an attempt is made to move the machine
into the area.
Program type M, E Shaded area (B) in the above diagram, determined by
Conditions After stop of movement parameters M9 (X), M9 (Yt), M26 (X), and M26 (Yt), is referred
Lower: to as the illegal axis area.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001° An alarm will result if an attempt is made to move the machine
into the area.
2-493
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set an access inhibition area in the inclined-axis control software limit

area consisting of the X-axis and the Yt-axis.
 Parameters M25 and M26 are valid only for the X-axis and the
Yt-axis.
 If the X-axial and Yt-axial upper limits (M25) and lower limits (M26)
are all zeros, the illegal axis area check function is invalid.
 Use the parameter BA126 to select Type A or B (BA126 bit 1).
 When the selection of whether to make this interference checking
Illegal axis area upper limits (Type B)
function valid or invalid is to be made according to the B-axis angle,
M25 specify the interference checking B-axis angle range.
d .
The interference checking function will be valid when the following
ve
(Type B)
er
1. M26 (B-axis)  B-axis angle  M25 (B-axis)
s
re
2. M25 (B-axis) = M26 (B-axis) = 0
ts
gh
<Type B (BA126 bit 1 = 1)>
ri
Program type M, E X-axial upper
ll
Yt-axial upper Upper
soft-limit
.A
Conditions After stop of movement limit M25 (Yt) interference area
M8 (X)
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°
N
O
Setting range ±99999999 (A)
TI
X-axial (X,Yt) = (0,0)
60
A
lower limit
R
40
M26 (X) X-axial

PO
Lower upper limit

29
interference area M25 (X)

R
(B)
o.
O
N
X-axial
C
Yt-axial lower
lower
al
soft-limit M9 (Yt)
soft-limit
ri
ZA
M9 (X)
Se
Illegal axis area lower limits (Type B)

A
Yt-axial upper
IM
M26 soft-limit M8 (Yt) Yt-axial lower

limit M26 (Yt)
(Type B)
K
ZA
A
Shaded area (A) in the above diagram, determined by

M

Upper: to as the illegal axis area.
YA

into the area.
3
Program type M, E Shaded area (B) in the above diagram, determined by

01

Conditions After stop of movement Lower: to as the illegal axis area.
)2

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°
(c
into the area.

ht
ig
Set the value that determines the maximum allowable value (Amax) of the
yr
acceleration that occurs between blocks.

op
M27 100 – N26 2

Amax = × 60 × 1000 × (mm/ms )
C
Optimum acceleration control N25 100

(Target speed)
Note :
M27 If M27 = 0, M27 is regarded as equal to M1 (rapid feed rate).
If N25 = 0, N25 is regarded as equal to N1 (rapid feed time constant)
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min
2-494
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the rapid feed clamping speed 1 for superposition control.

(Set value for the reference axis and superposition axis to be used during
superposition control.)
 When both the reference axis and superposition axis move at a rapid
Rapid feed clamping speed 1 for feed rate and in the same direction (see Note below), the rapid feed
superposition control rate for superposition will be clamped in accordance with the setting
of M30.
M29  Set M29 to M31 so that the following conditions are satisfied:
M29 (RA) + M31 (SA)  M1 (SA)
M31 (RA) + M29 (SA)  M1 (SA)
.
M30 (RA) + M30 (SA)  M1 (SA)
d
RA: reference axis
ve
Program type M, E M31 (RA) + M31 (SA)  M1 (SA) SA: superposition axis
er
Conditions After stop of axis movement Note :
s
re
Unit mm/min Whether the axes move in the same direction or in different directions is
Setting range 0 to 600000 judged from the command and polarity (parameter N21, bit 6).
ts
gh
Set the rapid feed clamping speed for superposition control when both the
ri
reference axis and superposition axis move at a rapid feed rate and in the
same direction (see the Note).
ll
.A
Rapid feed clamping speed 2 for superposition control.)
N
superposition control  Set M29 to M31 so that the following conditions are satisfied:
O
TI
M30 M29 (RA) + M31 (SA)  M1 (SA)
60
M31 (RA) + M29 (SA)  M1 (SA)

A
R
M30 (RA) + M30 (SA)  M1 (SA)
40
RA: reference axis

PO
M31 (RA) + M31 (SA)  M1 (SA) SA: superposition axis

29

R
o.
Conditions After stop of axis movement Whether the axes move in the same direction or in different directions is
N
Unit mm/min judged from the command and polarity (parameter N21, bit 6).
al

ri
ZA
Se
Set the cutting feed clamping speed for superposition control.

A
IM
superposition control.)
K
 Set M29 to M31 so that the following conditions are satisfied:

Cutting feed clamping speed for
ZA
superposition control M29 (RA) + M31 (SA)  M1 (SA)

M31 (RA) + M29 (SA)  M1 (SA)
A
M31 M30 (RA) + M30 (SA)  M1 (SA)

M
RA: reference axis

M31 (RA) + M31 (SA)  M1 (SA) SA: superposition axis
YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2

(c
Unit mm/min
ht

ig
Set the safety speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 2.

yr
If the operating speed of the axis exceeds the set value in safety
op
supervisory mode 2, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and result
C
in an emergency stop.
Safety speed
(Safety supervisory mode 2)
M32
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min / °/min
2-495
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the safety speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 3.

If the operating speed of the axis exceeds the set value in safety
supervisory mode 3, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and result
in an emergency stop. (Assign a value greater than that of parameter M32
Safety speed to parameter M33.)
M33
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
s
re
ts
Set the safety clamping speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 2.
gh
In safety supervisory mode 2 and while a safety clamping request is in
effect, operation decelerates to the set speed. (Assign a value smaller
ri
than that of parameter M32 to parameter M34.)
ll
Safety clamping speed
.A
N
M34
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.

O
N

al
Set the safety clamping speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 3.

ri
ZA
Se

A
effect, operation decelerates to the set speed. (Assign a value smaller

IM
than that of parameter M33 to parameter M35.)

Safety clamping speed
K

ZA
M35
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3

01

)2

(c
ht
Set to which door group the axis belongs in safety supervisory mode.
ig
yr
op
Speed supervisory door selection

C
(Safety supervisory mode)
M36
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-496
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
A speed clamping signal is output after the axis has decelerated to the
clamping speed. This parameter specifies to what additional percentage
of the safety clamping speed the axis is to be decelerated as the output
timing of the speed clamping signal.
Safety clamping speed reduction judgment
coefficient If 0 is set, the speed clamping signal will be output when the axis
(Safety supervisory mode) decelerates to a 10% additional speed (i.e., 110% of the safety clamping
speed).
M37
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
Set the machine interference detection distances for the INTELLIGENT
gh
SAFETY SHIELD.
ri
Set data so that the primary check distance is longer than the secondary
check distance.
ll
.A
N
Interference check distances for
O
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during
TI
manual operation
60
M38: Primary check distance

A Primary
M38
R
40
interference check
PO
M39: Secondary check distance

29
M39 distance (M38)

R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Secondary interference check

Se
distance (M39)
A
Program type M, E
IM
Note :
K
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

The same value as that of the primary parallel driving control axis
ZA
Setting range 0 to 99999999 should be assigned to the secondary axis.

A
For the machine specifications with a ram spindle, specify the maximum
M
operating range for the ram spindle selection. When ram spindle is
YA
selected, the range specified in these parameters becomes the maximum

operating range, instead of the manufacturer software limits specified in
3
Ram spindle stored stroke end

01
M08/M09.
M40: Upper limit
)2
M40 M41: Lower limit

(c
M41
ht
ig
yr
Program type M, E
op

C
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

2-497
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the machine interference check distance for INTELLIGENT SAFETY

SHIELD during automatic operation
Note :
Interference check distance for The same value as that of the primary parallel driving control axis
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during should be assigned to the secondary axis.
automatic operation
M42
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°
s
re
ts
Set which door signal is input for the axis with door signal input on the
gh
drive side (servo) in safety supervisory mode.
ri
1: Door 1 signal
ll
Selection of a door for signal input on the 2: Door 2 signal
.A
drive side (servo) in safety supervisory
4: Door 3 signal
mode
N
8: Door 4 signal
M45
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
Fixed value
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
M61
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Set the cutting feed rate for variable acceleration control.

ig
When “0” is set, the value set at parameter L74 is assumed.

yr
op
C
Variable acceleration control:

Cutting feed rate
M66

Conditions Immediate L74
Unit mm/min
2-498
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the limit for the rapid traverse rate in orbit machining.
When “0” is set for M67 or the value set for M67 is larger than M1, the
rapid traverse rate is clamped at the value set for M1.
Rapid traverse rate limit in orbit machining
M67
Program type E
.d
ve
er
s
re
Set the limit for the cutting feedrate in orbit machining.
ts
gh
When “0” is set for M68, the cutting feedrate is clamped at the value set
for M3.
ri
When the value set for M68 is larger than M1, the cutting feedrate is
ll
Cutting feedrate limit in orbit machining
.A
clamped at the value set for M1.
N
M68
O
TI
60
Program type E
A
R
40
PO

29

o.
O
N

C
al
Fixed value
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
M70
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
Conditions —
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
0: Invalid
ht
1: Valid
ig
yr
op
Real time tuning II Rapid feed time

C
constant selection
M72
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-499
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-14 Machine parameter TIME CONST. (N)
Classification MACHINE Display title TIME CONST.
Set the time constant to obtain linear acceleration/deceleration of the rapid

feed rate.
Speed
Rapid-feed time constant

M1
(linear acceleration/deceleration)
N1
d .
ve
Time
er
Program type M, E
N1 N1
s
re
MPL523
Unit ms Note :
ts
gh
Setting range 4 to 1800 This parameter is valid only when bit 0 of M21 is 1.
ri
Set the time constant to obtain linear acceleration/deceleration of the
ll
cutting feed rate.
.A
Speed
N
Cutting-feed time constant
O
M3
(linear acceleration/deceleration)
TI
60
N2 A
R
40
PO
29
Time
R
o.
Program type M, E
O
N2 N2
N
MPL523
al
Unit ms Note :
ri
ZA
Se
Setting range 4 to 1800 This parameter is valid only when bit 4 of M21 is 1.
A
First-order lag time constant for rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration

IM
(First-order lag) (Exponential acceleration/

Speed Speed
K
linear deceleration)
ZA
Rapid-feed time constant M1 M1

A
(First-order lag)
M
N3 Time
YA
Time
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
N3 N3 N3 N3 × 2
(c
Unit ms Note :
ht
This parameter is valid only when either bit 1, 2 or 3 of M21 is 1.

ig

yr
op
C
2-500
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the time constant for the filter that further smoothens the speed signal
waveform during rapid feed (G0) operation with shape correction off and
during rapid feed operation in manual operation mode.
The filter will be invalid if 0 is set.
Time constant for post-interpolation rapid
feed acceleration/deceleration filter
N4
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit ms
s
re
First-order lag time constant for cutting-feed acceleration/ deceleration
ts
gh
(First-order lag) (Exponential acceleration/
Speed Speed linear deceleration)
ri
ll
Cutting-feed time constant M3 M3
.A
(First-order lag)
N
N5 Time Time
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E N5 N5 N5 N5 × 2
PO
29

R
Note :
o.
Unit ms
O
N
This parameter is valid only when either bit 5, 6 or 7 of M21 is 1.

C

al
During external deceleration, the position loop is disconnected for the time
ri
ZA
interval set using this parameter and, as a result, the speed becomes
Se
zero.
A
IM
OT time
K
ZA
N7
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit ms
)2

(c
ht
The feed rate at which each axis is moved back to the zero-point
(reference point) after the zero-point watchdog LS (limit switch) has turned
ig
on in the initial operation after power-on.

yr
Feedrate
op
Creeping speed during initial zero-point

C
return
M2
N8
N8
Program type M, E
Conditions After stop of movement Watchdog Zero point
Unit mm/min (°/min) (Reference point)
MPL525
2-501
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The spacing at which the grid point is ignored during zero-point return
(reference point return in the initial operation after power-on) after the
zero-point watchdog LS (limit switch) is turned off. With this parameter,
dispersion in position deviations of the zero point can be avoided.
Amount of grid ignorance during initial
zero-point return
N9
Watchdog
Program type M, E Zero point
d.
(Reference point)
ve
Conditions Immediate N9 MPL526
er
Unit 0.001 mm (0.001°)
The amount of grid ignorance must not exceed 1 grid spacing.
s
re
ts
Set the grid interval of the detector.
gh
Usually, set the same value as the ball screw pitch. However, set the grid
ri
interval of the detector if the grid interval differs from the pitch.
ll
.A
Grid interval
N
N10
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit mm (0.001°)
N

al
K
ri
Machine dependent specific value

ZA
Se
A
IM
—
K
ZA
N12
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht

ig
yr
op
C
N13
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-502
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
N15
Program type —
. d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
N16
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Specify the channel number of the servo amplifier.

ZA
Se
1: 1 ch
A
2: 2 ch
IM
Servo amplifier channel number

K
ZA
N17
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Specify the rotary switch number of the servo amplifier.

ig
0: SW0
yr
1: SW1
op
2: SW2
C
Servo amplifier rotary switch number 3: SW3

4: SW4
N18 5: SW5
6: SW6
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-503
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the system number of the axes.

0: System 1
1: System 2
2: System 3
Axis system number 3: System 4
N19
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
76543210
gh
ri
Linear-type rotational axis (Note)
ll
0: Rotary type
.A
1: Linear type
N
Rotational axis shortcut
O
0: Invalid
TI
1: Valid
60
A
R
40
— Fixed value (0)

PO
29
N21 Fixed value

R
o.
Reference axis for superposition control

N
Superposition axis for superposition control

al
K
ri
Relative polarity of control axis

ZA
Se
Current position immediately after cross machining

A
0: No re-acquisition
IM
1: Re-acquisition
K

ZA
Conditions At power on When M18 bit 0 = 1 (type of C-axis: built-in type), if N21 bit 0 is set to 1
A
(linear type rotational axis), SA46 bit 2 must be set to 0 (C-axis position
Unit —
M
control changeover type: after return to zero point).

YA

0: Positioning
3
01
1: No positioning
)2
Axis selection for positioning during

(c
automatic operation or virtual machining

ht
with 3D interference check

N22
ig
yr
(bit 0)
op
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-504
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Turret C-axis specification

0: Turning spindle side
1: Tool side
Turret C-axis specification (for 3D
interference check during automatic
operation and for virtual machining)
N22
(bit 1)
.
Program type M, E
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select whether or not to perform the command of an axis whose name is
gh
specified with a comma, “ ’,U ”, “ ’,V ” or “ ’,W ”.
(The “ ’,V ” axis command is not dependent on the set value.)
ri
ll
0: Do not perform
.A
Axis for which the axis name is specified
1: Perform
with a comma
N
N22
O
TI
(bit 2)
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type E
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Fixed value
Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
N22
A
(bit 3)
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Fixed value
ig
yr
op
C
—
N22
(bit 4)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-505
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the maximum allowable value, Amax, for the acceleration occurring
between blocks.
M27 100 – N26 2
Amax = × 60 × 1000 × 100 (mm/ms )
N25
Time constant for deceleration rate
calculation Note :
If M27 = 0, M27 is regarded as equal to M1 (rapid feed rate).
N25
If N25 = 0, N25 is regarded as equal to N1 (rapid feed time constant)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit ms
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Accuracy coefficient for deceleration rate
.A
calculation
N
N26
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
Set the rapid feed (linear acceleration/deceleration) time constant for

ri
ZA
Se
superposition control.
A
IM
Note : Set the same value for all axes.

Rapid feed time constant for superposition
K
ZA
N27
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit ms
(c

ht
Set the cutting feed (linear acceleration/deceleration) time constant for

ig
superposition control.
yr
op
Note : Set the same value for all axes.

C
Cutting feed time constant for superposition
N28
Program type M, E
Unit ms
2-506
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Use of this parameter allows further smoothening of the speed signal

waveform during rapid feed with shape correction on.
The filter will be invalid if 0 is set.
Time constant for shape correction rapid

feed acceleration/deceleration filter
N29
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit ms
s
re
ts
Set the cutting feed time constant for a time constant changeover M-code
gh
Cutting feed time constant for time constant command.
ri
changeover M-code command
ll
N30: for M881 command Feed rate
.A
N31: for M882 command
N30 N32: for M883 command
N
O
to
TI
N35
60
N35: for M886 command A

R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
R
Conditions After stop of movement M3 Time

o.
O
N
Unit ms
C
N30 to N35 N30 to N35

al

ri
ZA
Se
If the actual ball screw pitch is a decimal fraction (special gear ratio) with
A
the machine of absolute position specification, input the number of

IM
rotations of the ball screw per rotation of the rotary axis (360 degrees/
actual ball screw pitch).
Multi-turn counter increment with absolute
K
position rotary-type rotational axis in special

ZA
gear ratio
A
N36
M
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
ig
Set the rotational speed of the rotary axis so that the number of rotations
yr
of the ball screw per rotation of the rotary axis (360 degrees/actual ball
screw pitch) will not be a decimal fraction.
op
C
Rotational speed after multi-turn counter

increment with absolute position rotary-type
rotational axis in special gear ratio
N37
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-507
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
N38
Program type —
. d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Real time tuning II Rapid feed time constant, maximum value
gh
The optimum time constant is calculated from the estimated inertia ratio by
ri
setting the maximum and minimum values for the rapid feed time constant
ll
and inertia ratio.
.A
constant, maximum value Rapid feed time constant
N
O
N57
TI
N57
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
N60
R
o.
O
N
Unit ms
C
Inertia ratio
N58 N61
al

ri
ZA
Real time tuning II Minimum inertia ratio

Se
IM
and inertia ratio.
K
Real time tuning II Minimum inertia ratio

ZA
Rapid feed time constant

A
N58
M
N57
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
Conditions Immediate N60

)2
(c
Unit % Inertia ratio

N58 N61
ht

ig
Real time tuning II Rapid feed time constant, minimum value

yr
op
C
and inertia ratio.

constant, minimum value Rapid feed time constant
N60
N57
Program type M, E
Unit ms Inertia ratio
Setting range 0 to 10000 N58 N61
2-508
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Real time tuning II Maximum inertia ratio
and inertia ratio.
Real time tuning II Maximum inertia ratio
Rapid feed time constant
N61
N57
. d
Program type M, E
ve
er
Unit %
s
Inertia ratio
re
Setting range 0 to 65535 N58 N61
ts
The current time constant is used if the difference between the optimum
gh
time constant and current time constant is equivalent to or smaller than the
ri
value set for N63, and the optimum time constant is used if the difference
ll
is greater than the value set for N63.
.A
constant, range of change
N
O
N63
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
o.
O
N
Unit ms
C
al

K
ri
ZA
Set the cutting feed time constant for variable acceleration control.
Se
When “0” is set, the value set at parameter L75 is assumed.

IM
K
Variable acceleration control:

ZA
Cutting feed time constant

A
N66
M
YA
3
Program type M, E L75

01
)2
Unit ms
(c

ht
Axis name specified with 2 characters is

ig
yr
0 : Invalid
op
1 : Valid
C
Axis with a 2-character axis name

N67
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-509
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
—
N67
(bit 1)
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-510
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-15 Machine parameter ANOTHER (S)
Classification MACHINE Display title ANOTHER
Set for each axis the feed forward gain for acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation for the MAZAK Precision Rapid Boring Tornado
Option.
Feed forward gain for the MAZAK Precision

Rapid Boring Tornado Option
S3
d .
ve
er
Program type M, E
s
re
Unit 0.1%
ts
gh
ri
Set for each axis the feed forward gain for acceleration/deceleration
ll
before interpolation.
.A
N
O
Feed forward gain
TI
60
S4 A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
Program type M, E
O
N
al
Unit %
ri
ZA
Se

A
Set the position of the rotational center of the table in the machine
IM
coordinates system.
K
–X
ZA
A
S5
M
YA
Rotational center of the table S5

3
–Y
01
S5 Note :
)2
1. Z-axis data are not required for a machine with a tilting table.
(c
2. This parameter is used to execute the automatic program origin

ht
calculation function (option) for a machine with a tilting table.

ig
yr
op
Program type M, E
(For INTEGREX series)
C
Conditions At power on (For dynamic offset)

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (For HV machining)
2-511
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When movement is beyond the length set by this parameter during the
power off, it activates the alarm mode.
If 0 is set, no alarm occurs.
Absolute position detection parameter
S6
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in/
Unit
s
0.0001°
re
ts
This parameter specifies the range of rotating machining for the table
gh
rotating machining  (X-B machining).
ri
Set the upper limit (on Z-axis) of the machining range in the machine
ll
coordinates system.
.A
Upper limit (on Z-axis) of machining range The machine recognizes that it is prohibited to move beyond this limit in
for table rotating machining  the negative direction.
N
O
S7
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
o.
(For HV machining)
N
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

C
al

K
ri
ZA
Specify the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration feed-forward gain

Se
levels for each axis.

A
IM
K
Feed-forward gain G00

ZA
A
S8
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Specify the axis of rotation of the tilting table in machine coordinates (Y

ig
and Z).
yr
This parameter is used for the software travel limit function.

op
Note : X-axial data are not required.

C
Axis of rotation of the tilting table
S10 –Y
S10 (Z)
Program type M, E
S10 (Y)
Conditions Immediate –Z
Unit 0.0001 mm
Setting range 0 to ±99999999 (For machines equipped with a tilting table)
2-512
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the corner position of the tilting table in (Y- and Z-axial) distances
from its axis of rotation.
This parameter is used for the software travel limit function.
Corner position of the tilting table Note : X-axial data are not required.
S11
S11 (Z)
Program type M, E
d .
S11 (Y)
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
ts
Specify the axis of rotation of the tilting table in machine coordinates (Y
gh
and Z). Use this parameter to execute the automatic program origin
calculation function (option).
ri
Measure and enter data for respective machines.
ll
Axis of rotation of the tilting table
.A
Note : X-axial data are not required.
(Used for the automatic program origin
N
calculation function)
O
S12 –Y
TI
60
A S12 (Z)
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
S12 (Y)
–Z
R
o.
O
N
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

C

al

K
ri
ZA
Set the in-position width for G00. The in-position check for G00 is
Se
effective when the parameter K95 bit 7 is 1 and K96 bit 0 is 0.

A
For utilizing the in-position width of G00, set the in-position width of the
IM
servo parameter to 0 to avoid trouble.

K
G00 in-position width

ZA
Note :
S13
A
1. This parameter is valid only when bit 3 of M19 is 0.

M
2. Setting a value outside 0 to 32767 assumes S13 = 200.

YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm
(c

ht
Set the inposition width for G01. The in-position check for G01 is effective
ig
when one of G09 (exact stop check), G61 (exact stop check mode) and
yr
the error detection is selected with the parameter K95 bit 7 set to 1.
op
For utilizing the in-position width for G01, set the in-position width of the
C
G01 in-position width servo parameter to 0 to avoid trouble.
S14 Note :
1. This parameter is valid only when bit 3 of M19 is 0.
2. Setting a value outside 0 to 32767 assumes S14 = 50.
Program type M, E
Unit 0.001 mm
2-513
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
S15
Program type —
. d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set automatically after estimation of the characteristics.
gh
ri
ll
.A
Unbalanced axis torque offset
N
S16
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Specify torque limit buffer reduction ratio 1.

ZA
Se
A
IM
Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 1

K
ZA
S17
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Specify torque limit buffer reduction ratio 2.

ig
yr
op
C
Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 2
S18
Program type M, E
Unit %
2-514
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the tool change completion position of the long boring bar end tool
by the corresponding machine coordinates.
Tool change completion position of the long S19 Tool change

boring bar end tool completion position
S19
Machine S19
zero point
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
Unit
er
0.0001°
s
re
ts
Set the completion position of automatic pallet change operation.
gh
ri
ll
.A
APC completion position
N
S20
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

O
N

al
Set the completion position of gantry robot operation.

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Completion position of gantry robot

K
operation
ZA
S21
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

)2

(c
ht
Specify the critical cutting feed rate to be used during tool tip point control.
ig
During tool tip point control, speed is clamped in accordance with

yr
parameter S22 or M3 (critical cutting feed rate), whichever is the smaller.

op
Cutting feed clamping speed during tool tip

C
point control
S22
Program type E
2-515
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the position of a reference workpiece zero point for each axis in the
machine coordinate system.
Set the position of a reference workpiece zero point relating to the turret
also in the machine coordinate system.
For machining centers, this parameter is invalid.
* Tool set value is determined based on this parameter.
Reference workpiece zero point X
S23 M
Z
d.
S23 (Z)
ve
er
S23 (X)
s
re
Program type M, E
ts
gh
ri
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in Reference workpiece zero point
ll
.A
Sets the ATC complete position for long milling tools.
N
O
TI
60
A
R
Long milling tool ATC complete position
40
PO
29
S24
R
o.
O
N
C
al
Program type M, E
ri
ZA
Se

A
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

IM

K
Set the central position of the tilt table upper surface on the VIRTUAL
ZA
MACHINING display in terms of machine coordinates for each axis.

A
(For machines with a tilt table)

M
Central position on the upper surface of the

Set the central position of the table upper surface on the VIRTUAL
YA
tilt table
(for machines with a tilt table)
(For other machining centers)
3
Central position on the table upper surface

01
S25 (for other machining centers) +Z +Z

)2
(c
+X +Y
ht
S25 (Z) S25 (Z)

Program type M, E
ig
yr
S25 (X) S25 (Y)

op
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

C
2-516
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the position of the tilt table rotational center on the VIRTUAL
+Z +Z
Central position of tilt table rotation +X +Y
S26 S26 (Z) S26 (Z)
S26 (X) S26 (Y)

Program type M, E
. d
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
(Special function for machines with a tilt table)
s
re
ts
For the machine specifications with a ram spindle, specify the offsets
gh
between the main spindle and the ram spindle for each axis.
ri
+Z +Z
ll
.A
+Y +X
N
O
TI
Ram spindle offset amount S27X
60
S27Y
A
R
40
S27
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
S27Z S27Z
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Main spindle
A
Program type E Main spindle Ram spindle Ram spindle

IM
(Milling spindle)
K
Unit 0.0001 mm
ZA
Setting range ±99999999 (Special function for machines with a ram spindle)
A
For graphics on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display, set with machine co-
M
ordinates of the rectangular axes, the center of the workpiece to be

YA
directly mounted on the table of the machines equipped with an additional

table.
3
+Z
01
Center of the workpiece to be directly

mounted on the table of the machines
)2
equipped with an additional table +X

(c
S28
ht
S28 (Z) S25 (Z)

ig
Table S25 (X) Additional table

yr
S28 (X)
op
Program type M
C
Note :
This parameter is only used when multiple material pieces can be
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
arranged on the display in question (F35 bit 0 = 1). Use parameter S25
Setting range ±99999999 to set the center of the additional table’s upper surface.
2-517
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Machine
zero point
Position of the axis of rotation of the work

hand in relation to the machine zero point S29 (X) Work hand
S29
Program type M, E
d .
ve
S29 (Z) Axis of rotation
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
(Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)
re
ts
Set the distance from the axis of rotation of the work hand to the reference
gh
position of the vice for the work hand during workpiece transfer.
ri
S30 (Z)
Distance from the axis of rotation of the Reference position
ll
of the vice
.A
work hand to the reference position of the
vice
N
S30
O
TI
Work hand S30 (X)
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
Axis of rotation
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

O
N
Setting range ±99999999 (Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)
al
Specify the machine coordinates of the floating reference point.

ri
ZA
Se
Example :
A
G30.1X10.Z10.;
IM
Specification of the machine coordinates of Entry of the above command returns the tool in rapid feed mode
K
the floating reference point through the intermediate point (X10, Z10) to the floating reference point
ZA
specified in this parameter.

S31
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

)2

(c
ht
The general setting for rapid traverse speed in parameter M1 will be used
also for the mode of tool tip point control if it is lower than the setting in
ig
parameter S32.
yr
op
Rapid traverse speed for the mode of tool

C
Note :
tip point control
Set zero (0) in S32 if it is desirable to use the general setting in
S32 parameter M1 for the rapid traverse in question.
Program type E
2-518
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the machine coordinate of the table edge on the negative side of the
X-axis.
Reference position X for the TEACH Machine zero point
Reference position S33 (X)
function, to be used for setting the LENGTH
B item of an angular tool
(For machines of five-surface machining by
S33 angular tools)
Program type M, E
d.
Table
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Set the amount of offset to add to the data for rotary head misalignment
gh
offset for each axis.
ri
ll
Amount of offset for rotary head * This parameter is valid on the machines with the capability of
.A
misalignment Maza-Check.
N
S34
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.0001°

O
N

al
Set the position of the rotational center of the second table in the machine
ri
ZA
coordinate system when table selection is valid. (That of the first table to
Se
be specified in parameter S5)

IM
Table having a horizontally rotational axis

K
Machine zero point

ZA
S35(Y) S5(Y)
A
S5(X)
M
YA
S35(X)
3
Z
01
Y
)2
Rotational center of the second table X

(c
S35 Table having a vertically rotational axis

ht
ig
Machine zero point

yr
S35(Y) S35(Z) S5(Y)

op
S5(Z)
C
Z
Y
X
Conditions At power on Among the rotary axes (parameter M17 bit 4 = 1) excluding the rotary
head, the first axis is regarded as the first rotary table and the second
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in axis the second rotary table.
2-519
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the central position of the second additional table in the machine
coordinate system on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display when the table
selection function is valid. (Set the first additional table at parameter S25.)
For the table having the horizontal axis of rotation
Machine zero point
S36(Y) S25(Y)
S25(X)
.
S36(X)
d
ve
er
Z
Position of the center of the second Y
s
re
additional table on the VIRTUAL X
MACHINING display
ts
S36
gh
For the table having the vertical axis of rotation
ri
ll
Machine zero point
.A
N
S36(Y) S36(Z) S25(Y)
O
S25(Z)
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Z
Y
R
o.
X
N
Program type M, E
al
Note :
ri
ZA
Se
Among the rotary axes (parameter M17 bit 4 = 1) excluding the rotary
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
A
head, the first axis is regarded as the first rotary table and the second
IM
Setting range 0 to ±99999999 axis the second rotary table.

This parameter allows you to make the preset time for canceling the
K
ZA
emergency stop status at powering on (hotline disconnection time)

variable.
A
0: 1000 ms
M
YA
1 to 7: 8 ms
Time-out period for releasing the 8 to 3000: The time-out period is set according to the setting.
3
emergency stop status during powering on Beyond 3000: 3000 ms

01
)2
S38 Note :
(c
1. Set the value for the first axis (X-axis).

ht
2. Setting a negative value invalidates this parameter and the hotline

ig
is disconnected for 7.1 ms.

yr
3. When this parameter is valid, the time taken to cancel the

op
Program type M, E emergency stop status is output to register R71. When the ready
C
Conditions At power on lamp turning on process has failed due to a communication error,
“0” is output to the register R71.
Unit ms
2-520
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the turning spindle number of the table control mechanism that
features switching of servo C-axis and turning spindle.
0: Specification not supported or the spindle C-axis specification
Turning spindle number of the table control 1 to 8: Spindle number
mechanism that features switching of servo
C-axis and turning spindle
S39
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Set the offset amount from the turning spindle 0°position to the servo
ts
C-axis machine zero point for the table control mechanism that features
gh
switching of servo C-axis and turning spindle.
ri
Offset amount from the turning spindle
ll
.A
0°position to the servo C-axis machine zero
point
N
S40
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001°
O
N

al
Non-target axis setting for indexing unit (rotational axis)

ri
ZA
Se
Set the axis of which setting check or rotation command is not output in
A
the indexing unit.

IM
* Rotational axis: the axis specified in parameter M17 bit 4 = 1

Non-target axis setting for indexing unit
K
(rotational axis) 0: Target axis

S45
ZA
1: Non-target axis
(bit 0)
A
M
Note :
YA
Program type M This is invalid for rotational axes of the sixth or higher.
When parameter BA48 = 0 and L21 = 0, this is invalid for rotational
3
01
axes of the fifth or higher.

Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Set an axis that is not displayed on the counter.

ht
ig
0 : Displayed
yr
1 : Hidden
op
Setting of an axis not displayed on the

C
counter
S45
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-521
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Sets the disable axis for the rapid feed overlapping function.
0: Rapid feed overlapping function enabled axis
1: Rapid feed overlapping function disabled axis
Rapid feed overlapping function disabled
axis * When bit 2 of S45 is set to “1”, the settings of S49 and S50 will be
S45 ignored.
(bit 2)
S49 : Rapid feed overlapping function: G0 in-position width
Program type M, E S50 : Rapid feed overlapping function: G1 in-position width
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Set the G0 in-position width to be used when the rapid feed overlapping
gh
function is valid.
ri
If a value outside the setting range is set, operation is carried out with the
upper limit value (10000000) or lower limit value (0).
ll
Rapid feed overlapping function:
.A
N
O
S49
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
0.0001 mm / 0.00001 in
O
Unit
N
0.0001°
al

ri
ZA
Se
Set the G1 in-position width to be used when the rapid feed overlapping
A
function is valid.
IM
If a value outside the setting range is set, operation is carried out with the
upper limit value (10000000) or lower limit value (0).
K
Rapid feed overlapping function:

ZA
A
M
S50
YA
3
Program type M, E
01
)2
0.0001 mm / 0.00001 in
(c
Unit
0.0001°
ht

ig
yr
op
C
2-522
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Sets the distance from the center of rotation to the edge of the
small-diameter table for VARIAXIS.
Even if a value is set for the axis parallel to the rotary axis of the tilt table,
the value is not used for the software limit check.
When 0 is set, the small-diameter table is not taken into consideration.
Distance to the edge of the small-diameter

table
S51
d .
ve
s er
S51 (Y)
re
ts
S11 (Y)
gh
Program type M, E
ri
Conditions Immediate [Related parameters]
ll
.A
Unit 0.0001 mm S11
(Function dedicated to machines equipped with the tilt table)
N
O
Sets the in-position width for rapid feed overlapping at joints between
TI
consecutively specified G00 in the tool tip point control or cutting point
60
A
command mode.
R
40
PO
Rapid feed overlap function G0 in-position If a value outside the setting range is set, operation is carried out with the
29
width (for tool tip point control and cutting upper limit value (10000000) or lower limit value (0).
R
o.
point command) When 0 is set, the value set for S49 (Rapid feed overlapping function: G0
O
N
in-position width) is used.

C
S52
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Program type M, E
IM
K
0.0001 mm / 0.00001 in
Unit
ZA
0.0001° [Related parameters]

A
S49
M
Sets the in-position width for rapid feed overlapping at joints between
YA
consecutively specified G00 and G01 or G01 and G00 in the tool tip point
control or cutting point command mode.
3
01
Rapid feed overlap function G1 in-position If a value outside the setting range is set, operation is carried out with the
)2
width (for tool tip point control and cutting upper limit value (10000000) or lower limit value (0).
point command)
(c
When 0 is set, the value set for S50 (Rapid feed overlapping function: G1
in-position width) is used.
ht
S53
ig
yr
op
Program type M, E
C
0.0001 mm / 0.00001 in [Related parameters]
Unit
0.0001° S50
2-523
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
S70
Program type —
d.
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
Setting range —
re
Used to select whether the alarms 1022 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM
ts
ALARM3 and 72 SERVO WARNING are to be displayed or not.
gh
0 : Displayed
ri
1 : Not displayed
ll
Smart safety monitoring alarm
.A
(for servo axis)
S71
N
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-524
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-16 Machine parameter SPINDLE (SA)
Classification MACHINE Display title SPINDLE
Number of revolutions per minute of the spindle in each speed range
Maximum number of speed ranges

Address
1 2 3 4
SA1  L L L
SA2 Invalid H M ML
SA3 Invalid Invalid H MH
.
SA4 Invalid Invalid Invalid H
d
ve
Maximum spindle speed in each speed
range (range 1 to 8) Example :
SA1
er
Output voltage
s
to
re
SA8
ts
gh
MAX
ri
H
ll
L
.A
N
O
Program type M, E min
–1
TI
(Spindle speed)
60
Conditions At power on A SA9

R
40
Unit min
–1 SA1 SA10
PO
29
Setting range 0 to 999999 SA2

R
o.
Constants for calculating each gear speed of the spindle

O
N

al
Address
ri
1 2 3 4
ZA
Se
Constants for calculating each gear speed SA9  L L L

A
SA9 of the spindle (range 1 to 8)

IM
SA10 Invalid H M ML
to SA11 Invalid Invalid H MH
K
SA16 SA12 Invalid Invalid Invalid H

ZA
A
M
Program type M, E
YA
–1
Unit min
3
01
Setting range 0 to 999999 ( SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4)

)2
The maximum number of revolutions per minute of the spindle in each

(c
speed range during a tapping cycle

ht

ig
Address
Maximum spindle speed during tapping 1 2 3 4
yr
SA17 cycle (range 1 to 8)

op
SA17  L L L
to
C
SA18 Invalid H M ML
SA24 SA19 Invalid Invalid H MH
Program type M, E
–1
Unit min
2-525
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The number of revolutions per minute of the spindle during shifting of

gears thru the various ranges
Maximum number of speed range

Address
Spindle speed during gear shifting (range 1 1 2 3 4
SA25 to 4)
SA25  L L L
to SA26 Invalid H M ML
SA28 SA27 Invalid Invalid H MH
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
–1
Unit min
s
re
ts
Scaling factor (for high-speed coil) with respect to the reference output of
gh
the load meter
ri
Output
(kW) Output diagram at
ll
Load meter reference output scaling factor short-time rating
.A
(high-speed coil) P0
N
Output diagram at
SA29
O
continuous rating
P1
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
N0 N1
29
Speed
Conditions Immediate SA29 = P1/P0 × 100 –1
(min )
R
o.
SA30 = N1
O
Unit %
N

al
K
ri
Base rotational speed (for high-speed coil) for the output changed by the
ZA
Se
parameter SA29 with respect to the reference output of the load meter
A
Output
IM

Load meter reference output base short-time rating
K
rotational speed (high-speed coil) P0

ZA
Output diagram at
SA30 continuous rating
A
P1
M
YA
Program type M, E
N0 N1
3
Speed
01

(min )
SA30 = N1
)2
–1
Unit min
(c

ht
Scaling factor (for low-speed coil) with respect to the reference output of
ig
the load meter

yr
Output
op

Load meter reference output scaling factor short-time rating
C
(low-speed coil) P0
Output diagram at
P1
Program type M, E
N0 N1 Speed
(min )
Unit % SA32 = N1
2-526
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Base rotational speed (for low-speed coil) for the output changed by the
parameter SA31 with respect to the reference output of the load meter
Output
Output diagram at
(kW)
Load meter reference output base short-time rating
P0
rotational speed (low-speed coil)
Output diagram at
P1
Program type M, E
.
N0
d
N1 Speed
ve
(min )
SA32 = N1
er
–1
Unit min
s
re
ts
Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the synchronous
gh
tapping cycle
SA33: Range 1
ri
ll
SA34: Range 2
Acceleration/deceleration time constant for
.A
the synchronous tapping (range 1 to 8) SA35: Range 3
SA33
N
SA36: Range 4
to
O
TI
SA40
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit ms
N

al
Specify the spindle orientating speed.

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Spindle orientating speed

K
ZA
SA41
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
–1
Unit min
(c

ht
Specify the minimum spindle speed.

ig
yr
op
C
Minimum spindle speed
SA42
Program type M, E
–1
Unit min
2-527
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

Specify the channel number for the spindle amplifier.
1: 1 ch (the setting used when connection to SV1 of the HR353 is
established)
2: 2 ch (the setting used when connection to SV3 of the HR353 is
Channel number for the spindle amplifier established)
SA43
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Specify the rotary switch number of the spindle amplifier.
ts
gh
0: SW0
ri
1: SW1
ll
2: SW2
Spindle amplifier rotary switch number
.A
3: SW3
N
SA44 4: SW4
O
5: SW5
TI
60
6: SW6 A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
Unit —
o.
O
N
C
al
0: As specified by bit 1
ri
ZA
1: L/H coil sw. + Mecha. gear shift

Se
Spindle speed range changing method, in * For the setting of SA45 bit 0 = 1, set the rated torque, viscous &
IM
relation to switching the torque factors for coulomic friction coefficients of the spindle motor in the relevant
auto-pecking of the cutting load detection parameters as tabulated below:
K
SA45 type
ZA
Speed Rated Visc. fric. Coul. fric.

(bit 0) Coil
range No. torque coef. coef.
A
M
1 L SA53 SA57 SA61

YA
Program type M, E 1 H SA54 SA57 SA61

Conditions After stop of movement 2 L SA53 SA58 SA62
3
01
Unit — 2 H SA54 SA58 SA62

)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
0: L/H coil switching scheme

ht
1: Mecha-gear scheme (Only when 0 is set up at bit 0)

ig
* Bit 1 is valid only when bit 0 = 0.

yr
Spindle speed range changing method, in

relation to switching the torque factors for
op
auto-pecking of the cutting load detection

C
SA45 type 2
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-528
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
00: Shorter route

01: Forward rotation
10: Reverse rotation
Homing direction for synchronous tapping

SA45
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Homing direction for synchronous tapping
.A
SA45
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
Program type M, E
A
R
40
PO
29

R
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
Defines the specified direction as the Z-phase detection direction.

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Defines the specified direction as the

Z-phase detection direction.
K
SA45
ZA
(bit 4)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
0: Invalid
ht
1: Valid
ig
yr
op
Spindle index gear correction

C
SA45
(bit 5)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-529
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Selection of spindle removal

SA45
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
ts
76543210
gh
Direction of orientation
ri
00: Shorter route
ll
.A
N
C-axis position control changeover type
O
00: After return to zero point
TI
01: After deceleration stop
60
A Synchronous tapping position control changeover

R
40
type
PO
29
0: After return to zero point

—
R
1: After deceleration stop

o.
O
N
SA46 Z-phase detection direction

al
0: Forward rotation
K
ri
ZA
1: Reverse rotation
Se
C-axis homing direction

IM
00: Shorter route

K

ZA
Synchronous tapping command polarity

A
0: Reverse rotation
M
1: Forward rotation
YA
Program type M, E
3

01
Unit —
)2

(c
ht
76543210
ig
yr
op
0: Ignoring the spindle/motor gear ratio

— 1: Considering the spindle/motor gear ratio
C
SA47
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-530
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the encoder signal input destination.

0: Via the HDLC-connected axis (Spindle AMP feedback data)
1: Direct connection to encoder 1 (ENC1)
2: Direct connection to encoder 2 (ENC2)
Encoder signal input destination
SA48
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the speed attainment detection width. If a value other than 1-99 (%) is
gh
set, the value will be regarded as 15 (%).
ri
ll
.A
Speed attainment detection width
N
SA49
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit %
N
al
K
ri
Specify the type of spindle corresponding to the displayed SA parameters,

ZA
Se
by the appropriate numeric value.

A
0: Axis not specified

IM
1: No. 1 milling spindle

Spindle type 2: No. 1 turning spindle
K

ZA
SA50 4: No. 2 turning spindle

A

M
6: No. 3 turning spindle

YA

Program type M, E 8: No. 4 turning spindle
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Set the number of gears on the spindle.

ig
1. For displaying [GEAR SELECT] in the manual operation mode

yr
0, 5 to 8: Without gear
op
1: 2 gear positions (without neutral)

C
Number of gears on spindle

2: 2 gear positions (with neutral)
SA51 3: 3 gear positions (with neutral)
4: 4 gear positions (with neutral)
2. For automatic gear selection with the MAZATROL program (only for
Program type M, E milling spindle)
Unit —
2-531
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Type not set.

1: C-axis type
2: Orientation type
Turning spindle type
SA52
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for the L coils of the spindle motor.
gh
Note :
ri
Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known
ll
auto-pecking of the cutting load detection for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque.
.A
type If coil selection is not possible for the spindle, enter the same value
in both SA53 and SA54. An alarm will result if 0 is entered even in
N
— L coils
SA53 either one of the two parameters.
O
TI
2. If bit 1 in SA45 is set to 1, set the 1/4h rated torque applied when
60
A
the spindle motor gear position is 1.
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.1 N·m

N

al
K
ri
Set the 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for the H coils of the spindle motor.
ZA
Se
Note :
A
IM
Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known
auto-pecking of the cutting load detection for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque.
K
type If coil selection is not possible for the spindle, enter the same value
ZA
— H coils in both SA53 and SA54. An alarm will result if 0 is entered even in
SA54 either one of the two parameters.
A
M
2. If bit 1 in SA45 is set to 1, set the 1/4h rated torque applied when
the spindle motor gear position is 2.
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit 0.1 N·m

(c

ht
Set the 1/4h rated torque applied when the spindle motor gear position is
ig
3.
yr
Note :
op
Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for

auto-pecking of the cutting load detection 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known
C
type for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque.
— Spindle gear position 3 2. This parameter is valid only when the setting of bit 1 in SA45 is 1.
SA55
Program type M
Unit 0.1 N·m
2-532
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the 1/4h rated torque applied when the spindle motor gear position is
4.
Note :
Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for
auto-pecking of the cutting load detection 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known
type for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque.
— Spindle gear position 4 2. This parameter is valid only when the setting of bit 1 in SA45 is 1.
SA56
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1 N·m
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-533
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
If the “fms” value depends on spindle speeds, specify the gradient.
Example :
Spindle viscous friction coefficient “cms” for If “fms” is 90000 for an “S” value of 5000 and 140000 for S10000:
type — Range 1 fms
SA57 140000 Gradient = b/a
b
90000
a
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit — 5000 10000 S
s
re
ts
Since “cms” = (140000 – 90000) / (10000 – 5000) = 10, set “10” in the
gh
above example.
ri
Note :
Spindle viscous friction coefficient “cms” for
ll
Set the spindle viscous friction coefficient “cms” when SA45 bit 0 = 1.
.A
auto-pecking of the cutting load detection (Enter, moreover, 1000 times the respective calculation results in this
type — Range 2
N
case.)
SA58
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM

K
type — Range 3
ZA
SA59
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
ig
yr
op

C

type — Range 4
SA60
Program type M
Unit —
2-534
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the value where the width of the flat section in the current feedback
data matches estimated data.
Example :
Spindle coulombic friction coefficient “fms”
for auto-pecking of the cutting load If “fms” is 90000 for an “S” value of 5000 and 140000 for S10000, set “c”
detection type — Range 1 in L105.
SA61 fms
140000 Gradient = 10
b
Program type M
.
90000
d
a
ve
Conditions Immediate c
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range ±99999999 5000 10000 S
ts
gh
ri
Calculate “c” form the linear equation “y = (b/a) x + c”. Since “c” = 90000
Spindle coulombic friction coefficient “fms” – (10 × 5000) = 40000, set “40000” in the above example.
ll
.A
for auto-pecking of the cutting load Note :
detection type — Range 2
N
Set the spindle coulombic friction coefficient “fms” when SA45 bit 0 = 1.
SA62
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM

for auto-pecking of the cutting load
K

ZA
SA63
A
M
YA
Program type M
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
ig
yr
op

C
for auto-pecking of the cutting load

SA64
Program type M
Unit —
2-535
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the filter for the data which has been sampled at 3.5-ms intervals.
If the entered value is “0”, the data actually used will be 4 × 3.5 (ms).
Cutting force calculation filter for

type
SA65
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 3.5 ms
s
re
ts
If the rotational speed of the milling spindle during polygonal machining
gh
exceeds the setting of this parameter, that rotational speed will be
clamped at this setting.
ri
Also, if the rotational speed of the milling spindle during hobbing exceeds
ll
Maximum permissible speed of milling
.A
the setting of this parameter, that rotational speed will be clamped at this
spindle for polygonal/hobbing machining setting.
N
SA66 Note : This parameter is valid only for the milling spindle.
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
–1
O
Unit min
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Rotational speed in the following spindle Output

A
output diagrams: (kW)

IM
P3 P4 P5
 MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT
P1 P2
 MACHINING
K
SA67
ZA
NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION P6
to  Monitoring Functions
A
M
SA73  POSITION P0
YA
Speed
–1
Program type M, E (min )
3
01
)2
–1
Unit min Cross axis: speed Vertical axis: output
Point
(c
–1
Setting range 0 to 999999 (Unit: min ) (Unit: 1/100 kW)
ht
P0 SA67 SA74
ig
Output in the following spindle output P1 SA68 SA75

yr
diagrams: P2 SA69 SA76

op
 MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT P3 SA70 SA77

C
 MACHINING P4 SA71 SA78

SA74 NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION P5 SA72 SA79
to  Monitoring Functions P6 SA73 SA80
SA80  POSITION
Note :
Program type M, E Whether to specify these values for an output diagram at short-time
rating or at continuous rating depends on the specifications of the
model.
Unit 0.01 kW
2-536
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the spindle limit speed at which the time constant for the spindle
position control is to be changed
Spindle limit speed selection for spindle
position control time constants [Spindle speed]
SA81: Limit speed 1
SA81 SA82: Limit speed 2
to SA83: Limit speed 3 Max. spindle
speed
SA83
Program type M, E
d .
ve
Conditions At power on SA83
er
–1
Unit min
s
SA82
re
SA81
ts
gh
ri
0 [Time]
Spindle position control time constants
ll
SA84
SA84: Time constant 1
.A
SA84 SA85: Time constant 2
SA85
N
to
O
TI
SA86 SA86
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit ms
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Revolutions
A
IM
Spindle speed operating time constant

SA9
changeover revolutions
SA88
K
SA87: Revolutions 1
ZA
SA87 SA88: Revolutions 2 SA87

A
SA88
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Conditions Immediate Time

SA89
–1
)2
Unit min SA90

SA91
(c

ht
Note :
ig
For gears 2 to 8, SA87 or SA88 is internally converted to calculate the

yr
changeover revolutions.
Spindle speed operating time constant
op

C
SA10 to 16
SA89 SA90: Time constant 2
SA88 × (SA10 to 16/SA9)
to SA87 × (SA10 to 16/SA9)
SA91
Program type M, E
Unit ms
2-537
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the maximum revolutions for conducting Z-phase detection.
Z-phase detection speed
SA92
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
–1
Unit min
s
re
ts
Set the amount of shifting from the Z-phase when the axis is to be
gh
returned to its zero point for synchronous tapping.
ri
Shifting is conducted in the Z-phase detection direction (specified in bit 4
of SA46).
ll
Amount of synchronous tapping zero point
.A
shifting
N
SA93
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit °
N

al
K
ri
Set the homing speed effective when “After return to zero point” (SA46 bit
ZA
Se
2 = 0) is selected as the position-changing type for synchronous tapping.

A
IM
Homing speed for synchronous tapping

K
ZA
SA94
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
–1
Unit min
(c

ht
Set the manual operation mode maximum revolutions.

ig
yr
op
Maximum revolutions in manual operation

C
mode
SA95
Program type M, E
–1
Unit min
2-538
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the amount of shifting from the zero point of orientation control.
Amount of orientation position shifting
SA96
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
Unit 0.00005°
er
s
re
The synchronous tapping time constant for high-speed synchronous
ts
tapping is reduced with respect to the synchronous tapping time constant
gh
set in parameter SA33 to SA40. The value set in SA97 becomes the
reduction ratio.
ri
Reduction ratio of the synchronous tapping
time constant for high-speed synchronous Without the high-speed synchronous tapping option or for the axis
ll
.A
tapping combination that does not allow high-speed synchronous tapping, normal
SA97 synchronous tapping is applied, in which case the data setting of SA33 to
N
SA40 is used as it is.
O
TI
High-speed synchronous tapping time constant
60
Program type M, E
A = SA33 × (100 – SA97)/100
R
40
PO
29
Unit %
R
o.

N
Time constant of the turning spindle during override variable thread

al
cutting
ri
ZA
Se
* Set the value that is adjusted to the machine specification when the
IM
Time constant for override variable thread

cutting override variable thread cutting option is provided.
K
SA98
ZA
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit ms
)2

(c
Set the time constant for orientation control.

ht
If 0 is set, 300 will be regarded as having been specified.

ig
yr
op
Orientation time constant

C
SA99
Program type M, E
Unit ms
2-539
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Rotational speed in the following spindle Output

output diagrams at continuous rating: (kW)
P3 P4 P5
 MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT
P1 P2
 MACHINING
SA100 NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION P6
to  Monitoring Functions
SA106  POSITION P0
Speed
–1
Program type M, E (min )
d .
ve
er
–1
Unit min Cross axis: speed Vertical axis: output
s
Point
re
–1
Setting range 0 to 999999 (Unit: min ) (Unit: 1/100 kW)
P0 SA100 SA107
ts
Output in the following spindle output
gh
P1 SA101 SA108
diagrams at continuous rating: P2 SA102 SA109
ri
 MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT P3 SA103 SA110
ll
.A
 MACHINING P4 SA104 SA111
SA107 NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION P5 SA105 SA112
N
to 
O
Monitoring Functions P6 SA106 SA113
TI
SA113  POSITION
60
Note : A
R
40
Program type M, E 1. Set values for spindle output diagrams at continuous rating.
PO
29
Conditions Immediate 2. This parameter is valid for models that allow you to switch between
R
load meter ratings on the POSITION display.

o.
Unit 0.01 kW
O
N

al
Set the spindle speed to be monitored in safety supervisory mode 2.

ri
ZA
Se
If the operating speed of the spindle exceeds the set value in safety
A
supervisory mode 2, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and bring
IM
the machine to an emergency stop.

Spindle speed supervisory mode 2 for
K
safety supervision
ZA
SA114
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

–1
)2
Unit min
(c

ht
Set the spindle speed to be monitored in safety supervisory mode 3.

ig
If the operating speed of the spindle exceeds the set value in safety
yr
supervisory mode 3, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and bring
op
the machine to an emergency stop.

Spindle speed supervisory mode 3 for
C
Assign a value greater than the speed value to be monitored in mode 2

safety supervision
(i.e., specified in SA114).
SA115
Program type M, E
–1
Unit min
2-540
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the spindle safety clamping speed to be monitored in safety

supervisory mode 2.
effect, the spindle is decelerated to the set speed.
Spindle safety clamping mode 2 for safety
Assign a value smaller than the speed value to be monitored in mode 2
supervision
SA116
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
–1
Unit min
s
re
ts
Set the spindle safety clamping speed to be monitored in safety
gh
supervisory mode 3.
ri
effect, the spindle is decelerated to the set speed.
ll
Spindle safety clamping mode 3 for safety
.A
Assign a value smaller than the speed value to be monitored in mode 3
supervision
N
SA117
O
Assign a value greater than the speed value to be monitored in mode 2
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
–1
O
Unit min
N

al
K
ri
Select the door group to which the spindle belongs in safety supervisory
ZA
Se
mode.
A
If SP129: SFNC9/bit F is OFF, speed monitoring will not be conducted,

IM
irrespective of the setting of this parameter.

Selecting the spindle door of the spindle
K
[Examples of setting]
whose speed is to be monitored
ZA
0000: The spindle does not belong to any door.

SA118 0001: The spindle belongs to the door-1 group.
A
0002: The spindle belongs to the door-2 group.

M
0003: The spindle belongs to the door-1/2 group.

YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
For safety speed clamping in safety supervisory mode, when a claming

ig
request is input, a clamping signal will be output after the spindle has
yr
decelerated to a safety clamping speed. This parameter specifies to what

op
additional percentage of the safety clamping speed the spindle is to be

Deceleration judgment coefficient on safety
decelerated as the output timing of the speed clamping signal.
C
speed clamping of the spindle to be

supervised for safety If 0 is set, the speed clamping signal will be output when the spindle
SA119 decelerates to a 10% additional speed (i.e., 110% of the safety clamping
speed).
Program type M, E
Unit %
2-541
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the number of PLG teeth per revolution.

If a value less than zero is set, 1024 will be regarded as having been set.
PLG pulse rate for spindle index gear tooth

correction
SA120
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit Teeth
s
re
ts
Amount of branching point correction for Set the amount of correction at the branching point where one PLG gear
gh
spindle index gear tooth tooth is split into eight equal segments.
ri
SA121: Branching point [1]
ll
.A
SA121 SA124: Branching point [4]
N
to
O
TI
SA128 SA127: Branching point [7]
60

A
R
40
PO
Program type M, E
29
R
o.
Unit 0.0001°
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Set the notch filter frequency for the cutting-load detection pecking cycle.
Se
A
IM
Notch filter frequency for cutting-load

detection pecking cycle
K
ZA
SA129: #1 notch filter frequency

SA129 SA131: #2 notch filter frequency
A
SA131
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.1 Hz
(c

ht
Set the notch filter depth to be used in the cutting-load detection pecking
ig
cycle.
yr
op
Notch filter depth for cutting-load detection

pecking cycle
C
SA130: #1 notch filter depth

SA130 SA132: #2 notch filter depth
SA132
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-542
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the detection torque to be used when the breakage detection distance
(l) is specified for the cutting-load detection pecking cycle.
Breakage detection torque for cutting-load

detection pecking cycle
SA133
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.01 Nm
s
re
ts
Set the maximum spindle orientation speed.
gh
Note :
ri
1. Some other functions (such as safety speed clamping control based
ll
on a PLC ladder) may cause the spindle orientation speed to be
.A
Maximum spindle orientation speed clamped at a speed lower than the setting of this parameter.
N
2. Immediately after power-on, the Z-phase is detected, so the spindle
SA134
O
is oriented at the maximum speed specified in parameter SA92, not
TI
SA134.
60
A
3. Clamping based on this parameter will be invalid if the setting is 0.
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
–1
O
Unit min
N

al
K
ri
When override variable thread cutting is valid, acceleration/deceleration is

ZA
Se
controlled according to the override variable time constant (SA98) and the
A
gradient set by this parameter.

IM
Spindle
Override change Speed change width
K
Rotational speed change width while speed

(SA135)
ZA
override variable thread cutting is valid

A
SA135
M
YA
Time
3
Time constant for override variable

01
Program type M, E
thread cutting (SA98)
)2
–1 * Set the value that is adjusted to the machine specification when the
(c
Unit min
override variable thread cutting option is provided. When this parameter
ht
Setting range 0 to 999999 is set to 0, it is regarded as 65000.

ig
Set which door signal is input for the axis with door signal input on the
yr
drive side (spindle) in safety supervisory mode.

op
1: Door 1 signal
C
Selection of a door for signal input on the 2: Door 2 signal

drive side (spindle) in safety supervisory
4: Door 3 signal
mode
SA136 8: Door 4 signal
Program type M
Unit —
2-543
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the number of gears.

0 : No gears
1 or more : Actual number of gears
Number of gears
SA138: Number of spindle gears
SA138 SA139: Number of motor gears
SA139
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Sets the turret indexing gear ratio at the motor side.
gh
ri
ll
.A
Turret indexing gear ratio at the motor side
N
SA140
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 1 to 199 (Only for MULTIPLEX)

al
K
ri
When the C-axis position control changeover type is set “after

ZA
Se
deceleration stop” (parameter SA46 bit 2 = 1)

A
0: No initial zero-point return

IM
1: Initial zero-point return

Initial C-axis position control changeover
K
with deceleration to stop setting

ZA
SA142
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Forward rotation with a forward rotation command and reverse rotation

ig
with a reverse rotation command

yr
1: Reverse rotation with a forward rotation command and forward rotation

op
Relationship between spindle rotation with a reverse rotation command

C
commands (M code) and direction of

spindle rotation
SA143 * Setting with the turning spindle:
(bit 0) 0 for spindles that turn the spindle forward rotation signal on with the
forward rotation command
1 for spindles that turn the spindle reverse rotation signal on with the
Program type M
forward rotation command
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-544
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set whether or not to wait spindle orientation completion at the start of

high-speed synchronous tapping.
0: Do not wait
Waiting for phase compensation completion 1: Wait
at the start of high-speed synchronous
tapping
SA143
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Set whether or not a spindle gear shift command and a turning spindle
ts
speed command are output simultaneously.
gh
0: Not output simultaneously
ri
1: Output simultaneously
ll
Simultaneous output of a gear shift M code
.A
and a turning spindle speed command
SA143
N
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
R
M
40
Program type
PO
29
R
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
When the orient command is given during spindle rotation

ri
ZA
0: Hold the spindle speed at the time of the orient command.

Se
1: Accelerate the spindle speed up to the maximum speed for orientation.

IM
Spindle speed for the orient command

given during spindle rotation
K
SA143
ZA
(bit 3)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Fixed value
ht
ig
yr
op
—
C
SA143
(bit 4)
Program type —
Conditions —
Unit —
Setting range —
2-545
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Fixed value
—
SA143
(bit 5)
.
Program type —
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
SA143
O
TI
(bit 6)
60
A
R
40
PO
Program type —
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
ZA
0: Invalid
Se
1: Valid
A
IM
Spindle winding coil selection function while

K

ZA
SA144
A
(bit 0)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: H winding coil
ig
1: L winding coil
yr
op
Spindle winding coil selection while * This parameter is valid when bit 0 of parameter SA144 is set to 1.
C

SA144
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-546
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Include
1: Do not include
Warning check for alarm 67 HI-SPEED

SYNCTAP AXIS ALARM (for spindle
C-axis)
SA144
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
.d
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
0: Spindle cycle counter increase
ts
gh
1: Spindle cycle counter decrease
ri
ll
Encoder polarity for the spindle rotation for
.A
normal thread cutting
SA144
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
Gear conversion during spindle rotation valid

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Gear conversion during spindle rotation

valid
K
SA144
ZA
(bit 5)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Spindle gear changeover valid

ht
ig
yr
op
Spindle gear changeover valid

C
SA144
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-547
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Turret indexing valid
Turret indexing valid

SA144
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range 0, 1
re
Sets the M code number for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation
ts
synchronous mode for the spindle speed fluctuation function.
gh
ri
Spindle speed fluctuation function
ll
.A
M code number for enabling the spindle
speed fluctuation synchronous mode
N
SA231
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
Sets the M code number for disabling the spindle speed fluctuation
ri
ZA
synchronous mode for the spindle speed fluctuation function.

Se
A
IM

M code number for disabling the spindle
K
speed fluctuation synchronous mode

ZA
SA232
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2

(c
Sets the M code number for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation for the
ht
spindle speed fluctuation function.

ig
yr
op

M code number for enabling spindle speed
C
fluctuation
SA233
Program type E
Unit —
2-548
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Sets the M code number for disabling the spindle speed fluctuation for the
spindle speed fluctuation function.

M code number for disabling spindle speed
fluctuation
SA234
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Fixed value
gh
ri
ll
.A
—
N
SA242
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
Set the rotating direction of the measured data.

ri
ZA
Se
0: Normal
A
1: Reverse
IM

function (IBA):
K
Measured data rotation direction

SA243
ZA
(bit 0)
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
Used to select whether the alarms 1022 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM
ht
ALARM3 and 82 SPINDLE WARNING are to be displayed or not.

ig
0: Displayed
yr
1: Not displayed
op
Smart safety monitoring alarm (for spindle)

C
SA243
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-549
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-17 Machine parameter BARRIER (BA)
Classification MACHINE Display title BARRIER
Setting of chuck outside diameter of the No. 1 turning spindle
Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier)

— No. 1 turning spindle
BA1 BA1
d .
ve
Program type M, E
er
NM211-00312
s
re
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
ts
gh
Setting of chuck width of the No. 1 turning spindle
ri
ll
.A
BA2
N
Chuck width (for chuck barrier)
O
TI
BA2
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
R
o.
N
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

al
NM211-00313
ri
ZA

Se
Setting of chuck inside diameter of the No. 1 turning spindle

A
IM
K
ZA
Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier)

A
M
BA3 BA3
YA
3
01
Program type M, E
)2
NM211-00314
(c
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

ht

ig
Specify the workpiece outside diameter to be used for the EIA program.
yr
op
C
EIA program workpiece outside diameter
BA4 BA4
Program type E
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in BA17
2-550
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Setting of chuck outside diameter of the No. 2 turning spindle
Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier)

BA5 BA5
Program type M, E NM211-00312
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in For single turning-spindle specifications, this parameter is invalid.
s
re
ts
Setting of chuck width of the No. 2 turning spindle
gh
ri
ll
Chuck width (for chuck barrier)
.A
N
BA6
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
NM211-00313
29
BA6
R
Note :
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N
For single turning-spindle specifications, this parameter is invalid.

C

al
K
ri
Setting of chuck inside diameter of the No. 2 turning spindle

ZA
Se
A
IM
Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier)

K

ZA
BA7 BA7
A
M
YA
Program type M, E NM211-00314

3
01
Note :
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in For single turning-spindle specifications, this parameter is invalid.
(c

ht
Setting of tail body outside diameter

ig
yr
op
C
Tail body outside diameter (for tail barrier) BA8
BA8
NM211-00315
Program type M, E
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-551
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Setting of tail body length
BA9
Tail body length (for tail barrier)
BA9
Program type M, E
d .
NM211-00316
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Setting of tail spindle outside diameter
gh
ri
ll
Tail spindle outside diameter
.A
(for tail barrier) BA10
N
BA10
O
TI
60
A NM211-00317
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N

al
K
ri
Setting of length with tail spindle at back end

ZA
Se
BA11
IM
Length with tail spindle at back end

K
(for tail barrier)

ZA
BA11
A
M
YA
NM211-00318
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

(c

ht
Setting of tail head outside diameter

ig
yr
op
Tail head outside diameter

C
(for tail barrier) BA12
BA12
NM211-00319
Program type M, E
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-552
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Setting of tail head length
BA13
Tail head length

(for tail barrier)
BA13
NM211-00320
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Setting of tail head taper angle
gh
ri
ll
Tail head taper angle
.A
BA14
(for tail barrier)
N
BA14
O
TI
60
A NM211-00321
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001°
N

al
K
ri
Setting of biting diameter when tail head is used

ZA
Se
A
IM
Tail head biting diameter

K
BA15
(for tail barrier)
ZA
BA15
A

M
YA
NM211-00322
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-553
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the dimensional data for forming tail barriers using an EIA/ISO
program.
<During tail operation>
BA17 BA16
.d
EIA tail barrier <During tail reversing>
ve
BA16 Tail dimensions
s er
to
re
BA18 Machine
ts
zero point BA18
gh
ri
ll
.A
BA16: Tail extruding length
N
BA17: Workpiece length (Note 2)
O
BA18: Distance from the machine zero point to the leading edge
TI
position during tail reversing
60

A
R
40
PO
Conditions Immediate 1. ±999999999 for BA18.

29
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 2. BA17 is valid for MAZATROL programs as well, when ONLY MILL
R
o.
is specified for the common unit of the MAZATROL program.

O
Setting range 0 to 99999999 (Note 1)

N
C
al
Specify the distance from the machine zero point of the Z-axis to the edge
K
ri
of the No. 1 turning spindle.

ZA
Se
BA19
Distance from the Z-axis machine zero
IM
point to the spindle edge

— No. 1 turning spindle Machine zero point
K
ZA
BA19
A
Spindle
M
edge
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in Enter the distance with minus sign for the machine zero point in the
minus direction with respect to the spindle edge.
)2

(c
Specify the distance from the machine zero point of the Z-axis to the edge
ht
of the No. 2 turning spindle.

ig
yr
BA20
Distance from the Z-axis machine zero
op
point to the spindle edge

C
— No. 2 turning spindle Machine zero point

BA20
Spindle
edge
Program type M, E
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in Enter the distance with minus sign for the machine zero point in the
minus direction with respect to the spindle edge.
2-554
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Specify the jaw number that has been registered on the CHUCK JAW
DATA display to be referred to in the EIA program when forming a jaw
barrier for the No. 1 turning spindle.
Jaw number for EIA program barrier

BA21
Program type E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Specify the jaw number that has been registered on the CHUCK JAW
gh
DATA display to be referred to in the EIA program when forming a jaw
barrier for the No. 2 turning spindle.
ri
ll
Jaw number for EIA program barrier
.A
N
BA22
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
Set the turret dimensions for the turret-type tool post.

ZA
Se
BA24
A
IM
Turret dimensions
K
ZA
BA23
A
BA24 BA23
M
BA23: Outside diameter of the turret

YA
Program type E BA24: Width of the turret

3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

(c

ht
Specify the turret reference position from the machine zero point for the
ig
turret-type tool post.

yr
Turret
op
reference BA26
position
C
Turret reference position

BA25
BA26 BA25
Program type E BA25: Turret reference position X

Machine
Conditions Immediate zero point BA26: Turret reference position Z
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-555
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Setting of tool holder mounting position. When plus data is used, the tool
holder is mounted horizontally, and minus data downward.
Tool holder mounting position Example : Type 1
BA27 - Type 1 Turret reference positon
BA27 BA30 - Type 2
BA33 - Type 3 BA27 (> 0)
BA30
BA36 - Type 4
BA33
BA36
Program type M
d .
ve
BA27 (< 0) NM211-00327’
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
Same for types 2, 3, 4
re
ts
Setting tool holder width in X-axis direction
gh
Example : Type 1
ri
Tool holder width in X-axis direction Turret reference position
ll
BA28 - Type 1
.A
BA28 BA31 - Type 2
BA34 - Type 3
N
BA31
BA37 - Type 4
O
BA34
TI
BA28
60
BA37 A (where BA27 < 0)

R
40
Program type M BA28

PO
29
(where BA27 > 0)

R
NM211-00328’
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N

C

al
K
ri
Setting of tool holder width in Z-axis direction

ZA
Se
Example : Type 1
A
Tool holder width in Z-axis direction Turret reference position

IM
BA29 - Type 1
BA29
K
BA32 - Type 2
ZA
BA32 BA35 - Type 3

BA38 - Type 4
A
BA35
M
BA38
YA
Program type M
3
BA29 BA29
01
Conditions Immediate (where BA27 < 0)

(where BA27 > 0)
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in NM211-00329’

(c

ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-556
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the holder shape data for forming tool barriers using an EIA/ISO
program.
<Holder-under type>
Input BA39 with a minus sign.
BA40
d.
BA39
ve
er
BA41
EIA tool barrier
s
re
BA39 Holder dimensions
ts
to <Holder-side type (0° type)> <Holder-side type (180° type)>
gh
BA41 Input BA39 with a plus sign. Input BA39 with a plus sign.
ri
Input BA41 with a plus sign. Input BA41 with a minus sign.
ll
.A
BA39 BA39
N
O
BA40 BA40
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
BA41
R
BA41
o.
O
N
Program type E
C
BA39: EIA tool barrier, Holder mounting position

al
Conditions Immediate BA40: EIA tool barrier, X-axial width of the holder
K
ri
BA41: EIA tool barrier, Z-axial width of the holder

ZA
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

Se
Setting range ±99999999 (Note) Note : 0 to 99999999 for BA40.

IM
Select the type of barrier to be made valid.

K
0: Type with head B-axis (tool rotational B-axis) [INTEGREX type]

ZA
1: Type without head B-axis (tool rotational B-axis)

A
M
Barrier type
YA
BA42
3
01
)2
Program type M, E
(c
ht
Unit —
ig
yr

op
C
2-557
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the first tool number assigned to the first set of tools.
First tool number (in the 1st set of tools)
BA43
Program type M, E
. d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the number of tools assigned as the first set of tools.
gh
ri
ll
.A
Number of tools (in the 1st set of tools)
N
BA44
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
Set the first tool number assigned to the second set of tools.
ZA
Se
A
IM
First tool number (in the 2nd set of tools)

K
ZA
BA45
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
Set the number of tools assigned as the second set of tools.

ig
yr
op
C
Number of tools (in the 2nd set of tools)
BA46
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-558
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the type of turret:

0: ATC
1: Turret
2: Lower turret
Turret type 3: Opposed turret
4: Steady rest
BA47
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Set the axis name of the head axis to be rotated.
gh
Set “&42” if the head axis to be rotated is the B-axis.
ri
ll
.A
Axis name of the head to be rotated
N
BA48
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
Set the axis number of the Y-axis to be controlled using inclined-axis

ZA
Se
control functions.
A
The inclined-axis control is invalid when this parameter is set to 0.

IM
Axis number of the inclined axis

K
(Inclined-axis control)
ZA
BA49
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Set the axis number of the X-axis to be controlled using inclined-axis

ig
control functions.
yr
The inclined-axis control is invalid when this parameter is set to 0.

op
Fundamental axis number

C
BA50
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-559
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Specify one of the vectors created by the triangles formed by inclination

angles.
BA51: Vector of the inclined axis (virtual Y) in the rectangular
coordinate system
Vector of virtual Y
BA52: Vector of the fundamental axis (X-axis) corresponding to the
inclined axis
BA51 BA53: Vector of the real axis corresponding to the inclined axis
X
Y
Program type M, E
d .
ve
Conditions At power on BA51
BA52
er
Unit —
s
Yt
re
Setting range ±99999999 BA53
ts
gh
Set the value of BA51/BA52 assuming that 10000000 is assigned to
ri
BA53.
ll
Vector of real X
.A
N
BA52
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Vector of real Y
K
ZA
BA53
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c

ht
Set the axis number of the work spindle to be used for hobbing.
ig
The hobbing is invalid when this parameter is set to 0.

yr
op
C
Selection of work spindle for hobbing
BA54
Program type E
Unit —
2-560
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the turning spindle to be used in the D1 command mode of polygonal

machining.
0: Turning spindle No. 1
Turning spindle number for polygonal 2: Turning spindle No. 3
machining (D1) 3: Turning spindle No. 4
BA55 –1: Invalid
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
gh
machining.
ri
ll
Turning spindle number for polygonal
.A
N
BA56 –1: Invalid
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri

ZA
Se
machining.
A

IM

Turning spindle number for polygonal 2: Turning spindle No. 3
K

ZA
BA57 –1: Invalid

A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht

ig
machining.
yr

op

Turning spindle number for polygonal
C

BA58 –1: Invalid
Program type E
Unit —
2-561
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
 If the command block of G284/G288 (machining G-codes, F30 = 0) or

of G84/G88 (turning G-codes, F30 = 1) does not contain spindle
forward/reverse rotation M-codes, one of the following M-codes will be
output, depending on the status of bit 0 in parameter SU153:
Spindle forward rotation M-code for tapping
BA59 = 3 BA59 = 203
cycle
BA60 = 4 BA60 = 204
BA59 0 Tapping cycle of turning Tapping cycle of milling
SU153
Bit 0 Inverse tapping cycle of Inverse tapping cycle of
1
turning milling
Program type M, E
.
 If 0 is set in BA59, 3 will be regarded as having been set, and M03 will
d
ve
Conditions Immediate be output.
er
Unit —  If 0 is set in BA60, 4 will be regarded as having been set, and M04 will
s
be output.
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
Spindle reverse rotation M-code for tapping
.A
cycle
N
BA60
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type —
PO
29
Conditions —
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
Enter the distance from the rotational center of the B-axis to the tool
ZA
Se
center.
A

IM
Amount of runout of the B-axis center

K
ZA
BA61
BA61
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
Note :
3
01
Conditions Immediate Enter the distance with a minus sign for B-axis rotational center above
)2
Unit 0.001 mm the tool center position.

(c

ht
Enter the distance from the rotational center of the B-axis to the spindle
ig
edge.
yr

op
Amount of offset for the B-axis — spindle

C
distance
BA62
Program type M, E BA62

Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
2-562
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the holder angle of the angle tool holder.

According to the value set in this parameter, the holder angle is set in
HLD.TYPE on the TOOL DATA display.
BA63 = 45
Holder angle of angle tool holder
BA63
.
Program type M
d
ve
er
Unit ° HLD.TYP: 45 HLD.TYP: 45
s
(BA63 = 45) (180 – BA63 = 135)
re
ts
gh
Upper turret
ri
BA65
machine zero point
ll
.A
B-axis tool reference position X
N
BA64
O
BA64
TI
60
A Upper turret
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N
Setting range ±99999999 B-axis tool reference position

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
B-axis tool reference position Z

ZA
BA65
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

(c

ht
Set the deceleration area and measuring area in the G37 command.
ig
BA66: Set the distance between the starting point of movement at the
yr
measuring rate, and the measuring point. This value will be used
op
when argument R is omitted from the G37 command.

G37 deceleration area
C
G37 measuring area BA67: Set the moving distance in measuring feed mode. This value will
be used when argument D is omitted from the G37 command.
BA66
BA67
Program type E
0.001 mm/0.0001 in
Unit
±99999999
2-563
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the deceleration area and measuring area in the G36 command.
BA68: Set the distance between the starting point of movement at the
measuring rate, and the measuring point. This value will be used
when argument R is omitted from the G36 command.
G36 deceleration area
BA69: Set the moving distance in measuring feed mode. This value will
G36 measuring area
BA68 be used when argument D is omitted from the G36 command.
BA69
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
 Workpiece zero point:
gh
Workpiece edge center
ri
 Tool position reference point:
Reference point on the turret
ll
.A
 Turret clearance:
Distance between the reference points on both turrets (radius value)
N
O
 Workpiece offset:
TI
Workpiece zero point – Reference point of reference turret tool
60
Distance between the reference points on position A

R
40
both turrets (radius value)  Tool position:

PO
29
Tool position reference point – Tool nose position

BA70
R
<Schematic diagram>
o.
O
N
Tool position
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Work offset
Se
Turret clearance
IM
(BA70)
K
Program type M, E
ZA
A
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in Tool position

M
YA

0: System 1
3
1: System 2
01
2: System 3
)2
3: System 4
(c
System number to be used when argument

L is omitted from G112
ht
ig
BA71
yr
op
C
Program type M, E
Unit —
2-564
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the overriding value for retracting the tap.

Tap retracting feed = [Programmed feed for the interrupted synchronous
tapping] × BA72/100
BA72 is processed as 100 (%) when the setting is equal to zero (0) or
Feed override for retracting the tap greater than 100.
BA72
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit %
s
re
ts
0: Chuck, sub-chuck and tailstock invalid
gh
1: Chuck valid
ri
2: Sub-chuck valid
ll
Barrier valid/invalid 1 3: Tailstock valid
.A
(chuck, sub-chuck, tailstock)
N
BA73
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
0: Lower turret and steady rest invalid

ZA
Se
1: Lower turret valid

A
IM
2: Steady rest valid

Barrier valid/invalid 2
K
(Lower turret, steady rest)

ZA
BA74
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-565
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the reference position when it is viewed from the machine zero point.
BA19 (#1) Upper turret machine

BA65 (#1)
zero point
BA77
BA75 (#1) BA64
(#1) (#1)
Upper turret BA78
Barrier setup turret reference position BA92 (#1)
BA75 (#1)
X1
.
to
d
ve
Z1
BA78 BA76 (#1)
er
B-axis tool reference position
s
Lower turret/Steady rest
re
BA78
ts
BA92 Z2 (#2)
(#2)
gh
X2 BA76
ri
Program type M, E BA75 BA77 (#2)
(#2) (#2)
ll
.A
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in BA19 (#2)
Lower turret/Steady rest
N
machine zero point
O
TI
Set the reference position 1 of the chucks with respect to the machine
60
A
zero point of the upper turret.
R
40
Use J109 to J112 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 1.
PO
29
Upper turret machine zero point

R
Barrier setup chuck reference position 1

o.
BA79
N
to BA79 BA81 BA79 BA81

al
(#1) (#1) (#2) (#2)

ri
BA82
ZA
Se
BA82
A
(#2)
Program type M, E
IM
BA82 (#1)
K
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in BA80

ZA
BA80 (#1)
(#2)
A
M
Set the chuck reference position 2 to be used to set barrier around jaws
YA
for a program without jaw No. setting.

Use J113 to J116 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 1.
3
Upper turret machine zero point

01
Barrier setup chuck reference position 2

)2
BA83 BA83 BA85

(c
BA83 BA85 (#2) (#2)

to (#1) (#1)
ht
BA86
BA86 BA86 (#1)
ig
(#2)
yr
op
Program type M, E
C
BA84 (#1) BA84
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in (#2)
2-566
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the reference position for barrier area of a powered tailstock.

Use coordinates with respect to the machine zero point of the upper turret
to set the position of the tailstock being not used for machining.
When the tailstock is used, the barrier will be provided at the position
shifted through the distance of R10366 (lower-order)/R10367
(higher-order) in the Z-axis direction, from the position specified above.
For machines with multiple systems use only parameters for System 1.
Upper turret machine

Barrier reference position for a powered zero point
BA87 tailstock
d .
ve
to
er
BA90 BA87 BA89
s
(#1) (#1)
re
ts
BA88
gh
(#1)
ri
ll
BA90
.A
Program type M, E (#1)
N
O
R10366 (lower-order)
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
TI
R10367 (higher-order)
60
Setting range ±99999999 A

R
40
Set the reference position of the partition plate.

PO
29
Machine zero point

R
o.
BA91
N
Distance from spindle edge to partition (System 1)

al
plate
ri
ZA
BA91
Se
Machine zero Partition

IM
point plate
K
Program type M, E
ZA
BA91
A
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in (System 3)

M

YA
Set the central position X when viewed from the machine zero point.
3
01
Upper turret (HD1)

machine zero point
)2
Central position X when viewed from

(c
machine zero point

X1
ht
(Barrier function) BA92

BA92 (HD1)
ig
Z1
yr
op
C
Program type M, E
BA92 Z2
(HD2)
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in X2 Lower turret (HD2)
machine zero point
Setting range —
2-567
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
When using the C-axes of the HD1/HD2 in the lower turret system, set the
offset angle with respect to the upper turret, for the lower turret system.
<HD1> <HD2>
BA93: Upper/lower turret tool angle
difference (HD1)
BA94: Upper/lower turret tool angle
BA93 difference (HD2)
BA93
BA93 BA94
BA94
BA94 XX XX
YY CC CC YY
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001°
s
re
ts
Use BA95 and BA96 to set the dimensions of the sensor for tool nose
gh
measurement.
BA97 and BA99 are provided to set in machine coordinates the reference
ri
point of the sensor (see the diagram below).
ll
.A
Example :
1. For horizontal type
N
O
Machine zero point
TI
60
A
R
40
BA95: Sensor width along the X-axis

PO
29
BA96: Sensor width along the Z-axis

BA97: X-coordinate of the sensor’s
R
o.
BA97
O
reference point
N
Sensor’s
C
BA99: Z-coordinate of the sensor’s

reference point
al
BA95
K
reference point
BA99
ri
ZA
BA96
Se
BA103: Sensor width along the X-axis

A
BA97 (for lower turret/HD2) BA95

IM
BA104: Sensor width along the Z-axis

BA99 Sensor for tool nose
(for lower turret/HD2)
K
BA100 BA100: X-coordinate of the sensor’s measurement

ZA
BA102 reference point BA96

A

BA103
M
BA102: Z-coordinate of the sensor’s 2. For vertical type

YA
BA104 reference point

Machine
(for lower turret/HD2) zero point
3
01
)2
(c
BA99
ht
ig
Sensor’s
reference point
yr
BA97
op
C
BA99
Program type M
Sensor for tool nose
measurement
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
BA95
2-568
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Setting of sensor reference point Y coordinate
BA98: Y-coordinate of the sensor’s Machine zero point

reference point B98
BA101: Y-coordinate of the sensor’s
reference point
BA98
BA101
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in
s
re
ts
Set adjustment “FdT” for holding the thrust of the servo axis.
gh
Set a value less than BA108 × BA106/100.
ri
If any other value is set, the thrust may be unstable.
ll
.A
Adjustment “FdT” for servo axis thrust hold
N
BA105
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit 0.0005 mm/0.000005 in

O
N

al
K
ri
Set the dead zone for the drooping level of the servo axis thrust.
ZA
Se
A drooping level change less than BA108 × BA106/100 is ignored.

A
IM
Dead zone
K
ZA
BA106
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit %
(c

ht
Set the monitoring time for changes in the drooping level of the servo axis
ig
thrust.
yr
op
C
Filter
BA107
Program type M, E
Unit 1/3.5 ms
2-569
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the drooping level for holding the servo axis thrust.
This drooping level is held during the application of the servo axis thrust.
Servo axis thrust hold droop
BA108
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.00005 mm
s
re
ts
Specify the axis offset amount applied during automatic calculation of the
gh
tool setting value for the backface tool, which is difficult to measure using
the TOOL EYE. This automatic calculation is done based on the tool
ri
setting value for the target tool measured in the opposite position.
ll
Offset amount (X) during automatic tool
.A
setting value calculation
N
BA109
O
Reference workpiece
TI
zero point
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
Turret center - TOOL

29
Conditions Immediate SET Z of the target tool

R
o.
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

O
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Distance to the turret center (parameter)

A
IM
Offset amount (Z) during automatic tool TOOL SET X = Tool setting value X for target tool + Parameter for offset
K
setting value calculation amount X

ZA
BA110 TOOL SET Z = (Parameter for distance to center of turret × (–1) × 2)

A
– Tool setting value Z for target tool + Parameter for offset

M
amount Z
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in

(c

ht
Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration Set the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for a time
ig
time constant for time constant changeover constant changeover M-code command.
yr
M-code command If zero is assigned to this parameter, the pre-interpolation

op
BA111: For M881 command acceleration/deceleration time constant will not be changed, even when a
time constant changeover M-code command is assigned. The
C
BA112: For M882 command

BA111 BA113: For M883 command pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant existing before
to BA114: For M884 command the time constant changeover M-code command is assigned will be held.
BA116 BA115: For M885 command

BA116: For M886 command
Program type M, E
Unit mm/min
2-570
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the outside diameter and width for the turret which is to be indicated
on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.
BA118
Outside diameter of the turret for Virtual
Machining
BA117 BA117
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
Width of the turret for Virtual Machining
N
BA118
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

O
N

al
K
ri
0: Head 1
ZA
Se
1: Head 2
A
2: Head 1/2
IM
Selecting a head having a lower-turret

K
TOOL EYE
ZA
BA119
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Set the X-axis position of mounting the HOLDER part of an assembly tool
ig
model.
yr
Machine
op
zero point
Mounting position X for an assembly tool
C
model
BA120
BA120
Assembly tool model

Program type M, E mounting position
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
2-571
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Set the Z-axis position of mounting the HOLDER part of an assembly tool
model.
BA121
Machine
Mounting position Z for an assembly tool zero point
model
BA121
Assembly tool model

Program type M, E
.
mounting position
d
ve
er
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in
s
re
ts
Specify the turret reference position from the machine zero point for the
gh
turret-type tool post (for VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display).
ri
Turret BA123
For VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D
ll
reference
.A
MONITOR display position
Turret reference position
N
BA122
O
BA123 BA122
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
Machine BA122: Turret reference position X

29
Conditions Immediate zero point BA123: Turret reference position Z

R
o.
Unit 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

N

al
K
ri
Fixed value (0)

ZA
Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
BA124
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-572
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set the types of tailstock, tool holder and chuck for which the EIA barriers
are to be activated.
76543210
Tailstock usage valid/invalid (Note 1)

0: Invalid
1: Valid
Tailstock present/absent (Note 2)
0: Absent
1: Present
d .
Tool holder present/absent
ve
0: Absent
er
1: Present
s
re
Barrier tool nose position
ts
0: Tool length correction
gh
1: Current tool nose
ri
EIA barrier activation Setting of BA11 is handled as tailstock extruding
ll
length
.A
BA125
Execution of spindle revolution M-code specified in
N
same block as synchronous tapping
O
0: Invalid
TI
1: Valid
60
A
R
40
Barrier cancellation check (see Note 3 and 4)

PO
0: Valid
29
1: Invalid
R
o.
Missing jaw number check (see Note 3)

N
0: Valid
al
1: Invalid
ri
ZA
Note :
Se
1. “Tailstock usage invalid” does not mean canceling the tail barriers; it
IM
means that the tail will move away prior to machining.

2. Bit 1 in this parameter is valid for the MAZATROL program as well.
K
If bit 1 is set to 0, the tailstock function itself will become invalid. For
ZA
Program type E a machine having a tailstock, be sure to set up 1 at bit 1.

A
Conditions Immediate 3. Valid only for MAZATROL programs.

M
4. Bit 6 of this parameter is valid only when the setup data has been
YA
Unit —
entered.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-573
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
76543210
System to be made valid without system selection
for queuing
Y-axis interference type
0: Type A 1: Type B
Y-axis moving range display
0: Invalid 1: Valid
Tool command scheme (Note)
0: M06 required. 1: M06 not required.
.
FLASH tool valid/invalid
d
ve
0: Invalid 1: Valid
—
er
Milling spindle orientation command (M219)
s
0: Output 1: No output
BA126
re
System without turret
ts
gh
Shape of the tailstock center for Virtual Machining
ri
0: Single stage 1: Twin stage
ll
Note :
.A
T-command operation is defined as follows by the setting of bit 3:
N
 If the setting of bit 3 is 0
O
TTM6: Replaces the current tool with  and indexes  as the
TI
60
next tool.
A
TM6: Replaces the current tool with .
R
40
Program type E T: Indexes  as the next tool.

PO
29
Conditions Immediate  If the setting of bit 3 is 1

R
o.
Unit — T: Replaces the current tool with  and set  as the tool
O
N
offset number.
C

al
76543210
ri
ZA
Se
M249 command for preparing for tool change

A
before moving the tool to the tool change position

IM
using a MAZATROL program

0: No output 1: Output
K
ZA
For programs of Z-offset scheme: Fixed value (1)

For other programs: Invalid
A
M
Simultaneous output of TTM6M200 and

YA
TTM6M202
0: No simultaneous output
3
— 1: Simultaneous output
01
NC tailstock (servo axis thrust control)

)2
BA127 0: Invalid 1: Valid

(c
M90/M91 output for machines with turret

ht
(for QTN II series)

ig
0: Output 1: No output
yr
Type of the clamping and unclamping M-codes that

op
the NC automatically output for machines

equipped with a spindle head of swiveling type.
C
0: M-codes for machine tools of composite

machining
1: M-codes for machining centers
Program type M (Bit 3, 7: M, E)
Whether or not to read the current settings
Immediate
Conditions (tailstock position) on the SET UP MANAG. display
(Bit 3: After stop of movement)
at the beginning of the execution of each program
Unit — 0: No 1: Yes
2-574
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
NC tailstock pushing direction

0: Negative direction
1: Positive direction
NC tailstock pushing direction

BA128
(bit 0)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Method of automatic determination of the virtual nose point for tool
gh
measuring unit (TOOL EYE)
ri
0: Determined according to the machining section, direction of rotation
and orientation (left/right hand) in the tool data
ll
.A
* If measurement is carried out at a B-axis angle other than that used for
actual machining, the measurement result will not be correct because
N
the virtual nose point that is automatically determined for measurement
O
TI
according to the machining section, direction of rotation and orientation
60
(left/right hand) of the tool will not agree with the virtual nose point of the
A
actual tool.
R
40
PO
29
Example: Correct Incorrect

measurement measurement
R
o.
Machining
O
TOOL EYE TOOL EYE

N
section: O.D.
C
Left hand
pattern #1 pattern #3
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Method of automatic determination of the

virtual nose point for tool measuring unit
K
BA128
ZA
Tool nose point Tool nose points agree

(bit 1)
A
M
YA
1: Determined from the measurement pattern (TOOL EYE #1 to #4)

* The measurement result will not be correct if the virtual nose point that is
3
automatically determined for measurement (with TOOL EYE) from the

01
measurement pattern does not agree with the virtual nose point that is
)2
automatically determined according to the machining section, direction

(c
of rotation and orientation (left/right hand) of the tool.

ht
Example: Correct Correct

ig
Machining
yr
TOOL EYE TOOL EYE

section: O.D. measurement measurement
op
Left hand pattern #1 pattern #3

C
Tool nose
points agree
Program type M
Conditions Immediate Tool nose point Tool nose points agree
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-575
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the first set
of tool data (BA43, BA44)
0: Valid
Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for 1: Invalid
the AFC function in the first set of tool data
(BA43, BA44)
BA128
(bit 2)
Program type M
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the
gh
second set of tool data (BA45, BA46)
ri
0: Valid
Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for
ll
1: Invalid
the AFC function in the second set of tool
.A
data (BA45, BA46)
BA128
N
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
Program type M
A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-576
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Approach from the approach relay point (APK2) for TOOL EYE #2, #4
1: Approach from the approach relay point (APK1) for TOOL EYE #2, #4
<When bit 4 of parameter BA128 is set to 0>
* The areas enclosed with dotted lines show approaches to TOOL EYE
#2/#4.
APK2 <Upper turret SP1> <Upper turret SP2>
APK1 APK1
AP2 AP2
L78 AP1 L78 L78 AP1 L78
d .
L28 L28 L28 L28
ve
TOOL TOOL
EYE EYE AP4
s er
AP4
re
AP3
<Lower turret SP1> <Lower turret SP2>
ts
gh
AP4 AP3 AP3 AP4
ri
TOOL TOOL
ll
EYE EYE
L28 L28
.A
L28 L28
AP2 AP1 AP1 AP2
N
L78 L78 L78
L78
O
TI
APK2 APK1 APK2
APK1
60
A
R
40
AP1: TOOL EYE #1 approach point, APK1: TOOL EYE #1/#3 approach relay point
PO
29
AP3: TOOL EYE #3 approach point

R
AP2: TOOL EYE #2 approach point, APK2: TOOL EYE #2/#4 approach relay point
o.
TOOL EYE measurement approach

O
AP4: TOOL EYE #4 approach point

N
selection with turret-equipped machines

C
BA128 <When bit 4 of parameter BA128 is set to 1>

al
K
ri
(bit 4)
ZA
* The areas enclosed with dotted lines show approaches to TOOL EYE
Se
#1/#2/#3/#4.
A
IM
<Upper turret SP1> <Upper turret SP2>

APK1 APK1
K
AP1 L78 L78 AP1

ZA
L28 L28 TOOL

A
TOOL
EYE EYE
M
YA
AP3 AP3
<Lower turret SP1> <Lower turret SP2>

3
AP3 AP3
01
TOOL
)2
TOOL
EYE
EYE
L28
(c
L28
ht
L78 L78
ig
AP1 AP1
yr
APK1 APK1
op
C
AP1: TOOL EYE #1/#2 approach point

AP3: TOOL EYE #3/#4 approach point
APK1: TOOL EYE #1/#2/#3/#4 approach relay point
Related parameters
L28: Amount of Z-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE
measurement
Program type M L78: Amount of X-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE
measurement
SU118 to SU121: Tool change position during TOOL EYE measurement
Unit —
SU158 (bit 0): Tool change position during TOOL EYE measurement
Setting range 0, 1
2-577
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Action to take when hobbing (G114.3) is specified on a machine not

equipped with a tool rotary axis or table tilt axis
0: Alarm stop (alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT)
Hobbing on the machine without tool rotary 1: Hobbing

axis or table tilt axis Note :
BA128
If parameter BA128 bit 5 is set to 1 with a machine equipped with the
(bit 5) tool rotary axis or table title axis, feed commands for the B- or A-axis will
not be output when machining helical gears.
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
ll
.A
Turret lathe with an ATC unit
N
BA128
O
(bit 6)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Display of [TURRET UNCLAMP] for machines with an ATC-type turret

ZA
Se
0: Invalid
A
1: Valid
IM
Display/No display of [TURRET

UNCLAMP] for machines with ATC-type
K
Note : Setting of bit 7 is valid only for machines without lower turret.
ZA
turret
BA128
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Conditions At pwer on
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Not output
ig
1: Output
yr
op
Output of tool change preparation M code

C
(M109/M249) when executing tool change

BA129
(bit 0)
Program type M
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-578
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
—
BA129
(bit 1)
Program type —
d .
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
Select the inclination to be used for fixed G0 inclination control (option) in
gh
the G68/G68.5 mode when parameter M1 (rapid feed rate) and parameter
N1 (rapid-feed time constant) are used.
ri
0: Uses the minimum inclination among the actual axes after G68/G68.5
ll
Fixed G0 inclination control in the
.A
conversion.
G68/G68.5 mode
1: Uses the minimum inclination among the virtual axes before
N
BA129
G68/G68.5 conversion. (*)
O
(bit 2)
TI
60
A
* If the move command specifies one axis, the inclination of the specified
R
40
Program type M, E axis is used.

PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Select whether or not to measure the milling tool length with the tool
ZA
Se
measuring unit.
A
0: When a milling tool is selected, its length is not be measured and the
IM
Selection of whether or not to measure the alarm 714 ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA is raised.
milling tool length with the tool measuring
K
1: The tool length is measured.

ZA
unit
BA129 When BA129 bit 3 is 0, no measurement is performed on models in which
parameters are set as described below.
A
(bit 3)
M
 BA47 = 0 (turret type: ATC)

YA
 BA48 = &42 (axis of the head to be rotated: B)

Program type M
 K52 = 0
3
01

)2
Unit — For INTEGREX i with a workpiece hand, even if BA129 bit 3 is 0, the
(c
Setting range 0, 1 length of a milling tool can be measured.

ht
Display of [BARRIER CANCEL] with [BARRIER CANCEL TEACH]

ig
selected
yr
0: Not displayed
op
Display of [BARRIER CANCEL] with 1: Displayed

C
[BARRIER CANCEL TEACH] selected

BA129
(bit 4)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-579
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Drop the fractional portion.

1: Do not drop the fractional portion.
Handling of measurement speed of 1 in/min

or higher during laser tool length/diameter Examples of measurement speed during the execution of this
measurement with inch-specification measurement are given below.
BA129 machines BA129 (bit 5)
(bit 5) Set speed 0 1
Example (1) 0.9 in/min 0.9 in/min 0.9 in/min
Program type M, E Example (2) 1.1 in/min 1.0 in/min 1.1 in/min
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Planetary tapping in the MAZATROL rear XY mode
gh
0: Helical machining in the CCW direction (right-hand thread cutting)
ri
1: Helical machining in the CW direction (left-hand thread cutting)
ll
Planetary tapping in the MAZATROL rear
.A
XY mode
N
BA129
O
(bit 7)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
Fixed value
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
BA130
A
(bit 1)
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Multi-magazine number indication on the POSITION display

ig
yr
0: Not set
op
1: Set
C
Multi-magazine number display

BA131
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-580
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Tool length C input of MAZATROL tool data

0: Invalid
1: Valid
When tool length C input is valid, WEAR COMP. Y and MAX WEAR Y
Tool length C input, valid/invalid
can be input in the list on the TOOL DATA display.
BA131
(bit 1) Note :
This parameter is valid only with the machines equipped with tool length
C.
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Switches the approach pattern for TOOL EYE measurement in
gh
MAZATROL program.
ri
0: xtends the TOOL EYE after approach selected by the SU11 setting.
ll
1: Executes zero-point return first, and then executes approach after
.A
Switching of the approach pattern in TOOL extending the TOOL EYE.
EYE measurement (MAZATROL program)
N
1. The turret always moves to the machine zero point.
BA131
O
2. Extends the TOOL EYE.
TI
(bit 5)
60
3. Axes move to the approach relay point in G0 (rapid feed) mode,

A
with axis move priority given to the Z-axis.
R
40
PO
* After the measurement with the TOOL EYE, the following operation
29
Program type M is executed if “retract the measurement equipment” is set in the

R
o.
Conditions After stop of movement program.

O
N
Unit — 4. The turret always moves to the machine zero point.

al
Setting range 0, 1 5. The TOOL EYE retracts.

ri
ZA
Se
Sets the axis number of the axis to be used as the hobbing axis in hobbing
A
II operation for each system.

IM
K
Hobbing II (position controlled hobbing)

ZA
Hobbing axis allocation

A
BA241
M
YA
3
Program type E
01
)2
Unit —
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-581
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-18 Machine parameter MACHINE STRUCTURE (MS)
Classification MACHINE Display title MACHINE STRUCTURE
Sets the initial fluctuation cycle for the spindle speed fluctuation function.
Note :
If 0 is set, 0.1 s is assumed.
Spindle speed fluctuation function If 50 or greater is set, 50 is assumed.
Fluctuation cycle Initial value
MS26
d .
ve
er
Program type E
s
re
Unit 0.1 s
ts
gh
ri
Sets the initial fluctuation amplitude with respect to the specified speed for
ll
the spindle speed fluctuation function.
.A
Note :
N
Spindle speed fluctuation function If 0 is set, 1% is assumed.
O
Fluctuation amplitude Initial value If 50 or greater is set, 50 is assumed.
TI
60
A
R
MS27
40
PO
29
R
o.
Program type E
O
N
al
Unit %
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-582
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Classification MACHINE Display title MACHINE STRUCTURE
Sets the initial fluctuation mode for the spindle speed fluctuation function.
0: MODE 1: Increasing/decreasing the spindle speed with respect to the
specified speed
–1
Spindle speed (min )
Spindle speed
Fluctuation during fluctuation
amplitude
Specified speed
d .
ve
er
Spindle speed fluctuation mode
s
Fluctuation cycle
re
Initial value
Time
MS125
ts
gh
(bit 0)
ri
1: MODE 2: Increasing/decreasing the spindle speed by taking the
ll
specified speed as the upper limit
.A
–1
Spindle speed (min )
N
O
TI
60
A Fluctuation
amplitude
R
40
Specified speed
PO
29
Spindle speed
during fluctuation
R
o.
Program type E
O
N
al
Fluctuation cycle
K
Unit —
ri
ZA
Time
Se
Setting range 0, 1
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-583
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-19 Data I/O parameter CMT parameter (CMT)
Classification DATA I/O Display title CMT
Meaning Description
Baud rate for RS-232C interface
Set values
BAUDRATE
110 4800
300 9600
1200 19200
d .
2400
ve
Program type M, E
er
Conditions At I/O startup
s
Unit —
re
ts
gh
Type of processing to be executed if the machining program of an existing
work number is to be loaded
ri
ll
.A
SAME WNo. Set values Description
N
Issues an alarm if the work number
O
ALARM
already exists.
TI
60
A LOAD
Overrides the program if the work
R
40
Program type M, E number already exists.

PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range —
al
CMT port selection

ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Set values Description

PORT
K
COM1 RS232C conversion connector

ZA

A

M

YA
Program type M, E
3

01
Unit —
)2
Setting range —
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-584
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Classification DATA I/O Display title CMT
Invalid
—
CMT1
to
CMT32
Program type —
.
d
ve
Conditions —
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-585
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
2-3-20 Data I/O parameter TAPE parameter (TAP)
Classification DATA I/O Display title TAPE
Meaning Description
Set values
BAUDRATE
110 4800
300 9600
1200 19200
d .
2400
ve
Program type M, E
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
gh
Number of data bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)
ri
ll
Set values
.A
DATA BITS
N
7
O
TI
8
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
R

o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 7, 8
K
ri
ZA
Parity check (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

Se
A
IM
Set values
K
PARITY
ZA
NONE
A
ODD
M
EVEN
YA
3
Program type M, E
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Number of stop bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

ig
yr
op
Set values
C
STOP BITS
1
1.5
2
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range —
2-586
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Meaning Description
This parameter is used to select the method of handshaking to control the

state of data transfer between the NC system and connected device.

HAND SHAKE
NONE No control
DC CONTROL Complies with control code DC1 through
DC4
RTS/CTS Complies with device connection RTS/CTS.
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range —
ts
The waiting time for replies from the connected device during inputting or
gh
outputting.
ri
An alarm occurs if this time elapses following the final reply.
ll
.A
WAIT TIME
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit 0.1 s
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Selection of paper tape puncher output code

Se

IM
ISO Paper tape punching in ISO code

K
FORMAT
EIA Paper tape punching in EIA code
ZA
ASCII Paper tape punching in ASCII code

A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht

ig

yr
op

C
SAME WNo. Issues an alarm if the received work

ALARM
number already exists.
Overrides the program if the received
LOAD
work number already exists.
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range —
2-587
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Meaning Description
Tape port selection
Set
values Data I/O Tape operation
RS232C RS232C
PORT COM1
conversion connector conversion connector
RS232C RS232C
COM2
RS232C RS232C
COM3
d .
ve
RS232C RS232C
Program type M, E COM4
conversion connector
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range —
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-588
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set values Terminator

0 Without terminator
Type of terminator 1 EOB or EOR
2 EOB only
TAP1
3 EOR only
4 One character of your choice
Program type M, E 5 Two characters of your choice
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Effective only when TAP1 is set to 4 or 5.
gh
ri
ll
.A
Terminator code 1
N
TAP2
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Effective only when TAP1 is set to 5.

Se
A
IM
K
Terminator code 2
ZA
TAP3
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c

ht
This parameter is used to specify whether or not CR is to be placed in

ig
front of LF (separation of blocks) during ISO code punching.

yr
0: No placement of CR
op
1: Placement of CR
C
Output of CR during ISO code punching
TAP4
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-589
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
This parameter is used to specify whether or not a parity bit is to be

assigned to the DC code to be output.
Set values Parity Hole-punching pattern of DC3 code
DC code parity
0 No assignment    
1 Assignment     
TAP5
Note :
This parameter is valid only when HAND SHAKE is set to DC
Program type M, E CONTROL.
. d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Select whether or not DC2 and DC4 codes are to be output to the feed
gh
sections which will be generated at the beginning and end of paper tape
punching.
ri
Example : :
ll
.A
Feed EOR (Significant EOR Feed
N
information)
O
Feed section DC code output
TI
DC2 DC4
60
TAP6
A
R
40

PO
29
0 Neither DC2 nor DC4 is output.

R
o.
1 Only DC2 is output.

N

al
Program type M, E
ri
3 Both DC2 and DC4 are output.

ZA
Se
Conditions At I/O startup Note :

A
IM
Unit — This parameter is valid only when HAND SHAKE is set to DC

Setting range 0 to 3 CONTROL.
K
ZA
Select whether or not DSR flow control is valid for serial communication
during tape operation.
A
0: Valid
M
1: Invalid
YA
DSR output flow control selection

3
Note :
01
TAP7
This parameter setting is enabled when the cycle start button is pressed
)2
to start tape operation.

(c
ht
Program type M, E
ig
yr
Unit —
op
C
Setting range 0, 1
2-590
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character

code “[” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.
Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.
“[” code for paper tape reader/puncher for Example : : Hole to be punched
EIA
“[” code
TAP9
Program type M, E Set value
d.
ve
er
Unit — (0 × 27)+(1 × 26)+(0 × 25)+(0 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(1 × 22)+(0 × 21)+(0 × 20) = 76
s
MPL068
re
ts
gh
code “]” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.
ri
ll
“]” code for paper tape reader/puncher for Example : : Hole to be punched
.A
EIA
N
“]” code
TAP10
O
TI
60
A
R
40

PO
29

R
o.
(0 × 27)+(0 × 26)+(0 × 25)+(0 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(1 × 22)+(0 × 21)+(1 × 20)=13

O
Unit —
N
MPL069
C

al
K
ri
ZA

Se
code “#” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.

A

IM
“#” code for paper tape reader/puncher for Example : : Hole to be punched
K
EIA
ZA
“#” code
TAP11
A
M
YA

3
01

(0 × 27)+(1 × 26)+(1 × 25)+(0 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(1 × 22)+(0 × 21)+(1 × 20)=109
)2
Unit —
MPL070
(c

ht

ig
code “” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.

yr

op
Example : : Hole to be punched

C
“” code for paper tape reader/puncher for

EIA
“” code
TAP12

(0 × 27)+(1 × 26)+(1 × 25)+(1 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(0 × 22)+(1 × 21)+(0 × 20)=122
Unit —
MPL071
2-591
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER

code “=” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.
“=” code for paper tape reader/puncher for Example : : Hole to be punched
EIA
“=” code
TAP13
d .
ve
(0 × 27)+(1 × 26)+(0 × 25)+(1 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(0 × 22)+(1 × 21)+(1 × 20)= 91
er
Unit —
MPL072
s
re
ts
gh
code “:” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.
ri
ll
“:” code for paper tape reader/puncher for
.A
EIA
N
“ : “ code
TAP14
O
TI
60
A
R
40

PO
29

R
(0 × 27)+(1 × 26)+(0 × 25)+(0 × 24)+(0 × 23)+(1 × 22)+(1 × 21)+(0 × 20)=70

o.
Unit —
N
MPL073
C

al
K
ri
ZA

Se
code “(” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.

A

IM

“(” code for paper tape reader/puncher for
K
EIA
ZA
“(“ code
TAP15
A
M
YA

3
01

(0 × 27)+(0 × 26)+(0 × 25)+(1 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(0 × 22)+(1 × 21)+(0 × 20)=26
)2
Unit —
MPL074
(c

ht

ig
code “)” onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA.

yr

op
C
“)” code for paper tape reader/puncher for Example : : Hole to be punched
EIA
TAP16 “)” code
Program type M, E
Set value
Unit — (0 × 27)+(1 × 26)+(0 × 25)+(0 × 24)+(1 × 23)+(0 × 22)+(1 × 21)+(0 × 20)=74
2-592
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
Paper tape puncher parity-V check
TAP25 0: No parity-V check during paper tape

reading
1: Parity-V check during paper tape reading
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
0: Tape loading impossible
gh
1: Tape loading possible
ri
ll
Data transfer of a paper tape program
.A
which has been punched by M2
TAP26
N
O
(bit 0)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
0: All programs and various NC data

ri
ZA
Se
1: All programs only

A
IM
Types of data to be punched onto paper

tape during all punching
K
TAP26
ZA
(bit 1)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
0: Valid
ht
1: Invalid
ig
yr
op
Input/output of the program name during

paper tape reading/punching
C
TAP26
(bit 2)
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-593
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: 8 digits
1: 4 digits
Number of digits of work No. output

TAP26
(bit 3)
Program type E
. d
ve
Unit —
s er
Setting range 0, 1
re
0: Output of ASCII data in hexadecimal notation
ts
gh
1: Output in characters
ri
Input/output of material data during
ll
.A
punching/reading
TAP26
N
O
(bit 4)
TI
60
Program type E
A
R
40
PO

29
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
0: Do not add
K
ri
ZA
1: Add
Se
A
IM
Setup data to add when outputting an

EIA/ISO program through tape I/O
K
TAP26
ZA
(bit 5)
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-594
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
76543210
To specify whether or not M99 is to be set as the
program end code in reading of paper tape
0: Set as program end
1: Not set as program end
program end code in reading of paper tape
.
d
ve
Bit parameter related to program end code program end code in reading of paper tape
er
(M) for paper tape reader
s
re
TAP27 To recognize the code “O” (or “:”) as the program
ts
end in reading of multiple programs (on one paper
gh
tape)
0: Yes
ri
1: No
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
O
N

al
The number of characters in NULL (feed) that are to be punched at the

ri
ZA
beginning and end of paper tape

Se
Example :
IM
Number of characters in feed section for TAP29 characters TAP29 characters

K
paper tape puncher

ZA
(Significant
Feed EOR information) EOR Feed
TAP29
A
M
YA
Tape setting position End of punching

Program type E
3
MPL078
01
)2
Unit Character
(c

ht
The total number of space-characters that are punched out between

ig
O-number and program section.

yr
op
Number of characters in the space between

C
O-number and program for paper tape Program

puncher
O 1 2 3 4 SP SP SP  SP CR
section
TAP30
TAP30 characters
MPL079
Program type E
Unit Character
2-595
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The total number of space-characters that are punched out between

programs when more than one program are punched onto paper tape.
Number of characters in the space between

programs for paper tape puncher  M 0 2 CR SP SP  SP CR O 1 2 3 4 
TAP31
Program TAP31 characters Program
Program type E MPL080
d .
ve
er
Unit Character
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-596
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-21 Data I/O parameter DNC parameter (DNC)
Classification DATA I/O Display title DNC
Meaning Description
Set values
BAUDRATE
110 4800
300 9600
1200 19200
d .
2400
ve
Program type M, E
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
gh
ri
ll
Set values
.A
DATA BITS
N
7
O
TI
8
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Program type E
R

o.
O
N
Unit —
C
al
Setting range 7, 8
K
ri
ZA
Parity check (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

Se
A
IM
Set values
K
PARITY
ZA
NONE
A
ODD
M
EVEN
YA
3
Program type E
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht

ig
yr
op
Set values
C
STOP BITS 1
1.5
2
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range —
2-597
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Meaning Description
outputting.
WAIT TIME
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit 0.1 s
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
SAME WNo. Issues an alarm if the received work
ALARM
N
number already exists.
O
Overrides the program if the received
TI
LOAD
work number already exists.
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range —
al
K
ri
ZA
DNC port selection

Se
A
IM

K
RS232C
PORT COM1
ZA
RS232C
A
COM2
M
YA
RS232C
COM3
3
RS232C
01
Program type E COM4

)2

(c
Unit —
ht
Setting range —
ig
yr
op
C
2-598
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Set values Terminator

0 Without terminator
Type of terminator 1 EOB or EOR

2 EOB only
DNC1 3 EOR only
4 One character of your choice
5 Two characters of your choice
Program type E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
Effective only when DNC1 is set to 4 or 5.
gh
ri
ll
.A
Terminator code 1
N
DNC2
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Effective only when DNC1 is set to 5.

Se
A
IM
K
Terminator code 2
ZA
DNC3
A
M
YA
Program type E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c

ht

ig

yr
op

C
DC code parity
0 No assignment    
DNC5 1 Assignment     
Program type E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-599
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
This parameter is used to set the number of times that the  code or TEXT
is to be repeatedly transmitted to a host system in case that the @ code is
not sent from the host system within the waiting time which has been set
at WAIT TIME.
Number of NC transmission retries during
HOST NC
DNC file transfer
Retransmitted if @
 is not received.
DNC9
@
An alarm occurs if the
TEXT transmission operation is
Program type M, E
.
repeated up to the number of
d
ve
Conditions At I/O startup @ times set with this parameter.
er
Unit Number of times EOT MPL081
s
re
ts
This parameter is used to set the number of times that the @ code is to be
gh
repeatedly transmitted to a host system in the case that the EOT-code or
TEXT from the host system is not received within the waiting time which
ri
has been set at WAIT TIME.
ll
Number of NC reception retries during DNC
.A
HOST NC
file transfer
N
 Initialized if EOT or
O
TEXT is not received.
DNC10
TI
@
60
A An alarm occurs if the

R
40
Program type M, E TEX transmission operation is

PO
29
repeated up to the number of

Conditions At I/O startup times set with this parameter.
R
@
o.
Unit Number of times MPL082

N
EOT
al
K
ri
ZA
This parameter is used to set the number of times that

Se
transmission/reception of command messages is to be repeated in the

A
case that it is not correctly performed.

IM
Number of NC transmission/reception This parameter has almost the same meaning as that of parameters
DNC9 and DNC10, except that command messages are interchanged in
K
retries during DNC command message

ZA
transfer the case of DNC11 and files are interchanged in the case of DNC9 and
DNC10.
A
DNC11
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit Number of times

(c

ht
The NC waiting time from transmission of  or TEXT to reception of @

ig
from the host system.

yr
HOST NC
op

@ waiting time during DNC
C
DNC12
transmission
@
DNC12 TEXT
DNC12
@
Program type M, E
EOT
Conditions At I/O startup MPL083
Unit 0.1 s
( DNC9)
2-600
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The NC waiting time from transmission of @ or reception of EOT to

reception of  or TEXT from the host system.
HOST NC

“”, TEXT waiting time during DNC
transmission @
DNC13
TEXT
DNC13 @
EOT
DNC13

.
Program type M, E
d
ve
Conditions At I/O startup @
TEXT MPL084
er
Unit 0.1 s
s
re
Setting range 0 to 255 ( DNC10)
ts
The NC waiting time from transmission of @ to reception of EOT from the
gh
host system.
ri
HOST NC

ll
.A
EOT waiting time during DNC
transmission @
N
O
DNC14 TEXT
TI
60
A @
R
40
DNC14
PO
Program type M, E
29
EOT
Conditions At I/O startup MPL085
R
o.
Unit 0.1 s
N
( DNC10)
al
K
ri
ZA
The NC stop time from reception of ! from the host system to transmission
Se
of .
A
IM
HOST NC

K
NC stop time after reception of !

ZA
!
DNC15
A
DNC15 
M
MPL086
YA
Program type M, E Code  is transmitted to the host system if the time that has been set with
3
DNC15 elapses following reception of !.

01

)2
Unit 0.1 s
(c

ht
The time from the moment the NC receives the digital-out command to the
ig
moment the NC internally resets this command.

yr
op
C
NC reset time after digital-out
DNC16
Program type M, E
Unit 0.1 s
2-601
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
[For NC transmission] [For NC reception]

The NC stop time from reception of The NC stop time from reception
@ from the host system to of  or TEXT from the host system
transmission of EOT or TEXT to transmission of @
NC stop time from reception HOST NC HOST NC
* *
DNC17 DNC17
@ @
DNC17
TEXT TEXT
Program type M, E DNC17
d .
@ @
ve
DNC17
er
Unit 0.01 s EOT EOT
s
MPL087
re
ts
The NC waiting time from transmission of command message EOT to
gh
reception of command reply message  from the host system.
ri
HOST NC
*
ll
.A
DNC command reply message waiting time @
N
Command messages
TEX
O
DNC18 @
TI
60
A EOT
DNC18
R
40
Program type M, E *
PO
Command
29
Conditions At I/O startup reply @

R
o.
messages
O
Unit 0.1 s
N
TEXT
C
MPL088
al
K
ri
ZA
The numbers to be assigned to various machines in order to manage on

Se
the host system the tool data, parameters etc. that are specific to the
A
machines being used

IM
K
DNC machine number

ZA
A
DNC19
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c

ht
The NC stop time from reception of EOT from the host system to
ig
transmission of  of the next message

yr
HOST NC
op
*
C
NC transmission stop time of DNC (from

reception to transmission) @
TEXT
DNC20
@
Program type M, E EOT

DNC20
Conditions At I/O startup *
Unit 0.01 s
@ MPL089
2-602
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
The NC stop time from transmission of EOT to the host system to

transmission of  of the next message
HOST NC
*
NC transmission stop time of DNC (from
transmission to transmission) @
TEXT
DNC21
@
Program type M, E EOT
d .
DNC21
ve
Conditions At I/O startup *
er
Unit 0.01 s
@
s
MPL090
re
ts
76543210
gh
Select the type of processing to be executed if
the tool quantity data within the NC memory
ri
mismatches that which has been transferred
ll
from the DNC memory.
.A
—
0 : Issues an alarm if the tool quantity data
N
mismatches.
DNC25
O
1 : Executes loading forcibly, even if the tool
TI
quantity data mismatches.
60
A Handling of tool data and tool files in the M

R
40
Program type M, E PLUS format

PO
29
0 : Valid
R
1 : Invalid
o.
Unit —
N

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
76543210 (1: Valid, 0: Invalid)

A
IM
1: After program reception, a search is made for

the work number of that program.
K
1: Details of an alarm occurring in DNC are

ZA
displayed.
A
1: Loading of programs having the same work

M
number as that of the registered program in

YA
— NC becomes impossible.
1: The program protect function is released.
3
DNC26
01
1: Three digit G-format and G10 format codes

)2
input/output for MAZAK data transfer protocol

1: Binary to ASCII format input/output of MAZAK
(c
data transfer protocol

ht
1: All programs having work numbers smaller

ig
than No. 9000 are erased at the start of

yr
program reception.
op

C
Conditions At I/O startup When both bit 5 and bit 6 are set to 1 (enable), this functions for three
digit G-format and G10 format codes input/output.
Unit —
2-603
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Interpret 0 for automatic operation and 1 for check. (Setting for

machining centers)
1: Interpret 1 for automatic operation and 2 for check. (Settings for turning
machines)
Interpretation of message for DNC macro
variable transmission
DNC27
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
gh
ri
ll
Number of retry times with detection of a
.A
physical error
N
DNC29
O
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit Number of times

N

al
K
ri
ZA
Select a tool data/tool file message format.

Se
0: M32 scheme
A
IM
1: M Plus scheme
2: M640M scheme
K
Tool data/tool file message format

3: M640M Pro scheme
ZA
DNC30
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
ht
Set the time interval from the time the response from the COM port driver
ig
has disappeared, to the time the initialization of the COM port driver is
yr
started.
op
C
Waiting time for a response from the COM

port driver
DNC31
Program type M, E
Unit 0.1 s
2-604
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
2-3-22 Data I/O parameter OTHER (IOP/DPR/IDD)
Classification DATA I/O Display title OTHER
Handling of TPC data (parameters, relay points) when loading

MAZATROL programs created with the MATRIX series
Handling of TPC data when loading Bit 1 Bit 0 Handling of TPC data
IOP2 programs created with the MATRIX series
0 0 Not loaded
(bit 0) 0 1 Parameters loaded
(bit 1) 1 0 Not loaded
d.
1 1 Parameters and relay points loaded
ve
Program type M
er
s
re
Unit —
ts
Setting range 0, 1
gh
Mazak data library function
ri
0: Invalid
ll
.A
1: Valid
N
Mazak data library function
O
IOP4
TI
60
(bit 0) A
R
40
PO
29
Program type M, E
R
o.
O
N
Unit —
al
Setting range 0, 1
ri
ZA
Se
0: To output
A
1: Not to output
IM
K
Outputting of Version.txt at saving on the

ZA
DATA I/O display

IOP4
A
M
(bit 1)
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
0: Valid
ig
yr
1: Invalid
op
C
Parameter load error prevention function When the function is enabled, a warning window is displayed if loading is
started with a parameter selected on the DATA I/O display.
IOP4
(bit 2)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-605
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: TOOL, PART, NOM, ID CODE (+ATTRIB)

1: TOOL, PART, NOM, ID CODE (+ATTRIB), GROUP No.
Overwriting registration judgment criteria

when entering tool data text with machines
allowing registration of multiple tools
IOP4
(bit 3)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
Unit —
s er
Setting range 0, 1
re
Tool count in tool data is checked when loading tool data in binary format.
ts
0: Invalid
gh
1: Valid
ri
Tool data count check during tool data * When tool data does not match the tool count checked during loading,
ll
loading
.A
alarm 505 CANNOT LOAD (MISMATCH) occurs.
IOP5
N
(bit 1)
O
TI
60
Program type M, E A
R
40
PO
29
Unit —
R
o.
Setting range 0, 1
N
Selects how the sign for the start point Z of point machining (XC, XY
al
mode) is treated when the program of the Z offset scheme (MATRIX

ri
ZA
series) is converted into the WPC workpiece scheme program.

Se
Selection of the sign for the start point Z of 0: Does not invert the sign from the set value.
IM
point machining (XC, XY mode) when

1: Inverts the sign from the set value.
loading a Z offset scheme program
IOP5
K
ZA
(bit 2)
A
M
Program type M, E
YA

3
Unit —
01
Setting range 0, 1
)2
Overwriting associated with loading of the same work number as that of

(c
the program(s) registered in the NC unit by hard disk, USB, or SD card

ht
input/output.
ig
0: Alarm without overwriting

yr
Overwriting associated with loading of the

program of the same work number 1: Overwriting
op
IOP5
C
(bit 6)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-606
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Overwriting associated with loading of the tool model of the same name
0: Next tool model loaded without overwriting
1: Overwriting
Overwriting associated with loading of the
tool model of the same name
IOP5
(bit 7)
Program type M, E
d .
ve
Unit —
s er
Setting range 0, 1
re
Appending the text string specified in the setting text file to the end of the
ts
program name at program conversion using the B-axis tilt table
gh
compatible program conversion function or EIA conversion (INTEGREX
ri
IV  INTEGREX i)
ll
0: Do not append
.A
1: Append
N
O
Program name change upon program
TI
* If the resulting program name exceeds 32 characters, the program
conversion
60
name before the conversion will be truncated at its end and then the
A
IOP6 specified text string is appended at the end to bring the length of the
R
40
(bit 1)
PO
program name to 32 characters.

29
* The setting text file for the B-axis tilt table compatible program
R
o.
conversion function is stored in the following location.

O
N
C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\EiaCnvVA2B\eia_cnvva2b_program_name
C
.txt
al
K
ri
* The setting text file for the EIA conversion function (INTEGREX IV 
ZA
Se
Program type M, E INTEGREX i) is stored in the following location.

A
C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\EiaCnvF2I\eia_cnvf2i_program_name.txt
IM
* This parameter is enabled only for the B-axis tilt table specification
Unit — machines and the INTEGREX i Series horizontal multi-tasking
K
ZA
Setting range 0, 1 machines.

A
Adding the comment “(_CNV)” to the converted blocks upon EIA

M
conversion (INTEGREX IV  INTEGREX i)

YA
0: Do not add
Adding comments to the converted blocks 1: Add

3
01
upon EIA conversion

IOP6
)2
* This parameter is enabled only for the INTEGREX i Series horizontal

multi-tasking machines.
(c
(bit 2)
ht
ig
Program type E
yr
op
C
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-607
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
Displaying the EIA-compatible conversion menu upon EIA conversion

(INTEGREX IV  INTEGREX i)
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
EIA-compatible conversion menu display
IOP6 * When this function is enabled, all the EIA programs are converted with
(bit 3) the menu item turned ON. To avoid erroneous operations, change the
parameter setting only at the time of conversion.
* This parameter is enabled only for the INTEGREX i Series horizontal
Program type E multi-tasking machines.
d .
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Commenting out the blocks that contain variable numbers and operators
gh
upon EIA conversion (INTEGREX IV  INTEGREX i)
ri
0: Commenting out the blocks and adding M9999 at the following block
ll
Commenting out blocks containing variable 1: Not commenting out
.A
numbers and operators upon EIA
conversion
N
IOP6 * This parameter is enabled only for the INTEGREX i Series horizontal
O
(bit 4) multi-tasking machines.
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type E
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Handing of T-command blocks that contain a D code upon EIA conversion

Se
(INTEGREX IV  INTEGREX i)
A
0: Commenting out the T-command block and adding M9999 at the

IM
following block
Commenting out T-command blocks upon
K
1: Commenting out only the D code

EIA conversion
ZA
IOP6
A
(bit 5) * This parameter is enabled only for the INTEGREX i Series horizontal
M
multi-tasking machines.
YA
Program type E
3
01
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
Specify the serial port number of the NC unit that is to be used for
ig
communication with the magazine-side display unit.

yr
op
Serial port used for communication with the

C
magazine-side display unit

IOP7
(bit 0)
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-608
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Fixed value
—
IOP7
(bit 2)
(bit 3)
Program type —
d .
Conditions —
ve
er
Unit —
s
Setting range —
re
ts
Bit 5 Bit 4 ID amplifier type
gh
0 0 EUCHNER
ri
0 1 BALLUFF
ll
(Magazine-side display unit) ID amplifier
.A
type 1 0 Invalid
IOP7
N
1 1 No ID amplifier
(bit 4)
O
(bit 5)
TI
60
A
Program type
R
M, E
40
PO
29
R
Unit —
o.
O
N
Setting range 0, 1
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Bit 7 Bit 6 Tool mounting/removing timing

Se
0 0 Not controlled with PLC

A
IM
(Magazine-side display unit) Tool mounting/ 0 1 Controlled with PLC

removing timing 1 0 Invalid
K
IOP7
ZA
1 1 Invalid
(bit 6)
A
(bit 7)
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01
Unit —
)2
Setting range 0, 1
(c
0: Do not clear
ht
1: Clear
ig
yr
op
(Magazine-side display unit IN/OUT) Tool

count/time data clear setting
C
IOP8
(bit 0)
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-609
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
0: Do not clear
1: Clear
(Magazine-side display unit IN/OUT) Tool

life count/time data clear setting
IOP8
(bit 1)
Program type M, E
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
Setting range 0, 1
ts
Display of [TILT.TBL A->B CONVERT] menu item on the DATA I/O
gh
display
ri
0: Hidden
ll
1: Displayed
B-axis tilt table compatible program
.A
conversion menu
N
IOP8 * Enabled only with B-axis tilt table specification machines.
O
(bit 3)
TI
60
A
R
40
Program type M
PO
29
R
o.
Unit —
N
Setting range 0, 1
al
K
ri
ZA
Fixed value (0)

Se
A
IM
K
—
ZA
IOP9
A
M
YA
Program type —
3
01
Conditions —
)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range —
ht
Set the connection port number for the Mazak data library function.
ig
yr
op
C
Mazak data library function:

Connection port number
IOP13
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-610
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
0: Invalid
1: Enabled (LAN-RS232C converter required)
11: Enabled (LAN-RS232C converter not required)
MAZA-CARE function
(for the Japanese market only) * When the term of MAZA-CARE contract has expired, the function
cannot be used even if the parameter is made valid.
IOP14
Program type M, E
d.
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
gh
Baud rate
Set values Baud rate Set values Baud rate
ri
110 4800
ll
0 110 4 4800
.A
300 9600
1 300 5 9600
1200 19200
N
2 1200 6 19200
DPR1
O
2400
TI
3 2400
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
ZA

Se
Stop bit Set values Stop bit

IM
1 0 1
K
1.5 1 1.5
ZA
2 2 2
DPR2
A
M
YA
Program type M, E
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
ht

ig
yr
Set values
op
C
Data bit Set values Data bit

0 8
DPR4 1 7
Program type M, E
Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-611
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
This parameter specifies whether “CR” is to be inserted at the beginning

of LF (block delimiter) in ISO code output when the output destination is a
serial port (DPR14 = 2 or 3).
0: No “CR” insertion
ISO code CR output and the output file size 1: “CR” insertion
This parameter specifies the maximum permissible file size to be used for
DPR8 hard disk output using an external output command macro when the
output destination is the hard disk (DPR14 = 4).
Maximum permissible file size: Entered value × 100K bytes
Program type M, E However, this file size is 100K bytes if the entered value is 0.
.
d
ve
er
Unit —
s
re
ts
This parameter is used to select the method of handshaking to control the
gh
state of data transfer between the NC system and connected device.
ri
Set values Method Description
ll
.A
Method of handshaking 0 None No control
N
1 DC control Complies with control code DC1 through DC4
DPR9
O
TI
2 RTS/CTS Complies with device connection RTS/CTS.
60
A
R
40
Program type M, E
PO
29

R
o.
Unit —
N
al
K
ri
ZA

Se

A
IM
  
K
DC code parity 0 No assignment 

ZA
DPR10
1 Assignment     
A
M
Note :
YA
This parameter is valid only when the handshaking method is set to DC

Program type M, E control (DPR9 is set to 1).
3
01

)2
Unit —
(c
Setting range 0, 1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-612
Serial No. 294060
PARAMETER 2
Select whether or not DC2 and DC4 codes are to be output to the feed
sections.
Example :
(Significant
Feed EOR EOR Feed
information)
Feed section DC code output DC2 DC4
.
DPR11
d
ve
er
0 Neither DC2 nor DC4 is output.
s
re
ts
gh
3 Both DC2 and DC4 are output.
ri
Program type M, E
ll
Conditions At I/O startup Note :
.A
Unit — This parameter is valid only when the handshaking method is set to DC
N
control (DPR9 is set to 1).
O
TI
60
outputting.
A
R
40

PO
29
R
o.
Waiting time
O
N
DPR12
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Program type M, E
K
ZA
Unit 0.1 s
A
M
Selection of output code

YA
3
Set values Format Description

01
0 ISO Output in ISO code

)2
Output format
1 EIA Output in EIA code
(c
DPR13
ht
ig
yr
Program type M, E
op
C

Unit —
Setting range 0, 1
2-613
Serial No. 294060
2 PARAMETER
The port is selected according to the combination of parameters DPR14

and DPR16.
DPR16 DPR14 Port Description

0 0 – Not used
1 – Not used
2 – NC unit SIO CH1
Selection of an output destination port 3 – NC unit SIO CH2

1 0 – Not used
.
DPR14
d
1 – Not used
ve
2 COM3 RS232C conversion connector
s er
3 COM4 RS232C conversion connector
re
ts
When DPR14 = 4, data is output to the hard disk regardless of the DPR16
gh
setting.
ri
Program type M, E
ll
Set values Output destination
.A
4 Hard disk (C:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\Print\)
Unit —
N
O
TI
60
This parameter denotes the number of characters in NULL (feed) when

A
the output destination is a serial port (DPR14 = 2 or 3).
R
40
PO
29
Example :
R
Number of characters or the number of

o.
DPR15 characters DPR15 characters

O
lines in feed section

N
(Significant
al
DPR15
K
Feed EOR EOR Feed

information)
ri
ZA
Se
This parameter denotes the number of lines fed when the output
IM
Program type M, E destination is a hard disk (DPR14 = 4).

K
ZA
Unit Character
A

M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
2-614 E
Serial No. 294060
Original Instructions
PARAMETER LIST
ALARM LIST
M-CODE LIST
.d
ve
er
s
re
ts
gh
HA12HA0034E (2/2)
ri
Manual No.:
ll
.A
NC: MAZATROL SmoothX
N
O
TI
Serial No.:
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this
al
K
ri
manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the
ZA
Se
nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.

A
IM
K
ZA
IMPORTANT NOTICE
A
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
M
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
YA
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
3
2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety.

01
3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
)2
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
(c
such items are in place.

ht
ig
4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
yr
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject
op
to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical
C

5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology
Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
7. The export of machining programs may be restricted to prevent them from being used for
military purposes. The machining programs you prepared are your property, so you should
manage them yourself in accordance with the law.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION, Japan
06.2018
Copyright (C) 2017 YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved.

C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 29
K 40
C
O 60
Serial No. 294060
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
.
Rule
d
ve
er
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
s
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
re
states may take place at the user site.
ts
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
gh
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
ri
ll
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
.A
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
N
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
O
TI
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
60
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are

A
R
40
“inexecutable” functions.
PO
29
3. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
R
o.
follows:
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

A
IM
DANGER
K
ZA
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

A
life or body.
M
WARNING
YA
3
01
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

)2
machine damage.
CAUTION
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
HGENPA0102E S-1
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
 After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
WARNING  Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
 Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block,
and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path
d.
check, Virtual Machining, and other functions, if provided.
ve
er
 Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
s
re
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable
ts
feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used,
gh
those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ
ri
from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or
ll
rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the
.A
machine.
N
O
 Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
TI
60
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
A
R
40
function is executed without its thorough understanding.

PO
29
 Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
R
o.
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
O
N
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
al
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect

ri
ZA
Se
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
A
without a thorough understanding.

IM
K
Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC

ZA
A
M
 Before using the following cutting conditions:

YA
• Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
3
Determination Function
01
WARNING
)2
• Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function

(c
• Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
ht
Function
ig
yr
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken
op
– especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.

C
 Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.
S-2
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
 Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate
in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the
WARNING
event of contact with the tool.
 During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
 Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
d .
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
ve
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
ser
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
re
from the way it did before.
ts
gh
 If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
ri
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
ll
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
.A
N
 If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
O
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of
TI
60
the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will
A
R
40
be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO

PO
29
functions.)
R
o.
 The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
N
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
al
K
ri
applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)

ZA
Se
 If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are

IM
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
K
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
ZA
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
A
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
M
units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)

YA
 The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter
3
01
the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier
)2
function will not work correctly.

(c
 The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the
ht
machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series and the other turning machines.

ig
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended

yr
machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands
op
C
before using this system.
Sample program Machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series Turning machines

–1
S1000M3 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
–1
S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min . The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S-3
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
 For the machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using
an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate com-
mand) of the EIA/ISO program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through
WARNING
180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the
plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the
program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected
positions may incite collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code
command (G50.1, G51.1).
 After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
d.
check function, the Virtual Machining function, and other functions, and confirm that the
ve
er
program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven
s
machining program to change in operational status.
re
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
ts
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
gh
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is
ri
present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the
ll
.A
common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move
N
from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be
O
present on this path.
TI
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of
60
A
R
the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
40
PO
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.

29
R
o.
O
N
 If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

C
al
for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
K
ri
ZA
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
Se
CAUTION
A
 Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
IM
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
K
operator injury.
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-4
Serial No. 294060
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
 Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system
variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that
makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give
WARNING
thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the
system variables before starting the above operations.
 If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
d.
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures
ve
being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
ser
 Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
re
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
ts
gh
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
ri
 After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
ll
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
.A
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for
N
the active program.
O
TI
60
A
 During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
R
40
PO
29
 For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
R
turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
o.
CAUTION
O
N
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
C
al
As a result, serious machine damage will result.

ri
ZA
Se
 Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
A
operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently,
IM
axial movement will become faster than that expected.

K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-5
Serial No. 294060
REQUEST TO THE USER
REQUEST TO THE USER
Request for Saving Data of Machining Programs

Machining programs saved on the local disk of the NC unit may not be read out in the event of
accidental local disk trouble. The user, therefore, is earnestly requested to back up and store
every machining program of importance at regular intervals onto an external memory (USB
memory, SD card, etc.).
 The procedure for data storage is detailed in the Operating Manual, Part 3
(OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION), Chapter 10, (DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE).
d.
 Always use an initialized USB memory or SD card. The USB connector and
ve
er
the SD card slot are located on the right side of the machine operating panel.
s
re
ts
gh
ri
USB memory SD card
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
 On machines with a random ATC feature, each actual ATC operation changes the tool
data (in pocket numbers). Be sure not to run the machine after loading the externally
stored data of the TOOL DATA display without having confirmed the data’s
CAUTION correspondence to the current tooling on the magazine. Otherwise the machine cannot be
be guaranteed to operate normally.
S-6
Serial No. 294060
Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
d.
ve
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
er
equipment
s
re
ts
Operating Environment
gh
ri
1. Ambient temperature
ll
.A
During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
N
O
2. Relative humidity
TI
60
A
During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing)
R
40
PO
Note : As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to

29
deteriorate quickly.
o.
O
N
C
al
Network Setting
ri
ZA
Se
The NC unit operates using dedicated network adapters.

A
IM
Note 1: Do not change the settings of the following two network adapters. Any changes will
K
prevent the NC unit from operating normally.

ZA
 Ethernet_NC (IP address:192.168.100.2)

A
 NC Trainer Virtual Network (IP address:192.168.202.10)

M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-7
Serial No. 294060
Note 2: Use “Ethernet_PC” to connect the NC to an intra-factory network and other systems.
Do not use, however, the following network addresses: “192.168.100.xxx” and
“192.168.202.xxx”
 If the setting of the network adapter “Ethernet_PC” is changed, other systems

connected to the network may not operate normally. So, be sure to check the
settings of the other systems on the network as well. Here are some
examples of systems connected to the network.
Other systems Sections describing how to configure network settings
Smooth PMC Operating Manual of the Smooth PMC
“Network Setting for the MAZATROL at the Machine”
TOOL HIVE Operating Manual & Maintenance Manual of the Extended
TOOL HIVE
d .
“How to Change Network Settings”
ve
Magazine display unit for Operating Manual of the Visual Tool ID/Data Management
er
Tool ID (touch panel) “CONNECTING TO THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK”
s
re
ts
Note 3: If you configure network settings for the NC unit, using Internet Information Services
gh
(IIS) on Windows, do not use the following port numbers.
ri

ll
21
.A
 683
N
 43816
O
 55555
TI

60
55556 A

R
40
57400
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
S-8 E
Serial No. 294060
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1-1
2 PARAMETER ....................................................................................... 2-1
2-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2-1-1 Types of parameters ............................................................................................... 2-1
d .
2-1-2 Precautions ............................................................................................................. 2-2
ve
s er
2-2 Parameter List .................................................................................................... 2-3
re
ts
gh
2-2-1 User parameter ....................................................................................................... 2-3
ri
ll
2-2-2 Machine parameter ............................................................................................... 2-42
.A
N
2-2-3 Data I/O parameter ............................................................................................... 2-79
O
TI
60
A
2-3 Detailed Description ......................................................................................... 2-84
R
40
PO
29
2-3-1 Structure of the parameter list .............................................................................. 2-84

o.
O
N
C
al
2-3-2 User parameter POINT (D) ................................................................................ 2-86

ri
ZA
Se
2-3-3 User parameter LINE/FACE/3D (E) ................................................................. 2-118

IM
K
2-3-4 User parameter EIA/ISO (F) ............................................................................. 2-154

ZA
A
M
2-3-5 User parameter SOFT LIMIT (I) ....................................................................... 2-258

YA
2-3-6 User parameter SYSTEM (SU) ........................................................................ 2-264

3
01
)2
2-3-7 User parameter TURNING (TC) ....................................................................... 2-298

(c
ht
2-3-8 User parameter SOLID (SD) ............................................................................ 2-351

ig
yr
op
2-3-9 User parameter DISPLAY STRUCTURE (US)................................................. 2-358

C
2-3-10 Machine parameter CALL MACRO (J) ............................................................. 2-362
2-3-11 Machine parameter MEASURE (K) .................................................................. 2-379
2-3-12 Machine parameter TABLE (L) ........................................................................ 2-439
2-3-13 Machine parameter FEED VEL. (M) ................................................................ 2-482
C-1
Serial No. 294060
2-3-14 Machine parameter TIME CONST. (N) ............................................................ 2-500
2-3-15 Machine parameter ANOTHER (S) .................................................................. 2-511
2-3-16 Machine parameter SPINDLE (SA) .................................................................. 2-525
2-3-17 Machine parameter BARRIER (BA) ................................................................. 2-550
2-3-18 Machine parameter MACHINE STRUCTURE (MS) ......................................... 2-582
2-3-19 Data I/O parameter CMT parameter (CMT) ..................................................... 2-584
d .
ve
2-3-20 Data I/O parameter TAPE parameter (TAP) .................................................... 2-586
s er
re
2-3-21 Data I/O parameter DNC parameter (DNC) ..................................................... 2-597
ts
gh
2-3-22 Data I/O parameter OTHER (IOP/DPR/IDD).................................................... 2-605
ri
ll
.A
3 ALARM ................................................................................................. 3-1
N
O
TI
60
3-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 3-1

A
R
40
PO
29
3-1-1 Alarm display .......................................................................................................... 3-1

R
o.
O
N
3-1-2 Precautions ............................................................................................................. 3-2

al
K
ri
ZA
Se
3-2 Detailed Description ........................................................................................... 3-3

A
IM
3-2-1 Structure of the alarm list ........................................................................................ 3-3

K
ZA
A
3-2-2 No. 1 - No. 99, No. 1000 - No. 1099 (System/Drive error) ...................................... 3-4
M
YA
3-2-3 No. 100 - No. 199, No. 1100 - No. 1199 (CNC machine control error) ................. 3-18
3
01
3-2-4 No. 200 - No. 399, No. 1200 - No. 1399 (PLC machine control error) .................. 3-39
)2
(c
ht
3-2-5 No. 400 - No. 499, No. 1400 - No. 1499 (CNC screen operation error)................ 3-77
ig
yr
3-2-6 No. 500 - No. 599, No. 1500 - No. 1599 (I/O error) ............................................ 3-102
op
C
C-2
Serial No. 294060
3-2-11 No. 2000 - No. 2099 (3D setup error) ................................................................. 3-180
3-2-12 No. 2100 - No. 2199 (Interference error) ............................................................ 3-186
3-2-13 No. 2200 - No. 2299 (CAM data output error) .................................................... 3-190
3-2-14 No. 2600～No. 2699 (CNC screen operation error)............................................ 3-192
4 M-CODE LIST....................................................................................... 4-1
4-1 Miscellaneous Functions (M Codes) Upper Turret Commands (TR1 Side) ........ 4-1
d .
ve
er
4-2 Miscellaneous Functions (M Codes) Lower Turret Commands (TR2 Side) ...... 4-15
s
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
C-3
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A Se
ZA
K ri
al
IM
N
A o.
ZA 29
K
C-4 E
40
C
O 60
Serial No. 294060
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
ser
ve
d.
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
3 ALARM
If machine failures occur or if erroneous operations are carried out, appropriate alarm numbers
and messages will be displayed in the alarm display section of the screen. If alarm display
appears, refer to the alarm list to locate and eliminate the cause of the alarm. More than one
alarm may be raised at once, depending on the particular status of alarm occurring. In the event
of alarm display, therefore, it is highly recommended that the operator should call the
DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display on the screen and make sure of the type of alarm.
3-1 Outline
1. Scope of this chapter
d .
This chapter describes all the alarms displayed on the screen of NC unit. Always refer to
ve
this chapter for eliminating an alarm.
ser
re
2. Precautions on this chapter
This chapter also lists alarms related to machine model-dependent functions and optional
ts
gh
functions. These alarms may therefore include ones not displayed for your machine. Check
ri
the type of machine purchased by you and its specifications before you read this chapter.
ll
.A
Note 1: The contents of this list are subjected to change without notice, for NC unit or machine
N
improvement.
O
Note 2: Any questions about the contents of this list should be communicated to Mazak
TI
60
Technical Center or Technology Center. A

R
40
PO
29
3-1-1 Alarm display

R
o.
O
N
1. Display on the screen of NC unit

al
K
ri
ZA
An alarm will be displayed on the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display in the following format:
Se
650 CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE (1234, 56, 78)

IM
K
Tool sequence number or block number

ZA
Unit number or sequence number

A
Work number
M
Alarm message
YA
Alarm number
3
01
 For the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display, refer to Part 3 OPERATING

)2
NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION of the

(c
Operating Manual.
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-1
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
3-1-2 Precautions
1. If program-related alarm display appears, that portion of the program in which the alarm has
occurred will be displayed within the parentheses next to the alarm message. The meaning
of each code in parentheses on the alarm list is listed in the table below.
Code Meaning
WNo. Work number (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
UNo. Unit number (MAZATROL)
SNo. Tool sequence number (MAZATROL)
NNo. Sequence number (EIA/ISO)
BNo. Block number (EIA/ISO)
blank No display, or intra-system alarm processing code
.d
ve
2. The stopped status, clearing procedure, and display color for some types of alarm depend
er
on whether the alarm-encountered program is on the foreground (program selected on the
s
re
POSITION display) or on the background (program selected on the PROGRAM display).
ts
The above mentioned three types of information for the latter case are indicated with
gh
parentheses in the alarm list.
ri
ll
3. The table for an alarm which does not exist remains blank.
.A
4. An alarm may not be displayed for certain machine models or versions of NC-software.
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-2
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
3-2 Detailed Description
3-2-1 Structure of the alarm list

This alarm list is written in the following format:
Type of Stopped Clearing
No. Message Display
error status procedure
[1] [2] ( , , ) [3] [4] [5]
Cause [6]
Action [7]
.d
ve
er
[1] Alarm number
s
[2] Alarm message
re
[3] Type of error
ts
gh
Code Type Description
ri
A Operation A wrong key has been pressed. Or the machine has been operated incorrectly.
ll
.A
B Registered data The program or tool data includes an error(s).
N
There are data to be checked, such as on inspection items.
O
C Servo Malfunctioning of the servo control mechanism
TI
60
D Spindle Malfunctioning of the spindle control mechanism

A
R
40
E NC equipment System (hardware/software) error

PO
29
F Machine (PLC) Machine failure

R
o.
G External I/O unit Malfunctioning of external I/O unit

O
N
C
al
[4] Stopped status

K
ri
ZA
Se
Code Status
A
IM
H Emergency stop
I Reset stop
K
ZA
J Single-block stop
K Feed stop (hold)
A
M
L Operation continued
YA
[5] Clearing procedure

3
01
Code Procedure
)2
M Power off  Eliminate cause  Power back on

(c
N Eliminate cause  Power off  Power back on

ht
O Eliminate cause  Press the RESET key.

ig
yr
P Press the RESET key.

op
Q Eliminate the cause  Tap the alarm clear button.

C
S Tap the alarm clear button.
[6] Cause of alarm

[7] Action to be taken to eliminate the cause.
Note : The list for alarms related to PLC machine control (No. 200 to 399 and No. 1200 to
1399) may have a different format.
3-3
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
3-2-2 No. 1 - No. 99, No. 1000 - No. 1099 (System/Drive error)

No. Message Display
1 EMERGENCY STOP ( , , ) E H O Red
Cause ——
Action ——
2 EMERGENCY STOP ( , , ) E H M Red

Trouble has occurred in the hardware.
Cause
.
d
Turn power off and then back on. If this does not clear the alarm status, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or
ve
Action Technology Center.
s er
3 EMERGENCY STOP ( , , ) A H M Red
re
The emergency stop button on the operating panel has been pressed.
ts
Cause
gh
ri
Release the pressed state of the emergency stop button and reset the NC unit to its initial state.
ll
Action
.A
N
4 CORRECTABLE ECC ERROR ( , , ) E H M Red
O
Data error on the memory.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40
Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

PO
Action
29
R
o.
5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR ( , , ) E H M Red

N
The contents of the system software and/or custom software have been destroyed.
al
Cause
ri
ZA
Se

A
Action
IM
K
6 REMOTE I/O ERROR ( , , ) E H M Red

ZA
Cause ——
A
M

YA
Action
3
01
7 SRAM MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E H M Red

)2
The S-RAM mounted on the CPU card has become abnormal.

Cause
(c
ht

ig
Action
yr
op
8 RAM MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E H M Red

C
The RAM mounted on the CPU card has become abnormal.

Cause

Action
9 ABSOLUTE POSITION MALFUNCTION (Alarm No., Axis, ) E H M Red

The absolute position detection system has lost absolute position data.
Cause

Action
3-4
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
10 DETECTOR MALFUNCTION (Alarm No., Axis, ) E H M Red
The absolute position detection system has detected its detector error(s).
Cause

Action
11 POSITION REFERENCE MALFUNCTION (Alarm No., Axis, ) E H M Red

The absolute position detection system has detected an error(s) by cross-checking the absolute position of its detector and
Cause the internal coordinate data of the NC unit.

Action
.d
ve
12 SERVO BATTERY WARNING (Alarm No., Axis, ) E L M Blue
er
The battery for retaining absolute position data is running low with a voltage drop, or has exhausted.
s
Cause
re
* Depending on the machine, the message ABSOLUTE POSITION WARNING may be displayed in red.
ts
The battery must be re-charged or replaced. For the battery information, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
gh
Action
ri
13 PRE-PROCESSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E H M Red
ll
.A
The software is not correctly working.
Cause
N
O
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
( , , )
PO
29
Cause
o.
O
N
C
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
21 SYSTEM ERROR ( , , ) E H M Red

A
IM
Software of this system has become abnormal.

Cause
K
ZA

Action
A
M
22 AMPLIFIER NOT EQUIPPED ( , , ) E H M Red

YA
Amplifier power is not yet turned on. Or no signals are transferred yet.
Cause
3
01
Check for an incorrectly connected cable, an incorrectly attached connector, an inadequate input supply voltage to the
)2
Action amplifier, an incorrect axis-number switch setting, etc.

(c
ht
23 —— ( , , )
ig
yr
Cause ——
op
C
Action ——
24 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-5
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
25 SAFE OPERATION SYSTEM ALARM ( , , ) E H N Red
There occurred an alarm in the safe operation system.
Cause

Action
26 SPINDLE SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM ( , , ) E H N Red

Trouble has occurred for the spindle in the mode of safety-speed operation.
Cause

Action
d .
ve
( , , )
s er
Cause
re
ts
gh
Action
ri
30 POWER SUPPLY MALFUNCTION ( , , ) C/D H M Red
ll
.A
A power supply alarm has occurred.
Cause
N
O
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
31 SERVO MALFUNCTION 1 ( , , ) C H M Red

PO
29
The servo (power-off level) is abnormal.

R
Cause
o.
The inertia on the servo axis is excessive.

O
N

al
Note :
ri
ZA
Action
Se
If this alarm is displayed after replacing the workpiece, the situation may be improved by executing the inertia estimation
A
function.
IM
32 SERVO PARAMETER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) C H M Red

K
The parameters that have been transferred from the NC unit to the servo amplifier during NC power-on are not correct.
ZA
Cause
A
M

Action
YA
33 SERVO MALFUNCTION 2 ( , , ) C H O Red

3
01
The servo (NC reset level) is abnormal.

Cause
)2

(c

ht
Note :
Action
ig
yr
function.
op
34 SERVO MALFUNCTION 3 ( , , ) C H M Red

C
The servo (amplifier power-off level) is abnormal.

Cause
Note :
Action
function.
3-6
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
35 OVERLOAD ( , , ) C H N Red
An extraordinary overload has been detected.
Cause
Check if any collision has occurred on the machine and perform the corresponding recovery, or check and reduce the
Action cutting conditions.
If measures other than the above should be taken, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
( , , )
Cause
Action
d .
ve
41 SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 1 ( , , ) C H M Red
er
The spindle (power-off level) is abnormal.
s
re
Cause
The inertia on the spindle is excessive.
ts
gh
Note :
ri
Action
ll
.A
function.
N
42 SPINDLE PARAMETER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) C H M Red
O
The parameters that have been transferred from the NC unit to the spindle amplifier during NC power-on are not correct.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40

PO
Action
29
R
o.
43 SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 2 ( , , ) C H O Red

O
N
The spindle (NC reset level) is abnormal.

al
Cause
K

ri
ZA
Se

A
Note :
IM
Action
K
function.
ZA
44 SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 3 ( , , ) C H M Red

A
The spindle (amplifier power-off level) is abnormal.

M
Cause
YA

3
01
Note :
Action
)2
function.
(c
( , , )
ht
ig
Cause
yr
op
C
Action
51 E2ROM MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E L D Blue

Parameters cannot be correctly written into the E2ROM.
Cause

Action
3-7
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
52 BATTERY ALARM ( , , ) E L D Blue
The battery provided to retain parameters, machining programs and other types of data within the NC unit has reached the
Cause minimum voltage level permissible or has run down.
It is required that the machining data is rechecked for possible loss or that the battery is recharged or replaced. For battery
Action recharging or replacement, refer to the relevant description given in the Maintenance Manual.
53 NC TEMPERATURE WARNING (Note 1, Note 2, Note 3) E L O Blue

The temperature of the control unit or operation board has increased above the required level.
Note :
Cause 1. Location of the temperature alarm
2. Type of temperature alarm
d .
ve
3. On-alarm temperature value
er
Reduce the temperature by turning off the NC power or by mounting a cooling unit.
Action
s
re
54 DIO5V MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E H O Blue
ts
gh
Cause ——
ri
ll
.A
Action
N
O
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR (Note 1, Note 2, ) E H O Blue
TI
60
Cause —— A
R
40
PO
29

R
Note :
o.
O
N
1. & 00 00 01 00 2. & 00 01
C
al
No.1 system (X0 -, Y0 -)

K
No. 5 system (X380 -, Y400 -)

No.2 system (X80 -, Y80 -)
ri
ZA
No. 6 system (X400 -, Y700 -)

Se
No.3 system (X100 -, Y100 -)

The above example indicates that a
A
No.4 system (X280 -, Y300 -)

IM
Action communications error has occurred in

station 1 of the No. 5 system.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K
ZA
Station 1
Station 2
A
…
M
Station 8
YA
The above example indicates that a communications

error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 2 system.
3
01
56 SYSTEM SOFTWARE CHECKING ( , , ) E H N Red

)2
The ROMs mounted in the system ROM card are currently being checked for abnormalities.
Cause
(c
ht
Wait for a while.

ig
Action
Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center if the alarm is not cleared.
yr
op
57 NO PLC ( , , ) F H N Red
C
The user PLC is not stored in the NC unit.

Cause

Action
58 CORRUPT PLC ( , , ) F H N Red

Trouble has occurred with the PLC.
Cause

Action
3-8
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
59 PLC STOPPED ( , , ) F H P Red
The PLC has ceased running.
Cause
Run the PLC.

Action Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center if the alarm is not cleared.
60 REMOTE I/O VER2.0 ERROR (System, station, ) E H M Red

Disconnection or CRC error occurred during remote I/O 2.0 communication.
Cause

Action
d.
ve
61 REMOTE I/O INITIALIZE ERROR (No., System, ) E H N Red
er
An error occurred during remote I/O initialization processing.
s
re
No. Cause
ts
0 × 01 RIO2.0 control register does not “stop” although RIO2.0 stop was requested.
gh
0 × 02 Cyclic transfer counter is not operating.
ri
0 × 04 In RIO2.0 communication, connection status cannot be obtained.
ll
.A
0 × 08 RIO1.0 communication was conducted using a station number (9 or larger) which is
outside the RIO1.0 communication range.
N
Cause
0 × 10 A unit for RIO1.0 communication is connected to the No. 3 system.
O
TI
0 × 20 Units of more than 17 stations were connected to the No. 3 system.
60
0 × 40
A
A safety RIO unit and a unit for RIO1.0 communication are connected to the same
R
40
system.
PO
29
0 × 80 The received data of a safety RIO is not updated.

R
o.
0 × 100 Time-out in obtaining the RIO1.0 communication enabled station information while
O
N
RIO2.0 communication setting is made.

C
al
K
ri
ZA

Se
Action
A
IM
(No., Register
62 RI/O ARBITRARY ALLOTMENT ERROR E H N Red
number, )
K
ZA
An error occurred during remote I/O initialization processing.

No. Cause
A
M
1 A value outside the allowable range is set for a system number or a station number.
YA
2 Overlapped system number or station number

Cause
3
3 A value outside the allowable range is set for a device setting value.
01
4 An illegal value is set for a device setting value.

)2
5 The same device is set for multiple stations.

(c
ht

Action
ig
yr
op
C
3-9
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
(No., Register
63 ARBITRARY ALLOTMENT PARACHK ERR E L S Blue
number, )
The setting of a parameter is invalid.
No. Cause
1 A value outside the allowable range is set for a system number or a station number.
2 Overlapped system number or station number
Cause 3 A value outside the allowable range is set for a device setting value.
4 An illegal value is set for a device setting value.
5 The same device is set for multiple stations.
6 Parameter check is executed for arbitrary allocation parameters although the setting is
.
for fixed allocation.
d
ve
er
Action
s
re
(Threshold value,
ts
64 HIGH SPEED DIO SETTING OVER E H N Red
Number of excesses, )
gh
The number of set high-speed inputs/outputs exceeds the upper limit.
ri
Cause
ll
.A
N
Action
O
TI
65 OVER VOLTAGE DETECT ( , , ) E L M Blue
60
Hardware overvoltage was detected at the control unit.

A
R
40
Cause
PO
29
 After completing the machining, turn off the NC power and then back on.
R
o.
Action
O

N
If the alarm occurs repeatedly, check the voltage of power supply.

C
al
66 PARAMETER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E H O Blue

K
ri
ZA
Se
Cause ——
A
IM

Action
K
ZA
67 HI-SPEED SYNCTAP AXIS ALARM ( , , ) E H O Blue

A
A servo with a system not applicable to high-speed synchronous tapping is connected in spite of the high-speed
M
Cause synchronous tapping option being valid.

YA

3
Action
01
)2
68 HI-SPEED SYNCTAP SPDL ALARM ( , , ) E H O Blue

(c
A servo with a system not applicable to high-speed synchronous tapping is connected in spite of the high-speed
Cause
ht
synchronous tapping option being valid.

ig

yr
Action
op
C
69 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-10
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
70 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
71 ILLEGAL SERVO PARAMETER ( , , ) C H M Blue
Cause

Action
d .
ve
72 SERVO WARNING ( , , ) E H O Blue
er
The servomotor is loaded abnormally.
s
Cause
re
The inertia has become excessive.
ts
Turn off the NC and the machine, remove the cause of the abnormal load, and then turn on the machine and the NC.
gh
Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center if the alarm is not cleared.
ri
Note :
ll
Action 1. If this alarm is displayed after replacing the workpiece, the situation may be improved by executing the inertia
.A
estimation function.
N
2. If this alarm occurs when resetting the emergency stop state, press and hold the RESET key for 0.5 seconds or
O
longer.
TI
60
( , , A )
R
40
PO
Cause
29
R
o.
Action
N
C
al
81 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER ( , , ) E H O Blue

ri
ZA
Se
Cause ——
IM

K
Action
ZA
82 SPINDLE WARNING ( , , ) E H O Blue

A
M
The inertia on the spindle has become excessive.

YA
Cause
3

01
Note :
Action
)2
(c
function.
ht
( , , )
ig
yr
Cause
op
C
Action
98 H/W SYSTEM DISAGREEMENT ERROR ( , , ) E H M Red

The combination of the hardware and the installed software is not correct.
Cause

Action
3-11
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1000 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
1001 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ERROR1 (No., Information, ) E H M Red

A safety monitoring function error was detected.
No. Information Cause
.
1 Safety watchdog error
d
ve
2 Crosscheck error
er
3 Function (*1) Safety system internal processing error
s
re
4 Safety parameter saving memory error 1
ts
5 Safety parameter saving memory error 2
gh
6 Safety initial processing time-out
ri
7 Axis name NC-DRV safety initial communication error
ll
.A
8 Unit information Safety I/O initial processing time-out
N
*1
O
TI
Cause Function Function name
60
0001 Safety limit speed monitoring (SLS) A

R
40
0002 Safety limit position monitoring (SLP)

PO
29
0003 Safety speed monitoring (SSM)

R
o.
0004 Safety cam (SCA)

N
0005 Safety stop monitoring (SOS)

al
K
ri
0006 Safety stop 1 (SS1)

ZA
Se
0007 Safety stop 2 (SS2)

A
IM
0008 Safety torque stop (STO)

0009 Safety brake control (SBC)
K
ZA
000A Diagnosis function

000B Safety related I/O monitoring
A
M
YA

Action
3
01
1002 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ERROR2 (No., Axis name, ) E H M Red
)2

(c
ht
No. Cause
ig
1 Encoder error
yr
Cause 2 Abnormality detected in STO circuit diagnosis

op
3 Abnormality detected in SBC circuit diagnosis

C
4 NC-DRV safety communication error

5 Excess axis movement amount during power off

Action
3-12
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display

1 Unit information Slave station communication error 1
4 Unit information Slave station data verification error
5 Unit information Output OFF check error
6 Unit information Output signal crosscheck error
7 Unit information Transmission crosscheck error
d.
ve
8 Unit information Reception crosscheck error
er
9 Unit information Host station communication error 1
s
re
ts
gh
12 Unit information Drive safety reception crosscheck error
ri
13 Factor (*1) User safety sequence 1 illegal
ll
14 Factor (*1) User safety sequence 2 illegal
.A
15 Unit information Output signal crosscheck error
N
O
*1
TI
60
Factor A Cause
R
40
0 × 1200 CRC error occurred. The user safety sequence can be faulty.
PO
29
0 × 1300 File system version mismatch occurred.

R
o.
0 × 2100 Label duplication error occurred.

O
N
Cause
C
0 × 2600 Illegal execution of RET instruction

al
1. A RET instruction could not haven been executed at the branch destination of a CALL
ri
ZA
instruction.
Se
2. A RET instruction could haven been executed although a CALL instruction was not executed.
IM
0 × 2700 Ladder code error

K
An abnormality was detected with the data in the sequence program to be executed.
ZA
1. An unusable PLC instruction could be used.

A
2. A sequence program stored in the internal ROM could be corrupted.

M
0 × 2900 Execution area over

YA
The total number of steps of the ladder to be executed could be larger than the size of PLC
3
processor execution area.

01
0 × 8000 Exceptional software interruption (BCD instruction error) occurred.

)2
With a BCD or DBCD instruction, BCD conversion could be attempted for a BIN value outside the
(c
allowable input range.

ht
0 × 8100 Exceptional software interruption (BIN instruction error) occurred.

ig
With a BIN or DBIN instruction, BIN conversion could be attempted for a BCD value outside the
yr
allowable input range.

op
0 × 8200 Exceptional software interruption (bus error) occurred.

C
0 × 8300 Exceptional software interruption (non-installed instruction error) occurred.

0 × 8400 Exceptional software interruption (instruction format error) occurred.
0 × 8500 Exceptional software interruption (instruction bus error) occurred.
0 × 8600 Exceptional software interruption (CALL/RET instruction error) occurred.
0 × 8700 Exceptional software interruption (memory area error) occurred.
0 × 8800 Exceptional software interruption (ASYNC BUS error) occurred.

Action
3-13
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display

1 - Simultaneous execution of safety monitoring and smart safety
monitoring impossible
2 Connection channel Safety I/O device connection impossible
3 Connection channel Safety I/O impossible Incorrect safety I/O connection
Cause 4 - Safety I/O impossible No safety I/O
5 - Safety PLC not written
6 Channel number NC-DRV safety communication impossible
. d
7 Emergency stop Illegal emergency stop device specification
ve
device number
er
9 - Illegal setting of safety I/O device allocation parameter
s
re
ts
Action
gh
ri
ll
1005 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ERROR5 (No., Axis name, ) E H M Red
.A
N
No. Cause
O
TI
1 SLS speed error
60
2 SLS deceleration error A

R
40
3 SLP position error

PO
29
Cause 4 SOS speed error

R
o.
5 SOS position deviation error

N
6 SOS movement amount error

al
K
ri
7 SS1 deceleration error

ZA
Se
8 SS2 deceleration error

A
IM
Press the reset key.

K
Action If the alarm is still not cleared, please contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
ZA
A
1006 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ERROR6 (No., , ) E H M Red

M

YA
No. Cause
3
1 Stopped due to safety external emergency stop function

01
Cause
The emergency stop signal is off when the safety external emergency stop function is
)2
valid.
(c
ht

ig
Action
yr
op
1007 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ERROR7 ( , , ) E H M Red

C
Abnormal operation of the safety circuit inside the drive unit has been detected.
Cause
The drive unit can be faulty.

Action Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
3-14
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
( , , )
Cause
Action
1020 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM1 (No., Axis name, ) E H O Blue
No. Cause
.
1 SSM hysteresis width setting error
d
ve
SSM hysteresis width is larger than SSM speed.
er
2 Safety absolute position not established
s
Cause
re
1. The safety absolute position has not been established even once after making valid
SLP/SCA.
ts
gh
2. In the encoder diagnosis performed while SLP/SCA power is off, there is a positional
offset between the position saved when the power was turned off and the position
ri
restored when the power was turned on.
ll
.A
N
Action
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-15
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1021 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM2 (No., Information, ) E H O Blue

1 Factor (*1) SBT start impossible
When making the SBT start signal valid, the test start conditions are not
met.
2 Axis name SBT warning 1
In external brake test pattern 1, axis movement amount exceeded the
permissible value.
.
In motor brake test pattern 1, axis movement amount exceeded the
d
ve
permissible value.
er
s
re
permissible value.
ts
gh
ri
permissible value.
ll
.A
Cause *1
N
Factor Description
O
TI
0001 System during automatic operation existing
60
0002 No in the in-position state

A
R
40
PO
0003 In the servo off state

29
0004 In the current limited state

R
o.
0005 Slave axis in synchronous control

N
0006 In the superimposition control state

al
K
ri
In the arbitrary axis exchanged control state

ZA
0007
Se
0008 In the mixed control state

A
IM
0009 SBT parameter error

000A Reference point not established
K
ZA
000B Corresponding to the SBT exclusive conditions

Slave axis SBT invalid
A
000C
M
000D Slave axis SBT start impossible

YA
000E In the slave axis independent control method

3
01

Action
)2
(c
1022 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM3 (No., Axis name, ) E H O Blue
ht
ig

yr
No. Cause
op
Cause 1 In the PLC safe stop state

C
The safe stop 1 request signal or the safe torque stop request signal of the PLC input
signal is off.

Action Note : If this alarm occurs when resetting the emergency stop state, press and hold the RESET key for 0.5 seconds or
longer.
3-16
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1023 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM4 (No., , ) E H O Blue

No. Cause
Cause 1 24-hour ON state continuation warning

The output signal of the safety I/O device remained ON for more than 24 hours.
The relating unit No., RIO system and signal bit are displayed.

Action
.
1024 SMART SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM5 (No., , ) E H O Blue
d
ve
er
Cause
s
re
ts
Action
gh
ri
( , , )
ll
.A
Cause
N
O
TI
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-17
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
3-2-3 No. 100 - No. 199, No. 1100 - No. 1199 (CNC machine control error)

No. Message Display
100 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
101 SOFT LIMIT (Axis, , ) A K P Blue

Some mistake in operations during the automatic operation has caused the tool tip to overstep the area specified in the
Cause software limit parameters in the direction of the axis corresponding to the displayed axis name.
. d
ve
Modify the program so that the tool tip may move within the area specified in the software limit parameters.
Action
s er
( , , )
re
ts
Cause
gh
ri
Action
ll
.A
113 OVER TRAVEL (Axis, , ) A K P Red
N
O
The tool tip has reached stroke limit in the direction of the axis corresponding to the displayed axis name.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40
Move the tool tip away from the end in manual operation mode.
Action
PO
29
R
o.
( , , )
O
N
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Action
A
IM
121 SP ROT. FLUCT. ACCEL. CLAMP ( , , ) B L P Blue

K
The spindle speed acceleration was clamped while the spindle speed fluctuation function was enabled.
ZA
Cause
A
M
Review the cycle and amplitude of the fluctuation.

Action
YA
3
122 SPINDLE ROT. FLUCTUATION N/A ( , , ) B K P Red

01
An attempt was made to use the spindle speed fluctuation function although the relevant option was not featured.
)2
Cause
(c
The spindle speed fluctuation function cannot be used since the relevant option is not featured.
ht
Action
ig
yr
op
C
3-18
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
123 SP ROT. FLUCT. SETTING ERROR (Alarm No., , ) B K P Red
Alarm No. Cause

When specifying the M code for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation synchronous mode, a
&0000 0001 spindle that was already in the spindle speed fluctuation synchronous mode in another control
path was specified.
When specifying the M code for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation synchronous mode, the
&0000 0002
specified spindle or NC axis did not exist.
Cause
When specifying the M code for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation, a spindle whose
&0000 0004
spindle speed fluctuation was already enabled in another control path was specified.
When specifying the M code for enabling the spindle speed fluctuation, the specified spindle or
&0000 0008
NC axis did not exist.
d .
The spindle whose spindle speed fluctuation is enabled does not match the spindle encoder
ve
&0000 0010
number or the spindle specified for the constant surface speed control.
s er
re
Review the setting.
Action
ts
gh
124 SP ROT. FLUCT. ILLEGAL COMMAND (Alarm No., , ) B K P Red
ri
ll
Alarm No. Cause
.A
A spindle speed fluctuation mode enabling M code was specified while override variable thread
N
cutting was enabled.
&0000 0001
O
An override variable thread cutting enabling M code was specified while the spindle speed
TI
fluctuation was enabled.
60
A
A spindle speed fluctuation enabling M code was specified in the G61.1 mode.
R
40
&0000 0002
PO
G61.1 was specified while spindle speed fluctuation was enabled.

29
A spindle speed fluctuation enabling M code was specified in the polygon machining mode.
R
o.
&0000 0004 A polygon machining mode command was specified while spindle speed fluctuation was
N
enabled.
al
A spindle speed fluctuation enabling M code was specified in the hobbing mode.
ri
ZA
&0000 0008
Se
A hobbing mode command was specified while spindle speed fluctuation was enabled.
A
A spindle speed fluctuation enabling M code was specified during synchronized tapping.
IM
&0000 0020
A synchronized tapping command was specified while spindle speed fluctuation was enabled.
K
Cause The master spindle in synchronous operation was specified as the spindle for spindle speed
ZA
fluctuation.
&0000 0040
A
A spindle for which spindle speed fluctuation was enabled was specified as the master spindle
M
for synchronous operation.

YA
The slave spindle in synchronous operation was specified as the spindle for spindle speed
fluctuation.
3
&0000 0080
01
A spindle for which spindle speed fluctuation was enabled was specified as the slave spindle
)2
for synchronous operation.

(c
The master axis in the simplified synchronous mode was specified as the servo axis for spindle
speed fluctuation.
ht
&0000 0100
ig
A servo axis for which spindle speed fluctuation was enabled was specified as the master axis
yr
in the simplified synchronous mode.

op
The slave axis in the simplified synchronous mode was specified as the servo axis for spindle
speed fluctuation.
C
&0000 0200
A servo axis for which spindle speed fluctuation was enabled was specified as the slave axis in
the simplified synchronous mode.
Review the program.

Action
3-19
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
125 ILLEGAL AXIS EXISTS ( , , ) E H O Red
During reference-point return, the proximity-point detection limit switch has overrun the position in which the watchdog is
Cause mounted.
Either extend the length of the proximity-point watchdog or reduce the reference-point returning speed. After that, carry out
Action the zero-point returning operation once again.
126 AXIS HAS NOT PASSED Z PHASE ( , , ) E H O Red

During initial reference-point return following the power-on action, an axis has not passed through the Z phase of the
Cause corresponding detector.
First actuate the handle for manual pulse feed to move the axis back in the opposite direction to the zero-point, and then
Action carry out the zero-point returning operation once again.
d .
ve
127 ILLEGAL DIR. FOR ORIGIN RETURN ( , , ) A K P Red
er
The axis-movement direction selected with the axis selector switch is not correct for the reference-point return in manual
s
Cause
re
operation mode.
ts
Select the correct direction (+, –) using the axis selector switch.
gh
Action
ri
128 OUTSIDE INTERLOCK AXIS ( , , ) A K P Red
ll
.A
An axis is interlocked because the interlock function has become active (input signal has turned off).
Cause
N
O
Clear the active state of the interlock function.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
129 INSIDE INTERLOCK AXIS ( , , ) A K P Red

PO
29
The very direction in which the manual skip function has become effective is specified in the axis-movement command. Or
Cause
R
the servo-off function is active.

o.
O
N
Deactivate the servo-off function.

al
Action
K
ri
ZA
Se
130 NO OPERATION MODE ( , , ) A K P Red

A
IM
Incorrect mode selection or malfunction of the automatic operation key.

Cause
K
ZA

Action
A
M
131 CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE SET AT 0 ( , , ) A K P Blue

YA
The cutting-feed override value is set to 0 on the machine operating panel.

Cause
3
01
Change the cutting-feed override value to one greater than 0. If this alarm message is displayed when the cutting-feed
)2
Action override value is not 0, check the signal line for a short-circuit.
(c
132 FEEDRATE ZERO ( , , ) A K P Blue

ht
ig
 An attempt has been made to execute an axis movement in the cutting feed mode or dry-run in the automatic
yr
Cause operation mode, with the manual feedrate remaining set to 0 on the machine operating panel.
op
 After a restart search, the cycle start button was pressed with the manual feedrate set to 0.
C
Change the manual feedrate to a value greater than 0. If this alarm message is displayed when the manual feedrate is not
Action 0, check the signal line for a short-circuit.
133 STOP SPINDLE ( , , ) D K N Blue

Spindle rotation did not start when the spindle rotation start command was issued during automatic operation.
Cause
1. Conditions for spindle rotation start are not satisfied. Check the program and tool data.
Action 2. The spindle amplifier and the encoder must be checked for normal operation. Contact the nearest Mazak Technical
3-20
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
134 SPINDLE ROTATION EXCEEDED ( , , ) D K N Red
The spindle-speed limit has been exceeded.
Cause
Reduce the spindle speed. The spindle amplifier must be checked for normal operation.
Action
135 BLOCK START INTERLOCK ( , , ) B K P Blue

The interlock signal to lock the start of the program block has been input.
Cause
The sequence program needs checking for normal functioning.

Action
d .
ve
136 CUTTING BLOCK START INTERLOCK ( , , ) B K P Blue
er
The interlock signal to lock the start of the cutting program block has been input.
s
Cause
re
ts
The sequence program needs checking for normal functioning.
gh
Action
ri
137 DYNAMIC COMPENSATION EXCEEDED ( , , ) A K P Red
ll
.A
Dynamic compensation amount exceeded 3 mm (0.12 in).
Cause
N
O
Make sure that the workpiece coordinate zero point is centrally positioned in the workpiece, and set the difference
TI
Action between the center of the workpiece and the rotary center of the table to 3 mm (0.12 in) or less.
60
A
R
40
138 CANNOT ROTATE TABLE ( , , ) A K P Red

PO
29
1. An interruption occurred during rotation of the indexing (rotary) table.

R
Cause
o.
2. A 3D coordinate conversion command (G68/G69) was specified while G0 was temporarily canceled in tool tip point
O
N
control during machining of an inclined plane or workpiece placement error correction.

C
al
1. No interruption is permitted during rotation of the indexing (rotary) table.

ri
Action
ZA
2. Check the details of program.

Se
139 PRE-INTERP ACCEL/DECEL ERROR ( , , ) A K M Red

IM
An abnormality has occurred in the NC unit during the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration process.
K
Cause
ZA
Hardware trouble is likely. Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
A
Action
M
YA
140 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN No. ( , , ) A K P Blue

Returning to the second reference point has been commanded in spite of the fact that returning to the first reference point
3
01
Cause has not yet occurred.

)2
Return the axis to the first reference point first.

(c
Action
ht
141 EXCESS SIMULTANEOUS ERROR ( , , ) A K P Blue

ig
yr
The synchronization error between the master axis and the slave axis during synchronous control has overstepped a
Cause
op
predetermined allowable value.

C
Move either axis in the direction that the error decreases.

Action
Reduce the allowable value to zero (checking invalid), or increase the allowable value.
142 NONE OR DUPLICATE OPERAT. MODE ( , , ) A K P Blue

An operation mode has not been selected, or more than one operation mode have been selected.
Cause
The automatic operation key is malfunctioning.
Check for incorrect wiring of the input mode key.
Action
3-21
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
143 ILLEGAL HANDLE FEED AXIS ( , , ) A K P Blue
A nonexistent axis has been designated as the handle feed axis.
Cause
Or a handle feed axis has not been designated.
Check the handle feed axis selection signal line for incorrect wiring.
Action
Or check the maximum number of axes that can be used under the current specifications.
144 ILLEGAL CYCLE START (Alarm No., , ) A I O Red

It was attempted to start automatic operation under the following conditions:
Alarm No. Cause

0 × 101 The smoothing level is not zero.
.
d
0 × 102 NC ready signal is not ON.
ve
0 × 103 Reset state not yet cleared.
er
0 × 104 Feed hold is in operation.
s
re
0 × 105 Hardware overtravel not yet cleared.
ts
0 × 106 Software overtravel not yet cleared.
gh
0 × 107 No operation mode selected.
ri
0 × 108 Two or more operation modes selected.
ll
.A
Cause 0 × 109 During change in operation modes.
N
0 × 110 During editing on the EIA MONITOR display.
O
0 × 111 During search on the tape data.
TI
60
0 × 113 Abnormality in temperature. A

R
40
0 × 114 Program being edited on the EIA MONITOR display

PO
29
0 × 115 A door opened.

R
o.
0 × 116 During compensation in tandem control.

O
N
0 × 117 An alarm related to polygonal machining or hob milling not yet cleared.
al
0 × 118 An alarm related to safety barrier not yet cleared.

ri
ZA
0 × 120 After establishing absolute positions through zero return operation, the
Se
power has not been turned off and back on.

IM
Remove the cause, if possible, to (re)start the automatic operation.

K
Action
ZA
If not, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

A
145 REQUIRE ABSOLUTE RECOVERY (Alarm No., , ) C K P Blue

M
The absolute position data has become lost.

YA
Cause
Trouble has occurred in the absolute position detector.
3

01
Action
)2
146 NOT AUTO MODE ( , , ) A I O Blue

(c
ht
Automatic operation has been started in a mode other than automatic operation.
Cause
ig
yr
Change the mode to the automatic.

op
Action
C
147 SHAPING AXIS TURNING ANGLE OVER (WNo., NNo., BNo.) A K P Blue
1. The rotational angle limit at the shaping block connections has been exceeded.
Cause
2. The radius of the arc is less than the rotational radius of the C-axis.
1. Review the program.
Action
2. Review the setting of parameter K1 (rotational radius of the C-axis).
3-22
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
148 CHUCK BARRIER (Note 1, Note 2, ) A (B) K (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. The tool entered in the chuck barrier.
Note :
1. Interfering component 1
Display
1 No. 1 spindle chuck
2 No. 2 spindle chuck
4 Tailstock
8 Turret
2. Interfering component 2
Cause Display Type A Type B Type C
.
d
0 Tool tip Turret Tool, holder, turret
ve
1 Turret Holder —
er
2 — Tool —
s
re
Machine type A, B and C above are available according to the settings of the following parameters:
ts
Type BA73 BA129 bit 1
gh
A Other than 0 0
ri
B — 1
ll
C 0 0
.A
2. Interference is occurring between the tool and chuck in the solid mode.
N
Review and correct the machining program. If the program is correct, review the tool data and the barrier parameters.
O
Action
TI
60
149 TAILSTOCK BARRIER ( , Note,

A ) A (B) K (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
R
40
PO
1. The tool entered in the tail barrier.

29
Note :
R
o.
Cause
O
For details of the cause, refer to Note 2 “Interfering component 2” in the explanation of alarm 148 CHUCK
N
BARRIER.
al
2. Interference is occurring between the tool and tailstock in the solid mode.
ri
ZA
Se
Action
A
IM
150 WORK PIECE BARRIER ( , , ) A, B H (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

K
1. Interference is occurring between the workpiece of the No. 1 turning spindle side and the workpiece of the No. 2
ZA
Cause turning spindle side.

A
2. Interference is occurring between the tool and workpiece in the solid mode.
M
YA
Action
3
151 NO TANDEM CONTROLLING OPTION ( , , ) B I N Red

01
)2
Executing the tandem driving function has been attempted despite a tandem driving option not being present.
Cause
(c
ht
The tandem driving function can be used only for a special machine. If this alarm occurs in a special machine that allows
Action
ig
the use of the tandem driving function, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
yr
152 ILLEGAL SYNCHRONIZED AXIS NAME ( , , ) B I N Red

op
1. The settings of the address name parameters (M11) on each axis are illegal.
C
Cause
2. An attempt has been made to simultaneously control axes other than the master axis that has been set in a parameter.
1. Correct the address names of the master axis and slave axis to the uppercase alphabet and the lowercase alphabet,
Action respectively, and set the address name parameters (M11) of each axis properly.
2. Subject the specified master axis to simultaneous control.
153 TRANSFER/PUSH UNFINISHED ( , , ) A K O Red
1. The axis reached its pressing completion position before a skipping signal was generated.
Cause
2. The drooping amount during pressing operation cannot overstep the setting in parameter K46.
1. Check whether the pressing completion position in the program is correct.
Action
2. Modify the K46 setting as appropriate.
3-23
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
154 ZERO RET. NOT ALLOWED (G68 MODE) ( , , ) E L S Blue
Zero-point return mode has been selected during three-dimensional coordinate conversion.
Cause
1. Select an operation mode other than the zero-point return mode.

Action
2. To execute manual zero-point return, cancel three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.
155 BARRIER TURRET/TOOL HEAD ( , Note, ) A K O Red
The barriers of the upper and lower turrets interferes with each other.
Cause Note :
For details of the cause, refer to Note 2 “Interfering component 2” in the explanation of alarm 148 CHUCK BARRIER.
Correct the machining program. If the program is correct, review the parameters related to the barrier.
.
d
Action
ve
er
156 ILLEGAL MEASURING SENSOR SIGNAL ( , , ) A, B H O Red
s
re
The measuring sensor has turned on at a position in a non-measuring area.
Cause
ts
gh
If the sensor has come to contact with an object, confirm the program. In other cases, confirm the mounting status of the
Action
ri
sensor.
ll
.A
157 MEASURED RESULT MALFUNCTION ( , , ) A, B H O Red
Measurement results are not normal.
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Check the program. A

R
40
Action Check if the sensor tool length registered on the TOOL DATA display is correct.
PO
29
Check the mounting status of the sensor.

R
158 ILLEGAL COMMAND CROSS MACHINING ( , , ) A K Q Blue

o.
O
N
It was attempted to manually control an axis currently under the control for cross machining.
C
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
The axes under the cross machining control cannot be controlled manually.
Se
Action
A
IM
159 CROSS MACHINING IMPOSSIBLE (Alarm No., , ) E I P Red

K
ZA
Alarm No. Cause

A
M
&0000 0001 The specified axis does not exist in the counterpart system.
YA
&0000 0002 The self-system is specified as the system to be cross-controlled.

The cross machining control is specified for an axis which is already under the control in
3
&0000 0004
01
question.
)2
&0000 0010 A command for cross machining control is given from the counterpart system.
(c
In the mode of inclined-axis control a cross-control command is given for the fundamental axis
(X-axis) without positioning of the inclined axis (Y-axis) in its zero point.
ht
Cause
&0000 0040
ig
In the mode of inclined-axis control a cross-control command is given for the inclined axis
yr
(Y-axis).
op
A cross control command or cross control cancel command was specified for the NC axis in the
spindle speed fluctuation synchronous mode.
C
&0000 0080
A cross control command or cross control cancel command was specified for an NC axis for
which spindle speed fluctuation is enabled.
At the execution of a cross-machining command, the axis movement completion wait time
&0000 0400
exceeded the time set at parameter SU54.
Review and correct the program.

Action
Check and correct the value set at parameter SU54 for alarm No. 0 × 0400.
3-24
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
160 ILLEGAL NUMBER OF CROSS AXIS ( , , ) E I P Red
The number of axes in the remote system has become zero as a result of crossing command execution.
Cause

Action
161 SUPERPOSITION CTRL IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) E I P Red

It was attempted to start superposition control with an unavailable axis.
Cause It was attempted to start superposition control under incompatible modal conditions.
Check the parameters related to the type of acceleration & deceleration and to the motion speed during superposition
Action control.
. d
ve
162 ILLEGAL SUPERPOSITION PARAMETER (WNo., UNo., SNo.) E I P Red
er
Incorrect parameter settings do not allow the superposition control to be started.
s
Cause
re
ts
Check the parameters related to the type of acceleration & deceleration and to the motion speed during superposition
gh
Action control.
ri
163 BARRIER WORK (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A K O Red
ll
.A
There is a danger that one workpiece will interfere with the other.
Cause There is a danger that the partition plate will interfere with the workpiece or the lower turret.
N
O
Review the barrier parameters, or for automatic operation, correct the program properly.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
164 ILLEGAL CMD SAFE OPER SYS ALARM ( , , ) A J Q Blue

PO
29
With the machine under the control for safety speed, a command for the following was given:
R
Cause Threading, Synchronous tapping, Cross machining, Superposition control.

o.
O
N
Close the door to operate the machine.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
165 CANNOT MAKE SAFE OPER SYS ACTIVE ( , , ) A L Q Blue

A
IM
The command signal for the control for safety speed was turned on in the following modes of machining:
Cause Threading, Synchronous tapping, Cross machining, Superposition control.
K
ZA
Close the door to operate the machine.

Action
A
M
166 LOWER TURRET ALREADY ASSIGNED ( , , ) A K O Red

YA
An M810 command was given from one HD side to operate the lower turret that was currently used on the other HD side.
Cause
3
01
Give the M810 command after the use of the lower turret on the other side.
)2
Action
(c
ht
167 ILLEGAL OPER TOOL TIP PT CTRL ( , , ) A K (O) O (S) Blue

ig
An attempt was made in the mode of tool tip point control to perform such an improper operation as follows:
yr
1. Manual interruption
op
Cause
2. Interruption using the manual pulse handle
C
3. MDI interruption
Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of tool tip point control.
Action
3-25
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
168 ILLEGAL OPER 5X RADIUS COMP. ( , , ) A K (O) O (S) Blue
An attempt was made in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining to perform such an improper
operation as follows:
Cause 1. Manual interruption
3. MDI interruption
Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis
Action machining.
169 ILLEGAL OPER.HIGH SMOOTHING CTR ( , , ) A K (O) Q (S) Blue

In the mode of high-speed smoothing control an unavailable operation (e. g. manual interruption) was attempted.
Cause
d.
ve
Manual interruption cannot be performed in the mode of high-speed smoothing control.
er
Action
s
re
170 W AXIS THRUST FORCE ALARM ( , , ) E J O Red
ts
W-axis thrust has not been obtained.
gh
Cause
ri
ll
.A
Action
N
171 ILLEGAL W AXIS COMMAND ( , , ) E J O Red
O
TI
W-axis operation was programmed during the application of the W-axis thrust.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO

29
Action
R
o.
172 B AXIS NOT AVAILABLE ( , , ) B I N Red

N
C
al
The head (B) axis is used without the B-axis control option.
K
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
Purchase the B-axis control option.

A
Action
IM
K
173 2ND SPDL C AXIS NOT AVIALABLE ( , , ) B I N Red

ZA
The No. 2 spindle/C-axis is used without the No. 2 spindle/C-axis option.

Cause
A
M
Purchase the No. 2 spindle/C-axis option.

YA
Action
3
01
174 2ND SPDL 1/10000 N/A ( , , ) B I N Red

)2
The No. 2 spindle/C-axis is used without the No. 2 spindle high-precision indexing option.
Cause
(c
ht
Purchase the No. 2 spindle high-precision indexing option.

Action
ig
yr
175 TABLE UNBALANCE CHECK N/A ( , , ) B I N Red

op
Vibration detection is used without the rotary table vibration detection option.
C
Cause
Purchase the rotary table vibration detection option.

Action
176 CANNOT CHANGE TIME CONSTANT (System No., , ) B I P Red

Changing the cutting feed time constant in the system has been attempted during synchronous tapping, threading, or
Cause control axis superposition.

Action
3-26
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
177 ONE-TOUCH TUNING IMPOSSIBLE (System No., , ) B I P Red
The inertia estimation has been attempted by G297 during movement of the axis whose inertia was to be estimated.
The G298 parameter setup command has been set during movement of the parameter setup reference axis or of some
axis assigned to the parameter data development system.
Cause
The G298 parameter setup command has been set during cutting feed time constant changeover or control axis
superposition.
The G298 parameter setup command has been set during axis rotation.
Action
178 INERTIA TOO LARGE (System No., , ) B I P Red
.
The estimated inertia has exceeded the maximum inertia specified in the TSVC parameter or the TSPC parameter.
d
Cause
ve
er
Correct the settings of the TSVC parameter or the TSPC parameter.
s
Action
re
ts
179 CANNOT AUTO MEASURE INERTIA (System No., , ) B I P Red
gh
Resonance has not been reduced during inertia estimation.
ri
Cause The minimum inertial is not specified in TSVC or TSPC.
ll
.A
The inertia estimation itself has failed.
N
Correct the settings of the TSVC parameter or the TSPC parameter.
Action
O
TI
60
180 SYNCHRO TAP ILLEGAL COMMAND A

(WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I P Red
R
40
An orienting command has been entered during synchronous tapping.

PO
Cause
29
R
o.

N
Action
C
al
K
ri
181 NO MDI DATA (System No., , ) B L S Blue

ZA
Se
Although operation has been started in MDI mode, data has been found to be missing.
A
Cause
IM
Set data in the MDI window.

K
Action
ZA
A
182 CANNOT DETACH AXIS (Axis, UNo., SNo.) B L Q Red

M
The axis removal request signal has been turned on when the axis removal-in-progress signal was on (after turning off the
YA
axis removal request signal, the operator has turned the axis removal request signal back on without waiting for the axis
Cause removal-in-progress signal to turn off).
3
01
After the axis removal request signal was turned on for the absolute position control axis, the axis removal request signal
)2
has been turned off during display of alarm 71 ILLEGAL SERVO PARAMETER.
(c
Turn on the axis removal request signal when the axis removal-in-progress signal is off.
Action
ht
Clear the alarm.

ig
183 CANNOT MDI INTERRUPT ( , , ) A L Q Blue

yr
MDI interruption has been attempted during automatic operation.

op
Cause
C
MDI interruption is not possible. Return to original mode and resume operation.
Action
3-27
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
184 ILLEGAL OPER IN G54.4 MODE ( , , ) A L Q Blue
An attempt was made in the mode of workpiece placement error correction to perform such an improper operation as
follows:
Cause 1. Manual interruption
3. MDI interruption
Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of workpiece placement error correction.
Action
185 ILLEGAL OPER IN G68.2 MODE ( , , ) A L Q Blue

An attempt was made in the mode of inclined-surface machining to perform such an improper operation as follows:
d .
ve
Cause
er
3. MDI interruption
s
re
Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of inclined-surface machining.
Action
ts
gh
186 W-THERMAL COMP. OVER LIMIT ( , , ) B L S Blue
ri
The amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion exceeded the effective range of +0.5 to –0.5 mm.
ll
Cause
.A
N
The operation is continued with the amount of error compensation reduced to the limit (+0.5 to –0.5 mm).
O
Change the reference point for workpiece thermal expansion compensation to a point on the workpiece, or execute the
TI
Action
60
workpiece thermal expansion compensation enable/disable command when the tool tip is in close proximity to the
A
workpiece.
R
40
PO
187 SET W-THERMAL COMP. TOOL LENGTH ( , , ) B L S Blue

29
The workpiece thermal expansion compensation command is issued to a tool for which tool data is not entered.
o.
Cause
O
N
C
al
Enter the tool data (tool length). If the tool length is not specified, compensation will be made on the assumption that the
ri
ZA
Action tool tip is at the spindle nose (or at the center of rotation of the B-axis if the machine has a spindle head rotating
Se
mechanism).
A
IM
188 SET W-THERMAL COMP. REF. POINT ( , , ) B J P Red

Although the reference point for workpiece thermal expansion compensation was not set, the workpiece thermal
K
Cause expansion compensation command was issued.

ZA
Set the reference point for workpiece thermal expansion compensation before issuing the workpiece thermal expansion
A
Action
M
compensation command.
YA
189 ILLEGAL SPINDLE DIRECTION (WNo., UNo., ) D K N Red

3
The directions of rotation of the turning tool selected in the manual program unit and the spindle do not match.
01
Cause
)2
Check the direction of rotation set for the tool selected in the manual program unit and select a correct tool.
(c
Action
Alternatively, set TC144 bit3 to “0” to enable automatic output of the spindle rotation command.
ht
ig
190 —— ( , , )
yr
op
Cause ——
C
Action ——
191 FILE SYSTEM I/O ERROR (Alarm No., , ) E I P Red

An internal error(s) has occurred during program data change by the function of VFC, MMS etc.
Cause
After checking the entire data of the program being executed, tool data, tool file, parameters, etc., save the data using the
Action data I/O operation and then Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
3-28
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
192 EXECUTION IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) E I P (S) Red (Blue)
1. A measurement operation was attempted although there is no FRM unit.
2. Coordinate measurement was executed from the FRM unit set as the center of table rotation.
3. Measurement of a tool other than a milling tool was attempted with laser measurement.
4. Offsetting of a tool other than a turning tool was attempted using measurement of O.D., I.D, single-side O.D., or
single-side I.D. in a workpiece measurement unit.
5. Offsetting other than tool radius offset was attempted for a milling tool using measurement of groove width, protrusion
Cause width, I.D. protrusion width, or I.D. groove width in a workpiece measurement unit.
6. The barrier teaching function was activated while running a program stored outside the memory operation range or
while there was an active barrier alarm during MDI operation.
.
7. An axis command for the driven axis was specified with the axis set in the synchronized operation mode.
d
ve
8. The override variable thread cutting function was activated while position data is memorized using the rethreading
er
function.
s
re
9. A winding that does not support the override variable thread cutting function is selected.
1. Set the FRM unit.
ts
gh
2. Review the setting of the FRM unit.
ri
3. Measure only milling tools with laser measurement.
ll
4. Select a turning tool.
.A
Action 5. Offset only the tool radius for a milling tool.
N
O
6. Do not use the barrier teaching function for programs other than the ones stored in the memory operation range.
TI
7. Specify the command after canceling the synchronization of the axes.
60
A
8. Clear the memorized position data before using the override variable thread cutting function.
R
40
PO
9. Select a winding that supports the function.

29
193 NO TOOL IN MAGAZINE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I P Red

o.
O
N
Tool data that correspond to the pocket numbers being displayed in the “TNo.” item of the POSITION display are
C
Cause unregistered.
al
K
ri
ZA
Register the tool data.

Se
Action
A
IM
194 NO TOOL DATA IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) E I P Red

K
An internal error(s) has occurred when surface speed or feedrate changing by VFC function was under way.
ZA
Cause
A
After checking the entire data of the program being executed, tool data, tool file, parameters, etc., save the data using the
M
Action data I/O operation (floppy disk) and then contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
YA
195 WRONG MEASURING DIRECTION ( , , ) A I O Red

3
01
During the second or subsequent rounds of manual measurement, an attempt has been made to perform skipping in a
Cause
)2
direction not available for measurement.

(c
Perform measurements in the correct direction.

ht
Action
ig
196 WRONG MEASURING POINT ( , , ) A I P Red

yr
op
During the second or subsequent rounds of manual measurement, an attempt has been made to measure an illegal point.
Cause
C
Measure correct points.

Action
197 UNREGISTERED HEAD DATA ( , , ) B I P Red

Head data of the head number being used during MMS, MDI MMS or manual measurement does not exist.
Cause

Action
3-29
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
198 NO HEAD DATA ( , , ) B I P Red
Head data of the head number being used during MMS, MDI MMS or manual measurement is partly missing.
Cause

Action
199 DIVISION BY ZERO ( , , ) B I P Red

An attempt has been made to carry out divisions by zero inside the NC unit during measurement of the
Cause degree-of-straightness on the MEASURE display.
Check the touch sensor for abnormalities.

Action
Carry out measurements once again if the touch sensor is normal.
. d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-30
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
Clearing
Type of Stopped
No. Message procedur Display
error status
e
1101 INTERFERE ( , , ) A K S Blue
Interference occurs between <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2>.
Cause
Tap the alarm clear button. When the alarm clear button is tapped, the interference check for the secondary check
Action distance is carried out.
When the RESET key is pressed, the process returns to the interference check for the primary check distance.
1102 INTERFERE ( , , ) A I P Red
Interference occurs between <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2>.
Cause
d.
Press the RESET key to clear the alarm. When the RESET key is pressed, the process returns to the interference check
ve
Action for the primary check distance.
er
Alternatively, disable the machine interference check to clear the alarm.
s
re
1103 INTERFERE CHECK DATA OVERLOAD ( , , ) B L S Blue
ts
The 3D interference check process cannot be performed within a proper time.
gh
Cause
ri
Set a simple workpiece model or a fixture model or a tool model.
ll
Action
.A
N
1104 RAPID FEED OVERRIDE SET AT 0 ( , , ) A K P Blue
O
The rapid feed override value set up on the operating panel is “0”.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40
Set the override value other than “0”.

PO
29
Action
R
o.
1105 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING ( , , ) B L S Blue

N
Machine operation has been stopped because of a delay in interference check process.
al
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
The machine will be restarted when the interference check process catches up with the operation.
A
Action
IM
If this alarm recurs, set up a simplified material model, fixture model or tool model.
K
1106 SAFETY SHIELD FAILURE (Cause, Alarm No., ) B L N Red

ZA
If the processing load of the PC is too high, it may not be possible to update the model properly.
A press of the RESET key returns operation to a normal state, thus allowing interference checks to be performed properly.
A
M
1. Creation of the model has failed.

YA
2. The interference check process has not been performed properly.

Cause 3. An NC-PC communications error (time-out error) has occurred.
3
01
4. An illegal access has been detected in processing at the NC side.

)2
5. Preparation of the safety shield has not completed normally because an alarm occurred during preparation of the
(c
safety shield.
ht
* For causes 1 to 4, the alarm No. given as the argument is not effective.
ig
Review and correct the parameter and model data. Then press the RESET key.
yr
If this does not clear the alarm status, turn power off and then back on.
op
Action If the alarm is not caused by software or hardware fault, pressing the RESET key to update the model may clear the alarm.
C
If the alarm cannot be cleared, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
* For cause 5, take the necessary action according to the corrective action for the alarm number.
3-31
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1107 INCOMPLETE TOOL DATA ( , , ) B L N Red
1. Manual tool measurement results cannot be calculated because of tool data items remaining blank.
Cause 2. The “tool length” or “tool diameter (nominal diameter)” of the tool was not set in the tool data when executing an MDI
program. (MAZATROL tool length and tool diameter are enabled and bit 7 of parameter F84 is set to “1”.)
1. Confirm the settings of the machining section, rotational direction, and nose R in the tool data items, and enter the
correct data.
2. Review the tool data and set any missing data.
Action Related parameters (F84 bit 7, F92 bit 7, F93 bit 3)
When MAZATROL tool diameter is enabled (F92 bit 7 = 1), enter the “tool diameter (nominal diameter)”.
When MAZATROL tool length is enabled (F93 bit 3 = 1), enter the “tool length”.
. d
If bit 7 of F84 is set to “0”, missing data will be ignored and the MDI program will be executed.
ve
1108 CANNOT CHANGE OPERATION MODE ( , , ) A L Q Blue
s er
The automatic operation key was pressed during tape operation.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Changeover to memory operation mode during tape operation is prohibited. Reselect tape operation mode before
Action restarting operation.
ri
ll
1109 TOOL LENGTH OVER ( , , ) B L N Red
.A
The tool length input range has been overstepped as a result of tool measurement.
N
Cause
O
TI
Use a tool of any tool length value falling within the range defined in parameters SU110–SU113.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1110 —— ( , , )
R
o.
Cause
O
——
N
C
al
K
ri
Action ——
ZA
Se
1111 —— ( , , )
IM
Cause ——
K
ZA
A
Action ——
M
YA
1112 CANNOT DETACH SPINDLE (Spindle No., , ) B L O Red

The spindle removal function was activated during spindle operation.
3
Cause
01
)2
Stop the spindle before removing the spindle.

Action
(c
ht
1113 —— ( , , )
ig
yr
Cause ——
op
C
Action ——
1114 SIMULTANEOUS AXIS EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K (L) P (S) Red
Commands that involve movement of axes exceeding the maximum number of simultaneously controllable axes have
Cause been specified.
Review the program.

Action
3-32
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1115 AXIS NUMBER ERROR ( No, , ) A K (L) O Blue
The Tx-/Ty-/Tz-axis was selected in the manual mode while in the conditions described below. Or, the Tx-/Ty-/Tz-axis was
selected during manual handle pulse interruption.
No. Cause
The axis number specified for K114 (or K226) as the horizontal axis of the orthogonal
0 × 00000001
coordinate system does not exist in the control path. Or, the axis is not a linear axis.
The axis number specified for K115 (or K227) as the vertical axis of the orthogonal coordinate
0 × 00000002
system does not exist in the control path. Or, the axis is not a linear axis.
The axis number specified for K116 (or K228) as the height axis of the orthogonal coordinate
0 × 00000004
system does not exist in the control path. Or, the axis is not a linear axis.
Cause
.
The axis number specified for K121 (or K230) as the first rotary axis does not exist in the
d
0 × 00000008
ve
control path. Or, the axis is not a rotary axis.
er
The axis number specified for K125 (or K234) as the second rotary axis does not exist in the
0 × 00000010
s
control path. Or, the axis is not a rotary axis.
re
The first digit (direction of the first rotary axis) of the value specified for K117 (or K229) as the
ts
0 × 00000020
direction of rotation of the rotary axis is incorrect.
gh
The second digit (direction of the second rotary axis) of the value specified for K117 (or K229)
ri
0 × 00000040
as the direction of rotation of the rotary axis is incorrect.
ll
0 × 00000080 The machine type set for K113 (or K225) is incorrect.
.A
N
Set a correct value for parameters K113 to K117, K121, K125 (or parametersK225 to K230, K234).
O
Action
TI
60
( ,
A
, )
R
40
PO
29
Cause
R
o.
O
N
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
1122 INTERFERE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L N Red

Se
Machine interference has been detected with the NC axis active in automatic operation mode.
IM
Cause
K
Press the RESET key. Modify the program to prevent machine interference from recurring.
ZA
Action
A
M
1123 ILLEGAL OPE (SAFETY SHIELD) (Cause, , ) A I P Red

YA
The operations that make interference checking impossible were performed during automatic operation when the
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function was valid.
3
The values of “Cause” denote the causes below.

01
1: After an EIA modal search under the invalid status of the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD in automatic operation mode,
)2
Cause the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function was made valid in an attempt to start automatic
(c
operation.
ht
2: Following completion of the EIA modal search, manual operation mode was selected and after the axis was moved to a
ig
position different from that before the search, memory mode was reselected and a restart operation was attempted.
yr
3: An attempt was made to start the MDI operation at the same time for both the upper and the lower turret.
op
Confirm the cause of the alarm. Also, avoid performing the corresponding operations when the Automatic Operation
C
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function is valid.

Action
Alternatively, restart operation after making the automatic operation interference checking function invalid with the
Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD menu.
1124 ILLEGAL CYCLE START ( , , ) B L N Red
Starting either the hard disk, Ethernet, IC card, or tape operation was attempted when the Automatic Operation
Cause INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function was valid.
Interference checking during automatic operation is prohibited in the hard disk, Ethernet, IC card, or tape operation mode.
Action Restart operation after making the automatic operation interference checking function invalid with the Automatic Operation
INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD menu.
3-33
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1125 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING ( , , ) A L Q Blue
1. Calculation for interference checking during automatic operation is in progress.
2. An NC alarm or PLC alarm occurs at the pre-read block. Or an M code is not completed at the pre-read block.
Cause
When the cause is No. 1 above, nothing will be displayed in parentheses.
When the cause is No. 2 above, contributing factors 1, 2 and 3 will be displayed in the parentheses.
1. When the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function is valid, the start of automatic operation
displays this alarm message, but the alarm will be automatically cleared when the calculation is completed.
If this alarm occurs except during the start of automatic operation, change the model to a simple one.
Action
If the single block or feed hold signal is input while an alarm is active, the next operation is not executed even when the
alarm is cleared and the machine remains stopped until the cycle start button is pressed again.
.
2. Report the arguments (contributing factors 1, 2 and 3) to the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
d
ve
1126 —— ( , , )
s er
Cause
re
——
ts
gh
Action ——
ri
ll
1127 INVALID SAFETY SHIELD ( , , ) B L S Blue
.A
The INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD for automatic operation has been canceled.
N
1. With the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being valid for automatic operation, a command which is not compatible with
O
interference check was executed.
TI
Cause
60
2. With the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being valid for automatic operation, an attempt was made to start a program
A
stored in the storage areas for Hard Disk operation, Ethernet operation, and IC Card operation, or a program prepared
R
40
for Tape operation.

PO
29
Tap the alarm clear button to clear the alarm. Be all the more cautious of allowing interference because the INTELLIGENT
R
Action
o.
SAFETY SHIELD is not working.

O
N
1128 SAFETY SHIELD CONDITION CHANGED ( , , ) A L S Blue

al
K
ri
ZA
With the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being valid for automatic operation, the feed-overriding value has been
Se
Cause changed.
A
IM
Tap the alarm clear button to clear the alarm. In addition, take care about interference because the actual operation may
Action differ from the result of the interference check due to the change in the feed rate override.
K
ZA
1129 MEMORY PROTECT (SAFETY SHIELD) ( , , ) A L S Blue

A
An attempt was made to change the part count value manually during automatic operation with the SAFETY SHIELD
M
Cause function set valid.

YA
Set the part count value before starting the operation, or perform automatic operation with the SAFETY SHIELD function
3
Action set invalid.

01
)2
1130 EXCESSIVE SPACE ERROR COMP. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A L S Blue

(c
The amount of space error compensation has exceeded the upper limit.
Cause
ht
ig

yr
Action
op
C
1131 NO SPACE ERROR COMP. DATA ( , , ) A I P Red

The space error compensation function is not operating properly.
Cause

Action
3-34
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1132 ILLEGAL CHOPPING CONDITION (Cause, , ) A I P Red
1. The chopping axis is in the servo-off or removed status.
2. The chopping axis is the rotating axis, basic axis or tilting axis under tilt control, or tandem axis.
3. The top dead point and the bottom dead point are the same.
4. The chopping axis has not been returned to its zero point.
5. An attempt was made to start chopping when the chopping axis is selected for the axis to control manually.
Cause
6. The chopping feed rate is zero.
7. An attempt was made to change the chopping axis during chopping.
8. An attempt was made in the replay mode of the fixed offset method to use an offset number of which record has not
been written.
d .
9. An M-code command for axis movement is issued during chopping.
ve
Press the RESET key. Take action below against respective causes described above.
ser
1. Ensure that the chopping axis is not in the servo-off or removed status.
re
2. Select an axis other than the rotating axis, basic axis or tilting axis under tilt control, or tandem axis for the chopping
ts
axis.
gh
3. Review the position of the top dead point or bottom dead point.
ri
Action 4. Return the chopping axis to its zero point.
ll
5. Select another axis for an axis to control manually and start chopping.
.A
6. Review the chopping feed rate setting.
N
O
7. Do not change the chopping axis during chopping.
TI
8. Use an offset number of which recording is finished in the replay mode of the fixed offset method.
60
A
9. Do not issue any M-code command for axis movement during chopping.
R
40
PO
1133 ILLEGAL OPERATION IN CHOPPING (Cause, , ) A L Q Blue

29
Manual interrupt or zero-point return mode for the chopping axis is selected during chopping.
R
o.
Cause
O
N
C
al
Do not attempt to select manual interrupt for the chopping axis during chopping. Do not select the zero-point return mode.
K
Action
ri
ZA
Remove the cause and tap the alarm clear button.

Se
1134 CHOPPING OVERRIDE SET AT 0 (Cause, , ) A K Q Blue

IM
The chopping override value is zero.

Cause
K
ZA
Set a value other than “0” for the chopping override.

A
Action
M
YA
1135 —— ( , , )
3
Cause ——
01
)2
Action ——
(c
ht
1136 HOB WORK SPINDLE ROT. EXCEEDED ( , , ) B K P Red

ig
yr
The work spindle speed exceeded the clamp speed during hobbing.
Cause
op
C
Check and correct the spindle speed or the Z-axis feedrate so that the work spindle speed does not exceed the clamp
Action speed, and then restart the operation.
1137 SAFETY SHIELD CONDITION CHANGED ( , , ) A L S Blue

The machine has been operated using a spare tool with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function while automatic
Cause operation was enabled.
Tap the alarm clear button. In addition, take care about interference because the actual operation may differ from the
Action result of the interference check due to the difference between the actual tool and the tool model used for interference
check.
3-35
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1138 INVALID SAFETY SHIELD(MATERIAL) ( , , ) A L S Blue
A material interference check cannot be carried out while the modal restarting process of the EIA/ISO program is in
Cause progress.
Check that there is no interference with the material along the path from the current position to the restarting start position.
Action Retract the tool to a safe position before executing modal restart of the EIA/ISO program.
1139 ILLEGAL COMMAND (SAFETY SHIELD) ( , , ) A K S Red

With parameter settings of F156 bit0 = 0 and F156 bit1 = 1, a cutting command that incorporates a rotary axis travel was
executed while one of the following interpolation modes was active.
 With the C-/U-axis
Cause
.
Interpolation other than G7.1 (cylindrical interpolation) or G12.1 (polar coordinate interpolation) active
d
ve
 With the B-axis
er
Interpolation active
s
re
Add the material model cutting invalid M-code in the program before starting the operation.
ts
It is also possible to select whether the operation should be continued or stopped by an alarm by using the following
gh
parameter settings.
ri
0 1
Action
ll
F156 bit0 Continue operation with material cutting According to the setting of F156 bit1
.A
enabled only at the end position.
N
F156 bit1 Continue operation with material cutting Stop with an alarm
O
disabled.
TI
60
A
R
1140 —— ( , , )
40
PO
29
Cause ——
R
o.
O
N
Action ——
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
1141 ILLEGAL OPER CUTTING PT CTRL ( , , ) A K (L) O (S) Blue

A
1. When the cutting point control mode was valid, automatic operation was restarted after manual interruption from a
IM
position that differs from the position where manual interruption was called.
K
2. When the cutting point command function is valid, automatic operation was restarted after manual interruption from a
ZA
Cause rotary axis position that differs from the rotary axis position where manual interruption was called.
3. When the cutting point command function is valid, automatic operation handle interruption or MDI interruption was
A
M
performed.
YA
4. When the cutting point command function is valid, the mode was changed to the zero-point return mode.
1. After manual interruption, in the state the cutting point command function is valid, restart automatic operation only after
3
returning the axes to the position where they were located before manual interruption.
01
2. After manual interruption, in the state the cutting point command function is valid, restart automatic operation only after
)2
returning the rotary axis to the position where it was located before manual interruption.
(c
Action
3. Do not attempt automatic operation handle interruption or MDI interruption when the cutting point command function is
ht
valid.
ig
4. When the cutting point command function is valid, changing the mode to the zero-point return mode is not allowed.
yr
Change the mode to a permissible mode.

op
( , , )
C
Cause
Action
3-36
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1145 ILLEGAL OPER CUTTING PT CTRL (WNo., NNo. , BNo. ) A K (L) O (S) Red
User macro interruption occurred in the block in which the tool path passes a singular point.
Cause
Eliminate the cause of occurrence of user macro interruption.

Action
( , , )
Cause
.
Action
d
ve
er
1152 CANNOT USE ORBIT MACHINING (Cause, , ) A K (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
s
re
1. G149 was specified without specifying a rotation stop M code during orbit machining.
ts
2. G148 (orbit machining mode ON) was specified while the mill spindle was rotating.
gh
3. G148 was specified for a machine that does not feature a mill spindle.
ri
Cause 4. A cross machining command was specified while in the orbit machining mode.
ll
5. Simplified synchronization control was attempted while in the orbit machining mode.
.A
6. Superimposition axis control was attempted while in the orbit machining mode.
N
7. Orbit machining was attempted during inclined-axis control.
O
TI
1. Specify a rotation stop M code before specifying G149.
60
2. Stop mill spindle rotation before specifying G148. A

R
40
3. The machine does not support orbit machining. Review the program.
PO
29
Action 4. No cross machining command can be specified in the orbit machining mode. Review the program.
R
o.
5. Simplified synchronization control is not possible in the orbit machining mode. Review the program.
O
N
6. Superimposition axis control is not possible in the orbit machining mode. Review the program.
al
7. Orbit machining is not possible during inclined-axis control. Review the program.
ri
ZA
Se
1153 ILLEGAL OPER IN ORBIT MACHINING (Cause, , ) A K Q Blue

A
IM
1. The MDI mode was selected during orbit machining.

Cause 2. The manual operation mode was selected during orbit machining.
K
ZA
1. Manual interruption using the MDI mode is not possible during orbit machining. Reselect the previous operation
mode.
A
Action
M
2. The manual operation mode cannot be selected during orbit machining. Reselect the previous operation mode.
YA
1154 FEED LIMITED IN ORBIT MACHINING ( , , ) A L S Blue

3
The feedrate/speed of any of the X-/Y-/Z-axis and mill spindle was clamped at the value set for parameter M1, M67 or
01
Cause M68.
)2
(c
Review the spindle speed commands (S command) or feedrate commands (F commands) specified in the program or the
ht
Action override setting.

ig
If display of this alarm is not necessary, set bit 4 of parameter K257 to “0”.
yr
1155 G124 MOTION RANGE EXCEEDED (Axis name, , ) B K P Red

op
1. The position of the fundamental axis or parallel axis was outside the movement range upon specifying G124.
C
Cause
2. The fundamental axis or parallel axis has moved beyond the specified movement range in the G124 mode.
1. Move the fundamental axis and parallel axis inside their movement ranges before specifying G124.
Action
2. Correct the program so that the axis concerned move within the movement range.
1156 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-37
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
Clearing
Type of Stopped
error status
e
1157 ILLEGAL OPERATION IN ENGRAVING ( , , ) A K Q Blue
Any of the following operations was attempted while executing the engraving function.
Cause
2. Manual pulse handle interruption
3. MDI interruption
Do not perform operations 1 to 3 above while executing the engraving function.
Action
1158 SENSOR ON WITH MOVING MULTI-AX ( , , ) A K O Red

During manual tool measurement (with TOOL EYE), the sensor was turned ON while multiple measurement axes (*) were
moving.
.
Cause
d
ve
* The measurement axes vary depending on the machine model.
er
Move the tool away from the TOOL EYE sensor (Sensor ON  Sensor OFF)
s
re
Action Pressing the RESET key with the sensor turned OFF clears the alarm.
After confirming that the alarm has been cleared, restart the measurement.
ts
gh
1159 ILLEGAL WRITING TOOL-OFFSET ( , , ) A K O Red
ri
During manual tool measurement (with TOOL EYE), the sensor was turned ON without specifying the destination for
Cause
ll
writing the tool offset for tool offset measurement.
.A
Move the TOOL EYE sensor away from the tool and turn the sensor OFF.
N
Action
O
Pressing the RESET key with the sensor turned OFF clears the alarm.
TI
After confirming that the alarm has been cleared, set the destination for writing the tool offset and restart the measurement.
60
1160 SAFETY SHIELD SYNCHRONOUS ( ,

A , ) B L S Blue
R
40
PO
When an M code for canceling the disabled status of the automatic operation safety shield is specified, operation stops
29
Cause until synchronization for restarting the interference check is completed. Operation restarts when the synchronization has
R
o.
completed.
O
N
Wait until the synchronization for the interference check has completed.
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
( , , )
A
IM
Cause
K
ZA
Action
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-38
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
3-2-4 No. 200 - No. 399, No. 1200 - No. 1399 (PLC machine control error)
 The alarm message in the DIAGNOSIS display varies between the machine provided with
tailstock or spindle 2 and the machine provided with lower turret as shown below.
CAUTION
d.
ve
ser
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
1. Tailstock / spindle 2 specification

3
01
Neither TR1 nor TR2 is displayed on the display.

)2
2. Lower turret specification

(c
TR1 or TR2 is displayed on the display. The alarm message related to the secondary
ht
turning spindle or lower turret (or its milling spindle) is displayed with TR2.
ig
yr
Example : 1210 SPINDLE INHIBIT (CHUCK OPEN) ( , , ) TR1

op
.........An alarm message related to the main spindle.

C
1210 SPINDLE INHIBIT (CHUCK OPEN) ( , , ) TR2

.........An alarm message related to the secondary spindle.
1234 MILL SP.INHIBIT (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) TR1
.........An alarm message related to the milling spindle of the upper turret.
1234 MILL SP.INHIBIT (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) TR2
.........An alarm message related to the milling spindle of the lower turret.
3-39
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
200 HYDRAULIC UNIT PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F H O Red
The pressure in the hydraulic system has dropped.
Cause
Check the hydraulic system.

Action
Address: X1313
201 CHILLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F J O Red

Something is wrong with the hydraulic chiller unit.
Cause
1) Check the chiller unit filter for clogging.
.
d
2) Check the chiller unit in accordance with its operating manual.
ve
Action
3) If the breaker QF201 is tripped, turn it back on.
er
Address: X1302
s
re
202 AIR PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F H O Red
ts
The air pressure has dropped and the pressure switch was triggered.
gh
Cause
ri
ll
Check the air supply port and piping for abnormalities.
.A
Action
Address: X1506
N
O
203 MILL SPINDLE OIL PRESS. DOWN ( , , ) F K O Red
TI
The oil pressure in the milling spindle oil/air lubrication pump system has decreased.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO
29
Check the milling spindle oil/air lubrication system.

Action
R
Address: X150A
o.
O
N
204 MILL SPINDLE OIL LOW ( , , ) F J Q Yellow

al
K
ri
The liquid level in the tank for milling spindle oil/air lubrication system has decreased.
ZA
Cause
Se
A
IM
Refill the milling spindle oil/air lubrication tank with lubricating oil.
Action
Address: X150B
K
ZA
205 MILL SPINDLE OIL AIR PRESS. DOWN ( , , ) F K O Red

A
The air pressure in the milling spindle oil/air lubrication system has decreased.
M
Cause
YA
Check the milling spindle oil/air lubrication system.

3
Action
01
Address: X170C
)2
206 SPINDLE COOLING MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F J O Red

(c
The cooling oil pressure switch (SP115) of the spindle cooling unit was triggered.
ht
Cause
ig
yr
Check the quantity of remaining cooling oil.

op
Action
Address: X1314
C
207 GEAR LUBE PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F J Q Red

The pressure in the lubricating pump system of the B-axis or magazine gripper has dropped.
Cause
Check the lubricating system for the B-axis and magazine gripper.
Action
Address: X150C
3-40
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
208 GEAR LUBE LEVEL LOW ( , , ) F J Q Yellow
The oil level in the lubricating oil tank of the B-axis or magazine gripper is very low.
Cause
Add lubricating oil to the lubricating oil tank of the B-axis and magazine gripper.
Action
Address: X150D
( , , )
Cause
.
Action
d
ve
er
212 MAGAZINE DRIVER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) C J N Red
s
re
The alarm for the magazine rotating servo driver was raised.
Cause
ts
gh
1) Press the RESET key.
ri
Action 2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on. Then rotate the magazine manually to check for interference between
ll
tools.
.A
213 TOOL No.OK?(SPDL,NEXT, )----> (Spindle tool No., Standby tool No., ) - - P Yellow
N
O
This alarm message is displayed when automatic ATC recovery is finished.
Cause
TI
60
A
Check that the spindle tool and standby tool numbers are consistent with those displayed.
R
40
Action
PO
Then press and hold the reset key (more than one second) to reset the alarm.
29
214 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED ( , , ) B K P Red

o.
O
N
 When a group number is specified in the EIA program, tool data of the specified group number is not found.
Cause
al
 When a group number is specified in the EIA program, tool data of the specified group number is set as an invalid tool.
ri
ZA
Se
Modify the program or tool data.

Action
A
IM
215 —— ( , , )
K
ZA
Cause ——
A
M
Action ——
YA
3
216 HYDRAULIC UNIT BREAKER TRIP ( , , ) F H M Red

01
The circuit breaker of the hydraulic pump has tripped.

)2
Cause
(c
Check the hydraulic system.

ht
Action
ig
Address: X1307
yr
217 BREAKER TRIP ( , , ) F K M Red

op
One of the following circuit breakers has tripped (clogging of filter or nozzle):
C
Cause QF231, QF232, QF233, and QF234

For circuit breakers (QF***), see the electrical diagram.
Check the filters etc. and turn on the relevant circuit breaker.
Action
Address: X1306
3-41
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
218 CONVEYOR THERMAL TRIP ( , , ) F L M Red

The following circuit breaker has tripped (clogging of filter):
Cause QF271
Check the filters etc. and turn on the relevant circuit breaker.
Action
Address: X1305
219 MAIN TRANSFORMER OVERHEAT ( , , ) F H O Red

The power transformer was overheated because cutting was performed for a long time under heavy load.
Cause (The thermal switch was triggered.)
Turn off the circuit breaker and watch for a while what is going on with the transformer.
.
Action
d
Address: X1301
ve
er
220 —— ( , , )
s
re
Cause ——
ts
gh
Action ——
ri
ll
221 —— ( , , )
.A
N
Cause ——
O
TI
60
Action —— A
R
40
PO
29
222 AFC OVERLOAD ( , , ) F K O Red

R
o.
The load on the spindle cannot be reduced, even though the feed override was reduced using the AFC function.
O
Cause
N
C
al
Check if the tool has worn out and applies an extra load. Reduce the cutting load.
ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
( , , )
K
Cause
ZA
A
Action
M
YA
227 SIMULTANEOUS M CODE OPERATION ( , , ) B K O Yellow

3
Two or more M-codes that cannot be handled simultaneously were issued at the same time.
01
Cause
)2
Correct the program.

(c
Action (Ex.: Simultaneous entry of M3 and M4.)

ht
ig
228 ILLEGAL M CODE ( , , ) B K O Yellow

yr
An M-code unsupported by the machine was entered.

op
Cause
C

Action (Ex.: M-code for an optional device that is not mounted)
229 CYCLE START SCREEN ERR ( , , ) A L S Red

The cycle start button is pressed on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display when the SAFETY SHIELD function is effective for
Cause automatic operation.
Call a display other than the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.

Action
3-42
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
230 ILLEGAL MMS UNIT ( , , ) F K N Red
Something is wrong with the workpiece measuring amplifier.
Cause
Turn off the circuit breaker and watch for a while what is going on with the amplifier.
Action
( , , )
Cause
Action
d .
ve
235 MAGAZINE MANUAL INTERRUPT ( , , ) A L S White
s er
The manual interruption key on the magazine operating panel is activated.
re
Cause
ts
gh
After completing manual intervention, deactivate the manual interruption key.
Action
ri
ll
236 —— ( , , )
.A
N
Cause ——
O
TI
60
Action —— A
R
40
PO
29
237 MAGAZINE DOOR OPENED ( , , ) A L S White

R
o.
The magazine door is open.

O
Cause
N
C
al
Close the magazine door when performing automatic operation.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
Address: X4
A
IM
238 AUTO TOOL CHANGE STOP ( , , ) - L S White

ATC has been stopped by selecting [ATC STOP].
K
Cause
ZA
A
Operation is stopped immediately before starting the ATC operation. Tap [ATC STOP] to deselect it, and then press the
M
Action cycle start button to restart the ATC operation.

YA
( , , )
3
01
Cause
)2
(c
Action
ht
ig
242 MILL SPINDLE ORIENT TIME OVER ( , , ) D K N Red

yr
op
The orientation of the milling spindle was not completed within 30 seconds after the issue of a milling spindle orient
Cause command.
C

Action 2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on, and operate the spindle manually or with MDI to see if it can be oriented
correctly.
( , , )
Cause
Action
3-43
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
247 TOOL UNCLAMP SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red
The milling spindle tool unclamping sensor has not turned on within a predetermined time after the issue of a milling spindle
Cause tool unclamp command.
Check the spindle tool clamping/unclamping sensor.

Action
Address: X1708, X1709
248 TOOL CLAMP SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

The milling spindle tool clamping sensor has not turned on within a predetermined time after the issue of a milling spindle
Cause tool clamp command.
Check the spindle tool clamping/unclamping sensor.

Action
.
d
ve
( , , )
ser
re
Cause
ts
gh
Action
ri
ll
258 ATC COVER OPEN SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Yellow
.A
The ATC cover open status sensor has not turned on within a predetermined time after the issue of an ATC cover open
N
Cause command.
O
TI
60
Check for chips or other foreign substances that obstruct cover open/close operation.
A
Action
R
40
Address: X1317
PO
29
259 ATC COVER CLOSE SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Yellow

R
o.
The ATC cover close status sensor has not turned on within a predetermined time after the issue of an ATC cover close
O
N
Cause command.
C
al
Check for chips or other foreign substances that obstruct cover open/close operation.
ri
ZA
Action
Se
Address: X1318
A
IM
( , , )
K
Cause
ZA
A
M
Action
YA
264 SHIFTER POCKET CL SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

3
01
The clamp sensor of the shifter pocket is malfunctioning or the pocket itself is not fully clamped in the shifter.
Cause
)2
(c
Check the shifter.

Action
ht
Address: X1620
ig
yr
265 SHIFTER POCKET UCL SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

op
The unclamp sensor of the shifter pocket is malfunctioning or the pocket itself is not fully unclamped from the shifter.
Cause
C
Check the shifter.

Action
Address: X1621
266 MAGAZINE POCKET CL SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

The clamp sensor of the magazine pocket is malfunctioning or the pocket itself is not fully clamped in the magazine.
Cause
Check the magazine.

Action
Address: X162A
3-44
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
267 MAGAZINE POCKET UCL SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

The unclamp sensor of the magazine pocket is malfunctioning or the pocket itself is not fully unclamped from the magazine.
Cause
Check the magazine.

Action
Address: X1624
268 MAGAZINE2 POCKET CL SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

On Magazine 2: The clamp sensor of the magazine pocket is malfunctioning or the pocket itself is not fully clamped in the
Cause magazine.
Check the magazine.

Action
d.
Address: X162B
ve
er
269 MAGAZINE2 POCKET UCL SENS. MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red
s
On Magazine 2: The unclamp sensor of the magazine pocket is malfunctioning or the pocket itself is not fully unclamped
re
Cause from the magazine.
ts
gh
Check the magazine.
Action
ri
Address: X1628
ll
.A
( , , )
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Action
A
R
40
PO
29
278 COND.MISSING (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A L - Yellow

R
o.
Milling or turning spindle orientation or C-axis connection was attempted with the front door open.
N
Cause
C
al
K
ri
Close the front door and try again.

ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
279 —— ( , , )
K
Cause ——
ZA
A
Action
M
——
YA
280 NO ORIENT (UNCLAMPED TOOL) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

3
01
When the tool on the milling spindle was unclamped, a milling spindle orient command was entered.
Cause
)2
(c
Clamp the tool on the milling spindle before orientating the milling spindle.
Action
ht
ig
281 —— ( , , )
yr
op
Cause ——
C
Action ——
282 NO ORIENT (ATC ARM POS. ERROR) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

When the ATC arm was not in its reference position, a milling spindle orient command was entered.
Cause
Set the ATC arm to its reference position in a manual operation mode.
Action
3-45
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
283 NOT UNCLAMPED (NOT STOP SPINDLE) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
When the milling spindle was rotating, a tool unclamp command was entered.
Cause
Stop the milling spindle when unclamping the tool.

Action
284 NOT UNCLAMPED (MILL CLAMP UNFIN) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

When the milling spindle was not clamped, a tool unclamp command was entered.
Cause
Clamp the milling spindle correctly when unclamping the tool.

Action
d .
ve
285 NOT UNCLAMPED (NOT MANUAL MODE) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
s er
When manual operation mode was not selected, a tool unclamp command was entered.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Select manual operation mode when unclamping the tool.
Action
ri
ll
286 NOT AUTO MODE (UNCLAMPED TOOL) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
.A
When the tool was not clamped, automatic operation mode was selected.
N
Cause
O
TI
Clamp the tool when selecting automatic operation mode.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
( , , )
R
o.
Cause
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
291 NO TOOL UNLOAD (TOOL IN MAG.) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

When a magazine pocket containing a tool was indexed, a command for moving the tool shifter to the magazine position
K
Cause was entered.

ZA
A
Index a magazine pocket that contains no tool.

M
Action
YA
292 —— ( , , )
3
01
Cause ——
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
ig
293 NO TOOL UNLOAD (SHIFTER POS ERR) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

yr
op
Shifter movement command was given when the magazine rotation is in progress.
Cause
C
Give the shifter movement command after the magazine has stopped.
Action
294 NO TOOL SELECT (INCORRECT TNo.) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

A negative number was specified as a T-code.
Cause
M6 is specified in an independent block.
Specify the correct tool number.
Action
Specify M6 together with a T code.
3-46
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
295 NO TOOL SELECT (SHIFTER POS ERR) ( , , ) B K O Yellow
Magazine rotation command was given when the tool shifter was not positioned at the ATC position.
Cause
Move the tool shifter to the ATC position.

Action
296 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
d .
ve
297 NO TOOL CHANGE (Z POS ERR) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
s er
A command for rotating the ATC arm was given when the Z-axis position was not appropriate to ATC.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Perform a Z-axis movement as required for ATC.
Action
ri
ll
298 TOOL UNCLAMP OK? ( , , ) A L S Yellow
.A
The tool unclamp button has been pressed once.
N
Cause
O
TI
Pressing and holding the tool unclamp button for one second while the message is displayed unclamps the tool.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
299 NOT UNCLAMPED (B AXIS ANGLE) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

R
o.
When the angle of the B-axis was not 0°, a tool unclamp command was entered in a manual operation mode.
O
Cause
N
C
al
When unclamping a milling tool, set the angle of the B-axis at 0°.
ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
300 BREAKER TRIP ( , , ) F K O Red

A circuit breaker in the control panel has tripped.
K
Cause
ZA
A

M
2) Turn off the circuit breaker.

YA
Action 3) Check all circuit breakers in the control cabinet to see if they have tripped. If a tripped circuit breaker is found, turn it
3
back on.
01
Address: X1303
)2
301 TAIL THRUST CNG INHIBIT ( , , ) B K O Yellow

(c
A command for changing the thrust of the tailstock was given with the tailstock remaining in a pressing position. (For auto-
ht
Cause matic mode of operation)

ig
yr
Retract the tailstock beforehand from the pressing position.

Action
op
C
302 LINE FILTER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F L P White

The line filter was overloaded.
Cause
Check the filter for clogging.

Action
3-47
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
303 LINE FILTER ALARM ( , , ) F J O Yellow
The line filter was overloaded.
Cause
Check the filter.

Action
304 HIGH PRESS. PUMP THERMAL TRIP ( , , ) F K O Red

The thermal relays in the coolant unit of a machine of the high-pressure coolant specifications have become tripped.
Cause
Check the thermal relays of the coolant unit.

Action
d .
ve
( , , )
s er
re
Cause
ts
gh
Action
ri
ll
309 SPINDLE ORIENT TIME OVER ( , , ) D K N Red
.A
The orientation of the turning spindle was not completed within a predetermined time after the issue of a turning spindle
N
Cause orient command.
O
TI
60
Action
A
2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on, and operate the spindle manually or with MDI to see if it can be oriented
R
40
PO
correctly.
29
310 SPINDLE MISS CHUCK ( , , ) F K O Red

R
o.
O
N
Mis-chucking has been detected under the specifications of the machine provided with chuck open/close confirmation
C
Cause sensors.
al
K
ri
ZA
1) Check if the chuck holds the workpiece correctly.

Se
2) If the diameter of the workpiece currently inserted in the chuck is different from that of the previous workpiece, or if the
IM
Action stroke of the chuck jaw has been changed, check also if the chuck opening/closing sensor works normally when a
workpiece is set in the chuck. If necessary, adjust the position of the sensor.
K
Address: X1500, X1501 (Turning spindle 1) X1401, X1402 (Turning spindle 2)

ZA
311 SPINDLE CHUCK TIMER OVER ( , , ) F K O Red

A
M
The chuck did not close within the time set with the alarm timer.
Cause
YA
3

01
Action 2) If the diameter of the workpiece currently inserted in the chuck is different from that of the previous workpiece, or if the
)2
stroke of the chuck jaw has been changed, change the setting of the alarm timer, i. e. , time set with the PLC parameter
TIM47.
(c
ht
312 CHUCK FOOT SWITCH MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F L O Red

ig
Something is wrong with the foot switch for opening/closing the spindle chuck.
yr
Cause
op
C
1) Turn off the circuit breaker.

Action 2) Check the microswitch in the foot switch for functioning and the wires for breaks and short circuits.
Address: X150E, X150F (Turning spindle 1) X1403, X1404 (Turning spindle 2)
313 SELECT CHUCK INT-EXT ( , , ) A L P Red
When a selection between internal and external chucking was not made for the spindle chuck:
Cause 1) A spindle start command was entered or
2) Automatic operation was started.
Select a chucking mode between internal and external chucking.
Action
3-48
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
314 CHUCK SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red
Both the open end sensor and the closed end sensor were turned on simultaneously.
Cause

2) If the diameter of the workpiece currently inserted in the chuck is different from that of the previous workpiece, or if the
Action stroke of the chuck jaw has been changed, check also if the chuck opening/closing sensor works normally when a
workpiece is set in the chuck. If necessary, adjust the position of the sensor.
315 CHUCK PRESSURE LOW ( , , ) F K O Red
A pressure drop in the chuck was detected.
Cause
d .
ve
1) Adjust the chuck pressure and the pressure monitoring switch pressure.
er
Action 2) Check the hydraulic system of the chuck.
s
re
ts
316 CHUCK INT-EXT SELECT INHIBIT ( , , ) A L P Yellow
gh
When the milling spindle and the turning spindle were still rotating, the chucking mode between internal and external
ri
Cause chucking was switched.
ll
.A
Switch the internal/external chucking selector mode after both the milling spindle and the turning spindle have stopped
Action
N
rotating.
O
TI
317 C AXIS CONNECTION TIME OVER ( , , ) D K N Red
60
A
The connection of the C-axis was not completed within a predetermined time after the issue of a C-axis connect command.
R
40
Cause
PO
29

o.
Action
O
N
2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on, and check if the C-axis is connected correctly.
C
al
318 —— ( , , )
ri
ZA
Se
Cause ——
A
IM
K
Action ——
ZA
319 B AXIS SENSOR MALFUNCITON ( , , ) F K O Red

A
M
The clamp and unclamp confirmation of the B-axis clamping mechanism do not work normally.
YA
Cause
3
Repeatedly execute B-axis clamp and unclamp commands in the menu.

01
Action
Address: X170D
)2
320 NON INDEX DATA ( , , ) B K P Yellow

(c
ht
When special ATC pattern “B-axis rotation at the specified position in the index unit” is used, the data for rotation position Z
Cause
ig
is empty in the index unit.

yr
Set coordinate data for rotation position Z at which B-axis rotation is possible.
op
Action
C
321 TAIL THRUST CNG INHIBIT ( , , ) A L O Yellow

A command for changing the thrust of the tailstock was given with the tailstock remaining in a pressing position. (For
Cause manual mode of operation)
Retract the tailstock beforehand from the pressing position.

Action
3-49
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
322 MILLING GEAR SHIFT SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red
The engagement sensor of the lower-turret gear shift is malfunctioning or the gear shift is not fully engaged.
Cause
The disengagement sensor of the lower-turret gear shift is malfunctioning or the gear shift is not fully disengaged.
Check the lower-turret gear shift.
Action
323 TOOL EYE ARM POS. SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

It cannot be confirmed whether the TOOL EYE unit operates normally.
Cause 1) The TOOL EYE forward end sensor does not work normally.
2) The TOOL EYE backward end sensor does not work normally.
.
Check if the operation of the TOOL EYE is hindered by chips etc.
d
Action
ve
er
324 PARTS CATCHER CYCLE TIME OVER. ( , , ) F K O Red
s
re
The confirmation sensor concerned has not turned on within 20 seconds after the issue of a parts catcher operation
ts
Cause command (M248/M249).
gh
Check the confirmation sensor for parts catcher extension/retraction.
ri
Action
ll
.A
325 PARTS CATCHER POS. SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red
N
O
The parts catcher has not been extended or retracted completely if the confirmation sensor concerned functions properly.
Cause
TI
60
A
R
40
Action
PO

29
326 TAIL POSITION MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

o.
O
N
A tailstock positioning command for pressing (M841 or M842) was completed at a position overstepping a permissible
Cause
al
pressing range.
K
ri
ZA
Se
Reverse the tailstock and confirm the target position on the SETUP INFORMATION display.
Action
A
IM
327 TAIL PUSHING MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F H O Red

K
ZA
During machining with the tailstock, the amount of W-axis adjustment has exceeded its permissible range.
Cause
A
M
Make sure that the cutting depth, thrust, and other machining conditions are appropriate.
YA
Action
3
328 —— ( , , )
01
)2
Cause ——
(c
ht
Action ——
ig
yr
329 TAIL SPINDLE ACT. TIME OVER ( , , ) F K O Red

op
C
The pressing operation of the tail spindle is not completed.

Cause

Action
2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on.
330 TAIL DATA ILLEGAL ( , , ) B L P Yellow

1) The value of parameter RL22 is smaller than 0.
Cause
2) The setting of RL21 is smaller than that of RL22.
Change the parameter to the appropriate value.
Action
3-50
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
331 C AXIS CLAMP MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F H P Red
The C-axis position has changed more than the setting value of parameter RL51 while the C-axis is clamped.
Cause
The C-axis clamp mechanism may be faulty.

Action
332 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
d.
ve
333 —— ( , , )
s er
Cause ——
re
ts
gh
Action ——
ri
334 TAIL THRUST-CONTROL ( , , ) A L - White
ll
.A
This message is displayed after the tail thrust control mode is turned ON (M504 or tail spindle advance with the tail spindle
N
Cause switch) until the pressing motion is finished.
O
Rapid feed or handle feed is not available while this alarm is occurring.
TI
60
Wait until the pressing motion is finished or cancel the tail thrust control mode (M503 or tail spindle retract with the tail
A
Action spindle switch).
R
40
PO
29
335 —— ( , , )
R
o.
O
N
Cause ——
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Action ——
Se
A
IM
336 NOT SAME TOOL No. ( , , ) A, F L O Yellow

Although the indication of the number of the “tool in the spindle” is zero (0), the tool clamping sensor is ON.
K
Cause
ZA
A
Check the indication on the “tool in the spindle” against the actual state.
Action
M
YA
337 DRIVE MODE CHANGE INHIBIT ( , , ) A J S Yellow

3
01
An attempt to change operation modes was made:

Cause 1) At the start of automatic operation
)2
2) When ATC mechanism was in operation.

(c
1) Stop automatic operation.

ht
Action
2) Wait for the ATC mechanism to finish operation.
ig
yr
338 —— ( , , )
op
C
Cause ——
Action ——
339 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-51
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
340 ATC CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) C J N Red
The alarm for the ATC arm servo driver was raised.
Cause

Action
341 MAGAZINE2 CONTROLLER MALF. ( , , ) E J N Red

The alarm for the magazine-2 rotating servo driver was raised.
Cause
.
Action
d
2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on. Then rotate the magazine manually to check for interference between
ve
tools.
er
342 CARRIER CONTROLLER MALF. ( , , ) E J N Red
s
re
The alarm for the tool carrier rotating servo driver was raised.
Cause
ts
gh
ri
Action
ll
2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on. Then rotate the magazine manually to check for interference between
.A
tools.
N
343 —— ( , , )
O
TI
Cause ——
60
A
R
40
PO
29
Action ——
R
o.
344 —— ( , , )
N
C
al
Cause ——
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Action ——
K
345 START ERROR (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

ZA
Automatic operation was started with the front door left open.
A
Cause
M
YA
Close the front door.

Action
Address: X2
3
01
346 START ERROR(TURRET UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

)2
Automatic operation was started with the lower turret unclamped.

(c
Cause
ht
ig
Clamp the lower turret.

Action
yr
op
347 START ERROR (ATC COVER OPEN) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

C
Automatic operation has been started with the ATC cover open.
Cause
Close the ATC cover.

Action
3-52
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
348 START ERROR (MG COVER OPEN) ( , , ) A L S Yellow
Automatic operation was started with the magazine door left open.
Cause
Close the magazine door.

Action
349 START ERROR (TOOL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

Automatic operation was started with the tool being unclamped.
Cause
Clamp the tool.

Action
d .
ve
350 START ERROR (TOOL EYE EXT.) ( , , ) A L S Yellow
s er
Automatic operation was started with the TOOL EYE unit left out.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Return (retract) the TOOL EYE to its home position.
Action
ri
ll
351 START ERROR (SPINDLE MISS CHUCK) ( , , ) A L S Yellow
.A
Automatic operation was started when the spindle chuck was not fully closed.
N
Cause
O
TI
1) Check if the chuck holds the workpiece properly.
60
Action
A
2) Check if the chuck opening/closing sensor works normally when a workpiece is set in the chuck. If necessary, adjust the
R
40
PO
position of the sensor.

29
352 START ERROR (TAIL SPINDLE POS.) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

R
o.
O
N
Automatic operation was started when the tailstock (optional) was pressing the workpiece or the tailstock was neither in its
C
Cause retraction position nor backward end (zero point).

al
K
ri
ZA
Move the tailstock backward or to the pressing position.

Se
Action
A
IM
353 START ERROR (PARTS CATCHER EXT.) ( , , ) F L O Yellow

K
Starting automatic operation has been attempted although the parts catcher was not fully retracted.
ZA
Cause
A
M

Action
YA

3
354 START ERROR (ATC ARM POSITION) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

01
Automatic operation was started when the ATC arm was not in its reference position (0°).
)2
Cause
(c
ht
Set the ATC arm to its reference position.

Action
ig
yr
355 START ERROR (EXT. RESET) ( , , ) F L O Yellow

op
C
Starting automatic operation has been attempted with a RESET signal input from an external controller.
Cause
Refer to the instruction manual of the external controller.

Action
3-53
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
356 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
357 START ERROR (CRR/SFT POSITION) ( , , ) F L O Yellow

Starting automatic operation has been attempted without the shifter being in the ATC position.
Cause
Move the shifter beforehand to the ATC position.
.
Action
d
ve
er
358 LINE FILTER WARNING ( , , ) F L P Yellow
s
re
The high-pressure coolant unit or the separate line filter was overloaded.
Cause
ts
gh
Check the filter for clogging.
Action
ri
ll
.A
359 ATC ARM INHIBIT ( , , ) A L P Yellow
N
An ATC arm manual positioning command was entered under one of the following conditions:
O
1) The milling spindle was not clamped.
TI
Cause 2) A door was open and the machine setup switch was set to “O” (OFF).
60
A
3) A tool was not clamped (when a reference position/swinging over position was specified.)
R
40
A tool was not unclamped (when a tool change position was specified.)
PO
29
Check to see that none of the conditions listed above is met.

R
Action
o.
O
N
C
al
360 START ERROR (NOT SAME CHIP No.) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

K
ri
ZA
The orient angle was changed by manual interruption, and the cycle start button was pressed without returning the orient
Se
Cause angle to its original angle.

A
IM
Return the orient angle to the original angle.

Action
K
ZA
361 START ERROR (SET UP SWITCH) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

A
M
When the machine setup switch was set to “l” (ON), automatic operation was started.
Cause
YA
3
Set the machine setup switch to “O” (OFF).

01
Action
Address: X1
)2
362 START ERROR (TOP/SIDE DOOR) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

(c
ht
Automatic operation was attempted with the top door or side door open.
Cause
ig
yr
Close the top door or side door.

op
Action
C
363 OVERLOAD DETECTION ( , , ) F K O Red

An overload has been detected in a machine having an overload detection option.
Cause
Check the overload detection level.

Action Reduce the cutting load.
3-54
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
364 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
365 MILL CLAMP INVALID (ORIENT DEG) ( , , ) A K P Yellow

A clamp command was entered in an angle other than orientation angle at which the milling spindle can be clamped (0
Cause degrees or multiples of 15 degrees).
Orient the milling spindle to an angle at which clamping is possible.

Action
d .
ve
366 MILL CLAMP INVALID (NOT ORIENT) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
s er
When the milling spindle was not oriented, a milling tool clamp command was entered.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Orient the milling spindle correctly.
Action
ri
ll
.A
367 ORIENT/C AXIS INHIBIT (SYNCHRO.) ( , , ) A K O Yellow
N
An orient command was given for turning spindle 1 or 2 with the spindles being set in the synchronized operation mode.
Cause
O
TI
60
Cancel the synchronized operation mode beforehand. A

Action
R
40
PO
29
368 MILL UNCLAMP INV. (TOOL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

R
o.
When the tool is being unclamped, a milling spindle unclamp command was entered.
N
Cause
C
al
K
ri
Clamp the tool.

ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
369 SPINDLE SYNCHRO INHIBIT ( , , ) A K O Yellow

K
It was attempted to select the synchronized operation mode for the turning spindles with headstock 1 or 2 (HD1 or HD2)
Cause
ZA
remaining in the C-axis control mode (i.e. milling mode).

A
Set both headstocks (HD1 and HD2) to the turning mode.

M
Action
YA
370 —— ( , , )
3
01
Cause ——
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
ig
yr
371 COND. MISSING (SET UP SWITCH) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

op
When the front door was opened and the machine setup switch was set to “O” (OFF), a start command was entered.
Cause
C
Close the front door or set the machine setup switch to “l” (ON).
Action
372 HIGH PRESS. COOL SYSTEM ALARM ( , , ) F K O Red

An alarm signal has been sent from the high pressure pump system to the NC unit.
Cause
Check the high pressure pump system.

Action
3-55
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
373 HIGH PRE COOL SYS. PRESS. ALARM ( , , ) F K O Red
The pressure in the coolant unit tank of a machine of the high-pressure coolant specifications has decreased.
Cause
Check and adjust the coolant unit tank pressure.

Action
374 HIGH PRESS.COOL SYSTEM ALARM ( , , ) F K O Yellow

An alarm signal has been sent from the high-pressure pump system to the NC unit.
Cause
Check the high-pressure pump system.

Action
d.
ve
375 COOLANT LEVEL LOW WARNING ( , , ) F L Q Yellow
s er
The coolant level in the coolant unit of a machine of the high-pressure coolant specifications has decreased.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Check the coolant level in the coolant unit.
Action
ri
ll
376 WORK NO. SEARCH ERROR ( , , ) B K O Yellow
.A
For a machine witha warm-up function (optional), a work number search was made for an unregistered program.
N
Cause
O
TI
Register the warm-up program number (1 to 99999999) with a machine parameter.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
377 WORK NO. SET ERROR ( , , ) B K O Yellow

R
o.
For a machine with a warm-up function (optional), a negative number was assigned to the warm-up program.
O
Cause
N
C
al
Register correctly the warm-up program number (1 to 99999999) with a machine parameter.
ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
378 —— ( , , )
K
Cause ——
ZA
A
M
Action ——
YA
379 WARMING UP ERROR ( , , ) A L O Red

3
01
Warm-up was stopped because a front door was opened or the machine setup switch was set to “l” (ON).
Cause
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
ig
( , , )
yr
op
Cause
C
Action
383 SAFETY FENCE OPEN ( , , ) A L S White

With a machine with safety fence, the orient, chuck jaw air blow, chuck open/close, chuck jaw coolant, cycle start or front
Cause door open/close command was issued from the robot with the safety fence open.
Close the safety fence.

Action
3-56
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
384 CONVEYOR OVERLOAD ( , , ) F L O Yellow
The chip conveyor is clogged with chips.
Cause
Clear chips from the conveyor.

Action
Address: X1304
385 GREASE LUBE PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F J O Red

The pressure of the lubricating grease has dropped.
Cause
1) Check the quantity of grease and add grease if there is not enough grease left.
.
Action
d
2) Check the grease lubricating system.
ve
Address: X170B
er
386 —— ( , , )
s
re
ts
Cause ——
gh
ri
Action ——
ll
.A
387 C AXIS SYNCHRO CONTROL ALARM ( , , ) E L P Red
N
The C-axis synchronous command was issued but the synchronous mode was not set.
O
Cause
TI
60
A
Contact the nearest MazakTechnical Center or Technology Center.
R
40
Action
PO
29
388 ROBOT CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) G K O Red

o.
O
N
An alarm has occurred to the external robot or GL.

C
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
Reset the alarm at the external robot or GL.

Action
A
IM
389 SCALE AIR PRESSURE DROP ( , , ) F L O Yellow

K
ZA
The air pressure for the linear scale has decreased.

Cause
A
M
Check the pneumatic system (linear scale).

YA
Action
Address: X1509
3
390 —— ( , , )
01
)2
Cause ——
(c
ht
Action ——
ig
yr
391 SAVING ENERGY MODE ( , , ) A L - White

op
C
No key operation has been made for a preset period while automatic operation is not in progress.
Cause
This is reset by key operation or human detection sensor activation.

Action
3-57
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
392 THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ER ( , , ) F K N Red
 The thermal displacement has exceeded 500 m.

 The average among the thermal sensor inputs has gone below “40” (disconnection detected).
 The parameter setting is invalid (RS25 = 0 or RS33 < 3).
 The temperature rise at the milling spindle (temperature difference between the milling head and lower carriage) is
Cause abnormal.
(A temperature rise at the milling spindle exceeding the value set for parameter RS26 has continued over the time set
for RS28.)
 The channel switching confirmation signal did not turn on while reading the temperature data.
(The temperature data inside the thermal displacement amplifier is not updated and the last temperature obtained
.
before a failure continues to be output.)
d
ve
er
Action 2) Turn off the circuit breaker and then back on.
s
re
Address: R0, R1, R2, R3
ts
393 —— ( , , )
gh
ri
Cause ——
ll
.A
Action ——
N
O
394 —— ( , , )
TI
60
A
R
Cause
40
——
PO
29
Action ——
o.
O
N
C
al
395 ATC CYCLE TIMER OVER ( , , ) F K O Red

K
ri
ZA
Although 120 seconds have passed since the issuance of the ATC command, the operation complete signal does not turn
Se
Cause on.
A
IM
Reset the ATC unit using the following procedure:

K
1) Cancel the ATC command by pressing the emergency stop button.

Action
ZA
2) Release the emergency stop status by pressing the RESET key.

A
3) Execute the ATC reset function of the machine menu. For recovery of normal status, see the Operating Manual.
M
396 MAINTENANCE/ADJUST ON ( , , ) A L - White

YA
[ATC INT-LOCK CANCEL] in the machine menu is tapped.

Cause
3
(ATC related interlock is reset.)

01
)2
Tap [ATC INT-LOCK CANCEL] in the machine menu again.

Action
(c
ht
397 OPERATING SWITCH FAULT ( , , ) F H N Red

ig
A switch on the operating panel is faulty. Or a switch is held down by some external force.
yr
Cause
op
C
Check if the switch is held down by something.

Action
398 MOTOR&SERVO POWER OFF FAULT ( , , ) F H N Red

When the front door is opened by an operator, each motor is cut off from the power line. When the front door was opened,
Cause however, it could not be confirmed that the supply of power to the motors were shut off. Or although the front door was
closed, the supply of power was shut off.
Action
3-58
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
399 MAIN POWER OFF FAULT ( , , ) F H N Red
Power was not shut off in spite of an emergency stop, or power was shut off although an emergency stop was not made.
Cause

Action
d .
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-59
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1202 TURRET CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) C J N Red
A turret rotation servo driver alarm has occurred.
Cause

Action
1203 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
d.
ve
1204 TURRET INDEX TIME OVER ( , , ) F K O Red
s er
The index finish signal was not turned ON within 20 seconds after the issue of a turret index command.
re
Cause
ts
gh
The turret index motor detector or controller is faulty.
Action
ri
ll
1205 TURRET CLAMP SENS.MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red
.A
The clamp confirmation sensor is not turned ON although the turret is clamped.
N
Cause
O
The clamp confirmation sensor is not turned OFF although the turret is unclamped.
TI
Check the clamp confirmation sensor of the lower turret.
60
Action
Address: X1422
A
R
40
PO
29
1206 —— ( , , )
R
o.
Cause
N
——
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Action ——
Se
A
IM
1207 TOOL FITTING ALARM ( , , ) A, B K O Red

The tool has not been clamped properly.
K
Cause
ZA
A
Check the tool and the seating surface on the milling spindle for sticking chips.
M
Action
Address: X1703
YA
1208 TOOL FITTING ERR (CUTTING I.L.) ( , , ) F K O Yellow

3
01
The tool is not clamped securely.

)2
This alarm occurs at the same time with alarm 1207 TOOL FITTING ALARM. This alarm is retained until the tool is
Cause
unclamped once.
(c
Cutting feed is prohibited while this alarm is occurring.

ht
This alarm will be reset when the tool is unclamped. Check if chips are stuck on the tool or tool seating surface on the
ig
Action milling spindle.

yr
op
1209 —— ( , , )
C
Cause ——
Action ——
3-60
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1210 SPINDLE INHIBIT (CHUCK OPEN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
A turning spindle rotation command was given even though the chuck was not closed.
Cause
Close the spindle chuck.

Action
1211 SPINDLE INHIBIT (MISS CHUCK) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

When a turning spindle chucking error (alarm No. 310) was detected, a turning spindle rotate command was entered.
Cause
See the “Alarm No. 310: SPINDLE MISS CHUCK section.

Action
d .
ve
1212 SPINDLE INHIBIT (CHUCK INT/EXT) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
ser
When a selection between internal and external chucking was not made for the turning spindle chuck, a turning spindle
re
Cause rotate command was entered.
ts
gh
Action
ri
ll
1213 SPINDLE INHIBIT (CHUCK PRES. LOW) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
.A
When a pressure drop (alarm No. 315) in the chuck was detected, a turning spindle rotate command was entered.
N
Cause
O
TI
See the Alarm No. 315 CHUCK PRESSURE LOW section.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1214 SPINDLE INHIBIT (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

R
o.
When the front door was open, a turning spindle rotate command was entered.
O
Cause
N
C
al

ri
ZA
Action
Se
Address: X2
A
IM
1215 SPINDLE INHIBIT (TOOL EYE EXT.) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

When the TOOL EYE arm was not at its backward end, a turning spindle rotate command was given.
K
Cause
ZA
A
Return the TOOL EYE arm to its backward end.

M
Action
YA
1216 SPINDLE INHIBIT(TULLET UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

3
01
A turning spindle rotate command was given with the lower turret unclamped.
Cause
)2
(c

Action
ht
ig
1217 SPINDLE INHIBIT (TAIL POS.) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

yr
op
A turning spindle rotate command was given with the tailstock in a state other than the following:
C
- Returned to the home position,

Cause
- Pressing the workpiece in the corresponding position, or
- Retracted to a certain extent (as specified for M843) from the pressing position.
Return the tailstock to its home position, or position it correctly to apply thrust on the workpiece.
Action
3-61
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1218 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
1219 SPINDLE INHIBIT (HEAD SELECT ER) ( , , ) B K O Yellow

In automatic mode of operation a turning spindle start command was given before headstock selection (with M901 or M902
Cause for HD1 or HD2).
Select the desired headstock beforehand.

Action
.d
ve
1220 SPINDLE INHIBIT (MILLING MODE) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
ser
In milling mode (C-axis connected), a turning spindle start command was given.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Disconnect the C-axis.
Action
ri
ll
.A
1221 SPINDLE INHIBIT (EXT. INTERLOCK) ( , , ) G K O Yellow
N
A turning spindle start command was given with an interlock signal input from an external controller.
Cause
O
TI
60
Check the external controller. A

Action
R
40
PO
29
1222 SPINDLE INHIBIT (B AXIS UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

R
o.
A turning spindle start command was given with the B-axis being unclamped.
N
Cause
C
al
K
ri
Clamp the B-axis.

ZA
Action
Se
Address: X170D
A
IM
1223 SPINDLE INHIBIT (TOOL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

K
A turning spindle start command was given with the milling spindle in tool unclamping state.
Cause
ZA
A
Clamp a tool in the milling spindle.

M
Action
YA
1224 SPINDLE INHIBIT (MILL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

3
01
A turning spindle start command was given with the milling spindle being unclamped.
Cause
)2
(c
Clamp the milling spindle.

Action
ht
ig
yr
1225 SPINDLE INHIBIT (SLAVE HD) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

op
A turning spindle start command was given for the slave headstock in the synchronized operation mode of turning spindles.
Cause
C
Give a turning spindle start command for the headstock being selected as the master in the synchronized operation mode.
Action
( , , )
Cause
Action
3-62
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1230 MILL SP. INHIBIT (CHUCK OPEN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
When the spindle chuck was not closed, a milling spindle rotate command was entered.
Cause
Close the spindle chuck.

Action
1231 MILL SP. INHIBIT (MISS CHUCK) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

When a chucking error (alarm No. 310) was detected, a milling spindle rotate command was entered.
Cause
See the Alarm No. 310 SPINDLE MISS CHUCK section.

Action
d .
ve
1232 MILL SP. INHIBIT (CHUCK INT/EXT) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
ser
When a selection between internal and external chucking was not made for the spindle chuck, a milling spindle rotate
re
Cause command was entered.
ts
gh
Action
ri
ll
.A
1233 MILL SP. INHIBIT (CHUCK PRES. LOW) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
N
When a pressure drop (alarm No. 315) in the chuck was detected, a milling spindle rotate command was entered.
Cause
O
TI
60
See the Alarm No. 315 CHUCK PRESSURE LOW section. A

Action
R
40
PO
29
1234 MILL SP. INHIBIT (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

R
o.
When the front door was open, a milling spindle rotate command was entered.
N
Cause
C
al
K
ri
ZA

Se
Action
Address: X2
A
IM
1235 MILL SP.INHIBIT(TURRET UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

K
A milling spindle rotate command was given with the lower turret unclamped.
ZA
Cause
A

M
Action
YA
1236 MILL SP. INHIBIT (TAIL POS.) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

3
01
A milling spindle rotate command was given with the tailstock in a state other than the following:
)2
- Returned to the home position,

Cause
(c
- Pressing the workpiece in the corresponding position, or

ht
- Retracted to a certain extent (as specified for M843) from the pressing position.
ig
Return the tailstock to its home position, or position it correctly to apply thrust on the workpiece.
yr
Action
op
C
1237 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-63
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1238 MILL SP. INHIBIT (TURNING MODE) ( , , ) B K O Yellow
In turning mode (C-axis not connected), a milling spindle rotate command was entered.
Cause
Connect the C-axis.

Action
1239 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
.
d
ve
1240 MILL SP. INHIBIT (HD SELECT ER) ( , , ) B K O Yellow
ser
In automatic mode of operation a milling spindle start command was given before headstock selection (with M901 or M902
re
Cause for HD1 or HD2).
ts
gh
Select the desired headstock beforehand.
Action
ri
ll
1241 MILL SP. INHIBIT (TOOL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
.A
A milling spindle start command was given with the milling spindle in tool unclamping state.
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1242 MILL SP. INHIBIT (MILL CLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

R
o.
A milling spindle start command was given with the milling spindle being clamped.
O
Cause
N
C
al
Unclamp the milling spindle.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
1243 MILL SP. INHIBIT (ATC ARM) ( , , ) A K O Yellow

When the ATC arm was not in its reference position, a milling spindle start command was given.
K
Cause
ZA
A

M
Action
YA
1244 MILL SP. INHIBIT (TOOL EYE EXT.) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

3
01
When the TOOL EYE arm was not at its backward end, a milling spindle rotate command was entered.
Cause
)2
(c
Return the TOOL EYE arm to its backward end.

Action
ht

ig
( , , )
yr
op
Cause
C
Action
1249 AXIS MOVE INH.(TOOL EYE) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

A W-axis move command was given with the TOOL EYE for the lower turret extended.
Cause
Retract the TOOL EYE for the lower turret.

Action
3-64
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1250 AXIS MOVE INH. (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) B K P Yellow
The axis movement command was issued with the front door open during automatic operation.
Cause

Action
1251 AXIS MOVE INH. (C AXIS CLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

An attempt was made to perform a C-axis movement with the C-axis being clamped.
Cause
Unclamp the C-axis.

Action
d .
ve
1252 —— ( , , )
s er
re
Cause ——
ts
gh
Action ——
ri
ll
1253 AXIS MOVE INH. (ATC ARM) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
.A
When the ATC arm was not in its reference position, an attempt was made to perform a Z-axis movement into the ATC
N
Cause area.
O
TI
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1254 —— ( , , )
R
o.
Cause
N
——
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Action ——
Se
A
IM
1255 AXIS MOVE INH. (Z AXIS ATC AREA) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

An attempt was made to perform an X- or Y-axis movement with the Z-axis position within the ATC area.
K
Cause
ZA
A
Do not give any command of axis movement in an XY-plane the Z-axis position of which is within the ATC area.
M
Action
YA
1256 AXIS MOVE INH. (SP SYNCHRO.) ( , , ) A K O Yellow

3
01
An attempt was made to perform an independent W-axis movement with the turning spindles being set in the synchronized
Cause operation mode.
)2
(c
Cancel the synchronized operation mode beforehand.

Action
ht
ig
1257 AXIS MOVE INH. (AXIS SYNCHRO.) ( , , ) B K P Yellow

yr
op
The Y-axis movement command was issued during balance cutting.

Cause
C

Action
1258 TURRET ROT.INH. (TURRET UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow

The turret rotate command was issued with the turret unclamped.
Cause
Clamp the turret.

Action
3-65
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1259 TURRET ROT.INHIBIT(AXIS POS.NG) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
A turret rotation command was given manually while the X2-axis is not located at the zero point.
Cause
Move the X2-axis to the zero point.

Action
1260 TURRET ROT.INHIBIT(DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

When the machine setup switch was set to “O” (OFF), a turret rotation command was given with the front door open.
Cause
Set the machine setup switch to “I” (ON) or close the front door.
Action
.
d
ve
1261 TURRET ROT.INHIBIT(TR SELECT) ( , , ) A L O White
ser
Manual turret rotation has been attempted while the upper turret is selected.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Select the lower turret.
Action
ri
ll
1262 TOOL EYE EXT.INH.(AXIS POS.NG) ( , , ) A, B L O Yellow
.A
A lower-turret TOOL EYE extend command was given while the W-axis is not located at the zero point.
N
Cause
O
TI
Move the W-axis to the zero point.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1263 TOOL EYE EXT. INH. (SPINDLE RUN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

R
o.
When the turning spindle or the milling spindle was rotating, a TOOL EYE extend command was given.
O
Cause
N
C
al
Stop the turning spindle or the milling spindle.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
1264 TOOL EYE EXT. INH. (TOOL EYE) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

When the TOOL EYE arm was not at its backward end, a TOOL EYE extend command was given.
K
Cause
ZA
A
Return the TOOL EYE arm temporarily to its backward end.

M
Action
YA
1265 TOOL EYE EXT. INH. (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

3
01
A TOOL EYE extend/retract command has been given with the machine setup switch remaining set to “O” (OFF) and the
Cause front door remaining open.
)2
(c
Change the setting of the machine setup switch to “I” (ON). Or close the front door.
Action
ht
ig
1266 TOOL EYE EXT.INH. (GL) ( , , ) A, B L S Yellow

yr
op
The TOOL EYE extend command was issued when the GL was in the machine.
Cause
C
Retract the GL out of the machine.

Action
1267 B AXIS ROT. INHIBIT (SPINDLE RUN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

When the spindle or the milling spindle was rotating, a B-axis rotate command was entered.
Cause
Stop the spindle or the milling spindle.

Action
3-66
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1268 B AXIS ROT. INHIBIT (AXIS POS. NG) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
When the X-axis was not in its zero point, a B-axis rotate command was entered.
Cause
Move the X-axis to its zero point.

Action
1269 B AXIS ROT. INHIBIT (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

A command for B-axis movement was given when the machine setup switch was set to “O” (OFF) and the front door was
Cause open.

Action
.
d
ve
1270 B AXIS ROT.INHIBIT (ATC ARM) ( , , ) A L S Yellow
ser
The B-axis rotate switch was pressed with the ATC arm not in the reference position.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Move the ATC arm to the reference position.
Action
ri
ll
1271 B AXIS ROT. INH. (TOOL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow
.A
A command for B-axis movement was given with the milling spindle in tool unclamping state.
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1272 B AXIS ROT.INHIBIT(TR SELECT) ( , , ) A L O White

R
o.
A B-axis rotation command of the milling spindle was given manually with the lower turret selected.
O
Cause
N
C
al
Select the upper turret.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
1273 —— ( , , )
K
Cause ——
ZA
A
M
Action ——
YA
1274 TAIL MOVE INHIBIT (SPINDLE RUN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

3
01
When the spindle was rotating, a tailstock movement command was entered.
Cause
)2
(c
Stop the spindle.

Action
ht
ig
1275 TAIL MOVE INHIBIT (MILL SP. RUN) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

yr
op
When the milling spindle was rotating, a tailstock movement command was entered.
Cause
C
Stop the milling spindle.

Action
1276 TAIL MOVE INH. (AXIS MOVE) ( , , ) A, B K S Yellow

A W-axis move command was issued while another axis was moving.
Cause
Issue the W-axis move command in an independent block.

Action
3-67
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1277 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
1278 TAIL MOVE INH. (PARTS CATCHER) ( , , ) A, B K S Yellow

A W-axis move command in the negative direction was issued with the parts catcher extended.
Cause
Return the parts catcher.

Action
d .
ve
1279 —— ( , , )
ser
Cause ——
re
ts
gh
Action ——
ri
1280 START ERROR (W AXIS POS. MALF.) ( , , ) A K O Yellow
ll
.A
Starting automatic operation has been attempted without W-axis positioning at the zero point.
Cause
N
O
TI
Perform return to the zero point for the W-axis beforehand.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
1281 —— ( , , )
29
R
o.
Cause ——
O
N
C
al
Action ——
ri
ZA
Se
1282 START ERROR (3D MODEL) ( , , ) A K O Yellow

IM
Starting automatic operation has been attempted before completion of internal processing for updating the 3D models to be
Cause
K
used for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS).

ZA
Wait for the internal processing to be completed.

A
Action
M
YA
1283 —— ( , , )
3
01
Cause ——
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
ig
1284 —— ( , , )
yr
op
Cause ——
C
Action ——
1285 COND. MISSING (ATC ARM POSITION) ( , , ) A, B K O Yellow

When the ATC arm was not in its reference position, an attempt was made to move the tool shifter.
Cause

Action
3-68
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1286 COND.MISSING (MILL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow
The M132 (milling spindle-through air) command was issued with the milling spindle unclamped.
Cause

Action
1287 COND.MISSING (SET UP SWITCH) ( , , ) A L S Yellow

The door unlock key was pressed when the machine setup switch was set to “O” (OFF), while the GL is in automatic
Cause operation.
Set the machine setup switch to “I” (ON), and place the GL in the feed hold state, and then open the front door.
Action
d .
ve
1288 BAR-FEEDER CONTROLLER MALF. ( , , ) G J O Red
er
An alarm signal is input from the bar feeder while the bar feeder is enabled.
s
Cause
re
ts
Check the bar feeder.
gh
Action
ri
( , , )
ll
.A
Cause
N
O
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
PO
1292 HAND OPEN ERR.(MILL UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow

29
The hand open command was issued with the milling spindle unclamped.
R
o.
Cause
O
Or the milling spindle clamp command was issued with the hand open.
N
Clamp the milling spindle.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
1293 HAND AIR PRESS.ERR. ( , , ) F K O Red

IM
The pressure switch is not turned ON when the time set for parameter TIM55 has elapsed after the hand open/close
Cause command was issued.
K
ZA
The air circuit or pressure switch may be faulty.

Action
A
Check the primary air, and if there is no problem, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
M
YA
1294 ATC INHIBIT (B-AXIS POSITION) ( , , ) B K P Yellow

When using special ATC pattern “B-axis rotation at the specified position in the index unit”, cycle start was attempted while
3
Cause the B-axis was not at the zero point at the first ATC operation during automatic operation.
01
)2
Start automatic operation with the B-axis in the zero point.

Action
(c
ht
1295 TOOL MISSCLAMP SNS. ALARM ( , , ) F K O Red

ig
yr
The milling spindle tool mis-clamping sensor has not turned on within a predetermined time after the issue of a milling
Cause spindle tool clamp command.
op
C
Check the milling spindle tool mis-clamping sensor.

Action
Address: X1709
3-69
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1296 TOOL CLAMP ERR (CUTTING I.L.) ( , , ) F K O Yellow
The mis-clamping sensor is not turned ON within a preset period after the issuance of the milling spindle tool clamp
command.
Cause This alarm occurs at the same time with alarm 1295 TOOL MISSCLAMP SNS. ALARM. This alarm is retained until the tool
is unclamped once.
Cutting feed is prohibited while this alarm is occurring.
This alarm will be reset when the tool is unclamped. Check the spindle tool mis-clamping sensor.
Action
1297 ATC INHIBIT(HAND CLOSE) ( , , ) A, B K P Red

An ATC command was issued with the hand closed.
Cause
d .
(When the hand is closed, a workpiece may be held in the hand and therefore the ATC operation is prohibited.)
ve
Open the hand.
er
Action
s
re
1298 —— ( , , )
ts
gh
Cause ——
ri
ll
.A
Action ——
N
1299 AUTO DOOR CONTROLLER MALFUNCTIO ( , , ) C K N Red
O
TI
Auto door drive servo driver alarm has occurred.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO

29
Action
R
o.
O
N
1300 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL DATA ( , , ) B K - Blue

C
al
When the data change check function is valid, the tool data with changes has been called.
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
This alarm will be reset by pressing the cycle start button. (Be sure to check that there is no problem in tool data
IM
Action beforehand.)
K
1301 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL OFFSET ( , , ) B K - Blue

ZA
When the data change check function is valid, the tool offset data with changes has been called.
A
Cause
M
YA
This alarm will be reset by pressing the cycle start button. (Be sure to check that there is no problem in tool offset data
Action beforehand.)
3
01
1302 RAPID OVERRIDE LIMIT ( , , ) B L - Blue

)2
This alarm occurs after alarm 1300 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL DATA or 1301 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL OFFSET
(c
Cause has been reset. While this alarm is occurring, the override value is clamped to the value set for parameter F145.
ht
When the cutting speed is specified, the alarm will be cleared.

ig
Action
yr
op
1303 —— ( , , )
C
Cause ——
Action ——
1304 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-70
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1305 TOOL LIFE OVER ( , , ) F J O Red
The tool has been used for a period of time longer than its serviceable life.
Cause
Replace the blade of the tool for which the alarm was raised.
Action
1306 TOOL BREAKAGE ( , , ) F J O Red

A broken tool was detected.
Cause
Replace the broken tool.

Action
d .
ve
1307 TPS POINT LIMIT EXCEED ( , , ) B L S Yellow
ser
The maximum number of TPS storage times has been exceeded.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Review the number of TPS storage times.
Action
ri
ll
1308 —— ( , , )
.A
N
Cause ——
O
TI
60
Action —— A
R
40
PO
1309 —— ( , , )
29
R
o.
Cause ——
N
C
al
Action
ri
——
ZA
Se
1310 AXIS MOVE INH. (B AXIS ANGLE) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow

IM
A GL retraction position move command was given to the milling spindle with the B-axis at an angle other than 0-deg.
Cause
K
ZA
Turn the B-axis to the 0-deg. position.

A
Action
M
YA
1311 GL DOOR OP/CL INH (FRONT DOOR) ( , , ) A K P Yellow

3
A top door/side door open/close command was issued with the front door open.
01
Cause
)2

(c
Action
ht
ig
1312 SIDE DOOR OP/CL INH (AXIS POS.) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow

yr
A side door open/close command was given with the milling spindle in the GL wait position or with the Z-axis not in the
op
Cause spindle 1 side with respect to the zero point.

C
Move the milling spindle to the GL wait position or move the Z-axis to the zero point.
Action
1313 TOP DOOR OP/CL INH (SIDE DOOR) ( , , ) A K P Yellow

A top door open command was given with the side door closed.
Cause
Open the side door before opening the top door.

Action
3-71
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1314 SIDE DOOR OP/CL INH (TOP DOOR) ( , , ) A K P Yellow
A side door close command was given with the top door open.
Cause
Close the top door before closing the side door.

Action
( , , )
Cause
Action
.d
ve
1318 TOP DOOR SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red
ser
The top door opened position sensor is malfunctioning or the top door is not fully opened.
re
Cause
The top door closed position sensor is malfunctioning or the top door is not fully closed.
ts
gh
Check the top door opened/closed position sensor.
Action
ri
ll
1319 SIDE DOOR SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red
.A
The side door opened position sensor is malfunctioning or the side door is not fully opened.
N
Cause
The side door closed position sensor is malfunctioning or the side door is not fully closed.
O
TI
Check the side door opened/closed position sensor.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
( , , )
29
R
o.
Cause
N
C
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
1325 COOLANT CHILLER UNIT MALF. ( , , ) G J O Red

IM
Something is wrong with the coolant chiller unit.

Cause
K
ZA
Check the coolant chiller unit.

A
Action
M
Address: X140C
YA
1326 —— ( , , )
3
01
Cause ——
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
ig
1327 —— ( , , )
yr
op
Cause ——
C
Action ——
1328 ATC RECOVERY MODE SELECTED ( , , ) - L - White

This alarm message is displayed when the ATC recovery mode is selected.
Cause
This alarm message is used for display only.

Action
This alarm will automatically be cleared when the recovery mode is canceled.
3-72
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1329 RECOVERY MODE IMPOSSIBLE. ( , , ) A L P, S Yellow
[ATC RECOVERY MODE] was tapped while ATC recovery mode selection was not possible.
Cause
Tap [ATC RECOVERY MODE] while ATC recovery mode selection is possible.
Action
( , , )
Cause
Action
.
d
ve
er
1334 PROGRAM DATA ILLEGAL ( , , ) B H P Red
s
A rapid feed command was issued during preparation for pressing (after execution of M508).
re
Cause
ts
gh
Action
ri
ll
( , , )
.A
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1341 PARTS CATCHER INH. (AXIS POS.NG) ( , , ) A, B K S Yellow

R
o.
A parts catcher extend/retract command was issued while the W-axis was not at the zero point.
O
N
A parts catcher extend/retract command was issued while the X2-axis was not at the zero point.
C
Cause
al
A parts catcher extend/retract command was issued while the Z2-axis was in the negative side with respect to the +70 mm
ri
ZA
(2.76 in) position.

Se
Check the parts catcher extend/retract condition.

A
Action
IM
K
1342 PARTS CATCHER INH. (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A K S Yellow

ZA
A parts catcher extend/retract command was issued while the front door was not closed.
Cause
A
M
Issue a parts catcher extend/retract command with the front door closed.
YA
Action
3
01
1343 PARTS CATCHER INH. (L-TR No.) ( , , ) A, B K S Yellow

)2
A parts catcher extend/retract command was issued while tool No. 1 was not indexed on the lower turret.
Cause
(c
ht
Issue the parts catcher extend/retract command with tool No. 1 indexed on the lower turret.
Action
ig
yr
op
1344 —— ( , , )
C
Cause ——
Action ——
1345 TURRET ROT.INH. (PARTS CATCHER) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow

A turret rotation command (tool change command) was issued with the parts catcher extended.
Cause
Return the parts catcher.

Action
3-73
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
( , , )
Cause
Action
1350 SAFETY EDGE DETECTION ( , , ) A K O Red

The edge sensor is activated while the auto door is being closed.
Cause
Do not touch the edge sensor while the auto door is being closed.
.
Action
d
Address: X5
ve
er
1351 AUTO DOOR TIME OVER ( , , ) F K P Yellow
s
re
The auto door did not reach the open or close end position when the time set for parameter TIM65 has elapsed after the
Cause auto door open/close command was given.
ts
gh
Check if the auto door motion is hindered due to chips.
Action
ri
ll
.A
1352 —— ( , , )
N
O
Cause ——
TI
60
A
R
40
Action ——
PO
29
1353 AUTOMATIC DOOR SPEED ABNOMALY ( , , ) C H P Red

R
o.
O
N
The auto door open/close speed reached an abnormal speed after the auto door open/close command was given.
C
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA

Se
Action
A
IM
1354 DOOR UNLOCK SWITCH MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K P Yellow

K
The door unlock state was not confirmed within 0.5 seconds after the door unlock command was given for auto door open
ZA
Cause command.
A
M
Check the door lock unit.

YA
Action
3
1355 AUTO DOOR OP INH (SPINDLE RUN) ( , , ) A, B K P Yellow

01
)2
An auto door open command was issued while the milling spindle or turning spindle is rotating.
Cause
(c
ht
Stop all spindles.

Action
ig
yr
op
( , , )
C
Cause
Action
3-74
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1360 NO SFT/CRR MOVE (ATC ARM POS.) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
When the ATC arm was not in its reference position, a command for moving the tool shifter or carrier was given.
Cause

Action
1361 NO POCKET LD (NO PCT IN MAG.) ( , , ) A K O Yellow

An attempt was made to take out a pocket from the magazine by the shifter when there was no pocket in the indexed
position of the magazine.
Cause Manual: A command was given for clamping the pocket in the tool shifter with the shifter being on the magazine side.
Automatic: A command was given for moving the tool shifter to the magazine side with the shifter being in pocket un-
.
clamping state.
d
ve
Index the desired magazine position with a pocket beforehand.
er
Action Check the pocket detection sensor when actually a pocket is present in the magazine position currently indexed.
s
re
ts
1362 NO POCKET ULD (PCT IN MAG.) ( , , ) A K O Yellow
gh
An attempt was made to return a pocket to the magazine by the shifter when there was another pocket in the indexed
ri
Cause position of the magazine.
ll
.A
Index the desired magazine position without a pocket beforehand.
N
Action Check the pocket detection sensor when actually no pocket is present in the magazine position currently indexed.
O
TI
60
1363 NO POCKET LD (PCT IN MAG.) ( , , A ) A K O Yellow

R
40
In the flow of automatic operation the state of detecting a pocket in the indexed magazine position was not appropriately
PO
Cause
29
turned off as a result of taking a pocket out of the magazine.

R
o.
Check the pocket detection sensor when actually no pocket is present in the magazine position currently indexed.
N
Action
C

al
K
ri
ZA
1364 NO POCKET ULD (NO PCT IN MAG.) ( , , ) A K O Yellow

Se
In the flow of automatic operation the state of detecting a pocket in the indexed magazine position was not appropriately
Cause
IM
turned on as a result of returning a pocket to the magazine.

K
Check the pocket detection sensor when actually a pocket is present in the magazine position currently indexed.
Action
ZA

A
1365 NO POCKET ULD (MAG. PCT CLAMP) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

M
YA
In manual mode of operation an attempt was made to move the tool shifter to the magazine side with the indexed magazine
Cause position being in pocket clamping state.
3
01
Set the magazine position concerned to pocket unclamping state.

Action
)2
(c
1366 NO POCKET ULD (MAG. POS.) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

ht
In manual mode of operation an attempt was made to move the tool shifter to the magazine side before completion of
ig
Cause magazine indexing operation.

yr
op
Do not move the tool shifter till completion of magazine indexing operation.
Action
C
1367 NO SHIFTER MOVE (PCT CL COND.) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

In manual mode of operation an attempt was made to move the tool shifter to the ATC side with both the indexed magazine
Cause position and the shifter being in pocket clamping state.
Set either the magazine position or the tool shifter to pocket unclamping state.
Action
3-75
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1368 NO TOOL SELECT (SFT POS ERR) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
In manual mode of operation an attempt was made to index the magazine with the tool shifter remaining on the magazine
Cause side.
Move the tool shifter to the ATC side.

Action
1369 NO TOOL SELECT (MAG. UNCLAMP) ( , , ) A L O Yellow

In manual mode of operation an attempt was made to index the magazine with the indexed magazine position being in
Cause pocket unclamping state.
Set the magazine position to pocket clamping state.

Action
d .
ve
1370 NO TOOL CHANGE (SFT NO PCT) ( , , ) A L O Yellow
s er
A command for rotating the ATC arm was given without the tool shifter being in pocket clamping state.
re
Cause
ts
gh
Establish a pocket clamping state for the tool shifter.
Action
ri
ll
( , , )
.A
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
1389 FREEZE ALARM (COOLANT CHILLER) ( , , ) G L Q Yellow

R
o.
Freezing has occurred to the coolant chiller unit.

O
Cause
N
C
al
Check the coolant chiller unit.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
Address: X140D
A
IM
1390 —— ( , , )
K
Cause ——
ZA
A
Action
M
——
YA
1391 —— ( , , )
3
01
Cause ——
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
ig
yr
1392 SPINDLE CONDITION MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

op
The temperature or vibration threshold level of the milling spindle has been exceeded for 10 seconds in succession.
Cause
C
Perform the conditioning check once again.

Action
( , , )
Cause
Action
3-76
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
3-2-5 No. 400 - No. 499, No. 1400 - No. 1499 (CNC screen operation error)

No. Message Display
400 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
401 ILLEGAL FORMAT ( , , ) A L S Blue

The format of the input data is not an available one.
Cause
Example : Negative data has been input to an item that rejects negative data input.
d .
Tap the cancel key and then input correct data.
ve
Action
s er
re
402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT ( , , ) A L S Blue
1. The work number of a display inhibiting program was specified.
ts
Cause
gh
2. The numeric value that has been input is out of the allowable range.
ri
1. The operation concerned cannot be performed for the program of display inhibition (Program management function).
Action
ll
2. Tap the cancel key and then input correct data.
.A
403 PROGRAM TOO LARGE ( , , ) A L S Blue
N
O
The limit of 2000 lines per program has been exceeded.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40
Recreate the program so that it consists of 2000 lines or less.

Action
PO
29
R
o.
404 MEMORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue

O
N
1. Additional creation of a machining program is no longer possible since the memory has already been filled up to its
al
machining-program data storage capacity.

K
ri
ZA
2. Additional preparation of process control data is no longer possible since 100 sets of such data have already been
Se
Cause
stored.
A
IM
3. Additional preparation of program layout data is no longer possible since 4000 sets of such data have already been
stored.
K
Make an available storage area by either erasing an unnecessary machining program from the memory or saving a
ZA
Action machining program onto an external storage, and then create a new machining program.
A
M
405 PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

YA
An attempt has been made to select a program whose work number has not been registered.
Cause
An attempt was made to select the work number marked with [!] in the project display.
3
01
Select a program whose work number has been registered.

)2
Action
(c
406 MEMORY PROTECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

ht
1. Inhibiting operation (editing, erasing, renumber of work number and entry of names) has been performed for the
ig
edit-inhibiting program.
yr
Cause 2. The program protect function is set valid.

op
3. An attempt has been made to carry out “TOOL NAME ORDER” operation on the TOOL DATA display while a tool
C
remains set in the spindle.

1. The operation concerned cannot be performed for the edit-inhibiting program (program management function).
Action 2. Cancel the program protect function.
3. Remove the tool from the spindle, and then carry out the operation once again.
3-77
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue
The number or character string that has been designated does not exist in the program.
Cause
Designate an existent number or character string.

Action
408 PROGRAM ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

The memory contents in the machining-program data storage area have been destroyed.
Cause
Delete the corresponding program.

Action
.d
ve
409 ILLEGAL INSERTION ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
Program data insertion is not possible.
Cause
s
re
It is not possible to insert data before the common unit.
ts
Action
gh
ri
410 ILLEGAL DELETION ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
Program deletion is not possible.
.A
Cause
 An attempt has been made to erase the common unit during editing of the MAZATROL program.
N
O
It is not possible to delete the common unit.
Action
TI
 Edit the program only after moving the cursor to the position where the data exists.
60
A
R
411 POWER OFF DURING PROGRAM EDIT ( , , ) A L S Blue
40
PO
29
A portion of the program may have been destroyed because power has been turned off during program editing.
Cause
R
o.
O
N
Check the corresponding program for incorrect data, and correct the program data if an error(s) exists in it.
C
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
412 SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue

Se
The number of repeats of subprogram nesting has exceeded nine times.

IM
Cause
K
Correct the program so that the total number of repeats of subprogram nesting becomes nine or less.
ZA
Action
A
413 MAX. No. OF REGIST PROG EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue

M
YA
The program registration has exceeded its maximum value available (Standard: 256 programs).
Cause
3
01
Reduce the total number of registered programs by deleting unnecessary programs or moving them to the backup area or
Action by saving unnecessary programs in an external storage unit and then deleting them.
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-78
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
414 AUTO CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE (No., , ) A L S Blue
Automatic determination of the data failed due to an error.
No. Cause
- Automatic determination error
1 Automatic calculation of C-SP, FR or DEP-1 failed because the data (related to tool data) used for
calculation are not set.
2 Automatic calculation of C-SP, FR or DEP-1 failed because the data (related to programs) used for
3 (1) Automatic calculation of C-SP, FR or DEP-1 failed because a tool for which cutting conditions cannot
be calculated automatically (special tap, special cutter, chip removal, touch sensor, ball end mill,
special threading, special turning) is selected.
d .
Cause (2) Automatic calculation of “C-SP”, “FR” or “DEP-1” failed because a unit for which cutting conditions
ve
cannot be calculated automatically (mill-turning unit, turning-drilling unit with a drilling tool (mill
er
spindle)) is selected.
s
re
4 Automatic calculation of C-SP or FR failed during automatic calculation of C-SP, FR and DEP-1 because
the data (related to parameters) used for calculation are not set.
ts
5 Automatic calculation of C-SP, FR or DEP-1 failed because the data (related to the tool file) used for
gh
ri
6 Automatic calculation of C-SP or FR failed during automatic calculation of C-SP, FR and DEP-1 because
ll
the data (related to CUTTING CONDITION display) used for calculation are not set.
.A
99 The result of calculation exceeded the setting range permitted in the program during automatic calculation
N
of C-SP, FR and DEP-1.
O
TI
60
Action
Review the setting data. A
R
40
PO
29
415 MIS-SET G CODE ( , , ) B L S Blue

R
o.
A G-code not covered by the specifications has been designated.

O
N
Cause
C
al
Check and correct the G-code addresses within the program.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

Tools cannot be automatically developed because of errors of the machining-unit data.
K
Cause
ZA
A
Check and correct the machining-unit data.

Action
M
YA
417 EDITING PROHIBITED ( , , ) A L S Blue

3
1. An attempt has been made to modify a program whose editing is prohibited.

01
Cause 2. An attempt has been made to edit an EIA program whose size is 32 MB or larger on the PROGRAM display or EIA
)2
MONITOR display.
(c
1. Modify the data only after canceling the parameter setting for prohibition of editing.
ht
Action 2. EIA programs with a size of 32 MB or larger cannot be edited on the NC unit. Therefore, they need to be edited
ig
outside the NC unit.

yr
418 EIA/ISO CONVERTING ( , , ) A L S Blue

op
During EIA/ISO conversion, an attempt has been made to perform erasure, work number change or editing of the
C
Cause conversion source program. Or an attempt has been made to select the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
During EIA/ISO conversion, erasure, work number change or editing of the conversion source program cannot be done.
Action The TOOL PATH CHECK display cannot be selected.
3-79
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
419 AUTO TAP PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) A L S Blue
1. The pitch or other data cannot be automatically set because of incorrectness of the tap nominal diameter in the
tapping-unit data.
Cause
2. Although the text file is referred to for the pipe tap auto-setting (D95 bit 0 = 1), the auto-setting function cannot be
executed since the auto-setting text file (Pipescdt. txt) is incorrect or contains no data.
1. Check and correct the tapping-unit data and tapping-tool sequence data of the program.
Action
2. Check and correct the auto-setting text file (Pipescdt. txt).
420 SAME DATA EXISTS ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to input the same data as that which has already been registered.
1. Pocket number in the TOOL LAYOUT display.
.
2. Machining-program number (changed)
d
Cause
ve
3. Machining priority number
er
4. Tool model name
s
re
5. Tool data suffix
Check and correct the data settings.
ts
gh
Action In case 4, this alarm indicates that the tool model name the operator has attempted registering is already present under the
same tool type (such as: drill, end mill, turning tool, or grooving tool) in other systems. Specify another tool model name.
ri
ll
421 DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue
.A
An attempt has been made to designate the data that does not exist.
Cause
N
O
TI
Check whether the designated data exists.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
422 MEMORY PROTECT (I/O BUSY) ( , , ) A L S Blue

29
An attempt has been made to edit or input the machining program, tool data, etc. during I/O operation.
R
o.
Cause
O
N
C
al
Wait until the I/O operation is completed, and then repeat the editing or input operation from the beginning.
K
Action
ri
ZA
Se
423 MAX NUMBER OF TOOLS EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue

IM
During tool layout, the number of tools used in the designated program has exceeded the maximum available number.
Cause
K
ZA
Check and correct the corresponding machining program so that the maximum available number of tools is not exceeded.
Action
A
M
YA
424 ALL POCKET NUMBERS NOT ASSIGNED ( , , ) A L S Blue

It is not possible to finish the tool layout operation because the pocket number has not yet been assigned to all the required
3
Cause tools.
01
)2
Assign the pocket number(s) and then finish the tool layout operation.
Action
(c
ht
425 DATA MISSING ( , , ) A L S Blue

ig
Processing is not possible because of lack of data.

yr
1. Saving or loading has been attempted without designating any data (such as work numbers, etc.) on the DATA I/O
op
Cause
display.
C
2. The data to be input for restart operation is wanting.

Input data correctly.
Action
426 PROGRAM DATA MISSING ( , , ) A L S Blue

The tool sequence data cannot be automatically developed because of partial lack of the machining-unit data.
Cause
Fill up all the machining-unit data items with data.

Action
3-80
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
427 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO MODE) ( , , ) A L S Blue
An attempt has been made to input unallowable data in the automatic operation mode.
Cause
Change the mode over to the manual operation mode, and then input the data.
Action
428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to input unallowable data on a display (such as the TOOL DATA display) during automatic
Cause operation.
Input allowable data only after placing the NC unit in its reset state or after changing the current mode over to another
Action mode.
d .
ve
429 CANNOT PERFORM MEASUREMENT ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
The following conditions were not satisfied:
s
re
Coordinate measurement
ts
1. Automatic operation must not be in progress.
gh
Cause 2. The spindle must have a tool mounted on it.
ri
3. The tool data of the tool mounted on the spindle must have already been input.
ll
Tool-length measurement
.A
1. Automatic operation must not be in progress.
N
Set the specified conditions and then make the measurement.
O
Action
TI
60
430 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED ( , , A ) A L S Blue

R
40
During creation of a machining program, an attempt has been made to input a tool name not available for the particular
PO
29
Cause program unit, in the tool sequence.

R
o.
Designate a correct tool name.

N
Action
C
al
K
ri
ZA
431 ILLEGAL PALLET No. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Se
A nonexistent pallet number has been designated.

A
Cause
IM
Designate a correct pallet number.

K
Action
ZA
A
432 ILLEGAL TOOL No. ( , , ) A L S Blue

M
A nonexistent tool number has been designated.

YA
Cause
3
Designate a correct tool number.

01
Action
)2
(c
433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS ( , , ) A L S Blue

ht
The number of the machining program that has been designated for program reading from an external unit already exists
Cause
ig
within the NC memory.

yr
Check the number of the machining program.

op
Action
C
434 NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE ( , , ) A L S Blue

The milling tools (face-mills, end-mills, chamfering cutters, and ball end-mills) that have been designated on the machining
Cause program include a one(s) that is not yet registered in the TOOL FILE display.
Register the corresponding tools in the TOOL FILE display.

Action
3-81
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
435 PROGRAM CHECK NOT ALLOWED ( , , )
An attempt has been made to restart on the TOOL PATH display during checking of the tool path.
Cause
Interrupt the tool path checking operation before restarting.

Action
436 UNREGISTERED TNo. ( , , ) A L S Blue

An unmeasurable tool number has been designated in the automatic tool-length (diameter) measurement mode.
Cause
Designate a measurable tool number.

Action
d .
ve
437 NO NOM- DATA IN PROGRAM ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
It has been found during tool layout that there is a tool without a nominal diameter in the designated program.
s
Cause
re
ts
Check if nominal diameters have been assigned to all tools registered in the designated program.
gh
Action
ri
438 END UNIT NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
The end unit is not included in the machining program.
Cause
N
O
Create the end unit at the end of the program.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue

PO
29
A MAZATROL program has been designated for copying purposes during EIA/ISO program editing.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
No MAZATROL programs can be designated for copying purposes during EIA/ISO program editing.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
440 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue

A
IM
1. The machining program that has been designated on the TOOL LAYOUT, PROCESS CONTROL or SET UP
RECORD display is an EIA/ISO program.
K
Cause 2. An EIA/ISO program has been designated for copying purposes during MAZATROL program editing.
ZA
3. An EIA/ISO program has been designated as the source program of EIA/ISO conversion.
A
4. An EIA/ISO program has been designated when writing coordinate values on the MEASURE display.
M
YA
No EIA/ISO programs can be designated for operation on the TOOL LAYOUT, PROCESS CONTROL, SET UP RECORD
Action or MEASURE display or during EIA/ISO conversion or MAZATROL program editing.
3
01
441 UNREGISTERED HEAD DATA ( , , ) B L S Blue

)2
The head number that has been designated during MDI-MMS setting does not exist in the head data.
Cause
(c
ht
Review the designated head number.

ig
Action
yr
op
442 DATA RENEWAL NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) A L S Blue

C
No updates can be made to the machining program.

Cause
This message may also be displayed when the NC unit is busy processing data.
Action
Tap the alarm clear button and then carry out the operation once again.
443 HELP IS NOT AVAILABLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

No help display is prepared for the line on which the cursor is placed.
Cause
Refer to the Programming Manual (MAZATROL Program).

Action
3-82
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
444 EDITING PROHIBITED AREA ( , , ) A L S Blue
During automatic operation based on the EIA MONITOR display, an attempt has been made to move the cursor to the
Cause program section whose editing was prohibited.
The cursor cannot be moved to the area where editing is prohibited.

Action
445 ILLEGAL UNIT ( , , ) B L S Blue

An attempt has been made to set tool layout data in a MAZATROL program containing an illegal unit(s).
Cause
Review the program.

Action
d .
ve
446 RESTART TIMES EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
The block to be searched for at the time of restart of the EIA/ISO program does exist, but the designated number of times of
s
Cause reappearance of the block is too large.
re
ts
Check the number of times of reappearance of the block.
Action
gh
ri
447 PROGRAM ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
A program error(s) has occurred during EIA/ISO restart search.
Cause
N
O
The program being searched for includes an error(s). Perform a tool-path check upon the program contents.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
448 RESTART SEARCH UNFINISHED ( , , ) A I P Blue

PO
29
EIA/ISO restart searching has not been executed.

R
Cause
o.
O
N
Designate the restart position and tap the [EIA/ISO SEARCH] button to search the intended restart position.
al
Action
K
ri
ZA
Se
449 RESTART SEARCH FINISHED ( , , ) A L S Blue

A
IM
An attempt has been made to carry out another search operation when EIA/ISO restart searching had already been
Cause finished.
K
An attempt has been made to change the work number when EIA/ISO restart searching had already been finished.
ZA
Press the RESET key and then carry out the restart operation once again.
Action
A
Before changing the work number, press the RESET key.

M
YA
450 TOUCH SENSOR NOT IN SPINDLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

The spindle did not have a mounted touch sensor when an attempt was made to set MAZATROL coordinate measurement
3
Cause data on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.

01
)2
Mount a touch sensor in the spindle before setting the data.

Action
(c
ht
451 SAME MATERIAL ENTERED ( , , ) B L S Blue

ig
The materials name that has been designated on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT/T.-MAT. display already exists.
yr
Cause
op
C
Designate a new materials name.

Action
452 NO SHAPE DATA IN UNIT ( , , ) A L S Blue

No shape data exists in the program unit that has been designated in an attempt to make a copy of shape data.
Cause
Check the contents of the program unit for which shape copying is to be made.
Action
3-83
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
453 NO SHAPE DATA TO COPY IN UNIT ( , , ) A L S Blue
An attempt has been made to copy shape data whose type is not available for the particular program unit.
Cause
It is not possible to copy shape data of the pallet-changing unit, index unit, or other units that do not have a shape
Action sequence.
454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

Processing not permissible for the current cursor position has been attempted.
Example :
Cause 1. An attempt has been made to carry out a shape copying operation with the cursor on the tool sequence line.
2. The SHAPE CHECK display has been selected on a shape sequence line not actually executed during automatic
d .
operation.
ve
Example :
er
Action 1. No shape data can be copied on the tool sequence line.
s
re
ts
455 SAME PROGRAM No. DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue
gh
The machining program currently being edited has been appointed for the particular program copying operation.
ri
Cause
ll
.A
Copying within the same program is not possible. Check the designated program number.
Action
N
O
TI
456 NO TOOL IN SPINDLE ( , , ) A L S Blue
60
The spindle does not currently have a tool mounted on it. A

R
Cause
40
PO
29
After mounting a tool on the spindle, carry out the particular operation once again.
R
Action
o.
O
N
457 DATA ADDRESS NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

al
K
ri
ZA
During creation of manual program mode unit, data setting has been attempted without addressing.
Se
Cause
A
IM
During creation of the manual program mode unit, designate an address before setting data.
Action
K
ZA
458 INTERFERING TOOL REGISTERED ( , , ) A L S Blue

A
An attempt has been made to register a tool most likely to interfere with an adjacent pocket.
M
Example :
YA
Cause 1. An attempt has been made to register tool data or tool change data on the TOOL DATA display.
3
2. An attempt has been made to set such a tool on the TOOL LAYOUT display that is likely to interfere with an adjacent
01
pocket.
)2
Select a pocket that does not cause interference with an adjacent one.
Action
(c
ht
459 DISPLAY PROTECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

ig
yr
1. An attempt has been made to display a program whose display is prohibited.

op
Cause 2. An attempt has been made to display an EIA program whose size is 32 MB or larger on the PROGRAM display, EIA
MONITOR display, or POSITION display.
C
1. Display the program only after canceling the parameter setting for prohibition of display.
Action 2. EIA programs with a size of 32 MB or larger cannot be displayed. Therefore, their contents need to be checked
outside the NC unit.
460 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
3-84
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
461 PRIORITY No. OVERLAP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A L S Blue
The same priority number is assigned to different tools.
Cause
Within one process, the same priority number must not be assigned to different tools.
Action Change the priority number.
462 ILLEGAL PRIORITY NUMBER (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A L S Blue

The priority numbering order within a unit is not correct.
Cause
The machining order within one unit has been reversed by the incorrect priority numbering.
Action Change the priority numbers.
d .
ve
463 PRIORITY No. OVERFLOW ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
A priority number exceeding 99 has occurred because an attempt has been made to move a priority number(s) on the
s
Cause PROGRAM LAYOUT display.
re
ts
Set priority numbers in the correct order, and then move the desired priority number(s).
gh
Action
ri
464 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
An address not covered by the specifications has been designated during input of subprogram unit addresses on the
Cause PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.
N
O
Check and correct the address.
TI
Action
60
Check the specifications. A

R
40
465 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

PO
29
Although an attempt has been made to draw a workpiece shape using the selected EIA/ISO program, shape data is not
R
Cause present in that program.

o.
O
N
Review the program.

al
Action If the program is that which has been obtained by EIA/ISO conversion output, change the setting of the bit 0 of parameter
ri
ZA
F89 to 1 and then carry out the converting operation once again.
Se
466 INCORRECT EIA SHAPE DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

IM
Although an attempt has been made to draw a workpiece shape using the selected EIA/ISO program, the corresponding
Cause
K
shape data is not correct.

ZA
Review the program.

A
Action
M
YA
467 —— ( , , )
3
Cause ——
01
)2
(c
Action ——
ht
468 MAINTENANCE CHECK WARNING ( , , ) B L S Blue

ig
yr
The target time of the items which had been set on the MAINTENANCE CHECK display has been exceeded.
Cause
op
C
Carry out periodic checks, and then after completion of the checks, reset the current time of the check items of the
Action MAINTENANCE CHECK display to zero (0).
469 TPC DATA EDIT IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

The TPC data setting is not possible for the designated unit.
Cause
Check the program.

Action
3-85
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
470 ILLEGAL TPC DATA ( , , ) B L S Blue
The TPC data for the unit is not correct.
Cause
After setting the TPC data, the unit machining mode has been changed.
Delete the TPC data and set correct TPC data once again whenever required.
Action
471 TPC DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

While the cursor was on a line of unit not containing TPC data on the display, [TPC] was tapped during the program list
Cause mode.
Tap [TPC] after shifting to the programming mode.

Action
d .
ve
472 CALCULATION ERROR ( , , ) B L S Blue
er
1. The calculation expressions displayed in the desk calculator window includes expressions that result in a calculation
s
failure.
re
Cause
2. Calculating tool lengths A and B has been attempted in spite of tool nose position storage not being completed.
ts
gh
1. Review the calculation expressions, and correct nonexecutable sections, such as those which may include division by
Action 0 or result in a negative number in SQRT.
ri
2. Store the position of the tool nose.
ll
.A
473 FINAL POINT DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) B L S Blue
N
Although the end-point data of the preceding line was not yet set in the BAR or CPY unit, [NEXT] was tapped.
O
Cause
TI
60
A
Tap [NEXT] after setting the end-point data of the preceding line.
R
40
Action
PO
29
474 NO PROGRAM DISPLAY (TAPE MODE) ( , , ) A L S Blue

o.
O
N
1. During tape operation mode, an attempt has been made to select the EIA MONITOR display.
C
Cause
al
2. An attempt has been made to change the operation mode to tape operation mode when the EIA MONITOR display is
K
ri
selected.
ZA
Se
1. During tape operation mode, programs cannot be displayed on the EIA MONITOR display.
A
Action
IM
2. Select a display other than the EIA MONITOR display before changing the operation mode to tape operation mode.
475 NO EIA/ISO OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

K
ZA
An attempt has been made to use an EIA/ISO-option related function in spite of the absence of an EIA/ISO option.
Cause
A
M
An EIA/ISO-option related function cannot be used since the system has no EIA/ISO option.
YA
Action
3
476 NO OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

01
An attempt has been made to use an optional function in spite of the absence of that option.
)2
Cause
(c
This function cannot be used since the system does not have the option for the function.
ht
Action
ig
yr
477 DESCRIPTION IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) B L S Blue

op
The maximum memory capacity for drawing tool paths has been consumed in the 3D mode of the TOOL PATH CHECK or
Cause
C
TRACE display.
Action ——
478 MEMORY PROTECT (MEASURING) ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to copy the coordinates data in WRITE DATA column of the MEASURE display into the
Cause designated position, while measurement using the MEASURE display is in progress.
Copy the coordinates data only after the measurement has been completed.
Action
3-86
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
479 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
480 UNIT NOT SELECTED ( No., , ) A L S Red

Items necessary for copying units on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display have not been selected.
No. Cause
Cause 0 The unit to be copied has not been selected.
1 The copy destination has not been selected.
d .
ve
Select necessary items.
er
Action
s
re
481 DIRECTORY NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue
ts
An I/O operation was attempted on a non-existing directory.
gh
Cause
ri
ll
Check whether the specified directory is present.
.A
Action
N
482 —— ( , , )
O
TI
60
Cause —— A
R
40
PO
29
Action ——
R
o.
O
N
483 —— ( , , )
C
al
Cause ——
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
Action ——
K
484 INCORRECT SPINDLE TOOL ( , , ) A L S Blue

ZA
[LENG-OFS TEACH] has been tapped in spite of the fact that a tool not having its “Length Offset Data” item displayed on
Cause
A
the TOOL DATA display (for example, a turning tool) was mounted in the spindle.
M
YA
Check the tool mounted in the spindle.

Action
3
01
485 INCORRECT HEAD INDEX ANGLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

)2
Executing the tool nose position storage function (TEACH) has been attempted when the head index angle displayed in
Cause
(c
TOOL DATA display mode was neither 0°, 90°, nor 180°.
ht
Execute the tool nose position storage function (TEACH) when the head index angle is either 0° 90° or 180°.
ig
Action
yr
op
486 ILLEGAL JAW DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

C
The use of the jaw shape that has been specified for the program results in interference between adjacent jaws as a result
Cause of the SOLID mode PATH CHECK.
Review the jaw data or the workpiece-gripping diameter value.

Action
487 LONG BORING BAR ADAPTER EXISTS (Pocket No, , ) A L S Blue

Assigning a tool other than an inside-diameter turning tool to the magazine pocket holding the adapter for the long boring
Cause bar has been attempted.
Review the pocket number or the type of tool to be assigned.

Action
3-87
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
488 MEMORY PROTECT (MAGAZINE SETUP) ( , , ) A L S Blue
Tool data updating operations (such as editing tool data, completing the layout of tools, or downloading data on the DATA
Cause I/O display) have been attempted during magazine setup.
Perform tool data updating operations after completing the magazine setup operations.
Action
Deselect [MAGAZINE SETUP] relating to visual tool data management.
489 CANNOT SET THREAD POSITION ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt was made to set jaw dimensions without having selected the jaw type (OUT1/IN/OUT2).
Cause
Select the jaw type beforehand.

Action
d .
ve
490 REGISTRATION NUMBER EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
The data registration has exceeded its maximum value available.
s
Cause An attempt was made on the TOOL FILE display to register the ninth data item of workpiece material.
re
ts
Delete unnecessary items to register the desired one.
gh
Action
ri
491 ITEM NOT SETUP ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
Data registration is not yet complete.
Cause
N
O
Check if all the data items are set as required.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
492 CANNOT EDIT 3D DATA ( , , ) B L S Blue

PO
29
Editing the CAD tool model has been attempted.

R
Cause
o.
O
N
The CAD tool model cannot be edited.

al
Action
K
ri
ZA
Se
493 SELECT JAW TYPE ( , , ) A L S Blue

A
Assigning dimensions to jaw data for which a shape has not been specified has been attempted.
IM
Cause
K
Specify some shape before assigning dimensions.

ZA
Action
A
M
494 CANNOT SELECT TNO (NOT MAGAZINE) ( , , ) A L S Blue

YA
Execution of tool selection has been attempted under the selected status of a non-magazine type turret.
Cause
3
01
Select a magazine type of turret before executing tool selection.

)2
Action
(c
495 INCORRECT CAD MODEL DATA (Note, , ) B L S Blue

ht
ig
Registered tool model data contains imperfections (a tool model cannot be drawn with the entered data).
Cause
yr
op
Correct the data in the corresponding section.

C
Note :
 During Parametric model entry ······················The alarm-causing section is displayed.
Action  During rotating/extruding tool model entry ·······Causes are displayed.
11: The entered shape has overlapping elements.
12: The entered shape is clockwise (CW).
13: The line connecting the starting and ending points overlaps
some other element.
3-88
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
496 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
497 HEAD ANGLE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

1. An attempt has been made to storage the tool tip position with the head not in its horizontal machining position (TOOL
DATA or TOOL OFFSET display only).
Cause 2. An attempt has been made to perform MDI-MMS or manual measurement with the head not in its horizontal or vertical
machining position.
<HV>
d .
ve
1. Tool tip position storage (tool length measurement) is possible only with the head in its horizontal machining position.
Action
er
2. MDI-MMS or manual measurement is possible only with the head in its horizontal or vertical machining position.
s
re
498 NO HEAD DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue
Offset data for the selected head is not registered on the HEAD OFFSET display.
ts
Cause
gh
ri
Check if the selected head data is registered on the HEAD OFFSET display.
Action
ll
.A
499 ILLEGAL HEAD TYPE ( , , ) A L S Blue
N
An attempt has been made to perform tool tip position storage on the TOOL DATA or TOOL OFFSET display during use of
O
Cause
TI
the horizontal type of head.
60
A
To perform tool tip position storage for tool length measurement, mount a vertical head or a cover.
R
40
Action
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-89
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1400 SYSTEM ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
An internal trouble has occurred in the system.
Cause
Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing
Action the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses.
1401 FILE OPEN ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Trouble has occurred in opening a file from the hard disk.
Cause
The file in question might be currently being accessed by another application. Wait for a while to repeat the same
Action operation. If the alarm is not cleared, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the
.
information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses.
d
ve
1402 FILE READ ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
Trouble has occurred in reading a file on the hard disk.
s
Cause
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
1403 FILE WRITE ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
.A
Trouble has occurred in writing a file on the hard disk.
N
Cause
O
TI
60
Action A
operation. If the alarm is not cleared, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the
R
40
PO
29
1404 MEMORY PROTECT (DATA IN USE) ( , , ) A L S Blue

R
o.
It was attempted to edit jaw shape data of the machining program currently selected.
O
Cause
N
C
al
Change the selection of the program to edit the required data.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
1405 FILE SIZE ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

IM
The size of the loaded file is not correct.

Cause
K
ZA
The file in question might be destroyed.

A
Action Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing
M
the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses.

YA
1406 LOW MEMORY ( , , ) A L S Blue

3
Memory size currently available is too small.

01
Cause
)2
Exit all the unnecessary applications to make the best of the NC ones.
(c
Action If the alarm is caused again, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the
ht
particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses.
ig
1407 FILE CREATION ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

yr
op
Creating a file and folder on the hard disk was not successful.
Cause
C
1408 DATA TRANSFER ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Data transfer to the NC was not successful.
Cause
3-90
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1409 MILLING ONLY SELECTED ( , , ) A L S Blue
The designated function is not available for a program of initial-point scheme (ONLY MILL).
Cause
Use the function for a program of another scheme.

Action
1410 MILL & TURN (WPC) SELECTED ( , , ) A L S Blue

The designated function is not available for a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting.
Cause

Action
.
d
ve
1411 MILL & TRN (Z-OFS) SELECTED ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
The designated function is not available for a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with Z-offset setting.
Cause
s
re
ts
Action
gh
ri
1412 INCORRECT G-CODE ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
The designated function is not available for the G-code system selected by the F30 parameter.
.A
Cause
N
O
Correct the program, or change the F30 setting.
Action
TI
60
1413 INCORRECT RUNNING MODE ( , ,

A ) A L S Blue
R
40
PO
The designated function is not available for the current operation mode or on the current display.
29
Cause
R
o.
O
N
Change the operation mode or display.

C
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
1414 PROGRAM WRITING ( , , ) A L S Blue

Se
Storing a program on the hard disk was not successful.

IM
Cause
K
ZA
A
M
1415 ZERO CALCULATED TOOL LENGTH ( , , ) A L S Blue

YA
The LENGTH A item of the tool is set to zero (0).

Cause
3
01
Check the settings of tool length or tool set data and, if required, measure the tool in question again.
)2
Action
(c
1416 CANNOT INDEX TOOL ( , , ) A L S Blue

ht
The tool currently indexed on the turret is not appropriate.

ig
Cause
yr
op
Index an appropriate tool beforehand.

Action
C
1417 PARAMETER ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

The setting in a parameter is not correct.
Cause
Check and correct the parameter setting with reference to the codes displayed in parentheses.
Action
3-91
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1418 CANNOT USE LOWER TURRET ( , , ) A L S Blue
The current selection of the headstock to which the lower turret is subordinate is not correct.
Cause
Change over the headstock selection concerned.

Action
1419 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
d .
ve
1420 FILE SIZE LIMIT EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
The size of the file is too large for new data to be written in it.
Cause
s
re
Delete the file, or rename the file.
ts
Action
gh
ri
1421 DATA ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
Cause ——
N
O
Action ——
TI
60
1422 PROGRAM LAYOUT ERROR ( , ,

A ) A L S Blue
R
40
PO
Creating the data for turret-by-turret display of program layout was not successful.
29
Cause
R
o.
O
N
Change the display mode.

C
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
1423 TOOL PATH CHECK NOT COMPLETE ( , , ) A L S Blue

Se
Since the program has not yet undergone tool path check, the TOOL DATA display (tool layout mode) cannot perform
IM
Cause calculations for indicating the spare tools to be additionally provided for the machining operation with the program.
K
Execute the function for tool path check on the program.

ZA
Action
A
1424 BARRIER INFORMATION NOT SET ( , , ) A L S Blue

M
YA
In the program-listing mode, [BARRIER INFORM.] has been tapped without any barrier data being registered.
Cause
3
01
Select the program-creating mode before tapping [BARRIER INFORM.].

Action
)2
(c
1425 ILLEGAL SETUP DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

ht
The setup data are not correct.

Cause
ig
yr
Make a copy of the program in question on the PROGRAM FILE display, and prepare the setup data for the program
op
Action copied.
C
1426 NO PROG LAYOUT FOR THIS PROCESS ( , , ) A L S Blue

The current process has no program layout information provided.
Cause
Tap the menu selector button to select a process with program layout data, or select the display mode for all processes.
Action Alternatively, select a process with program layout data on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display or PROCESS
CONTROL display and then call up the PROGRAM LAYOUT display from there.
3-92
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1427 3D INTERFRNCE CHECK MODEL ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
3D remodeling of the workpiece, fixture, or tool has failed.
Cause
Modify the entered data.

Action
Confirm the model.
1428 INCORRECT POCKET FOR LBB ( , , ) A L S Blue
A long boring bar was assigned to a position other than the special pocket for long boring bars while operating [LAYOUT
Cause FINISH] on the TOOL DATA display (tool layout mode).
Assign the long boring bar to the special pocket.

Action
d .
ve
1429 CANNOT PERFORM AUTO SET ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
Tool setup auto-setting for a tool not capable of using the tool setup auto-setting function (e.g., a magazine tool or a tool
Cause
s
facing the No. 1 turning spindle) has been attempted on the TOOL DATA display.
re
Apply the tool setup auto-setting function only to a turret tool facing the No. 2 turning spindle.
ts
Action
gh
ri
1430 NOT ACTIVE PROGRAM ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
1. This alarm indicates that the machine-operating program and the program selected on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL)
.A
display differ during execution of the workpiece transfer storage function on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.
N
Cause 2. When the directory selection function was enabled (parameter US1 bit 4 = 1) or the project function was enabled
O
(parameter US1 bit 5 = 1), a work number that had the same name as the work number to be executed in automatic
TI
operation from the WORK No. SELECT window but was in a different operation area was selected for WORK No. in
60
A
the COMPARISON STOP window or for SUB PROG. No. in the RESTART (EIA/ISO) window.
R
40
PO
1. Match the machine-operating program and the program selected on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.
29
Action
2. Select the work number to be executed in automatic operation.
R
o.
1431 AUTO SET ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

N
The tool for which the reference tool length was set has not been found during automatic tool length setting.
al
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
Set at least one tool length value before executing automatic tool length setting.
A
Action
IM
1432 TOOLMODEL NOT SELECTED ( , , ) A L S Blue

K
ZA
The tool model to be used as a reference has not been selected during tool model copying, erasing, or renaming.
Cause
A
M
Select a reference tool model before executing tool model copying, erasing, or renaming.
YA
Action
3
1433 SAME TOOL MODEL NAME IN USE ( , , ) A L S Blue

01
A registered tool name has been specified during tool model copying or renaming.
)2
Cause
(c
ht
Specify a tool name that has not been registered.

Action
ig
yr
1434 INCOR CRS POS FOR PROG LAYOUT ( , , ) A L S Blue

op
When setting the PROGRAM LAYOUT display from the MAZATROL program was attempted, the layout of program data
C
Cause up to the first end unit has been displayed since an end unit was present at a position previous to the cursor.
Move the cursor to a position previous to the end unit, and then set the PROGRAM LAYOUT display.
Action
1435 3D MONITOR MANUAL MODE ONLY ( , , ) A L S Blue

Setting the 3D MONITOR display has been attempted during automatic operation mode.
Cause
Select manual operation mode before setting the 3D MONITOR display.

Action
3-93
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1436 DIFFERENT TYPE OF PROGRAM ( , , ) A L S Blue
A program of a different program type has been specified during MAZATROL program copying.
Cause
Specify a program of the same type.

Action
1437 CANNOT TRANSFER ACTIVE PROGRAM ( , , ) A L S Blue

Transferring the same program as the automatic operation program, from the backup area to the standard area, has been
Cause attempted.
Before conducting program transfer, select a different program for automatic operation.
Action
d .
ve
1438 NO SETUP DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
[SETUP DATA] has been tapped in the program listing mode when there was no registered setup data.
Cause
s
re
Select the programming mode before tapping [SETUP DATA].
ts
Action
gh
ri
1439 CANNOT CHANGE UNIT ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
Changing a unit has been attempted when a unit change in the MAZATROL program was prohibited.
.A
 It is not allowed to change a unit for which data other than the unit name has been set up.
N
Cause
 It is not allowed to change a unit if the current machining section is not selectable for the new unit (e.g., a unit for which
O
TI
an outside-diametral section has been selected as the machining section cannot be changed to a turning-drilling unit).
60
Action
Review the program. A
R
40
PO
29
1440 ID No. NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

R
o.
Although moving tool data from the magazine tool list to the stored-tool list has been attempted on the TOOL DATA display
N
Cause
C
(tool layout mode), an ID number has not been set up for the corresponding tool.
al
Set the ID number in the tool data.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
1441 FILE NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

The corresponding file does not exist during file loading on the MAINTENANCE CHECK display.
K
Cause
ZA
Create “maintenance.txt” under “C:\ymw\M8Y\data\nm64mdata\(language-name)”.

A
Action
M
YA
1442 ILLEGAL TOOL- CANNOT ASSIGN ( , , ) A L S Blue

3
Registering an illegal tool in tool data has been attempted.

01
Cause
)2
Confirm the type of tool to be registered.

(c
Action
ht
1443 BACKUP INCOMPLETE ( , , ) A L S Blue

ig
yr
NC data backup has been aborted.

Cause
op
C
To conduct the backup, perform the backup operations once again.

Action
1444 PROCESS TOO LARGE -DEVIDE PROC ( , , ) A L S Blue

Assigning a priority number to the roughing tool on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display has been attempted, but the priority
Cause numbers required exceed 99. The priority number must range from 1 to 99. Otherwise, this alarm will occur.
Split the process and execute [ROUGH PRIORITY].

Action
3-94
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1445 SAME SIMULTAN. NO IN RGH & FIN ( , , ) A L S Blue
Assigning a priority number to the roughing tool on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display has been attempted, but since
Cause simultaneous machining is specified in the program and the same simultaneous machining number is specified for both
roughing and finishing. Roughing cannot be prioritized with the simultaneous machining number ignored.
Review the specified simultaneous machining number and execute [ROUGH PRIORITY].
Action
1446 CANNOT CHNG.WNo (SNGL PROC.MODE) ( , , ) A L S Blue

A work number change has been attempted in single-process mode.
Cause
Cancel the single-process mode before conducting the work number change.
Action
d .
ve
1447 RESTORE OPERATION STOPPED ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
The NC data restore process has been aborted.
s
Cause
re
ts
To conduct the restore process, perform the restore operations once again.
gh
Action
ri
1448 TOOL LENGTH OVER ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
The tool length input range has been overstepped as a result of tool measurement.
Cause
N
O
Use a tool of any tool length value falling within the range defined in parameters SU110 - SU113.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
1449 NC PROGRAM MEMORY SIZE OVER (AREA, , ) A L S Blue

PO
29
This alarm indicates that during hard-disk program transfer to the program storage area (NC memory), as in a power-on
R
status, lack of the necessary NC memory space has been detected or the program storage capacity limit exceeded.
o.
O
N
Cause If AREA = 1 ........ indicates alarm during program transfer from the standard area to the NC memory
C
al
If AREA = 2 ........ indicates alarm during machine manufacturer macroprogram transfer to the NC memory
K
ri
ZA
If AREA = 3 ........ indicates alarm during GL pattern file transfer to the NC memory
Se
Use the PROGRAM FILE display to copy or move programs.

Action
IM
K
1450 SELECT LOWER TURRET ( , , ) A L S Blue

ZA
An attempt has been made to use [TEACH] for a WPC unit with the lower turret selected.
Cause
A
M
[TEACH] cannot be used for a WPC unit with the lower turret selected. Designate the upper turret.
YA
Action
3
01
1451 TILT TABLE ANGLE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

)2
Tip position memorization was attempted with the tilting table at other than the 0 position.
Cause
(c
ht
Perform tip position memory with the tilting table at the 0 position.
Action
ig
yr
1452 SPINDLE CONDITION CAUTION ( , , ) B L S Blue

op
The spindle condition check function judged that the spindle was in an alarm state.
C
Cause

Action
1453 MEMORY PROTECT (BACK UP) ( , , ) A L S Blue

Editing or setting of a machining program, tool data, or other data was attempted while saving the backup data.
Cause
Perform the editing or setting when the backup data has been saved.
Action
3-95
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1454 MEMORY PROTECT (RESTORE) ( , , ) A L S Blue
Editing or setting of a machining program, tool data, or other data was attempted while restoring from the backup data.
Cause
Perform the editing or setting when the backup data has been restored.
Action
1455 ILLEGAL MAKER NAME ( , , ) A L S Blue

Invalid characters have been used in the manufacturer name in an attempt to add a tool part model.
Cause
The characters \ / : * ? “ < > | cannot be used in the manufacturer name. Use other characters to assign the manufacturer
Action name.
d .
ve
1456 ILLEGAL MODEL NO. ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
Invalid characters have been used in the model number in an attempt to add a tool part model.
Cause
s
re
The characters \ / : * ? “ < > | cannot be used in the model number. Use other characters to assign the model number.
ts
Action
gh
ri
1457 CANNOT EDIT MAKER MADE DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
Editing or deleting the tool part model that the manufacturer created has been attempted.
.A
Cause
N
O
The tool part model that the manufacturer created cannot be edited or deleted.
Action
TI
60
1458 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM ( , ,

A ) A L S Blue
R
40
PO
[OP.PROG. TOOL PATH] was tapped in the tape operation mode or without selecting a program for the operation.
29
Cause
R
o.
O
N
Check the operation mode and program selection status.

C
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
1459 —— ( , , )
Se
Cause ——
IM
K
Action ——
ZA
A
1460 CANNOT USE V.M. DURING AUTO OPE ( , , ) A L S Blue

M
Calling up the VIRTUAL MACHINING display was attempted during automatic operation (when the INTELLIGENT
YA
Cause SAFETY SHIELD function in automatic operation mode was valid).

3
When the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in automatic operation mode is valid, the VIRTUAL MACHINING
01
Action display cannot be presented during automatic operation. Change the display mode after automatic operation has been
)2
completed or after making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in automatic operation mode invalid.
(c
1461 TOOL MODEL IMPORT FAILURE ( , , ) A L S Blue

ht
Importing the CAD tool model has failed.

Cause
ig
yr
The data to be imported is incorrect or importable data is absent at the specified location. Make sure that the data to be
op
Action
imported is correct or that data is saved in the specified path.
C
1462 CANNOT USE DISPLAY SAVE DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt to display the saved data was made during condition check operation.
Cause
Display the data when the condition check operation has completed.
Action
3-96
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1463 INVALID HANDLE INTERRUPT ( , , ) A L S Blue
Manual handle pulse interruption was attempted during balance cutting.
Cause
Manual handle pulse interruption is not permitted during balance cutting.

Action
1464 DEVICE ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Dismounting of a drive where no USB device is connected was attempted on the DATA I/O display.
Cause
Select a drive where a USB device is connected.

Action
d .
1465 —— ( , , )
ve
er
Cause ——
s
re
Action ——
ts
gh
1466 ILLEGAL ATTACHMENT No. ( , , ) A L S Blue
ri
A Non-existant attachment number was specified in the MDI mode.
ll
Cause
.A
N
Check the input data.
Action
O
TI
60
1467 SETTING RANGE EXCEEDED ( , , A ) A L S Blue

R
40
While the input error prevention function was enabled, the input data or variation of tool wear offset exceeded the
PO
Cause
parameter setting range.
29
Input the tool wear offset within the maximum variation set for parameter F125 and the maximum setting set for parameter
o.
Action
N
F126.
C
al
1468 —— ( , , )
ri
ZA
Se
Cause ——
A
IM
Action ——
K
ZA
1469 —— ( , , )
A
M
Cause ——
YA
Action ——
3
01
1470 INCORRECT DESIGNATED DATA ( , , Note) B L S Blue

)2
Note :
(c
ht
–1 : Data in the error file for space error compensation to be transferred to the NC unit does not match the machine
configuration.
ig
Cause
yr
–2 : Error components in the error file for space error compensation have exceeded the specification (single direction:
128 points, both directions: 64 points).
op
–3 : Data in the error file for space error compensation is illegal.

C
Take action below against respective causes described above.

–1 : Input the data measured on the corresponding machine.
–2 : Make measurements again so that the number of measurement points for each error component will not be greater
than 128 points (single direction) or 64 points (both directions).
Action
–3 : Match the file format (single direction/both directions) of error data with the valid mode (single direction/both
directions).
If the problem is not solved even after the action above, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology
Center.
3-97
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1471 1BLOCK SIZE OVER ( , , ) A L S Blue
The G code macro call output from the add-in EIA window has exceeded 248 characters.
Cause
Change the argument setting to make it within 248 characters.

Action
1472 INVALID REEDIT ( , , ) A L S Blue

[RE-EDIT] has been tapped when the block in the cursor position cannot be edited in the EIA/ISO program.
1. Unsuitable G code or unnecessary address for add-in EIA function is included in the block in the cursor position.
Cause
2. A comment is located toward the top of the program from the block of G code macro call.
3. The block for re-editing exceeds 248 characters.
d .
1. Delete unnecessary G codes and addresses from the block.
ve
Action 2. For blocks to be re-edited with the add-in EIA function, the comment must be added at the end of the block.
er
3. Edit the block to include 248 characters or less.
s
re
1473 NOT AUTO MODE ( , , ) A L S Blue
ts
The restart 2 non-modal function setting was attempted in a mode other than the memory operation or hard disk operation
gh
Cause mode.
ri
Perform the restart 2 non-modal function setting in the memory operation or hard disk operation mode.
ll
Action
.A
N
1474 MEASURED RESULT MALFUNCTION ( , , ) B L S Blue
O
Measurement using the INTELLIGENT BALANCE ANALYZER function did not complete normally.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40
Review the measurement program. Check that the dwell time is 40 seconds and that the table was rotating normally, then
Action
PO
repeat the measurement.

29
1475 ILLEGAL MEASURING CONDITION ( , , ) A L S Blue

o.
O
N
The tool measurement conditions on the TOOL DATA display are not satisfied.
C
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Check the tool length measuring procedure.

Se
Action
A
IM
1476 —— ( , , )
K
Cause ——
ZA
A
M
Action ——
YA
1477 INCORRECT PROCESS SELECTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

3
A process for a head differing from the selected head has been selected in the SELECT PROCESS window for the restart
01
Cause or single process operation.

)2
(Only for MULTIPLEX series)

(c
Select a process for the selected head.

ht
Action
It is also possible to avoid the alarm by setting parameter F158 bit5 = 0.
ig
yr
( , , )
op
Cause
C
Action
1482 CANNOT LOCK (LIMIT NUMBER) ( , , ) A L S Blue

With nine messages locked, an attempt to lock a 10th message was made.
Cause
The number of messages to be locked must be nine or smaller.

Action
3-98
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1483 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
1484 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
d .
1485 DATA GUARD ALARM (No., , ) A L S Blue
ve
The allowable operation range is restricted by the data guard function.
ser
re
No. Cause
ts
Cause 0 A user having the authority level lower than RANK “1” attempted to change the custom setting.
gh
1 to 8 The access authority level is lower than the level required for changing the data.
ri
999 Deletion of a user failed.
ll
.A
Log in the system with a user having the correct authority level.
N
Action
O
TI
1486 ILLEGAL ID OR PASSWORD (No., , ) A L S Blue
60
The input user name or password is incorrect.

A
R
40
PO
29
No. Cause
R
o.
The user name or password set at the input and display filed for switching a user is incorrect.
O
Cause 0
N
1 The password set at the input and display filed for changing a password is incorrect.
al
2 The user name or password set at the input and display filed for adding a user is incorrect.
ri
ZA
Se
Check the input user name or password.

IM
Action
K
1487 ID NOT SELECT (No., , ) A L S Blue

ZA
A user name is not selected in account management operation with Data Guard.
A
M
No. Cause
YA
Cause
1 A user name is not selected at the input and display field for changing a password.
3
3 A user name is not selected at the input and display field for deleting a user.
01
)2
Select a user name.

(c
Action
ht
1488 PASSWORD MISMATCH (No., , ) A L S Blue

ig
yr
Two passwords input in account management operation with Data Guard do not match.
op
C
No. Cause
Cause
1 Mismatch of two passwords input at the input and display field for changing a password.
2 Mismatch of two passwords input at the input and display field for adding a user.
Check the input passwords.

Action
3-99
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1489 ILLEGAL CHARACTER (No., , ) A L S Blue
A character string input in the account management operation by Data Guard includes illegal characters.
No. Cause
Cause 1 A character string input at the input and display field for changing a password includes illegal
characters.
2 A character string input at the input and display field for adding a user includes illegal
characters.
Check the input characters.

Action
d .
1490 SAME ID ALREADY EXISTS (No., , ) A L S Blue
ve
A user name input in account management operation by Data Guard already exists.
s er
re
Cause No. Cause
ts
2 A user name input at the input and display field for adding a user already exists.
gh
ri
Change the input user name.
Action
ll
.A
1491 RANK NOT SELECT (No., , ) A L S Blue
N
O
In Data Guard account management operation, RANK is not selected.
TI
60
Cause No. A Cause

R
40
2 In the input and display field for adding a user, RANK is not selected.
PO
29
R
o.
Select RANK.
O
Action
N
C
al
1492 ACCOUNT NUMBER OVER (No., , ) A L S Blue

ri
ZA
Se
An attempt was made to register more than 50 users in Data Guard account management operation.
A
IM
No. Cause
Cause
K
2 An attempt was made to register more than 50 users at the input and display field for adding a
ZA
user.
A
M
Delete an unnecessary user before registering a new user.

Action
YA
1493 ILLEGAL –9999 CODE (No., , ) A L S Blue

3
01
The confirmation code input in Data Guard account management operation is incorrect.
)2
(c
No. Cause
Cause
ht
3 Mismatch of the confirmation code, input at the input and display field for deleting a user, with
ig
“–9999”.
yr
op
Check the input code.

Action
C
3-100
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1494 CANNOT EDIT SMC DATA (No., , ) A L S Blue
SMC data operation is performed while the SMC data editing is not allowed or for the data items that cannot be edited.
No. Cause
0 The edit menu was selected although the SMC data was not selected.
1 An attempt was made to edit SMC No. 0.
Cause 2 An attempt was made to edit the locked SMC data.

Or, the locked SMC data is specified as the destination of transfer.
3 An attempt was made to edit the SMC data currently used in operation.
Or, the SMC data currently used in operation was specified as the destination of transfer.
4 The “SMC data addition” operation was performed by selecting the SMC data that is already
d .
registered.
ve
s er
Edit the SMC data after arranging the conditions that allow editing of the SMC data.
re
Action
ts
1495 SMC DATA NOT SETUP (No., , ) A L S Blue
gh
The SMC data that has not been set is specified in the SMC data selection window.
ri
Cause
ll
.A
Specify the SMC data that has been set.
Action
N
O
1496 ILLEGAL ITS PARAMETER ( , , ) A L S Blue
TI
60
The INTELLIGENT THERMAL SHIELD parameters have not been set.A

Cause
R
40
PO
29

Action
R
o.
O
N
( , , )
al
K
ri
ZA
Cause
Se
A
IM
Action
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-101
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
3-2-6 No. 500 - No. 599, No. 1500 - No. 1599 (I/O error)

No. Message Display
500 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——

An external storage medium that contains data other than Smooth system data has been set.
Cause
d .
Check whether the contents of the external storage medium are appropriate for the Smooth system.
ve
Action
s er
re
502 CANNOT LOAD (PROG SIZE EXCEED) (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
The contents of the external storage medium are not correct.
ts
Cause
gh
(Loading of a MAZATROL program of more than 2000 lines of data has been attempted.)
ri
Either use another external storage medium, or save the program data once again. After that, carry out the load operation
Action
ll
once again.
.A
503 CANNOT LOAD (TOO MANY PROGRAMS) (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
N
O
An attempt has been made to load more machining programs than the maximum number of programs that can be
TI
Cause registered within the NC unit.
60
A
Delete unnecessary programs, or save the programs onto an external storage and then delete them. After that, load the
R
40
Action
PO
particular program.
29
504 CANNOT LOAD (AUTO OPERATION) ( , , ) A L S Blue

o.
O
N
An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining programs.
C
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Load the data only after completion of automatic operation.

Se
Action
A
IM
505 CANNOT LOAD (MISMATCH) ( , , ) A L S Blue

K
Loading has been attempted although the data within the external storage medium does not match to the NC unit
Cause
ZA
(Mismatching in data size, etc.).

A
Check if the data saved on the external storage medium is the data to be used for the machine currently in operation.
Action
M
YA
506 SAME PROGRAM No. DESIGNATED (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

3
An attempt has been made to load the machining program that has the same work number as that of a machining program
01

)2
Check for an overlapping work numbers.

(c
Action
ht
507 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

ig
yr
The machining program whose saving has been attempted does not exist in the NC unit.
Cause
op
C
Check if the machining program with the specified work number exists in the NC unit.
Action
3-102
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
508 MEMORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED (WNo., , ) A (G) L (L) S (S) Blue (Blue)
1. An attempt has been made to load machining program data that exceeds the maximum available area for program
registration within the NC unit.
Cause
2. In the middle of saving onto the external storage medium, data saving exceeding the memory capacity has been made,
or the end-of-tape (or end-of-disk) code has been detected.
1. Delete unnecessary programs, or save the programs onto an external storage and then delete them. After that, load
the particular program.
Action
2. Split the data into segments according to the particular size of the free saving area within the external storage medium,
and then carry out the saving operations once again.

Loading has been attempted although the program protect function was set valid.
.
Cause
d
ve
er
Cancel the program protect function.
Action
s
re
ts
510 DATA DO NOT MATCH (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
gh
Comparison between the external storage medium contents and the NC memory contents has shown disparities in data
Cause
ri
size, type of file information, etc.
ll
1. Locate those disparities on the PROGRAM FILE display and correct them, and then make the comparison once again.
.A
Action
2. If the disparities exist in data other than machining program data, check if the data is for the machine being used.
N
O
511 PROGRAM DATA NOT SAME (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A L S Blue
TI
Comparison between the cassette tape or floppy disk contents and the NC data has shown several disparities.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO
1. After correcting the disparities within the machining program, make the comparison once again.
29
2. If the disparities exist in data other than machining program data, locate those disparities on each display.
R
o.
Note :
N
Action
C
This alarm message may be displayed if data is saved prior to automatic operation and then subjected to comparison
al
with that after automatic operation. This is because execution of automatic operation may cause automatic data
ri
ZA
overriding.
Se
512 NO EIA/ISO OPTION (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

IM
An attempt has been made to load an EIA/ISO program in spite of the absence of an EIA/ISO option.
Cause
K
ZA
An EIA/ISO program cannot be loaded since the system has no EIA/ISO option.
A
Action
M
YA
513 PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to load a machining program different in structure from the programs within the NC memory.
3
Cause
01
)2
Check whether the contents of the external storage medium are appropriate for the Smooth system.
(c
Action
ht
514 DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

ig
yr
An attempt has been made to load data (other than machining program data) that differs in structure from the NC memory
Cause
op
data.
C
Check whether the contents of the external storage medium are appropriate for the Smooth system or the machine being
Action used.
515 INCORRECT DESIGNATED DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

1. During I/O operation with a memory card, an attempt has been made to load data the structure of which is not correct.
Cause
2. During I/O operation with a floppy disk, an attempt has been made to load data the structure of which is not correct.
1. Check if the data saved during I/O operation with a memory card is for the Smooth system.
Action
2. Check if the data saved during I/O operation with a floppy disk is for the Smooth system.
3-103
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
516 SYSTEM ERROR ( , , ) E L S Blue
1. When program loading was attempted, there was not a comment file (C:\MC_MachinePrograms\index.tbl).
Cause
2. An error has occurred within the system.
1. Enter any comment on the PROGRAM FILE display, and load the program. Do not edit or delete “index.tbl” since it is
the management file for NC.
Action 2. Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. (At this time, also please notify them of what kind
of operating procedure you had carried out before the alarm message appeared and what values were displayed in
parentheses.)
517 PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
1. An attempt has been made to save a display inhibiting program. (Program management function)
Cause
2. An attempt has been made to save the program being edited or the program being loaded using another I/O unit.
d .
ve
1. Check if the specified work number is for the program of display inhibition.
er
Action 2. Carry out a saving operation only after completion of the program editing operation (or the program loading operation
s
using another I/O unit).
re
518 DATA OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) A L S Blue
ts
gh
1. An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining program data.
Cause
ri
2. An attempt has been made to save the data being loaded using another I/O unit.
ll
3. An attempt has been made to load the data being saved using another I/O unit.
.A
Wait until automatic operation has been completed (or until the loading or saving operation using another I/O unit has been
Action
N
completed).
O
TI
519 DATA SIZE EXCEEDED (WNo., Note, ) A L S Blue
60
A
The EIA/ISO machining program includes a block that consists of more than 256 characters. (EOB or EOR does not
R
40
appear within 256 characters.)

PO
29
Cause Note :
R
o.
The number displayed next to the work number is a line number, which corresponds to the number displayed in the lower
O
N
right section of the PROGRAM display.

C
al
Correct the EIA/ISO machining program. (Insert EOB within 256 characters.)
K
Action
ri
ZA
Se
520 EIA/ISO CONVERT ERROR (WNo., , ) B L S Blue

IM
Nonconvertible sections have been found when an attempt was made to convert the MAZATROL program into an EIA/ISO
Cause program.
K
ZA
Review the MAZATROL program.

A
Action
M
YA
521 CANNOT LOAD (WRONG PROG TYPE) ( , , ) A L S Blue

The operator has attempted loading a machining program of a scheme different from the program scheme within the NC
3
Cause unit.
01
)2
Confirm the program scheme of the machining program.

Action
(c
ht
522 SAME SET No. EXISTS ( , , ) B L S Blue

ig
yr
An attempt has been made to load the GL setup data that has the same GL setup number as that of setup data registered
Cause within the NC unit.
op
C
Rename or erase the GL setup data within the NC unit before loading the data.
Action
523 IMPOSSIBLE TO CONVERT EIA (Prg. No. Processing No., , ) B L S Blue

1. The parameter file does not exist under the same directory as that of the program.
Cause 2. The G-code is other than standard G-code Series A.
3. The program is a subprogram.
1. Save the parameter file under the same directory as that of the program.
Action 2. The G code cannot be converted since it is not supported by the Smooth system.
3. The program cannot be converted since the system concerned is unknown.
3-104
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
524 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
525 HDD I/O ERROR (Cause, , ) E I S Blue

An error has occurred while outputting data of the measurement results print-out function to a local disk.
Cause
Check if the available space within the local drive is sufficient for the purpose.
Action
.d
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-105
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
526 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATION ERROR (Note 1, Note 2, ) E L M, O, Q Blue
Communication error has occurred during the PROFIBUS-DP communication using a field network expansion card.
Note :
1.
○○  
Global error bit

Indicates the error status (hexadecimal).
01: Control error (parameter error)
02: Auto clear error
(Since an update at a slave station has failed, updates at all slave stations have
d.
stopped.)
ve
04: No-exchange error (a slave station has an update error)
er
08: Critical error (communication cannot continue due to a serious network problem)
s
re
10: Not ready (NC communication is not ready)
ts
20: Timeout error (a timeout is detected during an update with each station)
gh
Master communication status
ri
Indicates the status of the master station (hexadecimal).
ll
.A
00: Off-line (being initialized)
40: Stop (I/O stopped)
N
O
80: Clear (resetting the output data from each slave station by sending “0” data)
TI
C0: Running (I/O being updated)
60
2.
A
R
40
PO
29

R
o.
Slave communication status

N
Cause
Indicates the communication status of the slave station at which a communication error is
al
occurring (hexadecimal).
ri
ZA
Se
00: The target slave exists on the bus.

A
An appropriate data communication is being made between the master station and
IM
the target slave station.

01: No data communication is being made between the master station and the target
K
ZA
slave station.
Configuration with the target slave station may not be finished correctly.
A
M
There may be no response from the target slave station.

YA
02: No data communication may be being made between the master station and the
target slave station.
3
Diagnosis information from the target slave station may exist in the internal buffer of
01
the master station.

)2
03: The target slave exists on the bus. An appropriate data communication is being made
(c
between the master station and the target slave station.

ht
Diagnosis information from the target slave station may exist in the internal buffer of
ig
the master station.

yr
op
Slave station number

C
Indicates the number of the slave station at which a communication error is occurring
(hexadecimal).
However, if no communication is being made with the master station, “00” is displayed.
00: No communication is being made with the master station.
01: Station No. 1
02: Station No. 2



7D: Station No. 125
Check the environment of the master station or slave station at which a communication error is occurring.
Action
3-106
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
527 ETHERNET/IP COMMUNICATION ERROR (Note 1, Note 2, ) E L M, O, Q Blue
1. Communication error has occurred during the EtherNet/IP communication using a field network expansion card.
2. EtherNet/IP connection wait time setting may not be appropriate.
Note :
1.
○○  
Adaptor status
0x00: Scanner stopped or connection failed
.d
0x01: Communication being made
ve
0x02: Communication stopped (communication with at least one adaptor station has
er
stopped)
s
re
ts
Scanner status
gh
0x01: Configuration not finished
ri
0x02: Stopped
Cause
ll
0x03: Idling
.A
0x04: Running
N
O
2.
TI
60
 A
R
40
PO
29
Communication error details

R
o.
0x0000: Scanner stopped or connection failed 0x0124: Parameter error

O
N
0x000c: Watchdog timeout 0x0125: Illegal network address

al
0x0100: Initialization failed 0x0126: No security memory

ri
ZA
Se
0x0101: Database access failed 0x0140: Network failure

A
0x0119: Configuration not executed 0x0141: Communication failure

IM
0x0120: Configuration failed 0x0142: Communication timeout

K
0x0121: Data mismatch 0x0143: Network isolation

ZA
0x0122: Data discrepancy 0x0144: Node redundancy

A
0x0123: Inadequate data license 0x0145: Cable not connected

M
YA
1. Check the environment of the scanner or adaptor at which a communication error is occurring.
Action
2. Review the EtherNet/IP connection wait time setting, and turn power off and then back on.
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-107
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
528 FIELDNETWORK SETTING ERROR (Note 1, Note 2, ) E L M Blue
Note :
1.
Cause
1: The value at R19974 (field network output data top register) is out of the setting range.
2: The value at R19976 (field network input data top register) is out of the setting range.
3: The value specified at the register R for high-speed data input/output is out of the setting range.
Cause 4: The value of parameter F150 is out of the setting range.
d .
2.
ve
er
Field network expansion card type
s
re
0: Not connected
ts
1: PROFIBUS-DP unit
gh
ri
2: EtherNet/IP unit
ll
1. Review the value at R19974 (field network output data top register).
.A
2. Review the value at R19976 (field network input data top register).
N
Action
3. Review the value at the register R for high-speed data input/output.
O
TI
4. Review the value of parameter F150.
60
529 CC-LINK COMMUNICATION ERROR ( No., ,

A ) E L M (O) Blue
R
40
PO
A communication error has occurred in the CC-LINK communication.

29
Cause
R
o.
Check the method of connection and communication.

N
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
530 CMT MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

Se
This message implies incorrect cable connection between CMT (cassette magnetic tape unit) or microdisk unit and the NC
IM
Cause unit, or implies a power-off status or an incorrect baud-rate setting.

In the case of microdisk unit, this message also implies incorrect setting of a floppy disk.
K
ZA
1. Check for correct cable connections.

2. Check if power is turned on.
A
Action
M
3. Check for correct baud-rate setting. (Parameter for the NC unit: Baud rate)
YA
4. For microdisk unit, check if the floppy disk is correctly set.

531 DESIGNATED FILE NOT FOUND (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
3
01
The machining program or another data that has been designated for the LOAD or COMPARE operation does not exist
Cause
)2
within the cassette tape or floppy disk.

(c
Carry out a DIRECTORY operation to check what type of data is stored on the cassette tape or floppy disk.
ht
Action
ig
yr
532 CMT NOT CONNECTED ( , , ) A L S Blue

op
A cassette tape or floppy disk drive has not been mounted.

Cause
C
Correctly mount a cassette tape or floppy disk drive.

Action
533 NO OPERABLE DATA IN CMT ( , , ) A L S Blue

The current M640 series-use cassette tape or floppy disk does not contain a saved machining program (only machining
Cause programs can be loaded from M640 series-use cassette tape or floppy disk).
The cassette tape or floppy disk that has been registered for M640 series use does not contain a registered machining
Action program.
Perform checks using the M640 series NC unit.
3-108
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
534 CMT I/O ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue
A hardware error has occurred in the CMT or microdisk unit.
Cause
Check the CMT or microdisk unit baud rate setting (RS-232C setting parameter), and replace the cassette tape or floppy
Action disk.
535 CMT WRITE PROTECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

Data saving onto a write-protected cassette tape or floppy disk has been attempted.
Cause
The cassette tape or floppy disk is protected against data writing.

Action Release the write-protected state.
d .
ve
(For cassette tape, fill in the hole on the tape surface with tape.)
er
536 POWER OFF DURING CMT OPERATION ( , , ) A L S Blue
s
re
Power has been turned off during operation of the CMT or microdisk unit.
Cause
ts
gh
Check the machining program being transferred. If an anomaly is found, repeat the desired operation. If this alarm state
ri
Action has occurred during loading of a machining program, erase the loaded portion of the program and then execute the loading
again.
ll
.A
537 CMT MALFUNCTION ( , , ) G L S Blue
N
Data cannot be read because of the presence of check sum errors, for example, within the cassette tape or floppy disk
O
Cause contents.
TI
60
A
Reread the data only after setting a new cassette tape or floppy disk or after saving the corresponding data.
Action
R
40
PO
29
538 CC-LINK UNCONNECTED ( , , ) E L M (O) Blue

R
o.
Connection cables between the CC-LINK unit and each device are disconnected or broken.
N
Cause
C
al
K
ri
Check the data at registers SW0080 to SW0083 to identify the error station and check its cable connection.
ZA
Se
Action
A
IM
539 —— ( , , )
K
Cause ——
ZA
A
M
Action ——
YA
540 TAPE READER MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

3
This message implies incorrect cable connection between tape reader or microdisk unit and the NC unit or implies a
01
Cause power-off state. In the case of microdisk unit, this message also implies incorrect setting of a floppy disk.
)2
(c

ht
Action 2. Check if power is turned on.

ig
3. In the case of microdisk unit, check if the floppy disk is correctly set.
yr
541 TAPE PUNCHER MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

op
This message implies incorrect cable connection between tape puncher or microdisk unit and the NC unit or implies a
C
Cause power-off state. In the case of microdisk unit, this message also implies incorrect setting of a floppy disk.

Action 2. Check if power is turned on.
3. In the case of microdisk unit, check if the floppy disk is correctly set.
542 NO TAPE READER PUNCHER OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue
An attempt has been made to carry out a tape I/O operation although the tape reader/puncher option is not provided.
Cause
Provide the NC unit with a tape reader/puncher option. (Only with this option, tape I/O operations can be carried out.)
Action
3-109
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
543 WNo. NOT FOUND ON PAPER TAPE ( , , ) A L S Blue
Loading or comparing is not possible since no O numbers (work numbers) are stored on the paper tape or floppy disk.
Cause
Call the DATA I/O display (TAPE) and designate a work number(s).
Action
544 SET NEW PAPER TAPE ( , , ) A L S Blue

1. The tape reader/puncher is not correctly loaded with paper tape.
Cause 2. Differences in baud-rate or other parameter settings for RS-232C exist between the tape reader/puncher (or microdisk
unit) and the NC unit.
1. Check if the tape reader/puncher is correctly loaded with paper tape.
.
Action
d
2. Check for differences in RS-232C parameter settings between the I/O unit and the NC unit.
ve
er
545 POWER OFF TAPE READ/PUNCH OPER. ( , , ) A L S Blue
s
Power has been turned off during operation of the tape reader/puncher or microdisk unit.
re
Cause
ts
gh
If power has been turned off during loading, check the machining program loaded. If an error(s) is found, delete the loaded
Action data and then reload the program. If power has been turned off during punching, re-punch the tape.
ri
ll
546 TAPE READER ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue
.A
A hardware error has occurred in the tape reader or the microdisk unit.
N
Cause
O
TI
Before operating the tape reader or microdisk unit, check that no differences in RS-232C parameter settings exist between
60
Action A
the tape reader or microdisk unit and the NC unit and replace the paper tape or floppy disk.
R
40
PO
29
547 TAPE PUNCHER ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

R
A hardware error has occurred in the tape puncher or the microdisk unit.
o.
Cause
N
C
al
Before operating the tape puncher or microdisk unit, check that no differences in RS-232C parameter settings exist
ri
Action
ZA
between the tape puncher or microdisk unit and the NC unit and replace the paper tape or floppy disk.
Se
548 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue

IM
An attempt has been made to punch a MAZATROL program onto paper tape.
Cause
K
ZA
Designate an EIA/ISO program.

A
Action
(Only EIA/ISO programs can be punched on paper tape.)
M
YA

The designated data was not found on the paper tape or floppy disk.
3
Cause
01
)2
Select another set of data or make a search once again from the beginning of the paper tape or floppy disk.
(c
Action
ht
550 PARITY H ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

ig
yr
op
The contents of the paper tape or floppy disk cannot be read since they include a parity-H error(s). (The
number of holes on tape must always be even for ISO; it must be odd for EIA).
C
Cause
 Sprocket
Reading must be carried out only after replacing the paper tape or floppy disk or after re-punching the program.
Action
3-110
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
551 PARITY V ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue
The contents of the paper tape or floppy disk cannot be read since they include a parity-V error(s).
E E E
O O O
Cause B B B
The number of sprocket holes in this area must be even.
Make reading possible by making bit 1 of parity V-check valid/invalid parameter TAP25 invalid.
Action
552 PROGRAM END NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue
. d
ve
A machining program in which EOR precedes the end M-code (M02, M30 or M99) or the next O number (work number)
was loaded.
er
Cause
s
The end-of-program condition can be changed by varying the settings of the parameter (TAP27).
re
Since the machining program has already been loaded, the PROGRAM display must be called and then one of the above
ts
Action three end M-codes must be inserted in the program.
gh
ri
553 WORK No. UNITS EXCEEDED ( , , ) B L S Blue
ll
An attempt has been made to load the program of a work number of more than four digits in spite of the fact that the
.A
Cause maximum allowable number of digits in one work number is set to four.
N
Check bit 3 of parameter TAP26.
O
Action
TI
60
554 POWER OFF IN EIA/ISO CONVERT ( , ,

A) A L S Blue
R
40
PO
Power has been turned off during EIA/ISO conversion.

29
Cause
R
o.
O
N
Check the EIA/ISO program being converted. If an anomaly is found, erase the program and repeat the conversion.
C
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
555 —— ( , , )
Se
A
IM
Cause ——
K
ZA
Action ——
A
556 —— ( , , )
M
YA
Cause ——
3
01
Action ——
)2
(c
557 DESIGNATED DIRECTORY NOT FOUND ( , , ) B (A) I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ht
The designated directory does not exist.

ig
Cause
yr
op
Check if the designated directory exists.

Action
C
( , , )
Cause
Action
3-111
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
563 PRINTER I/O ERROR (Cause, , ) G L S Blue
An error in printer communications has occurred during measurement result printing.
Cause
 Check the printer for correct connection.

Action
 Check for differences in the RS-232C parameter settings between the printer and NC unit.
564 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
.
d
ve
565 ID MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue
er
Erroneous cable connection has occurred during connection of the ID unit and the NC unit, or power has remained turned
s
Cause off.
re
ts
Check for incorrect cable connections.
gh
Action
Or check if the power is turned on.
ri
566 POWER STOPPED DURING ID OPER. ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
Power has been turned off during the operation of the ID unit.
Cause
N
O
Check the current tool data, and if errors are found, operate the unit once again.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
567 ID I/O ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

PO
29
Communication between the NC unit and the ID unit has become interrupted because of hardware trouble (such as line
R
Cause noise).
o.
O
N

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
568 IBS COMMUNICATION ERROR (Note 1, Note 2, ) E I P Blue

A
IM
An error occurred in bar loader communication with the IBS (intelligent bar loader system).
Note :
K
ZA
1. Details of communication error

1: Transmission of the schedule data does not start.
A
M
Cause 2: Writing of the material length and cut-off position does not complete.
YA
3: Inconsistent work number.

4: Transmission of top-cut work number does not start.
3
01
5: Inconsistent top-cut work number

)2
2. Schedule number that caused communication error.

(c
Press the RESET key and tap [SCHEDULE OPERAT.] on the BL SCHEDULE display again to highlight it.
Action
ht
ig
569 —— ( , , )
yr
op
Cause ——
C
Action ——
570 NO DNC OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

DNC operation was attempted although DNC option is not provided.
Cause
Provide the NC unit with a DNC option. (Only with this option, DNC operation can be carried out.)
Action
3-112
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
Data other than that of the MATRIX system, Smart, or the Smooth system has been received from the host (the format of
Cause the message is incorrect).
Check whether the received data from the host is for the MATRIX system, Smart, or the Smooth system.
Action
572 CANNOT LOAD (PROG SIZE EXCEED) (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

The contents of the transmitted machining program from the host system are not correct.
Cause
(More than 2000 lines of MAZATROL program data have been transmitted.)
Check the size of the program which has been transmitted from the host system.
Action
d .
ve
573 CANNOT LOAD (TOO MANY PROGRAMS) (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
er
s
re
ts
gh
Action particular program.
ri
574 CANNOT LOAD (AUTO OPERATION) ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining program data.
Cause
N
O
Load such data only after completion of automatic operation.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
575 CANNOT LOAD (MISMATCH) ( , , ) A L S Blue

PO
29
Loading has been attempted when the transmitted data from the host system does not match to the data or other
R
Cause parameter settings within the NC unit (mismatching in data size, etc.).
o.
O
N
Check if the data that has been transmitted from the host system is that which is to be used for the machine being used.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
576 SAME PROGRAM No. DESIGNATED (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

A
IM
An attempt has been made to load the machining program that has the same work number as that of a machining program
K
ZA
Check for an overlapping work number. This alarm message also implies that the parameter (DNC26, bit 2) is set for the
Action priority of the old program over a new one. If the parameter is set to 0, the old data will automatically be deleted in such a
A
case as mentioned above and the new program data can be loaded with the specified work number.
M
YA
577 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

 The machining program whose transmission from the NC unit to the host system has been attempted does not exist
3
within the NC unit.

01
Cause
 The machining program that has been designated using a control command (work number search or program deletion)
)2
does not exist within the NC unit.

(c
Check if the machining program with the specified work number exists in the NC unit.
ht
Action
ig
yr
578 MEMORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

op
C
Action particular program.

Loading has been attempted although the program protect function was set valid.
Cause
Cancel the program protect function.

Action The program protect function is valid due to the setting of parameter (DNC26 bit 3). Therefore, it is possible to make the
program protect function invalid by setting it to ON (1).
3-113
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
580 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
581 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
d .
ve
582 DESIGNATED FILE NOT TRANSFERED ( , , ) A L S Blue
er
A file different from the one that has been requested from NC unit to the host system was transferred from the latter.
s
Cause
re
ts
Check the details of the file that has been transferred from the host system.
gh
Action
ri
583 PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue
ll
.A
An attempt has been made to load a machining program that is different in structure from those stored within the NC unit.
Cause
N
O
 Confirm that the program to be transferred from the host is for the MATRIX system, Smart, or the Smooth system.
TI
Action
60
 Check if the contents of the file transfer message (header block) are correct.
A
R
40
584 RECEIVED DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

PO
29
 An attempt has been made to load data other than machining program data and also different in structure from the data
R
stored within the NC unit.

o.
Cause
N
 The contents of the header block or data block in the file transfer message (including machining programs) are not
C
al
correct.
K
ri
ZA
 Check if the data that has been transferred from the host system is for use with the Smooth system or for use with the
Se
machine being used.

A
Action

IM
Check the contents of the header block (version number, etc.) or data block (sequence number, etc.) in the file transfer
message.
K
585 CABLE MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

ZA
This message implies incorrect cable connection between the host system and the NC unit or implies a power-off status.
A
Cause
M
YA
 Check if the DNC cables are correctly connected.

 Check if the host system is turned on and ready for data transmission/reception.
3
Action
01
There may be cases that although a DNC option is provided, DNC itself is not to be used for the time being and thus the
DNC cables are not yet connected. If this is the case, then set the appropriate parameter (DNC26, bit 1) to OFF (0). This
)2
will clear the alarm display.

(c
586 SYSTEM ERROR ( , , ) E L S Blue

ht
An error has occurred within the system.

ig
Cause
yr
op
Contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. (At this time, also please notify them of what kind of
C
Action operating procedure you had carried out before the alarm message appeared and what values were displayed in
parentheses.)
587 PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED (WNo., , ) A L S Blue
1. An attempt has been made to transmit a display inhibiting program to the host system. (Program management
function)
Cause
2. An attempt has been made to transmit to the host system the program being edited (or the program being loaded using
another I/O unit).
1. Check if the specified work number is for the program of display inhibition.
Action 2. Carry out the transfer operation only after completion of the program editing (or program loading using another I/O
unit).
3-114
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
588 DATA OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) A L S Blue
 An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining program data.
Cause  An attempt has been made to transmit to the host system the data being loaded using another I/O unit.
 An attempt has been made to load the data being saved using another I/O unit.
Wait until automatic operation has been completed (or until the loading or saving operation using another I/O unit has been
Action completed).
589 DATA SIZE EXCEEDED (WNo., Note, ) A L S Blue

The EIA/ISO machining program includes a block that consists of more than 256 characters. (EOB or EOR is not present
within 256 characters.)
Cause Note :
d .
The number displayed next to the work number is a line number, which corresponds to the number displayed in the lower
ve
right section of the PROGRAM display.
er
Correct the machining program. (Insert EOB within 256 characters.)
s
Action
re
ts
590 DNC COMMAND IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) A L S Blue
gh
The particular status of the NC unit disables execution of the control command that has been requested from the host
ri
system.
ll
Cause  A request for work number search has been made during automatic operation.
.A
 During automatic operation, a request for deleting the machining program being used for the automatic operation has
N
been made.
O
Wait until the NC unit becomes ready for processing or until the automatic operation is completed, and then make the
TI
Action
60
request once again. A

R
40
591 NO OPTION (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

PO
29
An attempt has been made to load (save) the data not supported by the current option of the DNC unit.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Only data supported by the option can be processed.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
592 ILLEGAL COMMAND RECEIVED ( , , ) A L S Blue

A
IM
 The control command or file transfer command that has been requested from the host system is a nonexistent
command.
K
Cause
 The machine number that has been designated for the loading of data other than machining program data does not
ZA
agree with any of the machine numbers within the NC unit.

A
 Check the details of the command message that has been sent from the host system.
M
Action
 Check if the machine number is the same as that registered within the NC unit (parameter DNC19).
YA
593 DNC I/O ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

3
01
 During use of DNC, processing has been aborted by line noise or other hardware factors.
)2
 RS-232C communication parameter settings (such as those of the baud-rate, etc.) between the host system and NC
Cause
unit differ.
(c
 Timer, number-of-retries or other settings are not correct.

ht
ig
 Make line checks and hardware checks of the host system and NC unit.
yr
 Match the RS-232C communication parameter settings between the host system and NC unit.
Action
op
 Set the timer, number-of-retries, or other settings to those of the host system. (Parameters for the NC unit: DNC
C
parameters)
594 SEND-RECEIVE ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue
 The preset number of retries has been exceeded during transmission/reception of command messages.
Cause
unit differ.
 Make line checks and message checks of the host systems.
Action
 Set the timer, number-of-retries or other settings to those of the host system. (Parameters for the NC unit: DNC
parameters)
3-115
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
595 FILE TRANSFER ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue
 The preset number of retries has been exceeded during transmission/reception of the messages.
Cause
unit differ.
 Make line checks and message checks of the host systems.
Action
 Set the timer, number-of-retries or other settings to those of the host system. (Parameters for the NC unit: DNC
parameters)
596 DNC MALFUNCTION ( , , ) G L S Blue
An irretrievable hardware error has occurred during reception of the first message (ENQ) from the host system.
d .
Cause
ve
er
After making hardware checks of the NC and host systems and line checks, turn the NC unit power back on and then
s
Action restart the receiving operation.
re
ts
597 POWER OFF DURING DNC OPERATION ( , , ) A L S Blue
gh
Power has been turned off during DNC operation.
Cause
ri
ll
.A
Check for errors in the machining program being used, and if errors are found, carry out the DNC operation once again.
Action Note, however, that if the machining program is being loaded, then loading must be carried out once again after erasing the
N
loaded contents of the program.
O
TI
598 NO EIA/ISO OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue
60
A
An attempt has been made to transfer EIA/ISO program although the NC unit is not provided with an EIA/ISO option.
R
40
Cause
PO
29
Without an EIA/ISO option, EIA/ISO program processing is not possible.

R
Action
o.
O
N

al
K
ri
The host system has issued a request for transmission/reception of data not existing within the NC unit.
ZA
Se
Cause  A drum-tool data transfer request has been issued to the NC unit though it is not provided with a drum.
A
IM
 A request for transfer of a larger volume of data than the control data stored within the NC unit has been made.
Check the contents of the command messages that have been sent from the host system.
K
Action
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-116
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
3-2-7 No. 600 - No. 699, No. 1600 - No. 1699 (MAZATROL program error)

No. Message Display
600 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
601 SYSTEM ERROR ( , , ) E I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A processing error has occurred within the NC unit.
Cause
d.
Using data I/O operation, save the program data, tool data, tool file data, parameters, etc. that are currently being used.
ve
Action After that, contact the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
s er
602 PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
re
An attempt has been made to start the program being transferred.
ts
Cause
gh
ri
After the transfer operation is completed, start the program.
Action
ll
.A
603 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
 The program having the work number that has been set in the subprogram unit does not exist within the memory.
O
TI
Cause  No work number has been set in the subprogram unit.
60
 A
The work number that has been designated as the restart position does not exist within the memory.
R
40
Review the machining programs to see if the designated program exists.

PO
29
Action
R
o.
604 NO PITCH IN MULTI WORKPIECES (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
 Pitch X is not yet set in spite of the fact that multi-piece machining in the direction of the X-axis is to take place.
al
Cause
ri

ZA
Pitch Y is not yet set in spite of the fact that multi-piece machining in the direction of the Y-axis is to take place.
Se
Review the particular machining program and then set an appropriate multi-piece machining pitch in the common unit.
A
Action
IM
K
605 NO TOOL DATA IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ZA
The point-, line- or face-machining (including 3-D) unit does not contain any tool sequences.
Cause
A
M
Review the particular machining program to see if there are units that do not contain necessary tool sequences.
YA
Action
3
606 NO FIGURE IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
01
The point-, line- or face-machining (including 3-D) unit does not have any shape data.
)2
Cause
(c
ht
Review the particular machining program to see if there are units that do not contain necessary shape data.
Action
ig
yr
607 MISSING INPUT DATA (POINT) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
op
A point-machining unit lacks data.

C
Cause
Review the particular machining program, and set data if a point-machining unit lacks data.
Action
608 MISSING INPUT DATA (LINE) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A line-machining unit lacks data.
Cause
Review the particular machining program, and set data if a line-machining unit lacks data.
Action
3-117
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
609 MISSING INPUT DATA (FACE) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A face-machining unit lacks data.
Cause
Review the particular machining program, and set data if a face-machining unit lacks data.
Action
610 MISSING TOOL DATA FOR POINT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A point-machining tool sequence lacks data.
Cause
Review the particular machining program, and set data if a point-machining tool sequence lacks data.
Action
.d
ve
611 MISSING TOOL DATA FOR LINE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
A line-machining tool sequence lacks data.
s
Cause
re
ts
Review the particular machining program, and set data if a line-machining tool sequence lacks data.
gh
Action
ri
612 MISSING TOOL DATA FOR FACE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
A face-machining (including 3-D) tool sequence lacks data.
Cause
N
O
Review the particular machining program, and set data if a face-machining tool sequence lacks data.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
613 DATA MISSING IN WPC UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The WPC unit lacks data.

R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the particular machining program, and set data if the WPC unit lacks data.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
614 SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The maximum permissible number of repeats of MAZATROL program nesting has been exceeded nine.
Cause
K
ZA
Review and correct the particular machining program so that the total number of repeats of nesting does not excess nine.
Action
A
M
615 DATA MISSING IN OFFSET UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
The offset unit lacks data.

Cause
3
01
Review the particular machining program, and set data if the offset unit lacks data.
)2
Action
(c
ht
616 DATA ERROR IN M CODE UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
The M-code unit contains no data.

yr
Cause
op
Review the particular machining program, and input data to the M-code unit.
C
Action
617 EXECUTION IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The data processing operation cannot be performed because of contradiction in data. This condition occurs if an attempt is
Cause made to start automatic operation when the specified work number is an unregistered number.
Search out the contradictory data making reference to WNo., UNo., SNo. (which are displayed together with the alarm
Action message), and then correct the data.
3-118
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
618 POINT CUTTING PARAMETER ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The point-machining parameter setting(s) is out of its permissible range.
Cause
Action ——
619 LINE/FACE CUTTING PAR. ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The line- or face-machining parameter settings are out of their permissible ranges.
Cause
The parameter E13 is set to “0”; change it to a value other than “0”.
Action
d.
ve
620 CUTTING SPEED ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
Of tool sequence data (except for chip removal), the surface speed (C-SP) is unset or set to “0”.
s
Cause
re
ts
Review the machining program and set the desired surface speed (C-SP).
gh
Action
ri
621 FEEDRATE ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
Of tool sequence data (except for chip removal), the feedrate (FR) is unset or set to “0”.
Cause
N
O
Review the machining program and set the desired feedrate (FR).
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
622 DESIGNATED UNIT NOT FOUND ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

PO
29
The unit that has been designated as the restart position is not present in the program with the specified work number.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the machining program and designate the correct unit number.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
623 DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A
IM
The tool sequence that has been designated as the restart position is not present in the unit of the specified work number;
Cause two or more lines of tool sequence data are present in the line-machining chamfering unit.
K
ZA
Review the machining program and designate the correct tool sequence number.
Action
A
M
624 RESTART IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

YA
 The unit that has been designated as the restart position is the end unit.
3
Cause  The designated number of times of reappearance (L) is too large and the corresponding restart position is not present.
01
 The restart data is incomplete.

)2
Check the contents of the restart data or the program.

(c
Action
ht
ig
625 ENDMILL DIAMETER EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
yr
 The value of “(groove width) – (finish allowance R) × 2” of the endmill groove unit is smaller than the “tool diameter”
op
Cause value of the rough-machining tool.

C
 The “groove width” value of the endmill groove unit is smaller than the “tool diameter” value of the finishing tool.
Action ——
626 DESIGNATED TOOL NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The tool(s) specified in the program is not registered in the tool data.
Cause
Carry out a tool layout operation and register the necessary tool(s) on the TOOL DATA display.
Action
3-119
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
627 TOOL DATA INPUT PROCESS ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The data of the tool length or tool diameter is not yet input on the TOOL DATA display.
Cause
Review the tool data and input the tool length or tool diameter.
Action
628 NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The tool specified in the program is not registered on the TOOL FILE display.
Cause
Register the tool data that is to be used in the program into the tool file.
Action
d .
ve
629 TOOL FILE INPUT PROCESS ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The tool file lacks of data.
s
Cause
re
ts
Review the data on the TOOL FILE display and fill in any empty items with data.
gh
Action
ri
630 Z DEPTH OF CUT TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
Of the line- or face-machining tool sequence data, the value of the Z depth of cut is in excess of the depth of cut on the
Cause TOOL FILE display.
N
O
Review the machining program and correct the value of the Z depth of cut.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
631 STOCK REMOVAL R TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The value of “(removal allowance R) – (finish allowance R)” in the line-machining unit is larger than the value of the tool
R
o.
Cause diameter of the rough-cutting tool.

O
N
The value of removal allowance R in the line-machining unit is larger than the value of the tool diameter of the finishing tool.
C
al
Review the machining program and correct the values of removal allowance R and finishing allowance R in the
ri
Action
ZA
line-machining unit.
Se
632 RADIAL DEPTH OF CUT ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
IM
Of line- or face-machining tool sequence data, the radial depth of cut is set to zero or smaller.
Cause
K
ZA
Review the machining program and set the radial depth of cut to the correct value.
A
Action
M
YA
633 Z DEPTH OF CUT ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Of line- or face-machining tool sequence data, the Z depth of cut is set to zero or smaller.
3
Cause
01
)2
Review the machining program and set the Z depth of cut to the correct value.
(c
Action
ht
634 FINISH DEPTH OF CUT ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
yr
The finish allowance value in the line- or face-machining unit is set to zero in spite of the fact that a finishing tool is
Cause
op
registered.
C
Review the machining program and set data in the finish allowance data item.
Action
635 TOOL DIAMETER ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Of tool data, the tool diameter setting is zero.
Cause
Review the data on the TOOL DATA display and set data in the tool diameter item.
Action
3-120
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
636 STOCK REMOVAL Z TOO SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
In the line- or face-machining unit, removal allowance Z is smaller than finish allowance Z.
Cause
Review the line- or face-machining unit and increase removal allowance Z to a value greater than that of finish allowance Z.
Action
637 STOCK REMOVAL R TOO SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
In the line- or face-machining unit, removal allowance R is smaller than finish allowance R.
Cause
Review the line- or face-machining unit and increase the value of removal allowance R to a value greater than that of finish
Action allowance R.
d.
ve
638 R DEPTH OF CUT TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
Of the face-machining tool sequence data, the setting of the radial depth of cut is smaller than the tool diameter setting on
s
Cause
re
the TOOL DATA display.
ts
Review the machining program and increase the radial depth of cut to a value greater than the tool diameter setting in the
gh
Action tool data.
ri
639 DESIGNATED PALLET NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The pallet number that has been set in the pallet changing unit is larger than the maximum allowable number of pallets set
Cause in the parameter L46.
N
O
Review the machining program and set an allowable pallet number.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
640 ILLEGAL INDEX ANGLE INPUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The data that has been set in the angle item of the indexing unit is that which cannot be divided by the parameter L37
R
Cause
o.
setting (minimum allowable angle of index).

O
N
Review the machining program and set an allowable angle of index.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
641 MISSING INPUT DATA (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The pallet changing unit or the indexing unit lacks of unit data.
Initial point Z is not yet set in the common unit.
K
ZA
CPT-X, CPT-Z or rotational direction is not yet set in the mill-turning unit.
Cause
When "SHIFT - R.T" is set in the WPC shift unit with the machine equipped with table selection function, the rotational
A
M
center is not set in the table selection unit.

YA
The table is not set in the table selection unit.

Review the machining program and set all the necessary values in the unit.
3
Action
01
)2
642 ILLEGAL NEXT PALLET No. INPUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
(c
The same pallet number as the current pallet number has been set as the next one.
Cause
ht
ig
Review the machining program and make sure of the pallet numbers.
yr
Action
op
C
643 DATA ERROR IN MAN. PROG. UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The manual program mode unit contains a sequence that has no data.
Cause
Review the machining program, and fill in any incomplete sequence with data or erase such sequences.
Action
3-121
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
644 NOMINAL DIAMETER NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The nominal diameter item of the tool sequence data is not complete. The nominal diameter item of the MMS unit or the
Cause manual program mode unit (when a tool is set) is not complete.
Review the machining program, and set data in the nominal diameter item of the MMS unit or the manual program mode
Action unit (when a tool is set) or erase the corresponding portion.
645 PRIORITY No. OVERLAP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The same priority number is assigned to different tools.
Cause
Within one process, the same priority number must not be assigned to different tools.
Action
Change the priority number.
d.
ve
(WNo., UNo., SNo.)*
646 ILLEGAL PRIORITY NUMBER B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
(LNo. 1, LNo. 2, )**
s
re
The priority numbering order within a unit is not correct.
ts
* During setting the priority numbers on the PROGRAM display.
Cause
gh
** During setting the priority numbers on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display - data in the layout lines LNo. 1 and LNo. 2 are
ri
not correct.
ll
The machining order within one unit has been reversed by the incorrect priority numbering.
.A
Action
Change the priority numbers.
N
647 END UNIT NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
O
TI
The end unit is not present in the program.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO
Review the machining program and set the end unit at the end of the program.
29
Action
R
o.
O
N
648 MULTI OFFSET DATA TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
C
al
More than 10 sets of offset data have been input for multi-piece machining.
K
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
The machining program is in an abnormal state. If the program is already saved onto cassette tape, floppy disk or other
IM
Action media, erase the program and then reload it. If the program is not yet saved, make corrections with the editing function and
fully scan for more data errors.
K
ZA
649 MEASURING SEQUENCE INCOMPLETE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The measurement sequence lacks of data.
A
Cause
M
YA
Review the machining program, and input data to the measurement sequence to make it complete.
Action
3
01
650 CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
)2
Cutting is impossible because the chamfering cutter is likely to come into contact with the wall or bottom of the workpiece
(c
Cause during chamfering.

ht
The data of the specified chamfering cutter on the TOOL DATA or TOOL FILE display is not appropriate.
ig
Review the machining program or the tool file, and correct inappropriate data.
yr
Action
op
C
651 GEAR PARAMETER ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
An attempt has been made to execute the point-, line- or face-machining MAZATROL program when the setting of
Cause parameter SA51 was “5” or more.
Change the setting of parameter SA51 to a value between 0 and 4.

Action
3-122
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
652 GEAR SHIFT DATA ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The tool sequence data contains an unavailable milling spindle gear-shift M-code(s).
Cause
Change the corresponding code(s) to an available one(s).

2-gear H : M39 3-gear H : M39 4-gear H : M39
Action L : M38 M : M38 MH : M38
L : M37 ML : M37
L : M36
653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Tools that cannot be used have been designated.
Cause
d.
ve
Review the machining program and designate tools that are usable.
er
Action
s
re
654 TOOL DATA ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ts
The tool length and tool diameter settings on the TOOL DATA display are negative.
gh
Cause
ri
ll
Set positive tool length and tool diameter values.
.A
Action
N
655 PROGRAM DATA CORRUPT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
O
TI
The program is destroyed.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO
Erase a part of the program and then re-create the destroyed part; or erase the entire program and then carry out a loading
29
Action operation using the data I/O operation once again.

R
o.
O
N
656 MEASURING SEQ. DATA NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
C
al
The measurement units include one that has no sequence data.

K
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
Create one or more lines of sequence data in the corresponding measurement unit, or erase the unit.
IM
Action
K
657 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ZA
The program contains incorrect data.

A
Cause
M
YA
Review the machining program and make data corrections.

Action
3
01
658 INITIAL Z < MATERIAL DEPTH (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
)2
The setting of the material height in the 3-D machining unit is greater than that of initial point Z in the common unit.
Cause
(c
ht
Change the program to give a material height value smaller than the initial point Z value.
ig
Action
yr
op
659 NO TOOL PATH CHECK (I/O BUSY) (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

C
The tool path check cannot be performed since I/O operation (loading) is in progress.
Cause
Make the tool path check after the I/O operation has been completed.
Action
660 CANNOT MOVE DESIGNATED AXIS ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The Y-axis or Z-axis of the index position has been appointed using the indexing unit when the parameter L41 is set to “2”.
Cause
Clear the Y-axis or Z-axis data of the index position by tapping the cancel key.
Action
3-123
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
661 ILLEGAL M CODE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
M195 (tool breakage detection start command code) has been set for the M-code unit or for the manual program mode
Cause sequence.
M195 cannot be executed on MAZATROL programs. Delete that command code from the program.
Action
662 NO INCLINED PLANE OPTION (WNo., UNo., ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
An attempt has been made to execute the inclined-plane machining program in the absence of an inclined-plane machining
Cause option.
Inclined-plane machining is not possible because of the absence of an inclined-plane machining option.
Action
d.
ve
663 WRONG HEAD ANGLE (WNo., UNo., ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
1. A corner-face unit or plane inclination measurement has been designated in unit data other than inclined-plane
s
machining unit data.
re
2. Table rotational machining has been designated in spite of the fact that the facial angle data in the face definition
ts
sequence is not for the top plane.
gh
3. Calibration measurement has been designated for the top plane or an inclined plane.
ri
4. Groove center, hole center, boss center, and step width measurements have been designated for an inclined plane.
ll
Cause
.A
5. Machining at the work hand side “↓Z” (B-axis at 90, approach in the Z-axis) has been specified for the direction of
the geometry sequence in coordinate measurement.
N
O
6. Machining at the work hand side “↓Z” (B-axis at 90, approach in the Z-axis) has been specified for the direction of
TI
the geometry sequence in workpiece measurement.
60
A
7. Measurement at the work hand side has been attempted with the parameter setting of L106 bit5 = 0 (B-axis
R
40
user-defined angle measurement invalid).

PO
29
1. A corner-face unit and plane inclination measurement can be designated only for an inclined plane.
R
o.
2. Table rotational machining can be executed only for the top plane.
O
N
3. Calibration measurement is possible only for the side.

al
4. Only reference plane measurement and plane inclination measurement are possible for inclined planes.
ri
ZA
5. Change the direction setting of the geometry sequence in coordinate measurement to “↓X” (B-axis at 90, approach in
Se
Action the X-axis).

A
IM
Alternatively, select “↓X”, “←Z”, or “←X” for measurement with the B-axis at 0.
6. Change the direction setting of the geometry sequence in workpiece measurement to “↓X” (B-axis at 90, approach in
K
the X-axis).
ZA
Alternatively, select “↓X”, “←Z”, or “←X” for measurement with the B-axis at 0.
A
7. Change the parameter setting to L106 bit5 = 1.

M
YA
664 3-D UNIT NOT FOUND IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A 3-D machining unit has been set in the program in spite of the fact that 3-D machining option is not provided.
3
Cause
01
)2
Erase the 3-D machining unit from the machining program.

Action
(c
ht
665 ILLEGAL DATA IN 3-D UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
yr
The 3-D machining unit lacks of unit data.

Cause
op
C
Review the machining program and set necessary data in the 3-D machining unit.
Action
666 PLANE DATA NOT FOUND IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The 3-D machining unit lacks of plane definition data.
Cause
Review the machining program and set plane definition data in the 3-D machining unit.
Action
3-124
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
667 CHECK SURFACE DATA NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The 3-D machining unit lacks of check surface data.
Cause
Review the machining program and set check surface data in the 3-D machining unit.
Action
668 ILLEGAL PLANE DATA IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The plane definition data in the 3-D machining unit is not complete.
Cause
Review the machining program and set data in the plane definition data item.
Action
d.
ve
669 ILLEGAL TOLERANCE DATA INPUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The value of the tolerance parameter that has been designated in the tool sequence is “0”.
s
Cause
re
ts
Check the parameters E67 through E75, and set a value other than “0” in the parameter whose setting is “0”.
gh
Action
ri
670 ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA IN PRG. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The tool sequence in the 3-D machining unit lacks of data.
Cause
N
O
Review the machining program and input data to the tool sequence.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
671 ILLEGAL MOVE SURFACE DATA (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The coordinate conversion data in the 3-D machining unit is not complete.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the machining program and make the coordinate conversion data complete.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
672 ILLEGAL AREA DATA INPUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
In the check surface data of the 3-D machining unit, the setting of the maximum value is smaller than that of the minimum
Cause value.
K
ZA
Review the check surface data, and make corrections so that the setting of the maximum value is equal to or greater than
Action that of the minimum value for each axis.
A
M
673 FL NUMBER EXCEEDED (3-D UNIT) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
In the ruled-surface unit, the number of FLs is in excess of 20, or in the line- or face-machining unit, the number of defined
Cause
3
figures is in excess of 2.
01
)2
Review the machining program and correct the shape data.

Action
(c
ht
674 NO 5FACE CUTTING OPTION (WNo., UNo., ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
An attempt has been made to execute a five-surface machining program when the five-surface machining option was not
yr
Cause present.
op
C
Set the five-surface machining option to execute a five-surface machining program.

Action
675 ILLEGAL CUTTING FACE DESIGNATED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) P (S) Red (Blue)
A face that cannot be cut with the selected head has been designated.
Cause
Change either the selected face or the head.

Action
3-125
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
676 ILLEGAL UNIT (WNo., UNo., ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. The face definition unit or five-surface machining unit includes illegal units and measurement sequences.
Illegal units and sequences:
face definition unit, pallet change unit, process end unit, index unit, WPC unit, and measurement of workpiece
inclination.
2. An MMS unit has been set in the program that has table rotational machining designated in its face definition
sequence.
3. Executing the mill-turning unit has been attempted in a machine not having a mill-turning option.
Cause
4. An attempt was made to run a program including a table selection unit on the machine not equipped with table
selection function or the machine equipped with table selection function but while the function is invalid (parameter
D106 bit 4 = 0).
5. C-axis machining has been selected for machining at the work hand side. Or, turning has been selected for
d .
machining at the work hand side.
ve
6. Workpiece measurement has been executed with the work hand at 0 other than in the workpiece transfer unit.
er
7. An attempt was made to execute an engraving unit on a machine that does not feature the engraving function option.
s
re
1. Remove all illegal units and sequences from the machining program.
ts
2. MMS measurement is not possible while table rotational machining is effective.
gh
3. The mill-turning unit cannot be executed without a mill-turning option.
ri
4. With the machine not equipped with table selection function, correct the program into a program without table selection
ll
Action unit. With the machine equipped with table selection function, make table selection valid (parameter D106 bit 4 = 1)
.A
and check the program and tool path before starting machining.
N
5. Delete the C-axis machining unit and turning unit at the work hand side.
O
TI
6. Set the work hand angle to 0 in the workpiece transfer unit.
60
A
7. No engraving unit can be executed since the engraving function option is not featured.
R
40
677 UNREGISTERED HEAD DATA (WNo., UNo., ) B I (L) P (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
Head data corresponding to the head of the designated head number does not exist.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the designated head number.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
678 NO INTERSECTION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A
IM
In the line- or face-machining unit, the coordinates of the intersection point of figures cannot be obtained because of
Cause shortage of, or contradiction, in the free-shape data.
K
ZA
Action ——
A
M
679 CONNECTING CORNER IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
The figures cannot be connected smoothly at corner R because of contradiction in the data of corner R or in the data of the
Cause
3
figures in front and rear of corner R.

01
)2
Review the machining program and check the value of corner R of the free shapes.
Action
(c
ht
680 NUMBER OF HOLES EXCEEDED (>500) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
The point-machining units include one(s) that has more than 500 holes defined in it.
yr
Cause
op
Review the point-machining units, and make corrections so that the total number of hole settings in one point-machining
C
Action unit in not greater than 500.
681 CORNER R/C DEFINED AT SPT/FPT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Corner rounding or corner chamfering has been set at the starting or ending point of a figure when defining figures in the
Cause central linear machining, right-hand linear machining, left-hand linear machining, right-hand chamfering or left-hand
chamfering units.
Review the machining program and correct it so that the corner rounding or corner chamfering is not set at the starting or
Action ending point.
3-126
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
682 ILLEGAL REPEAT FIGURE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Contradiction presides in the figure rotation or figure shift data that has been set during defining free figures in the line- or
Cause face-machining unit.
Review and correct the corresponding shape data.

Action
683 UNDEFINED CORNER (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The specified size of corner rounding or chamfering is inadmissible.
Example :
This alarm does not occur in general unless the specified size of rounding or chamfering exceeds the length of one of the
two sides of the corner concerned. As for a rectangular line- or face-machining shape described with the aid of
.
[SQUARE], in particular, the size in question for corners CN1 (starting point) and CN4 (ending point) must not exceed
d
ve
half the length of the side between them since the cutting start position will be set in actual machining to the mid-point of
er
that side.
s
Specified
re
Starting point
Cause chamfering size
Cutting start position
ts
Ending point CN1
gh
CN4
ri
Sides of the corner
ll
to be rounded or
.A
chamfered
N
O
CN3 CN2
TI
60
A
Check the shape sequence data in question to correct the size of corner rounding or chamfering.
R
40
Action
PO
In the above-mentioned particular case of rectangular shape, use [ARBITRY], instead of [SQUARE], to describe the
29
desired shape on multiple lines of shape sequence data.

R
o.
684 POINT CUTTING PATTERN ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
The point-machining shape definition data is not appropriate.

al
Cause
ri
ZA
Se

A
Action
IM
685 SQUARE CANNOT BE DEFINED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
K
ZA
When the shape pattern is “square”, the input data cannot be used to make shape definitions.
Cause
A
M

YA
Action
3
686 NO STARTING POINT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
01
During input of free-shape data (open-figure data) to the line-machining unit, “?” has been set as the definition of the
)2
Cause starting point.

(c
ht
Review the machining program and set the coordinates of the starting point of the free shape.
Action
ig
yr
687 NO FINISH POINT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
op
During input of free-shape data (open-figure data) to the line-machining unit, “?” has been set as the definition of the ending
C
Cause point.
Review the machining program and set the coordinates of the ending point of the free shape.
Action
688 INSUFFICIENT INPUT DATA (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The coordinates of the intersection point cannot be calculated since the free-shape input data in the line- or face-machining
Cause unit is incomplete.
Review the corresponding shape data and set data that is wanting.
Action
3-127
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
689 INPUT DATA TOO MANY (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. The line- or face-machining unit contains too much free-shape input data, and there is contradiction between
Cause overlapping data.
2. Too many tool sequences have been set for the line- or face-machining unit.
1. Review the corresponding shape data and erase either one of the overlapping data sets.
Action
2. Reduce the number of tool sequences.
690 ILLEGAL RADIUS (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Contradiction exists in the free-shape data that have been set to define arc in the line- or face-machining units.
Cause
Review the corresponding shape data and set correct data.
.
Action
d
ve
er
691 MOUNT (VALLEY) SHAPE ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
s
The second figures (inside figures) are not yet defined in the endmilling-mountain (STEP), pocket milling-mountain or
re
Cause pocket milling-valley unit.
ts
gh
Review the machining program, and define the second shape in the endmilling-mountain (STEP), pocket milling-mountain
Action or pocket milling-valley unit.
ri
ll
692 MAX POINT NUMBER EXCEEDED (>200) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
.A
The number of points which are necessary to define the shapes designated in the line- or face-machining unit exceeds 200.
N
Cause
O
TI
Review the machining program, and reduce the number of shapes within one line- or face-machining unit.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
29
693 NUMBER OF SHAPES TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
R
Among the line- or face-machining units is one(s) that contains more shapes than allowable within one unit.
o.
Cause
N
C
al
Review the corresponding shape data and check the number of shapes.
ri
ZA
Action
Se
694 FIXED FIGURE DESIGNATED ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
IM
Fixed shapes are included in the shape data (open figures) of the central linear machining, right-hand linear machining,
K
Cause left-hand linear machining, right-hand chamfering, left-hand chamfering or endmilling-groove units.
ZA
Change the fixed shapes to free ones.

A
Action
M
YA
695 POINT INSIDE CIRCLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
3
It is not possible to draw a tangent line from point P1 since it is inside the arc.
01
Cause
)2
Review the machining program and check the free-shaped data.

(c
Action
ht
ig
696 ILLEGAL DIRECTION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
yr
“Left” or “right” is set for the crossing point (P), though “up” or “down” should have been set.
op
Cause
C
Review the machining program and check the value of the crossing point (P).
Action
697 DATUM <P> REQUIRED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The crossing point (P) is not yet input in spite of the fact that there are more than two points of intersection with the arc.
Cause
Review the machining program and set the crossing point (P).
Action
3-128
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
698 TWO POINTS OVERLAP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The coordinate values of the start point and end point are the same.
Cause
For the pattern of straight line, the data of X/Y are set to exactly the same end point coordinate values as X/Y present on
Action the preceding line of the program; delete these data.
699 PARALLEL LINE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The two straight lines are parallel to each other, and thus the coordinates of their intersection point cannot be obtained.
Cause
Review the corresponding shape data and set correct data.

Action
d.
ve
s er
re
ts
gh
ri
ll
.A
N
O
TI
60
A
R
40
PO
29
R
o.
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
K
ZA
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-129
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1601 ILLEGAL ATC MODE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ATC mode ID number 5 has been set in the main program.
Cause
ATC mode ID number 5 can be set only in subprograms. Set ATC mode ID number 0 to 4 in the main program.
Action
1602 SET INDEX UNIT BEFORE MACHINING (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The position of W-axis is not specified in the index unit preceding the machining unit.
Cause
Review the machining program and set the position of the W-axis in the index unit.
Action
d.
ve
1603 PROGRAM IS NOT WPC. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The main MAZATROL program of the initial-point scheme has been executed under the setting of the machine model with
s
Cause
re
MAZATROL-based control of the lower turret.
ts
Re-create the main MAZATROL program into a program of the workpiece scheme.
gh
Action
ri
1604 ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION (INDEX B) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
There is a mismatch in workpiece scheme data settings between the machining direction for index unit POS-B and the
Cause machining direction for the machining section of the lower-turret milling tool.
N
O
Insert an index unit in front of the desired milling unit. Next, set the value to POS-B appropriate for the lower-turret milling
TI
60
Action tool machining section, or select the appropriate lower-turret milling tool according to the particular machining direction for
POS-B of the index unit.
A
R
40
PO
1605 LOW TUR CANNOT EXECUTE MIRROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
29
Either lower-turret turning unit, the measuring unit, the manual program mode unit, or subprogram EIA call has been
o.
Cause
O
executed with MIRROR of the WPC shift unit made valid in a program of the workpiece scheme.
N
C
al
Insert the WPC shift unit in front of the desired unit and then make MIRROR invalid.
K
Action
ri
ZA
Se
1606 ILLEGAL CUTTING ANGLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
IM
The infeed angle or relief angle during cutting is 0° or less.

Cause
K
ZA
Confirm the infeed angle or relief angle in the tool data.

A
Action
Change the B-axis machining angle.
M
YA
1607 NEED TOOL ROTATION DIRECTION ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The M-SP ROT. item (which is indispensable for executing a MAZATROL program when K102 bit 6 = 1) remains unset on
3
Cause
01
the TOOL DATA display.

)2
Perform the required setting for the M-SP ROT. item.

Action
(c
ht
1608 NEED SELECT TABLE UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
yr
When table selection is valid (parameter D106 bit 4 = 1), no table selection unit is set before the WPC, WPC shift or
Cause
op
indexing unit.
C
Set a table selection unit before the WPC, WPC shift or indexing unit.
Action
1609 CANNOT SET WPC IN 2WORKPIECE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A basic coordinates sytem unit (WPC) is set in the program section for the two-workpiece machining sequence.
Cause
Delete the basic coordinates system unit.

Action
3-130
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1610 SET INDEX UNIT IN 2WORKPIECE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Machining units in the two-workpiece machining section are not preceded by an index unit.
Cause
Set an index unit.

Action
1611 SET INDEX UNIT AFTER 2WORKPIECE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Machining units after the two-workpiece machining section are not preceded by an index unit.
Cause
Set an index unit.

Action
.
d
ve
1612 SET HEAD UNIT AFTER 2WORKPIECE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
Machining units after the two-workpiece machining section are not preceded by a head selection unit.
s
Cause
re
ts
Set a head selection unit.
gh
Action
ri
1613 SET HEAD UNIT IN 2WORKPIECE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
Machining units in the two-workpiece machining section are not preceded by a head selection unit.
Cause
N
O
Set a head selection unit.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
1614 NO TABLE ROTATION AXIS (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
Index unit is set while NO USE is selected for ROT. AXIS in table selection unit on the machine not equipped with spindle
R
Cause
o.
head of swiveling type (parameter BA48 is set to 0).

O
N
Delete the index unit.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
1615 TABLE ROTATION CENTER NOT AGREE (WNo., UNo., SNo. ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The ROT.CENTER setting in the table selection unit does not match the TABLE-CT. setting in the FRM unit.
Cause
K
ZA
Review either the ROT.CENTER setting in the table selection unit or the TABLE-CT. setting in the FRM unit.
Action
A
M
1616 CYLINDER CHAMFERING N/A (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program although the smooth chamfering function is not provided.
Cause
3
01
The smooth chamfering program cannot be executed because the smooth chamfering function is not provided.
)2
Action
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-131
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1617 CYLINDER CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program with the machine type with which the smooth
chamfering function is not available.
2. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program when the B-axis angle is other than +90° in the end
milling slot unit of WPC workpiece scheme.
3. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program when the machining face is other than cylindrical
surface in the C-axis point machining unit of WPC workpiece scheme.
Cause
4. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program when HOLE-DEP is set to a value other than 0 in the
chamfering tool sequence for point machining.
5. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program when the cylinder radius is set to 0 or blank in the
end milling slot unit of WPC workpiece scheme.
6. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program when CHMF is set to 0 or blank in the end milling
. d
slot unit or point machining unit.
ve
er
1. Delete the smooth chamfering program.
s
2. Set an index unit before the machining unit that includes smooth chamfering and set angle B to +90°.
re
3. Set the machining face to the cylindrical surface in the C-axis point machining unit.
ts
Action
4. Set HOLE-DEP in the chamfering tool sequence to 0.
gh
5. Input the correct cylinder radius value in the end milling slot unit.
ri
6. Input the correct value for CHMF.
ll
.A
1618 —— ( , , )
N
O
Cause ——
TI
60
Action ——
A
R
40
PO
29
1619 ILLEGAL APPROACH SCHEME (WNo., UNo., SNo. ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
R
o.
In the selection of the approach scheme for INTELLIGENT POCKET MILLING (IPM), “TAPER” or “PECKING” was
O
Cause
N
selected.
C
al
Select “HELICAL” or “STANDARD”.

ri
ZA
Action
Se
( , , )
IM
Cause
K
ZA
Action
A
M
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-132
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
3-2-8 No. 700 - No. 799, No. 1700 - No. 1799 (MAZATROL program error)

No. Message Display
700 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
701 DEFINED SHAPE TOO SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

The shape compensation clearance with respect to the shape of the endmilling-top is too large; or the tool diameter with
Cause respect to the size of the line-inside machining is too large.
d .
ve
Change the shape compensation clearance (parameter E13) to an appropriate value: or use a tool of smaller diameter.
Action
ser
re
702 FIGURE DEFINITION ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue
ts
1. The input shape is contradictory to logic, that is, the radius of the arc, for example, does not agree with the distance
from the center.
gh
Cause
2. An attempt was made to execute the smooth chamfering program when CHMF in the end milling slot unit is set to other
ri
than 0, when an arc is specified or when the shape sequence is specified in three or more lines.
ll
.A
1. Such contradiction usually results from arithmetic errors. Change the radial depth of cut by some micro, or use a tool of
smaller diameter.
N
Action
O
2. When executing the smooth chamfering program, set a linear shape, whose angle formed with the X-axis is 0 degrees,
TI
in two lines (start point line and end point line).
60
703 PROCESS DEFINITION ERROR A

(WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue
R
40
PO
The machining conditions are incorrect (for example, the radial depth of cut is zero).
29
Cause
R
o.
Change the machining conditions to correct ones.

N
Action
al
K
ri
ZA
704 TOOL INTERFERENCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

Se
In area machining, the tool diameter with respect to the figure is too large.
Cause
IM
K
Replace the tool with one that has a smaller diameter; or select the M2 mode endmilling-mountain (STEP) machining
Action
ZA
pattern with setting bit 7 of parameter E91 if this error occurs in the outside machining endmilling-mountain (STEP).
A
705 APPROACH POINT ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Red

M
YA
1. The approach point cannot be obtained.

Cause
2. The approach path or retract path may interfere with the programmed shape.
3
01
1. Reduce the tool diameter, the approach amount (parameters E1, E2) and/or the overlap amount (parameter E21).
Action
)2
2. Extend the shape toward the approach or escape side.

(c
706 ILLEGAL FIGURE DATA (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L O Blue

ht
 The shape has been separated into three segments or more as a result of offsetting.
ig
 The inside form does not contain the center of the outside form for outside-related fixed path.
yr
Cause
 The outside form is concave for inside-related fixed path.
op
 The inside form is not adequate since it contains a concave or an intersection.

C
Change the machining pattern (from inversed type to fixed type, for example); or divide the machining shape in advance so
Action that it will not be separated by offsetting.
707 CHAMFER CUTTER INTERFERENCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

1. The chamfering tool interferes with the side wall or bottom.
Cause 2. The tool edge is not in perfect contact with the surface to chamfer.
3. A chamfering tool with a chamfering angle other than 45 is used for Smooth chamfering.
1. Use a tool which does not interfere with the side wall or bottom.
Action 2. Shorten the chamfering width or use a tool having a long cutting edge.
3. With Smooth chamfering, always use a chamfering tool with a chamfering angle of 45.
3-133
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
708 BLOCK DATA LIMIT EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L S Blue
In the EIA program, the total number of characters within one block is in excess of 248.
Cause
Divide the block so that one block contains 248 characters or less.
Action
709 CHECK DEPTH-R (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L S Blue

No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there is no or too short a distance between end points of the
Cause shape.
Change the radial depth of cut in the tool sequence by some micro.
Action
d.
ve
710 CORNER ROUNDING CUTTER DIA ERR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L S Blue
er
The programmed amount of round chamfering differs from the following:
s
Cause
re
(NOM- – MIN-)/2.
where NOM- and MIN- are the setting values of the selected tool on the TOOL FILE display.
ts
Select a tool appropriate to the chamfering amount.
gh
Action
ri
ll
711 UNIT DATA NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
.A
Unset unit data exists for the unit you have made an attempt to execute.
N
Cause
O
TI
Set all data.
60
Action A
R
40
PO
712 ILLEGAL UNIT DATA (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
29
Sequence data for the unit you have made an attempt to execute does not match to the unit data.
o.
Cause
O
N
C
al
Delete the sequence data, and then set correct sequence data.
K
Action
ri
ZA
Se
713 SEQUENCE DATA NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
IM
1. No sequence data exists for the unit you have made an attempt to execute.
Cause
K
2. The machine was operated or a tool path check was performed with “DEP-1” or “FR” set to “?”.
ZA
1. Set sequence data.

A
Action 2. Set a numeric value for “DEP-1” and “FR”. Or, press the [AUTO SET] menu key after checking that all setting items in
M
the unit data/sequence data are properly set.

YA
714 ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
3
Data out of the allowable setting range exists in the sequence data of the unit you have made an attempt to execute.
01
Cause
)2
Correct the sequence data.

(c
Action
ht
ig
715 ILLEGAL CUTTING POINT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
yr
The specified infeed point is outside the profile of the workpiece (approximate workpiece shape designated by common
op
Cause unit).
C
Move the infeed point into the profile of the workpiece.

Action
716 ILLEGAL CUTTING START POINT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The relative position of the starting or ending point specified by the sequence data with respect to the specified infeed point
Cause is not appropriate.
Change the position of the starting or ending point of the sequence data, or change the position of the infeed point.
Action
3-134
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
717 SHAPE EXCEEDS MATERIAL SIZE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The starting or ending point is outside the profile of the workpiece (approximate workpiece shape specified by common
Cause unit).
Change the starting or ending point.

Action
718 CUTTING DIRECTION NOT DEFINED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The direction of machining (forward/backward) cannot be determined using the specified infeed point and sequence data.
Cause
Change the position of the starting or ending point.

Action
. d
ve
719 REVERSE SHAPE CONTOUR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
Part of the defined shape is opposite in direction of machining with respect to the reference axis movement direction.
s
Cause
re
ts
Correct the position of the starting or ending point.
gh
Action
ri
720 DOUBLE SHAPE CONTOUR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The defined workpiece shape has overlaps.
Cause
N
O
Correct the position of the starting or ending point.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
721 ILLEGAL RADIUS (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
Arc-drawing data you have specified is illegal.

R
o.
Cause That is, the relationship between the starting point, ending point, and radius of the arc is incorrect.
O
N
It is impossible to define an arc.

al
Correct the starting-point data, ending-point data, or radius data of the arc.
ri
ZA
Action
Se
A
IM
722 ILLEGAL CORNER DEFINITION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
There are the following errors related to the designated corner C data:
K
<BAR, CPY, CORNER>

ZA
Cause The arc length of the block present before or after corner C is smaller than that of corner C.
A
<T. GROOV>
M
Added corner C is outside the workpiece profile.

YA
Correct either the length of corner C or the sequence data set before or after corner C.
Action
3
01
723 EXCEEDS NUMBER OF SHAPES

)2
(WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

(c
Defined shape of machining or of the workpiece is too complicated to be processed.

Cause
ht
ig
Simplify the shape of the machining or of the workpiece.

yr
Action
op
724 EXCEEDS NUMBER OF VALLEY SHAPES (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
C
The total number of valleys in the machining shape is in excess of 16.

Cause
Divide the machining shape in multiple units.

Action
3-135
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
725 ILLEGAL COMMON DATA (RADIAL) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
OD-MAX and ID-MIN in the common unit do not satisfy the following condition:
Cause
OD-MAX > ID-MIN  0
Set correct data to OD-MAX, or ID-MIN.
Action
726 ILLEGAL COMMON DATA (AXIAL) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
LENGTH, WORK FACE and FIN-LENGTH do not satisfy the following condition:
Cause
LENGTH  WORK FACE + FIN-LENGTH > 0
Set correct data to LENGTH, WORK FACE and FIN-LENGTH.
Action
. d
ve
727 MATERIAL SHAPE CROSSING (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
There is a data overlap between the inside diameter side (IN) and outside diameter side (OUT) of the workpiece shape
s
Cause
re
which has been designated in the MATERIAL unit.
ts
Change the IN or OUT shape data.
gh
Action
ri
728 EXCESSIVE FINISH ALLOWANCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The area to be rough-cut does not exist since the designated finishing allowance is larger than the shape defined by the
Cause sequence data.
N
O
Either change the finishing allowance or cancel rough-cutting.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
729 ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGNATED (CNR) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
In the CORNER unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Set the correct data to SPT and FPT.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
730 ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGNATED (EDG) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
In the FACING unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.
Cause
K
ZA

Action
A
M
731 ILLEGAL NUM. OF PATHS (THR) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
The designated number of cutting times for #0, #3 thread type is less than 3.
Cause
3
01
)2
Change the number of cutting times to 3 or more, or change the thread type.
Action
(c
ht
732 ACCELERATION DISTANCE EXCEED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
The calculated distance of threading acceleration is in excess of the allowable value.

yr
Cause
op
C
Change the related parameter setting value or reduce the surface speed to its minimum permissible value.
Action
733 ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGNATED (GRV) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
In the T. GROOV unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.
Cause

Action
3-136
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
734 ILLEGAL SHAPE EXCEEDS MTRL SIZE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
For machining of multiple grooves, the second and subsequent grooves are outside the workpiece profile defined by
Cause common unit.
Reduce the number of grooves.

Action
735 ILLEGAL DESIGNATED TL WID (GRV) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The designated tool width does not match to the groove shape specified in the T. GROOV unit.
Cause
Designate some other tool, or correct the width of the designated tool.
Action
d .
ve
736 ILLEGAL OVERLAP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The parameter-set amount of grooving overlap is larger than the width or diameter of the designated tool.
s
Cause
re
ts
Either designate some other tool, correct the width or diameter of the designated tool, or change the parameter setting
gh
Action (TC75).
ri
737 ILLEGAL DRILLING DIRECTION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
In the T-DRILL or T-TAP unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.
Cause
N
O
Set the correct data to SPT-Z and FPT-Z.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
738 CORNER (R/C) DESIGNATED OVERLAP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
In the unit (BAR, CPY, etc.), different types of corners (R and C) have been designated for portions that are identical in
R
Cause
o.
shape.
O
N
Check the designated corner portions and delete one of the corners.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
739 ILLEGAL FINISHING ALLOWANCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
In the #0, #0 type of THREAD unit data, the following condition exists:
K
(Finishing allowance) > (First depth-of-cut/4)

ZA
Cause
A
Calculated from the height (HGT) and the number of times (NUMBER) in unit data.
M
Specified by parameter TC78.

YA
Change either the thread height or the setting of parameter TC78.

Action
3
01
)2
740 ILLEGAL ANGLE IN FIRST SEQUENCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
(c
The relationship between the thread shape and threading angle that are defined by the first sequence data of the THREAD
Cause unit is incorrect.
ht
ig
Change the threading angle, or change the coordinates of the starting or ending point of the first sequence.
yr
Action
op
C
741 ILLEGAL THREAD ANGLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
In the machining type that requires the designation of a threading angle, the following condition is not satisfied.
Cause
(Tool tip angle)  (Threading angle)
Change either the threading angle or the data of the tool to be used.
Action
3-137
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
742 ILLEGAL THREAD HEIGHT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
In the THREAD unit data, the following condition is not satisfied.
(Finishing allowance)  (Thread height)
Cause
Designated in the unit data.
Set using parameter TC78.
Change the thread height or the setting of parameter TC78.
Action
743 INTERSECTION NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there are shape sequence data disparities.
.
Cause
d
ve
er
Correct the shape sequence data.
Action
s
re
744 DATA MISSING (INTERSECTION) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ts
gh
No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there are lack of data to automatically calculate a point of
Cause intersection.
ri
ll
Correct the unit data or the sequence data.
.A
Action
N
O
745 INTERSECTION CALCULATE IMPOSS. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
TI
No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there are illegal data in the program.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO
29
Correct the unit data or the sequence data.

Action
R
o.
O
N
746 NO DEPTH OF CUT INFO. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
al
A cutting depth cannot be determined for the tool since the DEPTH or CUT ANGLE data item on the TOOL DATA display
ri
ZA
Cause is left blank.

Se
Set data in DEPTH or CUT ANGLE, or use some other tool.

IM
Action
K
747 CHIP BREAKING CYCLE N/A (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ZA
Executing the chip-cutting cycle program has been attempted in spite of the chip-cutting cycle option being absent.
A
Cause
M
(3 or 4 has been assigned to PAT. in the roughing tool sequence.)

YA
The chip-cutting cycle option must be present before the chip-cutting cycle program can be executed.
Action
(Assign either 0, 1, or 2 to PAT. in the roughing tool sequence.)
3
01
748 CANNOT MAKE T-PATH (CHK DEPTH) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
)2
1. A normal path cannot be created since the cutting area is wider than twice the depth of cut per pass.
(c
2. When the cutting area is equal to the clearance, a normal path cannot be created since the cutting area is wider than
ht
Cause the depth of cut per pass.

ig
3. A normal path cannot be created since the cutting area overlaps the deceleration distance and is wider than the depth
yr
of cut per pass.

op
1. Increase the cutting depth to be set in the tool sequence, or narrow down the cutting area.
C
2. Increase the cutting depth to be set in the tool sequence, or reduce the clearance.
Action
3. Two overlapping areas must not be present. Narrow down PRE-DIA (deceleration distance) to be set in the tool
sequence, or narrow down the cutting area, or increase the cutting depth to be set in the tool sequence.
749 CANNOT DRAW FIGURE ( , , ) A L S Blue
1. Shape drawing of the program set with workpiece placement error correction was attempted on the TRACE display.
Cause 2. Shape drawing of a main program that does not contain turning operation but calls a subprogram containing turning
operation was attempted on a VARIAXIS machine featuring the turning function.
Action ——
3-138
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
750 ——
Cause ——
Action ——
751 CURVE DEFINITION ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Blue
A curved surface that cannot be machined has been defined.
Cause
No corrective actions can be taken against this error; define a curved surface that can be machined.
Action
d.
ve
752 DESIGNATED AREA DATA IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Blue
er
The check surface values are incorrect.
s
re
1. For rough-machining 1 or 2: Check surface Z min.  material height
Cause
ts
2. For finishing: Check surface Z min.  initial Z
gh
3. Check surface X min.  X max., or Y min.  Y max., or Z min.  Z max.
ri
Set the check surface values as follows:
ll
1. For rough-machining 1 or 2: Check surface Z min.  material height
.A
Action
2. For finishing: Check surface Z min.  initial Z
N
3. Check surface X min.  X max., and Y min.  Y max., and Z min.  Z max.
O
TI
753 SMALL TOOL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Blue
60
A
In rough-machining 2, the tool diameter is extremely small in comparison with the dimensions of the defined 3-D figure.
R
40
Cause
PO
29
Use tools whose diameters are no less than 1/100 of the distance between the maximum and minimum dimensions of the
R
o.
Action
O
3-D figure.
N
C
al
754 LARGE TOOL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
K
ri
ZA
Tool interference has occurred.

Se
Cause
A
IM
Set the approach path and the tool size so that the interference does not occur.
Action
K
ZA
755 R DIRECTION PITCH SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
In rough-machining 2, the pitch in the radial direction is extremely small in comparison with the dimensions of the defined
M
Cause 3-D figure.

YA
Set the radial-direction pitch to a value no less than 1/200 of the distance between the maximum and minimum dimensions
3
Action of the 3-D figure.

01
)2
756 Z DIRECTION PITCH SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
(c
In rough-machining 2, the pitch in the Z direction is extremely small in comparison with the dimensions of the defined 3-D
ht
Cause figure.
ig
yr
Set the Z-direction pitch to a value no less than 1/250 of (material height – height of the Z bottom of the 3-D figure).
Action
op
C
757 CURVE DEFINITION LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. For rough-machining 2 with designation of workpiece size, the dimensions of the defined figure are larger than those of
the workpiece.
Cause 2. For rough-machining 2, a material height smaller than “(height of the Z bottom of the 3-D figure) + (height of a
machining area outside the figure)” [parameters E84, E89] has been set irrespective of designating the offset amount
or the workpiece size.
Change the E84 and E89 parameter settings so that: for the offset amount designation, “(height of the bottom of the 3-D
Action figure) + E84 < material height”, and; for the workpiece size designation, “(height of the bottom of the 3-D figure) + E89 <
material height”.
3-139
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
758 INITIAL POINT SET ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
In rough-machining 1 or 2, initial Z  material height.
Cause
Change settings to give initial Z > material height.

Action
759 WPC UNIT NOT FOUND (MILL & TURN) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The workpiece shape cannot be defined since, in a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting, no
Cause WPC unit is prepared before machining units.
Create a WPC unit before the machining units and then enter the correct data.
Action
.
d
ve
760 NO T. CENTER POINT IN WPC UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
1. In a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting, the workpiece origin specified in the WPC unit
s
re
Cause which precedes C-axis point/line machining or turning units does not correspond to the axis of turning.
2. Additional basic coordinate system or work offset value is set in the WPC unit preceded by the common unit.
ts
gh
1. Before creating C-axis machining or turning unit, create a WPC unit with reference to the axis of turning.
Action
ri
2. Instead of additional basic coordinate system or work offset value, specify T. CENTER to set the WPC-zero point to the
turning center in the WPC unit preceded by the common unit.
ll
.A
761 HEAD ANGLE INCORRECT (C-AXIS) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
In a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting, the machining section specified in a C-axis point/line
O
Cause machining or turning unit does not correspond to the B-axis angle specified in an index unit.
TI
60
A
Before creating C-axis machining or turning unit, create an index unit to specify the B-axis angle appropriate for the section
R
40
Action to be machined.
PO
29
762 PROGRAM IS NOT MILL & TURN TYPE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
R
o.
It was attempted to set a turning or C-axis point/line machining unit in a program of initial-point scheme (ONLY MILL).
N
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Delete the turning or C-axis point/line machining unit, or set it in a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC
Se
Action setting.
A
IM
763 START PROCESS ILLEGAL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
K
It was attempted to execute restart operation from, or single-process operation of, an unsuitable unit.
Cause
ZA
A
Specify an appropriate unit for the desired mode of operation.

M
Action
YA
764 MAIN PRG/SUB PRG TYPE MISMATCH (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
3
01
There are programming units of workpiece scheme with WPC setting and of the same scheme with Z-offset setting
Cause prepared in one and the same program.
)2
(c
Delete the incompatible units to create a program of the required scheme.

Action
ht
ig
765 Z-OFFSET NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
yr
op
The indispensable Z-offset is not yet set for a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with Z-offset setting.
Cause
C
Set the Z-offset item externally in the setup data page.

Action
766 MAXIMUM NO.OF LAYOUTS EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
It was attempted to run a program which contains a process with more than 4000 layout data items.
Cause The number of repetitions exceeds 9999990 for a program (CONTI. = 1 in the END unit) without workpiece transfer unit.
Reduce the number of layout data items for one process to no larger than 4000.
Action Modify the program to reduce the number of repetitions to no larger than 9999990.
3-140
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
767 ILLEGAL ESCAPE TOOL No. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The setting in the parameter for the retraction tool is not correct.
Cause
Check the parameter concerned.

Action
768 4 AXIS MACHINING PROGRAM ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The setting for simultaneous machining is not correct.
Cause (Example : Only the upper or the lower turret is specified for simultaneous machining.)
Review the program and perform corrections as required (e. g. to change the turret to be used for the particular tool
Action sequence of the unit concerned).
.d
ve
769 ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION/SPDL ROT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The specification of the direction of turning spindle rotation differs between those tools on the upper and lower turrets which
s
Cause
re
are to be used for simultaneous machining.
ts
Select another tool, or change the specification in question, on either side for the same direction of turning spindle rotation
gh
Action as for the other tool.
ri
770 FIN LEN ERROR (CHECK COM UNIT) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
For the execution of a composite program: The settings in the common unit do not satisfy the following condition:
Cause FIN-LENGTH  LENGTH – WORK FACE.
N
O
Reduce the FIN-LENGTH setting to satisfy the above condition.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
771 ILLEGAL LOW TUR COMMON UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
A unit of machining with the lower turret (or including a command for its retraction) is created within a program whose
R
Cause
o.
common unit declares (under LOW TURR) that the lower turret is “not used”.
O
N
Change over the LOW TURR setting, or modify the machining unit concerned in the turret selection.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
772 NO HEAD UNIT IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
1. For the execution of a composite program: Machining units are not preceded by a head selection unit (HEAD).
Cause
2. For the execution of a composite program: The workpiece transfer unit (TRANSFER) is not followed by a HEAD unit.
K
ZA
1. Set a HEAD unit to specify the turning spindle to be used for the succeeding machining units.
Action
A
2. Set a HEAD unit after the TRANSFER unit to specify the turning spindle to be used for the succeeding machining units.
M
773 TRANSFER UNIT IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
For the execution of an independent program: A workpiece transfer unit (TRANSFER) is erroneously set in a program to be
Cause
3
run independently on either HD side.

01
)2
Delete the inappropriate TRANSFER unit from the program.

Action
(c
ht
774 HEAD UNIT IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
For the execution of an independent program: A head selection unit (HEAD) is erroneously set in a program to be run
yr
Cause independently on either HD side.

op
C
Delete the inappropriate HEAD unit from the program.

Action
775 TOOL CANNOT PERFORM FACING (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
For tool selection on a turret-type tool-post: The section to be machined by the selected tool differs from the corresponding
Cause setting in the unit data line.
Change the setting in the unit data line with respect to the tool, or select another tool as required.
Action
3-141
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
776 NO Y-AXIS (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A Y-axis machining unit is created for a turret not correspondingly executed.
Cause
Delete the inappropriate machining unit from the program, or describe the particular machining process without using the
Action Y-axis control.
777 INCORRECT POSIT. CANNOT RESTART (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The restarting function has been started from the balanced-cutting with the lower turret.
Cause
Specify the upper turret to execute the restarting function from balanced cutting.
Action
. d
ve
778 INCORRECT POSIT. CANNOT START (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The single-process function has been applied to the balanced-cutting with the lower turret.
s
Cause
re
ts
Specify the upper turret to execute the single-process function for balanced cutting.
gh
Action
ri
779 —— ( , , )
ll
.A
Cause ——
N
O
TI
Action ——
60
A
R
40
780 APPROACH PATH INTERFERENCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The programmed shape of the approach path and/or retraction path interferes with the workpiece (programmed machining
R
Cause
o.
shape + machining allowance).

O
N
Reduce the amount of approach and/or the amount of overlap or the tool diameter.
al
Action
Or specify another position as the approach point.
ri
ZA
Se
781 DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL TUR ASIGN (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
In a 2 WORKPC unit the selection of the turret in the tool sequence does not correspond to the selection of the spindle
Cause (SP1 or SP2) in the unit data line.
K
ZA
Select the correct turret in the tool sequence data in question.

Action
A
M
782 DBL SPDL OPER NO TRANS UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
The 2 WORKPC machining unit is not preceded by a workpiece transfer unit.

Cause
3
01
)2
Set a TRANSFER unit as required.

Action
(c
ht
783 DBL SPDL OP ILLEGAL SIMUL OP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
There is an instruction of simultaneous machining given in the flow of “2 Workpiece” machining.

yr
Cause
op
C
Clear the tool sequence concerned of the instruction of simultaneous machining.

Action
784 DBL SPDL OP ILLEGAL BALANCE CUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
There is an instruction of balanced cutting given in the flow of “2 Workpiece” machining.
Cause
Clear the tool sequence concerned of the instruction of balanced cutting.

Action
3-142
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
785 DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL TUR ESC (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
There is an instruction of retraction given in the flow of “2 Workpiece” machining.
Cause
Clear the tool sequence concerned of the instruction of retraction.

Action
786 DBL SPDL OP ILLEGAL MEASUREMENT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
There is a measurement unit inserted in the flow of “2 Workpiece” machining.
Cause
Temporarily cancel the mode of “2 Workpiece” machining to execute the required in-process measurement.
Action
.d
ve
787 DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL TRANSFER (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
There is a workpiece transfer unit inserted in the flow of “2 Workpiece” machining.
s
Cause
re
ts
Temporarily cancel the mode of “2 Workpiece” machining to execute the required workpiece transfer.
gh
Action
ri
788 DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL HEAD UNIT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The head selection unit in the mode of “2 Workpiece” machining has another setting than SINGLE under TYPE.
Cause
N
O
Temporarily cancel the mode of “2 Workpiece” machining to execute synchronous rotation of both spindles (by selecting
TI
Action
60
SYNCH.). A
R
40
789 DBL SPDL OPER UNIT ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
1. For a flow of “2 Workpiece” machining an end instruction is given before the start instruction.
R
o.
2. For a flow of “2 Workpiece” machining a restart instruction is given before the end instruction.
O
Cause
N
3. In a flow of “2 Workpiece” machining, only one spindle is specified in the head selection unit and machining instruction
al
is given for only one spindle.

ri
ZA
1. Set the “2 Workpiece” machining units in correct order.

Se
2. Set the “2 Workpiece” machining units in correct order.

Action
IM
3. Review the program for “2 Workpiece” machining. In a “2 Workpiece” machining unit, be sure to set two head selection
units so that machining is performed with two spindles.
K
ZA
790 ILLEGAL BALANCE CUT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
1. Only a single line of tool sequence is created for balanced cutting.

M
Cause 2. Tools different in shape (nose angle, infeed angle and nose R) are designated for the upper and lower turret in
YA
balanced cutting.
1. Add another tool sequence line to use the other turret symmetrically for balanced cutting.
3
01
Action 2. Specify tools identical in shape (nose angle, infeed angle and nose R) for the upper and lower turret in balanced
)2
cutting.
(c
791 MUST INPUT CUTTING SPEED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ht
The surface speed data set in the tool sequence contains an invalid value.
Cause
ig
yr
Set correct surface speed data in the tool sequence.

op
Action
C
792 MUST INPUT FEEDRATE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The feed data set in the tool sequence contains an invalid value.
Cause
Set a correct feed data in the tool sequence.

Action
3-143
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
793 ILLEGAL MILL SPINDLE RPM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
If DRILL is selected as the turning drilling unit tool:
1. The milling spindle speed is less than the turning spindle speed when the rotation direction set in the tool sequence is
the same as that of the milling spindle.
2. The milling spindle speed has exceeded the maximum rotation speed (SA1 to SA8) when the rotation direction set in
Cause the tool sequence is the same as that of the milling spindle.
3. The milling spindle speed is set to a negative value when the rotation direction set in the tool sequence is opposite to
that of the milling spindle.
4. When the direction of rotation in the tool sequence is the opposite of the direction of mill spindle rotation, the turning
spindle speed matches the relative speed calculated from the surface speed.
1. Reduce the spindle speed for the turning spindle.
. d
2. Set the milling spindle speed to a value lower than its maximum spindle speed.
Action
ve
er
s
re
794 INCORRECT B AXIS POSITION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ts
For ATC (BA47 = 0) turret type machines with B-axis (BA48 = B), the direction of “part to be machined” set with the turning
gh
Cause drilling unit does not match with the B-axis angle set with the index unit.
ri
Reset the B-axis angle for the index unit defined prior to setting the turning drilling unit to either 0 or 180°.
ll
Action
.A
N
795 SHIFT-Y TOO LARGE ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
O
When the amount of SHIFT-Y is not equal to zero in the mill-turning unit, the amount of SHIFT-Y is smaller than the radius
TI
Cause
60
of the tool or greater than (workpiece radius + tool radius). A

R
40
Modify the program so that the amount of SHIFT-Y is equal to or greater than the radius of the tool or equal to or smaller
PO
Action
29
than (workpiece radius + tool radius).

R
o.
796 NO MAZATROL L TURRET OPT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
An attempt was made to execute a MAZATROL program with lower turret control enabled although the MAZATROL lower
al
Cause turret control option is unavailable.

ri
ZA
Se
The MAZATROL program cannot be executed because the MAZATROL lower turret control option is unavailable.
A
Action
IM
797 BARRIER CANCEL ON (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
K
ZA
The cycle start button has been pressed when the barrier was canceled.
Cause
A
M
Disable the “Cancel Barrier” setting.

YA
Action
3
01
798 JAW NO NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
)2
The cycle start button has been pressed when a jaw No. was not assigned.
Cause
(c
ht
Set the jaw No.

Action
ig
yr
799 —— ( , , )
op
C
Cause ——
Action ——
3-144
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1700 LAYOUT UNABLE ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Program editing was attempted after editing the layout.
Cause
Set the layout again on the PROCESS LAYOUT screen.

Action
( , , )
Cause
. d
Action
ve
er
1705 AVOIDANCE DISTANCE EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
s
re
For the reciprocating grooving pattern, any of the conditions indicated below is met.
ts
1. The value “tool nose width + 2  (finishing allowance)” is larger than the value “groove width – tool load avoidance
gh
distance (TC156)”.
ri
Cause 2. The value “2  nose R” is larger than the value “groove width – tool load avoidance distance (TC156)”.
ll
3. The value “tool nose width – 2  nose R” is larger than the value “groove width – rear corner  factor – tool load
.A
avoidance distance (TC156)”.
N
4. The tool load avoidance distance (TC156) is larger than the depth of cut.
O
Review the program or change the value set at parameter TC156 smaller.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
PO
1706 UNCUT EXIST (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L S Blue

29
In intelligent pocket milling (IPM), the engage angle is too large for the tool nose R.
o.
Cause
O
N
C
al
Change the programmed engage angle smaller.

ri
Action
ZA
Or, make the uncut check function invalid by setting E108 bit 1 = 0.
Se
A
IM
1707 UNCUT INCREASING (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L S Blue

Uncut amount increases if corner rounding path is automatically inserted in INTELLIGENT POCKET MILLING (IPM).
K
Cause
ZA
A
Set a corner rounding path, larger than the value set at E115, to the shape.
M
Action
YA
1708 IPM PATH IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Red (Blue)

3
01
In intelligent pocket milling (IPM), a tool path that has a constant engage angle cannot be generated.
Cause
)2
(c
Change the approach point or engage angle.

ht
Action
ig
yr
1709 ILLEGAL CUTTING FACE (C-AXIS) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) P (S) Red (Blue)
op
A machining face where machining is not possible is specified in the C-axis machining unit.
C
Cause
Change the machining face specification.

Action
( , , )
Cause
Action
3-145
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM
3-2-9 No. 800 - No. 899, No. 1800 - No. 1899 (EIA/ISO program error)

No. Message Display
800 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
Action ——
801 SIMULTANEOUS AXIS EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The number of axis motion commands given in one block is in excess of the number of simultaneously controllable axes.
Cause
d.
Modify the program with respect to the specification concerned.
ve
Action
s er
802 ILLEGAL AXIS NAME (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
re
1. The axis address names assigned in the program are different from those which have been parametrized.
ts
Cause
gh
2. Bit 4 of parameter M17 for the shaping control axis (the axis specified in parameter K3) is set to ‘0’ (linear axis).
ri
1. Correct the axis address names in the program.
Action
ll
2. Set bit 4 of parameter M17 for the shaping control axis (the axis specified in parameter K3) to ‘1’ (rotational axis).
.A
803 DIVIDED COMMAND ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
O
A distance of axis movement that cannot be divided by the preset command unit has been assigned.
Cause
TI
60
Review the program.

A
R
40
Action
PO
29
804 PARITY H ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
o.
O
N
On paper tape, the number of holes per character is even for EIA code or odd for ISO code.
C
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Check the paper tape and the tape reader.

Se
Action
A
IM
805 PARITY V ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
K
On paper tape, the number of holes per block is odd.

ZA
Cause
A
M
Make even the hole quantity per block on the paper tape; or turn off the bit 1 of the parameter TAP25 used for parity-V
Action selection.
YA
806 ILLEGAL ADDRESS (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
3
01
An address that is not covered in the specifications has been used.

Cause
)2
(c
Check and correct the corresponding address in the program, and also check the specifications.
ht
Action
ig
yr
op
C
3-146
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
807 ILLEGAL FORMAT (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. The format in which the data has been designated in the program is incorrect.
2. Under the condition of workpiece placement error correction, or tool tip point control, an axis address other than those
for the five controlled axes concerned (as specified in parameters K114, K115, K116, K121, and K125) was used in a
motion command block.
Cause 3. The engraving program contains a format error.
 A text string containing 100 characters or more was specified.
 A character that cannot be engraved was specified.
 Engraving was specified with another command in the same block.
2. Do not use an axis address other than those for the five controlled axes concerned (as specified in parameters K114,
.
d
Action K115, K116, K121, and K125) in a motion command block under the condition of workpiece placement error
ve
correction, or tool tip point control.
er
s
re
808 MIS-SET G CODE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ts
A G-code that is not covered in the specifications has been designated.
gh
Cause
ri
Check and correct the corresponding G-code address in the program.
ll
Action
.A
N
809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
O
The assigned data for the address is out of the allowable setting range.
TI
Cause
60
A
R
40
Review the program.

PO
Action
29
R
o.
810 PROGRAM END NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
“EOR” has been detected during tape or memory operation.

al
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
For the main program, set M02 or M30 at the end of the program. For subprograms, set M99 at the end of the program.
A
Action
IM
811 ILLEGAL O/N NUMBER (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
K
ZA
Zeroes have been designated as program or sequence numbers.

Cause
A
M
Delete zero from N (sequence) or O (program) numbers of the program; or change O-No. (program numbers) to between 1
YA
Action and 99999999, N-No. (sequence numbers) to between 1 and 99999.

3
812 ERROR IN BUFFER BLOCK (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
01
)2
An error has been found to exist in the pre-read block during execution of tool diameter offset.
Cause
(c
ht
Review the program.

Action
ig
yr
813 INCH/METRIC OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
op
The inch/metric selection command has been issued using the G-code although a G-code inch/metric selection function is
C
Cause not provided.
Check the specifications.

Action
814 INTERPOLATION OVERFLOW (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The specified moving distance is too long.
Cause
Specify a shorter distance.

Action
3-147
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
815 G60 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Program command G60 has been designated although a unidirectional positioning function is not provided.
Cause
Check the software specifications and change the program command G60 to G00.
Action
816 FEEDRATE ZERO (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The feedrate command has not been input.
Cause
Specify feedrate F for the movement command. (Since modal move command G01 is automatically set at power-on, axis
Action movement in the modal mode is started by input of a move command, even if G01 is not designated in the program).
d.
ve
817 INCORRECT ARC DATA (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The relationship between the starting and ending points of the arc and the center of the arc is not appropriate.
s
Cause
re
ts
Check the values of the starting/ending points and the address values of center of the arc in the program, and check the
gh
Action address values for the correct direction (minus or plus).
ri
818 MISSING CENTER (NO DATA) (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
 For arc interpolation by R designation, the coordinates of the center of the arc cannot be calculated.
N
Cause  Axis moving by manual interruption is specified in immediate front of the arc command. The arc cannot be defined
O
since the relationship between the starting point, ending point, and radius of the arc becomes incorrect.
TI
 Correct the value of each address in the program.
60
Action
 Restart the program after pressing the RESET key.
A
R
40
PO
29
819 HELICAL OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
R
The helical interpolation command has been issued although such an interpolation function is not provided.
o.
Cause
N
C
al
Check the specifications, and if such an interpolation function is not available, correct the data of the block in which the arc
ri
ZA
Action interpolation command has been issued with designation of three axes.
Se
820 G02.1, G03.1 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
IM
The spiral interpolation command (G02.1 or G03.1) has been issued although such an interpolation function is not
K
Cause provided.
ZA
Delete the G02.1 or G03.1 command.

A
Action
M
YA
3
The virtual-axis command (G07) has been issued although there are not virtual-axis specifications.
01
Cause
)2
Check the specifications, and then change the G07 command.

(c
Action
ht
ig
822 ILLEGAL MODAL (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
yr
A G-code command has been specified in illegal modal data.

op
Cause
C
Review the program.

Action
823 G17 - G19 COMMAND IN M98 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) has been issued during figure rotation.
Cause
Delete the plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) from the figure rotation subprogram.
Action
3-148
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
824 G17 - G19 COMMAND IN G68 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) has been specified in the coordinates rotation command (G68).
Cause
IF G68 has been issued, execute the coordinates rotation cancel command (G69) before specifying the plane selection
Action command (G17, G18 or G19).
825 G17 - G19 COMMAND IN G38 - G42 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) has been specified during tool diameter offset (G41 or G42).
Cause
Specify the plane selection command after the tool diameter offset command has been canceled by G40.
Action
d .
ve
er
The synchronous feed command (G95) has been specified although such feed specifications are not provided.
s
Cause
re
ts
After checking the specifications, change the synchronous feed command (G95) to the feed-in-minutes command (G94).
gh
Action Also change the F command value.
ri
827 F0 COMMAND IN G02, G03 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The F 1-digit rapid-feed command (F0) has been specified during arc interpolation (G02 or G03).
Cause
N
O
Since rapid feed cannot be ordered for arc interpolation, specify an F 1-digit command other than F0. Specify G0 or G1 if
TI
Action
60
the type of interpolation is not arc interpolation. A

R
40
828 NO AUTO CORNER OVERRIDE OPTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The automatic corner override command (G62) has been specified although such an override function is not available.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Check the specifications, and delete the G62 command from the program.
al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
829 ILLEGAL 2ND M CODE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The secondary auxiliary function address that has been specified in the program is different from the corresponding
Cause address that has been parameterized.
K
ZA
Check and correct the secondary auxiliary function address that has been specified in the program.
Action
A
M
YA
The constant surface speed command (G96) has been specified although such specifications are not provided.
Cause
3
01
–1
)2
Check the specifications and change the constant surface speed command (G96) to the speed command (min ).
Action
(c
ht
831 G45, 46, 47, 48 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
A tool-position compensation command (G45 to G48) has been specified although such specifications are not provided.
yr
Cause
op
C

Action
832 G45 - G49 COMMAND IN G98 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Tool-position compensation has been specified during figure rotation or coordinates rotation.
Cause
Review the program.

Action
3-149
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
833 1/4, 3/4 CIRCLES IN G45 - G48 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
An arc command that is not available for tool-position compensation has been specified.
Cause
Review the program.

Action
834 G40, G41, G42 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A tool diameter offset command (G41 or G42) has been specified although such specifications are not provided.
Cause

Action
d .
ve
835 G41, G42, FORMAT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
A compensation command (G40, G41, G42) has been specified during the arc mode (G02 or G03 command).
s
Cause
re
ts
Set either the linear command (G01) or the rapid-feed command (G00) into the compensation command block or the
gh
Action cancellation block. (That is, set the modal status to linear interpolation).
ri
836 NO INTERSECTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
In tool diameter offset (G41 or G42), the coordinates of the intersection point existing when a block was skipped in
Cause processing of interference blocks cannot be calculated.
N
O
Review the program.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
837 TOOL OFFSET INTERFERENCE ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
An interference error has occurred during execution of tool diameter offset (G41 or G42).
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the program.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
838 3-D OFFSET OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The three-dimensional compensation command has been designated although such compensation specifications are not
Cause provided.
K
ZA

Action
A
M
839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
A compensation command (G41 or G42) has been designated without a compensation number (D); or the
Cause
3
compensation number is larger than the maximum number of sets of compensation numbers available in the specifications.
01
)2
Check the maximum available number of sets of compensation numbers, and designate a compensation number smaller
Action than that.
(c
ht
840 CANNED CYCLE OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
A fixed-cycle G-code has been designated although fixed-cycle specifications are not provided.
yr
Cause
op
C
Check the specifications and correct the program.

Action
841 DESIGNATED TOOL NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The tools that are not yet registered on the TOOL DATA display are specified using T-code command in an EIA/ISO
Cause program.
Check the program and register the necessary tools on the TOOL DATA display.
Action
3-150
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
842 SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. The total number of sequential calls of subprogram has exceeded eight.
2. Execution of a program that includes an “M99” command was attempted in the direct operation mode using HD or
Cause
Ethernet.
3. The program in the HD or host called a program stored in the HD or host.
1. Check the number of subprogram calls, and correct the program so that the number of calls does not exceed eight.
Action 2. Do not include an “M99” command in the main program to be executed in the direct operation mode.
3. Do not call a subprogram stored in the HD or host from a program stored in the HD or host.
843 DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The sequence number for subprogram call, for return from a subprogram or for the GOTO designation is not yet set.
Cause
.
d
ve
Set the sequence number in the appropriate block.
er
Action
s
re
844 PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ts
An attempt was made to call a subprogram which was not yet registered.
gh
Cause
ri
ll
Register the subprogram.
.A
Action
N
845 ILLEGAL VARIABLE COMMAND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
O
TI
A variables number has been designated although variables number (#) specifications are not provided.
60
Cause A
R
40
PO

29
Action
R
o.
846 DESIGNATED NUMBER NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
C
al
The designated variables number is larger than the maximum variables number permitted by the specifications.
K
Cause
ri
ZA
Se
Check the specifications and the variables numbers in the program.

Action
IM
K
847 NO “=” CODE IN PROGRAM (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ZA
“=” was not designated in the definition of a variable.

Cause
A
M
YA
Set “=” in the variables definition.

Action
3
01
848 M98 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B K O Blue

)2
A figure rotation command has been designated although figure rotation specifications are not provided.
Cause
(c
ht

ig
Action
yr
op
849 FIGURE ROTATE NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B K O Blue

C
One figure rotation command has been designated during execution of another such command.
Cause
Check the program.

Action
850 G68 AND M98 COMMANDS SAME BLOCK (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A figure rotation command and a coordinates rotation command are designated at the same time.
Cause
Check the program.

Action
3-151
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
The coordinates rotation command (G68) has been designated although coordinates rotation specifications are not
Cause provided.

Action
852 USER MACRO OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Macro specifications have been designated although such specifications are not provided.
Cause

Action
d .
ve
853 EXTERNAL MACRO OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
A user macro interruption command has been designated although such interruption specifications are not provided.
s
Cause
re
ts
gh
Action
ri
854 INCORRECT USERMACRO PROGRAMMING (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
An NC statement and a macro statement are present in one block.
Cause
N
O
Review the program and give the NC statement and the macro statement in separate blocks.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
855 USER MACRO NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The maximum permissible degree of multiplicity of user macro calls has been exceeded.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the program and correct it so that the number of user macro calls does not exceed the maximum number of calls
al
Action permitted by the specifications.

ri
ZA
Se
856 USER MACRO ARGUMENT EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The number of sets of user macro call arguments of type  is too large.
Cause
K
ZA
Review the program.

Action
A
M
857 INCORRECT USER MACRO G67 PROG. (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
Command G67 has been designated when G66 command modal state was not yet set.
Cause
3
01
)2
The G67 command is the call cancellation command; after reviewing the program, designate firstly the G66 command and
Action then the G67 command.
(c
ht
858 USER MACRO “[“ NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
The total number of “[” and “]” within one block has become more than five.
yr
Cause
op
C
Review the program, and correct it so that the total number of “[“ and “]” within one block does not exceed five.
Action
859 NUMBER OF PARENTHESIS MIS-MATCH (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The total number of “[” and “]” within one block differ.
Cause
Review the program, and correct it so that the total number of “[“ and of “]” become the same.
Action
3-152
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
860 CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The operation expression is not correct.
Cause
Review the program and correct the operation expression.

Action
861 DIVISION BY ZERO (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The denominator in the division expression is zero.
Cause
Review the program and correct it so that the denominator in the division expression does not become zero.
Action
.
d
ve
862 INTEGER VALUE OVERFLOW (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
31 31
The integral value has overstepped –2 (2 –1) in the operation process.
s
Cause
re
ts
Review the operation expression written in the program, and correct it so that after operation, the value of the integer does
gh
Action 31
not overstep –2 .
ri
863 REAL VALUE OVERFLOW (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ll
.A
The variables data is overflowing.
Cause
N
O
Review the variables data in the program.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
864 “IF” STATEMENT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The statement of IF [<conditional expression>] GOTO is wrong.

R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the program.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
865 “WHILE” STATEMENT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The statement of WHILE [<conditional expression>] DO ~ END is wrong.

Cause
K
ZA
Review the program.

Action
A
M
866 “SETVN” STATEMENT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
The SETVN statement containing the variables name is wrong.

Cause
3
01
)2
Review the program and correct it so that the variables name in the SETVN statement consists of seven characters or less.
Action
(c
ht
867 DO-END NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
Of WHILE [<conditional expression>] DO ~ END, DO ~ END has appeared more than 27 times (degree of multiplicity).
yr
Cause
op
C
Review the program and correct it to reduce the degree of multiplicity of DO ~ END to no larger than 27 (27 times).
Action
868 DO-END MIS-MATCH (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The DO's and END's are not formed in pairs.
Cause
Review the program and correct it to give DO's and END's in pairs.
Action
3-153
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
869 NO USER MACRO IN TAPE MODE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
During tape operation, macro command (WHILE, DO, END, IF, GOTO, POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT or DPRNT) has been
Cause found to exist in the tape contents.
Execute the program in the memory operation mode since blocks containing a macro command (WHILE, DO, END, IF,
Action GOTO, POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT or DPRNT) cannot be executed during tape operation.
870 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The designated variables name is not correct.
Cause
Review the variables names in the program and correct the corresponding variables name.
Action
d.
ve
871 VARIABLE NAME EXISTS (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
There are overlapping variables names.
s
Cause
re
ts
Correct the program so that variables names do not overlap.
gh
Action
ri
ll
.A
A scaling command (G50 or G51) has been designated although scaling specifications are not provided.
Cause
N
O
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
873 G51.1 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
A mirror image command (G50.1 or G51.1) has been designated although programmable mirror image specifications are
R
Cause
o.
not provided.
O
N

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
874 CORNER R/C OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
Corner chamfering or corner rounding/ has been designated although such specifications are not provided.
Cause
K
ZA
Check the specifications and delete corner rounding or corner chamfering from the program.
Action
A
M
875 NOT FOUND GEOMETRIC OPTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
The geometric command has been designated although geometric specifications are not provided.
Cause
3
01
)2

Action
(c
ht
876 NOT FOUND GEOMETRIC OPTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ig
The geometric setting format is wrong.

yr
Cause
op
C
Review the program.

Action
The polar coordinates command (G16) has been designated although such command specifications are not provided.
Cause

Action
3-154
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
878 ADDRESS CHANGE OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Absolute/incremental axis address conversion has been designated although such conversion specifications are not
Cause provided.

Action
Program data input has been designated although such input specifications are not provided.
Cause

Action
d.
ve
880 AXIS NOT ZERO RETURNED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
er
A move command other than that for reference-point return has been designated for the axis that was not returned to its
s
Cause
re
reference point.
ts
Manually return the axis to its reference point.
gh
Action
ri
ll
.A
Second, third or fourth reference-point return has been designated although such reference-point returning specifications
Cause are not provided.
N
O
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
882 ILLEGAL COMMAND CROSS MACHINING (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
PO
29
The program section under the mode of cross machining contains an incompatible G-code.
R
Cause
o.
O
N
Review the program.

al
Action
ri
ZA
Se
883 ILLEGAL CROSS MACHINING COMMAND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
1. A G110 command is given under modal conditions not suitable to cross machining control.
Cause
2. An unsuitable axis (since it cannot be used successfully for the counterpart) is specified for cross machining control.
K
ZA
Review the program.

Action
A
M
884 REFERENCE POINT RETURN CHECK (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
An axis had not returned to the zero-point when the zero-point check command (G27) was executed.
Cause
3
01
)2
Review the program.

Action
(c
ht
ig
The before-movement stroke check function (G22) has been designated although such function specifications are not
yr
Cause provided.
op
C

Action
886 BEYOND AREA OF G22 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
This alarm message is displayed before execution of a movement block to indicate that the ending point of the axis
Cause movement designated in the block is likely to enter the forbidden area which has been designated using the
before-movement stroke check function (G22).
Review the axis-address coordinate values in the program.
Action
3-155
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
887 TAPE I/O ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B (G) I O Red (Blue)
1. An error occurred at the tape reader, or on the printer during macro printing.
2. Calling of a program inside the host computer failed during Ethernet operation.
3. The size of the output text file exceeded the value set for DPR8.
Cause
When the cause is either No. 1 or 2 above, WNo., UNo. and BNo. will be displayed in the parentheses.
When the cause is No. 3 above, the error type, detailed error code and “0” will be displayed in the parentheses.
* Error types 110: File open error, 111: File write error, 112: File size over error
1. Check the parameter.
2. Check the network connection between the NC and the host computer that stores the specified program.
3. Take actions below.
. d
Action  Change the file size setting at parameter DPR8 to a value larger than the text file.
ve
er
 Reduce the size of the text file to be output to within the file size setting at parameter DPR8.
s
 If a value other than “0” is displayed for the detailed error code in the parentheses, note the number and contact
re
the nearest Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.
ts
888 FILE I/O ERROR ( , , ) E I O Red (Blue)
gh
The machining program file cannot be read.
ri
Cause
ll
.A
N
Action
O
TI
60
A
The automatic tool-length measurement command (G37) has been designated although such measurement specifications
R
40
Cause are not provided.

PO
29

R
o.
Action
O
N
C
al
K
ri
ZA
The skip command (G31) has been designated although skip specifications are not provided.
Se
Cause
A
IM

Action
K
ZA
891 G31.1 - G31.3 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
A multi-step skip command (G31.1, G31.2 or G31.3) has been designated although such skip specifications are not
M
Cause provided.
YA

3
Action
01
)2
892 AUTO PROGRAMMING FAILURE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
(c
A trouble has occurred with the software of auto program during the operation.
ht
Cause
ig
yr

Action
op
C
893 PROGRAM DATA MISSING ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Argument P was not designated in the macro call command (G65, G66, G66.1).
Cause
Review the program and set the number of the macro program to be called to argument P.
Action
3-156
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
894 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. An attempt has been made to call a MAZATROL program from an EIA/ISO program which was designated as a
subprogram of MAZATROL program.
Cause
2. A MAZATROL program has been specified using G65 command (subprogram call) in the manual program mode unit of
the MAZATROL program.
In cases 1 and 2 above, a MAZATROL program cannot be called as a subprogram. Review the program.
Action
895 —— ( , , )
Cause ——
.d
ve
Action ——
er
896 ILLEGAL CHAMFERING ( , , ) B J P Red
s
re
1. In the thread cutting cycle command, designation for chamfering is incorrect.
ts
Cause
2. The current plane differs from the plane of chamfering.
gh
1. Set chamfering data that ensures termination of the operation of the tool within the cycle.
ri
Action
2. Select the same plane as that of chamfering.
ll
.A
897 LAP CYCLE BLOCK NUMBER EXCEED ( , , ) B J P Red
N
The number of blocks in the shape data of the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273) exceeds 100 blocks.
O
Cause
TI
60
A
Reduce below 100 the number of blocks in the shape data of the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273).
R
40
Action
PO
29
898 LAP CYCLE ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGN. ( , , ) B J P Red

R
o.
The shape defined in the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273) is not the shape for correct cutting.
N
Cause
al
K
ri
ZA
Recheck the shape data specified by the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273).
Se
Action
A
IM
899 ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH ( , , ) B J P Red

K
In the fixed-cycle (G290, G294), designation for the taper length or the taper height is incorrect.
ZA
Cause
A
Set the taper length or the taper height for the fixed-cycle (G290, G294) smaller than the travel of the axis.
M
Action
YA
3
01
)2
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
3-157
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1800 CANNOT CHANGE TIME CONSTANT (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I P Red
The G-command has been set in the block containing a time constant changeover/cancellation command.
The time constant changeover/cancellation command has been set in the fixed cycle.
Cause
The time constant changeover/cancellation command has been set during MAZATROL programmed simultaneous
machining or MAZATROL programmed “2 workpiece” machining.
Action
1801 ILLEGAL COMMD TIME CONST. CHANGE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I P Red
The G10 command has been set during time constant changeover (non-M880 mode).
Cause
. d
ve
Action
s er
1802 ILLEGAL STARTUP CONDITION G12.1 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
re
1. The G12.1 command is set when the current position of the No. 1 axis (linear axis) on the plane is present on the
ts
Cause negative side.
gh
2. The No. 2 axis (rotational axis) on the plane is not a rotating type of rotational axis.
ri
1. Move the current position of the No. 1 axis (linear axis) on the plane into the positive side before setting the G12.1
ll
command.
.A
Action
2. Specify a rotating type of rotational axis as the No. 2 axis on the plane.
N
Example : G17X_C_; G12.1; …
O
TI
1803 ILL GCODE (2ND SPDL POS ONLY) (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
60
A
A G-code whose usage for the secondary spindle is prohibited has been entered when the secondary spindle
R
40
Cause high-accuracy index option was valid.

PO
29
When the secondary spindle high-accuracy index option is valid, an interpolation command cannot be issued for the
o.
Action
O
secondary spindle; only a positioning command can be used.

N
C
al
1804 NO Z-OFFSET (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I P Red

ri
ZA
With F165 bit 6 = 1 (Z-offset data presence check for EIA automatic operation), Z-offset value was missing in setup data
Se
Cause when the G53.5 command (initial G53.5 included) was entered for EIA automatic operation.
A
IM
Set the Z-offset value in the setup data or change the setting of F165 bit 6 from 1 to 0.
Action
K
ZA
A
Executing the program has been attempted despite an inclined-surface machining option being absent.
M
Cause
YA
The program for inclined-surface machining cannot be executed without the inclined-surface machining option.
3
Action
01
)2
1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
(c
A command (G-command or T-command) that cannot be used for inclined-surface machining has been specified during
ht
Cause inclined-surface machining.

ig
Cancel inclined-surface machining before executing a G-command or T-command that cannot be used during
yr
Action inclined-surface machining.

op
C
1807 CANNOT USE G68.2 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
1. Inclined-surface machining has been specified in the mode that prohibits the specification of inclined-surface
machining.
Cause
2. A G68.4 command (for incremental coordinate system establishment) was given with the inclined-surface machining
mode being cancelled.
1. Cancel the mode that prohibits the specification of inclined-surface machining.
Action 2. With the inclined-surface machining mode being cancelled, use G68.2, instead of G68.4, to establish a particular
coordinate system for ease of programming.
3-158
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
Inclined-surface machining has been specified in the mode that prohibits the specification of tool axial control.
Cause
Cancel the mode that prohibits the specification of tool axial control.
Action
1809 TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) A L S Blue
The inclined-surface machining command address is wrong.
Cause

Action
d.
ve
1810 TILTED PLANE CANNOT BE DEFINED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) A L S Blue
er
The inclined surface cannot be defined with the specified data.
s
Cause
re
ts
Action
gh
ri
1811 CANNOT USE G43.1 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B L O Red
ll
.A
“Tool length correction in the tool axial direction” has been specified in the mode that does not permit that command.
Cause
N
O
Cancel modes that cannot be used with “Tool length correction in the tool axial direction”.
TI
Action
60
A
R
40
1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B L O Red

PO
29
An incorrect command (such as a G-command or a T-command) has been entered during “Tool length correction in the
Cause
R
tool axial direction”.

o.
O
N
Cancel “Tool length correction in the tool axial direction” to execute the G- or T-command.
al
Action
K
ri
ZA
Se
A
IM
The workpiece placement error correction option is not present.

Cause
K
ZA
The workpiece placement error correction cannot be used without the workpiece placement error correction option.
Action
A
M
1814 ILLEGAL CMD IN G54.4 MODE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
An incorrect command (such as a G-command or a T-command) has been entered during the workpiece placement error
Cause correction.
3
01
Cancel the workpiece placement error correction to execute the G- or T-command.

)2
With parameter F156 bit 2 set to 1, even when the movement is separated between rotary axis and linear axis during the
(c
Action workpiece placement error correction, this separation is not possible if tool radius compensation is used concurrently.
ht
With parameter F156 bit 2 set to 1, when the movement of rotary axis and linear axis is separated during the workpiece
ig
placement error correction, the MSTB command cannot be included in the same block.
yr
op
The workpiece placement error correction has been specified in the mode that does not permit the workpiece placement
C
Cause error correction.
Cancel modes that cannot be used with the workpiece placement error correction.
Action
1816 CANNOT USE G18.1/G18.2/G18.3 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
The mode existing during plane selection (with G18.2/G18.3/G18.4) for turning, or during plane cancellation (with G18.1)
Cause for turning is not valid.

Action
3-159
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1817 ILLEGAL CMD IN G18.2/G18.3 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
An incorrect command has been specified during the plane selection (with G18.2/G18.3/G18.4) for turning.
Cause

Action
1818 ILLEGAL COMMAND (SAFETY SHIELD) ( , , ) B L N Red

An invalid cutting command was issued for the material model when interference checking of the material model was valid.
Cause
Specify the material model cutting invalid M-code in the program.

Action
d.
ve
1819 ILLEGAL C/S (SAFETY SHIELD) ( , , ) B L N Red
er
1. The program of either the hard disk operation or Ethernet operation area was specified as subprogram when automatic
s
operation interference check was valid.
re
Cause
2. The program to be called up as a subprogram is not registered in the memory.
ts
gh
1. Make the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function invalid, or before specifying the program of
either the hard disk operation or Ethernet operation area as subprogram, set the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
ri
Action function invalid M-code in the main program, to make the automatic operation interference check function invalid.
ll
.A
2. Register the required program.
B I (L) O (S)
N
1820 ILLEGAL COMMD IN G54.4 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) Red (Blue)
O
1. Such a command has been assigned that the travel on a rotational axis exceeds an angle of 180° before or after the
TI
correction of the tool direction.
60
Cause A
2. The distance of correcting motion on the primary or secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction
R
40
is beyond the limit particularly set for MAZATROL programs.

PO
29
1. Divide the move command so that the angular motion, whether it be before or after being corrected, will be up to 180°
R
o.
in terms of the travel per block.

O
Action
N
2. Modify the settings of angular errors (a, b, c) in order that the distance of correcting motion on the primary or
C
al
secondary rotational axis may not exceed the limit concerned.

K
ri
ZA
1821 UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Se
Writing into a write-protected system variable has been attempted.

IM
Cause
K

ZA
Action
A
1822 —— ( , , )
M
YA
Cause ——
3
01
Action ——
)2
(c
1823 NOT POSSIBLE SETTING ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
ht
The workpiece setup error correction command has been issued in a MAZATROL program under inadequate conditions.
ig
Cause
yr
op
Confirm the followings:


C
Action Parameter K113 = 1 (Machine type: Tool tilt type)

 Workpiece setup error correction for MAZATROL program (option) valid
1824 UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE(ISS) (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I P Red
An attempt was made to change the part count data by changing the system variables (#3901 and #3902) during automatic
Cause operation with the SAFETY SHIELD function set valid.
Set the part count value before starting the operation, or perform automatic operation with the SAFETY SHIELD function
Action set invalid.
3-160
Serial No. 294060
ALARM 3
No. Message Display
1825 ILLEGAL M CODE ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
M711 to M714 was specified in the manual program unit, TPC, or tool sequence.
Cause
Review the program.

Action
1826 HEAD-AXIS ILLEGAL COMMAND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I O (S) Red (Blue)
A G-code command that cannot be used for the head indexing axis has been specified.
Cause

Action Use G00 to index the head.
. d
ve
1827 HEAD-AXIS ANGLE INCORRECT (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I O (S) Red (Blue)
er
The angular value given for indexing the head cannot be divided by the L17 parameter setting (minimum angle of head
s
Cause index command).
re
ts
Action
gh
ri
1828 —— ( , , )
ll
.A
Cause ——
N
O
TI
Action ——
60
A
R
40
1829 NO 5 AXIS SPLINE CUTTING OPTION ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

PO
29
Tool tip point control or high-speed smoothing control is made valid in the G61.2 mode when the 5-axis spline interpolation
Cause
R
option is not provided.

o.
O
N
When the 5-axis spline interpolation is not provided, 5-axis spline interpolation is not available.
al
Action
K
ri
ZA
Se
1830 CANNOT USE 5AXIS SPLINE CUTTING (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A
IM
The 5-axis spline interpolation mode is made valid during the uniaxial rotation interpolation (when bit 3 of parameter F85 is
Cause set to 0).
K
ZA
To use the 5-axis spline interpolation, select the joint interpolation (set bit 3 of parameter F85 to 1).
Action
A
M
1831 ILLEGAL CHOPPING CONDITION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
YA
1. The top dead point and the bottom dead point are the same.
3
2. The chopping feed rate command specifies zero.

01
3. The chopping command is given in the chopping command inhibiting mode.

)2
Cause 4. An illegal value (other than 0 to 2) is set for the chopping offset method.
(c
5. An illegal value (other than 0 to 7) is set for the chopping offset number.
ht
6. The chopping record M-code is issued when the offset update method is selected.
ig
7. An overflow occurs when writing the chopping speed value.

yr
Take action below to remove the cause, and press the RESET key or tap the alarm clear button.
op
C
1. Review the command for the top dead point or bottom dead point.
2. Review the chopping feed rate command.
3. Issue the chopping command in the chopping command possible mode.
Action
4. Set a correct value (0 to 2) for the chopping offset method.
5. Set a correct value (0 to 7) for the chopping offset number.
6. Do not issue the chopping record M-code when the offset update method is selected.
7. Specify the chopping speed value so that on overflow will not occur during writing.
3-161
Serial No. 294060
3 ALARM

No. Message Display
1832 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN CHOPPING (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
A command that is inhibited during chopping is issued.
Cause
Change the program so that the inhibited command is not issued during chopping.
Action
Then press the RESET key or tap the alarm clear button.
1833 ILLEGAL COND. CORRECT LENGTH.C (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
Tool length compensation G43P3 is issued under any of the following conditions.
1. Pinch cut or Y-axis turning option is invalid.
2. The machine is not equipped with tool length C compensation, or tool length C compensation is made invalid.
Cause
(Parameter BA131 bit 1 = 0)
d .
3. MAZATROL tool length is invalid. (Parameter F93 bit 3 = 0)
ve
4. Tool length A, B or C is not set for the current tool in MAZATROL tool data.
er
1. Pinch cut or Y-axis turning option must be purchased.
s
re
2. If the machine is not equipped with tool length C compensation, correct the program so that the G43P3 command is not
ts
used. If the machine is equipped with tool length C compensation, make tool length C compensation valid. (Parameter
Action
gh
BA131 bit 1 = 1)
ri
3. Make MAZATROL tool length valid. (Parameter F93 bit 3 = 1)
ll
4. Set tool length A, B and C for the current tool in MAZATROL tool data.
.A
1834 CORRECTING LENGTH.C (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)
N
1. The X-, Y- or Z-axis movement command is issued before the head rotary axis (B-axis) is turned to the 90-degree
O
position after the tool length compensation G43P3 command was issued (or after tool change to a tool with tool length
TI
Cause
60
C setting).
A
R
40
2. A G-code command that is prohibited in the tool length compensation G43P3 mode is issued.
PO
29
1. When the axis movement command is issued with tool length C compensation valid, the head rotary axis (B-axis) must
Action be turned to the 90-degree position in advance.
R
o.
2. Review the program and delete prohibited G-codes.

N
1835 FILE ACCESS ERROR (Cause, , ) G I P Red

al
K
r

Mazak I300stw Parameters Ha12ha0034e

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mazak I300stw Parameters Ha12ha0034e

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Serial No.

nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.

2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety.

such items are in place.

Center or Technology Center.

Copyright (C) 2017 YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved.

It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are

: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

function is executed without its thorough understanding.

understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect

without a thorough understanding.

Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC

 Before using the following cutting conditions:

• Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function

– especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.

be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO

applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)

 If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are

units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)

function will not work correctly.

machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series and the other turning machines.

Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended

before using this system.

Sample program Machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series Turning machines

workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.

 If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

As a result, serious machine damage will result.

axial movement will become faster than that expected.

REQUEST TO THE USER

REQUEST TO THE USER

Request for Saving Data of Machining Programs

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

Note : As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to

The NC unit operates using dedicated network adapters.

prevent the NC unit from operating normally.

 Ethernet_NC (IP address:192.168.100.2)

 NC Trainer Virtual Network (IP address:192.168.202.10)

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

 If the setting of the network adapter “Ethernet_PC” is changed, other systems

1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1-1

2 PARAMETER ....................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 2-1

2-1-1 Types of parameters ............................................................................................... 2-1

2-3-1 Structure of the parameter list .............................................................................. 2-84

2-3-2 User parameter POINT (D) ................................................................................ 2-86

2-3-3 User parameter LINE/FACE/3D (E) ................................................................. 2-118

2-3-4 User parameter EIA/ISO (F) ............................................................................. 2-154

2-3-5 User parameter SOFT LIMIT (I) ....................................................................... 2-258

2-3-6 User parameter SYSTEM (SU) ........................................................................ 2-264

2-3-7 User parameter TURNING (TC) ....................................................................... 2-298

2-3-8 User parameter SOLID (SD) ............................................................................ 2-351

2-3-9 User parameter DISPLAY STRUCTURE (US)................................................. 2-358

2-3-10 Machine parameter CALL MACRO (J) ............................................................. 2-362

2-3-11 Machine parameter MEASURE (K) .................................................................. 2-379

2-3-12 Machine parameter TABLE (L) ........................................................................ 2-439

2-3-13 Machine parameter FEED VEL. (M) ................................................................ 2-482

2-3-14 Machine parameter TIME CONST. (N) ............................................................ 2-500

2-3-15 Machine parameter ANOTHER (S) .................................................................. 2-511

2-3-16 Machine parameter SPINDLE (SA) .................................................................. 2-525

2-3-17 Machine parameter BARRIER (BA) ................................................................. 2-550